. st Shea Piil * 4 ya 8 4 eaenns Baie ; ate ovate Boh ee Ss oy tat tht stay vi ‘ hits) : oF. ies ts tates prgeth ail Otis ' VASA ene a Ry Pain een on ey SES K ante als ai Bars Sth rake ay est oa wiyant BM a hie Wheels te “ts ‘ “ys waite ih coped eayre Ny bast shiny by ferecden ares ee ath ‘ Rrra F PASO VELEN a aM beyr ee jap teks » rey Sita ae eh “Abad Fi vee peat © dibe Cdbeacgs ew EPO IRA Me RRR Bea pe Oy ete hea T he Mabe ae ESB Rete te oe wie tay SAA) blo GEFs sey Wav eeyieh RES E ee S e Pet ete Bare ee wey at ‘ aah ye Bhs ett Ayart Pee oan a8. $ We © al RES SIO Re a A 3 agin BPE D LRN eS FOE aad & ¥ mes ae eae ate Teds ope rie aeet oe AP dc cate Se metee UP Oath? er sexe 2 Parent Yat) fe peje gga BESTE eieltaceee bewats peak a get wait basyir ote te) Fat ote pA: Sipe aappae ” he ea Rares Bis ——s io ie : nee Oe cae creel fe ee ee any he ‘ ; ye : 7 in Sach \ ; hl f i Ni! ; Mi aha ‘ai ‘ 10 ah 1 . Teva. 4} ay the ay r DEP a a Mee a ath NN RCRA J i" ve at i. w i i ‘af ft Ni rr { ; ; i i ok , I \ x } by, : shit} play i or | i" a Tee 1 r iy ig U = id A, ; é " 7 ’ ‘ 1 : if i af : Wy t ; i Je j ‘i 2 Ti i i My st RN ng 13, Wy \ mip “a one ‘if : * ne a Ve ’ iW : ait ih nase i), ue a ih’ ten } y ates bis i iba iis eter a Rb sap Me : i} Ld on Neat eee ia itil Wk aac al PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XX. JAN. 1882 to APRIL 1883. NOS. 110, 111, 112, 113. PHILADELPHIA : PRINTED FORTHE SOCIETY BY M’CALLA & STAVELY. 1883. SK A Manual for the Use of Students in Egyptology. By Edward Yorke McCauley, U. S. N. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, July, 1881.) Preface t Sn the followin Manual” , evrmfpited from thu authorities urithin my reach, will bo found much unferma Gow utuch aller he furst clementany knowledge hos beow acg ured, essentrol bo progress un the sludy of Egy folology Mo attempt, that I om aurare of , has beew Ritherls mace & bring lig cther within the compass of one vetume, amd uw us present fullness, Uae resulls of Khe learned latars of Boy fabotogals omiment uw This defoartrment:, eo obtwn these reoula, ugueres aw exlinsive ancl exjoensive tibrany amd many hays of patent labor amo research. Sn a defoartmenks of knowleolge ushere our meles ame baumds are eemstamtly widening Ui uroutdl be frresumfp- uous lo assunie Uhat the lisls I Rove gwen of- Gods, of sym bots , Homes of Countries ve, compo rise alt Khok aw Known Or diok may be foundk iw Rierogty phe lexls: Those fack, alone mre guvew whch ore of olay CeeUurrence. The slirclend” will observe , rn my List of Ideografohs , that, nol emlent with giving the main dea. ondy;of which ony simole example us the exponent 7 a8 us Qenerally Ure case, OF give a Wet of the lerms which slart from the Povent ideografoh ; By Uros amplification , which & far from complete , a concepliow may be farmecl of Ure general value or lenor of Ure ideografaly. Ob must be borne wv mind Hak 4b fiawe not uncer: latven lo gue ouy generak outhme of Héerogtyfohres du- rung the thousands of years coverecl ly Bg y foliam fis - lory wor which , what may Rowe been correct ab one fooriodk may be chamegedt ak another; Vhverefore, although errers’ undowbledly occur un the following foages (Errave estyr), Raolé in imputing them ce 3 be clefavecculeeb . ft g wei me foleasure bo ad’ nowka ge he eonslant aid amd mecuragement which, of howe veeewed from of Melesiey S.S: 9. omd also the untiring courlesy eylenctecb ls me by MGT Sloy PDP Snuth and fus afsustant NG de: Samuel at the Rudgeway Subvary . Philadel[hva Gdwoark Jortte No Coutery 1 Now 1881, wd.8 Navy ALPHABET. | yeeoL ] | | j Vofe | Mi ab- \hude| | SA |hat| plough cpl | 2 Xu |=" | @ |arm| if) % fer a i b {lo at Bry he lull f eg crook K | a . Se | goose i oe; i PPK ba |ram | Se.) fr am | a Ala Dla [rane A [enw at = ab- |columa { he Me \ 1 \peron|.™ \fho bashet) b “| > y 3 & > 5 ne para nara iPra|Hs ©0 =~ eat INDEACOF NON DESCRIP Ts ss 462 ez eed OLE o Wd vba; _ =f ys fel | A, Pay) OE Ey Ash uy ee wy. “4 soy gw Mg ie 4+. 7 . | ea | © o4/ cs] 443 Ne 2 _ +47 | Po) e a) es a | oy | es 7 | a mee” ae ake oe ee ye | —., New, | | wrer 4+. PAC? ist i an = Se | _ Ae aeremee | ee a | a | | IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. r | sty, 2 pomney be as Bee oe ges | gunleam aye UA fet ‘suns ght ‘ per, * Z j Awe ceiling, ub ay Na lz XS lelevaleore glee far \Gver, aleve eA Co oe here | chief Zig. roa a Goarw 2gart | Aad Aeawvern iis Nar Course of Ge Sure (See atocle of SCATS ae falc | durst, testort dette: fou \ obslruct Guse cedesteat Surv Shemed SLAM rer got aemowv ao 2c way, solarawellin ie solar ce ES: Be i 4 AX ine ue Me, ii ress arse el Pe, ; SF ar C077 ay 7h | night, a j mrv9d80rT Ft ee oy fo Ak jossce ly aah | moon SSaa4 acl | month ashi LOA Fe 33 Zr | fort Jet i tc [aeere” eclipse | ‘Soe | slay a za Che #47 ain Solar ausk 2) Sate \aderss gate ,s aul tnt \@ tght aee | munth ; ZAa | forlnig, he clog & stizze pst \& glearr Terfih| year han def | yetlarctoy ED 2- Es. Kar \Sumset Koh | night ~ Ret onee fru | our ae | Row jcoms lellatcor Swaw ees ES s§lar annut| the Gous | pec le Yoscor of celestial ° a eee Eel - — PePOGRArFHS AND DETERMINATIVES. ap, eng rave, Alar 9 Tow, 2 erminole godlet ere mann ere: | Ask ek mae Uirst » pure Luléa |\conserve, sods ar7v ariwzwk Go vrash iG "pete Ss Lids , COLT od yhu | @ ancunt mrhrt | Co WOK hanne| ibe a are eee y 4 ashzr |\z727flarmne asalu | cous w7rr2e TUK | Grazcer ayrr ex lirig wish rey raz Zer ideoata GF verbs tw general, ofeross oh a4, gente fe up and sau the door” =) mo te sesta arrived * 3 ape @j uage | tye, ansala ary | 7Zife t ss 8 vit etna srul VN \englracd, efs ence | ar fre oes ammierg res pe eit ack essence, Kak Sy | ”7,) mounrsfy, feer, subsist. ° Ke meter flarre ae the Rouse sf flame, ihe ated “i « Rouse of flame, Calor Meee C3 Eek | Saalern Rorizow eases ne ey eas “aym “exting eee haw | MNMeayesly, pur Y beksu | Some thing ealew j Mable Zegud 45, refreshments | ; far peaceful BR ast hate heart; mlentior! hes 3 VOX, errrage Art | peace ag \ovely 329 | shake. | , | mat | grande | | Smf jel d Hr |g ynuau | 7raler - Sees aay ne j Nia \aqueds, 1 aha dale a | PO led Sie 12. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIV aby 7rLe Sers ampulla Peon a ; Of acte Ahan vase das i dante guid 7eas- hekna é ed a @ nem b alagecd abu e ann Hy lo charm, mage qehat raofcn S lo cook amlu | casle, rant ON move ore acquarin, udge C ray 2 J exfn opps. 2 ov ’ a Sod Chae srrpees | ash hte i plant rdler bk | wesh, favor fonp | to shy a deserler .| hader fiam femme - To TOO Ruler | le order Resi puracse ath Sherle hwelling on, hevimg om Wer ‘silence ae aull |e ehecknce i Romoges ovey —9 Kal hie: acd ag .) names | a agucdk AD oe Caro ig actiove 4, tka | proslrale t @s aal , cha a gop ge Lexa vesht | le veyolt, aebel user, vest 4 or pre’: SUCOAMIY jas fre? \/ . asa |gervare, salelicle /0 a loaww eae cafe _ fo bower; compan Troops, pnereenarces 772€7e aS The gate muth\ a Zid eer Sh apa | ancestor se | yarcarl Sf ci as notle, prect 5 on atau a torr mri Mer -_— ae I, me, 77y, r7ryseef = 13 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. A sO0cunt: nat | @Anead /¥ slitpr Syau | clconvicl- empco us xefe enemy br narke. Ue gild lo ont mM ha fo ryouwe : adn {lo aidare, prrase, exalt leshla lnahu Zeshta weak lahu |fresorner [wes vlatae arncteslor weal pruresorrey fiannal s hla “Pp Tehh | resowe t ha em heh, a Vrlign yes Eee limilably , for ever ofile one ip ere hd s prouple sf S rd iy POL TE 'G gprr jrarnes - , , cuunGers fanrily ot ervegr = 2eholclers crib Soper Seye runtlen ders of fe Tyfh @ lear, & carry Ses SackoX ass a7nes O) fever and bo drovk Goldesses. pures preest Serile Libattow of prarlartiony co drim fo suckle. wa welnurse lo aan e “ “ lafut G glecf lo “rag along Suf/rure 14 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. bver throw over throvwe nin | Shrinkle Neveh| libalior efu | growl aniehve! lo fuumrble Truk malefaclar fet mi! cbs cure Voxat rebel, cul able I enemues, Re empious sem | older, prone, refer- ved, pee Hes | la beg, beseech ! UXs | crealé , mould | } | Sbar | praise, Qorifiation Tummy [Ha afonr lof embvalmhrmng aut jaaner xeat la body Kats |embcitim fies lobedient _ ab \form, lype, nage ox lodead, spor, lype —| th \Uimmble Ms al jemage [Re ceremony invert Reavens, the sky jee | nebkt | & wash gotel swine amw conceal, envellop ak | captive o)- comslyructiow ‘chastise sa a4 build ; eonslyuct | Heer han high priest fis strike ae | chashse en _pructse counentiu frrde , belsh | lazy, slow, cajure belnu malefactor | u fo loot back JOY acclamation jexall, pProuse y ¥) weaver{ofdea- | JT | | Learey, dem) lolear, suppor, exlend ¥ Rawho extends Ke fiea | Yens. sl Salem] listen | ab hear, Lesléw Oth jen, Plaimt Bind ,P ASiake captive ee IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. WNegro capulive /2 ch vef- maan| caltle Guard xiye | Go whip Va lo offersacrifice Sebo ie pe SS SS |S |S ae | maan | ccltle Seeder, driver —— mect i £ \ < Th > a ash crys plait pherr aba lo play a game ‘Kebeh | litalion Cp dl as neham | vejocce porrerful servant mow babble, want Roe glvikke pee uah uro wt, a feed nebeh | libaliow Eh aa atn |ls beat, & pound =, ig Shee oe oh lo measure corm YS = R hes |@sing »| leyen | lo fray the Rarf. f arubdue We gslaliue bu db melal (wel aslone) Hes |lsubaue, overcome, van- quish sais b Le ees Quadrigga a slatue lo Tervify 16 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. . up earth : v7, e te jralale,edge of- life 6 it dedicatvow 5or thw her ov, upon, fo ae prvsoner, cComvey elder afsestant poriesléss (e suo an |appear, show. of y? uth na & Sy - Lasrre an ae pea FES wu nhas | raise ufe e beer’ res |suspenct | alin nw, sleck youth, fiero, Soldier cmlent |art, Splendor uaint, yudge ves Fg rarvit .| eye 77774 | wwee pias ae eye, wink bud bt dh, for, creclé 720 | ruild 1 forms Sleep aliv & luald. forms fashion Xf scarab Xporta jearth, vweotlid ty 8 | ne ae OF eee i = ® & 2 menat | 2e ose, death abod ae slee fe, death = of he Read —_ ain |wou 1 eaa ; u /6 _— ro rey : the i erchcist haka\ lo chew, gobble ub “Ge ace fw soo tala ‘Reak | $ stem |stuume 7 — 17. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. of Land. working th .S of ngelar olyecis. ey oot he Woth , ectrth lv swallow = iw |means, laslé, percepliow Rentbt ease oat f i t corner (32 fiortzow clear uph j|to are Sel fire garrusare Sate the Feet : our exe poke e as | Knee ec xent SCE sack sea 3 arou i $Sulen jlie om hamea|lérritle, roar opt |guide lead. por peler ene la . Co Kneél { se 18. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. horse aua | bull of cattle ta * aka |fat ah cow aua i qnant | whde antelope Kau cow of motow wander, Search aslef., apoce Sna |lamaway yeosef stop » not go fem | slay sha, | nostril beathing porld* cargo, mer nw | nose davelling dise TeX yernn ‘slee Sen breathe 2 veru |boar ar a xXxau |sow 7) lash [Steshy frovt 26 apha hog : ee quadmpeds Kamer|edimet s * mat Thenees Aoppopoltamus = : atu eb Sandal D er icas ce —-, ha husband : mt ° \cpicce of linen, piel o ore [aul fiatt | bellows fan |fusband Beet venti, embah Lefere, im presence oy farm _ ‘personae ba | goat, Soul R = ae gerr égyplan Sheep Man |Zinds, SiTands E ab la game of Chess JO i ‘ abu |Pumidian goat Kan gazelle Xahse | “ asui tagstés al ar jan U a ar = vis og htar Rorse a esm |\ymare sd ami _|ealt 2 = Sehak janceslor x ~ ‘Ska |e colleckacrowa Y) | Sahu |race, family, anceslors 19. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. + ‘ Sen |lioness, lurn back Set an ass 32 cont* ea) na " uhar | dog | 3 au cal Tesne |lom-cat maaft lynx a a rat 4, gerboa rat 4; COE) Criest: hal jworshifr Nant |rage jackal, erafly, cunning. > De magus ansh | wolf, dog: Ts Pete maau| ion “~, agom,an order jer ical vhi yroceros hifyro holamus gtraffe gry phon! tO Sphyrx ems E | crocodile uw Rye axem | extinguish cule lay oul | x Sat |connecuon, beam | See 1 any hare = air being , xislence |B lapsh lorloise fiek frog ,nruMmeEe MUS Tadpote, many, nume rous, million OV Chee = ) tTrore than 10.009 | blind wor: sa, CRaieael fizard, numerous, lo S$ LYaply 5 to give breath be - Ss cor plow 20. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. vA fem |&ocisl ur © Sanhedm Grass hoppe ¥ Ce fet vee was kal Che Gwoeal es the gullet vides _ yeennre ae conduct shft_ |ronv, tofashtor lenin | & Ti8e up, pr ide xefe | demon ,liar geshi lace in “writing ; Nefau picce Ie cove sad Kv a + lesh x i dorcas goal peat | vigilant ge oe et 2) Sh ram, lo ‘ashvor pide to rise 1p, pride, yeroll eft demon, liar M_| Herve! subjecT, servant @ iow disturb, Runt ten lin mae ot pe ide xepe | the efa seize emfefa on the comlraty Re (acorré ear) solem| listen , heard 36 aln - penetvale , qegurale beset pass hi Fevate spromolé wy palin mortals Ford mut | die = carry en ha bear off ta oe fam _ slé claw aspan measure J9g refat lord 40 Se Son, daughTer a MMi Fate XPT scarab Sine deste Xenn | slee Se Kar title 1 ae |e half teller @ bau | souls eee sere Qrasv ee duck ler er) Rind of- danolt Sent | fo aie ve, fear, lérrer, , be - hat bea omning bah falcnmidale, supply, lo gorge abahu | bird on Cont fie : =~ obhubar inundation, Gewill, par To fly Pee lennw t move J Ser hth Fe a male facitite Henr | erealé, produce Xjush athigh . “of fame 3g 21. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. akam | wr du asham| eagle or faleow (o freghler ,lo pre lect an adjulant , red amish envy » malice - os wi fesm | suffocale Rem @ find oJ SeeRing faim | deolroy fer : emsah mislay qnas |falé , 3 icevs family clesolale Sout. iale , dilligent: nest, waler place, fo ful fell, fearful taney Ss sesht | nest, marsh, nels juave,sperel, dyeanv pure, soul, dreayw veX |pure, Soul, drearw ‘oaty. & F rangle. bind wicked, mateh ye, spiral ywrese x peTeit igent, reasoning, mother the dead léal orsmall duek - 3 the perfume of Ant fi Tac, yance predecessor to be idle (snared bird) pty eee: s’haal|« « * selel | lo lremble soul. 22 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. apt | duck ver nes of Sodesses lureeus u unterlarr Serpent nray | vanquish een Nan | niworber, numerous uy lenh | wing os syns mes of lrees i | oft _ pa ofly amore a a fo mounrl mb eD : axym | lo soar Coat lema | lo SYroop — ayu | lo vuse, lofly SS 5 = of Yrood aiyat | lo fly perbea(wood) lree axex se - Xu wing or plume | ashoot, Ti — ji horse di wy j Sa 4 ( she wa) So of fishes +I (o increase, grow, plants bar abominable abut jatind of sesh eee fader “ “ ca ee an a hervech bes Co bring, over. | yout lan Bb = " +S rley ers ye acalrit |foodk (lotus) bas belsh Oxex alane nak xefe fala sem |yeeds anak |fodder < ae cles) clover, fodder - elevale apt is rriected : abominalcn dragon | fanlasle, shame ak, hre 3 real Derourer enemy, accuser 44 fore Read = A su wheal | bolt Au while barley, yrheat / 23. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. clelicious TR PaR) =, Xe a title vh nosegay yasha Jey Z ysh |jo aar |javine JS amalérial of sline Wiwa iz y or d pound, face ro mien ! rf 19° round alabuynant arr Y eh fac cee rnpa pee ae ba bronze alarnije , boat anem precerl, yasper SU ant, |Kind of ungu uent, yellow anlt perfume benr |dales y}ralm Lee, delight ash |acacta, cedar ws : : Kar |fherczon “of cilves A e merr| a calte d7 ° akiind of nosegay ; nut |ace ly @ ra, Pret Fe by ie sttc —_ Solis emblem of LE. pe ha beugl, eroad Ars mark ned Py chariot paddle fe i eens Lv Sa Rap al Bd es wood, Slick, sceplre at. at-h fee asledge, acharcol 4 {o re a abode, coucl oes Rina: of incl of pai asr | lamartnd wine lie! akara| bow a absi_ |partopa boat rappel he abou er = ams yer ashck (lotus leaves) ie het wetiatl Posicalyt 9 belau| roles for ropes plepiel«|y ele | 7/3/3393 04 - pe amal a bed t+ ast altr ied ta festivala 11 ey row are (a fod or lio Leaves) asit Lae cedar vaxt power SS yet after wards 24 " @ | astick ~3 } s | tm adub (] ha | abocte I%& (37 neler ha Vem jue aie malen proestt ,Tead, way, rath I he ie roc joe” Sher |& proach ar lo guide Veo | & goes | a eet. | annu | hour Aa. tent o clery | kr ov ci ° Seble | yveell anbu | wall of enclosure, Tampart ab 3 BY. and |comace maléit| a Jrath at = Nemyem | : mak di m alower \ to brusse, lo erush of house ¥ dB paris r |\afrouse Ez jee Sle! T} fa 37 / lreasure fiouse |fRouse x] rupe iT Temple Fas house of Gold, orHall ha nu of Sold. te. Had of death IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. i an Lsoip ap tC, ahatl. roach ST aflower asland ,aframe, slodeés ascend Cent Mh “ftornb door} alomb lo fear aptitel %v apalace, ahouse 60 ceiling, <7 pralace fiouse G2 dardew Hal of tre lwo Truths 63 “ ro} © | = B| ser & | P| PSs U os e. = ee Bi Pylow 6% Propylow OS gate 66 1 bencl srer 7 eats relations a i “ “ fo forme, G execu! ue 1 Ltr Cle ® Caaee acircuil, anenclosure RE e 68 anbu | wall of enclosure, enclo-_ awa ehelnecd z re a aeashe kd 69 airy a door, a halth cover an a door ¥ fue fo orem y, ° sey |ahut . yrarbet aboals faleh 25: IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. n gery cloor, pylom J! Fowler, weaver,arlisan pen b [yoin. alab breathe mua |yvaler breath, airy, wind filh- = jocear 3 sey ar cuma |sea ee to carry aly yiver T_T | merull lake mer | basar,lake Co sail alyu | giver, dislance Co Sloe alu viver, Measure ayn |bank, rave LU |inundale ’ fauu Verralory cabue pre merl @n beloved of - of shone ry minerals Dy, p ts Rc] 2 sion , pebble fe B navigale = Ka brick floor) ab Kat a (brick floo ‘ archate form of boal HT Gval y 2) SSS pee a area Ts f as xesef | fo sp aboar hel es tival uaa ba} abic boat = ful Head demow an feb festival Wee} naen Ra boat of the Sun ee et F he estival als tar boat of aGod barge of dhnen ee @ pla fo slof., lo Anchor Tt t sla o Sin a boat; (@ amchar p 2 pel Eng Lx. — us ee Nea us barge of yons barge of Mou barge of Socaris barge of Ra barge o Socarcs aboal , asareuue 26. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. sasy jarrow con sati |ghool as sl arrow ser |Grrow-head Kaur |falricalé , build, construct pi abricalé, qe rrork, laboy- meny inbgret oct , anarlisans ‘soldiers or cher inscriition few hol thadeds 97 Serka | le carve K le embalw geoff ivory work branches ie ea @ ding, cloth ¢ 23 eee” TT — ¢ at every siFah, dress — e3,2ecKon, account a gerdle bind i embalne ca oar “ go 1 Sesht oa = oe | | ide or | la be naked cloak, olothes Xepsh [asword, smite pure le prostyale 9/ | b z <7 4 ye Low joaint sega denclose I 3 = el am G2 gena | fo lurnaway nex & exlttna O "5 “ peti | lack race, Ethions Lylians Sesh javing. ..o handle { fp acercle 701 ——_-| Rest Te ri @) Temes i pets et ad | © x the” ego, Prerserts PR lin Sap 27 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMIN ATIVES, Lyi Sha |lo encase ste 402 Sna | lo lum awa, Knee matt refose, quire, , dead, precept (heal} carlouche) 1 hesh te rale “i pexxs | olivistons Pxe vod pxat lioness a jlule ie. beast; servant, mote, 8ehul- chre, Chamber, lamw, idle- Ness »§ aull, lecsuve eunbit 116 & measuyve = com barley Hq on, account” es - a ei bomiunable Aav aie ad,ewil, a 3: tia [Py conduct ea Ta ela o fu i Ne fies naha ———— a bread belenn . fragrance (2i fenka “ neh -* Food fen + [Au Pai larve car barley feha aoe ' arar eee gh aa solid food altinel of bre 122. als , colors, gems, nerjunie a heals o0°90 yellow ‘ 108 - a O blue - avtupiciol lapre lazule léesy Japlale, aligqud cream / e7- 2 etcelain cheese 123 na lafris larule of boxes ren aname : han a box 109 ae To bind, an ordil 124 Kava | Sarcophagus, shrine e apendant xem jabox,a shrine 110 Pet Hawa oy ie) Kars jembalmment, funeral ——_ Het Upper Egypt | Barnu) Bayvneo aw te .ehorn = a box . ( box Lid rs fp coffer fi} 28. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. unwerted Rorns mer re pak beloved Seven ftoms ine blank voting Inalérial muslyess of wild Name of a codadess Co carry!, ev ouwt (o sus et ng red CS Gaya. rouse g Wg ee edamine, suspend Palee’. j42 a frlace lo avaw a Pg. (44 a vo cudthe ve anvarsly E , nekau | a shape hty lo examine 14s standards of forergn land work, skul © 6 of forergn Acople (olay foundaliom fahook) to bear away 74 ( aclhere veady lunar slandard (§ rclecl bancl of metal) , ulén |consecmahon Pe fiabela fold, recoubled J: Teb ingot, went gorouna 2% 148 un Sena en = s’elancer ch balance post) at @ balance, adjust (43 ‘ : q ¢ q 29. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. acrook feq. yule, acrook eon curler 14g nay latitle, (0 inscribe back of achai 0 ql Snab earth” ns MALS) akey, rue, blest {52 blestcs, mclure cs — hemp Ue’ earth, the land 157 Lg prs the land of- the winged Sum. td: lac the To veaions, Wiper ¥ ewer gypt oy k lau | counlrees | Lj “| hesfy | deslrect == paim measure BVAVAVAVAY] at LE- ep aa dew F at paint, la figure ei i pest | back 162 Spane 163 a subslance 164% [lo ree lyfe, drofr, lear tla atti type at T> caplive 165° Sah va hides 166 leopardé skin > 167 1 receive (68 lo late, Rold , seize ™ of ctv slabilily, follow, vale tte eg 109 impart bottom eslablish emble / 7 fe Shem | bolt, shrme Kem Iethy phattre God 17! Nae ss 172 Shrime, ark | 7? 30 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. Ordinois Xeric lah ctinie fH yee oor = | mel fost é ‘3 hethu | allar, ladle fein, ‘. ares pak: , = sy Xaui |allar ib 7 omy aa altar Py é | 7 Sy —F alu falar 178 lew : : —— xen allar j fe Were xau aula 180 4 Aye jcenser- + é ant staircase, halt J fe (breagtamis and paddle) 192 é lent jis placed ines | ‘ asha 183 Sem Fowe r Mh ry } ies sha af celd 18+ xersa | alvuss of fay << Shenh [living ix, 6 aii Thousands, or VeTY many 'Paut | divine assembly of the Gods | Synod of tre Gods 18] numerous foxeit v4 geese) | (Runes) | 3l. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. (abuckle) 192 O (@) ot path 195 ny Il 194 ae: lo bring True =e ? thousands lyub ute x * hu |léns Throu3ceands if direct, jrass, lyavexrsen " a slatuve 196 asthu | hundreds housand apsh | fall, float crvcular, [ encircle '97 anilkion ad oqo 7 ae apa bulions : 198 all time Bp fetal oe Tela | everlasling ,zere, infonily apr fost f sing Co fummig ale 199 200 a as | eal ov throne Shua reght, {troper abu ab | pure, cleacv . ar | feast lo serve, a fellow, a ter | vant 201 second -4 — — gt | (a sledge ¥ slime) Faia oe beslow, symbol of he (asiturelud} producl of yiches ee =-—* ——— 199 mer | achest, boy, ring, 203 aweight, a sujthly of tiquid | 191 eke TT «@ 6hietd) 90% 2 | | seston ee see = 32 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. Shuam feather, Withear 208 anme | drearr shu | eemyot i pati. ae ke em oreveul ‘20 i sept ighlew 7 ihnan, oa i aab | pass. ofyrose 210 | ids ni abKam malérial 2 aa arli i; Ar SET Sas i yale * a flour of Ure clay 13 minute I a My fen | + lheabenl aap, Bea rege Se | "ro ae Ax le olrog, hebté soles of Gu n foot 22/ or Lee ose faakil throat, charge yng fuk |ailver gay Rut ame | ae ; fiulau [onrons 20s Rut | alae 226 | fa Ab es | fiold a slick 227 | > 229 Scejulre of Lower Ssuor for, clecree, slatior 30 germ Labor, work, Runer, dlory, litle 2si artisan, dignuy Aa aal- nema Go force & Gam back tS Reais ee ee oe. ear wat | lo make grow 233 eras es 33. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. wy ln leva lime anhaley] lark 254 | ian Boe ; aa A sds tab | a je 23ST hur onions (lundle of) 257 flan ar @ pomegranile/ 2S 6 |- & 2 ares pytows gale abox 28 = pa arf [erie Wava |a chest 255 verlebra 238 = ast athrone, aflace hes aos ¢ IS% a d Ha | a Orrone, a seat oa | elay 239 4 S 1én seat ay = asl jafraces gullnealior es aseA” | Tscs Soddess LIF I Rianne | ayell a Asir {ny Gee Renbi | 2ér7lory SebT | dog s lar, ee ¢ 1 Serh oie pee SSaw fle or ae 257 mer | 24 class cilies,and wa- lexen 6X ar engraved Obelisk ler slalioms = a: prosbuile, sae ge g 43 ——) 2: te _|iron Tah erni|satr Sra J c em itefaat on the eomtrary 244 fs] : uty ©“ em i em nem ago, refreat ¥ 5; ushem | f renew ae R | ari Xem | hem i Tree iteian gain cafoukal colum7 Slax us caprlat colunw -| lén|pte gran ary 34 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. tole, accounl a slime 2863 Legh Crom of dower Egypt aprotters sland , mould 271 the Tle of the crown 286 to Touse., elevalé chaple v, eromv omnua fo Weuf, plain = ags Croww oy flowers men a bracelels an anther: 896 nie wbracelel, an ae 35. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. & shoe teuther 309 HWMUDH Sersh ja sislrum Player 310 maiaig & maa ee oanassislant priesless or ceclay gum 299 sersh | asislyun . aul Shent ‘ lo play the Susliunrv Sereh |sislrune — 32 shua oplume Senr o feather occat7a Un Louvre pely Tus as *—ax’ aningredient Cnaw omtment for the memory SIS ¢ Co ushify sba ‘Jeprer Z 72 Ve ae ulensils menx | | the Crown of Osis and sg?) Gods of L nd of oO $ of ower Yo “403 Sere O (a slek } Cram of Horus GOE Kannu |fiemp slonds oe linen Qhoth chain armor sandal G06 Tebti’ |two sandals leb leh | Sandals 5 t ofan, rejose dO7 a fly flap 308 neler a god neler fi a higsh priest, prophe I seb abantle axe 320 F z neyl avwoodmansaxe 7! 36. IDEOGRAPHS AND bacsu | a dagger J22 Maa adadger sachttf, above, : gerst 528 52+ acharvot” to wre, ascribe, proant ing 3 Seribes’ paver 526 vex la weugt, appointed a7, laveed pen _ G28 W shut, Co neperctle, a concubine on qQuowmly of food, frat scepler I2LG eid uid ,eTeamn or buller 3 old over, vuelory viches fP ory» pe The Yvest- SI sox = tied up voll Sood, cook bag, pouch, hurse tls DETERMINATIVES. in overseer of the”. 535 sar $36 sla abals Uhreacl, & Low, == @ spit, G lead ,lO conv. sat = lead IS 444 ] 67 nevus lo a <5 ab unrdumb | —_ ss as Aa é an anima a an Heliopolis ere = conserve, frut fienlit\arms, lols, Wensvs i 2 eh = Ismucth elong alect tm the ah. lect et ts Las reliefs; Is ppobabl - one de wot aa 4 ay 36 we Roney oF the Gods <¥ ned |Sord 369 352 = adie DEQ |. Aeb or ler. dora of all universal God eee ee ] ba tyon,cloua (acmucible) 370 archaic fonn of erucible we ee 35% : | ad id alén |lank, rank 3 72 Near carve ew. 2. | Sahu |receivead, SST | ble Sirjohis) sab consletiulron of Ortory Gn emblem of 8+)> 373 Ssah Orign, afsemble, joer | u | one, line, edge jy4 aa ith ammbula ,Afourney 7.5% : ! ; nena 1) & gens cod, a ragoul SIF Ta lo gwve, lérnutnation of present partiecprte 3 6 art ‘ © neler slé}- incense S77 i: jf en ae Sef times 358 stem |sfibium at 38. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. fia lo vemrarin a2}. | $soh a journey $8O —— beme alta serene ra | | Sent foundation $8 es (2) | sennt lo found A = eee 39s S| lala | proper, jeculior $82 aif a ae | om lala, poince, mrints: 396 i , chief ) (abbveviet ae vo 129. ) 583 —=_ Ral eart 397 pee i iesiat Shores 995 hele table, fe i Mp ler olish pe nnush | vib. nnush Kidney . beers nashe liver, oun FS the eyebrow, slibium, half month —_—SS_ 4 ma - sep continued JI58 & hore jlife, margin | me ae iri ofivery carving og a-vrhelsGme lo ordew 72 lo desfrcse aa | a - aera ere i 39 IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES be Squeeze, lo make bread ings clivided auch as,slraw, 2 eeetae 2 426 Sha rise (Sun rising?) Shen | acatfe, kind of food 427 sy festival nead, address, Save, help, afflict, jroumish, Rail! fectraaci zen hes ae lo- ghory le - | ee qmena | | sharpen. G& eat Ny febu | | aleather , cuter ae ——— Sexa | tf matte ber ber Ree AID Aankh are “ideogram sen atoclk, acwl wrens, =e Ram black a grie 14 me 426 Bipeenee ® uch | crown, buckle 416 | | pesm la cake OP fpler | ex incl of cane pS grief nevi’ 4350 rut posterity » of foment yu ja sprke | ae (asling) | Sxa Ker| lo embellish 41g 3h | ged, poo nae bon orrlerp ose for ewllar} A312 | ~ igood your, mertl, beanly | te fear Aas y_ : qtau |joecloral plole 422 | 1éns freant of- a net, aslielther 2 ules | @ streteh 4423) le shave 4a 40. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. Ass menti| the lao mounlaun chains bordering the Valley of the Wule Sah tous islellation of Or Orv ASE { als Unat the Sek uq | once fame Sun amen cH nemb | Ayyd Sepsen| Lwice P anustbe repec i ; a, of mines ana quater Sepxe if tiarece VE“ ead 437 ey | ba \o basket AS o} 2 }}0! Ss A J Hefas | ce Trollows fa- PETE) House ouse of Gold’ res used by Ue eae ans G avota the men L Of- Death. 4ISF hems & at AAA fremet awie, vroman uryec ae seeped conlrary HAS a neKkKa ja dap —— ja cubit, ,oforearms length, | | ust, Lyue | | ar etd Bi ~Teapatane over gue ) 44) | t% ts ferobably a variant” of , The same | | 460 } Di: mm i ie) | | AUS | | } } as PEs ed er ler ee sand 5 H +| jeer ali ig bovianil comeu- (a swamp or — morass) ees ren xe | bines s 46) oa swam|> » Movass AAG | t | Shea] Pee , are | % " | | quins 4627 | | = | | = yabes a beard 450 aia = ha aS cine j | if a —~ ae & ec of an enemy > an Sea | Astahe A463 sek | a battle axe £0) —————— SS “| > ba | bronze vO4 i \ al SS = ————— ‘bulau a prece of yrood of the sa- ~ lo serre AS? VY cred boat LOS [a es coy poe geet, vase 450 eo eS oh ' 3 poe Le 15 i oe a ~ a | shes | le serve as =] ee oe ant i. Set | fo Saar nate le > aheck | avrows, lo Uirow bread on De | Groun & , frocer iebations Ss | eee ae Gy Al. IDEOGRAPHS AND DETERMINATIVES. nt eee Mae ae I | st a ba The soul 47! Z | neferu yaces, mervil3, beaufies iat “a Me diencios 4j2 asymbol of Osiris 473 Ta forgers” hreadiiy, £ ofa 4 periilee Breen Fs ofacubil, es of aroyal cubd 47]4 ida lao fingers breadth Cer ‘three fingers breadth ——<——————" -——— —— lahands breadth 475 fiwe fengers breadth —————t Isix Fingers breadth |\Seve n fongers bread th eight f tngers breadth ‘a Shon A yo y | wu ja cuubil, 24 fongers brdth 42. Bote G4 ice cals he kat mmlat Mings chamberlain j prtest” of ae es u H neler nefer Good god jaseribe Beit eal | as a : 4 | ail nelerb fioly soul ti ss | ab | Priest hood., purey ane z . neley hp) horu scone x | | | SK anni | 1 AG ' | rH a | Likurgies sy sulan car god-beloved Git | g - | A = } “7 ~ neler salen fan. the ace Rie mayes ¢ { \y apriest 2 Eee Sbaen ft | Hl i f i \ct jorcest =i 4 ae ‘ ' ——- itiah priest of Amew K | : Praises lo Ra! anelen fa | Ls ia ne ayt ea god j jofferings The lemple fear | IPsiesiees of Pthah F = : offering of oxen geese ae | *> * laf emale niusietan, a | jarcesless Sculplors | Yases of the lenyue, Lhi deduc wie sibs wigs feteru | thingsdeducaled servane, or some Mind of priests is lowers. — Hek nu Aol y water, magic water servants SACVEpLees c oy MBG Sacrifices aneat offering offering of Sotiis flowers offering of sromegranile of fering of olive ol } _ | gacred loaves, eonsecraled cakes house of the Godse geTibe of the lemple Palace, Wings’ house Kings flouse, femjrle to “4 a 7 seat ar [iloce of the loved sancliaries of Thebes | Tem pre cI | ' ea eo - paki? i ao a seals, folaces, temples ,ashrime ov forlable lénrprle |a shrine , alémple | a great Rouse, alémple « “ ” = alibatiom house | | | | | | | alenyle, i ! | lémpie of Pittiah ” “ o lemple un the erly of Pthah or JKeemphis é | . lemmple of Rain Che Crily of the Sun, Hetiopolis, Theve a leniple a lemple SYMBOLS fiouse of IiGa, Truth Great house of the Goda sekbet | awalled court a walled court lemple Services King of £,6. Hing of WK" L.6. Gueen of We. Queen of ibs. queen of LS. the lovd lhe King of Ww. Uie lova the Wing o-< S. King Ruler os WS Ring, Ruler of- L.G. King, governorof WFLS the queew of W.¢k. &. = - ithe Hing, of Uke land ; lhe live a | Is bg fe raant the portals Pier a ; | af ee ger 799" sai (oS eet i an Wet tad of Lé. 99: | | = [AR Bs rf o | | pling of WLS. ) ee aes : E : € © | King, of Ww. ¥L.S = Offerings, purification 2) | +¥ | : mi eueeee | rere His Majesty w.. | he . fis Moyesly the Hing ia Ty his Mayed™ Me Wing | sacrifices, Sacrifices, Lis for ting of U.S. PA (vise heovenly ting eal lie queen rind, | Xing ¥ queew | 45. SY MBOLS Lord Ff battles conqueror fe Lore 97 re eword. 60n of Ra daughler of Ra dovd SF Sgypr u Ruler of Te counties Larcl of lands Be [ee {Sore of the line Egyjois i} neb Tax queen of the lk countries nebtlar queen of- the Tho countries neb Eg tai lady of Lhe Uvvene of ine Lwo ‘countrys lord of Ure field lord of W.&. or Shedes pu veshu Land of he South Us. nu mehT Land of the North, £.&. . h rth nth South gp Greil lene aah “Tune n21007v | months, in clesenbing a por Sons age id: |monthly a fortnight or half month 46. harvest months | al (mechty month of | he phamenoth « “ =. season of the rise of the the amonth of | Thoth | f lowering snonths ae he Tronth of {hatin F | hoa} - “ 0Oean~m } PRs a a * hachohs Seasg% ° Une rise of hachops Son wrur — ee nee eon _—_ cpye lalion , or. yt i of civ yea! “ “ epre ‘ha “ 47. SYMBOLS. Zohae re | a ejre}t month of — ee et: | Abs f 2 nS pm mes | = aie oS si ? ee slar of dark uess - | See = lfrtu jacay i ~ — | ier af - . & ee of light ~ Oo l i | © first day cee | : | ee is é x onnu |Rour | ! slar of- light ai herd; i bade Fe annut | the appointed four eo = b : | & S Slay of light ao. Bi: ” . oJ | ‘5 = . NO) | 4 Aries eee * _—h | | = Es A i Oo & | Jaurus, lhe birth ov Fe- a, sing of Jaurus 4 nlanels or wandering | | | Jaurus Pe | Feo ae Aru eyenin lar | ae Stats | Jaurnis a mae ! slay of night” | re a i= | SS Orion a y slar of night ceo | Gemun vide Cie mul mother + janother nial ales mult akef mut wie sislér, Ninsroman. brother, Kinsman - 52. GRAMMAR. Articles lhe, masculine | | the, | the, Senrinine ! | The, ” | The, plural war Une » " | Unis ,Urese, mase: | Unis gem: a® Qj) ve | this . these ye | this wae prem | dues , These ,anasc: l both ae : nner | er Gus , these y fem: Jaunbers | TOS %! mene thal, these if By | enew | those, Mal; precede che noun, Uie others follow u. This , Drese, ¥ serves frvquent wlilte a substartive verb le Zon ect sitbyech and preae - cale. Tre -o@ jet seb “my father the Saye us Sed” Personar prone uns a Z, Ze Urou, mase: ——E = | e7 wk Remonslrathve pronouns | Pronoun fie Urey row, aWrv]2ese- Trou, fe ye: Uiese suffxes Rave no independent x- f tslé1ce as words: 1 when affixed lo nouns Uiey fave the lovce Of osessive ONBUNS ; AFfKert lo verbs tre come persomat prrorecuns as: ‘ She *Plehu-a 7vUu-o ” nee open IT mouth my ¢ s eke nu |we T open my ?noud ‘fear A lhe - sai =a I on they —a a e Set Urey 53. GRAMMAR. Pronoun Pron]eun fore we |. qusuate Uhey a au} y. it aera Uiey at | s | I, King 07 God are ie ae cert a : of a J, nie, mine z . | x | a Tne, mine i 3 a I, me;,mine, Kinga God Se SR ee 7 | ag | 4 [ZL me, mine < nuk T fang or God- | fa a J, aie, mine | : if | Kua |Z, ane, 772202e = nuk | % SP é auk |Z | : tay oy | ua TI, 7e, Ize & £ thou, Uiine Ph ae ifou , Urine fem: S& Sfommerzie Hi OU, ine “ “ “ Trou; thine fern: thou ,thine fen Thou 77Uasc: = . . eS fie, fim, fus chou fem: fe , faim, fis aie fie | | fie > fam » hes : } an aleSU | fe, firm, fies. } & fie (Seezndepen denlyue ae ae |; —e | $ She , fier eG enles | She | a | ser She, filer —r | seset she, fer we | | & [shes Ben fle get |sShe, her amen | | | | gel |she, fer _»— | geset | She, her ye | yre, OUy, common gender ne we wre OU ” “ jie | we, OU « o Ghe they lew ao | en ner ' a2 naw | (len ‘ i | @!' | én é: (ree | Och. ¢es Yio * | sex oe —e—- 6en aan —o— ’ Sen wv! ‘ er | See: — le —w mitt gel- Lie Ws too | YANG ras GRAMMAR. Pronoun he, fam, hie he , firin, fiis he » fin, his fie, fitin, his he , fam, firs =o Urey, rem, their | They » Them. thevr | They » them, Their | They , them, their | They, them, heir | they, then, their They» them , thetr | they, them , he iv | | Independent pronouns | is used as he drench“ on” and when appled asa base to Ove Su es produces & Serres cfimdependent pro- nouans _as Thou an Independerd suffix |fte,an independent per Savi al pronoun Posessive [vro: s WNY. Inase: sitg: mary | ents jana Pronoun alle , pas -almy, mas: Sing: AU 2 pai-e!| ny, « God, King Apllgmiaiyy - = To na-a) my, mase: plural | qTRR weal > alla nee wiy, « God, King Bib na my, « — i-J Our, Com: wen . sing: ye WUT a Gale oe Fee é ail vis haat Bd how ARI |~ jrai- kK All — bein Bell pui-K| thy, Urine, ws @yl— juti- K thy, arine , we *d « plural our ] | thy ,Uhine, masc: sing: thy, thime, « - Dry, Thine, « “ a Wt qrea- K | Thy ,Urire, mase. Play: ll “~l | nai-K Uy Urine, " FS A “el nai-kK! Uy, thine, af - nai-K thy ,hine, a ~ - | Thy, Thine, fem: Sing: 4AN- Jaci-©| Thy Thine Fs x 55. GRAMMAR. Pron ouns yl. |e ees he | na-t thy, thine, fen: plu: “ “ « « pins | 2 eS patn your, mase: sing: Bhar [s - - Wie re ; Bas parn| « « ee hati your, mase: flu: men BS! : qos qvaliu tue = naitn | dia He psy All por | a Pas d . Bu | pay | aytl | putf |= -? 7 qa | fits, plu: oie lle nar | “ alr qearf- dene |: “ thy thine, fent: Scrug” [AAD pos big ronours fier, Surg,: RR pos fw, ARR! mii ae Al NE SMe res } ul qvas fer, plu: layed as | their, com: gen: sing aus be ae “ rare et I wan pears eae ll a | pars nu " Len t a pais paisn ° " { co a, —a 2 1} wo | yasn | Ufiew com: gen: flu: ween io are Specs maven « re iN | eet ay peel ae IWUNstjnaion|= sm “Rh “pls 4 il lai- ‘ ; aati} tia} (my > Mase: ‘ 56. GRAMMAR. Pronoun Pronouw an) Tan tet |Our, com: gen: =i lars PRY TE | cro [geo sh ere UT ee “oS lan | “" ” ae -4—. lak Thy, your, mase: AY Tas. Their, Core: gem: La t7] aan ee “Wirt Taian | “NJ | wk} ~~ - - KWsy aion s 7 aes “UNF Tatsn | -h- | Vat | iy , your, fem: =) hy! laasi | a os ee ee p||zte|-taisn| (bli Yoisw;) « " - | - delernrinalwe pronouns i CR S en the, Uus, inasce: -%]] wal ge Ae “ w pcg at : Ps fren “ “ o -[]- ——e laut oa . .-) | : aiJ= uit | er te | Sen Wem | The, this, fers: a lew | “a 1a lie Our, Com: gen: pu: —— lew be . : <4 laln |, ae * _ # aApen {these , com: gen: El ae | “Rll ian! « ESF tex lat: anu | : — : | “QUES aan - ee ee B:| apy | . 5 ee - —— ia ai “ | vreflecTuve pronouns li Vaitw . « 3 4 Rika DE person pr u Sa al me oe? | 4 ” Ri | s | Bu 3°72 person we lait ;“ a ae ! Tnvyself L inn) les-ek | Urou Uryself 57. GRAMMAR. Paonouns lase1| They themselves + lecluve ary of- ij f another, the arntithescs of the above the one the other those, the, so, tua who who whalZ when alone : Za is an afftrin: ative 3 bai lanuu| each, how e su a person ' — neb | all,every, ead (a a AMAR : =at men | q@cerlarue ma: ! prevrry Te == men acerlaun vromai | H ot | Relative jrromyvuns i | ‘ Hee who, whiclt a ent | " “ Mt " as ohh acs at H perefexed Ce Nee “A | ah the sense of-& vel: frron: | with | igen of, ixed fas Adverts nen | no, nol, negataw | en thas sometimes the value \ ofa negalhon | ~— went neganhon | | \ \(—— 5) | . | @ .| nent | 11e8: when the verb is | we | jelarar. | | (el ee | — le \} @Q ren fu merer A a | || Ce ; nen ner no lime \| | wen | combined wuh adjedive \| fonnsGreek A privalive | = lees @x, | fo Nw” Nehau sore few es | t | llAnnan | ben no, none | nee | J Fy & | bennu te ins | des | benny " | | ——a i] AN wen “ “ | I* “bu | i 4 1| J s bu |. “ \| —— a r Lbs | am nen ado not (Wwolon vats) | | I SB | = h | lém | cs used for not eager c=) ik __tem Rs c | i yQ | iia yes, affirmative ei | (a et AYA mcs ta OX! wherefore , Se pa vals, \ g | ma | as, like ee ; moa | «a « " Srayeh? H uke, as uw were o | | 58. GRAMMAR. Adverbs Aaverbs quab biaeand second Cire, luz - vally at second Rand. Ss _ Kar | where (apler verb), only News in ee Se Ww bm Shoa Gre) until, from i} adverbs are formed by prefixing I} these fieireglyphs 6 prepoortions LV T and mouns, as , 2 | i 7 fd @ em bestdes in addition le pad Wi24, em herl above = } ea em Aare " AD | em lz for ever ie—— — | fiehen |sep indefinilé number of =—— limes = } te em nefer fortim alely wy See em indecd , verily again ,acecendhme, — a | Tenew ! = * vem firn| besides in addilion lé Je ais abd hte em fru “ “ — eS | | Qe em mau also, anew i= +4 en yar fit... meas ee er fiertt lu the above | e | ac “ “ ie p @ cerlaur pr sition S | em ma | => esorm shi he BA ie em Si. ne | | | a ats ust f eretly | a er peli at the ena lastly ot Sadat BEES oe ~ &%& | em le whew, on account ae ; ersa | behind, afler aaa ES — | ey ma| at the place of => | | a fia | behind i t er feh| constantly , forever ees er lela! S0¥% ever 59. GRAMMAR. Adverbs excessively vy the gredlest, through the| whole, allogalher, ase } @ rT) er xa | very qnuch & a er ler | entire theradverbs by unio lé in, from, fO% OS, amid y ? = " ” | “ “ “ “ } ¥ 7 ag > er | lo, lowards, for, & be, from —_— | tha | enlela | for ever ij ? fier |soaslo,on, Of from, om = | i} * acount a > fier: | « a, & ] we | Le | flere because, above e en her be we | as ay | FR | fergal om, on lor sat | herenjame 05 much asinme-- [~~ ; : =~ H a aig ; > fa xfer | foctrse wm | K | eee | pa NE therefore | ee lar le . | that, which wher, imes- ine cP der-,@, course ofaday aA | erent muchas, Tegenerally ee | PS Ka bak m FAI ACIS a = | i72s senlénees and lows | we 2 uth es the verv,Tut,le roy ‘ Ara lw sby,ancd, no rs gt gs | one asif, in the same man- +} fier- |and (conjure:) ner 1} | | | Ss er hes-| with, logether, lowards } | => i e en sere H a | 2 | xer fo, forLe, | => }gher [a * = tis] where — Se ees am @, w h +e lam [+ - pa er yrnere — 2. , em lin | befor? : | —} gw | ‘a “ 1 AY : her nn aera the same man- — a? em ha ® =# |= —> eanbah | before Prepositions le, of s from by, or “ “ “ 7 GRAMMAR. Prepostions , conjunctions conjuctions, inte vee lions lo! behold , then, whilsT Wide inslead ~& H sta |inslead of like, as lo, besudes, then, -vith erma afler, while, Then eon su afler yhen ensu or, by, of flow much what now { , — — 7. how much, f howgreal 3 an exlént { ca mem Cate ty let if be, therefore ——— Yn —, ermen| until, unio what? Row ? Conjiwene tions are of let orrtultedt i and otherwise said ad, (th gubse- e but afley, but when } — and = - - ees otherwise said * I === : inasmuchas > & ref | or else, nor, or, either ‘ ‘ Inferjechtons 6h! GRAMMAR. 2 teryeck ons, yer’ l= | ar is, ( uently precedes ‘pus ar vs of len placed al commencement of s€*- lences) - j a aru | plural conju: of “tobe” j b au & be; & exist, ie heel y mau Signifees simililicde of + concliliow GY A | au-ad am, Suas — au- Wt |Shou art, dhou west, 4 Scere) aut | thou wertsdhou wast; fe V5. od auf |fieis, hewas ly/ ev” | aus |shers,shewas Igo ' or Qu nu) we ates’ we were ISx20.2., aulép | yeare. ye were ( it a dep cuser | they are, they were or or Tees ae ner «jase sulyeq or Oe Hy 6l. Yers Vv) we passive farms of f preceeding, une ts connecléad wah we , either immedcale iy s ugh Ue particle “nor 62. Index to geographical names. Ab 9 Desare 147 | Matau /20 Shairutan 97 Abo 6/ East 120 Memphis 54,05 Sharman 97 Aaker 99 Egypt 37,/25,/45 Mendes & Shasu 155 Aauw - 155 Egyptians 28-36 Maree 39 Shos $5 Aboosimbel Elephantina /06 Merve 39 Silsilis 154 Abshak 103 Elstout 14 famial24 Smehu 98 ASL 4,9 Elymais $08 Mo-imemphis 59 Speos $2 Abu lt Elysium 156 Mtharaina 124 Sun 139 Abydos 2,4b,107 Eshmour 137 Ntgroland 93 Syene b6 Alexandria 135 Esneh 7,82,136 Nehss 93 Tahennu 48 Amam 163 Ethiopia 5,19, 85 Nenu 126 Tahpenes 70 Ament 1,44 Gaditis 123, Nineveh 1426 Tahruna 146 An 73 Gaha 144 Ntle 153 Tashi 144 Ane fu 25. Groves 163 Nubia 93,118 Takema = /3 Anyem _ 8&4 Habenben 14 Ombos 6,49 Talmis Az Afbrodipoli 5! Hanes 70 0, ypidium W/Z Tamahuw /49 ab 97 Haru 97| Senter 104 Tamin 143 Aratia = 3, 69 ~—Hat 15 Oshmunain $8! Tanis 6 Arlemidess 52 Hebai . //2 Pairak /é/ Tantour, see Tout Aruma 10s Heliopolis, 98,75 Palestine 34 Taraua 3B Arunt 104 Henne [02 \114 Persia /32\Taru 143 Ashuash 89 Hermonthis 43 Peserk 133 Tat 150 Assouar 139 | Hermopol: 81,/37 Phil 6088513! Tattu 5 Assur los Hills 164 Philista 134 Taut 77,798,130 Assyrians 05 Hittites 131 Fheuda /27Temeh /43 Atacort 90 Hebebru /60 Pselchis 433 Tentyra, see7Jaut Aiarluchis 68 Hunen /li Purusata /34\Termas 142. Athors waters [62 Jonia Wi Racoks 135\Tesher /47 Athretis $2 Irtuna 116 Rebu 89 Thebes 9, 38 Alru-nu 162 Isidis 12 Renres 38 This 150 Bab 159 /tah 117, Rome 141 Thoum. 57 ‘Babast 109 Jordan W6 Rumenen 100 Tma | 166 Babru 96 Judah 17 Fut,Rutenna 94 Toeart go Babylow 96 Kabasha 40 Sa 140 Tohen 148 Bahbat /12 Kadesh /23, Sais 3,55,80 Turusus 93 Bast 109 Kanana = 164 Samneh 4l Tut 158 Begbe 138 Karuc /2/ San 76 Tyre. 142 Bthnte Hd Keb tu /22, Sas 3,55 Ut 152 Bounderies 165 Kenus M8 Sebekla 19,78 Uramu /57 Bubashs jo9 Kesh 93 Semel 141 Upper Egypt 1 Canaan 67 Lake _ 189: Sen 136 West country, /2.0 Chloe 22 Land of Kf 37 Senem 66 Yam 37 Coptos 122 44 Lalopolss 42, bj/3b Sert 95 Xaru 153 Cynopolis 53 Lebanon 00 Serk kar 90 Yas 93 Deep waters /to Borda: ap I Sesesennu = 37 Yemt 154 ‘Dendereh 45 79 Liycopolls 50,152 Selu 14 yita 15) won n (28 B0Ly ; 94 Shaak /o! Yourn $7. GEOGRAPHIC. == Wsaive) (Osut? ~ neb Sord F 2 ei : @ Ament | Mandos dhebes } = ae ee a @ Sgypr | AL? yesh Egypt | -- 2 ___ a a | yesh, Sgypl _ [3¢) nuresh, | Land of the South a eT are Qa laud of the North a Toe. a | Séayp j | Spy 7F-| alk i] 63. Kings of the bito regions ° Mb Sana of the Crocodile (God) ital } = 2 | = ES Gountiy 26 Ser 63 bf Se oe AP 2 __ | 4 | im : i ; Si 2 Pome Arabia &3 | D | Rebu Arabia 89 wn i FA | c=, ish — EEE ‘ eo) | fale Ao @& dnyenr | B+ => a ae | Rebu- | Arabia Sea se a = $$ _$_______—! ¢ t — & 8) Jul jéluoprt Bs || 68. GEOGRAPHIC. may be Seythiause, uhom Pliny calls gertiak Attacore eS. a | ee biG Eillf aS ll | Juke | Joceart, Seytuane | os a peopleliving £0 ad of &gypt> conquered | _ by Ramneses m 92 -~e’ if Hegrtand 98 | a? is ee hei [lt 1 Jrehsu JYeoroes | Negroland one of four vaces which (SS or 8mehu — « are usually named ee ee 8 ee : oe —, Rule u dydia * 11 Z ule. y G4 =, a re Rulers wor Al eee et & ‘ gx | Ay dians 69g. GEOGRAPHIC. Tie Shaak aaerby ae not i ye 34) éask, Thebes "9 a ae) ee?) | | comes Weet country 140 #e euple in the neigbor- | ———— r . ‘ Hennu food of Egypt, perhaps WM 7) | kare ] Sy | @NO mercenaries 102 bi 2 | Abshok| Aboos:mbel 103 | one. 4] pea > Sex | | Arunt River Ovoules 104, => IRS Assuru| Assyrians 105) ty y @ Abu élephanina 106 | 4 | Abu [Abydos tor | — Wes IE Granat | ésype | Vo Sruma Arama, ély mais 106) Pee RIOTS Se {ee eee | Bubast = } ers | venti Jinevah 126 J CaN or Pubaslis | a OF Bast 109) | K King of Phenicia (27 Jn “@ | Behni| alawn in Arabic j79) =—7 i S es : ees = wee "| Hunen ani nt pit | W ate B | ee Tanlour Dende, g 1; Neb or seth Fi put Hebat rena na | ay @ Nemshe Gilethyos = 129 Opprdinune Fae | ria 4 | J ll 2 ! Janlour, Denderm | 2 SH 3 dJatem 43 | = a | 5 a “Porrak Phile 131 we 4 sy Habenben rom er | H J /\ | Heliofsoc BH : waned Oy) | = ia) Yers | Persia 132 — & v |Edfoo,A linofolis _————— ~ 2 A ali ge us| af oS Peserk | Pselsis 153 | a = I UL ‘< ta Jordan River yp) aise i ‘ % oe a | @ ) cc Purnusat Bawsetine 134 | Philistine — | = ; \ These Stah SI 3 of | — (7) Rakali | Racolis, Alexandria t are @ 135° parr Fr @ Henus Aubia (sé | et 4 70. GEOGRAPHIC. a be Sesennu | Eshonoun, Hermopelis WAS i ae. Aaru BE SER ne. | ee ma, eae & | senenv | Begbe 138 i SS) so | Ura mu |Great Walerm 157 i j it “a seo |e | Afsouan, Syene 139 | -%& | SSeS a on } ed | Wile River 58 Se Sa South Cily wo | | Hine exe ———————— — ——— a= | f- Sent | Arnenti oer th as ae B a) i ii | Bab ake 159 a as ari eo alt we oo — - ||| Pea | Ss @ | _dermas | Jalmus 42 | ae — =e —_—-—-— ——__+— —— || op Www | Hebeb nu | cleejo walers (6¢ oO)? \| nen | er ee Pehl a Oe ————---—— —— i} ano Hell, fiery walers —_e x js 7) Jaiha Goha. 14& | 2? ie aia — Soe 1) ” a ae eS = a I ¢ ‘Es oa rans | Aloe nu | Walters of Athor 162 ru @ Tawi Saypt 14As eg ae << > ,— | * ws | Alu nee « fj @ 2 ne Rome 146 1S — ms | z ess os mas ong | ae m7 | i b, Dt ntl & bit Semen Casi 168 } | ek Jahnu | softer J48 | A | gett , 164 > 5 eR eS ee — he _ ——— oe Jemeh jdasnahu 149 + = Kile: é sew rete nln Ky f ¥ boundaries 165 S@ dar [This ($0) __=<" —— 5 SG, Ty 5 rT: a forlveas 166 D * xila =| Hittiles at jj =e 632 eS oe ~ — a4 / 2 Bs ur | : 182 eg Kanane | Canaan 16 Am tee ie copolis | all Cana ee So St be La t i) 3 a were _xeru Syria a a3 — — xXerie \s Selselis jae =t—=: Lt : : ™ THESNOMES OP "2e@ncr i. Greek mcime aici rejion| Deity tad = Wes hi: ree es alse Jnilcefaolilés re, @ |Per Har nub | U0.&, Horus sor. a Jar Aphoditojolis Te @ Jebtr | Vo.&, eHathor ; ; | | | a5 Ny er Amef peh | 3 | We Hes Ww. WHnathor | AN ae Kat : =* @ J | W.6, | dHather a] & i (Apollinojeotes XJ - | | - ae Res Jtar | Magia 1) Sebt, Gafoo | Us.6. | Horus aaa oO | | pe Si A we ae (Arabia) | 3 A ® €3 | Per tat Iter £6. cated Se Ay tn Sebeh [ei ce Qroewdavapolis y cS EEE tmypen Srsingilés TI @ Beene ina — a | F.] Soper paee| Kaye | Athribites qo. @ WWalaheriab £6 |Mar ryouit (AM ls aes = Sn yent | Bubastilés | ' >) | Per Bast | 2.6, |Basht | | C2 <=» | | Busirviles | lee Per Hsin re | J.8. Cabasilés | | | (Aorus | ; | | JS or a8 Aa Coptiles | 3le ® aes | WE hewn 3 | | [4 vem fet | Shu Sub} Cynopoliles <= aoe: (v1dger), 16. & Jmubis Janz Diopoltiés ‘la & | gor (Sheves | US. |Amow D tvs pol ules | Ym Xebeh | Perr” ! a | etepheartine | Tans (0) | Alb } | lo.& Ap nf nolilé | | { ee mesh | ° Sees ‘| | a Racotis ? | | i } 72. NOMES Greckname | Chief Ciliy Region} Derly faae- “aa 8 Buu nevis 2.6. um Ra mom 63 | Yenensu WS \Har Shefe 5 ah 2 Hermowthis OSS Ol Ar Munr log. | Mounlic Se aes nnn =| © isesun Thoth ~ Heroofolrs D darn £6. bred es | Sha s'helijs | 106. | Trion j | | Tum Roa | | | Nexer W0.b. | Mexeb Leonlopolikes Men | Saropolis Pash me a Xepshy delopoliles aie Sen, Esneh Jtayr ur Ye Ob ie vl ts part sas | | 45 ff ae Amef Shes Tycopolilés | ed Ust, Sycopolis a | Inubis | ee 136) Saxt, Siout | | Moareoles ey | i ae : AWendes | | Wun Mando F Xe Men Of] Ter ba neb lat } S65. Bi neb lat (Partof) | | Amen, Sebvek | and dior rusin Menelaués Canojous | o.G, | Succession or vile J >e Se, Tonens) | Ontos | | Xnounvd | | Onouphilés sf & Sent neper 2.6. Sebe Ra ba =a) | Oxy rinchilés | <> @ | Wert- - after: | ee | ci =I yards Per | & os ~ aa Talal | Xem Goris amines | a rar >) | Ho U6. | Kenv Las anf \ | Horus = ak uate } Ho FoR es Hebes | Bie jth 73. NOMES Glens Air Phthemphu| ee @ | Suk Wet aoe CF Aye |e Ation BD a EH Jpeh Phisencoiee| @B* locmur =| eG. |» Walle Mb @ Per Wal- : | rey lea P’ta Pie “ | aa Yenes | Prosopies oD 2B) sexem | £6. | Horus uf t ao Sa Ual-| Sarlés x4 ho 2S, a £6 |Weth Sethrovés ER of te ome a 56. [=A ie Shuted aa MW 88 aca Ua &, pesereg | ie a = Ohinites ae] @ jdJeni | ws PM wel se Ka : ge 26 eau | 8-8. | Ame | j | | | : | | | 74, Index lo the names of Gods &e. Aah amef, 103 Stim 115,02 Hepe,24.33,90\ Mesralaneh Pert 1ch Sultek 3% Ahi 24,sh Aurora 93| ter 14) Munt ra 109 Paeb ta bi,s34 Taken 39 Ahiur 182 Aypetter 153 her 11 9. i on Providence 14 Tahur 108 Aht 44 Ba No, Herief 1 81,124 Plhahk 7% Tape 38 Amen-ra 3Bai 25 Heseé II 16\ Pee’ Tasenti /31 Ament 41 Bar = 107, Horus 1% a Ra J, 3\ Tatann 79 pues Bennu 13| Aral 26| Nak 49\ Rannu bh Tatunn 49 Amothelp.30 Bes 120, H’siri_—13| Nebmak'3,49 Ranpu Ms Tet’ 19 Amset 31 Bubast 12,124 Imbotp 30, Nebsyac 19 Renpe 138 Thoth 19 Jnepu 1S Buto 58 loh 44 Nebthetp 149 Saf — iat Thouerts 108 Anka 77 Chem 10 Ipi_ 32, Nef Sap m3 7p M7 Annefer /3| Chnoumis 5 /ri-mher 6 NeferalumBi Sat 148 0,66 Anta shbDaphnx 39 Iseé — ps\Mehema 40 Saki §3 122 em /32 Anubis /§ Demon 4s Isis tN Neith 6,125 Saturn 9 Vati 136 Jnusis 77 Goat 49 Kebuse | Aenthys. 1b Seb, , 122,151 Unnu Il. Jinylu 99 Coodgenuslh Kern 10, Net 5, 1M, 25 Sehek fa Ura 8S Apiam 104 Har 139 Ket = 144 Neleralef 119 W2, Ur hek 134 “Pp 49 Hai 22|Khem 6|Neth 6,125 Sefey ba User 3 Appopis\ ae Hape 68, 137 K neph Net pe 6, 125 Seker 2% Vserma 57 Apt 60 Hapimu 23 Kla,19,56 4 Nilus 23,137 Semulef 34" " 37 Aptera I$ Harhur 1 Mando 24 Muth 127 Sench 135136 Xeb 10 Apu = 15 Harseksi 1y Mate sg Nuh = 98 Serennu WS Xem 10,16 Aset I Hathor 20 Mau 43, b4 Nur b9,5993 Serk 3h ” 132 Jsheru v5, Heavenly } - Mehen 101\ Nupe Snps Set 7, los. Neper 6374 Ast it ae ‘Menki $4 Nut 5 Sheput yh shai 9y Atat Stef’ — 6 Menk sup Auti 102\ Shu 2g Xnuph 5 Alef: 97 Hehes 42 Mendo 24 Osiris 14 Snuf 3 ‘Kans 7 Aten 2 Heke nt Mente 24 Ouro 47 SoKaris 28 Jonsu 7 i 20 Hekatuw MW Mer 37 Paka gi Sok = 44 Xu 5395 Athor)\ ¢2 Hekw WI Meru | Pashtj2,n4 Ste &I 4 Hs 75. bs he eS the SunGod, Helios 1 | Ta governing, Sun | Sve aie guns eye | “os | 0900 sg a: * | a re) ~ hic , . Ra withUreus, | | niginalor, Life . Crocodile god ! | | Ahem, dum the } Crealor 7 Ote juhatl 1e Sod, has tne left fund cone A 5 Amei, ATi Ahem Amen Aa |mur-ef- JSrman xen the husbanel of fis mother. She SIne- | vis, Che bull of- He- ligfolis the m has, evident- lly, aguiluralsound Fate Khem Lord of Janis the bull,the Aus- band | the bearer of Ue | fieavens 78. GODS, Gee | frmon Rallem Xa JWur ef ] | | | | Amen Sum gocl crealiy, | | get ©! | | The (bull) Ausband ¥- a } : fies mother. @ Trenily . or alinily with the } yor ; bo ppl altyibules of a trenily re Pla eo —_ | yl | asit “ Sars | | t ae xen ease li z | er : _- 2 | | ‘ } a |; xem aaih Khem-Sunus j — "| | os eae _ i - | ss dhar xe hem - Horus i ide | aset * == | +2 = i | ee ' ? J | xeb ie 4 | eee Ok | | Aenow Oinen -Khenw i { ¥ps 4 “ || Oey sSs { 4 . —— i ” | mul- neler Goddess mother 1 SAsel- Fsus “ ‘SA muut- neler “ “hy mutany fife guing mother |delermun- live of Ssts dg | WeKkalu |Gsis-Hetaiz - a x u Hear | « = Po§ el - } ut ee ie : I WUE Heku |, Sar e | SSS j eh Hek Wrje of Chnurmni <> | e | Sexet or! Sion epee rgd - belovedo tah- Pasht ‘Goddess = slakiaaae j ts probably, Wepthys A ees ) e tes 79. GOBS, Ei, ‘ \omee Se sclhpes | | At Pah lalgn Pthak the chief iT T Am fielefe imothetef> 30 | a? Ss = mace \| l Is Imhetep| Imothetep I} — Sekerc Lae ayes atitle of | EX pen Phase siris A) PEAS 4 Senticivcle of tre Suns age i —at apparent cHurse. Annunla Hades | fo Aht- Ioh = ig qo Arment: | Goddess Amenta onuall Ahr Ioh JFbnent | Hades = | Toh 1.¥ Atsutey lo il rel A : Jmier leo of Amenhk 1] a sot Toh, (hearkening God) 1} —| Veb Angnk fort of Ament, | 2. = Mes Ra a neh, Bora gf adore = af esis Rijyootaon ws before Osiris H Hi Shefout |\Syphon,the aod oragod- UVeb Arapast “ =< ace P pe ae cult Herreahaenkel Boars head and fel 46 é urt Tnimorial slied lLogods Spt a om soe dee cil aoe ce eeGo esses. F wmmorlz ‘o asc ft- is OV: 7] ie posed tb deipicd comes 8 al: url nettru Un morlal gods shenl Ammentc Dwelling, of A- ign park sees te r E “ Shent Anenta a leopard ficcrct ep + cHehes any shau diving Sars, efiving Gods Demon, Siar oS apj> Apophis 49 Nar Ce Greal\Srrallower — GODS. 85. = | Nie fret | Hovus the dew of fieaver| Athor Aathor, Athor <3 Sa Goddess of S1vuth IG | * User JTL Yiclorcous Sruth ST | Ahi an assislant jovies - oH | léss | lee ae Mau | tightGod 6% ; Gfre-fecacl god gy 4 30 || —_—————_- fe Alar — ; n | fi | Nefer A iinet The Good Alan. | _ a ] J | Alum | Alinu 6s | ! of Ahi gon of Athor Saal eG Ts ae a Hepi. | Aapr 66 x», Num lord ett ap eame partof Alys « s 0 Unis um Nun Sun-gocl 4 | | Jum R “ - % red | Set Sel, the Rules; clevil or Ee Os vw | yeper | Crealer 1 NMeul | Bulo rs bs | Athor | Yenus, Hathor vo ees jaca at xu Ruling Goddess 59 HAZ. | Jo South (eo i a? | ax} Anka |Anucis Apt H tf opolamus Godeless) ae} (ie P with fread of- fuman |--—— ok fair Ge las | Nu pet formament godcless \ | Grete Sone Sh sap + | Jalann| Chief Goddess = |_| Sa | Tri on Hp the eye of Jtomes 62 | 3 | Pr pir ier haa 5 aa x xeper God Creanior 63 ] ¥ i| 5 ———— | | Atur |.Aorth | 86. GODS. ETC. | Alhey | Athor, Hathor, bosiaar ? | Serpent of Wicked ness | | eB eternal q8 a good Serpentr, ; Sti | Sald, Juno aimee i ¢ AK | Yebr Mus li th g We Menfu ge atau! of | — me = pares nemige = oo nw Wehen hename of the Se ura |Goddess Ureus 8s ine Ur carafe nar | Aehent Sock CPiea st ® 01 4 Ma [Sruth , maseuline \aaCE Sma | t Mur ness, borne “LZ nine | Sa i | ye user Ma Sane } i? leat he —=£ } Nati |The lwo Sruths 8 || | a aah(ypames Jlonthly quar - | | cian 103 *S5) Hefor Apzs 90 | J | Set Sy json 105. YG) | taka: [Bates Secnerte gt j ] | Pext |Yoddess Pext 106 { | | | aa | = | | TS | Arles e meriee Aurora gs | ani | | — Bar aal 107 << was. 4 | | 8 oi i ae - iit X¢l Livo ficiae or l F | | Maur Ro Syy phon with Rawhk ; | head, 109 ae | | the Soul ad Ju | Siders mess of- the ne Soul "10 ae 4 | Suns barge gs Suchis i ccc can | Her pret vu Over-Che Goos, ee ! of th «gr7ds ge 4 | Az leru Falher of ieGods SS le a f . ioe gien nh} socalled. 97 |i ee ee Sebek- Suchis Helios 112 | 1 || 2 aE | Aen @? |) Rawnu Mislvess of the supplies of the Gods. ito | “£g i Fire breath o ‘7 ae of Hales ALINIG, ral ; j | | 9Xee Ruling, God us GODS. Heavenly GhiBeas Neith goddess of £.& Serennu Goddess of we. 1s Bacchus, God of jolli- Bes ly. also of death j20 KnoWwledg e | peter Atef Divine Sather ug i rae. ao s 87. Plahk | Pthak as stavvay | 128 ha Pa) "og ma. of the ¢ er of- the ation ‘Ap e coe a Pasht Sd forms of the name of r Ham ‘Pasht or Basht- dalora. {24 Mur ti Mother of the Live Uret jvet Jveith 4 123 Nebt upm mut neler ners Weith, great nother of Gods all. ya desso : Ka ieee SE bates of 1? Wa) Sof braries. age. shioth | s2I Salt Satis j22 a = | ea <____* Satz are — ————__—_a- —_—_— “ << =" | Sat 5 <_< %, te ella 32 | mR Sali aa |neb pet, Satisgreat | aie jiislress of-feaven || oe eee } | ro / | i | | Ssatt Sats, Great Goudess | ¥ A gebt Soihis Great Goddess || Tis | eith ovrer- the ly ye Giving, ype te ed Suir, Suir axu Harmachis ges 88. eS; MERE. al?,c ‘ ebla WNubli Lord of Hee an. The earth Seneb of Eilethya 13s Giver of Lefer hea ili Apophis 123 | eialc/ Apap Aysofehis Sfrearect by i \ on The Genius of the live reg lons 136 Joris The Gentus of &.8. ® } Hercules | BO | | () 07 | R . oe : \| Seneb or ehcp eee “ Hionem| Lady of Silethya | — Pa nev fa She Lord of- the lio H | Wishem yegions, Horus 139 Wat | dady of Reaven | | cos Pa = | B; bh | | | Oa sent vefer Ja the good ® | a= | Sislér, Wepthys 431 — | d | Mefer Aim The good Sum Wale [Lady of Sepep re = d | — —— 162 | air | @ | As | Defer A erie og Seart Sut oro Sere | vo l2elo1-of th "9 | : — regions of the | is \Haphap Jrilus 137 | | | | | j (ae — ; Jefer Atlin yu lai GoodFtin |! #)) 4 /Renpr She yea 138 | Ruler of the live region: | | Rpt G-4eas 1 ¥ q | F Snake head Godcless | JSleh Grealor of yisible be- ria easier 7 ings 134 ets le tints 0’ 3" to 8” Pe ATURE a si RNa y ate Reine la ate eee 3/to4’ 0 ” : “Si hy OMe Cael ct nae ein eee eee Orisa | oo A ROWAICs nic otters sh Oe sie cstele piri OU Ys: BS) Bs. WOU ye crett CCRC casas eed ae 0 6.” can GS, ODBIO ss sar tciee'e, vO cians eet Oi ‘ ae Mss (OOD che ah dee, é hate seals Be oie Se) OF TR! ee 8. Coal and sandy clay......... 0’ 43” BI 4 ¥ bs Me MOOD. oo sais Ste ie ian, Ror a sieiety Ot” ; i TAL EGE pats em rere, 5:3 SwRI beet) 0’ 1’ to 4!’ + ON, OGM ages vale taves ASSN AE, iL a pad 4 BS. Gliale ses. owes ses acess ase 0’ 1% to 4” oP is Codes seh 3" ase nas caps OF 10" 14, Bonytodes «sca baer SORE 4s ORAS No. 3 sometimes falls to 4inches. Like No. 5, it contains some good coal, but with it is not a little bony stuff, and the whole is strongly pyri- tous. Nos. 4, 6 and 12 are hard pyritous clays. Nos. 8 and 10 are sandy, sometimes becoming hard sandstone. Nos. 7 and 9 are fairly good coal, but contain binders and diagonal streaks of sandstone, which make them utterly worthless. Nos. 11 and 14 are bony stuff, but No. 13 is excellent coal. This opening is evidently on the upper division of the bed. The lower division is not exposed. Another opening was run in the Canadian cafion, where entries had been driven in both divisions of the bed. The lower division has five benches, all of which yield coal with much ash. No new features were seen in the upper division. The clay overlying the bed here is full of leaf impressions. A section was obtained in Dillon’s cafion at a deserted opening, just be- low Dillon’s ranch. This is described in the writer’s report+ upon this region, but the measurements are repeated here to show the general struc- ture of the bed. The section is: Upper adivision sees eee s- Rieriielciewiieeriieict: 4! 4" Carbon aceousSDale: cforeciss cine eed pa eee 0’ 4” Ooh noes soe ee pelosi jashelsthe etce seem 2/ 10/7 PHALCY. scree ies Batis gite sti otertie Miiiaiete vccs Beale QO’ 4! OOGb 5205 ee CR eee slapaaes ieteeuyele - 0/10 *U.S. Geographical Survey, west of the 100th Meridian, Vol. iii. Supplement. Now passing through the press. ¢t Loc. cit. p. 275. a ee Gs oe 109 (Stevenson. Clay shale, drab....... sole eiidia afe}a\e!elinfetecenanetads 2! Bit Lower division........ Sie claietaleratiets oat eee aru Coates ence aE Nee te ee RPI aia dace wate ete OAL OLE U1 111 eae ad es Me rae a oP . Si COMPS A SRS Sai ele TE oe ne ade rst 0! 8// Pantin st: areal fs cept os Bie alteteicts peas -— COR SARL Se See) pope ete, oe Sataeielerses aap fd: Gavia cin ciaceie aia ertinideny.e areeu se aeltteiseneh eens peru CON REDE ER DAA AS . een eaistevets 0! 6" The outcrop coal is not altogether promising in appearance, and has a decidedly slaty structure. Some of it was tried on a locomotive, but it burned much like rotten wood. Prospecting entries were driven into the sound coal ata little way below the old opening. The quality improved rapidly as the entries advanced, and a locomotive test of the sound coal proved as satisfactory as that of the crop coal had proved unsatisfactory. Extensive mining operations were begun here in June of 1881. Many prospecting pits were digged north from Dillon’s cafton along the bluff fronting on the plain, but none of these reached sound coal. Fulbrite & Company made an opening in the Dillon coal bed, at, say, a mile and a half north-west from Raton. They mined only the upper division, which has the following structure : RE COG whe ceyomiats ele tiene aos derNe, fom recreate OY ati 2. Sandstone..... Seade Nelavareretcve, csisie eto 0! 02 ” SY (CRBS ERS oe Satstah ays iets Sarees wire DOP Neos a ! ESE”. co ccetesesais «ne Lhissathasest basen See 0’ OL } 4h age La (CRIES SRS OER CTC RICI OE oC aPC Paiogee cc OES mrss Gee Exe DUTD OY sexes agsiane] spoke oa alayaisy scale Wal etoreranstsists 0’ 07,” TS (CQUHIS BL OS, AGRE CREAR EE Tore nice aD a ets The coal of Nos. 1, 3 and 5 is compact, though in part of slaty structure, and is an excellent fuel. The ash is bulky but powdery. No. 7 breaks much like cannel, and in appearance is fully equal to some of the Penn- sylvania cannels which are thought to be good marketable coals. It gives a long quick flame, and yields a bulky, powdery ash. This bench is some- times parted near the middle. The lower division of the bed is not well exposed, but as nearly as can be determined, its thickness is 30 inches near the mouth of this pit. An opening near the mouth of Willow creek cafion showed : te pal a. 2. persistent eel syd syecehcete ie ees OM tear) Pee e PUN Sa 5/122. 3) ola. dyolere wcleitentn mideiesaleencietd — ee COG. « Jarsas PR ee ore a ob ere 0/10 ” Meee TAY GIN = shes wae afc sermon seh ok regetaselie totals gh -— Wey OCs xt 5 mgs cir tid wien ye aiet lett Retiel eat A Od | th (CARGLEESS a FTL aie ee Eee cit SoUOoDD ane oboe _-— Vo MEM Ramco oOOC Oo OOK E EE ane Sasaocod ORs Ga! oly Metin Homing Robin. dodhetasee we eee CG OU cata) sleidc ctesietaiat aieaialee cela aatecatelsiela) sere nO mom a) Stevenson.] 110 [Dec. 2, This also is on the upper division, and the features are very similar to those observed at the Fulbrite opening. At the time of examination, the entry had been driven 79 feet, but sound coal had not been reached as the hillside is very badly slipped. Another opening was run ata little dis- tance further up the cafion. There the lower division is insignificant, and an entry had been driven nearly 60 feet in the upper division, which showed : Ls COG rulomestais stash spy « O16! to'Bi? 2. Sandstone parting......... 0! 1! to 2” DB. COGL imcenae tna eels ce ee ee 4. Clay and sandstone........ 0’ 1’ to 2/7 SABE DS SR Se are ioe pees, eA OMB Bid! tors! a" 6. Bony coal...... Sateen 0! 2’ to 3” Te (OTE BAA oe enrages she ae OLD eel aAuih Han eO Ns abn eats 0! A” to.2!? OS OGGIs 5Satetea Bharath dine als steiae 0! 4// to 6” The quality of the coal varies materially in the several benches. It all burns readily, and yields a powdery ash. No. 7 and 9 are liked for use as domestic fuel. At another opening further up the cafion, the lower divi- sion is worthless, and the mining was done on the upper division, which shows : 1; Coat... Ss niece stn ainsiprd tints ease ee yet 0’ 64” ML UULINO fe. ia tondiete ateleteiniecentte sie Ryan ce rclste -— By HOOMIE Bis bis «moist see’ Hie aot eames ale et Aert : A PAPAL EATON grepoteliavwistelele oiaieieeie telalol kel Jake: See DIP COUR Asc cletin seria oreiree eerie eeees O67 6 oy gga UPR Eni thn yaar: Conoodonccuadcom os ._-— ‘ a MOOGL Aste ee dae x ohne rca aa pene abil ee By OPN ii ores b wes, <0 ido Popaie ishwieisisvelae vie os 9. Oaths cut wate wine Savas on 2S sous NO! a? Unlike the other pits, this shows no good coal, and the whole bed is more or less bony. The last opening examined is at nearly two miles from Raton, and very near the last exposure of the bed in this cafion. No exposure of the rocks, either above or below the bed, was found, but the structure at this opening is so different from that observed at the ether pits, that there is no room for doubting that this is the lower division. The sec- tion is: \ he COWL: = sepminwtaipit cya bies!>'.- OQ! 44// DAOHSIS. cue Bene ise ies Stra 0’ 24’ to 4! & Usa. oscar LAS ey 1/3 '/ to 9’ + 3! to 2! 103” BSNS sda ee a. khip > 38 05 /’ to 8 Ds OO wiesc'stiecwbas Sino (axel 9 ”/ | 1881.3 eee (Stevenson, ments. No. 3 leaves a powdery ash, but it is pyritous. Nos. 2 and 4 vary at its expense. No. 5 is merely a coaly shale. The roof is irregular, and rolls or horsebacks cut out much of the bed. The coal from the Dillon bed is far from being such as is obtained from the standard beds of the Appalachian field, but it is fully equal to that from many beds, which is used as domestic fuel over large areas of our country. That from the openings in Dillon’s caiion, from Fulbrite’s open- ing and from one opening in Willow’s creek cafion is a good domestic fuel, superior indeed to that from the Waynesburg coal bed in Southwest Pennsylvania, which is an important source of supply for an extensive area. The ash does not exceed 15 per cent., barely one-half more than the amount contained in much of the Connellsville coke. This bed will be- come important to the region along the Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé Railroad, which is cut off from the Trinidad bed at Trinidad, by the diffi- cult grade between Trinidad and Raton pass. Another bed, probably coal bed H of the writer’s generalized section, has been mined to some extent near the head of Willow creek canon. The bed was opened somewhat more than a year ago by Mr. Pettigrew, who hauled the coal to Raton. The section at the Pettigrew opening is: MMO SAs stale: a 15} of 30 SHE emncenbateonedad Le Ont2 | 2S Ce en ae ea ngoucaure sus anaes SEOs 3b, CU Sob Ras dedeod cod sean ool’ QeSa tt BRAM YaSMALG, 25:5, afeie avis «a. eisisini oe) OF) 13/7 rp Of LOM. ROA ane crx1 da telny a's ea nanes oe clapare OF 10)"*t0, 8! Ge Saney shale... ss. scccie cuss aie air Oe REET MOOD = Pisa tine ap aiei EA rset eb Oe Sale No. 1 is slaty, and streaks of coal occur in No. 2. The coal from No. 3 is clearly the best found within several miles of Raton. It leaves a some- what bulky ash and contains some pyrites, but it is a strong fuel, and ad- mirable for steaming, as has been proved by tests on locomotives, where it worked better than the Trinidad coal does. It is preferred also for do- mestic purposes. The coal from No. 5 is but little inferior to that from No. 3, and the two benches were mined. No. 7 yields a coal which is hardly equal to that of the other two benches. The bed is somewhat twisted in this mine. A sudden dip was found at a short distance from the mouth of the pit, which continues for somewhat more than ten yards, beyond which the miners did not follow it. The railroad company has opened an extensive mine at a little way fur- ther down the cafion. The measurements there are almost exactly the same as in the Pettigrew opening. Lewis.] 112 : [Dec. 2, On a New Substance resembling Dopplerite from a Peat Bog at Scranton. By Henry Carvill Lewis, Professor ef Mineralogy in the Academy of Nat- ural Sciences of Philadelphia. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 2, 1881.) In the course of an excavation for a new court-house at Scranton, Pa., made last July, a very interesting substance was discovered, specimens of which were sent to the writer at that time for investigation. The excava- tion cut through a peat bog, and it was at the bottom of this bog, some 29 feet from the surface of the ground, that the substance here referred to was found. It appears that formerly there had been a lake or swamp at this place, which with the extension of the town had been filled up. Below eight feet of cinder and other rubbish there is a bed of peat 10-12 feet in thickness. The peat is said to be a good fuel after drying. Beneath the peat is a deposit of ‘swamp muck’’ or carbonaceous mud, which dries to a hard compact gray mass, burning with difficulty. In this “muck” are numerous plant remains and occasional seeds. The whole deposit rests upon glacial till or ‘‘hardpan,’’ and is therefore of post-glacial origin. Scranton is in the glaciated portion of the State, and the peat bog found here is one of the many which owe their origin to glacial causes. These peat bogs have been formed, for the most part, in former swamps or lakes caused by the damming up of streams by ridges of drift deposited at the time of the melting of the glacier. Near the bottom of the Scranton peat bog are irregular veins filled with a black jelly-like substance, elastic to the touch. The veins of this sub- stance, which are confined to the muck above described, vary in width from a mere stain to between two and three inches, and inake all angles with the horizon, being frequently nearly perpendicular. The substance, as thus found, has the following properties: When first taken from the ground it is jelly-like in consistency, breaking with a con- choidal fracture, and having a hardness of less'than 1. Immediately on exposure to the air it becomes tougher and more elastic, resembling India rubber. It may be preserved in this condition if kept in alcohol. The substance is black by reflected light. When a thin slice cut by a knife is examined under the microscope it appears brownish-red by transmitted light, and is nearly homogeneous in character. Occasional seeds occur in this substance as well as in the surranaeae peaty matter. In general appearance they resemble the seeds of certain Cyperacee. Under the microscope their surface is seen to be curiously marked with irregular wavy outlines. Professor J. T. Rothrock has been kind enough to make some sections of these seeds and reports concerning them that they have the characters of spores of one of the higher crypto- gams, probably Marsilia. He states that Marsilia is a bog plant which is found during later geological time, and that the general shape and size of | eae ne ae ee eee ee ee 1881.] 113 [l.ewis. its fruit corresponds with that of the specimens under examination. The outer coat is made up of outwardly pointing prismatic columns, the ex- tremities of which gives the peculiar wavy appearance seen on the surface of these peat seeds. Yet since the interior bag and its contents can bereduced neither to an embryo nor to the interior structure of the Marsilia, it is not possible to assign these seeds definitely to that species. No other recog- nizable organisms have been noticed in the substance here described. The black jelly is tasteless and odorless. If placed in the flame of a Bunsen burner before drying, it burns slowly and without flame. It is almost insoluble in water, alcohol or ether, but is almost completely dis- solved in caustic potash; and from the dark-brown solution thus formed may be precipitated in reddish-brown flocculent masses by the addition of an acid. After exposure to the air until completely dry, the suhstance becomes brittle, and nearly as hard as coal. In this condition it resembles jet or some of the varieties of lignite, and might readily be mistaken for those substances. It acquires a hardness of 2.5, and has the brilliant resinous lustre, and conchoidal fracture of true coal. It has a specific gravity of 1.032. It is jet black in the mass, but in pow- der is dark-brown. It now burns with a clear yellow flame. Soaking in water will not soften it appreciably. In the closed tube it gives off water, and abundance of brown oil and empyreumatic vapors. The latter are in the form of a white smoke which can be lighted at the end of the tube, In solubility it is like the undried substance. Hot alcohol dissolves a small portion, and forms a pale yellow solution. On treatment with caustic potash it dissolves completely, with the exception of an extremely slight residue of impurities. It will dissolve even in the cold. This test serves to distinguish the dried substance from brown coal or lignite, which are but partially soluble in alkalies. A very slight trace of ammonia is given off on heating with caustic potash. By dissolving in a standard solution of alkali and titrating with standard acid, it is found that the substance has an acid reaction. It is therefore either an organic acid or a mixture of such acids. The physical characters of this substance are closely allied to Dopplerite, but its chemical composition, as will be seen from its analysis, prove it to be an undescribed substance. Mr. John M. Stinson, of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, has, at the request of the writer, kindly made the following analysis. The substance was carefully separated from the surrounding earthy material, and dried at 212° F. before analysis. Carbon and hydrogen were de- termined in duplicate, the two determinations closely agreeing: Garbont. 555s aeons ital a eeeeteaes . 28.989 Eby dropem yes apie vt xan Jateeit eg pds iINjtro@enSee ee. DOO tEIIC ae Sic ovale tee eee Oxy renee. Sra scetaia setehePeser ass Scie ce DOLOS IN ce Soon bono cbhc so neeuo! lo steoe 6.400 100. Lewis.] 11 4 Approximate analysis of the dry separated material gave : Volatile matter............. ae saree 72.190 TKO (CATDOM tr. cue ae os oe lan ete eieiete » cleo Lea LO ASD ese Be Pins Sele ie Ciba Ciara ee eee 6.400 100. From this we may deduce the empirical formula C,)H,,0,,. This for- mula would yield the calculated composition : / Oh te oe rr ee eee SRT a 2): € 30.15 TE nV PERNT OS DEON: Mia 8 MD pees 7 coil aw vneee PMNs. a. coees Aste ee ee ener 64.32 . 100. In giving the above formula, itis by no means assumed that it represents a simple mineral substance. It is merely a convenient expression of its composition. It is probable that the substance here described is a com- plex organic acid containing water. The nitrogen may possibly exist as ammonia. The small amount of carbon and the excess of hydrogen dis- tinguish this substance from other organic acids. By the subtraction of NH,O, and one or more parts of H,O from the formula, it may be more closely allied to some of the organic acids which form Humic acid, the formula of which is so variously given by different authors. The determi- nation. of the true formula of the acid here analyzed, can only be determined after the formation of an organic salt with lead or silver. The absence of any exact knowledge concerning the composition of the organic acids ex- isting in humus, as recently shown by Julien,* renders it difficult to express definitely the chemical relations of the substance under discussion. The relation which it bears to its nearest ally, Dopplerite, may best be seen after a review of the facts as yet gathered about that curious mineral. The mineral known by that name, and generally regarded as allied to Humic acid, was first found in a peat-bog near Aussee, Austria, at a depth of 6 to 8 feet below the surface. It was a black gelatinous substance. known by the peat-cutters as ‘‘ Moder-substanz,’’ which after exposure to the air , became at first elastic and afterwards brittle, assuming the lustre of coal. Déppler drew attention to this substance in a paper entitled ‘‘On a re- *Proc. A. A. A.§., 1876 p. 311. ee ee es eT ey eo 1881.] 115 ise markable gelatinous substance discovered in Austria,’’ read before the Vienna Academy in 1849,* and stated that it was nearly insoluble in water, alcohol and ether, but almost entirely dissolved by caustic potash. Having been referred to Haidinger and Schrétter for further examina- tion, it was fully described and named by them a week later. Schrotter + found its composition to be (after drying at 2129 F.): Ceerdasiele's 48.06 or without ash METERS Poe stave 4.93 Cre er etctese 51.63 Oseese ss. 640507 Nc eee 5.34 IN Rave esis 'as 1.03 O+ N... 48.03 SHY cs, 0:86 Haidinger named the substance and described its physical properties. He stated the observation of Lowe that it burned without flame, and that of Ettinghausen that it contained recognizable vegatable organisms. _ In 1858, Giimbel} announced that a substance very similar to Dopplerite occurred in a peat-bed near Berchtesgaden, Bavaria. Like the substance from Scranton, a black jelly-like substance was found as irregular and sometimes nearly vertical veins of varying, but slight thickness, in the lower part of the peat. It was known as Peat-Pitch-Coal. It was very slightly soluble in alcohol, giving ita pale yellow color, but was almost completely soluble in alkali. Unlike the original Dopplerite, it burned with a yellow flame. Giimbel indicated the chemical changes which con- verted wood into peat, and showed that Dopplerite had the same composi- tion as peat, and was in fact a truly homogeneous peat. In 1863, Dopplerite was discovered in a peat-bog at Obburg, Switzer- jand, and was described by Kauffmann, who in an important paper§ showed that it had the same physical properties and chemical composition as the Dopplerite of Aussee. It occurred in a black peat at a depth of 12 to 14 feet, in layers sometimes a foot in thickness. Except in burning without flame, its phys- ical properties were nearly identical with the Scranton substance. The air-dried Dopplerite lost 19.7 per cent. of water at a heat of 110° C., and according to Muhlberg had the following composition : Oe SNS RSET es S/S otek ae Cae 52.2 jae edee Soy. Atco ete ne Ratt tom Re BAO! eat, Us BAe ertoaere eee ee Pee stats aarp 30.1 Ash aaowtee one nea Wajard (Siz orn Siatesiola sre ereentb ee 100. By dissolving in caustic potash, precipitating by acid, and then analyzing the dried precipitate, a similar composition was obtained. Kauffmann *Sitzunsb. d. k. Acad. dad. Wiss. Wien, 1849, Vol. i, p. 259. + Loc. cit. p. 286. { Neues Jahr., f. Min., 1858, p. 278. ¢Jahr., d. k. k. Geol. Reich, Wien. 1865, Vol. xv, p. 283. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 0. PRINTED MARCH 7, 1882. Lewis.] 116 concludes that Dopplerite consists of one or more of the humous acids, and shows that the portion of peat soluble in alkali is identical with Doppler- ite, and that compact peat contains minute black particles of Dopplerite. — Peat is therefore a mixture of Dopplerite with partially decomposed plant remains ; while Dopplerite itself may be regarded as a homogeneous peat = in which all organisms have been decomposed. He shows that in different peats the proportion of Dopplerite, or part soluble in alkali, increases with the age of the peat, while the contrary is the case with mineral coal. Thus while in a recent peat but 25-30 per cent. was soluble, in an old compact peat, the proportion was 77 per cent. On the other hand, the solubility of coal, decreases with its age, as shown in the following table, where the figures represent the degree of solubility in alkali: PNoepplerite) 2425. 2.2 ‘‘Slate coal,’”’ a woody lignite, ’ Diluvial. ISTO Wil! CORE: daidanis nthe ciate S pags Ae Sa ae eros 42 “Pitch coal,’* Upper Miocene...... PRET oN hee 10 a bower. 60> Ps echeecs cette co ere a5 x Bituminous coal, Eocene. .... Me crendeee end se an ee ye 2.3 re Carboniferous)... 4. ost a5. vise ie trace. (AntiTACHe 7c gen Cote ie eae co ste corms ok MN aor Baie 0 He concludes that in the formation of coal from peat, the first step of the process is the formation of Dopplerite, and the second the gradual transformation of the latter into a material less soluble in alkali, and richer in carbon. Several other European localities for Dopplerite have more recently been discovered. A substance resembling, Dopplerite in the peat of Hagnetswyll, St. Gall, Switzerland, mentioned by Deicke,* burns with flame, and is re- _ garded by Kenngott as having characters more nearly approaching those It possibly is more analogous to the sub- of Pyropissite or Melanchyme. stance from Scranton. Dopplerite has not as yet been discovered in America, While the sub=_ stance described in the present paper more nearly resembles Dopplerite than any other known mineral, it differs, as already shown, both in com- position and in its behavior when burning. A distinguishing feature of the Scranton mineral is its very low per- centage of carbon. Dopplerite has almost the precise composition of peat, and peat, as is well known, contains more carbon than is contained in wood. Yet the Scranton mineral contains even less carbon than is con- tained in wood.+ The empirical formula of the Scranton mineral gives | * Neues Jahr. f. Nim., 1858, p. 663. 7 The composition of peat is about: Cc H O+N 61 6 33 The average composition of wood is: Cc H O+N 49.6 6.1 43.1 vy. Coal, its History and Uses. Thorpe, etc., p. 165. Ash. = 100 Ash. 1.2 = 100 117 (Lewis. 1881.] € a larger amount of hydrogen than is expressed in the formulas of any Bere: similar substance. * The first printed notice of this substance was given by Mr. T. Cooper.+ A week later Mr. C. A. Ashburner, contributed to the same Journal the following analysis made by Mr. J. M. Stinson: MTG TAROT ON A .- 66.758 Volatile matter...... Beno etasmia wt a afere, oats 9.826 J 0 (6s Te C(O a 4,012 INGA D a ageie-- nas eA Ae BREE ee .. 19.404 iv 100. Mr. Stinson informs the writer that this analysis was made upon a sample consisting of a mixture of peat, muck, and the jelly-like substance, and that as no attempt was made to separate the latter, the analysis is i not of scientific value. Special interest is attached to the substance here described as being per- i haps an intermediate product between peat and coal. While the quater- y nary lignites illustrate the transformation of wood with coal, this substance c illustrates a similar change from peat. As by the investigations of Kauff- 4 man, it was shown that the formation-of Dopplerite preceded that of any 4 of the varieties of coal, so in the present case we have perhapsa yet earlier r: stage. ( The characters of the Scranton mineral entitle it to a distinctive place S - among the hydrocarbons of natural origin. It has been the custom among mineralogists to regard these substances, as mineral species. In view, | however, of the objection to adding new mineral species whose distinctive . characters are made prominent only by analysis, the writer believes that it would be more advisable to combine those already described under f generic names, and to regard the minerals included in such genera as va- rieties. : In the present case we have to do with a black jelly-like substance derived from vegetable decomposition, which with a different composition and with somewhat different physical properties has been found in similar geological conditions in several parts of Europe. It is therefore suggested that all of these substances be combined under one generic name. The name ‘‘ Phytocollite’ (gutdév, zé/da) signifying “‘plant-jelly,’”? would in- clude all jelly-like substances formed by the decomposition of plant mat- ter. Dopplerite would then be regarded as one of its varieties, the mineral described by Diecke would be another, and the mineral from Scranton yet another. ——s le ee oye * The formula of Dopplerite has been given as: Cis io Oi (Descloiseaux) ; Cio He Os (Dana). + Engineering and Mining Journal, Aug. 13, 1881. , D Fai ta & a ter F ms s ‘ " Pe 4 ae 7 ‘née? tn se PLAN oF ROcKERY To Evi K. PRICE. 1881.] H19 [Price. Rockery at the University of Pennsylvania, built in 1881. By Eli K. Price. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 16, 1881.) The form of the White Oak leaf is used and the rocks so placed, that every one may be seen. They are arranged according to the places where they were found, to show how nature has disposed of them. Section I.—The large upright black stones at the three corners (@) came from the tunnel on Thirtieth Street, near Master, 40 feet below the curb, 50 to 60 below the gravel hill. The quarried stones (0) are from the quarry of Price & Moore, next westward of the Woodlands Cemetery ; those next east (¢) from the quarry of Samuel C. Bunting, Junior, south of Walnut, west of Forty- fourth Street ; those farther east (d) from William P. Supplee’s quarry east of Fifty-third Street, southward of Girard Avenue; those marked (/) from McKinley’s quarry on Rittenhouse Street, near the Wissahickon ; and all the other quarried stones in this section (e and g) are from grounds of Eli K. Price, on both sides of Twenty-ninth and Thirtieth Streets and of Master and Jefferson Streets ; and the residue of this section is covered by transported rubbed rocks from the gravel hills of the same and adjoining grounds, at an elevation of about 100 feet. Section II is wholly covered by white and light-colored rocks, trans- ported and polished, from grounds of George 8. Harris, J. Clothier, L. Dolby and others, on south side of Market Street, from Forty-eighth to Forty-ninth Streets, a space of 480 feet by 246 feet, from a sand and gravel hill of a height of about 100 feet above tide. The large white rocks at the ends of this section lay near together, and show that when transported they came as one rock. Section III.—Letter 7 are stones from the south side of Chestnut Street, extending from Forty-seventh to Forty-eighth Streets, from a gravel and sandy elevation of about 70 feet above tide, from the grounds of the Byvam heirs and others. Section III.—Letter # are stones from both sides of Forty-fifth Street and of Spruce Street, from grounds of Albert 8. Letchworth and others. The elevations were about 90 feet above tide. ; Section IV is wholly covered by stones from the City Almshouse grounds, westward of Thirty-seventh Street, and both sides of Spruce and Thirty-eighth Streets, from gravel about 85 feet above tide.* * These elevations are based upon the following eurb heights, which are.about ten feet lower than the gravel banks had been: PHILADELPHIA, December 8th, 1881. Dear Sir :—The following are the elevations of the curb corners above tide, asked for in your note of 7th inst.:—Jefferson and Twenty-eighth, 96.57 feet: south side of Market and Forty-ninth, 88 feet; south side of Chestnut and Forty- seventh, 64.74 feet ; north side of Spruce and Thirty-eighth, 76 feet, and south side ditto, 75 50 feet; Spruce and Forty-fifth streets, 83.50; Tunnel, Thirtieth and Mas- ter streets, 40.70 to bottom. Yours, &c., SAMUEL L. SMEDLEY, Chief Engineer and Surveyor. ‘ f J *", anes ¢ ~“ 2 hives a ‘ 2 7. é ane / , : , ‘a “are oe ex hE ‘ ; 15 a ra te’ : td aS Price.] 120 [Dee 16, For the taking of the above stones I had, as faras known, the permission of the owners or their representatives, and for them the University of Pennsylvania and citizens owe thanks to the City of Philadelphia, to William Baldwin, Chief Commissioner of Highways, George 8. Harris, Dr. Twaddell, J. Clothier, L. Dolby, Samuel C. Bunting, Jr., Albert S. Letchworth and others, who gave them these valuable objects of curiosity and science without charge. The hunting, hauling and building them into a Rockery has been my occupation, with men and carts taken from my quarry for one day or more of the week, from the beginning of June to the end of December, 1881. The purpose of gathering these rocks has been for their preservation, and convenience of study by professors and students, and all interested in the important questions to which they give rise. What do these rocks say to us here to-day? Plainly they show the minerals they contain. But we go back from these to the period of primary rocks, to the granites and other igneous rocks, whose melting and moving power was fire, and whose disintegrations furnished the material for the stratified rocks deposited by later pervading waters ; and these also again, becoming disintegrated by frost, heat and water, also became modifying and different sources for their last granular depositions in strata. We have here from the quarries gneissic rocks, the first strata of the secondary formation ; and we have the transported rocks, also de- posited by water, consisting of materials that have undergone many changes of stratification and re-stratification as well as of attrition. In the study of these rocks we pass from a time when no life was on this globe into periods since the beginning, spoken of in the first verse of Genesis, wherein all life has been created; and therein perceive the methods of the Creator in the structure of this globe. The transported rocks demand special explanation. We ask to know what are their compositions? What their names? Where were they in the regular order of the geological stratification? Where geographically? How were they torn from their places?’ How transported to where found round our University? How polished? How lifted upon the hills? Had we really a great ‘‘continental glacier’’ to bring them here? Was the world made, peopled, civilized for the repetition of the disaster of the «‘Great Glacier ’’? These are some of the questions for the mineralogists and geologists, in ‘and out of the University, to answer: it is hoped that they may long incite to interesting and useful study. The objects are the oldest, but the questions are of new presentation. Charles E. Hall, of our State Geological Survey, began-to observe some of these rocks in 1875, and has partially answered the above questions, according to his observations and convictions at that time. (See Proceed- ings Amer. Philos. Soc., No. 95, Nov. 1875, p. 633.) He followed Agassiz, Lyell, Geikie, Croll, Dana and Newcomb in placing the south line of the great continental glacier at and below the 40th degree of north latitude, ¥ Yveee ‘ \ 1881,] 121 |Price. and naturally inferred that it was the cause of the deposit here of these transported rocks. In 1878 Professor Cook published his ‘“‘ Report on the Geology of the State of New Jersey,’’ and placed the glacial drift northward, on a line from a point of the Raritan river (lat. 40° 30’), thence N. W. to Den- ‘ville (near the 41°), thence westward and south-westward, to Belvidere on the Delaware (lat. 40° 50/). In 1881 Professor Henry Carvill Lewis, also of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, has traced the southern line of the glacial drift through this State for a distance of about 400 miles. He informs me, in advance of publication, that this line, which is marked by a terminal moraine, starts at a point opposite Belvidere, and passes in a north-west direction over the Kittatinny and Pocono mountains, and across the Lehigh and Susquehanna rivers into Lycoming county, where it ascends the Alleghany Mountains, and eontinues thence in a nearly straight line into Cattaraugus County, N. Y. (lat. 42° 15’). It there curves south- westward and, re-entering Pennsylvania in Warren County, passes south- west through Venango, Butler and Lawrence Counties, until in Beaver County (lat. 40° 50’) it crosses the Ohio State Line. In his ‘‘Essay on the Antiquity and Origin of the Trenton Gravels,”’ _ Mr. Lewis states his belief as to ‘‘the Terminal Moraine’’ which he had explored, which ‘‘ winds over hills and across valleys in such a manner that by no other known agency than a great glacier could it have been produced,”’ p. 17. This is the product, he says, of the last glacial epoch. There is some evidence that in an earlier period a glatier advanced south of that limit. To the north ‘‘the great glacier has left undoubted traces, in the universal covering of unstratified boulder clay or (¢ill, in the smoothed and grooved rocks, the transported boulders, &c.’’ ‘‘ There are many facts which indicate that the ice, even close to its lower terminus, had a thickness of over 1000 feet, which increased northward,’’ pp. 18, 19. Mr. Lewis also speaks of a post-glacial flood, ‘‘at a time when the river [Delaware] was larger than at present,’’ as a ‘‘conclusion warranted by many facts, and as acause of the deposit of the Trenton gravels,”’ p. 19, &e. ; and ‘‘ that the boulders upon its surface were dropped from ice-cakes is, however, probable,’’ p. 23. Did, then, these transported rocks come here by glacial action? If so, at a first or second glacial epoch? By a great glacier or by floated ice? Were they lifted upon the hills by ice or water? Or was the earth sunk when they were brought, and the rocks afterwards lifted by the rising of the earth’s surface? Professor Lewis gives to these transported rocks a transporting cause common to the Philadelphia red gravel and our brick clay, at ‘‘an epoch of submergence as indicated by the elevation of their deposit ;’’ and that ‘‘it is probable that this clay may be assigned to a period when the land stood 150 feet or more below its present level, and Price.] 122 [Dec. 16, when the cold waters from the melting glacier bore ice-rafts which dropped their boulders,’’ pp. 4, 5, 6, 7. It seems apparent that the supposed ice-sheets or glaciers have been greatly magnified by the first-named glacialists, both in tlteir thickness and extent, by reason of their taking the earth as a stable land-mark, whereas it is less stable than the ocean. Great rocks have been taken for boulders, though in situ, because they have been abraided by floating ice- sheets and the rocks they have borne ; rocks supposed to have been trans- ported and wpheaved by glaciers, have been floated downwards by ice rafts or icebergs, and afterwards have been lifted by the rising oscillation of the earth; and mountain sides are supposed to have been scored by great glaciers 6000 or more feet thick, yet the scorings may have been made much lower, and afterwards have been carried upwards to such height by the rising moun- tains. It seems not to be sober philosophy to seek abnormal causes when the ordinary laws of nature may afford the sufficing explanation. A sufficient cause is enough. The mountain tops have been higher and colder, and been since lowered by erosions; their oscillations have been upwards and downwards; the valleys have been raised by the debris of the mountains, and have risen and fallen with the rocks beneath them ; and how frequent are these alternations, and for what beneficent purpose, may be seen in every seam of coal in the carboniferous regions; for each was grown on a plain in the open air, and had the light and heat of the sun, and then sank below the waters, that these might deposit the particles to make the protecting covering rocks for the unknown centuries that followed, when again all were corrugated and lifted to bring them into human reach for man’s uses, in ages when skillful enough to win and apply the coals, the products of the soil, water, air and sun, and the life that God gave to the plants at a remote and momentous era of creation. It becomes us not to unreasonably impeach the goodness of the Creator. It seems, from all we know, not likely that He would destine the fairest portion of this earth, where man has best developed his civilization, to destruction by ice. The physical sciences, as well as those of morality and religion, furnish the proof that there is a limitation of forces that conserve nature, and afford us the foundation of a scientific faith that man’s best home on earth is an abiding one for the race. Yet must science observe all facts and heed all reasonable reasons ; and doing so mankind, it is believed, will gain reassurance that they are held in safety by a Creator who forever conserves His works: Re Re ee re en a ae ——— 1881.] | 123 (Stowell. The Vagus Nerve in the Domestic Cat (Felis domestica). By T. B. Stowell, A.M, Ph.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, July 15, 1881.) The idea of using the cat as the basis of anatomical study is by no means arecent one. Straus-Durckheim’s ‘‘Anatomie du Chat,’’ Dr. B. G, Wilder’s «« Anatomical Uses of the Cat,’’ and other papers published by the same author since 1877, and Mivart’s recent work on ‘The Cat,’’ present the general thought with more or less directness. I am not aware, however, that any one has made a study of the nerves of the cat in their detailed distribution, Having compared the vagus nerve in man, cat, dog, horse, ox, sheep, rabbit and frog, I am satisfied that the cat (Felis domestica) pre- sents advantages over all others as a basis for comparative study. I ac- cordingly submit the accompanying figures and text to aid students who may be disposed to investigate Comparative Neurology. The cat, dog, and rabbit were injected with plaster, as recommended by Prof. Simon H. Gage, of Cornell University, in a paper published in The American Naturalist, vol. xii, p. 717. The figuresare semi-diagrammatic; they were originally drawn toa scale, natural size; for the purpose of giving prominence to certain relations, to ramuli and anastomotic filaments, such modifications have been made as seemed necessary; where a nerve trunk is continuous, with no distinctive characters, it is shortened, e.g., the gastro- cardiac portions of the vagus (Fig. 9). The figure of the stomach is re- duced one-half (Fig. 13). For the sake of simplicity no attempt has been made to reproduce plexuses or the terminal ramification of filaments. The nomenclature used is largely that advocated by Dr. B. G. Wilder, before the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Boston, 1880, in a paper entitled ‘‘ A Partial Revision of the Nomenclature of the Brain,’’ and in a more detailed communication published in Science, March 19, and 26, 1881, entitled ‘‘A partial Revision of Anatomical Nomencla- ture, with especial reference to that of the Brain.’? The simplicity and perspicuity of the nomenclature commend it alike to the lecture-room and the laboratory. [In eases where it was thought that any possible doubt might arise from using the new terminology, the new words are followed by their anthropotomical equivalents. ] The vagus nerve (N. vagus; N, pneumogastricus; Pars vaga; Par vagum; N. ambulatorius; N. sympathicus medius; Eighth pair, pneumogastric branch, Willis; Tenth pair, S6mmering and Vicq-d’Azyr) presents the following marked characters, viz :— General Characters: N. vagus has the most extensive distribution and the longest course of the cranial nerves ; in its cephalic region princi- pal rami are derived from ganglia; it forms by its frequent and complex anastomoses with N. sympathicus numerous plexuses, hence presents in- volved physiological and pathological complications ; its terminal fila- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. Pp. PRINTED MARCH 8, 1882. Stoweil.] 124 . [July 15, ments supply the muscular substance and the mucous membranes of organs ; its development in relation with the development of, notably, the heart and adjacent blood-vessels, and the stomach, renders its distribu- tion somewhat asymmetrical, necessitating special anatomical study of its dextral and sinistral relations, and giving corresponding and distinctive physiological and pathological characters; the relation of this nerve to organic life, to the automatic and the reflex phenomena of respiration, and to the so-called ‘‘inhibitory phenomena’’ gives importance to its study. Special anatomical characters: N. vagus and its rami are dis- tributed to the most important viscera, at least to viscera most intimately related to the functions of organic life, e. g., digestive—pharynx, cesopha- gus, stomach, liver, pancreas, intestines ; e¢rewlatory—heart, pulmonary arteries, pulmonary veins, systemic arteries and veins in the region of the heart ; respiratory—larynx, trachea, bronchi, substance of lung. Special physiological characters: N. vagus is a sensory-motor nerve, having both sensitive and motor fibres; it controls, regulates or modifies the movements and the secretory functions of the organs to which it is distributed, and upon it depend the sensory phenomena which characterize the respective organs. DESCRIPTION: Origin and cervical portion—N. vagus in the cat (Felis domestica) takes its superficial origin from two regions of the medulla: by 12-14 filaments from the ventral border of corpus resti- forme and the depression line between cp. restiforme and the portion of medulla next laterad (Fig. 3, 4),* in a line caudad of (posterior to) the origin-filaments of N. glosso-pharyngeus (ninth pair of cranial nerves), (Fig. 2, 4), from which nerve it is sometimes separated by a small arterial twig of A. cerebellosa inferior ; and by 4-6 filaments imme- diately ventrad in the slight depression line ventrad of oliva and cepha- lad of the origin-filaments of the spinal portion of N. accessorius (Fig. 2. L). The dorsal filaments form a somewhat curved line of superficial origin, measuring 3-4 mm. in caudo-cephalic direction, and presenting its convexity dorsad (Fig. 2. X) ; the cephalic filaments are most ventral and leave the medulla oblongata just caudad of A. cerebellosa inferior—a con- siderable branch of A. basilaris at right angles with the main trunk and * There is some difficulty in establishing satisfactorily the homologies of the medulla. There are reasons for regarding the third nerve tract from the dor- simeson as the homologue of corpus olivarium: this is manifestly not the cp. olivarium of Fosteras given in his ** Practical Physiology ;:” it should be noticed that the cephalic origin-filaments of N. accessorius become apparent in this depression line, while the caudal origin-filaments appear along the depression line ventrad of this tract. The elliptical area (Fig. 1, 3) laterad of ventripyra- mis (anterior pyramid) and the one still dorso-lateral have relations upon which homologies might be based, giving each one the name oliva (corpus Olivarium),. It is not proper in this connection to discuss homologies. I have made this allusion in apology for the indetiniteness of description of the origin-line of N. vagus. Whatever homologies may be established and names assigned, the figures (Fig. 3, 4) designate the relation. . > 1881.] ; 125 [Stowell. given off 4-6 mm. cephalad of union of AA. vertebrales. These filaments unite about 1 mm. peripherad of their superficial origin into six or seven ramuli, which lie ventrad of plexus choroideus lateralis (Fig. 2, Pl. Ch.), and blend in foramen jugulare to form a single flattened nerve trunk, N. vagus. In the passage through the foramen 6 mm. peripherad of its origin, N. vagus is enclosed in common with N. accessorius (XT) in a sheath formed by a tubular prolongation of the dura mater and the arachnoid membrane, where it is also joined by N. glosso-pharyngeus (IX); but the sheath of the united NN. vagus (X) and accessorius (XT) may be readily dissected from that of N. glosso-pharyngeus (IX), which lies ectad and cephalad. Centrad of its foramen of exit—Foramen jugulare, (Foramen lacerum-posterius, Lacerum foramen posterius)—and 35-4 mm. peripherad of medulla oblongata, N. vagus presents a ganglionic enlarge- ment, ganglion jugulare, ganglion of the root. This ganglion is hemi- spherical in form, of a grayish color, and measures nearly 2 mm. in diam- eter; it has relations with NN. facialis, glosso-pharyngeus, accessorius and sympathicus (Fig. 5, J). At G. jugulare, N. vagus is connected by a single twig with the adjacent petrous ganglion of N. glosso-pharyngeus (IX) the ‘‘ganglion of An- dersch’”’ (Fig. 5, Pe.); by a considerable trunk with N. accessorius (Fig. 6, 10); by ramus auricularis (Fig. 5, 2), with N. facialis (VIL), from which ramus, a slender ramulus penetrates the petrous bone and joins a branch of N. facialis; a portion of the ramus continues across N. facialis to the cochlea (Fig. 5, 5), afilament from the auricular branch connects with a ganglionic plexus of N. sympathicus, entad of the gangliform plexus of N. vagus. Plexus gangliformis. The 5 mm. of N. vagus immediately caudad of G. jugulare is involved in a somewhat intricate net-work, which seems to be allied to plexus gangliformis (Fig. 6., Px. gang.); the apposed trunks of NN. glosso-pharyngeus (IX), vagus (X), accessorius (XI) and hypo- glossus (XII), are embraced by interlacing filaments of N. sympathicus, with which nerve they sustain more or less intimate relations, through anastomotic filaments; N. glosso-pharyngeus is ectal in this group, and, together with its root-ganglion—G. Ehrenritteri, which lies upon the ectal surface of G. jugulare, but which does not seem to sustain anatomical re- lations with it—may be dissected from the ental trunk; NN. vagus and accessorius are most intimately related—their separation involving the rupture of interlacing fibre—and apparently constitute a single trunk; entad of this united trunk is N. hypoglossus. At the caudal border of this plexus N. accessorius is directed dorsad to be distributed tothe muscles of the neck, and N. hypoglossus assumes ectal relations, crossing the ectal surface of N. vagus nearly at right angles, and takes its course ventrad, to the muscles of the tongue. As N. hypoglossus crosses N. vagus, it de- taches a filament to G. inferius (Fig. 5, 73). This region marks the origins of two other rami with whose terminal filaments N. vagus sustains inti- mate relations, NN. thyro-hyoideus and descendens noni. ee ee ee “Mie > Chitra Gray. No dermal flap nor marginal bones ; muzzle elongate....Trionyx Geoffr. £7. Suture for postabdominal coarsely serrate. Postabdominal recurved in front... 2.4.02. cateaeme es ss ee Plastomenus Cope. CHELYDRIDA. a. Bridges of plastron wide ; ? caudal vertebre. One row of marginal scuta ; six pairs of scuta of the plastron.........- be Idiochelys Myr. * Paleochelys novemcostatus Geoffr., belongs to this family, but not Pala@o- chelys Myr. ee 1881.] 145 [Cope. One row of marginal scuta ; scuta of plastron? not distinct.............. Hydropelta* Myr i aa. Bridges of plastron very narrow. f. Carapace smooth, not sculptured. Two rows of marginal scuta ; five pairs of scuta of the plastron........... Macrochelys Gray. One row of marginals ; five pairs on plastron............ Chelydra Schw. One row of marginals; four pairs of scuta on plastron. ...- Claudius Cope. 2. Carapace sculptured. One Low, Ol marmin al SCUtas.. a0 40 we cca aes ee ers ......Anostira Leidy. BAENID&. Cope, Annual Report U.S. Geol. Surv. Terrs., 1872 (1873), p. 621. Supramarginal scuta (Riitimeyer) ; no interhumerals.....Platychelys Myr. No supramarginals nor interhumeral scuta...... ab scleieie oe « DEN Mueldy- No supramarginals ; interhumeral scuta present ......Polythorax + Cope. ADOCID 2. Cope, Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1870, p. 559. . Vertebral bones and scuta normal. One intergular scutum entirely separating the gulars ......Adocus Cope. Either two intergulars, or the gulars meeting behind intergular.......... Amphiemys Cope. aa, Vertebral bones wedge-shaped, widening upwards; vertebral ; scuta not wider than the bones. ’ Elements of carpace early coéssified................Homorhophus Cope. EMyYDID&. «a, No Scutal sutures. Surface sculptured....... BDIC OCICS a. COMO GE ....eApholidemys Pom. aa, Scuta including intermarginals and two anals. Hohesof SLERMUM NALOW. scion. iseciis ee el es wes ....Dermatemys Gray. Lobes of sternum wide..... By sed Cao OES mleltclaeicise ria -Agonupluie Cone: aaa, Scuta; two anals, no intermarginals. Surfaces of carapace sculptured; plastron fixed...... Compsemys Leidy. Surfaces of carapace smooth ; plastron fixed; recent Hmydide and the PEMUS ania cme seis oie ere bate tes SG SG De AC ens cIIrrOes ....-Emys Brong.t Posterior lobe of plastron movable ; surface smooth. ...Ptychogaster Pom. Anterior and posterior lobes of piastron movable ; surface smooth........ Dithyrosternum Pict. et Humb. aaaa, Scuta; one anal, no intermarginals. CALA ACE SMLOOUM A .ciessefeeste spare toni ete Rie oy ctaicpetelctaiic'a sequins . Stylemys Leidy. * Eurysternum Wagn,. (Palwomedusa et Acichelys Myv. (fide Rittimeyer) is nearly allied to Hydropelta.) + Possibly one of the Adocide ; see Proceed. Acad. Phila., Oct., 1876, t Gray has distinguished several good genera among cee species on cranial characters. Cope.]} 146 (Dec. 16, ‘TESTUDINID &. a. Two anal scuta. Ten abdominal scuta....... Une vic due cce'e sew e's sells ohm FEU OGnTnEEIEIES aa, One anal scutum, Lower jaw with two cutting edges..........++..+..++.Xerobates Agass. Lower jaw with one cutting edge...... wh thee g od gece cds e LEStUdG Mann RODENTIA. PLESIARCTOMYS BUCCATUS Cope. Two mandibular rami. PLESIARCTOMYS DELICATIOR Leidy. Mandibles of six individuals, some of them accompanied by bones of the skeleton. BUNOTHERIA. T 2 NIODONTA. Additional material gives the following results with regard to the affinities of this sub-order. There are three allied groups represented by the genera Esthonyx, Tillotherium and Calamodon of the American Eo- | cenes, which are equally unlike each other. Zsthonyz, as I long since showed, is related to the existing Hrinaceus ; very nearly indeed, if the dentition alone is considered. Its anterior incisor teeth are unusually developed, and have, as in Hrinaceus, long roots. One pair at least in the lower jaw has enamel on the external face only, and enjoys a considerable period of growth. The genus Tillotherium is (fide Marsh) quite near to Esthonyz. Its molars and premolars are identical in character with those of that genus, the only important difference being found in the incisors. Here, one pair above, and one pair below, are faced with enamel in front only, and grow from persistent pulps as in the Rodentia. This character has been included by Marsh in those he ascribes to his ‘‘order’’ of Tilto- dontia, but as he includes Hsthonyz in that order,* which does not possess the character, it is not very clear on what the supposed order reposes. The rodent character of the incisors is the only one that I know of which dis- tinguishes Tillotherium from the Inesctivora. I have on this account retained the Tillodonta as a sub-order, and referred Esthonyz to the Insecti- vord. - F The Teniodonta agree with the Tillodonta in the possession of a pair of inferior incisors of rodent character, but it adds several remarkable pecu- liaritics. Chief among these is the character of the inferior canines. In the Tillodonta they are either wanting, as in Hrinaceus, according to the . Cuvierian diagnosis, or they are insignificant. In Calamodon they are of . large size, and though not as long-rooted as the second incisors, grow from presistent pulps. They have two enamel faces, the anterior and the posterior, the former like the corresponding face of the rodent incisors. *Report of U.S. G. Survey 40th Parallel, by Clarance King; Vol. i, p. 377. aH NaS i ee ti i i i ee ee 1881.] 147 (Cope, The function of the adult crown is that of a grinding tooth. This charac- ter distinguishes Calamodon as a form as different from Tillotherium, as the latter is from Hsthonyx. There are, however, other characters. The external incisors, wanting in Tillotheriwm, are here largely developed, and though not growing from persistent pulps have but one. an external band- like enamel face. Their function is also that of grinders. The fact that the rodent teeth in the lower jaw are the second incisors, renders it probable that those of the Tillodonta hold the same position in the jaw. This is to be anticipated from the arrangement in Esthonyx, where the second inferior incisors are much larger than the first and third. The superior dentition of the Twniodonta is yet unknown. CALAMODON SIMPLEX Cope. Report Vertebrate Foss., New Mexico, U. 8. Geog. Surv. W. of 100th Mer. 1874, p.5. Report of do. Capt. G. M. Wheeler, rv, ii, p. 166. A nearly complete mandible of this species was found by Mr. Wortman, besides a series of unworn molar and canine teeth of a second individua}, and fragments of some others. These furnish the correct dental formula as far as they go, as follows: I. 3; C.1; M. 5. It appears that I correctly referred the long rodent teeth to the lower incisior series, but that the truncate two banded teeth so characteristic of the sub-order, are canines and not incisors, and that they belong to the lower as well as probably to the upper jaw. The characters of the incisors are very peculiar. The first are small with short subcylindric crowns, and conic roots. The second incisors have been described ; as in C. arcamenus they have a horizontal shoulder posterior to the base of the cutting portion. The third incisors increase in diameter upwards, and have a triangular section. The largest side of the triangle is interior, and the shortest the posterior, and neither possess any enamel. The anterior or enamel faced side is slightly convex. The grinding face is transverse and is in the plane of the corresponding face of the canine. The long diameter of the crown of the canine is at right angles to the anterior face of the third incisor, and diagonal to the long axis of the mandibular ramus. This, with the peculiarities of the other incisors, gives an irregular appearance to the anterior dentition. The five molars are very similar in character, and even those with un- worn crowns do not present any distinction into premolars and true molars. The enamel covers the summit of the crown, but on wearing, it is soon reduced to a cylindrical sheath. Further wear brings the grinding surface to the anterior and posterior surfaces which are covered with cementum instead of enamel. INSECTIVORA. EsTHONYX BURMEISTERI Cope. Report Vertebrate Foss., New Mexico, 1874, p. 7. Report U.S. G. G. Surv. W. of 100th Mer. G. M. Wheeler, rv, ii, p. 156, pl. x1, fig. 26. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. s. PRINTED MARCH 11, 1882. = - Sa See pidk: Fa Bye PF, ube gee eee ae 6 Cope.) 148 | Dec. 16, Two fractured crania exhibit the entire dentition of this species, and give the Benege characters satisfactorily. The dental formula is, I. 2; C. 4; P-m. somewhat Paoieiahieh’ The second incisor is as robust as the first, but the crown is shorter. The second premolar has one external and one in- ternal lobe, in the third (fourth) premolar these lobes are much enlarged, and the tooth is transverse. The true molars have two external cusps, which are flattened, close together, and well within the margin of the base of the crown. There is one internal lobe and a strong posterior ledge, as in the opossums. Of the inferior incisors, the median is large and half gliriform, while the first and third are small. The inferior, like the superior canines, are large. The first and second (third) premolars have no internal lobes, but the second (third) has a heel. The fourth is more or less like the first true molar. The specimens show that my original determinations of the incisors based on loose teeth were correct. They also show that this genus is not far removed from the more rodent-like genus Anchippodus of Leidy. There are several species of the genus, which | define as follows 3 M. 3. The first superior incisor is large, 4nd the crown is I. Fourth inferior premolar like first true molar. Larger ; third superior premolar larger ; fourth premolar with the external Cusp Diop ate:st« se ho sh eee .0026 be ANTELOPOSTCLION |... ncie nctecr -0042 M. Il. PGS Ba teie ache a te ay aie ee .00388 Depth of ramus at P-m.I....... We aie ison stele sisted eee ears .0060 + es Ge Eo oa he siete eso, og eae ee atts es .0068 ANAPTOMORPHUS HOMUNCULUS Cope, American Naturalist, 1882, Jan. (Dec. 30th, 1881), p. 73. The genus Anaptomorphus was characterized by me in 1872,* from-a mandibular ramus which exhibited the alveoli of all the teeth, three of them occupied by the teeth; viz.: the P-m. iv, and the M. iand M. ii. From the specimen the inferior dental formula was ascertained to be I. 2 ; C.1; P-m.2; M. 3. The Big-Horn collection contains a nearly entire cranium of what is probably a species of the same genus. From it the superior dentition, exclusive of the incisors, is determined to be: C.1; P-m. 2; M.3. The premaxillary bones are mostly broken off, but a part of the alveolus of the external incisor of one side remains. The indications are that the external incisor was a small tooth, not exceeding the canine in size ; and it was situated close to the latter. The canine is also small, and its simple crown is not more prominent than those of the premolars. The latter are separated from it by a very short diastema. The long diameter of their crowns is transverse to the long axis of the * Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1872, p. 554. Paleontological Bulletin, No. 8, p. 1, Oct. 12, 1872. 4 eee EE a , >. 1881] 153 [Cope. jaw ; and each one consists of a larger external, and smaller internal cusp. e molars are also wider than long, and s rt two external an The tru 1 1 der than long 1 support two ext 1 and only one internal cusps. The orbits are large and are entirely enclosed behind. The frontal bone does not send inwards to the alisphenoid a lamina to separate the orbit from the temporal fossa, as is seen in Tuvsius. There is no sagittal crest, but the temporal ridges are distinct. The occipital region protrudes beyond the foramen magnum, or at least beyond the paroccipital process, which is preserved, the condyles being lost. The otic bulla is large, extending anteriorly to the glenoid cavity. The pterygoid fossa is large, the external pterygoid ala being well developed, and extending well upon the extero- anterior side of the bulla, as in 7arsius. As in that genus, the foramen ovale is situated on the external side of the bulla, just above the base of the external pterygoid ala. The carotid foramen, as I suppose it to be, is situated at the apex of the bulla, The lachrymal foramen is situated anterior to, and outside of the orbit as in Lemuride generally. The cast of the anterior part of the left cerebral hemisphere is exposed. This projects as far anteriorly as the middle of the orbits, leaving but little room for the olfactory lobes. The relations of the latter as well as of other parts of the brain will be examined ata future time. The part exposed does not display fissures, and gentle undulations represent con- volutions. The characters of this genus now known, warrant us in thinking it one of the most interesting of Eocene Mammalia. Two special characters confirm the reference to the Lemuride which its physiognomy suggests. These are, the external position of the lachrymal foramen, and the un- ossified symphysis mandibuli. Among Lemurida, its dental formula agrees only with the Jndrisinw, which have, like Anaptomorphus, two premolars in each jaw. But no known Lemuride possess interior lobes and cusps of all the premolars, so that in this respect, as in the number of its teeth, this genus resembles the higher monkeys, the Stmiide and Hominida,* more than any existing member of the family. Of these two groups the resemblance is to the Hominide in the small size of the canine teeth. It has, however, a number of resemblances to Tarsius which is perhaps its nearest ally among the lemurs, although that genus has three premolars. One of these points is the anterior extension of the otic bulls, which is extensively overrun by the external pterygoid ala. A consequence of this arrangement is the external position of the foramen ovale, just as is seen in Zursius. Another point is the probably inferior position of the foramen ovale. Though this part is broken away in the cranium of Anapto- morphus homunculus, the paroccipital process is preserved, and has the *In an early description of Anaptomorphus, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1873, the types make me say “this genus * * might be referred decidedly to the Le- muride, were it not for the unossified symphysis.” Itis scarcely necessary to state that Simiid@e should be read in place of Lemuride. Cope.) 154 [Dece. 16, position seen in Twrsius, as distinguished from the Indrisine, Lemurina, Galagine, etc, In this it also resembles the true Qvadrumana. When we remember that the lower Quadrumana, the Hapalide and the Cebide, have three premolar teeth, the resemblance to the higher mem- bers of that order is more evident. The brain and its hemispheres are not at all smaller than those of the Tarsius, or of the typical lemurs of the present period. This is important in view of the very small brains of the flesh-eating and ungulate Mammalia of the Eocene period so far as yet known. In conclusion, there is no doubt, but that the genus Anapto- morphus is the most simian lemur yet discovered, and probably represents the family from which the true monkeys and men were derived. Its dis- covery is an important addition to our knowledge of the phylogeny of man. Char. specif. The specimen is distorted by pressure, but its form is normally nearly round, when viewed from above or below. The extremity of the muzzle is broken away, but the alveolus of the external incisor in- dicates that it is short, and not prolonged as in Tarsius spectrum. The mandibular ramus, already described, proves the same thing. The orbits are large, but not so much so as in Tarsus spectrum ; their long diameter equals the width of the jaws at the last superior molar teeth inclusive. The supra-orbital borders project a little above the level of the frontal bone, which is concave between their median and anterior parts. The cranium is wide at the postorbital region, in great contrast to its form in the Adapide, resembling the Necrolemur antiquus Filh. in this respect. The postfrontal processes are wide at the basal portion, and flat. From their posterior border the temporal ridges take their origin. These converge posteriorly and probably unite near the lambdoidal suture, but this part of the skull is injured. The anterior lobes of the cerebral hemispheres are indicated externally by a low boss on each frontal bone. The paroccipital process is short and wide at the base, and it is directed downwards and forwards. The alisphenoid descends so as to form a strong wall on the anterior external side of the otic bulla. This is also the case in Tarsius spectrum, but in the extinct species the descending ala is more robust, and has a thickened margin. On the latter the external pterygoid ala rests by smooth contact of its thickened superior edge. This ala is twice as prominent as the internal pterygoid ala. The posterior nareal opening is not wide, and its anterior border is parallel with the posterior border of the last superior molar teeth. The palate is wide, and its dental borders form a regular arcade as in man, being quite different from the form usual in monkeys and lemurs, including Tarsivs. Perhaps the form is most like that of Microrhynchus laniger. The proximal parts of the malar bone are prominent, and overhang the maxillary border, as in Tarsius. The foramina ovale and lachrymale are rather large. There are two infraorbital canals, lying beside each other, and issuing by two foramina externa. The external appearance justified this conclusion, but the fact —s ee + See SP eared Seo per EE SS 1881.) 155 [Cope. was demonstrated when I accidentally broke away the anterior border of one of the orbits. This displayed the two canals filled with matrix their en- tire length. The anterior foramen externum is anterior to and above the posterior, and both are above the first (third) premolar tooth. The lachrymal foramen is above the space between that tooth and the canine. The crown of the canine tooth is a cone with a very oblique base, and a convex anterior face. The base rises behind, and the posterior face has on the median line a low angular edge. The internal cone of the third (first) premolar is not so prominent as that of the second, though large. The external cusps of both premolars rise directly from the external base. They are flattened cones, with anterior and posterior cutting edges. The crowns are a little contracted at the middle, so as to be narrower than the inner lobe of the tooth, which is narrower than the external portion. Both premolars have delicate anterior, posterior and external cingula. The ex- ternal cusps of the true molars rise directly from the external base, and like those of the premolars, have a regularly lenticular section. At the internal base of each one is a small intermediate tubercle, which is con- nected by an angular ridge with the single internal cusps. There are delicate anterior, posterior, and external cingula, but no internal. The posterior cingulum shows a trace of enlargement at its inner part, which is well marked on the second molar, but it is not as prominent as in many Creodont genera. The posterior external cusp of the last true molar is reduced in size. Taking the molars together, the first true molar is the largest, and they diminish in size both anteriorly and posteriorly. The third true molar is a little smaller than the first (third) premolar. Enamel smooth. Measurements. M. Length of cranium to occipital prominence above par- occipital process, and minus premaxillary bone. . .0280 Total width at posterior border of orbit, below........ .0240 Length of palate from front of canine tooth.......... .0116 Width of palate and peunltimate molars.............. .0125 Length of superior molar series................ sisispe et OOSD sf ce true molars..... mins ataisioie ey cckahey <\ofate .0060 anteroposterior. ...... .0018 \ aamcti We pemapeacecHen Aiisue, anteroposterior. ...... .0020 transverse...... Feodce sluee Diameters of crown of canine ; Diameters crown of P-m. iii, ; ) rP : anteroposterior. ...... .0020 Diameters crown of P-m. iv, ; transverse........ sia ée 10085 : .. ¢C anteroposterior...........-.... eee. 0032 re ; tTANSVEYSE. 2.2 cece seen ecoceces .++- 0040 : ; sss ¢ anteroposteriOr.....2---..e-eeeee . .0016 ER ; HTANSVETBE. oo cece es see cswes dvese a00R8 : bab GANILETOPISUETION cys oa='ni2ie]- = el ore .0110 ee EO Ga ; vertical (? depressed)..... eA ise OLS Interorbital width (least)..... a Ae Teer rie sasdaeeae eUOOO PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. T. PRINTED MARCH 13, 1882. Cope.] 1 56 [Dec. 16, The Anaptomorphus homunculus was nocturnal in its habits, and its food was like that.of the smaller lemurs of Madagascar and the Malaysian islands. Its size isa little less than that of the Zarsius spectrum. The typical specimen was found by Mr. J. L. Wortman in a calcareous nodule in the Wasatch formation of the Big-Horn basin, Wyoming Territory. CREODONTA. Shortly after the publication of my arrangement of the Creodonta in 1880*, I obtained a good deal of additional material, which enabled me to improve it in severai respects. A number of genera have been added, and the characters which distinguish the Miacide and Oxyenide have been more fully brought out. The Miacide differ from all other families in having the fourth superior premolar sectorial as in the true Carnivora, while the true molars are tubercular. In Oxyena, the fourth superior pre- molar displays no indication of sectorial structure, the first true molar assuming that character. In Stypolophus and allies, the second superior true molar is more or less sectorial, and the first true molar and even the fourth premolar in some of the genera, develop something of the same character. But there is every gradation between the triangular Didelphys- like, and the sub-sectorial Pterodon-like forms of the superior molars, in this group of genera. : The glenoid cavity of the squamosal bone presents differences in the various genera of this sub-order. In Arctocyonide (fide De Blainville), Oxyenide, and Mesonychide, it is bounded by a transverse crest anteriorly, as well as by the postglenoid posteriorly, while in the Leptictid@ it is plane and open anteriorly. In Amblyctonide@ its condition is unknown. In existing Carnivora this character is not very constant as a family defini- tion; it is best marked in the Felid@, and least marked in the Canida@. Nevertheless there is a group of genera allied to the Oryenide, which are very marsupial in character, which have been called the Leptictide, and which differ so far as known from Ozyena in the absence of the preglenoid crest. I suspect that these forms constitute a family by themselves, and for the present, until our knowledge of them is fuller, I define it by this character. The definitions of the families will then be as follows : I. Ankle-joint plane transversely, or nearly so. True molars above and below, tubercular ; last superior not transverse.... Arctocyonide. Superior true molars, tubercular; last superior premolar sectorial ; first inferior molar ‘‘tubercular sectorial’”’... ........ a's cia (a,e 0 aims DROCRO. Superior last molar transverse ; inferior molars tubercular-sectorial or with reduced anterior cusp ; no preglenoid crest...............Leptictida. Last superior molar trenchant, transverse ; first superior true molar sec- torial ; inferior true molars tubercular-sectorial ; a preglenoid crest... Oxyaenida. *Proceedings Amer. Philos. Society, p. 76. | a ee ee eS eS em or lated 1881.] 15% [Cope. Last superior molar longitudinal ; inferior true molars without developed BEctoniall WlaAd Ses cro cetelotatetate atone: cteler seictensyale, eve\ahe oleh alin eteyici=Ns Amblyctonide. If. Ankle-joint tongued and grooved, or trochlear. Molar teeth in both jaws consisting of conic tubercles and heels ; none sectorial ; a preglenoid crest........ Bare tnay aie eicys eave .....Mesonychida. I now give the characters of the genera. All these are derived from examination of typical specimens. The opportunity of doing this 1 owe to the kindness of Messrs. Leidy, Gervais, Gaudry, Filhol, and Lemoine. ARCTOCYONID A. Premolars, ¢ ; the first inferior one-rooted ; the last inferior well developed ; . Arctocyon Bly. Premolars below, 4, the first two-rooted, the last truc molar much reduced ; Gide WiemOimeyy.tt. < eve. seiaieceriel a tree Pen Sear atetok hee Hyodectes Cope. Premolars below, 3, first two-rooted ; true molars normal...............- Heteroborus Cope. MIAcID&. Inferior tubercular molars two, premolars four............+- Miacis Cope. Inferior tubercular molars one, premolars four........ ..Didymictis Cope. LEPTICTIDA. I. Superior molars sub-equilateral, without cutting heel posteriorly. a. Fourth inferior true molar like the true molars, with three anterior cusps. f. Third superior premolar with internal cusp; anterior cusp of in- ferior molars small, median. Third premolar with one external and one internal cusps. Mesodectes Cope. Third premolar with two external and one internal cusps. ...Zetops Leidy. #8. Third superior premolar without internal cusps ; anterior cusps of inferior molars present. Cusps of superior molars marginal ; two superior incisors ; Leptictis Leidy. Cusps of superior molars median in position ; anterior cusp of inferior THOIMES Well’ GEVELOPEO is < ) can tatte ss qnteus + was s ...-Peratherium Aym. £22. Anterior cusps of inferior molars wanting. Fourth inferior premolar like true molars............ ....Diacodon Cope. aa, Fourth inferior premolar different from true molars in a simpler constitution. Last inferior molar tubercular ; cusps of other true molars well developed; three inferior premolars.............. RR n oiapts ecetareg Lipodectes Cope. Inferior true molars alike, with anterior inner cusps little developed ; three LEM OLAS! (2) |store siclel eevetals enc ofuivomesl eer eno he ......Zriisodon Cope. Inferior true molars alike, with cusps well developed ; four premolars.... Deltatherium Cope. Cope.] 158 [Dec. 16, II. One or more superior molars, with the external heel produced into a blade. a, Molars 4—38; three last inferior tubercular sectorial. Premolars robust, conic............. 19 eink a tial? Aina Quercitherium Filh. Premolars compressed ; the fourth superior with a conic cusp and heel externally..... Ne aera ach eS sicya ots Ryetaes sereceseeee. Stypolophus Cope. Premolars compressed ; fourth superior with a simple blade externally... Proviverra Riitim. Oxy 2 NID &. I. Inferior molars without interna] tubercles. Molars, 4 $; three sectorials in the lower jaw...... oe seeeePterodon Biv. II. Inferior molars with internal cusps. a. Posterior heel of one or more superior molars elongate and trench- ant. Last inferior molar truly sectorial, without internal tubercle; second, tADereMlan-SECLOLIAL =: c10.-.0 ee orarolelols sianiee oie ies ......Protopsalis Cope. Molars, + 3; two last inferior molars tubercular-sectorial. .. Oxyena Cope. AMBLYCTONID&. Fourth inferior premolar with a broad heel supporting tubercles; an anterior and no internal tubercles......... oeeee..Amblyctonus Cope. Inferior molars with tubercular heel, an anterior and an internal tubercle. Periptychus Cope. Dental formula below, 3, 1, 3, 3. Fourth inferior premolar with a cutting edge on the heel; both internal and anterior tubercles.......... = Paleonyctis Blv. MESONYCHID 2. a. Inferior molars seven ; Cones of inferior and superior molars simple.............. «+ 2+. Mesonyz. Cones of last two inferior molars with lateral cusps..............Dissacus. aa. Inferior molars ? six. Internal lobes of penultimate superior molar v-shaped..... Sarcothraustes. aa. Inferior molars five. Inferior molars with strong anterior lobe.................... Patriofelis.* MIACIS CANAVuS Cope. Bulletin U. 8. Geol. Survey, Terrs., 1881, p. 189. One mandible. . MIACIS BREVIROSTRIS Cope, loc. cit. p. 190. Parts of four mandibles. DipYMICTIS DAWKINSIANUS Cope, l. c., p. 191. Six mandibular rami more or less complete. Individuals of the genus Didymictis are abundant in the Wasatch beds * Of uncertain reference to this family. = a Pee ae 1881.] 159 [Cope. of the Big-Horn, and a good many of them do not coincide well in characters with the species already described. I define them as follows, premising that with other parts of the skeleton some changes may be found to be necessary. The large D. altidens was not obtained by Mr. Wortman in the Big-Horn country. I. Inferior tubercular molar oval in outline, with a heel. Length true molars .010 ; last three premolars .0135 ; last molar narrow. . D. dawkinsianus. Length true molars .016—.018; last three premolars .028—.030; last INOMAT NATTOW «aye cinis cfaiee satrtst stalaiavetarcter Sartionarsicister var acreraye D. leptomylus. Length true molars .019—.020; last three premolars .036; last molar OWE SSG pce toe Bocon BSE OO RAO OCC ag0qnse4e oeee.-D. protenus. Length true molars .025 ; last three premolars .035 ; last molar short..... D. altidens. II. Inferior tubercular molar short, subquadrate in outline. Length true molars .011 ; depth of ramus at sectoria] .010......... = cents D. massetericus. Length true molars .018 ; depth of ramus at sectorial .017....D. cwrtidens. DIDYMICTIS LEPTOMYLUS Cope. American Naturalist, 1880, p. 908. The specimens which I refer at present to this species belong to two varieties, which may perhaps be specifically distinct ; but this cannot be demonstrated at present. They differ in dimensions only. Thus the true molars of the type, which comes from the Big-Horn beds, measure M. .016 in length. Five specimens from the Big-Horn basin agree in hay- ing this dimension .018. The entire inferior molar series is only a little shorter than that of the smalier variety of the D. protenus from New Mexico (See my report to Capt. Wheeler, plate xxxrx). DIDYMICTUS PROTENUS Cope. Jaws more or less complete, of six individuals, are referable to this species. They agree closely in measurements and belong to the larger variety of the species figured on plate xxxrx of the report to Capt. Wheeler. DipyYMIcTIS MASSETERICUS, Sp. nov. This species is intermediate in size between the D. leptomylus and the D. dawkinsianus, and is characterized by the peculiar form of its tubercular molar, and the deeply excavated masseteric fossa. It appears to have been . a rare species, as only one mandibular ramus was found by Mr. Wortman. This is broken off in front of the fourth premolar, and supports the last true molar teeth. The tubercular molar is subquadrate in form, and consists of three low tubercles in front, and a wide heel behind, which has an elevated posterior border. The tubercular-sectorial has a short and narrow heel. Its anterior cusps are not very acute, and the two internal are equal, and a good deal Cope.] : 160 [ Dec. 16, shorter than the external. The fourth premolar is relatively shorter than in any other species of the genus, and the posterior marginal lobe is a mere thickening of the edge of the heel. There is a low anterior basal tubercle. The enamel is smooth. The ramus is compressed and not deep. The angle is prominent, and is not inflected ; it does not extend so far posteriorly as the posterior border | of the condyle. The inferior border of the masseteric fossa is an angular line, without abrupt excavation, but the face of the fossa descends rapidly. The anterior border of the fossa is abrupt and is formed by the usual sub- vertical ridge. Measurements. M. Length between P-m. IV, and condyle inclusive...... 0520 «* of posterior three molars..- .. cc. << elstetets .0170 wisisi= .0120 : es ae SeCtOrial On. DASer. «simi kis siereui cio © Ban Wile Width fe In, fronts ees sacs Sash aCe aie sce mnie ta Depth of ramus’ at sectorial.....4..ccmcss-secs0s Meet O17 Icrops BicusPis Cope. Bull. U. 8. Geolog. Surv., Terrs. 1881, p. 192. This mammal was founded on a skull from the Wind River region. It is now represented by a mandibular ramus. The form of the fourth premolar being unknown, its reference to this species is provisional only. It may be remotely allied to Stypolophus, but the anterior inner cusp of the molars is smalland does not reach the inner side of the crown, and the an- terior external cusp is but little larger than the second anterior inner. The two cusps last named stand opposite to each other, and their apices are only separated from each other by an open notch. They, with the first anterior inner (here median), form a transverse narrow triangle. The posterior part of the crown is rather large and, though lower than the anterior part, — —~ — i a ii i i i 1881.] 161 [Cope. is absolutely quite elevated above the alveolar border. Its summit presents a V externally, and there is a small posterior median angle. In the last true molar this angle is a little more prominent than in the others, and rises into a cusp. The external bases of the crowns are protuberant, but there are no cingula. Enamel smooth. The ramus is rather compressed, and the masseteric fossa is well marked, and is bounded anteriorly by a prominent rib. Measurements. M. Length of true molars...... rues Sect ee eae .0100 anteroposterior......---. Miatot otha ict .0035 Diameters M. III VELLIGAIs crepencini stele ss, =1a ovate tevatists srerstoeee Ooo CANS VCTSES 5c crerciatyet res) ier ttol ova 008 F anterOposterior..........-.+.« FICO COO TO -0085 EO ; CLANISVETSE to soya cele oreteiers ole oo oncnete te .0028 Wepthiot ramus atiMis We a= crenpamere were ce iateyses sletats trees OOO This species is smaller in all dimensions than L didelphoides, and the crowns of the molar teeth are shorter and more elevated than in that species. DELTATHERIUM ABSAROK& Cope. American Naturalist, 1881, p. 669. A small species, represented by an imperfect cranium and lower jaw with nearly complete dentition. STYPOLOPHUS ACULEATUS Cope. Several fragmentary mandibles nearly coincide in measurements with this species. The molars are .0240 in length, and the ramus is .0140 in depth. The only difference in the measurements is that the true molars measure .0250 in S. aculeatus. The latter is, however, a species of the Bridger epoch, so that further comparison will be necessary before identi- fication is made. STYPOLOPHUS WHITI4, sp. nov. Stypolophus strenwus Cope. Bulletin U. S. Geol. Survey, v1, 192; not of Report Capt. Wheeler, vol. rv, pt. ii. The greater part of the skeleton, with skull and dentition of this species, were brought from the Big-Horn by Mr. Wortman. A part of a mandible of a second individual was also found. The species is, however, primarily based on a specimen from the Wind river. This is represented by a right mandibular ramus which supports all the molar teeth, and displays the alveolus of the canine, and lacks all posterior to the coronoid process ; also by a portion of the frontal bone, two vertebra, fragments of scapula, humerus, ulna, radius, ilium, and tibia, and the greater part of both tarsi. They represent a species larger than the Virginian opossum, and inter- mediate between the S. brevicalearatus and S. strenwus in proportions. It has not the rudimental heels of the molars of the former species, nor the robustness of the latter. The inferior outline of the mandible is gently curved from the canine Cope. ] 162 (Dee. 16, to below the last molar. The anterior border of the masseteric fossa is well marked, but not the inferior border. The ramus is compressed and deep. The canines have stout roots and narrow curved crowns. The first premo- lar is separated by a short space from the canine and by a longer one from the second premolar. It has either a single compressed root or two roots confluent within the alveolus. The crown is truncated obliquely behind. The second premolar is two-rooted and the crown is elevated anteriorly and depressed posteriorly. The third premolar is more symmetrical, but the heel is produced. It is narrow and keeled medially. The fourth pre- molar is abruptly larger than the third. Its crown is simple, except a low tubercle at the anterior base and a short trenchant heel at the posterior base. Of the three tubercular-sectorials the first is the smaller. The heels of all three are rather narrowed and elongate. Their margin is raised all round, inclosing a basin ; a notch in the external margin cuts its anterior part into a tubercle. The two internal tubercles are rather sid, and are considerably shorter than the external cusp. Measurements. M. Length from canine to end of last molar..........--... .060 - HK vi first true molar..... nae oe cane Bi e BH a6 BECONAIPLEMOlales eles eee .015 “< ».of-base of fourth premolar. oo. 3.0252 bac veleome QO Hlevation.of fourth premolars 5: . heer een ee .015 anteroposterior.........-. Soe A Sedciae -028 Diameters M. I {PANSVeCISE sacs seers EE er Aloo Werticalin soe cweiewe ss oe se we aie eee .012 Diameters P-m. OT | severe esses 080 | It is probable that this species was about the size of an ox. CoRYPHODON ANAX, Sp. NOV. Mr. Wortman sends me a number of teetlx of probably two individuals, which exceed in size those of any species of Coryphodon yet known, and differ in certain details of form from all of them. The specimens consist of incisors, premolars and molars of both jaws of one animal, and an in- ferior canine, which from its separate wrapping, I suppose to have been derived from a different locality. j The incisors and premolars have the form usual in species of the genus, differing only in their large size. The same may be said of the premolars, A well preserved superior true molar is probably the third. It has the form usual in the genus, but exhibits two peculiarities. The posterior transverse crest is divided more deeply than usual by a deep notch which a ——- 1881.] 169 [Cope. enters it from the transverse valley. The external portion is the shorter, and exhibits the peculiarity of being connected with external part of the anterior transverse crest. It is as closely connected with this crest, as it is with the internal portion of the posterior crest. The externa] connec- tion does not exist in the other species of the genus, where the two crests are separated at their outer extremities by a deep valley. The posterior basal cingulum is obsolete, while the anterior is well developed. The enamel of this tooth where not worn, is wrinkled. The posterior part of the last inferior molar is characteristic. The posterior transverse crest is short and very oblique, its inner extremity striking the posterior margin near the middle. Here it is elevated into a cusp, which rises above the surrounding parts in a characteristic manner. There is no ledge round its posterior base, but the border expands out- wards at the base of the true crest. The additional inner marginal tubercle is low and compressed as in G lobatus. A second inferior true molar is normal, with well developed anterior marginal ridge. The in- ferior canine mentioned is of large proportions, exceeding by one-half the dimensions of the inferior canine of C. lobatus. Its crown is curved outwards, and has a basal alate expansion of its internal ridge. Measurements. M. anteroposterior...... .039 transverses.. -. Api, AUaIL anteroposterior .039 transverse.... .028 Diameters of last superior molar Diameters of second inferior true molar Meno ho fevoenlOw CANINE ta sllelsisinsierts che a rears Shige ace, cllstl) Be CLOW OL Mie ere eee Ser eee ache Says Pere lll VEEtIGA yas icke © = .037 j ine Diameters of base of crown of can j pon Asana ath kik 036 This species is nearest the (. lobatus in some respects. The short posterior crest of the last inferior molar with its cusp-like extremity, and the absence of posterior ledge on this tooth will readily distinguish it. Bad lands of the Big-Horn river, Wyoming. There are six individuals of this species in the collection which are mostly represented by fine specimens, which represent the entire denti- tion. Eight other species of Coryphodon were obtained by the Big-Horn Ex- pedition, and the material enables me to distinguish them better than here- tofore. I present the following differential synopsis of their characters : I. The last inferior molar with three posterior cusps, the internal some- times represented by a ridge; or the posterior inferior molars with an accessory cusp or tubercle on the inner side between the crests (Coryphodon, Owen) : An internal tubercle ; last upper molar with the anterior cross crest and an- terior external crest closely connected ; size largest..........@. anag. Cope.] 170 (Dec. 16, An internal conic cusp; posterior crest oblique; heel very small; size BNE OMIM sc, uaciwic 5 on cieaia otoustatne niet ia ccia ister aicad ents ..2.-.C. cuspidatus. An internal crest ; posterior crest oblique ; heel small; size medium..... C. obliquus. An internal tubercle ; posterior crest little oblique ; heel large ; size large. C. lobatus. II. Posterior inferior molars with two posterior cusps ; without internal accessory tubercle : a. Posterior inferior molars with small or no heel : Large; posterior superior molar oval, with distinct straight posterior crest ; inferior molars elongate ; symphysis mandibuli produced and narrowed ; premaxillary elongate..... ota nari aig inte s/o dia sterata C. latipes. Medium ; inferior molars nearly as wide as long ; premaxillary short..... C. latidens. aa, Posterior inferior molars with prominent or wide heel : Medium ; posterior superior molar with posterior angle, and angulate posterior crest ; inferior molars elongate ; symphysis mandibuli broad and short ; premaxillary elongate ; tusk trihedral....C. elephantopue. Smaller ; premaxillary bone short ; tusk trihedral........ onceee C. 8UmuUs. Medium ; premaxillary elongate ; tusk compressed and grooved......... C. molestus. Large ; last superior molar oval, with angulate posterior crest ; its anterior lobe connected with anterior cingular crest............- C. repandus. III. Last inferior molar with but one posterior cusp from which a curved crest extends round the posterior border of the crown. Superior true molars narrow ; external incisors sharply angulate on ex- CeNHAUMACE-macii = oi eisrteeia BGR SARC OpSC ode aan Hash . 7. curvicristis. IV. Posterior inferior molar unknown. Posterior superior molar oval; posterior crest straight; internal crest fissured (? normally) ; a complete internal cingulum... C. marginatus. CoRYPHODON CUSPIDATUS Cope. = This species was found in a single individual obtained in New Mexico ; a second one was discovered by Mr. Wortman in the Wind River basin, and a third has now been brought from the Big-Horn. CORYPHODON LATIPES Cope. I refer seven individuals provisionally to this species. Three of these are represented only by superior teeth, etc., and in four the last inferior molar is preserved. Of the latter, three have an angle, sometimes almost a crest, descending from the posterior inner tubercle, as in 0. obliquus, but the specimens are all of superior size to that species, some of them very much exceeding it. It is also possible that this ridge is not a constant character. This species has the dentition which I have referred to the Bathmodon radians, but no astragalus of the species occurs in the collec- tion. It may be the @. latipes, of which the teeth have not yet been iden- tified. I hope soon to be able to decide this question. < —————eE— 1881, 1v1 [Cope, CoRYPHODON stmus Cope. A broken mandible and maxillary bone, with several teeth represent this small species in the Big-Horn collection. CoRYPHODON ELEPHANTOPUS Cope. Portions of the dentition of both jaws, including the last molar teeth of two individuals, prove that this species inhabited Wyoming in the early Eocene period. One of the individuals, represented only by the last molars of both jaws, is a little smaller than the typical specimen of which an entire cranium is figured in Capt. Wheeler’s report (4to, 1877, Pl. LI-III), while a second specimen, which includes the entire superior molar series, is a little larger than the same. This species is characterized by the obliquity of the edge of the posterior crest of the posterior superior molar backwards away from a transverse line ; and by the slope of the external side of this crest. In other words the inner half of the posterior crest nearly forms a V, like that of the penultimate molar. The posterior edge of the V is present, running out- wards from the inner end of the posterior crest, which thus becomes the apex of the V. The @. elephantopus thus most nearly approaches the genus Manteodon, of all the species. To accommodate the obliquity of the crest the posterior outline of the last upper molar is strongly angulate, giving a sub-triangular outline. The heel of the last inferior molar is insignificant. -CORYPHODON REPANDUS, sp. nov. This large species is known from the posterior portions of the dentition of both jaws, with an entire symphysis. The last superior molars are intermediate in outline between the regular oval of the @. radians, and the sub-triangular form of the C. elephantopus. The peculiarities of the species are seen in the posterior crest. The two lobes of which this is composed, do not form a continuous line as in C. latipes and C. simus, but form an angle with each other as in C. anaz. The anterior lobe is compressed, and its long axis is nearly that of the jaw ; the second lobe leaves it at a right-angle, but curves backwards as it ex- tends inwards, giving a concave exteroposterior border. There is no ridge descending outwards from the inner extremity of the crest, to form a V, as in @. elephantopus. But the posterior basal cingulum extends to the external side of the tooth, which is not the case in any other species known to me excepting the C. marginatus. The anterior cusp is closely joined to the external elevation of the anterior first cingulum asin C. anaz ; a character which separates it from all other species. A strong trace of a cingulum passes round the inner base of the crown. No external cingulum. The first true molar does not differ materially from that of other species. It is considerably smaller than the last. The apex of the premaxillary bone with the second incisor and alveolus of the first, is preserved. The bone is rather short. The crown of the incisor is regularly convex ex- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx.111. Vv. PRINTED MARCH 16, 1882. Cope.| 172 . (Dec. 16, ternally, and is not expanded at the base. There is a strong internal cingulum. A fragment of the lower jaw supports the last two molars. The internal angle of the last one, is unfortunately broken. The posterior crest fs, however, perfectly transverse, which is not the case with the species with three posterior tubercles. The preserved part of the posterior border shows a distinct, rather narrow heel. The anterior Vs are well developed and there are no lateral cingula. The symphysis is flattened out by pressure. The inferior canine is large. It is sub-triangular at base and has an anterior basal angular projection. ‘ Measurements. M. {TANSVETEC..,.\-i0,<'<0\ 6 sais ow) se longitudinal........... . .037 tTANSVETSC....2ceccceccees «000 longitudinal. ............. .032 VECHGal . ssaieqpccbideas ae SDA .018 tYARSV ELISE 2 ons aaincyew tabs ox ael cane ITATISVETISE. «50 clnacnaaghacenenton Diameters inferior M. III anteroposterior............ .040 vertical in front (restored)... .024 etirth OF symp YSIS... pccin ccm ade s os eee 5 abana -107 Depth of ramus’at M. TU. -...<..-.% a3 der welet eters Bare RE The superior molars of this species might readily be taken for an under- sized individual of C. anaz, but the last inferior molar is of a different type, and refers the species to a different section of the genus. Diameters of superior M. III ; Diameters of superior M. I ; Diameters crown I. 2 ; CORYPHODON CURVICRISTIS, Sp. NOV. The fragments which represent this species belong to one individual. They include a considerable part of both mandibular rami with numerous molar teeth, and most of the inferior incisors loose. Also the second superior molar, some superior premolars, the canine, and three or four incisors, two of them in place in an incomplete premaxillary bone. None of the bones of the skeleton were obtained, so far as known. The ramus of the mandible is both robust and deep. Its inferior border does not rise posteriorly so much as in some species, as e. g., 0. latidens, and the angle is well below the horizontal line of the dental alveoli. The dental foramen is just about in this line. The inferior premolars and molars do not differ from those of several other species, but the last molar has several peculiarities. The external cusp is the only one of the posterior pair which is present. It gives origin to two crests, both of them curved. The posterior represents the usual posterior transverse crest, but is gently convex backwards, and turns forwards on the inner side of the crown, only terminating at the external base of the anterior cross crest. The other curved crest is low, although higher than in most species, and ex- tends to the middle of the base of the anterior cross crest. There isa dis- tinct heel which is elevated at the middle and disappears gradually at each end, not being abruptly incurved as in C. anaz. The anterior part of this 1881.] 173 [Cope. tooth is as peculiar as the posterior. The external cusp gives origin to three crests, two of them the usual limbs of the anterior V ; while a third descends to the anterior border a little exterior to its middle. It encloses a deep groove with the anterior ridge of the anterior VY. This arrangement is not seen in any other species. The inferior canine is robust, and has its anterior angle prominent, but not alate. The crowns of the inferior incisors are regularly convex ex- teriorly, and have no cingula. They are regularly graded in dimensions. The superior molar preserved is probably the penultimate. Its anterior portion is broken. The posterior external V is narrower than usual for a second molar, and resembles somewhat that of the last superior molar of the Manteodon subquadratus. A slight contact face on the posterior cingulum shows that this-tooth is not the last molar. The said cingulum extends to the external base of the V; in rising to the internal cusp it forms a sigmoid curve. The cingulum below this, on the inner base of the crown, is rudimental. The superior canine has a long and robust crown, with a triangular section to the apex. The posterior face is a little wider than the other two, which are equal. The anterior is slightly concave in cross-section, and the posterior slightly convex transversely, although concave longitudinally. There is a weak ridge nearly parallel to and near the postero-external angle, and traces of others on the postero-external face of the crown in front of this one. The antero-internal angle is swollen at the base. The superior incisors present characteristic features. The ridge of the ‘external face, which is weakly developed in some of the species, and is wanting in others, is here represented by a strong longitudinal angle, which extends from the base of the crown to its apex, dividing the external face into two distinct planes. This character is most marked on the external incisor, where the planes are sub-equal, and concave. On the second the anterior plane is smaller, and on the first it is a good deal smaller. These incisors have a weak internal cingulum, but no external one. Measurements. M. Length of ramus from P-M. IV inclusive......... sjelols Reta es IN{eEIOLM LUC MIOMUS.75). ¢s\e'- © > aici sie SBA heC wae .098 : F anteroposterior.........-+--- .0275 BOR Ty ENE ; GLAMIS VEUSE. sels cts s'ajaelesteyae a0 :020 p ; anteroposterior. ......:.--. .036 BR LEE ae ; PLATISVICLSE <'e 21e\ c\spelste,n\elotstele is .029 Depth of ramus-at:M, TMs ns aes sete S Gevipersteterstas .075 : . anteroposterior........++- . 0315 bap tes SULs ; transverse...:.. ataiete aay ofeleie .039 longitudinal... .094 Diameters of crown of superior canine anteroposterior. .022 transverse..... .034 Di F f fh WeELtICAL Asc sa. ita ateiene 6 - 022 te ren al i fTAHSVEISE ase sia’) clove aan v S0C4 Cope.] 174 (Dec. 16, The numerous characteristic marks, show that this species is one of the most distinct Of the genus. It is also one of the largest, being second only to the 0. anua. CorRyYPHODON MARGINATUS, Sp. NOV. This is one of the smaller species, having nearly the dimensions of the C. molestus. It is only represented by the superior canine, first inferior premolar, and last superior molar of one individual found together by Mr. Wortman. Their size, mineral condition and degree of wear, render it probable that all belong to one individual. The superior molar is of the oval type, without posterior shoulder. The posterior crest is therefore straight, and parallel with the anterior crest. Its inner extremity does not display the least tendency to form a V, as is seen in Q. elephantopus. Its exterior extremity is widely separated from the external prominence of the anterior crest (cingulum). The latter dis- plays, at its inner extremity, the peculiarity of a deep fissure of the anterior side, which nearly divides the crest, and partially isolates the internal tubercle. Adjacent to the fissure its crest is tuberculate. The posterior upper cingulum descends from the inner cusp to the basal cingulum. The basal cingulum is well developed on the anterior and interior sides of the crown, and on the posterior as far as the base of the inner cusp of the posterior crest, where it gradually fades out. Enamel wrinkled. The superior canine is remarkable for its small size. The posterior face is a little the widest, and its bounding edges are sharp, but not expanded. There are no prominent ridges of the enamel. The anterior face is mode- rately wide. ‘The first inferior premolar presents no peculiarities. Measurements. M. anteroposterior......... .028 Diameters of M. IIT superior tHHIISVETRE Lise es sve ce os -U0U ‘ vertical ........ SeeUe see) OLGeRe Diameters ot owe Lanenor ; anteroposterior ......... -O15 PEC HANS VETBE sukte sae wisleleistoie' .009 Diameters of ©. superior f anteroposterior . veceeeee .014 transverse posterior..... .018 The superior molar is but little worn, and shows that the animal was just adult. The canine is more worn than the molar. There are several characters which mark this species as distinct from those previously known. It is the only member of the genus which has a complete internal cingulum. The fissure of the anterior crest, if normal, is peculiar to this species. The superior canine is disproportionately small. Besides the Coryphodons already mentioned, a number of more or less complete skeletons were obtained, some of which can be identified by comparison with those which are accompanied by teeth, and which are enumerated in the preceding pages. 1881.] nds: 175 [Cope. METALOPHODON TESTIS, sp. nov. The genus Metalophodon was described by me in 1872.* Since that time it has remained without further illustration of importance, as no good specimens of it have been obtained by any of my expeditions up to the present year. Thy material now at hand consists of the entire superior molar series of the right side, and the superior molars of the left side, in beautiful preservation. These display the characters on which the genus was proposed, 7. ¢., the conversion of the posterior external V of the second true molar into a transverse crest similar to that of the last true molar. It follows that the first true molar is the only one which exhibits this V. It also follows that in this genus the peculiarities of the dentition of Coryphodontide are carried further than in Coryphodon, where two molars display the V, and one the crest ; or than in Manteodon, where all three have a V, and none the crest. The genera then stand in the order of evolution, Manteodon, Coryphodon, Metalophodon. Char. specif.—The first superior premolar has lost its crown. The other premolars do not display any marked peculiarities. The internal cusps are well developed, and are most prominent posterior to the line of the apex of the exterior crest. They connect with the posterior cingulum by a broad ledge, but do not connect with the anterior cingulum. The two cingula nearly connect round the inner base of the crown on the third premolar. F The first true molar is well worn. The base of the posterior external V can be seen, and the anterior and posterior cingula. There is no in- ternal cingulum. The second true molar is the largest of the teeth. It is subtriangular in outline, its external side forming with the posterior, a right angle. Its general character is much like that of the Coryphodontes, but it presents the remarkable exception which constitutes the character of the genus Metalophodon. The posterior crest does not include a V, but is straight, and consists of the same elements as the posterior crest of the third true molars, but differently proportioned. The part representing the anterior V is a cone, much shorter than the part corresponding to the posterior V. As there is a postero-exterior angle of the crown there is an oblique surface rising to this part of the crest, which represents the ex- ternal face of the VY. There is also a small tubercle at the angle, where a similar one is found in the corresponding tooth of Hetacodon cinctus. Altogether this tooth is like the posterior molar of Coryphodon elephantopus, with a more prominent postero-external angle added. The anterior and posterior basal cingula are well developed, the latter being strong in- teriorly to the point where it sends a branch upwards to the internal cusp. There is no internal cingulum. The last superior molar is a transverse oval, more regular than usual in the species of Coryphodon, since the diameters of the internal and external portions are about equal. The characters of the posterior crest differ from * Proceedings American Philos. Soc., 1872, p. 542. Cope.] 176 Lhe: 16, those seen in the genus named in that the internal portion is much smaller than the external, having a small conic apex, distinct from that of the exterior portion. Its postero-external face is nearly vertical, and it diverges a little posterior to parallel with the anterior crest. The latter (the first cingulum) is elevated, and is widely separated externally from the posterior crest, to whose base it descends on the external extremity of the crown. The basal cingulum is present all round the crown except at the base of the posterior crest, and externally. It is narrow on the inner extremity of the crown. It sends upwards a strong branch to’ the apex of the internal cusp. The enamel ofall the molars is strongly wrinkled, but is worn smooth wherever rubbed. Measurements. M. Length of superior molar series..... pind bie, ce kudlie Spee ieee se premolar series...... sip isioigtetelaiatercietnaie 5 sieleiers LORD IOP. din sin sfanisae'a Fi -O1 Diameters P-m. IT { pce Ss Y EIPANSVETSC.c is ecotats 4b ohas 71 svaudie pon) si .025 i 2 Diameters M. I ATILELOPOBLELION. aversitis sjecsickeee eryereiow ae se .029 transverse........ eisioiels APS iris Seeeeee 032 teniOl sees eee HR ES .036 Diameters M. IT { same aa ea ELAN SETS ai tatslois a aiciete ote leieie acts acorns eee anteroposterior...... win ein'o eta bie mepneh eee Diameters M. III TADS VETS xc <.a.0 asinina lao no Bicng mae eis 041 WeTHMCAl = cpeecie = co tmslevolle lamistee Byaig ie tate .015 The WMetalophodon testis differs from the M armatus, in the more triangular form of its penultimate superior molar. Its form is quite different from that of the last molar, while in JZ armatus, the two teeth resemble each other closely. The species are of about the same size. The individual from which the above description is taken is rather aged. DINOCERATA. BATHYOPSIS FISSIDENS Cope. Bulletin U. §. Geolog. Survey, Terrs., Feb. 1881, 194. A considerable part of the dentition of the mandible of this species was found in the Big-Horn bad lands. This includes an incisor tooth, which is quite characteristic, and renders it probable that the anterior parts of the jaws differ considerably from those of other Uintatheriide. The root is sub-round. The crown resembles a good deal that of the species of Cory- phodontide. It is higher than wide and has a subacute apex. One edge of the crown is convex, and the other concave. The external face is con- cave in both directions, and has no ridges nor cingulum. The inner face is concave longitudinally and convex transversely. The convexity is median and has a longitudinal concavity on each side of it. No internal cingulum except a trace at the base of the concave edge. The edges are obtuse even when unworn, and the enamel is obsoletely rugulose. / . 1881.] 7 (Cope. Measurements of incisor. M. anteroposterior. .ucmaaet so daees.ts:.012 Diameters of crown ; transverse........ Sablemsten) areieransOc) OC VOrticdlins sladt s a a an S ¥ — Mite s ah eo ee? > 4 Bis a Fes . so oh a ave. Frid * eee ; : : i : be Pan ee ee Cope.] : 186 [Dec. 16, The nearest ally of this species outside of the genus Systemodon is prob- ably the Hyracotherium eraspedotum Cope. This species was brought from the Wind River bad lands, and does not occur in the Big-Horn col- lection. It is about the size of the S. semihians, but is a true Hyracothert- um, with a diastema behind the first premolar. The strong cingulum which characterizes it is not found in the S. semihians, and the inferior molars are wider and more robust. HyYRACOTHERIUM CRASPEDOTUM Cope. Bulletin U. 8. Geol. Survey, Terrs., 1881, p. 199. American Natural- ist, 1880, 747. The dentition of this species is in its dimensions and proportions inter- mediate between the two species of Systemodon. Its three premolars +] equal four of those of the S. semihians, while the molars of the two species are about equal. ‘ A specimen having the proportions of the H. craspedotum was found by a. Mr. Wortman on the Big-Horn, but unfortunately it does not exhibit the 3 characteristic cingula of the two dental series. The second superior pre- fi molar, like that of Systemodon semihians has no internal tubercle. It is ; not certain whether there is any diastema posterior to the first superior pre- molar. I therefore cannot yet ascertain whether this specimen represents an undescribed species of Systemodon or Hyracotherium, or a strong variety of the H. craspedotum. The accompanying inferior true molars are inter- mediate in size between those of the latter species and the H. vasacciense. HyRACOTHERIUM VASACCIENSE Cope. This species differs from the H. venticolwm in its deep mandibular ramus. _ . A single specimen from the Big-Horn presents the same proportions. The posterior inferior molar is rather short. HyYRACOTHERIUM VENTICOLUM Cope. re Bulletin U. 8. Geol. Survey, Terrs., 1881, 198. = Fifteen individuals of this species are included in the collections. HyRrACOTHERIUM ANGUSTIDENS Cope. ; This was a very abundant species. Mr. Wortman’s collection contains jaws and teeth of twenty individuals sufficiently well preserved for identification, and a large number of other pieces of jaws, etc., which may be reasonably inferred to belong here. In my report on the Wind River collection*, I noticed three varieties of this species, which differ in the depths of the ramus at the line of junction of the fourth and fifth molars. The numbers are 12, 14, and 15.5 mm. respectively. The lengths of the first true molar also vary from 7 to 6.5 and 7.5 mm. respectively. The last true molar measures in all 10.0 mm. The majority of the Big-Horn specimens agree with the second variety, but two others occur, one a little smaller, and the other a little larger than the average. The former measures ; length of last molar .0090 ; of * Bulletin U. 8. Geol. Survey Terrs. vi, 1881, p. 198, 1881, ] 187 [Cope. first molar .0067 ; depth of ramus at M. J, .0120. The dimensions of the larger variety are: length of M. iii, .110; of M. i, .0067; depth ramus .0165. The New Mexican forms originally described, exhibit combinations of several of these measurements. PACHYNOLOPHUS VENTORUM Cope. Bulletin U.S. Geol. Surv. Terrs., 1881, p. 197. American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747. One mandibular ramus. PACHYNOLOPHUS POSTICUS, sp. nov. Both rami of a mandible represent this large species. They are somewhat injured, and the crowns of five of the molars only can be distinctly seen. The latter display the characters seen in the P. ventorwm and other species of the genus. The transverse crests are well characterized, and the valley between them uninterrupted. They are closed at the inner extremity by a low ridge nearly at right-angles with the cross crest posterior to them, as in the species of Rhinocerus. The anterior of these bounds an anterior ledge, which is quite large on the last true molar. The latter has a rather narrow, but prominent heel, which rises posteriorly. The fourth premolar has an anterior ledge, and wide heel with a diagonal crest which is median in front. The third premolar is similar, but smaller. The only cingulum is seen on the anterior part of the external side of all the true molars. Measurements. M. Length of crowns of posterior six molars............. .0700 se fy UIE THO Cee eae ond COUKE ae 0440 : : ee anteroposterior Ue ey sacaiertay eet Shoei p UWE LURE TER EO 'V ’ transverse..... bak Fea tues . .0070 dj e « y anteroposterior wie EN a OER an Ene RE oe .0130 oe eUBTANLSVEISC ate ee iat iajacsuentathares 0095 er LIV EO Goat oie CReeIDES Ca Oe ONC .0180 : a ves f anteropos a EDU S IE Seat | transverse anteriorly....... Sfareaetscs sie .0092 DV epila RAMs ye Mae yecn chocelcyeucia in ia fb erowiaty 216 sis e 28 0280 “ ou VESMI farere 2c ietetay dest avorei sve © cle 'aninmiette healt .0310 ARTIODACTYLA. MiocLa&NUS BRACHYSTOMUS, sp. nov. Char. gen. The typical specimen of this species is represented by all the molar dentition of both jaws excepting the anterior three superior pre- molars. It also includes pelvis, femur, the distal parts of the tibia and fibula, the entire tarsus and the proximal portion of the metatarsus. The dental characters conform precisely to those of the other species of Mioclenus. Thereis but one internal cusp of the superior true molars, and the intermediate tubercles are present. The fourth premolar has one external and one internal lobe. The inferior premolars have simple crowns without interior cusps or tubercles. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc, xx. 111. x. PRINTED APRIL 4, 1882, Cope.] 188 [Dec. 16, : The characters of the tarsus are of much interest, and demonstrate that Mioclenus is the oldest type of artiodactyle yet discovered, and that it is not altogether primitive in some of its characters. Members of this order have been found by Cuvier in the upper Eocene (Dichobune, Anoplotherium, etc.), but none have been determined as yet from the Suessonian of America. A species represented by teeth from the Siderolithic beds of Switzerland have been referred to Diehobune (C. campichii Pict.) ; but dental characters alone are not sufficient to distinguish that genus from Phenacodontide*. Dr. Lemoine found astragali of a small Artiodactyle in the Suessonian of Reims, and has referred them to his supposed Suil- line Lophiocherus peroni. I have reported an astragalus from the Wind River formation of Wyoming Territory, whiah is almost exactly similar to those found by Lemoine. The specimen now described, enables me to characterize with some degree of completeness this interesting form, which precedes in time all the known American Artiodactyla. The characters of the tarsus are typically those of the order Artiodactyla. The astragalus exhibits a distal trochlea which is continuous with the sustentacular facet, and which articulates with both cuboid and navicular. The distal portion of the fibula is free from the tibia, and its shaft becomes very slender. It is possible that a more perfect specimen would dis- play it as continuous. Its distal extremity articulates with the ascending tuberosity of the calcaneum. The cuboid facet of the latter is narrow. The cuboid and navicular bones are distinct from each other and from the cuneiforms. The mesocuneiform is shorter than the ectocuneiform, and is coossified with it. There are probably four metatarsals: The median pair are distinct, but appressed, their section together, sub-circular. The lateral metatarsals are slender, the external one is wanting, but its facet on the cuboid bone is very small. These characters are in general similar to those of the genus Dichobune, but Cuvier} does not state whether the cuneiforms are codssified in that genus or not. They are united in Anoplotherium.t Mioclenus differs from Dichobune in the presence of but one internal tubercle of the superifr molars, and in the single external tubercle of the superior premolars. Both genera are referable to a family to be distinguished from the Anoplothertide by the presence of the external digits. This has been already named by Gill the Dichobunide. Char. specif. The bones are about two thirds the size of those of the Javan musk-deer (Tragulus javanicus). The transverse extent of the superior true molars is greater than the anteroposterior. The composition of the last molar is like that of the others. The external tubercles are lenticular in section and the emargination which separates them is ap- parent on the external face of the crown. The intermediate tubercles are small, and are entirely distinct from the large external tubercle. There *See American Naturalist, 1881, December. + Ossemens Fossiles, v, p. 188. {Gaudry Enchainements d. Regne Animal, p. 147. Seti 1881.] 1 89 (Cope. is a distinct cingulum which is only wanting from the inner base of the crown. The fourth superior premolar has a trilobate outline of the base of the crown, the base of the inner lobe being contracted where it joins the external part of the crown. The internal tubercle is conic, with a prolongation outwards and forwards. Intermediate tubercle not distinct. External, anterior, and posterior cingula. In the inferior true molars the external tubercles wear into crescents. The crowns increase in size posteriorly, which is the reverse of the order of enlargement in some of the other species of the genus. The fifth tubercle of the last molar is rather small, but is well distinguished from the other cusps. The internal median cusp is small, the external median. large. The premolars are not so much larger than the true molars in this as in the typical species of the genus. The second and third are more elongate on the base than the fourth. The latter is also less compressed than those that precede it. It has a short wide heel, and a small anterior basal tubercle. In the second and third premolars the posterior edge of the principal cusp is sharp, and descends gradually to the posterior base of the crown. Both have small acute anterior basal tubercles. The first inferior premolar is one-rooted, and has a simple crown directed some- _ what forwards. It is separated from the second by a short space. The teeth anterior to this point are lost. Measurements. M. Length posterior four superior molars............ Anna wo lillex Dinaicters Pomc iv BEAL CTOPMRLOLIOR 2.5 sire ) b, —i=-+ 1, sin (4 — A,), by which equations the two quantities i, and 4, are fully determined. Thus we are able to compute b for any azimuth by the formula b =i— i, cos (A — 4,). But from (7) we have the equations i, sin 4; = + i, cos 4, —i, cos A, i, cos A, = — i, cos A + i, sin A, by which we finally find i, and 4,, ¢. e., the constant inclination of the ap- parent to the true horizon, as far as it is caused by irregularities in the sur- face of the Earth, and the azimuth of its direction. This constant inclina- tion i, however, is not yet the total inclination Z Z', since large instru- ments together with their piers may cause an inclination of the artificial horizon variable with the zenith distance of the observed object, as will be seen in Part II. Finally, attention must be called to two things. First, if the observa- tions mentioned above are made on different days, the positions of the (10) ‘stars are to be reduced to a common epoch, best to the beginning of the year. Secondly, though we have found the formulas for finding the con- stant inclination of the apparent to the true horizon as to magnitude and direction, we are not to forget, that these formulas suppose the perfect knowledge of the latitude and time of the place. 3. The Transit instrument in the Meridian. The correction of the hour-angle for observations by reflection dt = 2 8 —— (2) has the meaning, that in the moment, when the reflected image of any ob- ject passes over the middle thread of this instrument its actwal hour-angle is dt for upper transits and 180° +- dt for lower transits, if b is reckoned positive right-hand of the observer. Yet for these instruments the inclina- tion @ of the apparent horizon remaining always on the same side, it will be found more convenient to take § positive towards west and conse- quently to write the corrections for lower transits as follows : dt = —28-_, while dt always denotes the increment of the hour-angle, which is reckoned in the usual way from south to west. € Hagen. ] 214 [Feb. 3, For upper culminations we have z= + (¢ — d) culmination south of the zenith Z=— (gy — 0) north ‘‘ i and for lower culminations z = 180° — (g + 9), hence the corrections for the hour-angle are o cos (g — 0) for upper culm, dt = 2 7 Sr a cos (g + 9) ce ‘a ce ye (at lower dt = 2 8 aE Wee If again we compare this correction with the one for the rotation axis not lying parallel to the horizon, we find them coincident, except the con- stant. For if b denotes the elevation of the west end of the rotation axis above the true horizon, we have the usual formula for upper culminations __ _ cos (py — 8) — for direct image sit cos 3 + “* reflect. “ and for lower culminations cos (yg + 3)- d=") set ; — for direct image =+-' -** reflect. “ where dt has the same meaning asabove. Joining the two corrections and putting 2 (7 + b) = d, as before, we find For upper culminations. ) i cos (yg — 0) direct image dt = — b SACHaUAA cos (¢ i) 7 ce — __ fant ——— reflect. dt = — (b — d) fon | roa For lower culminations. cos (¢ + 0) | 3 direct image dt = — b roe ae cos (yg + 0) reflect. ‘‘: dt=— (b—d) ae or an J where dt denotes the increment of the hour-angle. We need not consider separately the formulas for lower culmination, as we may deduce them from those for upper culmination at any time by simply substituting 180° — 9 for 6. In consequence of these considerations the formulas of Tobias Mayer, Bessel and Hansen are to be modified for observations by reflection as fol- lows : Mayer’s formula is the following cos (g + 0) sin (a 0) c A 2. . nea cos 6 cos 3 where zr = — dt is the hour-angle east of the meridian, b the elevation of ) h q ; : 1882.) 215 (Hagen. the west end of the rotation axis above the true horizon, 90° — k the azi- muth of this west end and 90° + c its angle with the line of collimation. Begsel’s formula is 7™—=—m-n tan d+ csec 0, and finally, Hansen’s formula 7 =bsec yg + n (tan J — tan g) + c sec 0, where n denotes the declination of the west end of the rotation axis and 90° — mits hour-angle. All these constants are in the following relations to each other : n= bsin gy —k cos ¢ b= nsing+mcos g ; (12 m=bcosg+k sin g k=>—ncosg+msin g ) For observations by reflection the constant b and consequently m and n are to be changed, say into b!, m!, n!, by the following formulas : b= —2 @—b =b —d m' =m — 2 (f+ b) cosg=m—dcos¢ n! =n —2(%-+b) sin g=n —dsin ¢. Hence the three formulas of Mayer, Bessel and Hansen become for obser- vations by reflection, cos (g — 0) sin (¢ — 0) c = (jo) == 6) = nee ) cos 3 = cos 3 Cos 9 7™=— m+ n tan d + csecd—d — aay t = (b — d) sec g + (n — d Sin g) (tan 6 — tan ¢) 4 € sec 0. As to determining the constants of these formulas, it will be seen, as in case of the azimuth instruments, that they cannot be found, unless the time of the place be known. First we will find the constant d, which may be done in two different ways, viz: by the striding level, which, being itself inclined to the true horizon by the angle f, cannot give the value of b, but it gives the value of P+b=34; or by observing the transits of the direct and reflected image of a star. Let T and T’ be the mean values of time for all the transits reduced to the middle thread for direct and reflected image, 4 T the clock correction on sidereal time and a the star’s apparent right ascension, then is evidently a=T+ 4T+r1, hence cos (g—0) sin (g—0) c for direct image a = T + 4T Os con a ids ch coe cos (¢ — 0) ‘sin (¢g —_ 0) c “reflect “ a= T+ AT+ (b—4) ~ cos § cos + cod and by subtraction Uae A A cia Woe a 13 Bn Fle aie Bais eos, = a) Co Hagen.] 216 [Feb. 3, which determination will be the more exact, the greater cos (g— 9), 7. e. the nearer the observed star passed by the zenith. The collimation constant is found in the usual way either by reversing the axis, or by using two horizontal collimating telescopes, and the con- stant n by observations of the upper and lower culmination. If then, we suppose the times of transit already corrected as to the errors arising from cand n, we find from Bessel’s formula for direct imagea = T + 4T+m cos (gy — 0) “reflect. “ a=T!+ 4T+m—d per yare and from Hansen’s formula for direct image a = T + 4 T+ bsecg “ reflect. “ a=T'+ 4T + (b—4d) sec g. By these formulas it is made evident, that neither m nor b can be found inde- pendently of the clock correction. But if this is known, Bessel’s formula will give the constant m, or Hansen’s formula b. The azimuth constant k may be determined by observations of upper and lower transits or be computed from (12). Thus, b being found, we may finally determine d — oie b. z. é. the west inclination of the apparent to the true horizon. 4. The Transit Instrument in the Prime Vertical. From the general formula COS Z SS eee 9 dt = 2 8 cos § cos p (2) we shall obtain the formula for the transit instrument in the prime vertical by finding the value of cos p for the azimuth A = 90° and substituting it in the above formula. We have in general cos p sin Zz = Cos § sin g — Sin 6 cos ¢g Cos t. But for the prime vertical we have the three special equations sin z = cos § sin t COS ¢~ COS Z tee o/s. ae sin § = sin ¢ Cos z. Substituting these quantities successively into the three members of the general equation we find cos p cos 6 = sin ¢ COs ¢ Cos z tan t. But from the three formulas for the prime vertical follows ee an t= Cos y consequently, cos p cos § = sin g sin z, a ee ee 1882.]} 2 17 (Hagen. hence we have for observations by reflection with the transit instrument in the prime vertical the correction of the hour-angle. 28 d= tan z sin ¢ (14) The meaning of this correction is, that in the moment, when the re- flected image of any object passes the middle thread of this instrument, the actual hour-angle of the object observed is 902 +. dt or 270° + dt, B being positive right-hand of the observer. Yet as also for this instrument the inclination # of the apparent horizon remains always on the same side, it will be found more convenient to take ? positive towards north and consequently to write the correction of the hour-angle as follows : 22 Star west dt tan 7 sin ° | ie “east. If we now compare this correction with the one for the rotation axis not lying parallel to the horizon, we find them coinciding except their con- stants. Let @ denote the sidereal time, when the star passed over the true prime vertical, and T the clock time, when it passed the middle thread of the instrument, and finally, 4 T the correction of the clock on sidereal time, then the theory of this instrument gives us these formulas for direct observations b k c Qe BFAD ot tan z sin ¢ 48 sin @ oe sin z sin @ Stararaees b k c = T— 4 — —— aoe en ERG tan z sin sing” sinzsing where b denotes the elevation of the north end of the rotation axis above the true horizon, 180° — k the azimuth of this same end, and 90° + ¢ its angle with the sight-line of the telescope. For observations by reflection, 180° — z is to be substituted for z, which changes only the sign of b. But besides this, the artificial horizon being inclined to the north, the reflected image will be observed after the star passed over the prime vertical in the west and before it passed over the same in the east. Hence, if we put d = 2 (3+ b) as before, the first fraction of the above equations becomes b+28 pd ~ tan z sin g + tan z sin 9 Star west b+2, b—d ¥ tan z sin ¢ =~ tan z sin g ies Hence the two formulas for the transit instrument in the prime vertical are to be modified for observations by reflection in the following way : *" b—d k c o=T+ 47+ tenzein g + sing T sina sin g SOT West b—d k c ¢é=T+4T— ‘* east. Also in this case we shall see, that the constants cannot be found without tan z sin ¢ T gin g — sinzsin g | Hagen.,] 218 [Feb. 3, the time and latitude of the place being known. First d may be deter- mined, as in former cases, either by the striding level, which will give the angle }d=b+~, or by observing the direct and reflected image of a star either in west or in east. By subtracting the two corresponding equations we find 1_T 3 =f+b= ar tan z sin ¢, where stars are to be chosen, that pass near the zenith, The collimation constant c may be determined by reversing the axis and observing in both cases the time of transit. As in this case the sign of c alone is changed, we find by subtracting the two corresponding equations eee hae o== 5) sin z sin g, where stars passing near the zenith are again preferable. Both operations may be performed by first observing the transits over some threads and then, after having moved the instrument, over the rest, and by reduc- ing them to the middle thread, or if the observations are taken on differ- ent days, the rate of the clock must be known and added to the observed time. Let us now suppose the time T being already corrected as to the collima- tion, then by observing the same star east and west we may find both con- stants b and k. In this case the equations are b ¢@=T+4T+ Hane Gis : + sin g Star west, 1 —— T Ah Sia ie “ec t eater — tanzsing + sing ai By subtracting we have b=tanzsing[}(@—@)—3(T—T)]. : Should the clock corrections not be the same T! were to be corrected by the rate. Now} (?— @') =t is the hour-angle of the star in the moment when it passes over the true prime vertical and may be computed from the latitude of the place and the star’s declination by the formula or better still from the formula sin (g — 0) sin (g + 0) ° The errors in the observation of T — T! will also here be the smaller, the smaller tan z, ¢. e. the nearer the star passes the zenith. Now d and b being known we find the north inclination of the apparent horizon f=3da—b. tani? = ————“‘( et; 1882,] | 219 {[Hagen. By adding the above equations we find k=sin g [$ (0+ 6) —3(T4+T) —4TI, or as $ (04+ ¢') =a is the star’s right ascension k = sin g fa— 3 (T+ T') — AT]. Part Il.—Jnfluence of the inclination g on Altitude Observations. By « we have denoted that component of the inclination Z Z' of the apparent to the true horizon, which lies in the vertical plane of the instru- ment used. With large instruments part of this component may be caused by the instrument and its piers, and is, therefore, as was explained in the beginning, depending on the zenith distance of the ohject observed. The other part of g is according to former notations [see formula (6) ] q =i, cos CA — A) (15) and is caused by the constant local irregularities in the figure and density of the earth. The first part of g will have an effect on altitude observa- tions quite analogous to the flexure of the instrument. This latter correc- tion is generally represented by the series al cosz + a"cos2z4+- aM cos3z+... +b'sinz+ b'Usin2z+b"sindz+... and its sign is understood so, that if zis the reading of the zenith dis- tance of a star z+a'cosz+... +bisinz-+.... represents the true zenith distance freed from flexure. If for instance N denotes the reading of the Nadir point (for which z = 1809, ) | N—alb+tat—al4.., will represent the true nadir freed from flexure. By a similar formula the component @ may be represented this way a=q-+a,cosz+ta"%cos®z2+a,cos8z+.. “1 (16) +b/sinz+b," sin 2z2+b/"%sin3dz+...J For the nadir (z = 180°) we have a = G— a, + ata +... Now let z denote the reading of the instrument, ¢ the true zenith dis- tance of the object S observed, and N the reading of the nadir, then we shall have for direct observations (Fig. 2). z+alcosz+a%cos2z+alMcos3z+.. +b'sinz+b"sin2z2+b"sin3dz+... — (N + 180° —al+at—aM4 ...)4+a=¢ Again let z’ be the reading of an observation by reflection and we shall have z1—alcosz-+a'cos2z—alcos38z+... - +bsinz—b'sin2z+ bl! sindz—... — (N +1809 — al 4+ au —aM4, . jt g,= 1809-424 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 28. PRINTED MAy 18, 1882. Hagen.) 220 [Feb. 3, Let now the rotation axis of the instrument be reversed so that the gradua- tion runs in the contrary direction and z" be the reading of a direct obser- vation and we shall have zi alcosz+ alcos2z+al™cos3z+... —b'sinz—b"sin2z—b™sin3z—... — (N + 1809 — al 4+ a®— alla...) —a,=—3609—C¢ Let finally z™ be the reading of an observation by reflection in the same position of the instrument, and we shall have zt — al cos z+ a%cos2z—a™cos3z+.. —b sinz+ b" sin2z—b™ sin 32+ .. — (N 4+ 1809 — al + at—alli ...)—a,=— 18099 + £—2a But from the explanations in the first part, it is evident, that with obser- vations by reflection a star is observed out of the vertical plane of the in- strument, so that the azimuth of the star is by d A=2 fcotz greater than the azimuth ofthe reading. Hence, if we want to compare with each other the four equations given above, we are to reduce all the zenith distances to the same azimuth. This may be effected by the well-known formula dz = tan p sinzd 4, which by substituting the above value of d 4 becomes dz = 2 f tan pos z. (17) Here, as in Part I, p denotes the parallactic angle. The meaning of formula (17) is not, as if the inclination 7 of the artificial horizon could pre- vent the observer from reading the actual zenith distance of the star, it means that the actual zenith distance is by dz greater, than it would be, if the star were still in the azimuth of the instrument. i ee Mt el 1882. ] 221 {Hagen Hence, with the two observations by reflection mentioned above, the read- ings z' and z'" are to be diminished by 2 7 tan p cos z, in order to have in all the four equations the same true zenith distance belonging to the same azimuth. If the observation by reflection is taken in the meridian, where tan p is very small, this correction may be omitted as small of the second order. The same value of dz may also be found by the usual differential formula dz = cos § sin p dt and the following formula, which was developed above COs Z cos 9 cos p” dt —2f If for brevity’s sake we denote the apparent zenith point, corrected as to flexure, by Z, and put Z, = 1809 +- N — al +at—aM4+... our four equations mentioned several times will become C¢=z +a'cosz-+a"cos2z+a™cos3z+... | + bisinz-+ bY sin2z-+b'™ sindz+... ei Bee | 180° — ¢ =z! — (al — 2a,!) cosz-+ (al! — 2a,") cos2z—... + (b!— 2 b,’) sin z— (bu — 2b,") sin2z+... —Z,—2q+a4,—2/ tan p cos z. (18) if 360° — ¢ =z" + alcosz + al.cos2z-+a™ cos3z+... —b'sinz— b" sin2z—b'' sindz—... — Z, — a,. 180° +. ¢ = 2" — (al + 2a,') cosz + (a" + 2a,") cos2z—... — (b! + 2 b,!) sin z + (b! + 2b") sin2z—... —Z,+2q—a,—2f tan p cos z. These equation are sufficient to find the probable values of the constants a, b, a, and b, by observations of different stars. The constants a however can be eliminated, so that, to find zenith distances, we need not know but the constants band q. For we find £ — 1809 =3 (z—z") + b'sinz+ b' sin 2z2+b™sin3z+...+4, (19) The b being found by this equation, the constants a, may be found by the following one : — € =} (2 — 2) + 2a) cosz— 2a," cos2z+... + b'sinz — b" sin2z+...—2q+ a4, The constants a may be determined from 180° = 3 (z + z!) + al cosz + allcos2z+4...—Z, and afterwards also the b, from 180° = 3 (z! + 2) — al cosz-+ al'cos2z—... —2b/sinz+2b"sin2z2—...—2Z,— 2 tan p cos z. The equations (18) and all the others developed from them show, that ; Hagen.] 222 [Feb. 3, the true zenith distance { cannot be separated from the constant a, or, to speak more exactly, from the constant q, they giving always the value of ¢ —q. Nor will it be possible to separate zenith distances from this incli- nation by sexrtants or reflecting circles. The inclination 3 perpendicular to the plane of the sextant or reflecting circle has indeed no influence on finding altitudes, yet this is the case with the inclination g in the plane of the instrument, all the readings of altitudes being too great by the angle a, if an artificial horizon is used, while in case of a sea horizon the dip will be affected by this inclination. Neither of these errors can be eliminated by these instruments. Thus by altitude observations the inclination of the artificial horizon may be found as far as it depends on the attraction of the instrument and its piers, but not as far as it depends on local irregularities of the earth. Now to come to a conclusion, the question turns up to the astronomer, by what means he will find the latitude and the time of his place. Since in case that his apparent meridian line is not parallel to the true horizon, all observations of stars will give him the latitude not of his place, but of such places, whose true horizon is parallel to his apparent meridian line. And in like manner if the plane of his apparent meridian does not go through the centre of the earth, all observations of stars will furnish him with the time not of his place, but of such places as are lying ina plane parallel to his apparent meridian and touching the centre of the earth. Consequently, all the methods of finding the longitude by immediate transportation of time or by observation of signals visible at the same in- stant will give him the longitude not of his place, but of the places just defined. He must therefore look out for other means to find the errors in the de- termination of the latitude and the longitude of his place, and consequently also the constants of correction for his instruments, and such means seem to be geodetic mensurations and the observation of parallactic phenomena. If as many places of the earth as possible are combined by such observa- tions and mensurations and the condition is made, that the sum of the squares of differences between the calculated and observed longitudes and latitudes becomes a minimum, the probable errors in determining the posi- tion of these places may be found. The first method has been partially employed by Prof. Schmidt in G6ttingen and later also by the U. S. Coast Survey.* On the instigation of the celebrated Gauss Prof. Schmidt made use of the different meridian mensurations to calculate the dimensions of the terrestrial ellipsoid, so that the sum of the squares of differences be- tween the computed and observed latitudes was a minimum. He found for the mean error of latitudes 3/’ .193. But it may be interesting to have the complete result of his computation here reprinted from his ‘‘ Lehrbuch der mathem. u. phys. Geography, Gottingen, 1829, 1. p. 199.” * Report for 1853. aes a 1882.] 223 { Hagen. Tarqui 3° 4f 3017.83 + 1.87 Cotchesqui 0 2 37.83 — 1.87 Trivandeporum ali! ad 52.59 — 0.58 Paudree 13 19 49.02 4 0.57 Punne 8 9 38.39 — 1.78 Putchapolliam 10 59 48.93 — 1.22 Dodagoontah 12 59 59.91 +- 3.54 Namthabad 15 6 0.64 — 0.54 Formetera 38 39 56.11 + 3.40 Montjouy 41 21 45.45 + 2.55 Barcelona 41 22 47.16 + 0.82 Perpignan 42 41 58.01 — 4.16 Carcassone 45 12 54.31 — 1.02 Evaux 46 10 42.19 — 5.88 Pantheon 48 50 48.94 + 0.37 Diinkirchen 51 2 8.74 + 8.92 Gottingen 51 31 47.85 — 2.76 Altona, 53 32 45.27 +. 2.76 Dunnose 50 37 8.21 — 1.86 Greenwich 51 28 40.00 + 0.94 Blenheim 51 50 27.09 +. 3.01 Arburyhill 52 13 28.19 + 1.83 Clifton 53 27 31.99 — 3.91 Mall6érn 65 31 31.06 4+ 1.31 Pahtawara 67 8 51.41 — 1.31 In like manner also mensurations of Parallels might serve to find the errors in longitude. Amongst the parallactic phenomena, which may con- tribute towards finding the errors in longitude and latitude, especially solar eclipses and occultations of stars are to be mentioned. If in the equation, which represents the condition of a certain place of the earth lying in the surface of the cone of shadow, not only the longitude, but also the latitude and sidereal time, are supposed to be erroneous,* very likely part of the errors, for which formerly the ephemerides were made responsible, must be ascribed to the inclination of the apparent horizon. Thus longitude and latitude of an Observatory being approximately cor- rected by any of these methods, the formulas given in the preceding pages will furnish the means of finding the constants of correction for the instru- ments, and finally also the inclination of the apparent to the true horizon as to magnitude and direction. *Brtinnow in his ‘‘ Lehrbuch der Sphirischen Astronomie,”’ p. 32), develops this equation, supposing only the Ephemerides to be erroneous, Chanvenet in his “Manual of Spherical and Practical Astronomy,” 5th ed. vol. i, p. 523, re- gards the corrections of the coérdinates of the place of observation as depend- ing only upon the correction of the eccentrictity of the terrestrial meridian, supposing the latitude itself as well as the sidereal time to be correct. 224 _ [Feb. 17, Stated Meeting, February 17, 1882. Present, 8 members. Vice-President, Prof. KENDALL, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. Wm. W. Jefferis, dated West Chester, Pa., Jan. 25, 1882; and from Mr. W. Townsend, West Chester, Pa., Jan. 25, 1882. * The resignation of Rev. Samuel Longfellow from the Society was announced. Letters of envoy were received from the Imperial Botanical Garden, St. Petersburg, dated, Dec. 22, 1881; and the Depart- ment of the Interior, Feb. 9, 1882. Letters and postals acknowledging the réceipt of Proceed- ings, No. 109, were received from the Geological Survey of Canada; Maine Historical Society; New Hampshire Historical Society; Boston Public Library; Boston Atheneum; Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge ; Essex Institute, Salem ; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Rhode Island Historical Society, and Brown University, Providence; Con- necticut Historical Society, Hartford; University of the City of New York; New York Hospital; Astor Library; Prof. J. J. Stevenson; U.S. Military Academy, West Point; Mr. C. H. F. Peters, Clinton, New York; New Jersey Historical Society, Newark ; Pennsylvania Historical Society, Philadel- phia; Mr. Geo. Smith, Garrettford P. O., Pa.; Prof. CG. L. Doolittle, Bethlehem, Pa.; Prof. Trail Green, Easton, Pa. ; Mr. J. F. Carll, Pleasantville, Pa.; Maryland Historical Society, Baltimore ; Mr. Win. B. Taylor, Washington; Georgia His- torical Society; Prof. J. M. Hart, Cincinnati; Dr. Robert Peter, Lexington; Mr. Danl. Kirkwood, Bloomington, Ind. ; Chicago Historical Society ; Prof. J.S. Campbell, Crawford- ville, Ind.; and the Wisconsin Ilistorical Society, Madison. A letter dated, Feb. 3, 1882, was received from Prof. E. D. Cope, making a request that No. 95 of the Proceedings, con- taining Dr. Gabb’s paper on Costa Rica, should be sent to Mr. Leon Fernandez, San José, Costa. Rica, as he is preparing a history of that country. ~ ee : ~ 1882.] 225 -A letter was received from the Librarian of Cornell College Library, concerning the completion of their sets of Proceedings and ‘l’ransactions. A letter was received from C. Zinckra, dated Leipsig, Jan. 22, 1882. Circular letters were received from the Smithsonian Institu- tion, Washington. Donations for the ee were received from the Asiatic Society of Japan; St. Petersburg Imperial Botanical Garden; Swedish Bureau of Statistics; Zoolozischer Anzeiger, Leipsig ; Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; Socié:é de Géographie, Annales des Mines, and Revue Politique, Paris; Revista HKuskara, Pamplona; London Nature; Natural History Society, and Mr. Samuel Abbott Green, Boston; Essex Institute, Salem ; New York Academy of Sciences; New Jersey Historical Society; Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, American Journal of Pharmacy, “The American,” and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Mr. John H. B. Latrobe, Baltimore; Department of the Interior, Washington; and the Ohio Mechanics Institute, Cincinnati. Mr. Britton exhibited some peats and lignites of Arkansas, and some Anthracites from the same State, and also some bi- tuminous coals, showing the progress of the formation of coals. Pending nominations, Nos. 935, 951-955 were read. Report of the Officers and Council was read. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, March 3, 1882. Present, 7 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. The death of Robert Bridges, M.D., on February 20, 1882, in the 76th year of his age, was announced by the President. The death of Mr. Thos. P. James, at Cambridge, Mass., on February 22, 1882, in the 79th year of his age, was announced by Mr. Briggs. 226 [March 3, The President was authorized to appoint suitable persons to prepare obituary notices of each of the deceased. A letter of envoy was received from the Musée Guimet, Lyons, dated February 3, 1882. Letters of waenewiedemens were received from the Offen- bacher Verein fiir Naturkunde (108); American Statistical Association, Boston (109); Mr. T. P. James (109); Yale College Library, New Haven (109); Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia (109); and the Wyoming Historical and Geo- logical Society, Wilkesbarre, Pa. (108, 109). A letter was received from the Librarian of the Franklin Institute, dated February 21, 1882, requesting Part Ist of the Catalogue. On motion it was ordered to be furnished. Donations for the Library were received from the Editor of Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipsig; Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; Révue Coléopterologique, Brussels; Wurttembergische Vier- teljahrshefte fiir Landesgeschichte, Stuttgart; Revue Po- litique, Paris; Sociéié de Géographie Commerciale, Bordeaux ; Royal Academy of History, Madrid; Cobden Club, Journal of Forestry, and Nature, London; Prof. C. Schorlemmer, Manchester, England; Royal Dublin Society; Natural History Society, and Rev. E. F. Slafter, Boston; American Journal, New Haven; Franklin Institute, the American, Prof. E. D. Cope, Mr. J. Blodgett Britton, and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore; U.S. National Museum, Sensus Bureau, Bureau of Education, U.S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, and the War Department, Washington; Revista Cientifica Mexicana, Revista Mensual Climatologica, and Ministerio de Fomento, Mexico. A necrological notice of the late Dr. John W. Draper, by Dr. Wm. A. Hammond, was read. Prof. E. D. Cope read a paper entitled “On the Structure of some Eocene Carnivorous Mammals,” illustrating his subject by the exhibition of various fossil remains. New nomination No. 956, was read. Pending nominations Nos. 935, and 951 to 955, were read. And the meeting was adjourned. Te es 1882.] 227 (Hammond. An Obituary Notice of John W. Draper, M.D., LL.D. By William A. Hammond, M.D., Surgeon General U. S. Army (Retired List). (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 3, 1882.) In the death of Dr. Draper, the American Philosophical Society has to regret the loss of one of its most distinguished members. He died at his residence at Hastings-on-the-Hudson, in the State of New York, on the fourth day of January, 1882, after an illness which had lasted with more or less severity for several months, John William Draper was born at St. Helen’s, England, May 5th, 1811. His early education was received at the Wesleyan School at Woodhouse Grove, and subseqtiently from private teachers. At a still later period he made especial study of Chemistry, Natural Philosophy and the higher Mathematics, taking high rank in the knowledge of these sciences. In 1833 he came to the United States, intending to make it his perma- nent home. Here he seems to have had his attention for the first time turned to the profession of Medicine, for he entered the Medical Depart- ment of the University of Pennsylvania and graduated in 1836. He never practised medicine, however; probably he never had a patient. A few months after receiving hisdiploma, he was appointed Professor of Chemis- try, Physiology and Natural Philosophy in Hampden-Sidney, College, in Virginia. He occupied this position for about three years, publishing during that period several important essays on chemical and physiological ‘subjects. Some of these appeared in the American Journal of Medical Sei- ences, but the greater number in the London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philo- sophical Magazine. In 1839 he resigned his professorship at Hampden-Sidney College, to ac- cept that of Chemistry and Natural Philosophy in the newly inaugurated University of the City of New York. In 1841 on the origination of the Medical Department of the University, of which he was one of the founders, he was appointed Professor of Chemistry. In 1850 Physiology was com- bined with Chemistry and he held the joint chair. The union was con- tinued till 1865, when Dr. Draper gave up the teaching of Chemistry in the Medical Department, continuing, however, to lecture on Physiology. In 1867 he resigned this professorship also, retaining, however, the Presi- dency of the Medical Faculty, which he had held from 1850. In 1873 he severed his connection altogether with the Medical Department, but con- tinued to the day of his death to hold his professorship in the Department of Arts. Dr. Draper was, early in his career, an experimenter in various depart- ments of Natural Science. In 1840 he described the figures which are formed wher coins are laid on polished glass and which are made visible by exposure to the action of a vapor. About the same time he began to interest himself in the discoveries being made by Daguerre and was the first to photograph the human face. PROC. AMER, PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 2c. PRINTED MAy 18, 1882. Hammond. ] 228 [March 38, The chemical action of light was a favorite study with him. In 1844 he published his work on the ‘‘ Forces which produced the Organization of Plants,’’ in which he showed that the yellow ray of the solar spectrum is the most powerful in its influence over vegetation. One of the most im- portant contributions made by him to science is that in which he demon- strates that all solid substances become incandescent at about the tem- perature of 977° F. Dr. Draper did not confine his studies to the Natural Sciences strictly so-called. He was ambitious of distinction as a historian. His basis was, that nations are subject to the same laws as individuals and that in their migrations and stages of development they have been acted upon by purely physical causes. We are inclined to think that he carried his views in this respect, too far, and that he disregarded the undoubted influence of intellectual and emotional factors as creators and modifiers of history. Dr. Draper’s contributions to Scientific Periodicals and the Transactions of Medical Societies have been very numerous. One paper only was pre- sented to the American Philosophical Society, and this was May 27th, 1843. He was elected a member of the Society January 19th, 1844, and conse- quently this memoir was submitted before he joined us: its title is, ‘‘On the Decomposition of Carbonic Acid and the Alkaline Carbonates by the Light of the Sun.’”’ It is published in Vol. III of the Proceedings. His published volumes are as follows : ‘‘A Treatise on the Forces which produce the Organization of Plants,”’ 1844. ‘A Text-Book of Chemistry,’’ 1846. ‘© A Text-Book of Natural Philosophy,’* 1847. ‘‘A Treatise of Human Physiology,”’ 1856. ‘History of the Intellectual Development of Europe,’’ 1862. ‘Thoughts on the Future Civil Policy of America,’’ 1865. “History of the American Civil War,’’ 1867-70. ‘History of the Conflict between Religion and Science,”’ 1877. In all these works Dr. Draper showed that he had read extensively and thought deeply. He had great facility for expressing himself with clearness and directness and hence for impressing his views upon others. Never- theless it must be confessed, that his chief claim for distinction will rest upon his labors in Chemistry and Natural Philosophy. His ‘‘ Treatise on Human Physiology’ is in many respects fanciful and speculative, and theories are promulgated as well-founded which have no support from facts. His historical works are characterized by an entire absence of refer- ences to the sources of his information, and therefore they lost much of the value which they would ‘otherwise possess for students. In 1876 he was awarded the Rumford Medal by the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, for his researches on Radiant Energy. In 1881 he was elected one of the twelve honorary members of the Physical Society of London. 1882.] | 229 Stated Meeting, March 17, 1882. Present, 10 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. The death of Dr. Joseph Pancoast, March 7th, 1882, set. 77, was announced by Mr. Eli K. Price. On motion Prof. Samuel D. Gross was requested to prepare an obituary notice. Letters of acknowledement were received from the Astro- nomische Gesellschaft, Leipsig (108), Free Public Library, New Bedford (109), and the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia (109). A letter was received from the Kaiserliche Universitats-und Landes-Bibliothek, Strassburg, dated Feb. 16, 1882. The mat- ter was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. Donations for the Library were received from F. Sandber- ger; Zoologische Anzeiger, Leipsig; R. Accademia dei Lin- cei, Rome; Academie Royale, Bruxelles; Société deGéograph- ie, and Revue Politique, Paris; Société de Géographie Com- -‘merciale, Bordeaux ; Royal Astronomical Society and Nature, London; M. E. Wadsworth, Boston; Essex Institute, Salem ; Journal of Banking Law; Pennsylvania Historical Society, Franklin Institute, Journal of Pharmacy, The American, Philadelphia; New Jersey State Geological Survey ; Ameri- can Chemical Journal; U.S. Signal Service Bureau, Washing- ton; Historical Society of Wisconsin; Mercantile Library As- sociation, San Francisco; Illinois State Museum of Natural History, and Prof. Lesquereaux, Columbus. The President reported that he had requested Dr. Ruschen- berger to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Bridges, and Dr. Rothrock one of Thos. P. James, and that they had accepted the appointment. Prof. Sadtler read a paper by Prof. Edgar F. Smith, and N. Wiley Thomas, on Corundum and Wavellite from localities as yet unknown to mineralogists, about six or eight miles from Allentown, Pa. Mr. Phillips made a communication in reference to the Smith and Thomas.] 230 [Marchl7, progress of the New Dictionary of the English Language, now progressing under the auspices of the Philological Society. Pending nominations Nos. 835, 951 to 956, and new nomina- tions Nos. 957 and 958 were read. The resignation of the Rev. Samuel Longfellow, of German- town, Pa., was presented to the Society, and on motion ac- cepted. And the meeting was adjourned. Corundum and Wavellite. By Edgar F. Smith and N. Wiley Thomas. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 17, 1882.) Specimens of these minerals from localities, as yet perhaps unknown to mineralogists, came under our examination some time ago, and thinking that a description of them might not be without some interest to special- ists, we submit the following : 1. Early in January last, a piece of what was once a large hexagonal prism of corundum terminated by pyramids, was handed us. ‘The speci- men we received was an end piece exhibiting a perfect hexagonal form, with pyramidal ending, and on the broken surface of the crystal, the color observed was blue. The weight of this specimen is five pounds. The original complete crystal measured eight inches in length, and the diameter over the secondary axes is about four and one-half inches. On the exterior surface are observable here and there, magnetite crystals and these were the cause of the destruction of the original crystal soon after it had been ploughed up. The farmer thinking he had made a valuable discovery and curious to know the appearance of the inSide, broke the crystal into several pieces, one of these coming into our possession, after it had been carried about to various parties, for inspection and determination. Only very slight indications of any alteration are apparent on the exterior of the crystal. Soon after getting the above, we received another crystal —a double pyramid—about five and one-half inches long and weighing over five pounds. Since the reception of the preceding, we obtained sev- eral cigar boxes full of smaller, well-defined crystals. All of our speci- mens were found near Shimersville, Lehigh Co., Pa., and were thrown out while plowing. The district over which these crystals were scattered, and have been noticed, is rather extensive and is already under lease, and “prospecting ’’ for larger quantities has been commenced. Quite a num- ber of medium sized crystals were sent to the Weissport Emery Works, Lo d ' . | i ae a 1882,] 231 there tested and declared excellent for technical purposes. We reserve our analyses of the above for a future communication. 2. The specimens of Wavelliteare from the neighborhood of Macungie, Lehigh Co., Pa. They present radiating nodules on limonite ; their color is white. These crystals were considered to be calamine, and on this account we experienced some difficulty in ascertaining the locality. In- deed, we were obliged to show qualitative proof of the absence of zinc to the parties interested, before being made acquainted with the history of the specimens. Ouranalyses were made of some of the well-defined crystals. The method of analysis pursued, was that described by Dr. F. A. Genth, in Am. Journal of Science, ete., II. Vol. 23, p. 423. Analysis. hon Gn ces tedelata a ausaiseaels Maes saw aicsl eM waleiin's es 36.66 % 15 OS aa eee Serres er ith pone Gea ee aa ee ea 28.32 ABIES tyr ise Metal EN Meee Gilde CAR TAS o, trace TEAM OTEBC acer oretotetne Getaiotaciaevnetecaraars Sie eels ects in sieeve tots 0.60 99.72 Chemical Laboratory of Muhlenberg College, Allentown, Pa., March 3, 1882. Stated Meeting, April 7, 1882. Present, 12 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from 8. 8. Lewis, Corpus Christi College, Feb. 4; and from Wm. Blades, Abchurch Lane 28, London, Feb. 18, 1882. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the K. K. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteorologie, Wien (108); Verein fiir Erd- kunde, Dresden (105-106); Franklin Institute, Philadelphia (Catalogue Part I.); Prof. Thos. C. Porter, Easton, Pa. (109); West Chester Philosophical Society (109); Mr. Asaph Hall, Washington (109); and the Smithsonian Institution (109). Letters of envoy were received from the Central Physical Observatory, St. Petersburg, dated Feb. 1882; Prof. F. Reu- leaux, Berlin, March 10, 1882; Verein fiir Erdkunde, Dresden; 232 [April 7, U.S. Naval Observatory, Washington; and the Department of State, Washington, April 1, 1882. Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Munich, Rome and Brussels ; Prof. Reuleaux, Braunschweig; Herr. Aug. Tischner, and the Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipsig; Herr. L. Rtitimeyer, Zurich ; Geographical Societies at Paris and Bordeaux ; Baron J. De Baye, Chalon-sur-Marne; Royal Library at the Hague; Flora Batava, Leyden; Royal Astronomical Society, and Nature, London; Mr. M. EK. Wadsworth, Boston; American Academy of Arts and Sciences; American Journal, New Haven; Mr. K. A. Barber, Mr. Lorin Blodget, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Dr. Jayne, the Academy of Natural Sciences, Board of Direc- tors of City Trusts, and the Editors of the “ American,” Phila- delphia; Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore; U. 8. Fish Commission, U. 8. National Museum, U.S. Census Bureau, U. S. A. Department of Engineers, and the U. 8. Naval Observa- tory, Washington, D. C.; The Virginias, Staunton, Va; Amer- ican Antiquarian, Chicago. A letter from the Wyoming Geological Society was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. The death of Solomon W. Roberts, at Atlantic City, March 22,in the 71st year of his age, was announced by Mr. J.S. Price, and Mr. Fraley was requested to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. The death of Edouard Desor, at Nice, Feb. 23, in the “1st year of his age, was announced; and Mr. Lesley was appointed to prepare a notice. The death of Dr. Robert S. Kenderdine, in Philadelphia, March 27, aged 51, was announced by Mr. J.S. Price, and the President was ee to appoint. a proper person to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Mr. Ashburner read a paper on “ Estimation of Coal Areas and Coal Contents of the Anthracite Fields of Pennsylvania.” Prof. Cope read a paper on a new form of Marsupial Mam- mal from the Lower Eocene of New Mexico. Prof. Cope read a paper on Archeesthetism. 1882.] 233 Mr. Eli K. Price read the following report as Chairman of the Committee on the Michaux Legacy :— “«The course of lectures in Fairmount Park was successfully delivered by Dr. Rothrock in 1881, according to annexed statement.* The audience was interested and highly respectable ; the number varying from two to four hundred. «*T recommend the continuance of the lectures for the present year ; and that an appropriation be made of two hundred and eighty dollars ($280) for the lecturer, and fifty dollars ($50) for advertising. The course will be according to annexed schedule in manuscript.’’ + On motion it was ordered that an appropriation of $330 be made for the above objects, payable out of the Michaux Legacy. Pending nominations Nos. 935 and 951 to 958 were read, and the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, April 21, 1882. Present, 8 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Glasgow Philosophical Society (107-108); the Royal Geological Society of Ireland, Dublin (XV, 3; 107-108); and the Franklin Insti- tute, Philadelphia (108-109). *In 1881, from April 23d to June 18th, on Saturdays at 4 P. M.:—Subjects— 1. How and why we study Botany; 2. The Plants we Eat; 3. The Plants we Drink; 4. The Flants we Wear; 5. How we and the Plants Breathe and How we help each other; 6 and 7, Diseases of Plants. IJ. From September 10th to October 8th :—8. Strange Marriage among Plants; 9. Forestry in Europe; 10. Want of Forestry in America and its Consequences; 11. How Trees are made; 12. How Plants Trayel: 13. Weeds: 14, Botany for Winter. + In 1882, on Saturdays, at 4p, m., from April 22d to June 8d, Subjects—1, 2. Plants which have influenced Human History. 3,4. How Plants are Construct- ed. 5,6. How Plants are Organized. 7. Meat-eating Plants. II. September 9 to October 21.—8. How Vegetation protects the Earth and in- fluences Rain-fall. 9. What the Roots do and how they do it. 10. American Timber and its special value. 11,12. Sick Plants. 13. Strength and Durability of Timber. 14. The Plants eaten by other Nations. . 254 [April 21, Letters of envoy were received from the Naturforschende Gesellschaft,’ Gorlitz, dated Nov. 5, 1881; Naturhistorische Gesellschaft, Niirnburg, Nov. 16, 1881; Kgl. Hof-und-Staats- Bibliothek, Miinchen, Dec. 27, 1881; Meteorological Office, London, March, 1882; Canada Geological and Natural History Survey, Montreal, April, 1882; Department of the Interior, Washington, April 7, 1882; Louisiana Board of Health, New Orleans, March 30, 1882; and the Public Museum of Buenos Ayres. Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mies at St. Petersburg, Copenhagen, Munich, Rome, and Brus- sels; Observatories at St. Petersburg, and Munich ; Geological Society, Berlin; Natural History Societies at Gérlitz, Chem- nitz, Nuremburg, and St. Gall; Royal Society, G6ttingen ; Zoo- logical Society, Leipsig; Royal Library, Munich; K. K. Geol. Reichsanstalt, and the Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Vienna ; Herr Joachim Barrande, Prag ; Musée Guimet, Lyons; Anthro- pological, and Geographical Societies, Ecole Polytechnique, and Revue Politique, Paris; Revista Euskara, Pamplona; L. G. De Koninck, Liege ; Astronomical, Meteorological, Royal Geo- graphical, Geological, and Royal Asiatic Societies, and Society of Arts, London; Geological Survey of India, Calcutta; Glas- gow Philosophical Society ; Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada; Prof. J. D. Whitney and Prof. Alex. Agassiz, Cambridge; American Antiquarian Society, W orces- ter; Prof. O. C. Marsh, New Haven; Prof. J. Henry Com- stock, Ithaca; Capt. Jas. E. Cole, N. Y.; State Board of Agriculture, Harrisburg ; Philadelphia, and Reading R. R. Co. ; U.S. Fish Commission, U.S. Entomological Commission, U. S. National Museum, and Census Bureau, Washington ; Louisi- ana State Board of Health; National Museum, Mexico; and the Public Museum, Buenos Ayres. Dr. Gross declined by letter, on account of numerous engage- ments, his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Pancoast. The death of Charles Robert Darwin, April 20, aged 73, was announced by Dr. Le Conte. P. ’ "=e 2 er sa 1882.] 235 Dr. LeConte said: In rising to announce the death of Charles Robert Darwin, which oc- curred on the nineteenth day of April, last, in the seventy-fourth year of his age, I have no intention to give a biographical sketch of his life, or his contributions to science. This labor of love will be performed fully by some of his compatriots, who have had the benefit of the sweet and in- structive personal intercourse with him which has failed to be part of our earthly enjoyment. But what I do wish to manifest, as far as the feeble power of my language will permit, is the deep grief which we feel, at the loss of one, who has by his work and his writings, become a dear com- panion, and a guide in our scientific thought. For, te no man more than to Darwin, does the present age owe as much, _ for the gradual reception of the modern method of close observation over the scholastic or a priori formule, which, up to a brief period, affected all biological investigations. To him, above all men, we owe the recurrence to the old Aryan doctrine of evolution (though in those ancient times pro- mulgated under the guise of inspiration) as preferable, by reasonable demonstration, to the Shemitic views, which have prevailed to within a few years, andare still acceptable to a large number of well-minded but unthink- ing men. The doctrine of evolution, in its elementary form, means noth- ing more than that everything that exists has been derived from something that pre-existed ; that the former is related to the latter as effect is to cause. And it is most pleasing evidence of the acceptability of this doctrine, that it is now heard from many pulpits in the land, as a strong illustration of the instructions which are thence given. - Therefore, while lamenting the death of Darwin, at a ripe old age, and losing the benefit of his vast store of learning, which could not much longer remain with us, we are grateful that we have lived in a generation in which he was a conspicuous example of the humble and holy men of heart, which other scientific men should endeavor—albeit, with much less capacity—to imitate. And, finally, we offer to the bereaved family our most heartfelt sympa- thy in their affliction, and our trust that the well-chosen ancestral alliances will enable the descendants to worthily succeed in attaining the honor and usefulness which characterized our deceased colleague. The death of John Lenthall, U. 8. N., April 11, at Philadel- phia, in his 75th year, was announced. The death of Robert Christison, M. D., of Edinburgh, was reported as having taken place in 1880. Mr. Chase communicated Photodynamic notes No. V. Mr. H. C. Lewis described his observations of the aurora of April 19 and 20, proving its connection with the earth by the PROC. AMER, PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 2D. PRINTED MAy 22, 1882. 236 [April 21, apparent motion of the corona eastward at the rate of 15° per hour. | Nominations Nos. 951 to 958 were read and balloted for. Mr. Fraley reported that he had collected and paid over to the Treasurer the interest on the Michaux Legacy, due April 1, amounting to $133.07. On scrutiny of the ballot boxes, the following were declared duly elected members of the Society: 951. Charles W. King, Fellow of Trinity College, Cam- bridge, England. 952. Rev. James W. Robins, D. D., Principal of the Episco- pal Academy in Philadelphia. 953. Charles Sprague Sargent, A. B., Cambridge, Mass., Pro- fessor of Botany. 954. Franklin B. Hough, M. D., of Lowville, N. Y. 955. Stephen P. Sharples, of Boston, Mass., late Asst. Prof. Chem. Harvard College. 956. Charles Edward Rawlins, Esq., of Rock Mount Rain- hill, Liverpool, England. 957. George de B. Keim, Esq., of Philadelphia. 958. Hamilton Andrews Hill, Esq., of Boston, Secretary-of the National Board of Trade. And the meeting was adjourned. a 1832.] 237 (Chase. Photodynamic Notes, V. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 21st, 1882.) 158. Synchronous Areas. Kepler’s second law is grounded upon principles which must modify rotation and subsidence, so as to introduce harmonic tendencies among the synchronous areas which are described by different bodies, under the con- trolling activity of a common centre, as well as in the virtual areas which represent the reaction of the subordinate masses upon the centre of gravity of the system. In orbits of small eccentricity, the instantaneous area of a particle is nearly proportional to the square root of its mean radius vector. If we take r= (4)? = .125, as a harmonic divisor, the first of these tendencies is shown by the principal planets, as may be seen in the following table : Harmonic Areas. Synchronous Areas. Difference. or 625 Mercury .6222 + .0028 UT .875 Venus, 8505 + .0245 8r 1.000 Earth, 1.0000 .0000 10r 1.250 Mars, 1.2344 + .0156 18 r 2.250 Jupiter, 2.2810 — .0310 25 7 3.125 Saturn, 3.0885 + .0365 30 7 4.375 Uranus, 4.3799 — .0049 447 5.500 Neptune, 5.4803 + .0197 All the differences are within the limits of probable error, .03125, except Saturn’s. Jupiter’s area is nearly 3 of Saturn’s, and the combined masses of these two planets is so great as partially to override the simple tendencies of subsidence towards the chief centres of condensation and nucleation, Earth and Sun. The synchronous areas of Mercury and Mars, the outliers of the dense belt, are nearly in the ratio 1:2; Venus and Earth, 7:8; Uranus and Neptune, 4:5. The difference is less than j; of the probable error in the first of these comparisons ; less than } of the probable error in the second ; less than ;1, of the probable error in the third ; the ‘‘ probable error,’”’ in each case, being + of the common divisor, or the deviation which would be admissible without weakening the evidence of harmonic tendency in a VETH CAUSA. 159. Virtwal Areas. The virtual areas of synchronous reaction, or the instantaneous areas which a particle, at Sun’s mean distance, would describe about the principal planets if it were not restrained by stronger influences, vary as Vm 7. Vis viva may be represented by orbital areas, as well as by distances of pro- jection against uniform resistance, therefore we may add a third law to y Siege? ETOH pene g OM. es WE ales toe eee ‘ . i see + Chase.] 238 [April 21, Laplace’s two laws of constant sums, viz :—The sum of all the instantane- ous virtual areds in a system will always remain invariable. From Alexander’s harmony (Note 156, p. 605) it follows, that the ratio between the virtual areas of Jupiter and Saturn is nearly the reciprocal] of the ratio of their direct areas. The harmonic influence of the repeated nodal action of this ratio, upon subordinate planetary aggregation, is shown in the following table : Harmonic Areas. Virtual Areas. Difference. a 40,256 Jupiter, 40.587 — .331 P=a 30.192 Saturn, 30.063 + .129 y= 32 22.644 Neptune, 22.675 — .031L 5a 16.983 Uranus, 16.782 + .201 é 1.000 Earth, 1.000 .000 (imme 8 = 750 Venus, -749 + .001 y=Fe 400 Mars, 404 — .004 The greatest proportionate difference is that of Uranus, 14 per cent. The harmonic change from the outer to the inner belt of planets, 9 = ¢ — 16.983, represents the orbital retardation at the chief centre of conden- sation, Earth. If Earth were rotating with the speed which it would have if Laplace’s limit coincided with its equatorial surface, its time of rotation would be 27 = = 5073.6 seconds ; 86164.1 -—- 5073.6 — 16.983. The synchronous virtual area of Mars differs by less than 4} per cent. from } of 3. This is less than 18 per cent. of the probable error. 160. Laplace's First Law of Stability. The first of the two laws in which the author of Mécanique Céleste em- bodied his discoveries in relation to the stability of the solar system, is thus stated ; ‘‘If the mass of each planet be multiplied by the product of the square of the eccentricity and square root of the mean distance, the sum of all these products will always retain the same magnitude.” By combining the first and third of these factors, m V r, we get the quotient of mass by orbital velocity, together with the following suggestions of nodal influence: mY r Semi-axes major. Jupiter 722.19 = 5.1844 is 5.203 5 Saturn, 79.46 = 9.695% ve 9.539 Neptune, 93.82 = 30.1465 7, 80.087 Earth, 1.00 is 1.000 Jupiter’s exponent represents the variable ratio of subsidence-accelera - tion to orbital velocity ; Saturn’s the product of orbital time by mean distance; Neptune’s, the variable ratio of Laplace’s limit to nucleal radius. 1882.] 239 (Chase. 161. Orbital Momentum. The division of m V r by 7 gives the product of mass by orbital velocity, or orbital momentum, together with the following suggestions of photody- namic or nebular activity : m+Vr Cardinal Radii. Jupiter, 138.81 = 5.1783 r, 5.203 Saturn, 30.68 = 9.8002 f 10.000 Uranus, 3.35 = 20.5673 st 20.679 Neptune, 3.12 — 30.4833 és 30.470 Earth, 1.00 is 1.000 Jupiter’s exponent represents the ratio of its photodynamic orbital vol- ume to that of Earth ; Saturn’s, the ratio of orbital times ; Uranus’s the influence of mean rotary vis viva in an elastic medium; Neptune’s the influence of’ centre of linear oscillation in an elastic medium. 162. Coefficient of Solar Torsion. y In applying the oscillatory equation, f= 7 ee at the centre of gravity of a stellar system, let ¢ represent the duration of an oscillation or half- rotation, g the acceleration of gravity at the stellar equatorial surface, x? 1 the stellar modulus of light or the height of a homogeneous «thereal atmosphere which would propagate undulations with the velocity of light. Then, if the stellar rotary oscillation is due to the reaction of cosmical ‘ inertia against ethereal influence, gt is equivalent to the velocity of light, ,. ra a Ww In Coulomb’s formula of torsional elasticity, f= "2 gf” W represents a weight suspended by a wire, @ the coefficient of the radius of torsion, f the coefficient of torsion for the extended wire, g gravitating acceleration, t time of oscillation when the force of torsion is removed. Applying this formula to solar rotation, we have Mile We a OF 9, f= Die 10 gt? se But gé is the velocity which would be communicated by gravity, at Sun’s surface, in one oscillation of half-rotation, or the velocity of light ; g@ is the modulus of light at Sun’s surface ; a? 7, is the theoretical length of a pendulum, at Sun’s surface, which would oscillate once in each half- rotation ; a7, is the length of an equatorial radius rotating with Sun and having the superficial orbital velocity, Vgr, at its remote extremity. These are the same results as have been already derived from simple gravi- tating and radiodynamic considerations, Notes 17, 48, 100, etc. Their statement in this form may be satisfactory to some readers who have not followed the foregoing investigations through all their details. fr, = =z Chase. ] 240 [April 21, 163. Harmonie Categories. The simple discovery of so many harmonies, in all departments of physical science, would be interesting, even if it were accidental or wholly empirical. The fact that the discovery has sprung from systematic in- vestigations, under the guidance of well-known laws, adds much to its importance. The following results seem to be especially important, and somewhat typical. 1. The equality of gt, in the solar oscillations of half-rotation, to the velocity of light. Notes 17, 162, etc. ‘2. The relations of mass and v/s viva which satisfy cosmical tendencies | to nodality, subsidence, oscillation and orbital revolution. Notes 5, 23, 79, 91, 156, 158-61. 3. The far-reaching evidence of elastic influence which establishes measurable progressive relations between the solar system and the fixed stars. Notes 46, 111-5, 130-2, 155. 4. The simplicity of the relations between elastic and cosmical vis viva, which furnish data for approximate estimates of Sun’s mass and distance by means of barometric fluctuations. Notes 104-5. 5. The relations of magnetic and cosmical vis viva, together with the evidence which they furnish of the dependence of solar and lunar mag- netic disturbances upon thermal and tidal influences. Notes 2, 116-22, 125-6. 6. The curiously symmetric harmony in Mars and its satellite-system. Note 28. ‘ 7. The varied harmonies of spectral lines, together with the relations of planetary positions to luminous nodes. Notes 36-45, 109, 141-2, 144-53, 157. 8. The confirmations of predictions which were founded upon evidences of the influence of harmonic laws. Notes 33, 133, ete. 9. The interchangeable convertibility of physical units. Notes 90, 96. 10. Atomic phyllotaxy. Notes 135-9, 143. Although Gerber’s divisors were found empirically, they represent natural elementary groups. His utter want of suspicion that they had any physical meaning makes them “ much more important than they would have been if his investigations had been biased by a preconceived hypothesis. The kinetic theory of gases necessitates harmonic action, and the tendency to division in extreme and : mean ratio leads to one of the most simple kinds of harmony. There is : no necessary inconsistency between the doctrine of atomic phyllotaxy and Prout’s hypothesis. 164. Mercury's Virtual Area. The fundamental ratio of successive virtual areas, 3, represents the ratio of the locus of linear centre of gravity of a simple pendulum to the locus of its centre of oscillation, as well as the exponential ratio of nucleation to limitation in an elastic medium. The intermediate step between the har- monic areas for Mars and Venus, Note 159, may, perhaps, be distributed, a 1882,] 241 [Chase. partly among the asteroids, partly in satisfying special requirements of the dense belt, and partly in the variations of ethereal vis viva. The mass of Mercury is so imperfectly known that it is unsafe to put much trust in the accuracy of any merely harmonic indications of its value, but its virtual area is unquestionably of the same order of magnitude as (#)? of that of Mars, or 72.2, of that of Earth. This would give, for an approxi- mate estimate of the quotient of Sun’s mass by that of Mercury, 4054440. The two intermediate steps may, perhaps, be partly absorbed by the intra- Mercurial harmonic nodes and the meteoroids of the zodiacal light. 165. Relative Masses of Neptune and Mars.. An intermediate step between the virtual areas (Note 159) and the nodal. masses (Note 156), is indicated by the ratio between the masses at the outer limits of the supra-asteroidal and the intra-asteroidal belts. The quotient of the square of Neptune’s harmonic virtual area, 22.6442, by its harmonic radius, 30.036*, is 17.071; the quotient of the squared area of Mars, (3)°, by its harmonic radius, 1.669, is .10664 ; the ratio of the masses and the mass-ratio of Sun to Mars are approximately shown in the follow- ing proportions : Mz 2M, : + 17.071 : 10664 2: 160.09 : 1 m, :m,:: (160.09 K 19380 = 8102544) :1 166. Various Harmonic Indications and Tests. If x represents Earth’s limiting nucleal radius (Note 159), the corres- ponding atmospheric radius would be «3 = 43.653. Herschel’s locus of incipient subsidence, in the controlling two-planet belt, or Saturn’s secular aphelion, is 1.0843289 times the outer limiting locus of the belt (Stockwell, Smithson. Contrib., 232, p. 38); xs —- 1.0843289 — 40.258, which is, with close approximation, the ratio of the instantaneous virtual area at the inner locus of the controlling belt, to the corresponding area at the chief centre of condensation. The tendency of exponents, in elastic media, to become coefficients of elastic vis viva, is shown in Note 159. If we use the sym- metrical harmonic areas for Mars and Mercury, the percentages of differ- ence between the harmonic and virtual areas are, respectively, 2 of -O1, 4 of .01, + of .01, ¢ of .01, 4 of .01, .045, .099. In testing the com- bined harmonic influences of a vera causa which is subject to internal per- turbations, there is room for a possible deviation of 50 per cent. and a probable deviation of 25 per cent. The combined probability that the approximations in Note 159 are owing to ethereal influence is, therefore, 30 x 275 « 175 x 425 K 175 K 32 x 252 = 15664091727 : 1. The following points of symmetry and alternation may be noted in the nodal mass-factors of the two outer planets, Note 156: . 1. The tendency to equality of mean orbital o7s viva in Earth, Uranus and Neptune, as indicated by the factors 7,, 7, and 7/;. *Proc. Am. Ph. Soc., xiii, 239. @ Ye ae PRS aa eee x , , ~ Chase.] 242 {April 21, 2. The nodal modification of Neptune’s mass by Earth’s secular aphelion, and of the mass of Uranus by Earth’s secular perihelion. 3. The nodal modification of Neptune’s mass by its own mean perihelion, and of the mass of Uranus by its own mean aphelion. 4. The modification of Uranus by Jupiter, and the corresponding modi- fication of Neptune by Uranus. 167. Earth’s Modulus of Rotation and Jupiter’s Eccentricity. Let gs represent the sum of the gravitating accelerations of Sun and Earth at Earth’s equatorial surface ; ¢, time of Earth’s rotary oscillation (4 sidereal day); Pos Sun’s equatorial semi-diameter; 7,, Earth’s semi- diameter; p,, mean projection of centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter from p,; pa po Jupiter’s maximum secular eccentricity ; ps, Earth’s semi-axis major ; Ipts Earth’s modulus of rotation. Then Int > 032? Pa * po The photodynamic or oscillatory values of Sun’s mass and distance, Note 2 91, give for Sun’s gravitating acceleration of Earth = () = 331776 x 3 3 (3962.8 —- 92785700)? = .000605184 of Earth’s equatorial gravitating accel- eration., If we adopt Everett’s value for g, Ip? = 1.000605184 ~« 32.091 X 43082? -- 5280 = 5643840 miles ; p, + p, =.0608265. Stockwell’s value (Smith. Cont., 232, p. 38), is .0608274. 168. Amis of Central Subsidence and Rupture. The influence of the interstellar photodynamic paraboloid is shown in the boundaries of the belt of greatest condensation. The locus of incipi- ent rupture, Mercury’s secular perihelion, is about + of the locus of incipi- ent subsidence, secularaphelion of Mars. Stockwell’s values for the two loci are .2974008 and 1.736478. This gives for the major axis of the several in- cipient ellipses, described by the subsiding particles from the outer portion of the belt, .2974008 + 1.736478 = 2.0338788. Let go, g, represent equa- torial superficial gravitating acceleration of Sun, Earth, respectively ; mz, ms, masses of Jupiter, Earth ; ta, time of Jupiter’s orbital revolution ; ¢g, time of Earth’s rotation ; ps, Earth’s semi-axis major ; p,, asteroidal radius equivalent to major axis of incipient ellipses of dense belt. Then breed 2 | tp Ms, i eae UP 4332.58482 — 316.617 x 2.0338788 = a = 27.8316 3 ™, x Ds (2) Mes 5) Pe Ns SLE: -oigeia sme. 1882.] 243 (Chase. To Vie yo0) & 7) = 109.183 x 3962.8 = 432669 miles. py “+ 7, = 927857100 + 432669 = 214.45 These results may be compared with those which were given in Notes 91, 113 and 156, the extreme range of difference being less than ~; of one per cent. 169. Harth’s Incipient Subsidence. If the various relations which are shown in the foregoing note are due to Earth’s atmospheric and nucleal subsidence from the centre of the 4 dense belt a —"o160504), its secular aphelion should be () — 1.0695. Stockwell gives (op cit., p. 38) 1.0677352, upon the assumption that ma, = 368689. On page xi of his Introduction he gives 1.0693888 ; on page xvii he gives a series of values which yield, by interpolation, m, 1.0691 for the photodynamic mass-ratio, ~° = 331776. 3 170. Progression of Fundamental Atomicities. ’ Thomas Bailey, (Phil. Mag., Jan. 1882, p. 35), gives a series of atomic weights corresponding to minimum volumes, which are members of the geometric series a, ab, ab’, ab’, ab‘, the value of } being § of a@ and the value of @ being 10. This suggests an atomic parabolic motion, like that in the photodynamic or interstellar paraboloid, in which =}. We may also notice that 6 is the product of the two phyllotactic numbers, 2 and 3. 171. Perissad Phyllotaxy. The indications of phyllotactic tendency in various departments of physics, have induced me to test Gerber’s groupings of chemical atoms by methods which seem to me to be perfectly legitimate. In order to remove all effects of personal equation or bias, as well as of accidental or empirical coincidence, I adopt Clarke’s recalculation of atomic weights (Phil. Mag. [5] 12, 109-10), and my strictly phyllotactic divisors (Note 136), instead of Gerber’s empirical divisors. In view of the @ priori prob- ability of tendency to division in extreme and mean ratio, I assume that the ratio of probability to improbability, in each instance, is equivalent to at least 1 D : (T—O) ; D being the phyllotactic divisor, 7’ the theoretical atomic weight or nearest exact multiple of D, and O the observed atomic weight taken from Clarke’s table. I have added Rb and T!1 to Gerber’s list of monatomic elements, and Bo to bis trivalent list. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 2H. PRINTED MAY 232, 1882. Chase.) Monatomic Group ; D, = .768. Tr. “Oe T-O. Probability. Li 9D, 6.912 7.007 .095 192: 95 Na 30 D, 23.040 22.998 .042 192: 42 K 51 D, 39.168 39.019 .149 192 : 149 Cs 17a 132.864 132.583 .281 192 2281 Fl 25 D, 19.200 18.984 -216 192 : 216 Cl 46 D, 39.328 39.370 -042 192: 42 Br 104D, 79.872 79.768 104 192 : 104 I 165 D, 126.720 126.557 .163 192 : 163 Ag 140D, 107.520 107.675 .155 192 : 155 Rb 111 D, 85.248 85.251 .003 408 2S Tl 265 D, 203.520 203.715 .195 192 : 195 Three of the elements, Cs, Fl and TI, indicate © robability that the phyllotactic approximation may be merely accidental. The aggregate probability that the combining equivalents of the monatomic elements are modified by phyllotactic tendencies, or the product of all the separate prob- abilities, is more than 5610 times as great as the probability that the ap- proximations are accidental. N 1B As Sb Bi Au Bo 9D, 20 D, 48 D, "7D, 133 D, 126 D, 7D, >> 668375000 : 1. O Ss Se Te Mg Ca Sr Ba C 244 Trivalent Group ; D, = 1.559. 7. 14.031 31.180 74.882 120.043 207.347 196.434 10.913 oO. 14.021 30.958 74.918 119.955 207.523 196.155 10.941 T-O. .010 222 086 088 .176 279° 028 All the indications in this group are in favor of phyllotactic the aggregate ratio of probabilities being more than 108426 : 1. ing this by the monatomic ratio we get, for the aggregate perissad ratio, 172. Artiad Phyllotaxy. {April 21, Probability. 389.75 : 10 389.75 : 222 389.75 : 86 389.75 : 83 389.75 : 176 389.75 : 279 389.75 : 28 Di- or Tetratomie Group ; D, = 1.996. 8D, 16 D, 40 D, 64 D, 12 D, 20 D, 44D, 69 D, 6D, SMe 15.968 31.936 79.840 127.744 23.952 39.920 87.824 137.724 11.976 oO. 15.963 31.984 78.797 127.960 23.959 39.990 87.374 136.763 11.974 T-O. 005 .048 1.043 -216 -007 070 450 961 -002 Probability. 499 : 5 499: 48 499 : 1043 499. 216 499 : if 499: ‘70 499 : 450 499 : 961 499: 2 influences, Multiply- Spe heros ¥ . . - ¢ 1882,] 245 (Chase. 3 0. T-O. Probability. Si 14D, 27.944 28.195 .251 499 : 251 Ti 25 D, 49.900 49,846 054 499: 54 Zr, -45.D, 89.820 89.367 453 499 : 453 Sn 59D, 117.764 117.698 .066 499 : 66 Hg 100D, 199.600 199.712 .112 499 : 112 Mo 48D, 95.808 95.527. .281 499 : 281 Ww 92 D, 183.632 183.610 .022 499 : 22 U 60 D, 119.760 119.241 519 499 : 519 Two of these elements, Se and U, give adverse indications ; the aggre- gate ratio of favorable to adverse probabilities is more than 17173770000000 : 1. I have taken 4 of Clarke’s estimate for U, in order to compare it with Gerber’s assumed atomicity. Supplementary Artiad Group. Barker, in Johnson’s Cyclopedia, gives other artiad elements which Ger- ber places in his group of metals. In order to complete the comparisons which are based upon valency they are inserted here : p; O. T-O. Probability. Gl i 1b 13.972 13.695 2t7 499 : 277 Al 14 D, 27.944 27.009 935 499 : 935 In 57 D, 113.772 113.398 .ot4 499 : 374 Zn 33 D, 65.868 64.905 .963 499 : 963 Cd 56 D, 111.776 111.770 .006 499: 6 Cu 32 D, 63.872 63.173 .699 499 : 699 Pp 103 D; 205.588 206.471 .883 499 : 883 Pd 53 D, 105.788 105.737 051 499: 51 Pt 97 D, 193.612 194.415 .803 499 : 803 Yt 45 D, 89.820 89.816 004 499: 4 Ce 70 D, 139.720 140.424 . 704 499 : 704 La 69 D, 137.724 138.526 .802 499 : 802 Di 72 D, 143.712 144.57 .861 499 : 861 Er 83 D, 165.668 165.891 223 499 : 223 ii yeaa bya De 233.002 233.414 .118 499 : 118 Cr 26 D, 51.896 52.009 118 499 : 113 Fe 28 D, 55.888 55.913 .025 499 : 2d Mn 27 D, 53.892 53.906 014 499: 14 Ni 29 D, 57.884 57.928 .044 499 : 44 Co 30 D, 59.880 58.887 .993 499 : 993 Ru 52 D, 103.792 104.217 425 499 : 425 Rh 52 D, 103.792 104.055 .263 499 : 263 Ir SH LD) 193.612 192.651 961 499 : 961 Os 99 D, 197.604 198.494 .890 499 : 890 The first sub-group, Glucinum to Thorium, inclusive, consists of dyads Chase. | 246 [April 21, and tetrads, and gives 40911 :1 for the combined ratio of probabilities. The other sub-group is hexad, giving the aggregate ratio 11611 :1. The total aggregate ratio of the artiad elements is more than 81585(10)" : 1. 173. Metallic Phyllotazy. D, = 1.247. rT. oO. T-O. Probability. Gl da ESI Dp 13.717 13.972 250 311.75 : 255 Al” “22:D; 27.434 27.009 425 311.75 : 425 Se” veprDy 43.645 43.980 .300 311.75 : 335 Cr 42D, 52.374 52.009 B69 311.75 : 365 Fe 4D, 56.115 55.913 .202 311.75 : 202 Ga 55D), 68.585 68.854 .269 311.75 : 269 In 91D; 113.477 113.598 .079 611.75 : 79 in 92D, 64.844 64.905 061 311.75 : 61 Cd .90D, 112.230 111.770 460 311.75 : 460 Mn 43D, 53.621 53.906 285 311.75 : 285 Ni ~ 46D, 57.362 57.928 566 _811.75 : 566 Co 47D, 58.609 58.887 278 311.75 : 278 Cu : 51D, 63.597 63.173 424 311.75 : 424 by e1667D) 207.002 206.471 ool 311.75 : 531 Tl -163:D, 208.261 203.715 454 311.75 : 454 Rb 68D, 84.796 85.251 455 311.75 : 455 Ru 84D, 104.748 104.217 Oa 311.75 : 531 Rh 83D, 103.501 104.055 bd4 311.75 : 554 Pad 85D, 105.995 105.737 258 311.75 : 258 Ir 154D, 192.038 192.651 .613 811.75 : 613 Bi Lob, 194.532 194.415 Bay olla ALi Os), 159 D, 198.273 198.494 221 311.75 : 221 Mir <4f2-D, 89.784 89.816 .032 311.75 : 382 Cee lass, 140.911 140.424 487 S1L95/48T hn \ 6 La 1aieD, 138.417 138.526 .109 311.75 : 109 Diy iG, 144.652 144.573 .079 SH rh Er 133 D, 165.851 165.891 040 311.75 : 40 Th 187 D, 233.189 233.414 220 311.75 : 225 The aggregate ratio is 1386.8 : 1, the mean ratio for a single comparison being somewhat less than 4:3. The indication of phyllotactic tendency is, therefore, comparatively slight, and far less satisfactory than in the grouping according to valency. 174. General Test of Atomic Phyllotazy. Computors who are accustomed to calculations of probable error, and who have not given any special attention to the harmonic influences of wthereal vibrations, may, perhaps, question the propriety of making any allowance for an @ priori probability of division in extreme and mean ratio. For the satisfaction of all doubts upon this point it may be well to apply “7 = ~~ i+ 1882.] 247 [Chase. some test which will be rigid enough to fulfill the broadest requirements of mathematical likelihood. If we substitute 8, D, for } D, in the ratio of probability to improbability, we provide for requirements of linear oscilla- tion, orbital motion and gravitating tendency. . In such limited ranges of comparison as are possible for the chemical elements, most mathematicians would, perhaps, be satisfied with this substitution. All doubt should be removed by introducing the coefficient of probable error, .674489, and using .674489 & + D = .168622 D. If we let 7 represent the number of terms in a given group, the ratios of probability, which have been found in Notes 171-3, should be multiplied by .674489”, in order to give results which are entirely independent of any a@ priori assumption. We then find For the monatomic group, Note 171 73.75 21 «« trivalent ee a Wy i 6885.88 : 1 «« di-ortetratomic ‘‘ rae 5 21253910000.00 : 1 < 6.5 3 xX 6.3 i yab Gaya! Sa fees 18) 3<-7.0 15 X72 29 x 7.0 12 ta: 2x 7.0 Pit: Sey Gea (rr 10 x 7.5 yes eerie | 30 « 6.9 28 X 7.0 2x 5.5 2x 8.0 4x 8.0 10 x 7.9 16 x 8.0 3 xX 8.0 5 x 8.0 11 x 7.9 17 x 8.0 1 x 12.0 4x 7.0 6 x 8.3 £1 8.1 15°>< 7758 25 x 8.0 12 x 8.0 30 x 7.9 1x 9.1 3 x 9.0 OSA: {April 21, In the | : | 1882] 267 [Chase. D Sr c by Fe 6.3 .0500 7x 8.0 .0000 Ga 5.5 .0833 9x 7.7 .0375 In 6.5 .0833 WAS SGe Su .0125 Zn Go .0167 18 x 8.1 .0125 Cd 6. .0000 14 x 8.0 .0000 Mn 6.7 .1167 iS ola 087 Ni 6.4 ~ .0667 1G Oo -0375 Co 6.3 .0500 1x 8.4 .0500 Cu 6. .0000 Seo .0125 Pb 6.3 .0500 26 x 7.9 .0125 Ru 6.3 -0500 13 x 8.0 .0000 Rd 6. .0000 13 x 8.0 .0000 Pd 6.3 .0500 13 X 8.1 .0125 Ibe 6.3 .0500 24 x 8.0 .0000 Pt 6.3 .0500 24 x 8.1 .0125 Os 6.2 .0333 20 X 7.9 -0125 Ce 6.3 .0500 18 x 7.8 .0250 La 6.2 .03383 aly( aye .0125 Di 6.4 .0667 18 x 8.0 .0000 This comparison shows that the general deviations from Dulong and Petit’s law, while they are of the same order of magnitude, are much greater than the deviations from the perissad and artiad divisors. 209. Secondary Character of Perissad Phyllotazy. Although the fractions which are formed by successive approximations to the surd divisors represent phyllotactic dextro- and levo-gyration, other series of a higher order may spring from greater initial differences. If we skip the first even number, we get the series 1, 3, 4, 7, 11, 18, etc. Hence we see that the fundamental perissad and artiad divisors both start from the phyllotactic number which most nearly represents the first surd divisor, 3, and are formed by adding the next artiad number for the peris- sad divisor, and the next perissad number for the artiad divisor. The co- efficient of atomic heat is also formed from the same representative of division in extreme and mean ratio by taking its simplest artiad multi- ple, 2 x 3. 210. Comparison of Probabilities. In looking more closely into the deviations which are given in Note 208, we find the following indications of superiority in the perissad and artiad divisors : 1. The approximation of the observed values within .05 of the theoreti- cal values occurs 19 times in my columns, and only 9 times in those of Dulong and Petit. 2. The average deviations are, 0, = .0642; 3, = .0344. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOc. xx. 111. 2H. PRINTED JUNE 3, 1882. : 9 >. i Chase.] 268 [April 21, 3. The sums of the logarithms of the reciprocals of deviation, which indicate the aggregate relative probabilities of normal influence, are : 70.4555173 ; 89.2627807. 4. The ratio of aggregate probabilities is; therefore, P, : P, : : 1 > 64159 (10). The ratio of mean probabilities, PS, is P, : MP, :.: 1 : 2.1976. 5. Testing the hydrogen unit in a like way, I find the average deviation, ds == .0024 ; Y log (1+ 03) = 152.5459742 ; log. relative probability, taking Py as the unit, 82.0904569. This gives, P, = 12315 (10); p, = 31.0852. 6. In accordance with the principle of least squares, these values of p should be reduced inversely as the fundamental divisors. This gives DP, 2 Po Ps: Py::1:1.71 : 4.44: 5.08; log (P, + P) = 12.8482860; log (P; = P,) = 35.6100415 ; log (P, + P,) = 38.8306765 ; p, and P, being re- -spectively, the mean and aggregate probabilities of the phyllotactic divisors (Note 181). The corresponding mean relative probabilities for S,, S,, and Gerber’s divisors are respectively, 2.78, 2.45, 4.72. 211. Suggestions for Further Investigation. The ratio. between p, and p,, in the foregoing note, has been gradually diminished by successive approximations, and by making allowance for theoretical considerations, which have seemed to justify the adoption of some exact multiple or submultiple of an atomic weight which had been pre- viously accepted. The ratio between p, and p,, favorable as it already is for the latter, is based upon a comparison of the latest revision of the atomic heats with the first crude application of the perissad and artiad divi- sors. If Dulong and Petit’s law is entitled to great weight in determi- nations of atomicity, a still stronger claim may be urged in behalf of divisors which have a mean probability that is more than 70 per cent. greater. If Dumas’s proposed modification of Prout’s hypothesis were applied to Siand Cr, their atomicities would be very closely represented by 3 xX 8 and 13 x 8; P is very nearly 3 xX 8 X 7, or very nearly 4? of the monatomic phyllotactic divisor ; Na is about 30 times the monatomic divisor or 2 x 11, 11 being the phyllotactic number which follows 7 in the secondary series (Note 209); Bo is 7.018 times its proper phyllotactic divisor. Si, Cr, Na and P may, perhaps, have tendencies towards the opposite group, perissad or artiad, the investigation of which may throw light upon the beginnings of valency. 212. Chemical Hlectricity. Davy’s discovery of potassium laid the foundation of electrolysis, intro- ducing polarity as an important modifier of chemical attraction. The at- tractions and repulsions of Sir William Thomson’s hypothetical vortex- : atoms involve gyroscopic tendencies to maintain uniform planes of rota- tion, which must aid the normal arrangements of «ethereal particles (Proce. Am. Phil. Soc., xii, 408) in the determination of axial and polar, centri- fugal and centripetal relations. Hence arise various combinations of 1882.] 269) [Chase.’ motion and tendencies to motion, which are obedient to simple mechanical laws, and which give rise to the different classes of radiodynamic phe- nomena which we call gravitating, electric, magnetic, thermal, chemical, etc. In consequence of the universality of motion, which seems to make absolute equilibrium an absolute impossibility, the tendencies to division in extreme and mean ratio are never repeated in the same exact plane, but they partake of a more or less intricate spiral character, such as is uni- formly shown in vegetable growth. The comparative relative stability of axes, even in ultimate molecules and atoms, must produce ethereal oscilla- tions which are parallel to the axis, as well as those which are radial and tangential (Op. cit., ix, 408), giving rise to solenoidal currents, such as are assumed in Ampére’s hypothesis. 213. Harth’s ‘‘ Pulsation Period.’’ Proctor (Contemporary Rev., March, 1882, p. 479), speaks of ‘‘the time when the Earth’s rotation began to approach to synchronism with her pulsa- tion period ”’ or ‘‘the period of vibration of her mass after any impulse (af-° fecting the whole Earth) had been received from without. The Earth would as certainly have had such a pulsation period as the vibrating substance of a bell has.’’ This admission is interesting as an evidence of increasing recog- nition of the truths which are involved in Herschel’s doctrine of nebular elasticity or quasi-elasticity, and which are the groundwork of all my har-- monic researches. Proctor, however, in trying to explain the supposed retardation of Earth’s rotation, overlooks the more than three hundred- fold acceleration which Laplace’s hypothesis would require. 214. The ‘‘ Reproach’’ of Thermodynamics. The hypothesis that stellar systems are cooling, condensing and giving out heat, imparting their o¢s viva to the luminiferous ether without receiv- ing anything in return, and that, consequently, all things are tending to ultimate physical stagnation and universal death, is so unphilosophical and altogether unsatisfactory as to show that some important element must have been overlooked. If we were granted infinite elasticity, or a medium acting under elastic laws but without density, Laplace’s supposed instantaneous transmission of gravitating action might be represented by well-known physical formule. In other words, if we could conceive of a material medium endowed with qualities which are not material, some of: the difficulties of pure materialism would be removed. What name could be given to such a medium, but spirit? Spiritual, conscious, ‘‘upholding’’ and controlling power is conceivable ; without such a conception, the most important of all phenomena are wholly inexplicable. Any hypothe- sis that an unconscious universe could ever have wound itself up like a clock, is childish ; the belief that, after having wound itself up, it would: allow itself to run down without winding itself up again is more: childish still.. The confession that we can see no escape from'final stag- ») Chase. ] 270 [April 21, nation imposes no restraint on the universe ; it is only a confession of our own shortsightedness. He who sees the necessity of a Wise, Everlasting and Almighty Omnipresence, also sees that the present order of things must continue as long as its Ruler wills. He who sees that the Omnipres- ent Power acts ‘‘in ways which may be represented by harmonic or cycli- cal undulations in an elastic medium,’’ also sees that more is implied in the equality of elastic action and reaction than has yet been fathomed by the sounding line of the most skillful analysis. 215. Tides. The danger of hasty generalizations from investigations which are neces- sarily of a partial character, is well illustrated by the various speculations which have been set forthabout tidal action. The equilibrium-hypothesis and each of the dynamic hypotheses have severally considered important rela- tions and interactions between the disturbed and disturbing bodies, but the incompleteness of them all is shown by our inability yet to explain some of the phenomena which are of daily occurrence, as well as by our com- plete ignorance as to the normal position of the tidal crests. Bernouilli, and Laplace for certain mean depths of ocean, assumed that it should be high water under the moon; Laplace for other depths, Delaunay and Airy have given satisfactory evidences of tendencies to high tide when the moon is in the horizon ; sailors have a prevalent belief that the high water, in mid-ocean, lags about three hours behind the moon; many mathematicians think that either friction or inertia may produce such lagging, but it has never been shown that there is any tidal friction, or that inertia can delay any normal tidal action. Some of the most satisfactory results have been reached through considerations of the elasticity which is involved in wave-propagation, but the inter-molecular elasticity, the extent to which the several particles of water are free to fall towards. or recede from the attracting body, and the variations of weight conse- quent on variations of gravitating tendency, have not been sufficiently studied. 216. Barometric Analogy. Fortunately, upon at least one of the foregoing points, we can ask nature a simple question, to which she gives a satisfactory answer. Is there any evidence of tidal disturbance of weight? Yes, in the daily fluctuations of the barometer. They are certainly tidal, even if we fail to see in them any likeness to the ocean tides. The air, which is heated and expanded by the sun’s rays, is carried forward by the earth, in its orbital revolution and daily rotation, with a continual tendency of each particle to maintain the instantaneous direction of its motion. This tendency is represented, not by the simple momentum of the particles, but by their vis viva, and is ac- companied by gravitating tendencies, which are sometimes antagonistic and sometimes co-operative, towards the earth and towards the sun. Their own elasticity concurs with the elasticity of any intervening me- ee 1882. ] 271 (Chase. dium, in adjusting their relative positions to the ever-varying requirements of equilibrium, and causing harmonic oscillations which are easily trace- able by means of systematic barometric observations. There can be no friction, provided the adjustments are made by the simple approach or separation of particles, and such appears to be the case. In the most thorough series of observations that has been published for any station near the equator, the harmonic oscillations are of the simplest character conceivable, representing the quarter-daily sums of the instantaneous ten- dencies and the changes in atmospheric weight so accurately as to give an estimate of Sun’s distance, which differs by less than one-half of one per cent. from the latest astronomical estimates (Proc. Am. Ph. Soc., ix, 287; x, 375-6, foot note.) 217. Ratio of Tidal Adjustments. Sir William Thomson has found a partial solution of the theoretical re- quirements of terrestrial rigidity, in his theory of vortex atoms. Perhaps the solution may be completed by supposing an intermolecular elasticity which is greater than that of glass, instead of a rigidity which is greater than that of glass. The influence of atmospheric pressure on the height of ocean tides, which has been noticed by many observers, suggests the likelihood that the whole mass of the earth may contribute to the adjust- ments of equilibrium which satisfy tidal tendencies. If that is the case, the entire change which would be required in the distance between any two molecular centres is less than zy 93557 Of their mean distance, even at the spring tides, when the sun and moon combine their disturbing ener- gies. The whole adjustment might be accomplished, through ethereal elasticity, in less than ,'; of a second, but it only needs to be accomplished four times in about 25 hours. 218. Summation of Tendencies. The triumphs of calculus spring from the fact that its differentials repre- sent only tendencies and its integrals are summations of tendencies. No integration or series of integrations can be rightly looked upon as con- clusive, unless it has been extended to all the tendencies which can have any bearing upon the problem which we are examining. Nothing is more certain than mathematics, except our knowledge of our own spiritual existence and faculties. Neither in mathematics nor in psychology, how- ever, is it safe to assign any value to our results beyond their necessary re- lations to the data from which they were obtained. Delaunay’s hypothe- sis of tidal friction undoubtedly follows from his postulates, and if we ac- cept it, we may be satisfied with the explanation which it gives of appar- ent lunar retardation, but his postulates are not all axiomatic ; they do not cover the whole ground ; and the errors in the lunar tables may spring from some portion of a cycle of mutually compensating perturbations. The tidal tendencies are towards accelerated rotation in two of the quad- Chase. ] 272 [April 21, rants and towards retarded rotation in the other two, the sum of the ac- celerating being exactly equal to the sum of the retarding tendencies. No evidence has ever been adduced of any actual lagging of the water to maintain the normal position of the tidal crests relatively to the moon. There are many reasons for believing that the apparent westward motion, with a mean equatorial velocity of 1000 miles an hour, is only a motion of form, maintained by the combined influences of intermolecular elasticity, atomic elasticity or quasi-elasticity, variations of pressure on account of varying attraction, and such wave propagation as may be needed for the adjustment of opposite meridional and horizontal, static and dynamic ten- dencies. The adjustment may be brought about, as I have shown in Note 217, without any frictional diminution of the speed of rotation. 219. The Moon and the Chief Planetary Belt. _. The importance of Earth’s position, at the centre of the belt of greatest condensation, is further shown by the harmonic reactions between the Jupiter-Saturnian belt and Earth, with its satellite. The shortening of rotation-period which would represent a nebular contraction of Sun from Jupiter’s to Earth’s mean locus, corresponds to the shortening which would represent a contraction from Moon’s semi-axis major to Laplace’s terrestrial limit ; the ratio between Moon’s synodic and sidereal periods corresponds to the ratio between the locus of Saturn’s incipient subsidence - (secular aphelion) and axis-major.. The time of rotation, in an expanding or contracting nebula, varies inversely as the square of radius : (ps + p,)* = 5.2028? = 27.06912. Sidereal month —- day — 27.32166. Synodic -~ sidereal-month = 1.08087. Saturn’s sec. aph. - mean* = 1.08433. 220. Stability of Rotation-Periods. The relations of stellar rotation to oscillations which are propagated with the velocity of light, the relations of primary planetary rotation to planetary revolution, the relations of molecular rotation to electric, mag- netic and tidal phenomena, the constancy of tendencies to harmonic oscil- lation, the confirmation of nebular theories which is afforded by the foregoing note, and the principle that no change in the vis viva of a system can take place without foreign action, all indicate a stability of rotation which is inconsistent with the hypothesis of tidal friction. Moreover, the closeness of accordance between the mean daily thermal and hygrometric adjustments of elasticity and the tidal variations of at- mospheric pressure (Proc. Am. Ph. Soc., ta, 284-6, 291-3, 846-8), an ac- cordance which is also shown in the lunar-monthly barometric tides (/b., 395-9 ; Proc. Roy. Soc. xiii, 329-33), furnishes additional grounds for be- lieving that rotation is only modified revolution, that its period is deter- * Aecording to Stockwell. stil ~~ -1882.] ‘ 273 (Chase. ‘mined by a summation of all the tendencies to revolution which bear upon each and all the molecules of the rotating body, and that tidal variations of weight or pressure are as important in earth- and ocean-tides as in at- mospheric tides. 221. “There is much Virtue in If.”’ Some extracts from a lecture by Dr. Ball, the Astronomer Royal of Treland, have lately been largely copied by the newspapers. They con- tain a statement that the moon was once only 40,000 miles away, and that it thus acted asa geological engine of transcendent power. The state- ‘ment is somewhat qualified by the proviso that if the present tides are three feet, and if the early tides were 216 times their present amount, then it is plain that the ancient tides must have been 648 feet. This qualifica- tion is not sufficient, and it is misleading, because it will be generally un- derstood as covering all the points about which there is any uncertainty. Science in its claims of exactness, cannot afford to hazard any claims which can be easily refuted. It is true that there are many astronomers who believe that Delaunay’s views are correct, but there are probably few , who think that they have been conclusively demonstrated. If the moon pulls the ocean-waters around the earth, in a direction opposite to its daily rotation, at the rate of a thousand miles an hour, or at any less rate ; if the friction, which would result from such a pull, is not compensated in some way which is not yet fully known ; if-there is a bulge of tidal water which cannot fully keep up with the moon, and which, by its attraction on the moon, tends to retard its orbital velocity; ifall the mathematical - conclusions which it seems reasonable to draw from such supposed retard- ation are correct, and if the ‘‘reproach’’ of thermodynamics must be ac- cepted without qualification, the moon may be receding from the earth. 222. Weakness of the Postulates. In examining the provisos of the foregoing note, we find :—In the first place, no tidal currents have ever been observed which indicate a lagging tendency in ocean waters. Secondly, there is no evidence whatever to show that the earth’s rotation has been retarded by friction. Thirdly, there is no evidence to show that the moon’s orbital motion has been re- tarded by the ocean tides. Fourthly, the number of elements which must enter into any calculation of planetary disturbances is so great that no prudent mathematician ever looks for more than an approximation .to such results as he desires. Fifthly, the difficulties which are encountered in trying to explain irregularities of orbital motion, are vastly enhanced when we come to deal with the complicated tendencies of planetary rota- tion. Sixthly, there is as much reason to believe that the moon may be gradually falling to the earth, as there is to believe that the earth may be gradually falling to the sun. Seventhly, the accelerating and retarding tendencies of xtheréal elasticity and resistance are but little understood. Righthly, all of the possible compensatory adjustments, to which I havé Chase.] 274 [April 21, referred in foregoing notes, should be thoroughly investigated before forming any conclusive opinion respecting Delaunay’s hypothesis. Ninth- ly, even after such investigation, the remembrance of other possible un- known influences should prevent anything like dogmatical assertion. 223. The ‘‘Ifs’’ of Elasticity. I shall not shrink from any criticism such as is implied in the following ‘‘retort courteous’’: If there isa universal «ethereal medium ; if it is endowed with an elasticity somewhat like that of gases ; if its velocity of wave-propagation can be expressed by the ordinary formula of relation between elasticity and density ; if the Jaws of harmonic vibration in elastic media, which have been mathematically deduced, are correct; if the wthereal vis viva can be shared with chemical atoms and cosmical masses ; if nebular ‘‘subsidence’’ has been governed by the laws of gravitation ; if all kinds of energy are simple functions of mass and velocity, and ‘‘if all the mathematical conclusions which it seems reasonable to draw from’’ these hypotheses are correct, the general postulate that ‘‘ali physical phenomena are due to an Omnipresent Power, acting in ways which may be represented by harmonic or cyclical undulations in an elastic medium ”’ may be accepted as a good working hypothesis. 224. Acceptance of the Issue. These provisos cover the whole ground, as fully as I could wish. Ihave never claimed, nor have I believed, that any scientific thesis can be freed from the limitations which are involved in its fundamental assumptions. While I fully believe in the impossibility of anything acting except where it is, in the existence of a universal elastic medium which is governed by radiodynamic and harmonic laws, and in the uniformity of physical force, Tam well aware that they are incapable of mathematical demonstration and I have repeatedly acknowledged that the nebular and zxthereal hypotheses have no scientific value beyond such helpfui codrdination ot phenomena as they may furnish. The tidal ‘‘ifs’’ are mere assumptions, adduced in order to account foran apparent retardation which is altogether problematical and which, if it should prove to be real, may be followed by an equivalent acceleration ; the elastic ‘‘ifs’’ are all intrinsically proba. ble, and instead of having been assumed for a special purpose they repre- sent simple and natural generalizations from a wide range of independent physical phenomena. The tidal ifs are like Bacon’s ‘‘ barren virgins ;”’ the elastic ifs have already led to the discovery of a vast number of natural harmonies and the field for further like discovery widens so rapidly that every physical atom seems to contribute its individual melody, to the ever- resounding and ever-changing choral strains which constitute the music of the spheres. Although centripetal and centrifugal activities may be _ expressed by identical formule, it is difficult, if not impossible, to form any definite conception of attracting pulls. Elastic thrusts are exemplified by évery breath that we draw, every object that we see, every sound that ' q 1882.] 275 [Chase. we hear, and Anderssohn* has experimentally shown that they can ade- quately represent all varieties of gravitating and electromagnetic phe- nomena. 225. A Scientific Statement of the Tidal Problems. The ‘‘ Astronomy for Schools and Colleges,’’ by Newcomb and Holden (Ed. of 1879, p. 167), speaks with true scientific caution, as follows :— “‘The theory of the tides offers very complicated problems, which have taxed the powers of mathematicians for several generations. These prob- lems are in their elements less simple than those presented by the motions of the planets, owing to the number of disturbing circumstances which enter into them. The various depths of the ocean at different points, the friction of the water, its momentum when it is once in motion, the effect of the coast-lines, have all to be taken into account. These quantities are so far from being exactly known that the theory of the tides can be ex- pressed only by some general principles which do not suffice to enable us to predict them for any given place.’’ 226. Cometary Spectra. The uncertainties of measurement and the harmonic indications which are given in spite of those uncertainties may be illustrated by comparing observations of like objects by different reporters. Tacchini gives (Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., xxv, 286) measurements of the spectral lines in comet b, 1881, which correspond satisfactorily with lines in Hesselber’s carbon spectrum. The harmonic accordance is equally satisfactory. Harmonic. Tacchini. 31027. = 68 = 551.9 552.1 37527.7 = 73 = 514.1 514.1 37527.7 = 81 = 463.2 463.1 Thollon (Jb., 287-8) compares the same spectrum with three different spectra of carbon compounds, viz: A, electric arc, Jamin’s lamp measure- ments made by M. Bigourdan; B, cyanogen, coil and condenser, Salet ; C, blue flame of illuminating gas, Lecoq de Boisbaudran. Harmonie. Thollon, A. B. c. a1479)- bb pGeet 562 562.2 563.0 562.9 31479 + 61 = 516.0 516 516.5 516.3 516.1 31479 — 67 = 469.9 470 - 470.4 470.0 470.64 * The harmonic divisors for Tacchini’s measurements are sums of succes- sive or nearly successive phyllotactic numbers: 81=5+ 8+ 134 21 +34; 73=81—8; 68=73—5=—13+ 21+4 34. Inthe harmonic divisors for Thollon’s measurements, 56 = 7 x 8= product of the artiad and perissad divisors, and the middle line is an arithmetical mean between the other two. * Der Mechanik der Gravitation, Breslau, 1874; J. B.des Bres. Phys. Ver., 1881-2. + Boisbaudran does not give this line, but he gives 473.8 and 467.5, the arith- metical mean beimg 470.65. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 21. PRINTED JUNE 3, 1882. Chase. ] 276 {April 21, 227. Identity of Spectral Lines in Different Eiements. Young (Am. Jour. Sci., wv, 355) and Liveing and Dewar (Proc. Roy. Soc., vxxii, 225-31) have shown that many of the lines in different element- ary spectra, which have been supposed to be identical, really differ slight- ly in refrangibility and can be separated by a sufficient increase of dis- persive power in the trains of prisms. The number of separations which has already been effected makes it very doubtful whether any case of ab- solute coincidence can be found, where two elements are present in the spectral incandescence, This has been thought, by some, fatal to Lock- yer’s and Thalen’s hypothesis that all the lines are modifications of a few basic lines. That such a generalization is too hasty, may be shown by the following considerations: 1. Atoms are continually subject to in- commensurable, as well as to commensurable tendencies. 2. There are often various harmonic tendencies, which are simultaneously operative, the final harmonic adjustment being determined by the relative magnitude of the individual tendencies. 8. The well-known experiment of oscillat- ing balls, suspended from a horizontal cord, shows that the cyclical vibra- tions are modified by each member of a harmonic group. 4. The slight fluctuations in the lines of the solar spectrum make it probable that there are similar fluctuations in chemical and cometary spectra. 5, This proba- bility is increased by the differences of measurement which are made by different observers at different times. 6. Propositions 2 and 5 are both illustrated by the two harmonies which represent Tacchini’s and Thollon’s measurements (Note 226). 228. Lithium Harmonies. Liveing and Dewar (Proc. Roy. Soc., ar, 93-9) have observed three lines in the spectrum of lithium (3913, 3984 and 4273), besides Boisbau- dran’s line, 4131.7. The harmonies are shown below. Harmonic Divisors. ‘Harmonie Quotients. Observed. ul 4273.02 4273 1+ %4 4132.78 4131.7 14+ 1ba4 . 3983.37 3984 14194 3912.65 3913 The coefficient of the first addition to the harmonic divisor is the same as the perissad divisor and as Prout’s coefficient of Li. The second and third additions are respectively the artiad divisor and } the artiad divisor. The harmony is nearly as satisfactory, if we combine these lines with those which are given by Huggins (see Proc. Am. Ph. Soc., xvii, 297). Harmonie Divisors, Harmonie Quotients. Observed. 1 6107.37 6107.3 1+ 40a 4796.64 4794.8 14 484 4599.23 4599.3 1+ 68a 4269.74 4273. 14+ 70a 4131.49 4131.7 14 8a 3984.31 3984. BO Alpes - $014.50 .-- -- x= 7 BOLa..: —> =. © ne pn 1882.) 277 (Chase. The coefficients of a are, 5 X 8,6 x 8,9 x 7,10 x 7,10 x 7+8,10x 7+ 3 of 8, being made up of multiples or sums of the phyllotactic num- bers, 2, 3, 5 and 8, and the secondary phyllotactic number, 7. 229. Relations of Central Force to Thermal Constants. IT have shown (Proc. A. P. S., viv, 651) that the ratio of heat under con- stant volume to heat under constant pressure, as deduced from purely theoretical considerations, is z? + 4 : 27’, or 1 : 1.4232. The elements for computing this ratio are: 1, the synchronism of oscillations, under the action of central forces, in all orbits which have the same major axis ; 2, the kinetic theory of gases, which supposes that all the paths of clashing particles are rectilinear, and therefore in orbits of unitary eccentricity, one extremity of each path corresponding with the centre of a synchronous circle ; 3, the consequent ratio of mean rectilinear vis viva, or mean vis viva of con- stant gaseous pressure, to synchronous mean circular o¢s viva, or mean vis viva of constant volume; 4, the thermodynamic doctrine that equal quantities of heat correspond to equal increments of os viva and to equal increments of temperature; 5, the proportionality of mean vis viva to mean distance of projection against uniform resistance ; 6, the determina- tion of the radial locus at which the mean velocity of linear oscillation, or of mean gaseous pressure, would be acquired both in centrifugal and in centripetal motion. This theoretical determination of the ratio of specific heats proceeds on the hypothesis of Boscovich, that central forces continue to act, at all distances from the centre, with accelerations which vary in- versely as the square of the distance. There are many reasons for be- lieving that this law does not hold, even in the ethereal condition, within the radius of inertial aggregation, and it seems likely that careful experi- ments may bring to light many kinds of deviation from the theoretical value, the study of which will greatly extend our knowledge of atomic and molecular structure. The most accurate experimental determinations of the ratio that have been published hitherto seem to range between 1 : 1.4053 and 1 : 1.421. These values indicate an orbital eccentricity of from .9874 to .9985. 230. Tests of Thermal Relations by Solar Mass and Distance. The estimates which I have hitherto made of the central energies of the solar system, from measurable tendencies to equilibrium between gravi- tating and explosive or centripetal and centrifugal energies (Proc. A. P. S., wit, 392-4, xix, 354, et al.), have been based upon the supposition that all the calorimetric measurements were made under constant pressure. C. v. Than (Abstr. in Jour. Chem. Soc., March, 1882, p. 265.) gives five estimates for the heat of combustion of H,O, from which estimates of solar mass and distance may be deduced by the method of Note 16, Chase. | 278 {April 21, Observers. 0 p m At constant + Andrews, 33,880 92,760,000 331,500 volume \ v. Than, 33,822 92,839,400 332,350 J. Thomsen, 34,218 93,071,400 334,850 FavreandSilbermann, 34,426 92,789,800 331,820 { Schuller and Wartha, 34,471 92,729,200 331,170 The observations were made respectively in 1848, 1881, 1873, 1852 and 1877. The corresponding molecular heats, as given by Naumann (see Note 16) for three of the above observers, differ slightly from 2 % the above values of @, the greatest difference being 2 of one percent. The mean values, if we allow equal weight to the present note and to Note 16, after making the proper correction in the observations at constant volume, are p = 92,739,500 ; m = 331,280. This value of p differs by less than sh, of one per cent. from the mean of the combined results in Note 15 (92,737,100). At constant J pressure 231. Molecular Volume of Solids. E. Wilson (Proc. Roy. Soc., xxvii, 457-91) discusses the relations. of molecular volume to chemical constitution, furnishing new evidence of harmonic oscillation. He states the three following propositions, and thinks that his tables lend comparatively greater support to the third, while the first and second must, for the present, be considered more hypothetical : (i.) When any number of similar atoms combine, the volume of the resulting molecule is equal to that of the uncombined atom. (ii.) When dissimilar atoms combine, the volume assignable to each atom is some simple submultiple or aliquot part of its atomic volume, and the resultant molecular volume is the sum of those volumes. (iii.) Every element in its various compounds is capable of assuming different volumes bearing a simple proportion to one another, such as Tae Eee I er os He also adduces evidence in support of Kopp’s conjecture that alementa may undergo different degrees of condensation in different radicles of the same compound, and he shows the agreement of his results. with those which were obtained by Loschmidt from gaseous interdiffusion. 232. Variability of Crystalline Angles. F. Pfaff (Jour. Chem. Soc., June, 1881, Abstr. p. 356) has made a series of measurements, from which he concludes that the limits of admissible correction of measured angles by calculation from rational axial sections must be carried further than has hitherto been the case. W. H. Perkin (Ib. Aug., 1881, 409-452), in discussing the isomeric acids obtained from coumarin and the ethers of hydride of salicyl, gives seven sets of crystal- line measurements, with forty-nine comparisons of calculated and observed angles. Taking the range between the limits of observation, which are given in twenty-six of the comparisons, or the deviations of the observed | 5 ee enn i ee ad a cine * Nae, 1882.] 279 (Chase. from the calculated values, in the other twenty-three comparisons, the variability is more than one per cent. in one-third of the whole number of measurements, viz: .155, .121, .067, .056, .055, .054, .046, .044, .021, .019, -018, .016, .016, .015, .012, .011. The mean variability of the forty-nine measurements is .017. These facts may have an important bearing upon many questions of radiodynamic probability, especially in regard to the adjustment of commensurable and incommensurable tendencies. 233. Pressure. The experiments of Tresca and Spring, together with those of Crookes, Pictet and Cailletet, show that it is impossible to fix any boundaries be- tween any two of the adjacent states of matter, ethereal, gaseous, liquid, solid, crystalline. J.and P. Curie (Comptes rendus, laxxxi, lexrxii) con- firm Faraday’s hypothesis that magnetized and dielectric bodies should tend to contract in the direction of the lines of force and to dilate at right angles to those lines, a tendency which, as I have shown,* is propagated with the velocity of light. They suppose that between the opposed faces of two contiguous layers of molecules there is a constant difference of ten- sion, involving a condensation of electricity which depends on the dis- tance between the two layers. By experiments with tourmaline and hemihedral crystals with inclined faces they are led to attach primary im- portance to the form of the molecules, the extremity which corresponds with the most acute solid angles being always negative on dilatation and positive on contraction. They deduce the following laws : 1. The two extremities of a tourmaline crystal develop quantities of electricity under pressure which are equal, but of opposite kind. 2. The quantity developed by a given increase of pressure is equal to that which is developed by an equal diminution of pressure, but of oppo- site kind. 3. This quantity is proportional to the variation of pressure, is inde- pendent of the length of the crystal, and for the same variation of pressure per unit of surface is proportional to the surface. All of these results have an important bearing upon the old maxim that ‘‘nothing can act except where it is,’’ and on Newton’s consequent belief that the phenomena of gravitation can be more satisfactorily explained by sethereal pressure than by attracting pulls. They may also help to ex- plain the formation and sublimation of heavy metallic elements, by the immense pressures to which the interior of condensing nebule are sub- jected. Many of the aggregating and dissociative tendencies of ‘‘sub- sidence,’’ of which my planetary harmonies have given abundant evi- dence, may be exemplified chemically as well as cosmically. 234. Test of Harmonic Probability. I have endeavored, in my various physical papers, to collect facts, through the guidance of well-known laws, and to account for them by a *See citations in Note 200. Chase.} 280. [April 21, reference to those laws, without introducing any new hypotheses. I have’ already compared various phyllotactic harmonies with other chemical hypotheses, and Note 232 furnishes data for extending the tests of mathe- matical probability. In my first paper on the harmonic interferences in. the spectra of chemical elements (Proc. A. P. 8., xvii, 297-301) I examined the measured wave-lengths of 128 lines, in twenty-one different spectra. The greatest mean deviation of the measured lines in either spectrum from - lines which are rigidly harmonic, is less than } of one per cent., the mean deviation in the whole number of lines being less than ;'; of one per cent. The mean deviations in the several spectra are as follows: zy, gy # oe 0,25 up the tp ts rhe $b ain ty b to ty Zs de rs of one per cent. The greatest deviation in any single line is one per cent., and there is only one line which has a deviation of more than 3 of one per cent., which is only J; as great as the greatest deviation in Perkin’s set of erys- talline measurements, or less than } as great as his mean variability. Later comparisons, of which Notes 226 and 228 may be taken as examples, » show approximations which are still closer. The greatest deviation in Tacchini’s cometary measurements is ;\, of .01, and the mean deviation ° +, of .01; the greatest deviation in Thollon’s measurements is z;'yg, and the mean deviation ,-;,5; the greatest deviation in the first lithium spec- trum of Note 228 is ,7;;, and the mean deviation ,,/;;; the greatest de- viation in the second spectrum of the same note is ;;;5, and the mean deviation z355- 235. Spectrum of the Great Nebula in Orion. On the 7th of March, 1882, Huggins (Am. Jowr. Set., [3] waiii, 335): obtained a photograph of the spectrum of the nebula in Orion, with an exposure of 45 minutes. His former researches showed that the visible spectrum of gaseous nebule contains four bright lines, 5005, 4957, and two of the hydrogen lines, #andy. The photograph kas also a strong line in the ultra-violet, at the position of 2 3730, or nearly so. Some of the harmonic relations of the lines are given in the following table : Harmonic. Observed. 525405 —- 105 = 5003.86 5005 525405 ~— 106 — 4956.65 4957 525405 — 108 = 4864.86 4861 525405 ~ 121 — 4342.19 4340 525405 -—- 141 — 3726.28 3730 The greatest deviation is ;, of one per cent., and the mean deviation 2; of one per cent. 236. Magnetic Estimate of Atthereal Density. Newton’s ethereal hypothesis, Faraday’s electric hypothesis and my own numerical relations (See Note 200) are exemplified in the following combined harmonies: Let v, represent Earth’s mean orbital velocity —— eres ~ 1882. } 28] [Chase. which is due to Sun’s attraction ; »,, corresponding magnetic component of circular orbital velocity which Earth would communicate to an ethereal particle ; ¢,, specific heat of water; @, specific heat of typical gas; d,, density of Sun ; d,, density of Earth; 5,. mean density of ether in Earth’s orbit under influence of Sun’s attraction ; 0;, density of Earth’s atmos- phere at mean locus of magnetization. Then 3 20, > 203 = 45 (1) ded, 3:1 d5 ¢ Oy (2) The given values are, v, = 18.476 m. ; 0; = .23773 6,; d, = .25491 d;,. The required values are 23, J; and J,. From (1) we find V3 = .23778 K 18.476 = 4.3924m. At Earth’s equatorial surface, V gr = 4.9073 = 1.1172 o, ; the magnetic component of this velocity in Earth’s orbital plane is v,, = cos. 23° 28/ xX 4.9073 = 4.501 = 1.0248 »,; the mean locus of magnetization is there- fore, 1.0248? « 20,923,654 ft. drom Earth’s centre = .05028 x 20,923,654 = 1,051,985 ft. from Earth’s surface. According to Babinet’s formula (Smiths’n Tables, D, p. 68) the normal density of the air diminishes } at the altitude 30 — 15 Z = 52494 ft. x 30 1 15 The atmospheric density at the locus of magnetization is, therefore 6, = A + 28-12 — 1 -+ 1,252,920, 900,000,000,000; the ethereal density, 56, = ds X .25491 = 1 + 4,915,148,000,000,000,000. The density of hydrogen is .0692, or, according to this estimate, 340,128, 200,000,000,000 ¢,. This is 2.07 per cent. greater than the estimate which was based on the ratio of projectile gaseous energy to ethereal energy (Note 35). The significance of proportion (1) is increased by the cosmical relations of Joule’s equiva- lent (Proc. A. P. S., xix, 20). The agreement would be exact if we take ps3 = 92,809,500 miles. = 17498 ft. = 1,051,985 -— 60.12 237. ‘* Subsidence’’ Estimate of Atthereal Density. Subsidence towards the three chief centres of nebulosity, (Jupiter), condensation, (Earth), and nucleation, (Sun), should be influenced by zethereal harmonies. If we take the estimate of Sun’s mass which satisfies the requirements of subsidence and oscillation (331776 ; Notes 5, 23, 91) and the British Nautical Almanac value for Earth’s distance, measured in Sun’s semi-diameters (214,45), , = 92,785,700 miles ; the mean projectile locus of the chief centre of gravity in the system (c. g. Sun and Jupiter at mean perihelion) = 1.018 7, =7,; L, (solar modulus of light; Note 75) = 474657 r, = 465896 r,; the mean locus of magnetization, 1, = 7, x p3 = L, = 199.1555 miles = 1,051,541 ft. = 60.09498 x 17498. This gives, for the ratio of hydrogen density (d,) to ethereal density, q Chase. ] 282 {April 21, 6, = 334, 280, 400,000, 000,000 6, which exceeds the estimate of Note 35 by less than 4 of one per cent. 238. Rotation Estimate of Athereal Density. The hypothesis that hydrogen is the simplest known form of xthereal condensation and that all other chemical elements are condensed hydrogen, together with the theory that stellar rotation is due to ethereal harmonic oscillations (Notes 17, 34, 198 ef al.), requires that the linear oscillations of the kinetic gaseous theory should be made circular, within the stellar nucleus. Since gaseous density varies inversely as volume, the exther- hydrogen hypothesis is satisfied by the proportion ae a Ped, Ss On J, = 335,961,800, 000,000,000 6, which is } of one per cent. greater than the estimate of the foregoing note. 239. dthereal Elasticity. The velocity of light (2), according to the subsidence estimate, is 92,785,700 -- 497.827 = 186,381 miles. The velocity of sound in hydrogen, according to Dulong, is 4163 ft. If we designate the ratio of elasticity to density (e +d), for hydrogen and ether respectively, by «, and «,, the proportionality v x /e« gives Eo 2 en : : (186381 x 5280)? : 4163? : : 55,880, 460,000 : 1 for the relative elasticities under the same density. If we adopt the rota- tion estimate of comparative density, we have 5G, 8 2k 2 6,012, 151: for the relative elasticities at normal density. é o 240. _thereal Density at Mean Planetary Loet. - The ethereal density should be } as great as at Sun’s surface at 3 L, = 316,438 7, = 1448.343* »,. Atany other locus, p,, it should be (})",7 being equivalent to (p, + 1448.343 »,;). This gives, for the relative rotation estimate of «ethereal density at Sun’s surface and at the several planetary mean distances : Sun 1.00000 Mercury .99981 Venus .99965 Earth -99952 Mars .99927 Jupiter .99751 Saturn .99544 Uranus .99086 Neptune .98573 * Allowing for rupturing centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter. =~ “=. ve. © 4 i 2 1882.) 283 {Lewis. 241. Validity of Estimates. All estimates of this character are, of course, only provisional, and they can claim no validity, as I have heretofore shown, beyond the accuracy with which they represent the data upon which they are based. That all the «ethereal elements which I have considered are important, that they are more far-reaching than those which have been introduced into any like discussion of which I have any knowledge, that their influence has been rightly stated, and that they will contribute, by collation with Thom- son’s and other estimates, to a more satisfactory solution of many physical problems than is yet attainable, I fully and unhesitatingly believe. Sun’s orbital motion, and questions connected with the retardations which change revolution into simple rotation, are among the considerations which seem likely to modify the values that are given in the five foregoing notes and in Note 35. Note on the Aurora of April 16-17, 1882. By H. Carvill Lewis. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 21, 1882.) The aurora of Sunday evening, April 16-17, 1882, was probably one of the most remarkable, both as to beauty and scientific interest, that has been observed in this latitude. It is especially noteworthy on account of the brilliant corona which continued well defined for several hours, and whose apparent motion eastward, through space, could, therefore, be determined. Several other unusual features, such as an auroral curtain, and hyperbolic curves of light, were also displayed. The attendant solar and magnetic phenomena have also been of great importance in determin- ing a theory of the aurora. The aurora was noticed as soon as twilight had ended as a faint glow along the northern horizon. At 8.30 it was a low arch, probably not over 10 degrees high. It gradually rose higher, and left a dark segment below it. At 10P. M. the arch was some 20 degrees high, and was constanily increasing in brilliancy. Bright short white acicular streamers now ap- peared in the north, and sometimes rose as high as 40 degrees. These - occasionally assumed a reddish color, and were frequently wafted along the arch towards the west. The aurora now fluctuated greatly in brilliancy, sometimes nearly disappearing, and then flashing out brighter than ever. At 11.15 the arch had become brighter and much longer, though still of low altitude. Bright acicular streamers were crowded closely together at the western end of the arch, while in the east a second arch was now formed. The auroral arch now began to rise rapidly. At 11.20 the upper arch was 40 degrees high. Long narrow streamers were rapidly forming over the whole northern sky, and were traversed from base to apex with PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 23. PRINTED JUNE 6, 1882. Lewis.] 284 {April 21, swift, tremulous waves of light. At the same time a mass of fine red color appeared in the north-west, and flashed alternately bright and dark, as though a red cloud illuminated by heat lightning. This mass of red color moved rapidly westward and was preceded by remarkable flashes of red. At 11.25 the aurora had risen nearly to the zenith, and was of great brilliancy. Numerous narrow streamers, covering the entire northern half of the sky, were flashing bright and dark with great rapidity, while fine crimson patches appeared independently in several portions of the sky. At 11.30, or a few minutes later, the whole aurora from all sides moved with a bound toward the zenith. Streamers shot up from north, east and west with rapid, tremulous motions, reaching higher and higher with each pulsation, until, after apparently several ineffectual attempts, they all con- verged ata point nearly on the meridian nineteen degrees south of the zenith to form a corona of great beauty. This corona, which at first was unsteady and continually broken into detached segments, had become, at 11.40 P. M., a constant feature. Streamers now radiated from it in every direction, south as well as north. The whole sky seemed in motion ex- cept this one point. Rapid waves traveled along the narrow streamers from the horizon nearly up to the corona, while great nebulous masses and broad bands of crimson light flashed out in difterent portions of the sky. These ; masses of red light, particularly noticeable in the north-west, had no defi- nite form, and showed no undulating pulsations like those of the thread- like streamers, but either hung steadily in the sky for some minutes, or else were illuminated with flashes like lightning. The impression was given that these red portions of the aurora were distinct phenomena, dis- connected from the greenish-white streamers, and, perhaps, at a greater . distance from the earth. The centre of the corona appeared to be some 12 degrees east of Arc- turus. At 11.50, the centre of the corona was estimated to have the posi- tion R. A. 204°, Dec. 21° 30’. ss At midnight the corona, a perfect star of light, had become wonderfully 4 beautiful. The brilliancy of the whole aurora was concentrated at this point, the horizon being comparatively dark. Remarkable coruscations of light surrounded the corona, and these were often curved so as to ap- proach in form a hyperbola of large eccentricity, whose transverse axis passed through the centre of the corona. The streamers between the corona and the northern horizon now united into remarkable concentric hyperbolic curves of great brilliancy, whose vertices were stationary near the corona, and whose tremulous arms, made up of many streamers, reached to the northern horizon. This form recalled the drawings made of the coma of certain comets, and suggests interesting analogies. Still more closely did these curves of light resemble those assumed by iron filings in the vicinity of a magnet, and it is probable that they were identical. The centre of the corona was now at R. A. 2079, Dec. 21° 30’. he ll eG -. OQr 1882.] 280 [Lewis. At 12.10 A. M., and during the half-hour following, occurred the most magnificent sight of the evening, to which no description can do justice. The streamers, whose mass was now concentrated in the corona, had de- tached themselves from the northern horizon to form an auroral curtain of great beauty. The curtain hung some twenty degrees above the horizon, and was continually changing in form and color. The streamers, whose lower ends formed its fringe, were united above in bright hyperbolic or magnetic curves, which approached the corona within ten degrees, and which remained constant while the lower part of the curtain waved to and fro in waves of light. The following very rough diagram may serve to-illustrate the general positions of the corona and curtain: | s Fig. 1. AURORA AT 12.10 A. M. A line passing through the centre of the corona and Polaris was the transverse axis of the hyperbolic curves, of which a mere suggestion is made in the diagram. QF 250 [April 2l, The corona itself was a somewhat elliptical crown of radiating streamers, within which was a permanent nebulous mass of light, having a cwrdled appearance. This inner curdled mass was continually moving and heav- like the sea, and was often traversed by dark rifts. It continually rifted eastward to vanish suddenly, and to be continually replaced by other cloud-like forms at the centre. Meanwhile the brilliant flashes of Fig. 2. AURORA AT 12.25 A. M. in many portions of the sky, and often continued to form a back-ground for the quivering white streamers. The streamers south of the corona presented quite a diff rent appearance from those to the north. They were quite short, and were often broken into two or more segments, which fluctuated to and fro, but did not extend ~ca p Rer eet c+ c+ - 1882] 287 [Lewis. lower than some thirty degrees above the southern horizon. At 12.20 Arcturus occupied almost the precise centre of the corona. At 12.25 the remarkable sight was presented of two hyperbolic curves of light, the larger one lying in the north, the smaller to the south of the co- rona, and each pointing in an opposite direction to the other. The smaller hyperbola was bounded by an inverted arch of light in the south, some 30 degrees above the horizon. Straight lines of light, like a conjugate axis, passed east and west from the central point between the hyperbolas. The definite boundary of the southern auroral curtain may furnish data for a determination height of the aurora above the earth’s surface. The appear- ance of the sky at this time is rudely represented in Fig 2. It is evident that the phenomena now seen was no mere effect of per- spective. The auroral streamers had become curved in obedience probably to the Jaws of magnetic force around a pole. At 12.35 the corona was near R. A. 215°, Dec. 20° 30’, and at 12.45 near R. A. 216°, Dec. 20° 30’. At times the corona was a perfect star-like crown, with a small white cloud of light in the centre. Sometimes, how- ever, it would vanish completely for a few moments, to reappear with greater brilliancy. The curdled cloudy matter within it occasionally took fantastic curved forms, and at the same time the surrounding streamers would form curves at their extremities close to the corona. Once the streamers above and below the corona moved fora short space slowly around it, in the direction of the hands of a clock. At 1.05 A. M. the corona was estimated at R. A. 224°, Dee. 20°, and at - 1.10 at R. A. 226°, Dec. 20°. By this time it had become fainter, and it frequently disappeared fora period. The aurora in the north continued until daylight. Special attention was directed to mapping at intervals during the continuance of the corona, its exact position among the stars, in order, if possible, to determine any proper motion of its own. The cen- tral point could always be determined by projecting the paths of streamers to their converging point. The following map represents the approximate successive oie ot the centre of the corona, and the time of each observation. With the ex- ception of the position: given for 11.40 P..M., which was estimated from memory, the positions here given are as plotted at the time upon the star- map. Upon examination of this map it is at once evident that during the two hours in which it was observed, the corona had an eastward motion through space, and that this motion was at the rate of 15 degrees an hour, or pre- cisely the direction and amount of the earth’s rotation upon its axis. It was as if the corona had been fixed permanently to the earth, and the ob- servation is a strong confirmation of the theory that the aurora is a truly terrestrial appendage. * * The writer has previously (v. Proc. A. A. A.S., Boston, 1880, vol. xxix., p. 245), . described a phenomenon noticed in the aurora of May 2, i877, which, though less conclusively, leads to the same deduction. In that case an auroral comet-like streamer remained in a constant position, with regard to certain trees, for the space of nearly an hour, being apparently ‘fixed to the earth like a great pointer, while the stars and the zodiacal light revolved past it. 9) Lewis.] 288 [April 21, The are described by the corona was not perfectly coincident with a parallel of declination, but, if the observations are correct, had an inclina- tion of somewhat over 2 degrees. The pole of this arc would be consider- ably west of the true north. Moreover the corona was always about 3 degrees east of the meridian, a fact also indicating that the radiant point of the streamers was west of north. The corona was constantly 18 to 20 degrees south of the zenith. It is of interest to note in this connection that each of these facts has a direct relation to the position of the magnetic needle at Philadelphia. The magnetic pole is about 5 degrees west of the true pole, and the magnetic zenith is about 18} degrees south of the true zenith. The corona was, therefore, within one degree of the magnetic zenith. Parallax may, per- Fic. 3. Map oF Posrtrions OF CORONA. haps, account for the deviation, if any such exists. The position of the auroral streamers and of the corona is seen, therefore, closely to conform to the lines of magnetic force, and the connection between the two phe- nomena is evident. The electrical effects of the aurora were very marked, confirming the belief that the aurora is an electrical or magnetic discharge through re- mote portions of our atmosphere. The telegraph wires over a large por- tion of the country were strongly affected by electrical currents. The wires leading from Chicago to New York, to Washington, to Milwaukee, and to Omaha, are stated to have been worked without batteries, and, after grounding the wires, messages to have been sent on the strength of the ‘‘auroral current’’ alone. The Atlantic cable suffered similar electri cal disturbance 1882.] * 289 [Lewls. The influence of an aurora upon the telegraph wires is very different from the local and transitory effects of a thunderstorm, and can always be recognized. The electrical disturbances at Philadelphia continued from midnight until eleven o’clock on Monday morning. At the office of the Western Union Telegraph Company in New York it is reported that the wires began to be affected soon after ten 0’clock and that before eleven the wires in every direction were frequently interrupted. It is said that whenever an auroral current of like polarity with the battery reached the wires it neutralized the current completely and broke the circuit. In like manner auroral currents of opposite polarity, which were both powerful and frequent, would intensify the current to such a degree as to make it unsafe to use the wires. At such times brilliant sparks appeared at the ends of the keys and repeaters, which would soon burn the instruments if not disconnected. The change of polarity in the auroral current was very intermittent. Sometimes it occurred very rapidly, and at other times ten or fifteen minutes would intervene without change of current. Similar electrical phenomena are reported from many parts of the country, indi- cating an electrical storm of great extent. There was no wind at Philadelphia during the aurora, and the mild 7 spring-like weather before and during the few days since has undergone no change of consequence. Observations of this nature upon a number of auroras have led the writer to think that the popular idea that the aurora is either the cause or the result of change of weather is a fallacy. _ Local thunderstorms and several severe tornadoes have however occurred since the aurora in several parts of the country. On the night of April 19-20 a second aurora appeared. There had been a severe thunderstorm early in the evening—the occasion of loss of life and property in different portions of the State—and some time after the sky had cleared, at about 1.30 A. M., there appeared a fine aurora, with high and bright streamers. As before, the telegraph wires were affected, the disturbance at Philadelphia continuing from 1 A. M. to 11.30 A. M.* The occurrence of remarkable auroral displays at this time is a striking confirmation of the periodicity of those phenomena. It is just ten years since the last auroras of importance occurred, and the period of 10 to 12 years between maximum auroral displays may be regarded as firmly es- tablished. The coincidence of this period with that of most numerous sunspots shows a direct connection between the electrical condition of the earth and the sun. At the present time the sun is exhibiting remarkable disturbances. Upon the sun’s disc are numerous and large spots which are continually changing in shape, and are traversed by solar cyclones of unusual energy. Large groups of sunspots are now visible to the naked * The writer is indebted to the officers of the Western Union Telegraph Com- pany forinformation. He also takes pleasure in acknowledging the kindness of Mr. T. F. Townsend, Signat Service Officer at Philadelphia, who has contrib- uted his personal observations upon the aurora for use in the present paper. Lewis.] 290 [April 21, eye, and one of the spots is said to be the largest which has appeared for ten years. The theory is not improbable that sunspots are the result of solar elec- trical or magnetic storms, and that auroras are the result of a disturbed electrical condition of the earth, caused by induction from the sun. The common cause for both phenomena is probably cosmical. Postscript.—Since this paper was presented, reports of an unusual auroral dis- play have come from all sections of the country. The aurora was visible across the continent from the Atlantic to the Pacific coast. At San Francisco it is re- ported as the most brilliant seen for many years. A bright crimson light appeared at 8.30 P. M., and the aurora showed various colors. At Omaha acrim- son sheet across the sky is described as its most remarkable feature. At Kansas City it was said to be the finest aurora since 1872, ancat 12.30 the whole northern sky was lit up by streamers and red flames. At Warrenton, Mo., where it is described as the most remarkable ever seen, the light was so brilliant that signs 150 feet distant could be read. A white arch of light, extending from east to west, advanced southward at midnight to within 35 degrees of the southern horizon, and the corona was visible. At St. Louis it was seen early in the even- ing, and it is stated that at 11 P. M. there was no electrical disturbance in the telegraph wires. At Baltimore and Washington it was described as unusually fine, and consisting, first of a band of white light, later of shafts of colored light shooting through it, and afterwards of tremulous streamers moving with light- ning rapidity, from north to south, while clouds of red fire hung in the north- west. At Richmond, Va., it was seen distinctly at 3 A. M.,and is reported as the finest ever seen. At Boston, electrical disturbances were noticed shortly after the appearance of the aurora, and continued till late in the afternoon ot the 17th. The wires from Boston to Albany and from Boston to New York were worked without the battery, that to New York having been worked by the au- roral current alone for three hours consecutively. In England, France, Belgium, Germany and Italy similar electrical perturba- tions were observed. Upon the French telegraphic lines the perturbations were so frequent from April 16th to April 20th that special measures were taken by the authorities to meet the contingency. Electrical equilibrium was restored on the 21st. a It is also of the greatest interest to learn that in England, where, so far as known, no aurora was seen, there occurred a great magnetic storm at the precise time that the aurora appeared in America. Mr. G. M. Whipple, of the Kew Ob- servatory, in a communication to Nature of April 20. says “a magnetic storm of unusual intensity raged from about midnight of the 16th to midnight of the 7th,” and that ‘ta tremendous spot which appeared on the sun’s disk on the 13th, is now rapidly approaching the central meridian, and a group observed on Saturday in advance of it, has undergone considerable change in the interval.” In Nature ot April 27th, he further reports that “‘the magnetic dissurbance began at 11.45 P. M. (6.45 P. M. Philadelphia time), April 16th, by an increase of the declination, an augmentation of the horizontal force and a diminution of the vertical force. The movements of the declinometer became gradually more rapid after 2 A. M. on the 17th (9 P. M. Philadelphia time), whilst its oscillations extended farther and farther from its normal position, principally in the direc- tion of increased westerly declination. From 4.30 to 9 A. M, (11.30 P. M. to4 A. M, Philadelphia time) the horizontal force had diminished so much that the trace frequently passed off the paper, and the register was lost for a while. The mini- mum of vertical force occurred at 5.55 A. M.” (12.55 A. M. Philadelphia time). He states that the disturbance did not die out till about 8 P. M. on the 17th. “ During the 18th and 19th the magnets were unaffected, but at 3.45 A. M. of the 4S TERRI 1882.] 291 20th (10.45 P. M., April 19th, Philadelphia time), a second disturbance set in, commencing with a rapid increase of declination, the first swing of the magnet carrying it nearly a degree to the westward, whence it returned at 4.30 A. M. Its mean position was reached at6 A. M. (1 A. M. Philadelphia time) and then its oscillations became very rapid, and continued so until 2 P. M., after which hour they became less. Both forces were also simultaneously disturbed, but their movements were much more limited than on Monday.” 1t is at once seen that there is a most remarkable coincidence in time between the magnetic storm in England and the aurora as seen here. The second mag- netic storm also occurs simultaneously with the second aurora, and an absolute proot of the direct connection between the two phenomena is hereby estab- lished. It is interesting, also, to note that the magnetic disturbances for the most part slightly preceded the aurora, while on the other hand the electrical effects upon the telegraph wires were subsequent. This fact suggests magnet- ism as the primary cause of the aurora, The magnetic curves assumed by the streamers also favor this theory. The red flashes in the sky were probably ac- companying electrical discharges, and many auroral effects may be due to the continual transmutation of the two forces. Stated Meeting, May 5, 1882. Present, 4 members. Letters accepting membership were received from the Rev. Dr. Robins, No. 1821 Delancey Place, Philadelphia, April 26; from C.S. Sargent, dated Arnold Arboretum, Harvard Uni- versity, Director’s office, Brookline, Mass., April 26; from S. P. Sharples, A. M., No. 114 State street, Boston, April 29; from Franklin B. Hough, Department of Agriculture, Wash- ington, D. C., May 2, and from George De B. Keim, No. 2009 Delancey Place, Philadelphia, April 25, 1882. A photograph of M. Milne Edwards was received in a letter dated Museum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, April 7, with a re-. quest for Nos. 97, 102, 103 to complete a set of the Proceed- ings. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the New Hampshire Historical Society (110); Museum of Comparative Zoology (110); American Antiq. Society (110); Rhode Island Historical Society (110); Connecticut Historical Society (110); Astor Library (110); New Jersey Historical Society (110); PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 111. 2k. PRINTED JUNE 6, 1882. 292 [May 5, C. L. Doolittle (110); Traill Green (110); T. C. Porter (110); W.B. Taylor (110); J. H. C. Coffin (110); J. J. Stevenson (110); Georgia Historical Society (110); H. Phillips, Jr., (110); Wyoming G. and Historical Society (110); Numis- matic and Antiquarian Society (110); Buffalo S. N.S. (110); J. M. Hart (110); Chicago Historical Society (110), and the Royal Bavarian Academy (107, 108, Trans, XV, 2). Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey of India, Calcutta, Jan. 4; the Royal Bavarian Academy, Feb. 18, and Mr. Wm. Blades, 23 Abchurch Lane, London, April 17, 1882. Donations to the Library were reported from the Geological Survey, India; Academia dei Lincei; 8. C. Geog., Bordeaux ; Royal Astronomical Society ; London Nature; Mr. W. Blades ; Harvard University; Boston Society of Natural History; American Historical Society ; American Philological Society ; Silliman’s Journal; Mrs. T. P. James; American Chemical Society ; American Society of Civil Engineers; Franklin In- stitute; Journal of Pharmacy; Mr. H. Phillips, Jr.; Ameri- can Chemical Journal; U.S. National Museum; Com. Inter- nal Revenue; Weather Signal Bureau; Board of Health, New Orleans, and Academy of Sciences, St. Louis. The death of Ralph Waldo Emerson, at Concord, stings April 27, aged nearly 80, was announced. On motion of Mr. Phillips the President was requested to consider various communications from Professors James Hall, Geo. H. Cook, and J. P. Lesley, and to memorialize the Presi- dent of the Senate of New York for the complete publication of the Paleontology of that State. And the meeting was adjourned. \ 1882.] 293 [Rothrock, Biographical Sketch of Thomas Potts James. By J. T. Rothrock. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 19, 1882.) In the line of botanists binding the present to that remote past, when our flora was as unknown accurately to Americans, as to the rest of the world, but few survive. Darlington, Sullivant, Torrey, James, within recent years have dropped out of the chain. The interest attaching to such men is more than an ordinary one. They were the last generation to which our botanical pioneers belonged, and they witnessed not only the rise of a republic in politics, but the rise of a republic in science. They could remember when in all this broad land there were not a score of bot- anists ; when the science of plants and plant life held no recognized place in the colleges of this country ; when the literature of our flora was almost exclusively foreign ; when the commonest implements of exact research came from over the ocean. With them nearly the whole scientific tradi- tion of the country disappeared. Later events find prompt and wide cir- culation in our scientific periodicals, but much that would interest the future is lost to the world when one of these honored witnesses leaves us to join the host that went before. Thomas Potts James, in memory of whom this brief sketch has been prepared, is the latest whose loss we deplore. Mr. James was born at Radnor, in Pennsylvania, on September 1, 1808. He died suddenly of paralysis at Cambridge, in Massachusetts, on Feb. 22,1882. His ancestors were among the leaders of thought and action be- fore and during the Revolution. They arrived in Pennsylvania earlier than Penn. His grandfather, Thomas Potts, after raising a company and being commissioned captain in 1776, raised a battalion and was made its colonel. He was alsoa member of the convention which assembled in Philadelphia on July 9, 1776, to form the new government. Washington and his staff were frequent guests at his house, and in it many important public letters were written. As the friend and intimate associate of Franklin it is not strange that he was one of the original members of this society. He was also among the earliest to develop the iron interests of Penn- sylvania. A great uncle of Mr. James, Dr. Jonathan Potts, was Deputy Director-General of the Hospital in the Northern Department during the Revolution, and was subsequently made Director-General of the Hospital in the Middle Department when this State and New Jersey became the seat of war. . Another great uncle, Samuel Potts, was a member of the convention which framed the Constitution of Pennsylvania, and was also elected - Associate Judge. The name of the family is still perpetuated in Potts- town. Coming then from such a stock it is not strange that the subject of this sketch developed marked inteliectual traits. Indeed it would have been stranger if he had not, Rothrock.] 29-4 , (May 19, Mr. James’ love of botany appears to have been an early one. As stated in the Potts’ memorial by the authoress, his wife and congenial life com- panion, —‘‘ From his youth he devoted his leisure to the study of botany, and, having acquired a knowledge of phznogamous plants, he turned his attention to the cryptogamia, making the musci a specialty.’’ ‘‘ He re- ceived his early education in Trenton, N. J., intending to enter Princeton College, but was prevented by circumstances,’’ etc. There are some men who acquire all the mental discipline that a college course could confer without entering those halls of learning. Mr. James was one of these. It may be doubted whether he would have earned any more honored name, or placed the future bryologists of the land under any greater obligations if he had taken an academic degree. For almost forty years he was engaged in the drug business in this city, but never allowed the carés of trade to crowd science out of mind, and though not at the time enabled to devote all, or even much of his atten- tion to botany, yet the years were far from being unproductive in the science to which he was so deeply attached. In 1853 the third edition of (that work, which will always be a classic book of science) Darlington’s Flora Cestrica appeared. To this Mr. James contributed the portion de- scribing the class of Anophytes, 7. e., Mosses and Liverworts. Though hardly thirty pages long it represents an amount of labor which is now past belief. It may in part be regarded as a pioneer work. To say noth- ing of the labor involved in collecting the material for that short paper, there were the critical determinations of the species and the always per- plexing questions of synonyms to settle. It is needless to say that these duties were most conscientiously done, for Mr. James never worked in any other manner. Every line which he ever wrote upon a scientific subject was most carefully considered. In December, 1855, he published in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences, ‘‘ An enu- meration of Mosses detected in the Northern United States, which are not comprised in the Manual of Asa Gray, M. D., some of which are new species.” Mr. Lesquereux informs me also that about this time he wrote another paper of similar character to the above but where, or what its exact title is neither of us can say. In the Smithsonian Report for 1867 there appeared in ‘‘A Sketch of the Flora of Alaska,’’ prepared by the present writer, a list of the ‘‘ Anophytes determined and compiled by Thomas P. James.’’ Extending over but two pages, that list still represents a conscientious search through all the botanical literature of the region in order to bring together in a single view its entire moss flora ; then, too, there are his original determinations of the specimens coming from that region which were placed in his hands. In 1871 he published another catalogue with important notes in the now famous Volume V (of the Clarence King Surveys) which represents Mr. Watson’s earliest labor in the science in which he has since become so dis- tinguished. i li a a Ye OE OES 4 1832.] 295 [Rothrock. In 1878 another catalogue of Western Mosses was published by Mr. James in Volume VI of the Wheeler Survey. It contains short notes, and descriptions of the less known species. In the Proceedings of the American Mester of Arts and Sciences for February, 1879, conjointly with Leo Lesquereux, he published ‘‘ Descrip- tion of some new Species of North American Mosses.”’ At the time of his death Mr. James was engaged with Mr. Lesquereux in the preparation of ‘‘A Synopsis of North American Mosses,’’ a work which is of greater magnitude and importance than its modest title would indicate. Together they had advanced to the Hypnaceex, and of it Mr. Lesquereux writes to me ‘“‘If I have time to finish this work, it must be published in both names.”’ I cannot forbear quoting what his distinguished colleague has written of Mr. James in a private letter to me. It is of far greater worth than any statement of mine can be : “An excellent microscopist and delineator; an ardent collector of Mosses, he constantly devoted himself to their study. I came to this country in 1848, and it was only a little after my arrival here that he be- gan sending me his mosses for determination. Our connection continued until his death. I received a letter from him but a few days before this. When I was obliged to abandon the use of the microscope he worked con- stantly upon sketches of all the interesting or doubtful American species and prepared for the descriptive part of which I took charge. He had, moreover, to give much time to the examination of collections of mosses sent for determination from various parts of the continent, those of E. Hall from Oregon, Macoon in Canada, Wolff and others from Illinois, so that his work and influence in the Bryology of North America have been very great, though his publications are limited to a few catalogues or memoirs.”’ Then follows this touching tribute from his associate in what was to have been the crowning task of his active life: ‘‘Asa colleague, as a man of truth, of honor, I regret him very much, but still more as an old friend. We were about the same age and I expected he would survive me for a long time.’’ Surely such testimony from one who had constant relations with Mr. James for more than thirty years, in the same line of work, is praise indeed, and speaks volumes for the integrity and amiability of both. In this connection I may add how cheerfully he always aided those who appealed to him for assistance in naming what to them were doubtful and difficult species. However badly prepared the specimens might have been, however common, or however worthless the material was to him, the same careful reply was always sent to the inquirer. These demands upon his time were frequent and serious ; indeed we may fairly say that during his earlier years they were detrimental to his business. But from sympathy with, and desire to aid any fellow-student he tolerated these ap- peals to the very last. It is almost a pity that time which had become so valuable to science, during his later, most productive years, was so freely given away. 4 ° Rothrock.) 296 [May 19, Mr. James was as modest as he was painstaking and accomplished. It was only after the repeated solicitations of his life-long friend, Prof. Gray, that he undertook the preparation of the Synopsis of North American Mosses in conjunction with Mr. Lesquereux. When, however, he con- sented, he began the task with all the eager earnestness of youth. Two years of constant work made it requisite that he should rest ; and with this end in view he took a trip to Europe in 1878. But even there all the time he could give was spent in association with Schimper of Strassburg, then the head of European bryology, in comparing our American species and in settling synonyms. Fora whole month Prof. Schimper gave his after- noons to labor with Mr. James in this task. The result of that visit will be apparent in placing our own moss flora in proper relation with that of Europe. His industry and singleness of purpose at a time when most men seek rest were wonderful. During the last two years of his life he labored ‘‘from ten to twelve hours each day over the mosses ; often three or four hours at a time without moving from his table.’ Only a few weeks before his death when reminded by Mrs. James that he had already worked fourteen hours that day, and remonstrated with for writing by gas- light, his reply was, ‘‘ this work must be done and I have no time to rest.”’ The end came, and came suddenly, but he was not unprepared for it. No one whose life was as devout as his, and who lived with such entire charity toward all men, could be unprepared. February 22, 1882, Ash-Wednesday, Mr. James left his study and at- tended to his religious duties in the Chapel of the Protestant Episcopal Theological Seminary of Harvard University. It was to him the very gate to Heaven, though he little knew how soon he was to pass through and into the eternal world. Services being over he returned to his work. Leaving his study, he went into an adjoining room where he was seized by paralysis of the left side, and this was followed by loss of speech and then coma, from which without awakening he passed calmly away. We may well imagine how profound the grief over the loss of such a hus- band and father would be. But it was hardly less deep in the hearts of his habitual associates. A letter received from Professor Gray, who stood by as Mr. James departed, contains a_ passage too sacred even for a bio- graphical sketch, but which indicates a suppressed anguish and a sense of personal bereavement more clearly than any phrase set in intentional mournful measure could do. In another place Professor Gray has given his estimate of the man, and ina single sentence explained the cause of his own noble grief—because Mr. James ‘‘was admirable in all his rela- tions.”’ Mr. James’ active interest in botanical science, and the estimation in which he was held by his colleagues, are clearly indicated by the associa- tion he had in the learned societies of this land. He was ‘Fellow of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, «« Fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, CeeE_—™- ss. | ad 1882.} 29 4 (Rothrock. ‘“Member and sometime Officer of the American Philosophical Society, «‘Treasurer of the American Pomological Society for 27 years, ‘< Officer of the American Pharmaceutical Society, and also of the Phila- delphia Drug Exchange, «« Professor of Botany to the Pennsylvania Horticultural Society, ‘‘Member of the Boston Society of Natural History, ‘‘Honorary Member of the Massachusetts Horticultural Society, «« And of other kindred Associations.”’ During one of the absences of an honored member of this Society in Europe Mr. James was his substitute as librarian. There are those still living who remember how very acceptable his services were in that ca- pacity. This would be a one-sided and very imperfect sketch of Mr. James if it made no allusion to his public spirit as a citizen. Whatever was in the interest of education or of philanthropy interested him. During the late war he was thoroughly ‘‘Union”’ in his sympathies, and did duty with the First Regiment of the National Guard. He was also a member of the Union League, and an active associate of those who upheld the Govern- ment under all circumstances. His loyalty nevered wavered. In December 1851, he married Isabella Batchelder. This most fortunate union was the result of an acquaintance which began but fifteen months before, and which grew out of a correspondence between Dr. Darlington, Miss Batchelder, Mr. James, and Dr. Gray, relative to the publication of the letters of John Bartram. For more than thirty years Mr. James found in his wife a sympathy in all his work, and a cultured mind capable of ap- preciating and aiding in his own literary labor. Such marriages are blessings to both the contracting parties. Mrs. James and four children survive, and now reside in Cambridge, Massa- chusetts, whither he removed from here in 1867. “We mourn over the loss of Mr. James not only because he was dear to a large circle of friends, or because he was an active promoter of science, but also because his death leaves his favorite study with but one prominent representative in this land, a representative full of years and of honor. But there is no younger botanist on whom the mantle has fallen ; none appear to take up the work as these veterans cease from their labors, and in this event the world is made poorer from the loss of our former asso- ciate. Gentle, genial man, though we realize how serious a loss your depart- ure has been to science here, we do not mourn for you as for those over whom we have no hope; neither may we question the wisdom of the de- cree which opened your eyes to the full glory of the celestial splendor you had so long, patiently, trustingly waited to see. 298 [May 19, Stated Meeting, May 19, 1882. Present, 9 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from C. W. King, dated Trinity College, Cambridge, England, May 5, 1882. Letters of acknowledgment were received from Messrs. Downes, Hilgard, Goodfellow, Schott (109); American Eth- nological Society (109); U. 8. Naval Observatory (109); State Historical Society Wisconsin (110); Asaph Hall (110); C. H. F. Peters (110); Kansas State Historical Society (110); American Ethnologicol Society (110); Boston Publie Library (110); Maryland Historical Society (110), and Poughkeepsie Society of Natural History (109, 110). Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mia dei Lincei; Société Géographique, Paris; S.C. Geog., Bor- deaux ; London Nature; Academy, Brussels; Museum of Com- parative Zodlogy ; Cincinnati Observatory; and the Geological Survey of Canada. -Prof. Rothrock read, by appointment, an obituary notice of Thomas P. James. Mr. Lesley read, by appointment, an obituary notice of Ed- ward Desor. The Rev. C. G. Ames was requested to prepare an obituary notice of Ralph Waldo Emerson, The death of Wm.S. Vaux, at Philadelphia, May 5, aged 60, was announced, and Mr. Law appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. The death of Chas. M. Wheatley, at Phoenixville, May 6, aged 60, was announced. The death of Dr. George Smith, at Media, Delaware County, March 10, 1882, aged 78, was announced, and Dr. Brinton was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. A “Contribution to a monograph of the North American 1882.] 299 [ Williston. Syrphide, by Dr. 8. W. Williston,” was presented through the Secretary, with a letter from the author, dated New Haven, Yale College Museum, May 12, 1882. “The Classification of the Ungulate Mammalia” was read by Prof. Cope. New nominations, Nos. 959, 960, 961, were read. The President reported that he had forwarded a memorial to the President of the New York Senate, in favor of the com- pletion of the Paleontology of New York. Power was given to the Hall Committee to procure a copy of the portrait of Dr. Geo. B. Wood; and the President was empowered to fill the vacancy caused by the death of Sol. W. Roberts, a member of that Committee. Authority was given the Librarian to purchase Vols. I-XII Transactions of the American Philological Association. And the meeting was adjourned, Contribution to a Monograph of the North American Syrphide. By Dr. 8. W. Williston. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 19, 1882.) The Syrphide form one of the most difficult families of Diptera to classify. Although composed throughout the world of about one hundred and forty described genera, they present no characters that will decisively distinguish any considerable number. As a natural result, many genera have been loosely formed and more loosely described, until the difficulty in identifying species without the aid of numerous types has become ex- tremely great. The present paper is the result of many hours tedious labor in identifying a considerably large amount of material wholly with- out the aid of types. Prepared two or three years ago it has been re- written and changed many times ; that it is free from error yet I do not presume to hope, but from my own experience in the difficulties that are met with in working with the aid of books alone, I believe that it will materially aid in the study of our species. In Osten Sacken’s catalogue of American Diptera—a work indispensable to all entomologists—fifty-seven genera are recorded as having been cred- itably recognized from North America. Zoxomerus of Macquart I have PROC, AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 21. PRINTED AUGUST 3, 1882. Williston. ] 300 [May 19, resuscitated, and have also recognized an interesting new species of Seno- gaster Mac., hitherto known only from South America. Since the publi- cation of the catalogue four new genera have been described by M. Bigot and the writer, making in all sixty-two genera now known from North America. As regards the distribution of these genera twelve are pecu- liar to our fauna, viz: Hupeodes, Copestylum, Hadromyia, Hugeniamyia, EBurhinamallota, Teuchocnemis, Pterallastes, Polydonta, Crioprora, Somu- la, Merapioidus, and Mixogaster. The first four of these, with Cata- bomba, have never yet been found in the Eastern States, while the fol- lowing are not yet known west of the one hundredth meridian, viz: Triglyphus, Pyrophena, Doros, Ocyptamus, Rhingia, Teuchocnemis, Pterallastes, Senogaster, Somula, Temnostoma, and Milesia. Of these no doubt the distribution will yet be found more extensive. Indeed the wide distribution of species and genera of the family over our continent will not readily be paralleled by any other family of insects. In the present paper I have given a list of all the described species known west of the one hundredth meridian. These with the species de- scribed as new, reach yet but eighty-six ; of them fifty-four are known only from the West, while thirty-two, or over one-third, are distributed from the Atlantic to the Pacific regions. Five genera, of one or two species each, namely: Triglyphus, Pyro- phena, Copestylum, Aretophila, and Pterallastes, are unknown to me; their systematic positions have in consequence been wholly drawn from de- scriptions and figures. They, together with such species as are unknown to me, are preceded by an asterisk. An exclamation point indicates that the locality, or localities, preceding it are given from specimens that I have examined. It has not been deemed necessary to repeat any of the bibliographical references or synonomy that are given in Osten Sacken’s catalogue, except such as will facilitate the identification of species. The specimens which I have examined in the preparation of this paper, from Washington Territory, Oregon, and Kern County, California, were col- lected by Mr. H. K. Morrison; from Mendocino county, California, by Mr. O. T. Baron, and trom Wyoming, Colorado, and Kansas, by Mr. E. W. Guild and myself. The species that I have identified, or described, or that have been previously recorded from the West, are printed in small capitals. I desire to express my thanks to Mr. W. H. Patton and Drs. G. H. Horn and H. A. Brous, for kind favors in the preparation of this paper. To Baron C. R. von Osten Sacken, of Heidelberg, I am much indebted for his kindly interest and advice. The following table of generic groups is based essentially upon that of Schiner’s in his Austrian Diptera. It seems impossible to improve its general features so far as our American genera are concerned. S/ ah . be = lo # < 1882] 301 (Williston. Table of groups of genera. 4.—Small cross-vein of the wing distinctly before the middle of the discal cell, usually straight and rectangular. Hind femora usually slender, not thickened ; the third lon citudinal vein rarely much bent into the first posterior vein, usually straight or very gently curved. 1—Antenne longer than the | WGfe bea ere Rees gs oy SNES i: —Antenne as long or shorter than the head. a—Marginal cell open, 7. e., the second longitudinal vein terminates in the border of the wing. a—Face not tuberculate, nor distinctly carinate ; not excavated be- low the antenn in profile ; hyperstoma not produced. (Small, -nearly bare species, with short oval abdomen)-......... if te aa—Face tuberculate, or hyperstoma produced. *—Abdomen in outline, linear or oval, never narrowed toward the base, or club-shaped. Tegule of usual size.) +—Body uniform metallic green, or metallic green and black ; abdomen oval or elongate, never slender ; femora not thick- ened, nor facial tubercle dissimilar in male and female. III. ++—Black with luteous, reddish or yellow, when uniformly black thesbinid) femora thekemed ai. o%, sp aoe eve ie IV. tt}—Black or greenish black, with yellow or yellowish stripes or bands, « or face more or less yellow. S—Face black, abdomen slender, with yellow or greenish yellow interrupted. cross-bands .7-4-,.» 0521-0 Sjel eee = Vv. §S—Face partly or wholly yellow, abdominal markings Bea aig yellow lateral stripes.... VI. xxz—Dorsum of thorax ith aus yellow lateral stripes. Vil. **__ Abdomen contracted toward the base, more or less club-shaped VIII. aa—Marginal cell closed and petiolate... 2.00. ...00. 0. cee eee eee IX. 44—The small cross-vein at or beyond the middle of the discal cell, ti. é., the discal section of the fourth longitudinal vein beyond the small cross-vein, is but little longer or much shorter than the section before it ; small cross-vein nearly always oblique, the posterior femora frequently thickened. a—Antenne with a distinctly dorsal bristle. &—Third longitudinal vein bent deeply into the first posterior cell y—Marginal GEN Glosed ard SDEUOIALE’ o's oye sm ste diye c oleate x. vy—Marginal CANNON ra cretcts son as RSE Mec iadaiie mene nian € > ip 73—Third longitudinal vein gently curved. d—Arista plumose. Sa eneinal.cell. closed’ .i5409 o/i2.=1e14 So Meck hesee Doros. NN.—Front more rounded, face less receding, third joint of antenne tarce> ellipticals dae ste oels\ 4212 = ase e etaiete Xanthogramma. a.—Bands of abdomen entire or sub-interrupted..........+..--+6, feliz. b.—Bands of abdomen broadly interrupted : XANTHOGRAMMA DIVISA, Sp. NOv. 3 Q.—Face and cheeks yellow, or reddish-yellow. Front metallic greenish-black, continued as a broad stripe to the base of the antenn, somewhat expanded below, on the sides yellowish. Antenne black, somewhat reddish below on the sides of the second and third joint near the base, third joint oval obtuse as in feliz, but a little smaller. Dorsum of thorax deep metallic green with yellow lateral stripes, pleure yellowish with white pile. Scutellum a somewhat translucent yellow, its base nar- rowly black. Abdomen: first segment with a small yellow spot on each side just under the halteres, second segment with an oval spot on each side, somewhat attenuated toward the middle, third and fourth with large rec- tangular spots, separated by nearly their own width ; fifth with an ante- rior fascia narrower in the middie and encroaching slightly upon the pre- ceding segment. Legs yellow, anterior and middle femora. sometimes narrowly brown annulate near the base, posterior legs mostly brownish or blackish, except the base of femora and knees. Wings hyaline, with a smoky tinge, stigma yellowish. Long. corp.9-llmm. Eight specimens. * Washington Territory. VII. A.—Small cross-vein before the middle of the discal cell. 2.—Antenne short. a.—Marginal cell open. aa.—Face tuberculate, hyperstoma not produced. * —Abdomen oval. +++.—Black, or greenish-black, with yellow markings. $$:-—Face wholly, or in part, yellow. xx.—Dorsum of thorax uniform, without lateral stripes. O.—Thickly pilose species ; abdomen quite oval, broader beyond the mid- dle ; face perpendicular, somewhat projecting below and reaching far back under the eyes. (Basal portion of abdomen yellow, terminal portion black, wings with dark spot. L. lucorum)...... Leucozona. Leucozona LucoruM (Linné), Schiner—Meig. Beschr. iii, 313 ; Tab. 30, f. 27 (Syrphus) ; Mt. Hood, Oregon! Europe; North America. O0O.—Rather bare species ; abdomen with yellow bands, either all en- tire, or one or all interrupted. P.—Eyes of male with an area of enlarged facets above ; front very convex ; hypopygium very small...........-.. afm é. —Femora yellow at the base......... sa iidmad Vitek

ew fans’ okeas tReet 8. 4.—Tarsi red, large species ; humble bee-like.............. Serbo moOAC —Tarsi dark, smaller species........... Seoine soon sobs oc sein eter 6. 5.—Thorax wholly yellow pilose above..........0.sc0cssesenvs flavipes. —Thorax with black pile in the middle when seen from the side...... flavipes var. melanostomus. 6.—Abdomen with yellow or reddish on the sides of the second segment only, thickly mostly black pilose elsewhere, posterior half of third, and the fourth segment shining ; legs black............+. Bastardi. —Third segment with yellow or red, the pile of the abdomen almost wholly yellowish,,and Jone gicsewci «10 mis sips nisteep mahal tated eae tae le —Abdomen mostly reddish-yellow with a nearly equal median blatk stripe ; eyes barely meeting in the male ; legs black. montanus, sp. nov. —Third segment with a smaller reddish-yellow spot in the side, second segment velvety black, third with a triangular velvety expansion in PROD Gis cece je Cicte ie Siege © cieteie ts et esels epee aie ea ee ote ee occidentalis, sp. Nov. 8.—Third abdominal segment with a posterior velvety black cross-band not interrupted in the middle.............e0. ofehs tol ones eras aie sterare —Third abdominal segment with 4 distinctly interrupted band, or else wholly shining. Not with a complete band..................08 13. 9.—Thorax with transverse olivaceous fascix, front narrow above (¥ ).10.- —Thorax without'sach fascise...... 3.50% .-ceiee sv toile ee eee ails 10.—Hind femora not swollen, second segment of abdomen with large spots, third segment in the male, with anterior rectangular spots wanting in the female, and hind borders of second, third and fourth segments yellow. Legs varying from almost wholly yellow with black on tips of hind femora and tibix, to black with yellow knees... transversus: i; 1882.] 319 [ Williston. . . —Hind femora distinctly swollen, bands of thorax conspicuous, third segment of abdomen in female often with red or yellow side spots, otherwise resembling the previous species very much, and like it CUES ETI AVE re acta cece stees tiekehedal otro, ed aichelo\lai =’ shel ster stents ----vinetorum. 11.—Third segment of abdomen broadly and conspicuously yellow, joining the yellow of the second segment in front, the velvety fascia of third segment abbreviated on the sides ; thorax with indistinct stripes ; eyes = ee She of male touching each other very slightly.......... -?Meigenii Wied. —Third segment of abdomen without yellow, eyes of male broadly con- TLMUOUS Arar eeecai- fal waste Be SO DODOE GE OOOE abedpsiaiel eltvovo labs tele: sista’ sapeberttene 12 12.—Front of female narrow. Deep bluish-black, scutellum scarcely dif- . ferent, the abdomen with dull or obsolete triangular spots, the hind \ borders of the segments indistinct or absent, conical ; tips of femora, the posterior at the base especially in the female, basal half of tibie, and more or less of basal joints of anterior and middle tarsi, light yellow. Winies with aidark (gpotiy acm 2-14 cleciclecoiale- .---.Saxorum. —Front of female broad. Lighter markings of abdomen (the lateral tri- angles and posterior borders) usually quite distinct, sometimes nearly obsolete ; third and fourth segments with a velvety median tri- Z angular expansion with its base in front; tips of femora, anterior and middle tibiz, except tips and basal half of posterior tibie yellow. Wings sometimes with a distinct brown spot................. hirtus. 13.—Third segment without (or with very minute) velvety markings, abdomen mostly shining, second, third, and fourth segments with vada 2494°" PUNE OL. wiMiter pil Cars cyrus sus feecatel sis, a mietscciclvans ates ater srelcvere siete 14. _ —Third segment of abdomen with an anterior spot, and a posterior 2 interrupted velvety black fascia, second segment with sub-obsolete B triangular yellow spots, posterior border of segments narrow or in- z: distinct ; basal half of all the tibiz yellowish-white. Wings pure § hyaline. .'.... atau twhl a slate Perea ere seg auvneate dimidiatus. e 14.—Second segment of abdomen with yellow triangles, and a posterior uninterrupted or subinterrupted velvety cross-band, posterior mar- gin of segments 2-4 yellowish-white, with a fringe of pale golden yel- lomphaies A) Chenet i O13 mm els 52) Siac eects ov oes ste dle ldo oe stipator. —Second segment except the metallic side spots that extend the whole : length of the segment, velvety black ; third segment with a velvety triangle in front, the fourth with similar, but very small ; the yellow- ish-white hind borders fringed less conspicuously with light colored Op am Recerca etd seers oben eee Beierie toy aeayS Sols Savajebeverete Brousii, sp. nov. Bristalis inornatus Lw., Centur. vi, 68. Red River. Diagnosis, translation. Q. ‘“Sub-brassy black, shining, clothed with rather long lutescent pile (‘pube’); front broad, near the eyes black pilose, but the vertex itself with luteous pile ; eyes pilose ; antenne red- dish ferruginous, the first two joints black, the arista pilose; face, except the usual stripes yellow, with dilutely lutescent pile and pollen ; scutel- Willston.] 320 [May 19, lum wholly testaceous ; each segment of the abdomen except the first with a black posterior fascia, second and third emarginate and velutinous, the following sub-shining and in the posterior margin, very narrowly yellow. Feet black, extreme apex of the femora, the basal half of ante- rior and posterior tibix, the middle tibiz except the apical third and the first joint of the middle tarsi, pallid yellowish ; ‘ale hyalinz, vena disci > 99 colore subfusco late circumfusis. Long. corp. 6} lin., Long. al. 4° lin. Eristalis obscurus Lw., 1. c. 67. Red River. Diagnosis, translation. ‘9. Brassy black shining, clothed with rather long dilutely lutescent cinerous pile ; front broad, above black pilose ; eyes pilose, antennie reddish ferruginous, first two joints black, arista pilose, face except the usual stripes yellow testaceous, white pollinose and white- pilose ; scutellum brown, black near the base; each abdominal segment except the first with a posterior black fascia, not emarginate and with a very slender posterior yellow margin ; feet black, apex and base ofall the femora, the basal third of anterior and posterior tibix, intermediate tibiz except the apex, and the first two joints of all the tarsi pallid yellowish ; wings pure hyaline, veins of the disc clouded with fuscous. Long. corp. 5-5} lin., long. al., 43-42 lin. ERISTALIS LATIFRONS Lw., 1. c. 65. Matamoras, Texas, Iowa. Diagnosis, translation. ‘‘ ‘2. Black, moderately shining, wholly pal- lidly pilose ; antennze fuscous, setze bare, luteous ; scutellum testaceous ; second segment of the abdomen with two sub-triangular testaceous spots, posterior margin pallid, posterior margins of the following segments pal- » lid, in front pallidly pollinose ; feet black, the knees, tibix, except the apex, and the base of the intermediate tarsi, pallid flavescent ; eyes of the male contiguous, in the female by the front broadly separated. Long. corp. $-95 lin., long. al. 44-43 lin. Fristalis atriceps Lw., 1. c. 64. White Mts., Canada. Diagnosis, translation. ‘‘’. Black, shining ; head wholly concolorous, antennze obscurely rufous, arista bare; scutellum and two spots of the second abdominal segment brown ; posterior margin of the second, third, and fourth abdominal segments pallid yellow ; wings hyaline, costa ex- cept the apical third fuscous-clouded. Long. corp. 43-4,°; lin., long al. 32 lin.”’ Fristalis pilosus Lw., 1. c. 70. Greenland. Diagnosis, translation. ‘‘ 92. Black, thickly clothed with long yellow pile; eyes black pilose ; antennz black, arista bare; face black ; thorax unicolorous, opaque ; scutelium luteous; first two abdominal segments opaque, secured on each side witha dilutely lutescent spot ; third segment black, with two opaque spots, confluent in an abbreviated fascia ; two ul- timate segments brassy [metallic], black, shining, with a minute triangu- lar spot, opaque ; pile of the dorsum lupinous, on the sides of the middle ae Fad gts a” SSA A TVS fy 1882.] 321 (Williston. black, remainder yellow ; wings pure hyaline, veins fuscous black, in the female with blackish spots.—Long. corp. 53-6} lin., long. al. 45-53 lin.’’ Bristalis estriformis Walker, List, etc., iii, 573 (Syrphus). Hudson’s Bay Territory. **Mas. Niger, thoracis pilis anticis nigris pootecis fulvis, scutello fulvo, abdomine pilis albis nigris fulvisque fasciato, antennis piceis, pedibus nigris, alis Iimpidis fusco unimaculatis. “Body black; head clothed with dull tawny hairs, shining and promi- nent in front ; mouth pitchy ; feelers pitchy ; bristle ferruginous, downy; eyes pitchy, each witha broad stripe of short black hairs ; all the facets very small; chest clothed with short black hairs, and on the hinder part with pale tawny hairs ; scutcheon tawny, very thickly clothed with'pale tawny hairs ; abdomen nearly oval, broader and a little longer than the chest, clothed with white hairs at the base, with black hairs in the middle, and with bright tawny hairs towards the tip ; legs black, clothed with short black hair; knees pitchy ; shanks and feet clothed beneath with tawny down ; hind feet. tawny ; claws and foot cushions tawny ; tips of claws black ; wings colorless ; large dark brown spot in the disk; wing ribs pitchy ; veins black, ferruginous towards the base and along the free borders ; poisers ferruginous. Length of the body 7 lines; of the wings [spread] 14 lines.’’ Eyistalis albiceps Macq., Dipt. Exot. ii, 2, 56, 41, Carolina. ««Ater. horace antice duabus fasciis transversus albidis. Abdominis primo, secundo tertioque segmentis maculis lateralibus flavis. Facie fron- tique albis. Long. 41. ¢.” ‘< Face testacie, a duvet blancet bande nue, luisante. Partie antérieure du front a duvet et poils blancs. Antennes testacées. Yeux nus. Thorax d’un noir velonté; la seconde bande transversale sur la suture ; ecusson fauve. Abdomen, les taches latérales laissant un espace etroit entrélles ; celles du troisieme segment n’atteignant pas le sord posterieur ; incisions jaunes ; quatrieme a petits poils noire. Cuisses noires, & genoux fauves ; jambes jaunes, 4 extremité braune ; tarses noirs. Balanciers jaunes. Ailes hyalines ; 4 base un peu jaunatre ; cellule basilaire externe s’étendant jus- qu’a la moitié de la discoidale.”’ Eristalis parens Bigot, Dipt. Nouv. xxi, Annal Ent. Soc. Fr., 1878, 216. Diagnosis, translation. {. Eyes pilose, arista at the base briefly pilose (similar to EH. arbustoerum) ; antennze reddish-brown ; face black, on the sides obscurely cinereous pilose; thorax black, densely fulvous pilose ; scutellum fulvous ; tegulz testaceous ; abdomen, second segment, on each side, with a broad spot, triangular, fulvous, third with similar, but nar- rower, spots, narrowly margined with yellow ; femora obscurely reddish- brown, knees and tibiz pallid testaceous ; apex broadly reddish-brown, tarsi obscurely red, apex slightly infuscate; wings nearly hyaline, bese and external border, dilutely and very pallidly infuscated. Long. 13mm. North America. Williston.] ERISTALIS TENAX (Linné), Meig. Atlantic and Middle States, Washington Territory ! Eufope, Asia, Africa. A single specimen from the Pacific coast agrees in every respect with Eastern ones. The distribution of this species is remarkable ; although at present very abundaut in the region of New England, it was never observed or known to collectors longer ago than 1874! ERISTALIS FLAVIPES, var MELANOSTOMUS Lw., Centur. vi., 69. I have a single female specimen from Oregon that I doubtfully refer to this species. While the dorsum of the thorax is black pilose the yellowish pile of the abdomen is confined to the terminal segments. TI have collected large numbers of flavipes in Connecticut, and among them I have found typical specimens of melonostomi and others agreeing quite with the speci- men from Oregon, while still others have the yellowish pile of the abdo- men more or less intermixed with black. -0cs a0) + ope Rae dives. Anterior femora at base and tips of all the tarsi black... .buccata. All the femora brown ; tibiz likewise infuscated........nigripes. CHRYSOCHLAMYS CROESUS O. Sacken. West. Dipt., 341. Washington Terr., California ! Utah. nn.—Thorax without any bristly hairs. o.—Face short, not produced, extending but very little below the eyes, shorter than the front, concave from antenne to tip, not tuberculate, transversely arched, hind femora more or less thickened. p.—Abdomen elongate, hind femora with short spinous bristles below: os. fish ee wa eee nen eee eee Brachypalpus. 1882.] 329 [ Williston. BRACHYPALPUS PULCHER Wlstn. Can. Entomologist, vol. xiv, p. 78. Oregon, Washington Terr. Readily recognized by the abdominal segments being broadly banded and bordered behind by brilliant brassy or bronze, the fourth segment in the male wholly so. The first segment in the male with a narrow posterior border extending across from its side spots. ; pp. —Abdomen very broad, thorax densely pilose, very large species..... Hadromyia Wlstn, 1. c. HADROMYIA GRANDIS Wlstn., 1. c. Washington Terr. The present species is the largest Syrphid of which I have any knowledge ; it measures nearly an inch in length by a third of an inch in width across the abdo- men. oo.—Face produced, longer than the front. g.—Face produced forwards, pointed, concave from antenne to tip, not tuberculate, subcarinate, eyes of male contiguous or nearly so in front of ocellar tubercle, hind femora thickened, usually with bristiy points below, abdomen without yellow markings.Crioprora. A.—Dorsum of thorax beset with thick or yellowish or yellowish-rufous pile, on the pleura black; wings with brownish clouds along the veins. a.—Front in female broad, beset with yellow pile.........*alopex O.S. b.—Front in female narrow, beset with black pile..femorata, sp. nov. B.—Dorsum of thorax beset with long grayish or whitish pile, above on pleure yellowish-white, abdomen dark bluish-metallic (in the male with black opaque second segment, and a black opaque cross-band on EMOIOL s,3m cfs sete ote sis «aioe os at eee ener ath puanels weap ? *cyanogaster Lw. I have never seen a specimen of cyanogaster ; it is probably distinct from cyanellia, although the description applies quite well to my female cyanella. A comparison is needed of specimens from the Atlantic and Pacific States in order to make the description of Loew’s species more complete. *CRIOPRORA ALOPEX 0. §., West Dipt., 338 (Pocota). California. CRIOPRORA CYANELLA QO. S., 1. c., 339. California. Osten Sacken’s description, as usual, is quite accurate. CRIOPRORA FEMORATA, Sp. Noy. og. Everywhere deep shining black. Front in female narrower than in cyanella, with black pile, eyes in male less contiguous than in cyanella ; the face a little less produced and more obtusely pointed. An- tennze reddish-brown, arista yellow. Thorax and scutellum with rather abundant yellow pile, black on the pleure. Abdomen with a brassy re- flection, black pilose, intermingled with longer yellow on the sides of the second segment. Legs wholly black pilose, the anterior tibize and tarsi with golden pubescence. Hind femora in the male much thickened in the male and bent with a row of short spinous tubercles below, posterior cox obtusely Williston.] 330 tuberculate, and tibiz in lower third strongly bent ; in female the femora and tibie not bent, the formerswollen but the tubercles indistinct. Wings with brown clouds along the vein and a very dark spot near the tip of auxiliary, the inner portion of the cells hyaline. Long. corp. 15-16 mm. Washington Territory. pp.—F ace, not evenly concave, tuberculate ; hind femora slender. g.—Face produced downwards and forwards, proboscis long ; eyes of male well separated, abdomen uniformly black, short, broad...... Eurhinamallota Big. Bul. Soc. Ent. Fr. Apr. 1882, No. 6, p. 78, Brachymyia Williston, Can. Entomologist, Vol. xiv, p. 76, May, 1882. EURHINAMALLOTA LUPINA, Wlstn., 1. c. California. EURHINAMALLOTA NIGRIPES Wlstn., 1. c. Northern and Southern Cali- fornia. I know this species only in the female; should the male’s eyes be found to be contiguous in front of the ocellar tubercle, I know of no other character to separate it from Hriophora, Phillipi Ver. Zool. Bot. Gesells. Wien., 15, 735, 1865, pl. 26, fig. 36. qq.—Face produced directly downward, more or less arched or tubercu- late in the lower part. r.—Eyes of male separated by the ocellar tubercle. Antennal promi- nence very conical, abdomen with 3-4 pairs of large oval, oblique yellow side spots. — a a ‘ a: 2 « ¥ ~¥ —e —————— te se ~~ 355 (Jayne. } Elytra fulvous, with a black sub-basal spot and longitudinal broad band on either side of suture extending almost to, the apex, pubescence uniformly cinereous. Last joint of male club as long as the preceding two united, which are very large and equal....-.5.0. 7. A OOP RG SoH jeer. fee SLOLEI Is Elytra black with a sub-basal sinuous transverse piceous band, which bears dense whitish pubescence, all three joints of male club very large and equal.......... Sacdce perplexus. Prosternum narrow and short. Elytra black, with three, more or less confluent, broad piceous spots on either side of suture; whitish pubes- cence arranged in three distinct transverse fasciv, all three joints of male antennze club very large and equal. varicolor. A. piceus Oliv. Elongate. convex, black, clothed with short, semi- erect, yellow pubescence. Head coarsely punctate, sparsely pubescent. Antenne rufo-testaceous. Thorax black, coarsely punctate, pubescent at sides and base. Scutellum pubescent. Elytra black, or rufous, coarsely punctured, clothed with very sparse, brownish pubescence. Body beneath black, coarsely and densely punctate, clothed with semi-erect, yellow hairs. Prosternum long and wide. Legs rufous. Length .14-.20 inch ; 45mm. (Fig. 26.) Male. Antennee with first joint large, suboval; second smaller; joints 3-8 smull ; 9-11 forming the club, of which the first two joints are wide but very short, the last wide, extremely long, pointed at end—equaling all the preceding part of the organ. (Fig. 22.) Female. Antennal club compact, not quite equal to all the preceding joints, made up of three joints of which 9-19 are equal; while the last equals the two united. (Fig. 23.) Under this name I have included rufipennis, dichrous, spurcus, megatoma, as I can see no characters by which they can be separated. The sparsely * pubescent uniformly colored elytra, the broad prosternum and the struc- ture of the male antenne are diagnostic. Occurs everywhere. A. pellio Linn. Elongate, convex, black, clothed with short, semi- erect, brown hairs ; head coarsely punctate, pubescence sparse, brown and erect, antenn rufo-testaceous, club cinereous. Thorax coarsely punctate, base and angles clothed with white pubescence ; scutellum pubescent. Elytra black, sparsely pubescent, a small smooth spot on either side of suture is clothed with dense white hairs. Body beneath black, coarsely | punctate, pubescence yellow, semi-erect. Prosternum wide, moderately long; abdominal segments rufous, margined with black, pubescent. Length .21 inch;5.5mm. (Figs. 29, 30.) Male. Antennal club with joints 9-10 very small—last joint very large, as long as all the remaining portion of the antenne. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOc. Xx. 112. 2s. PRINTED auGusT 16, 1882. ge oe .,. ee : ee 5 ad Cr ats? ™ Bakes of Jayne.] 356 ao une 16, Female. Antennal club compact, joints 9-10 wide, together equaling the last segmént. Distinguished by the elytral spots, uniform color, and the structure of the prosternum and male antennal club. Occurs in New England. A. Hornii, n.sp. Elongate, convex, black, clothed with dense, cine- reous, semi-erect pubescence. Elytra fulvous with a broad longitudinal black band, interrupted obliquely at basal third, of black ; head coarsely punctate, pubescent, antenne testaceous; thorax coarsely punctate, densely pubescent. Elytra coarsely punctate, fulvous with a basal spotand longitu- dinal band rufous; entirely clothed with dense, cinereous recumbent pubescence. Body beneath rufo-piceous, moderately coarsely punctate, clothed with short cinereous hairs, prosternum moderately long, wide. Mesosternum twice as wide as long, sulcate in front, very prominent. Abdominal segments black with short cinereous hairs. Legs testaceous. Length .14 inch; 3.5mm. (Figs. 24, 25.) Male. Antennal club elongate, with joints 9-10 very large, equal, together as long as all the preceding joints, 11 elongate almost equal to 9and10 united. (Fig. 18.) Female. Antennal club elongate, joints 9-10-11 equal. (Fig. 19.) This species is easily separated from the rest, by the markings, and dense cinereous pubescence of the elytra and by the structure of the male antennal club. The mesosternum is long, less deeply sulcate and more prominent than in the other species. It was recognized by Crotch as a new form and labeled 3 in the collec- tions with the above nafhe, although no description has ever been pub- lished. A. byturodes Cr. of the Check List is the female of this species. Occurs in the Pacific States. A. perplexus n.sp. Elongate, convex, black, clothed with short, black, semi-erect pubescence. Elytra with broad sinuous basal and a few spots at middle and apex, of whitish pubescence. Head coarsely punctate, pubes- cence black and cinereous. Antenne rufous. Thorax densely and coarsely punctate, disc sparsely, sides and base more densely clothed with long semi-erect yellow pubescence. Elytra black, with a piceous sinuous sub-basal band which bears whitish-yellow hairs. Body beneath black, coarsely punctate, pubescence short, semi-erect, yellowish-white. Pro- sternum wide, moderately long, abdominal segments black, finely punctate, pubescent, legs rufous. Length .16 inch ; 4 mm. Male. Antennal club with joints 9-10 equal; 11 slightly longer not equal to both the preceding united. Female. Antennal club with the last joint equal to two preceding united‘ This species is entirely different in appearance and in the structure of the male antennal club from all others in our fauna except varicolor, from AONE Pi SORT OE we) Mere Ky ae he a “ ai4 id NE pat ee 2 aaa” + ig ae , errs ; 1882.] 357 [Jayne, which it can be easily distinguished by the narrow short prosternum and broad confluent piceous spots on the elytra of the latter. Occurs in Nevada. A. varicolor, n. sp. Elongate, convex, black, covered with whitish- yellow, semi-erect pubescence. Head and thorax coarsely punctate, pubescent. Antenne rufous. Scutellum pubescent. Elytra black, clothed with black, semi-erect pubescence, marked by three irregular transverse confluent rufous spots, with three sinous transverse bands of white semi-erect pubescence, Body beneath black, punctate, covered with short, cinercous hairs. Prosternum very short and narrow. Legs tufo-testaceous. Length .16inch; 4mm. (Figs. 20, 21, 27, 28.) Male. Antennal club not quite twice as long as all the preceding por- tion, with joints 9-11 very large; last joint only slightly longer. Female. Antennal ciub small, equal to all the preceding joints united, last joint almost equal to the two others together. The distinguishing characters of this species are the narrow prosternum; structure of male antennal club; the elytra, black and piceous, bearing three distinct white fascie. Occurs in the Pacific States. DEARTHRUS Lec. Head as wide as anterior border of thorax. Eyes round, large, very prominent, entire. Antenne 9-jointed, terminated by a 3-jointed club (fig. 38). Thorax not twice as wide as long, slightly bisinuate at base. Elytra elongate, sides nearly parallel. Prosternum one-third ‘as long as wide, tip sub-acute, not produced beyond anterior coxe. No true anten- nal fosse, Mesosternum narrowly divided. Mesocoxe not widely sepa- rated (fig. 32). Metasternum short, side pieces wide. Posterior coxe not reaching the sides of body. Coxal plates short and wide, covering more than basal half of femora. Legs slender, first four joints of tarsi subequal, last joint much longer, hardly equal to all the others taken together. This genus, founded upon one species, has been merged into Attagenus, from which, however, it is undoubtedly distinct. The 9-jointed antenne, the peculiar prosternum, the narrowly divided mesosternum, the short and wide posterior coxal plates like those of Trogoderma and allied genera, and finally, the entire facies of the insect, are characters too important to be overlooked or underestimated. D. longulus Lec. Elongate, compressed, black, clothed with sparse’ yellow semi-erect pubescence. Head black, coarsely punctate, sparsely pubescent. Thorax coarsely punctate, sparsely pubescent. Elytra black or piceous, coarsely punctate, sparsely pubescent. Body beneath rufous, moderately coarsely punctate, clothed with sparse, cinereous pubescence. Abdominal segments rufous, mnargined with rufo-testaceous, punctate, pubescent. Legsrufous. (Fig. 31.) - Length .1 inch; 2.5 mm. Jayne. ] 358 pre (June 16, | Male. Antenne of nine joints, first very large, sub-oval ; second some- what smaller; 3-6 small; 7-9 forming the club equal to all the preceding united, of which tie first is very small; the second wider and longer ; the last twice as wide as the second and almost three times as long as the two united, obtusely pointed at tip. Female. Club of antenne a little more than half as long as the preceding joints taken together; last joint as wide as, and little longer than the second ; nearly truncate at tip. Occurs in the Atlantic district. PERIMEGATOMA Horn. Form elongated, only moderately convex, body dark in color. Head moderately wide, front flat, epistoma moderately short ; a distinct ocellus. Antenne 11-jointed, club 3-jointed, except in Belfragi, where it is 5-jointed. Eyes large, round, prominent, and entire. Thorax twice as wide at base as at apex, and half as long as the greatest width, very convex and promi- nent in front, with a transverse depression across the: base, which is slightly bisinuate. Sides arcuate, hind angles prominent, except in Bel- fragi, where they are somewhat retracted. Scutellum small, but distinct. Elytra long, sides nearly parallel, apices not separately rounded. Pro- sternum only moderately broad, and very long, lobed in front, covering all the mouth parts, except the labrum, produced behind into a short tip re- ceived into the mesosternum, which is narrow and deeply emarginate. No antennal fossz, spaces between prosternum and lateral margins slightly concave (Fig. 35), metasternum short, side pieces wide. Legs stout. Posterior cox do not attain the sides; coxal plate short, moderately wide (Fig. 54) ; first joint of tarsus long, 2-3-4 successively shorter, 5 as long as first. This genus was established for several species, occuring from Lake Superior to Texas, California and Sitka, which agree with Megatoma in all the characters except in the antennal fossee, which are absent in this genus. The ornamentation, by the pubescence of the surface, resembles somewhat that of Megatoma, there being two transverse, undulating, cinereous bands, the one at the basal third, the other at the apical fourth. The following is the arrangement of the species, proposed by Dr. Horn (Trans. Am. Ent. Soc. 1875, p. 135) : Antennal club 3-jointed. - First juint of club in both sexes, very little smaller than the second joint. . : Pubescence unicolored, grayish-white (.16 inch).......cylindricum. Pubescence'bicolared;'C20ineh)\qasceice Jayne.) ) Ba sobrinus Lec., loc. cit., p. 108. mucoreus Lec.; loc. cit., p. 108. pulcher Lec., loc. cit., p. 108. lardarius Linn., Faun. Suec., p. 140. var, signatus Lec., Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 1874, p. 50. elongatus Lec., loc. cit., p. 109. cadaverinus Fabr., Syst. Ent., p. 55; ibid. Ent. ii, 9; p. 7, t. 2, f. 9, a-b. vulpinus Fab., Spec. Ins. i, p. 64.; Lec., loc. cit., p. 109. lupinus Mann., Bull. Mosce., 1843, ii, p. 257. maculatus DeGeer, Ins. iv, p. 223. ATTAGENUS. * Latr. Gen. Crust. et Ins. ii, 1807, p. 32. piceus Oliv., Ent. ii, 9, p. 10, t. 1, f. 4, a-b. dichrous Lec., loc. cit., p. 110. megatoma Fabr., Ent. Syst., Suppl., p. 71. rufipennis Lec., Proc. Acad. Phil., 1859, p. 71. spurcus Lec., Synop., loc. Cit., p. 109. p2llio Linné, Fauna. Suez., p. 141. bipunctatus Deg., Ins. iv, p. 197. ‘ Hornii, n. sp. perplexus, Nn. sp. varicolor, n. sp. DEARTHRUS. LeConte, Class. Col., N. Am., 1, 1861, p. 108. longulus Lec., New Spec. Col., i, 1863, p. 73. PERIMEGATOMA. Horn, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 1875, p. 135. = cylindricum Kby., Fauna Bor. Am., iv, p. 113, pl. 7, fig. 3; Horn, loc. cit., p. 186. var. angularis, Mann. Bull. Mose., 1853, iii, p. 216. variegatum Horn, loc. cit., p. 136. falsum Horn, loc. cit., p. 136. Belfragei Lec., Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 1874, p. 49; Horn, loc. cit., p. 1387. ACOLPUS, n. g. primus, n. sp. TROGODERMA., Latr., Regn. Anim. Ed. 2, iv, 1829, p. 511. simplex, nN. sp. sternale, n. sp. PON ee, 1882.] 305 [Jayne, ornatum Say., Journ. Acad Phil. v, p. 185. pusillum Lec., Synop. loc. cit., p. 111. inclusum Lec., loc. cit., p. 110. pallipes Zieg]., Proc. Acad. Phil. ii., p. 269. tarsale Mels., Proc. Acad. Phil. ii, p. 116. CRYPTORHOPALUM. Guér., Ic. Regn. Anim. Ins., 1838, p. 67. balteatum Lec., Synop. loc. cit., p. 111. hzmorrhoidale Lec., Ann. Lyc. 1, p. 170. t. 11, f. 4. apicale Mann., Bull. Mosc., 1843, ii, p. 258. ruficorne Lec., Synop. loc. cit., p. 111. triste Lec., 1. c., p. 111. var. fusculum Lec., loc. cit., p. 111. nigricorne Lec., Proc. Acad. Phil., 1861, p. 344. picicorne Lec., Synop. loc. cit., p. 111. AXINOCERUS, 0. g. americanus, 0. sp. ANTHRENUS. Geoffroy, Inst. Envir. Par. i, 1764, p. 113. 2, p. 568. ‘scrophulariz Linn., Syst. Nat. i, var. flavipes Lec., Synop., p. 112. var. thoragicus Mels., Proc. Acad. Phil. ii, p. 117. lepidus Lec., Synop. loc. cit., p. 112. varius Fabr., Syst. Ent., p. 60. var. destructor Mcls., loc. cit., p. 116. museorum Linn., Fauna Suec., p. 145. castanee Mels., loc. cit., p. 116. claviger Er., Nat. Ins. iii, p. 458. APSECTUS. LeConte, Proc. Acad. Phil., 1854, p. 113. hispidus Melsh., Proc. Acad. Phil. ii, p. 117; Lec., loc. cit. t > Ot =o Ss] Spe Be Se a = Sas (Jayne. Acolpus primus, n. sp. Head and antenne of 3‘ Trogoderma ornata Say. Antenna of 2 same. Underside of head and prothorax of the same. Prosternum and mesosternum of the same. a S oe Trogoderma sternale, n. sp. Trogoderma simplex, n. sp. Underside of head and prothorax of the same. Head and antenne of Trogoderma inclusum Lec. Cryptorhopalum balteatum Lec. Antenna of )01 |S Yes. Eee eee Specific Grayity = — — 2.997 — —— — 3.004 — —— SiO, == 29.07 — 3410 — -—— — 32.55 -—— 33.10 Al,O; == 50.44 — 47.38 — —— — 4887 — 562.20 Fe,0, = trace — 0.34 — — — 0.60 — trace MgO =—— 017 — — — 0238 — — CaO = 11.68 — 9.20 — —— — 1048 — 8.44 Li,O = — — trace — —— — trace — trace Na,O = —- — 114 — 0.80 — 2.38 — 2.59 K,O =— — 234 — 880 — 0.438 — Ignition = 668 — 448 — 415 — 434 — 485 Corundum = — — +054 — ee eee 99.64 — 99.88 — 101.18 5. Corundum, altered into Fibrolite. a. In my previous paper I mention an observation by Prof. C. U. Shepard that at the Falls of the Yantic near. Norwich, Conn., small crystals of sapphire are completely surrounded by fibrolite. Since then, Prof. George J. Brush has kindly presented to me a specimen which is quite interesting. It is a fibrolite of a brownish-white color, and shows, if examined with a strong lens, disseminated through the mass, numerous particles or remnants of grayish-blue corundum from which the fibrolite was formed ; but besides, there is implanted in the fibrolite, a small hexa- gonal crystal of brown corundum 5™" long and 1.5™™ thick, which must have crystallized at the time when the fibrolite was formed. b. Recently this rare alteration of corundum into fibrolite has been found in numerous specimens at Shoup’s Ford, Burke Co., N. C. The corundum occurs in a mica schist in crystals, varying generally between 20 and 75™" in length and from 10 to 45™" in thickness, it has a brown ora bronze color and many crystals exhibit a star of six rays. The crystals are frequently flattened, always altered on the surface, rarely to a depth of 5™". The alteration consists ‘of an aureole of very fine fibrous and radiating white fibrolite. It seems that subsequently the fibrolite underwent a partial alteration into mica, as the mica schist in whicli the crystals are imbedded contains stili a large admixture of fibrolite. c. I have very little doubt that the alteration, described by Sillem (Jahrb. fiir Mineralogie, 1851, 385), of corundum into guartz from Barsovka in the Ural is really that into fibrolite. The altered mineral surrounds a core of unchanged corundum from which it radiates. My opinion is supported by the fact that Sillem’s description of this alteration is identical with mine of corundum into fibrolite; then, that quartz very rarely assumes a radiating structure ; that fibrolite has nearly the hardness of quartz; and finally that his statement is not supported by an analysis. , 1882.] 391 (Genth, 6. Corundum, altered into Cyantte. a. In the gravel, two miles West of Statesville, Iredell Co., N. C., an interesting specimen has been found, consisting of a nucleus of pink colored corundum, around which is crystallized pale blue cyanite which latter has evidently resulted from the alteration of corundum. b. In some specimens which I have received. since the publication of my first paper on corundum, I have observed that the coarsely-bladed crystalline masses of cyanite from Wilkes county, N. C., resulting from the alteration of corundum, are further changed into micaceous minerals. They are very finely granular, scaly, and show the bladed structure and cleavage of the original cyanite, and between the lamin minute scales of mica and a little quartz. They have a grayish to brownish-white color, faint pearly lustre. H = 2.5. sp. gr. = 2.920. The purest material has been analyzed by my son, Mr. F. A. Genth, Jr., who found : SiO, = 39.58 AJj,O, = 49.42 Fe,0, = trace MgO = trace CaO = 6,34 Na,O \ se epi K,O = 3.01 H,O = 4.12 100.58 This analysis would correspond to about 59 % of calcium-sodium-mica (margarite), 29 % of potassium mica (muscovite), 9.7 % of unaltered cyanite and about 2.6 % of quartz. 7. When were the Corundum Alterations formed ? In many of the gravel beds in the Southern States, especially in North Carolina and Georgia, corundum is frequently met with, very rarely asso- ciated with diamonds, but generally with gold, zircon, monazite, xenotime, brookite, octahedrite, rutile, menaccanite, chromite, magnetite, cyanite, garnet, epidote, &c. The corundum is sometimes, but rarely found in crystals of the usual form, mostly in fragments and cleavage pieces with very sharp edges and angles, which hardly ever are water-worn. These fragments show that the minerals have been broken by a very great force which had acted upon them very rapidly. Many of these fragments give evidence that, at the time when the corundum was broken up, a great portion of it had already under- gone an alteration into other minerals. The most frequent are muscovite, mostly in fine scales, sometimes in subfibrous coatings ; some also show feldspar, margarite, black spinel and tourmaline, and very rarely cyanite, usually containing a nucleus of corundum. The altered minerals, accord- Genth.] 392 [August 18, ing to their hardness are more or less water-worn and rounded, whilst the corundum which they enclose is quite sharp and angular, which fact proves that, since the great gravel deposits were formed no alteration of the corundum has taken place in these deposits. IT. Alteration of Orthoclase into Albite. Orthoclase changed into albite is undoubtedly one of the most interest- ing alteration of one mineral into another. Numerous occurrences of it have been observed in. Europe, but Iam not aware that it ever was no- ticed in this country ; I will therefore give the description of an occur- rence from the neighborhood of Philadelphia. At the gneiss quarries of Upper Avondale, in Delaware county, Pa., druses have some time ago been found, which are lined with crystals of albite, associated with those of muscovite, and rarely with beautiful, but very minute, crystals of white beryl in hexagonal prisms and many pyramids, small crystals and groups of black tourmaline and calcite in cleavage masses and small scalenohedra, 1%, and thin hexagonal plates, which had so much the form of muscovite crystals that, at first, they were thought to be pseudomorphs. Mr. Lewis Palmer, of Media, presented me with a number of specimens. The albite appears in short, stout colorless or white crystals, mostly in twins, showing principally the planes J. O. 7-7. 2-7. i-3 and 1-7. and 7; the latter plane very small and indistinct. Many of the crystals are very small and imperfect, and form a crystalline coating upon the cleavage masses, either directly upon a flesh-colored orthoclase or a grayish-white plagioclase intervening. I have analyzed perfectly colorless crystals (1). Some of the specimens show conclusively that the albite is more recent than the orthoclase, and results from the decomposition of the latter, sometimes with the intermediate development of a plagioclase, and that the crystals and crystalline masses of muscovite have resulted_at the same time, and contain the potassium oxide of the former orthoclase. The or- thoclase which is associated with these albite crystals forms flesh-colored cleavage masses, which on the cleavage planes are bright and lustrous. The purest which with a strong lens appeared to be without admixture, was examined by my son, Mr. F. A. Genth, Jr. In their sections under the microscope it shows the rectangular reticulation characteristic of ortho- clase, but disseminated through it, minute particles of plagioclase, giving proof of an incipient alteration (2). One specimen, particularly is quite interesting. It is a mass of coarse cleavage particles of flesh-colored and white feldspars, with colorless albite crystals in cavities and crystals and scaly aggregations of muscovite and a little quartz. A cleavage crystal of flesh-colored orthoclase, espe- cially on one side shows a rotten appearance, as if in part eaten away and one of the edges and planes is replaced by a lining of albite in the form of an imperfect crystal made up by an aggregation of many small 202 : 1882.] 395 {Genth. individuals, joined together. In other places the albite gradually pushes itself, as it were, into the orthoclase, leaving in many iastances only a small nucleus of the flesh-colored feldspar in the white. In other instances there is between the orthoclase and the crystals of albite a grayish or grayish-white cleavable feldspar with deep striation. The analysis (3) shows it to be a mixture of albite with oligoclase, the oxygen ratio between R,O (RO) : Al,O, : SiO, being = 1 : 3.1 : 10.6. Although not in connection with the alteration of orthoclase into albite and muscovite, I will mention that at the same locality orthoclase has also been found in colorless crystals (4), and white cleavage masses (5) asso- ciated with imperfect crystal of muscovite. The analyses gave the following results : 1 2 3 4 5 Orthoelase, AJdbite and ; Orthoclase, Crystals flesh-red oligoclase, Crystals of white of albite cleavage cleavage O'thoclase, cleavage mass mass. colorless. mass. Spec. Grav. = 2.604 — 2.555 — 2.620 — 2.595 — 2.572 8i,0 =. 68.52 — 6453 — 65.22 — 65.84 — 65.08 P.O, SE ANE AP es Yee a Al,O; =. 19.44 — 19.64 — 21.44 — 19.50 — 19.22 Fe,0, = — — trace — 0.20 — — MnO —— == ttcen—) .-————_ —— race MgO => — — 0.25 — —_ — —_- —_—- es CaO Sere lr OC re 2:08 = . tree = ne BaO on prbreh a) Ane te be eR | Na,O = 11.42 — 1.77 — 9.36 — 3.93 — aly K,O — 0.65 — 138.62 — 1.146 — 10.69.— 14.18 Tgnition = — — 0.71 — 0.58 — 0.22 — 0.13 100.03 — 100.68 — 100.03 — 100.26 — 100.67 Such alterations of orthoclase into albite occur not only in the quarries of Upper Avondale ; én the lower quarries at Leiperville similar facts can be observed, although not so striking, many of the large orthoclase crys- tals showing small patches of a thin coating of a white feldspar, albite or oligoclase, in many places penetrating into the orthoclase to a consider- able extent. : Oligoclase is very common in our gneissic rocks, often associated with orthoclase, and very probably it is the result of the alteration of the latter. If. Alteration of Tale into Anthophyllite. The suggestion which I made over 20 years ago (Am. Journ. Se. [2] xxx, 200), that the chrome and nickel-bearing serpentines have resulted from the alteration of chrysolite, is, at present, I believe, generally ad- mitted, since the numerous investigations of Tschermak, von Drasche, . : Me i P Genth. | 594 [August IS, Groth, Sandberger, and others, have established beyond doubt that this change from, the one mineral into the other is almost universal. At that time I have also shown that at Webster, Jackson county, N. C., a foliated tale has in a similar manner resulted from the alteration of chrysolite. The latter alteration has since been observed in most of the localities in the Southern States, where corundum deposits are found asso- ciated with chrysolite rocks. In Pennsylvania, where the unaltered chrysolite rock has never been ob- served, a rock has been found which is its representative and contains the same constituents, only in different proportions. In North Carolina the granular chrysolite always contains small quantities of enstatite (bronzite), in Pennsylvania on the contrary we have an enstatite (bronzite) rock, con- taining small grains (from 5 to 10%) of chrysolite. It is best developed at Castle Rock, Delaware county, also near Wood’s Chrome Mine in Lancaster county. Tn all the chrysolite rocks small grains or crystals of chromite are dis- seminated through the mass of the rock ; in the serpentine, which has re- sulted from the alteration of the chrysolite, these crystals or grains are still present and give evidence of the original mineral. This is also the case with a peculiar variety of talc, the so-called ‘‘ indurated tale,’ which occurs a few hundred yards south-south-west from Castle Rock, Delaware county, Pa. It is compact, with a strong lens shows a cryptocrystalline, slightly scaly structure, and an impure grayish-olive green color. H = Sp. Gr. = 2.789. Fracture splintery to subconchoidal ; dull. The analysis gave : Calculated : Ssio, = 62.48 61.92 TiO, — trace Chromite Be 0.20 Cr,0, as 0.13 | Al,O; = 0.59 a NiO = 0.16 : FeO — 4.95 5.57 MgO = 27.60 27.86 Ignition | 4.81- 4.65 100.92 100.00 This is a tale, in which about one tenth of the magnesia is replaced by ferrous oxide = H, (Mg, Fe7z5); Si, O;,, represented by the calculated analysis above given. Talc is generally one of the final products of the alteration of other rocks and minerals, but in this case, it has suffered a very remarkable change into anthophyllite. It is enveloped by an aureole of a white or grayish-white mineral, radiating from the nucleus of talc, haying a thick- ness of from a few to over 15™". The mineral is fibrous, of silky lustre . im 1882. } 395 Genth. and shows a large cleavage angle, similar to amphibole ; the terminal planes are either not developed or broken off. It incloses, like the original talc, grains of chromite. Its Spec. gravity was found to be 2.983. Besides my analysis (a) I will give, for comparison, the analysis by Dr. A. Brezina of the anthophyllite from Hermannschlag in Moravia (Tschermak’s Mineral. Mitth., 1874, 247). Castle Rock. Hermannschlag. SiO, a 56.88 2 57.3 Al,O, = 2.45 == 2.04 Cr,0; = trace — - FeO, = : = 0.42 FeO = 9.20 —— 6.53 MnO =s 0.28 — — NiO = 0.17 — -—— MgO = 28.50 as 29.08 CaO — E — 0.69 Na,O = 0.18 — a K,O =: 0.03 a : Ignition = 2.28 = 2.56 99597 98.71 From the description of the mica globules from Hermannschlag, by Di- rector G. Tschermak (Tschermak’s Min. Mitth., 1872, 264) we learn that next to the anthophyllite-stratum and between it and the nucleus of biotite, is a stratum which has a seladon-green color, and appears to be a mixture of talc and chlorite, strongly altered. This observation is of very great interest in connection with the evident alteration of tale into anthophyl- lite, above described. There is also an observation of Dr. F. Becke (Tschermak’s Min. Mitth. [Neue Folge] iv, 450) who noticed the alteration of olivin into anthophy]l- lite between the gabbro locality ‘“*Vier Linden’’ and the R. R. Station Rosswein in Saxony. The olivin shows in many places a commencing alteration into serpentine (or tale ?), and is surrounded by a stratum of anthophyllite of from 5-6™" in thickness. This seems to be an analo- gous case, first, the olivin altered into serpentine (or tale), and this subse- quently changed into anthophyllite. IV. Tale, pseudomorphous after Magnetite. In the vicinity of Dublin in Harford county, Md., is a series of rocks, consisting principally of gneiss and micaceous schists. They are under- laid by a bed of talcose slate, changing in some places into a very superior quality of massive soapstone, from 12 to 15 feet in thickness. Immediately adjoining, and under the talcose slates and soapstone, and in most cases separated from them by seams of chlorite or chlorite slate, lies a very large bed of a beautiful variety of green serpentine, mottled and of darker and paler green colors, of about 500 feet in thickness, and under this, a bed PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xx. 112, 2x. PRINTED NOV. 8, 1882. _*. Genth.] of mottled black serpentine of about 800 feet, and frequently imbedded in the latter, masses of the same dark green serpentine. This immense bed of serpentine, in its two varieties, rests upon chloritic slates, with numer- ous erystals of magnetite in octahedra and twins, so called hemitropes, and tale slates, and below these again occurs another, but smaller bed of green serpentine of about 180 feet in thickness, which like the other is underlaid by chloritic and talcose slates, followed by a third bed of green serpentine. A titaniferous variety of magnetite is found in lenticular masses of vari- ous sizes, intercalated between the green serpentine and is frequently bounded on the hanging wall by chloritic slates. The green serpentine is quarried for ornamental purposes as it admits of a very fine polish and can be obtained in many beautiful shades of light and dark green. The chloritic slate is generally of a very fine scaly structure, sometimes the scales become larger, from 0.5 to 1™™ in diameter on an average, but rarely reaching 3". . At one locality in this large belt, a coarse scaly chlorite, immediately in contact with tale slate, has disseminated through it numerous small octa- hedra of tale, pseudomorphous after magnetite, an alteration, which, if I am correct, has never been observed before. These crystals from 1 to 2"™ in diameter are of a silvery-white color and pearly lustre, the scales are arranged parallel to the octahedral planes, in the center is occasionally a small nucleus of magnetite, sometimes associated with pulverulent limonite. This alteration of magnetite crystals into tale is of importance in connec- tion with the steatite bed of 12 to 15 feet in thickness; to which I have above referred, because it shows that no good reason can be given to con- tradict the proposition that an entire magnetite bed has disappeared and has been replaced by steatite. This opinion is proved by the following observations. . % The steatite is of a white or greenish-white color, it has mostly an un- even fracture, some seams in it, however, graduate into a slaty structure. Cryptocrystalline, and showing, when powdered, to be composed of an aggregate of exceedingly fine scales. Disseminated through the whole mass ure dark spots, from 0.1 to 10™™ in diameter. Especially the larger ones sometimes have @ definite shape of squares or rhombs, or other forms, rep- resenting sections of magnetite crystals. These dark spots of a dark gray or iron-black color, are quite soft and can be reduced to a powder by the nail of a finger, and consist of fine scaly tale, colored by remnants of the original magnetite, which frequently can be separated by a magnet, or dissolved out by hydrochloric acid. That only a small number of the dark spots show the form of sections of magnetite, whilst most of them are without definite shape, shows that the original magnetite in the bed . was granular or compact, but had, as is very common, crystals of magne tite disseminated through the whole mass. 1882. | : 597 [Genth. V. Gahiite. a. Already in 1876, at the Centennial Exhibition, I observed, amongst minerals from Western North Carolina, a specimen which was so unlike any species with which I was familiar, that I was in doubt about its nature. A little fragment of it which I afterwards received I put provisionally under gahnite. About a year ago I recognized the same mineral again amongst others which Mr. W. E. Hidden had collected in North Carolina, who very kindly gave me some fragments for investigation, which proved it to be gahnite. Apparently without form, a fracture between splintery and conchoidal, and of a very rich, dark green color, which can best be observed by trans- mitted light H=7%.5. Sp. Gr. = 4.576. The analysis is given below (a), after deducting 0.09% SiO, and (a 2) the calculated results. It occurs rarely at the Deake Mica Mine, Mitchell Co., N.C. The specimen at the Centennial Exhibition was about 4°" long and 5™ broad and, with an exception of thin micaceous coatings between fractures, was free from admixtures; Mr. Hlidden’s specimen was about 2 to 2.5°™ in size, and was surrounded by a thin coating of about 1™™ in thickness, consisting of yellowish-white fine scaly muscovite, evidently the result of alteration. ‘i b. Last summer Mr. Charles E. Hall, of the Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, brought me for determination a number of specimens from the Cotopaxi Mine, Chaffee county, Colorado,’ which were found to be _ gahnite. It occurs in large rough crystals, principally octahedra, some of the crystals show also the dodecahedral plane; the largest crystal which I have seen has an octahedral edge of 9° in length ; the crystals are often distorted and flattened out by the enlargement of two opposite octahedral planes. Besides containing inclosures of galenite, and, in smaller quantity of chalcopyrite and pyrite, they are very much altered. When in a pure state it has a dark blackish-green color, and an uneven to subconchoidal fracture. The material for the analysis was very carefully ‘selected, and first treated with sulphuric acid to remove the impurities, re- sulting from its alteration. Mr. Harry F. Keller has analyzed it in the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania, and obtained the results (b), after deducting 1.85 per cent. of silica ; (b 1) are the results calculated from the analysis : ; a b al bl ALO; = 54.86 — 60.76 — CuAl,O, =) 06920 — Fe,O, = 450 — 0.58 — ZnAl,O, = 86.34 — 53.94 FeO eo a hes 2: Rae 4.56 — FeAl],O, = 1—— -1~—«—_~»E 10.44 MnO = 0.29 — — — MnAlO, = 07 — CuO = 030 "— — MgAlO, = 1.07 —- 36.88 ZnO = 38.0 — 2.77 — MgFe.0, = 2.46 — — MgO = 0.79 — 10.33 — FeFe,O, = 3.67 — 0.84 BT GEG ee a 99.93 100.00 99.93 102.10 . Genth.] 398 {August 18, The analysis @ shows an excess of nearly 5 per cent. of alumina, which is remarkable, as the separations in the analysis were most perfect. This gahnite does not come from a corundum. locality, and it is therefore im- probable that any has been inclosed in it. In Mr. Keller’s analysis, 2.10 per cent. of alumina are wanting to form spinel, RR,O,. c. Alterations of the Gahnite from Cotopaxi. Even the best and purest specimens from this locality, which appear to be quite fresh, show innumerable cracks, breaking them up into small angular fragments. . a, In most instances these are coated with a white earthy mineral, which dissolves in strong boiling hydrochloric acid. A qualitative analy- sis shows this coating to be a hydrous silicate of alumina and magnesia, and it is probably the same substance which in thicker coatings, has a finely fibrous structure, a white or greenish-white color and silky lustre. The thickest were not over 3" in thickness, and were very much mixed with ferric oxide, and other impurities, some of them carbonates, as dilute hydrochloric acid liberates carbon dioxide. Does not exfoliate on ignition. The ignited mineral is readily decomposed by sulphuric acid. The best material which I could obtain for analysis, although still very impure, was sufficiently pure to determine the position in the system where the mineral belongs. It was decomposed by sulphuric acid after ignition, then the silica extracted by sodium hydrate, and separated from this solution. About 6 per cent., insoluble in sulphuric acid and S0dium hydrate, mostly gahnite, were deducted, and the following results obtained : Ignition = 13.82 SiO, = 28.08 Al,O, = 18.20 Fe,0, == 4.32 CuO =, 0.82 ; PbO — 1.80 ZnO — 1.75 MgO = 29.85 98.64 Lead and zine are probably present as carbonates, the ferric oxide as such, if I therefore deduct these as impurities, the following composition, which places this mineral near ripidolite, will probably not be far from the truth. SiO, —— 31.68 Al,03 = 20.54 MgO =: 33.68 H,O = 14.10 100.00 1882.] 399 (Genth. , Another alteration, shown by many of the crystals, is that into a micaceous, chloritic mineral. It either forms a coating parallel with the octahedral planes or penetrates the crystals irregularly in every direction. It has a white, grayish- or greenish-white color, is sectile and very little elastic. On ignition it does not exfoliate, but turns silver-white. The ignited mineral is easily decomposed by sulphuric acid. 0.2747 grms. although not quite, but nearly pure, was all that I could obtain for analysis, from which 0.0140 grms. insoluble in sulphuric acid and, sub- sequently, in sodium hydrate was deducted as impurity. The results were: Calculated : SiO, ——y ON fe 1) 32.58 Al,O, =e ooh 13.95 FeO = 10.74 11.40 CuO = 0.77 — ZnO = 0.39 — MgO Ol oe 29.86 Ignition == tet 1S ES Om eile Alkalies ? 97.18 100.00 These results show the mineral to belong to the chlorite group, closely agreeing with the formula H,, [Fe33,;Mgi$3],, Al, Si,, Ogg, for which I give calculated percentage above. It must remain undecided whether or not this is a new species, until larger quantities of pure material can be obtained for a fuller investigation. VI. Rutile and Zircon from the Itacolumite of Edge Hill, Bucks County, Pa. In the examination of a series of ‘‘ Edge Hill rocks’”’ which, according to Mr. Charles E. Hall (Report C6., of the 2d Geological Survey of Penn- sylvania), are Potsdam sandstone, I have made a few observations which should be placed on record. The rocks are generally thinly laminated quartzites which contain yel- lowish-white scales of muscovite in larger or smaller quantity, and are identical in appearance with the large mass of the ‘‘itacolumite’’ rocks of the Southern States, which do not show any flexibility. Especially in Neeley’s Quarry, but also in smaller quantity in many others, the rock contains exceedingly minute, yellowish, orange or brown- ish-yellow grains, they are smaller than 0.25™™. By powdering and levi- gation I have obtained a considerable quantity of the same. Under the microscope they appear as irregular, sharp, angular fragments, showing now and then avery smooth plane, but no distinct crystalline form. They have a honey-yellow color. B. B. they gave the reaction of titanic oxide, and a very minute trace of tin. a> iy rs a ae es os 7 =: ; wi » he a > ee oe a. ¥ Te Genth.) 400 {August 18, Associated with the yellow grains are small crystals of a dark brown almost black tourmaline, small crystalline plates of menaccanite and color- less or slightly yellowish and brownish-white zircons, the latter more or less water-worn, but showing the planes of the prism JZ the pyramid 1 and also less distinct, the planes of the pyramids 7, and 33. As it isan impossibility to pick out enough of the pure yellow grains for analysis, I made several unsuccessful attempts to analyze the mixture, and obtained by Pisani’s method 79.07 % of titanic oxide. I had, at the expense of one week’s labor, picked out a little over two milligrams of perfectly pure yellow grains, which Dr. G. A. Koenig had the kindness to test by his colorimetric method, and pronounced to be almost pure titanic oxide, the yellow grains are therefore probably a va- riety of rutile. In the rock itself the yellow grains show the same sharp angular forms above mentioned, whilst the zircons are water-worn. It appears’ from this that the rutile. tourmaline, mica and menaccanite crystallized or rather separated when or after the itacolumite was deposited, whilst the zircons, together with the quartz, are remnants of decomposed rocks, probably com- ing from granulites. In those of the South mountains, I have frequently observed microscopic zircons, very similar in form to those in the Edge Hill rocks. I may mention that Prof. Zirkel (Jahrb. f. Mineralogie, 1876, 90), has also detected microscopic zircons in the granulites of Saxony. Artificial Rutile and Octahedrite. Whilst decomposing some of the mixed yellow sands, containing about 80 % of rutile, by fusion with a rather small quantity of potassium hydro- gen sulphate, I was interrupted in my work for several hours, so that the greater portion of the potassium hydrogen sulphate was converted into potassium sulphate. By dissolving in cold water most of the titanic oxide went into solution, but I noticed a pale brownish, heavy, sandy substance, which, under the microscope, appeared in very brilliant crystals of the usual form of rutile Zand ii, and pyramids 1and1z. One or two of the crystals were twins. There were, perhaps, several hundred of rutile crystals. Amongst these I observed two crystals of octahedrite which had the acute pyramid 1 and a decided blue color. Experiments which I subsequently made for the purpose of making these artificial rutile crystals from pure titanic oxide were not very successful ; although I have repeatedly obtained microscopic quadratic forms, I never could get any distinct brilliant crystals. VII. Sphalerite and Prehnite, from Cornwall, Lebanon Co., Pa. a. Sphalerite. About two years ago small crystals of a greenish mineral were discov- ered by Mr. E. E. Craumer, of Lebanon, Pa., associated with a white crystalline coating upon the magnetite of the great Cornwall Ore Bank, x 1882. ] 401 (Genth. Lebanon county, Pa. I am indebted to him and also to Mr. J. Taylor Boyd, the General Superintendent of the Cornwall Ore Bank, for about a dozen of these exceedingly rare crystals, which I have found to be spha- levite. Only two or three distinct crystals were obtained, which were octahedra in hemitrope twins. Most of the crystals are very much dis- torted or imperfect for want of space for their development. In color, they are between asparagus-green, brownish-green and light brown. Spec. grav. = 4.033. The largest crystals are between 4 and 5™™ in size. They occur in cavi- ties of magnetite and are associated with a peculiar variety of prehnite, which sometimes envelops the sphalerite, magnetite, pyrite and crystal- lized chlorite, in small scales, frequently altered into a mineral resembling leidyite, which also envelops the magnetite crystals. There is too little of the latter for further examination. The analyses of the sphalerite crystals gave the following results : 12 2. s = 32.69 33.06 Zu = 66.47 ) Co — 0.34 ae 66.96 Fe == 0.38 ) 99.88 100.02 b. Prehnite. This occurs in crystalline incrustations upon magnetite, or as lining the cavities of the same. They consist of minute crystals and groups of crys- tals showing the planes J, O, and w, forming frequently small globular, coxcomb and fan-shaped aggregations, colorless, white, yellowish and brownish-white. Sp. gr. = 3.042. The prehnite is the most recent forma- tion, its incrustations covering magnetite, sphalerite, pyrite, chlorite and leidytte. The analysis of a carefully selected specimen gave : SiO, == 42.40 Al,O, == 20.88 Fe,0, = 5.54 CaO — 27.02 H,O — 4.01 Alkalies and MgO = traces 99.85 VII. Pyrophyliite in Anthracite. At the meeting of the American Philosophical Society, of July 18th, 1879, I mentioned the very interesting occurrence of pyrophyllite in deli- cately fibrous incrustations from the Buck Mountain seam near Mahanoy City, Schuylkill county, Pa. Identical in appearance and association it has lately been observed by Gentb.] 402 [August 18, Mr. Oswald J. Heinrich, near Drifton, Luzerne county, in the Tomhicken Basin, which. lies 75 feet above the Buck Mountain seam. Another variety of pyrophyllite, which has the appearance of kaolinite, has also been found by Mr. Heinrich, near Drifton and Gowen, in the Buck Mountain seam. He has favored me with the following data, relative to its occurrence. It is found principally in the upper bank of the seam which has a thick- ness of 5 to 6 feet and does not only occur in the planes of stratification | and fissures, but even in the most compact anthracite. It has accumu- lated especially in layers or lenticular patches of from one-half to over one inch in thickness in the slate bank which divides the upper from the lower bank, and which has a thickness of from 8 to 15 inches, sometimes in- closing a few inches of anthracite. It is white or yellowish-white, com. pact, eryptocrystalline, slightly soils the fingers. Soft. Does not in the least exfoliate or expand on strong ignition. Sp. gr. = 2.812. Not decomposed by sulphuric acid. The analysis of that from Cross Creek Colliery, near Drifton, Luzerne county, gave : SiO, = 65.77 Al,O, = 29.36 Fe,O, — 0.12 H,O = 4.85 100.10 IX. ~Beryl from Alexander Co., N. C. Many beautiful varieties of beryl have lately been found in Alexander county, N. C., and Mr, Wm. Earl Hidden especially has brought to light many of the most interesting specimens. To him I am indebted fora fragment of a rounded pebble which has a slightly leek-green color, turn- ing brown by oxidation. It has a pretty distinct cleavage in one direc- tion. Its specific gravity was found to be = 2.703. The analysis proved it to be beryl. It contained : SiO, = 66.28 Al,O, = 18.60 Be,O, = 13.61 FeO = 0.22 Ignition, = 0.83 99.54 X. Allanite. Mr. W. E. Hidden found in the ‘‘ Hiddenite ’’ vein, Alexander county, N. C., associated with quartz, white orthoclase and little mica, small brownish-red, brownish-yellow or light brown crystals, which have the appearance of a partial decomposition or hydration, and a resinous lustre. 1882.] 403 [Genth, Their analysis proved them to beallanite. Sp. gr. =3.005. As the quan- tity for examination was very small the cerium oxides were not sepa- rated. For comparison I give the analysis of a variety of allanite from the Mica Mine of Balsam Gap in Buncombe Co., N. C., where it occurs in jet black or brownish-black slender crystals, sometimes from six to twelve inches in length (Minerals, &c. of North Carolina, Raleigh, 1881). Spec. grav. = 3.400.— Alexander Co. Balsam Gap. SiO, = 32.05 = 32.79 Al,O, = 22.938 =e 18.16 Fe,0, = 11.04 oe 1.64 FeO == — — 10.08 are = 1.99 — a (DiLa),0, = a = 14.40 0; = 0.85 oa 1.84 MgO = 1.28 = 0.15 CaO = 9.43 — 10.95 Na,O = 0.54 =: 0.33 K,O = 0.20 as 0.12 Ignition = 3.64 -— 1.89 98.76 99.65 XI. Niccolite from Colorado. In the American Journal of Science [3] xxiii, 380, Mr. Malvern W. Tles mentions the occurrence of smaltite near Gothic, Gunnison Co., Colo- rado, and gives an analysis of the same. He states that the Gem and other mines near Silver Cliff, Colorado, contain a number of nickeliferous minerals and a small amount of cobalt. About two years agolI received fragments of niccolite from Colorado: from some of my students, and about a year ago Mr. Henry A. Vezin sent me a specimen from Silver Cliff, which was pure enough for examination. It occurs in rounded or nodular masses disseminated through a granular limestone, which has the appearance of dolomite, but contains only a very small percentage of magnesia. In dissolving the limestone, the niccolite remains in small irregular masses, partly made up by globular and botryoidal aggregations with a crystalline black surface, showing the crystals of niccolite to be exceedingly small] and indistinct ; I have not seen any in which the form could be made out. It has a very pale copper- red color witha grayish tint. Sp. gr. = 7.314. Associated with it in druses of the limestone are globular crystalline groups of an apple-green mineral, which is probably an arseniate of nickel but which has not the appearance or annabergite. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xX. 112. 2y. PRINTED NOV. 8, 1882. ° “ Bi A Ti 3h b ‘ # ‘ L Spea Se We mh ie ve Genth.] 404 [August 18, The analysis of the niccolite gave : \ As —— 46.81 Sb == 2.24 SS) — 2.52 Cu = 1.59 Ni = 44.76 Co —— 1.70 Fe —— 0.60 — 100.22 This is a niccolite in which a small portion of the arsenic is replaced by antimony and sulphur. XII, Artificial Alisonite (?). About a year ago Mr. R. Pearce, Metallurgist of the Works of the Bos- ton and Colorado Smelting Co., at Argo, Colorado, kindly sent me some very interesting crystals from furnace bottoms, which he had never before observed. They were octahedral crystals, some showed cubical planes and slight indications of the dodecahedron ; they were mostly distorted, cavernous, and many of them rounded, iron-black, and of metallic lustre. Spec. gr, = 5.545. Crystallized upon a plate of copper matte, containing a large percentage of metallic copper. The analysis gave : Calculated. Ss = 15.23 — 17.61 Ag = 2.16 a pa Cu — bless — 49.84 Pb = 31:15 = 32.55 Fe 255 trace — a 100.00 99.87 The composition is similar to alisonite or nearer 2PbS, 5Cu,S in which part of the copper is replaced by silver. The small percentage of sulphur «an be accounted for from a small admixture of metallic copper, with which some of the crystals were contaminated. UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, August 17, 1882. 2 ee 405 Stated Meeting, September 15, 1882. Present, 4 members. Vice-President, Dr. Lr Contr, in the Chair. M. Woldemar Kowalevski, member of the I. Academy of St. Petersburg, was introduced. M. Edward Séve de Bar, accepted membership by letter, dated Philadelphia, August 31, 1882. The death of M. Liouville, at Paris, Sept. 9, was announced. Acknowledgments of the receipt of publications were re- ‘ceived from the Ast. Gesell., Leipsig (109); the Cincinnati Observatory (109,111); the Leop. Car. Gesell. Halle am Saale (109); and the Free Public Library of New Bedford (111). Requests for missing numbers were received from the Leop. Car. Gesell. Halle am Saale (108, and pp. 483-498 of —-); and from the Paris Geographical Society (XIV, i, and 62). Donations for the Library were received from the Revista Euskara ; Academy of St. Petersburg; Ant. and Hist. So- ciety at Copenhagen; Academies at Amsterdam, Leiden, Harlem, Batavia, Brussels and Munich; Geographical So- cieties at Paris and Bordeaux ; London Antiquarian Society and Nature; Cambridge University Library ; Hist. Societies of New York and New Jersey ; James Hall; Franklin In- stitute, Journal of Pharmacy and Dr. J. B. Roberts ; U.S. National Museum, Fish Commission, Census Bureau and Coast Survey; Am. Chem. Journal, and Johns Hopkins University; Ohio Mechanics Institute, and Davenport Acad- emy of Sciences. Mr. Cope exhibited and described some remarkable new fossil forms from the Permian rocks of Texas, and commu- nicated a “ Third contribution to the history of the Verte- brata of the Permian formation in Texas.’’ The reading of nominations being dispensed with, the meeting was adjourned. Chase.] 406 [Oct. 6, Photodynamic Notes, VI. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 6, 1882.) 242. Stability of Harmonies. In Note 220, I presented several reasons for believing that the mean periods of planetary rotation are stable. They are all dependent upon more general principles which regulate the harmony of persistent oscilla- tions in elastic;media, and consequently furnish strong @ priori presump- tions against all hypotheses which seem, in any way, to conflict with har- monic tendencies. The certainty (Note 213), which Proctor admits, of Earth’s baving a pulsation period, with which its rotation must once have begun to approach to synchronism, springs from a like source with the harmonic tendencies in Jupiter’s satellite system, and Laplace’s reasoning is equally applicable to both cases. The ‘‘ pulsation period ’” which is due to luminous vibration is constant, and if it should ever be suddenly or greatly disturbed, rotation would immediately begin again to approach to its normal synchronism. After the synchronism is once reached, all the influences from which it originated continue to contribute towards its perpetual maintenance. 243. Improbability of Delaunay’ s Hypothesis. Newcomb and Holden (Astronomy, p. 148) close their note on the secu- lar acceleration of the Moon, as follows :—‘‘ The present theory of accelera- tion is, therefore, that the Moon is really accelerated about six seconds in a century, and that the motion of the Earth on its axis is gradually diminishing at such a rate as to produce an apparent additional accelera- tion which may range from two to six seconds.’’ The former portion is known to be cyclical, to be followed, after a long interval, by a corre- sponding retardation ; there is not a particle of evidence to discredit the probability that the latter portion is also cyclical. Neither is there a parti, cle of evidence that there is any tidal friction except at the shores of the ocean, where any accelerating tendencies at one period are counterbal- anced by retarding tendencies at another. The frictional hypothesis was a gratuitous assumption, to explain a doubtful phenomenon, and although the explanation would be satisfactory if the frictional retardation could be proven, the assumption violates the ordinary rules of framing scientific hypotheses so completely, that its chief claim for consideration rests upon the reputation of its originator. On the other hand, the harmonic hypothesis makes no assumption ; starting from acknowledged facts and principles, it asks what results may be reasonably anticipated, and there are few, if any, modern researches, in which the anticipations have been so abundantly verified. Even if we grant frictional retardation, there is ““no way of determining the amount of this retardation unless we assume ar 1882. ] 40% [Chase. that it causes the observed discrepancy between the theoretical and observed accelerations of the Moon’’ (op. cit. p. 147). 244. Scientific Skepticism. Hesitation in the acceptance of alleged results, in any new line of scien- tific research, is an obvious duty on the part of those who are fitted and expected to be on the watch against the promulgation of hasty general- izations which would needlessly cumber the field of knowledge. There is danger, however, that even faithful watchmen may sometimes hinder scientific progress by failing to keep their skepticism within proper bounds. The fact of harmony, and especially of codrdinated harmony, transcends all mathematical tests of probability. It would be a tedious, but not a difficult task, to find in how many ways the letters of the Iliad could be arranged, and it is often wrongly assumed* that in a purely accidental arrangement of the letters, the faultless one would be as likely to take place as any other. It would be no more absurd to inquire whether the music of an orchestra might not be accidental, than to make a like inquiry as to the rhythm of atoms and waves and spheres. When mathematical tests confirm the probability that special forms of harmony are due to special laws, as in phyllotactic, thermodynamic and fundamental atomici- ties, they are useful ; but when they fail to give any reason for obvious ac- cordances, as in Schuster’s first examination of spectral lines (Note 141), they are utterly worthless unless they awaken further inquiries which lead to satisfactory results, as in Schuster’s final conclusions. 245. Centre of Dawning Condensation in the Terrestrial Belt. The intrinsic probability that the major axis of the Moon’s orbit is in- variable, is greatly enhanced by the following proportion : Ts tle 22 Bs 2 Ly Substituting the several known values, we have: 7, = Earth’s equa- torial semi-diameter = 3962.8 miles; 7,—= Laplace’s terrestrial limit = 86164.1\3 fie sean. ie (cea 7,; R,—= Moon’s semi-axis major = 60.27787,; LZ, = limit of incipient belt-condensation = R, /, = 7, = 1,578,217 miles. The oscillatory value of Sun’s mass (Note 23, etc.,) gives, for the ratio of Earth’s subsi- dence from the centre of the belt of greatest condensation, L, = p; = 1,578,217 — 92,785,700 = .0170093, and for the dawning central locus of the belt of greatest condensation, 1.0170093 »;. The arithmetical mean between Stockwell’s estimates of Mercury’s secular perihelion and the secular aphelion of Mars is (.2974008 + 1.786478) — 2 = 1.0169394 p,. The difference between the two estimates is less than 7}, of one per cent * See Note 252. Chase.] 408 (Oct. 6, 246. Pendulum Estimute of Moon's Mass. In Note 8, I anticipated slight modifications of my first estimate of Moon’s mass, as likely to be required by subsequent investigations. If we apply the principles which are involved in the coefficient of solar tor- sion, Note 162, to the determination of the length of Earth’s theoretical pendulum, we find 32.088 L— "9 (< y= = 5200 * (48082.05)? -—- ? = 1,142,882 miles. From this equation we deduce the relative value of Moon’s mass, , by the proportion, ‘pgiliiMsip 92,785,700 : 1,142,882 : : 81.1857 :1 This estimate differs from the one in Note 8 by less than ~; of one per cent. 247. Rotation Estimate of Moon's Mass. The conviction, which I have often expressed (Note 220, etc.), that rotation is only modified revolution, is further strengthened by the follow- ing considerations. The orbital velocity (v,) which the combined energies of Earth and Moon tend to give to an equatorial particle which is nearest to the Moon, is about 2.18 times as great as the velocity (2) which they tend to give to the mean centre of gravity of Earth’s oscillating particles. The preponderating attraction of Earth prevents the action of these ten- dencies, in any other way than as accelerating disturbances on the several particles whose retarded and constrained revolution leads to axial rota- tion. The greater acceleration, acting for a half-monthly oscillation (¢,), gives the mean orbital velocity of the system (2,), while the smaller accel- eration, acting for a half-daily oscillation, gives Earth’s equatorial velocity of rotation (0,), as is shown by the proportion Os SDs 20, t, 2 0g ty 18.4735 : .288183 : : 14.7652942 0, : 3 0, : 0, = 2.1798 vg. If we designate the distances of the respective particles from the centre of gravity of the system by d, and d,z, we have d, 0,7 = d,0,?; dg= 4.7514 d,. The theoretical mean intersections of d, with Earth’s sur- face should be on the equator, and those of d, should be on meridians, but want of exact homogeneity, as well as orbital inclinations, may be pre- sumed slightly to modify their respective loci. The mean centre of gravity of Earth’s oscillatory particles is at the distance 7 from the surface, but they are all also affected by wave-lengths equivalent to d,, so that we have d,=d,+7r=4.7514d,, Hence r= 3.7514 d,; d, =.26657 r = 1056.35 miles ; d, = 5019.15 m.; 7 — d, = 2906.45 m.; m; + pw = (238,869 = 2906.45) », = 82.1858 » ; m, = 81.1858 4, a value which corresponds ex- actly with the one in the foregoing note. 1882.] 409 (Chase. 248. Harmonies of Central Condensation. The superficial intersections of a, in the foregoing note, describe circles about the poles, which have diametrical arcs of 5° 10/ 40’, which differs by only 2/ from the inclination of the Moon’s orbit. If we take1x2x3 x5, the product of the first four phyllotactic numbers, as a divisor of Earth’s diameter, calling the quotient a, we have the following approximate accordances : Harmonic. Observed, 4 a == 1056.748 miles. d,, = 1056.35 miles. 11 a = 2906.057 ‘<° r—d, = 2906.45 “« 15 a = 3962.805 << 7 = 3962.8 & 19 a@ = 5019:558) = “< d,= HOLD. —=* 7 @= 1849.309. ‘< r—2 d, = 1850.10 <“ The coefficients of nodal division in the radius which is nearest the Moon, (4, 11), are the second and fourth of the secondary phyllotactic numbers. The coefficients in the remote radius, (8, 7), are the third phyllotactic numbers in the primary and secondary series, or the artiad and perissad divisors (Notes 201-2,). It may be interesting to inquire whether the frequency and locality of earthquakes are affected by these nodal influences. 249. Pendulum Estimate of Earth’s Oblateness. The ratio of Earth’s equatorial semi-diameter to its theoretical equatorial pendulum, or the corresponding ratio of »,? to v2, (square of limiting orbital velocity to square of equatorial rotation-velocity), represents a cen- trifugal force which would tend to produce oblateness in a liquid globe, to maintain oblateness in a solidified globe, or to exert a constant pressure for restoring oblateness, should it be temporarily disturbed in any way. From the estimate of the theoretical pendulum in Note 246 we get 3962.8 : 1,142,882 : : 1 : 288.40 Bessels’ estimate was 298.1528; Olarke’s two estimates 291.36, 293.76 : Listing’s (1878, cited by Newcomb and Holden, p. 202), 288.5. This ac- cordance furnishes additional reasons for believing that Earth’s rotation and Moon’s mean distance are as invariable as planetary major axes. 250. Oscillatory Relations of Venus. The masses of Venus and Earth are more nearly alike than those of Jupiter and Saturn. This is perhaps owing to their comparatively central position in the belt of greatest condensation. The reasonable expectation that their mutual actions and reactions should be rhythmical is strength- ened by many harmonic relations, among which are the following : 1. If we divide Venus’s mean locus of subsidence (mean aphelion) by the product of the first four phyllotactic numbers, 1 x 2 x 3 x 5 = 30, Chase.) 410 (Oct. 6, and call the quotient @, we obtain an approximate harmonic divisor for six cardinal nodes : Harmonic. Observed. 27 a .6740 Venus, s. p. .6722 28 a .6990 ff nemiyps & O9TS 29a .7239 $5") ne . 7233 30 a .7489 Fe mast 67480 31a .7739. fe gas CHa 40a .9985 Earth, m. 1.0000 2. Venus’s incipient locus of subsidence (secular aphelion) is near the second centre of linear oscillation of the incipient locus of subsidence of Mars. (2 of = 4) of 1.7365 = .7718. Harmonic. Observed. 7718 7744 3. The photodynamic origin of Venus’s orbital period (224.701 days) is indicated by the proportion, psi: iit it, The length (/,) of a theoretical pendulum at Sun’s equator, which would oscillate once whilea wave of light traverses the solar modulus of light, is J, = 224.261 ,; ¢, and ¢, are respectively Earth’s day and Venus’s year. 4. Moon’s semi-axis major is a mean proportional between Earth’s semi- diameter (7,) and Venus’s nearest approach to Earth. Venus’s secular aphelion = .7744234 »,; Earth’s secular perihelion = .9322648 p,; differ- ence, 1578414 9; = 3695.725 75 ; / 3695.725 = 60.792. 5. Earth’s oscillatory influence on Venus’s mean subsidence is indicated by the proportion 13: 1,3: pm: ps 3962.8 : 1,142,882 : : 60.2778 : 17384.276 Stockwell’s estimate for Venus’s mean locus of subsidence is .748878 p3= 17534.36 75. f 6. All the orbital loci of Venus are midway between Sun and orbital loci of Mars. ~ 7. Venus’s incipient rupturing locus (secular perihelion = .672,) is near Earth’s linear centre of oscillation (3 of 3.) 8. Venus’s mass indicates Earth’s harmonic influence at her incipient locus of subsidence (p,). ‘ Ms Mz 2: pz? p, 428,417 : 331,776 :: 1: .7744234 Hill’s estimate for m,-—- m, is 427,240, which differs from the harmonic estimate by less than ,3; of one per cent. a a 411 [Chase, 251. Oscillatory Relations of Mercury. The cardinal loci of Mercury show the following among other harmonic relations : 1. The locus of Mercury’s semi-axis major (.3871) is the rupturing locus for Venus’s locus of incipient subsidence : (4 of .7744 = .3872). | 2. Mercury’s incipient rupturing locus (.2974) indicates phyllotactic in- fluence at Venus’s locus of incipient subsidence (.7744) j 207i os 74d 335 + 18: 3. Mercury’s incipient rupturing locus (.2974) is also near the extremity of the linear pendulum, which has Mars’s incipient subsidence locus (1.7365) for its point of suspension, and Venus’s incipient subsidence locus (.7744) for its centre of oscillation : (3 % .7744 — 1.7365) + 2 = .29384. 4. If we divide Earth’s semi-axis major by the phyllotactic product 2 x 3 < 3 x 13, we find approximate indications of Earth’s harmonic influence on Mercury’s cardinal loci. 70a .298 Mercury s. p. .297 75 a .3820 fe m.p. .dl9 91a .388 Ge m. .087 107 a@ .456 ae m.a. .455 112.a@ .A477 Hy Sa. 400 234 a .997 Earth 1.000 252. Improbability of Accidental Harmonies. ‘Schuster’s harmonic investigation (Note 141) appears to have been grounded on the hypothesis, which others have also entertained, that har- monies such as are found in spectral lines and planetary positions may be accidental. In note 244, I spoke of such an hypothesis as ‘‘ wrongly as- sumed,” and I believe that it is only calculated to hinder scientific pro- gress. Professor Peirce, in the Howland will case, showed that the rela- tion of each individual position to all the possible positions which it might assume, as well as the relative positions of the lines among themselves, should be considered in calculations of mathematical probability. In the Iliad problem, the bare improbability of the accidental arrangement of the letters in their orderly sequence is a”, a representing the number of letters in the alphabet and ” the number of letters in the poem. Let p be the number of readily distinguishable positions which each letter can as- sume, and the adverse probability against the accidental occurrence of the actual positions would be (ap)". -The improbability would be likewise increased by considerations of the spaces between the letters, the word spaces, the orderly arrangement of lines and pages, the probable frequency of errors, and countless other particulars which are indicative of plan and purpose. Finally, the adequate explanation which is furnished by the simple hypothesis of human contrivance, wholly removes the question from the realm of chance, and makes the improbability infinite. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 22. PRINTED NOVMEBER 15, 1882. Chase.) > 412 toet. 5 253. Probability of Anticipated Results, = It is not likely that any one would ever think of attributing the angles of crystals to accident, although it would not be so unreasonable to do so as it would be to account for much closer harmonies in that way. The laws of crystallization are obscure and almost wholly unknown, and yet we are not slow in believing that there are such laws, in spite of the irregularities which were pointed out in Note 232. The laws of elasticity, which lead to nodal action, are as well understood as any of the funda- mental truths of physical science, yet there.are many who fail to recognize them, and who seem to think that no explanation is needed of the har- monies which thrust themselves upon us on every hand. I am not aware that any attempt has ever been made, by any one who believes in the pos- sibility that connected harmonies may be merely accidental, to confirm his belief by framing a series of such harmonies. In ordinary investigations, the discovery of a single fact, through anticipations which are grounded upon theoretical assumptions, is hailed as a wonderful scientific achieve- ment. In the study of rhythmic elasticity such successful anticipations, may be endlessly multiplied before their importance becomes generally understood. And yet each one of those verified anticipations lends a con- . firmation to the photodynamic hypothesis which is little, if any, short of absolute certainty, and which cannot be measured by any ordinary test of mathematical probability. 254. A Photodynamic ‘‘ Problem of Three Bodies.’’ We have now gathered, by strictly Baconian methods, all the facts which are needed for framing and solving the following problem: To find simple stellar, planetary and satellite relations of mass, position and zthereal density, that will satisfy tendencies to the formation of three pri- mary harmonic nodes, in an elastic medium which propagates undulations with the velocity of light. i 1. Nodal tendencies presuppose some deviations from absolute homo- geneity, which lead to differences of direction and velocity in the subsid- ing particles, thus giving rise to oscillations which continually incline to take some form of synchronism. As long as there is any liberty of motion among the particles, those which are at the boundary line, between the constraining inertia of central stellar nucleation and sthereal impulse, will oscillate with the greatest rapidity, tending to assume paths which will alternately receive and exhaust the projectile energies of the ethereal medium. Those energies cannot be completely exhausted until enough time has elapsed to communicate the velocity of light (7), to an ethereal particle which is at rest at the beginning of the oscillation. The central inertia makes the oscillations circular, changing free elliptic revolution into constrained axial rotation, each oscillation of half-rotation occupying a time (¢) which gives gt = ,; gt, = modulus of light = M¥; M~ a 413 (Chase. _ length of a theoretical pendulum, at the stellar equatorial surface, which 0D) F : : A us m would swing synchronously with the rotary oscillations ; y= 7 =, The value of g determines the mean orbital velocity, 7/gr _ axis major, 7,. 2. The actions and reactions, between the stellar centre and the primary centre of planetary condensation (Note 23), involve tendencies towards the linear centre of gravity (4); the centre of linear oscillation (4), the cen- tre of conical oscillation, (+), and centripetal accelerations which vary as the fourth power of the velocity of circular orbital revolution. These ten- dencies may all be satisfied by a stellar mass which is (2 x 3 x 4) = 331- 776 times the mass of primary condensation. 3. The orbital control of the stellar centre is exercised on the planet and satellite alike, at the mean distance ps If the planet transfers to the satel- lite a projectile vis viva, (1), corresponding to its superficial energy of rota- tion (Note 246), the relative masses of the planet and satellite, which satisfy their joint oscillatory relations and Sun’s projectile energy, may be repre- sented by the proportion : for any semi- nv pg ibiiMs: p. 2 255. Subordinate Tendencies. There are other harmonic tendencies which seem likely to have been less permanent and more open to modification. The following instances of primitive tendency may be given as interesting : _. 4, The radii of static equlibrium are inversely as the masses ; rupturing vis viva is acquired by subsidence through 4 radius ; if the rupturing locus of simple subsidence becomes a centre of linear oscillation for satellite semi-axis major, Pw We have Pu? T3223 Ms 22 yp. 5. The relations of ethereal density are found by the method of Note 240. Notes 162, 23, and 246 give the following mass values which precisely ' satisfy the first three of these requirements, viz : m, = 331,776 ms; ; m3 = 81.186 ». The fourth requirement points to the value, m,; = 80.372 y, This slight discrepancy may, perhaps, be partly owing to the fact that Earth’s oscillation is mainly rotational while Moon’s is nearly that of a circular pendulum. : 256. Other Approximations to Moon's Mass. a. The formula, m#? x »*, gives the following approximations to the value of »,: (1 year = 1 lunar mo.)? = 178.724; (03 = Pur? = 58,609,000 ; (Mm, + m3) = 327,930 (ms + p) = 331,777 mz ; mz, = 86.241 yp. b. A close harmonic approximation is given by the proportion : M,: 2:6 t,:¢, +: 2191.54 dy : 27.32166 dy : 80.214: 1. j ey ik ; J r j Grete a a rr 7 5 Sa ve Cot NT a ea oe cara + ae UP id ot 7+ aaa f r a Re ‘ ns Ay Gee Vy ; at 444 Reena h! : L eat bard ant Chase.) — (Oct. 6, Py “J t +* product, 1 x, 2 x 3. It is also very nearly equivalent to the square root of the quotient of Laplace’s solar limit by Sun’s semi-diameter, which + would give, m, = 80.619 ». d. The mass of Mars is very nearly a mean proportional between the masses of Earth and Moon; (3,093,500 -- 331,776)? = 86.938. e. An approximation similar to } is given by the proportion : month : day ::m,z:3 yp: : 81.965 : 3. Ff. Moon’s locus of subsidence, or aphelion (8), and the mass of Venus (m,), furnish the following approximation : Mz 22:28: 7, : > 63.593 : 1. Substituting the observed basis of the second approximation to m, in Note 250, this gives, m, = 82.119 yp. Many other approximations might doubtless be found which would represent obvious harmonic tendencies within the belt of greatest conden- sation. Simplicity and Conciseness of Harmonie Calculus. 257. The range of estimates in the foregoing note is about 83 per cent., and the mean of all the estimates is about 2 per cent. greater than the most recent astronomical estimates. These deviations are four times as great as in my extreme estimates of solar distance, and twelve times as great as in the estimates which have been based upon the fatest determinations of the harmonic elements. If these approximations are compared with those which had been made by astronomers, a hundred years after Newton had - published the laws of gravitation, the indications of superiority in the har- monic methods become very striking. The difficulty of finding the har- monic influences which are most important, isincomparably less than that of determining the corresponding gravitating influences, and the saving of labor is obvious to every one who has ever solved astrenomical problems by the ordinary processes of mathematical analysis. Doubts as to the degree of certainty which attaches to purely harmonic results will natur- _ ally arise, in the minds of those who have never carefully inquired into the necessity of elastic rhythm, but I believe that such doubts will gradually yield to the fast accumulating evidences of its universal sway. Astronomical, chemical and mechanical science may all be challenged to prodace a series of connected fundamental determinations that are com- parable, in precision and in intrinsic mathematical probability, with those which are embodied in Note 168 and in the three solutions of Note 254. 258. Needless Obscurity. In Sir John Leslie’s Dissertation on the Progress of Mathematical and Physical Science (Hneye. Brit., 8th. Ed., i, 732), after referring to the «‘maze of intricate and abstruse formule’’ in which Laplace had involved the phenomena of capillary attraction, the following reflections of Dr. . ts he a Rk en | i ne my ina i ayEN* Rey (8 ey iy aie? AS, ; Fi Ao oNay ae ie + i / _ r J A [Chase. Thomas Young are quoted :—‘‘It must be confessed that, in this country, the cultivation of the higher branches of the Mathematics, and the inven- tion of new methods of calculation, cannot be too much recommended to the generality of those who apply themselves to Natural Philosophy ; but it is equally true, on the other hand, that the first mathematicians on the Continent have exerted great ingenuity in involving the plainest truths ot mechanics in the intricacies of Algebraical formulas, and in some instances have even lost sight of the real state of an investigation, by attending : only to the symbols, which they have employed for expressing its steps.”’ ij After this quotation Leslie proceeds as follows :—‘‘Laplace’s intricate formula has been since unraveled by the acute discrimination of Mr. Ivory, who disjoined it into two separate portions ; the one depending on the adhesion of the watery film to the inside of the tube, and the other resulting from half the cohesion of the particles of the liquid to each other. s But our ingenious countryman deduced these elements of the complete force from the simplest physical principles, availing himself of the property of equable diffusion of pressure through the mass of a fluid. The same investigation gave the measure and limits of depression observed in mer- ak Sas Chae. +, Oy er 7 ‘4. Ae Sl ie. ee a sa * , cury and some other liquids.”’ = 259. Cooperative Methods. a ‘i Since the invention of Hamilton’s quaternions and Peirce’s linear asso- : F ciative algebras, the temptation for mathematicians to involve ‘‘the plain- : ig ; est truths of mechanics in the intricacies of algebraical formulas’’ has ey greatly increased. The higher the algebra, the smaller is the number > who are able to understand it. While it may be no part of an investiga- te tor’s duty to ‘‘ popularize”’ science, no result can be rightly regarded as ae 2 belonging to the dominion of science until it has been so far popularized 3 as to be brought within the grasp of the majority of scientific men who 3 ay are willing to follow the several steps of the original investigation. Labor ie: which is expended on intricate solutions of problems which can be simply : deduced from *‘the property of equable diffusion of pressure through the ; sy mass of a fiuid,’’ or from other properties of elastic media, is either labor ef wholly wasted, or, at best, an exercise of ingenuity which serves as a a harmless recreation. On the other hand, the use of well-known physical ; a 4 relations as clews for the discovery of codrdinate relations, alternating ea ’ with analytical solutions of problems which are suggested by such dis- ‘a coveries, combines the advantages of theory and’ observation in ways +0 which are most helpful to scientific progress. Whenever any given result may be reached by two or more different methods, the shortest and sim- plest is always most.commendable. ~~ 260. Lunar Magnetic Polarization. The relations between magnetic fluctuations and gravitating tendencies to ‘ the restoration of equilibrium in disturbed atmospheric or ethereal currents ma ee ay rs KE % 4 . = ee , er po oe a \, * " ah) : PPS ee | ’ 1 yy £. , } ah Peat ae [¥ el . hee < pri) S08 2b vil eae ; iy ~- S hreg F ¥ ‘ ‘o. » “ 203 ¢ Jyh eg b RS ie ek teh 5. , . r wi, Me As a Chase.] 416 a | a? (Notes 116-122), are, as might reasonably have been foreseen, greatly modi- fied by Sun’s thermal activity. The moon, acting on the currents which originate in Sun’s thermal disturbance, shows accordances both in time and magnitude (Note 121), which point strongly, if not conclusively, to an ab- R solute identity between lunar disturbances of terrestrial magnetism and of . terrestrial gravitation. These pointings are confirmed by the identity of . velocity, in the electro-magnetic ‘‘ratio,’”’ in the pendulum-oscillations of solar rotation, and in the transmission of luminous undulations. The — symmetrical arrangement of «zthereal particles which most simply repre-_ sents the results of elastic pressure (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soe., xii, 408), the spiral tendencies of division in extreme and mean ratio, the rotation which — helps to maintain equilibrium between conflicting forces (Note 212), the differences of centrifugal and centripetal energy which result from rota- tion, all contribute towards an axial polarity which should modify all forms of chemical and mechanical aggregation. To these elements of cyclical rhythm Moon adds her orbital disturbance of Earth’s rotation (Notes 247-8), which is so modified by orbital inclination as, to produce a magnetic nutation. If we add to these considerations the oscillations of Earth’s crust, and other influences which lead to variations in the rela- tive positions of areas of greatest heat and cold, we find data for many interesting problems in mathematical analysis, the solution of which may throw much light both on the normal and abnormal phenomena of terres- trial magnetism. 261. Gravitating Modulus of Planetary Revolution. The hypothesis that stellar rotation is merely retarded revolution, and the exact correspondence between the time of rotary oscillation and the time in which maximum gravitating acceleration would communicate the velocity of light toan ethereal particle, suggest the likelihood of other moduli, which may be intimately connected with the solar-equatorial modulus of light, and which may help us towards a fuller understanding of fundamental kinetic relations. As the rotary oscillations are circular, the simplest and most natural comparison would refer them to circular revolutions of uniform velocity ; as all orbital times and velocities are func- tions of mass and distance, it seems right to begin by examining the greatest possible limit of circular-orbital velocity (;/g,r,), and the least pos- sible limit of circular-orbital oscillatory-time (: of revolution aye ‘ Io The British Nautical Almanac value of n, Note 75, gives t= 4} t, = 5024.5 sec.; g,t=xy/g, 7, = .0019648 r,; 9, P= 2l1=-x' 7, The photody- namic relations of this fundamental gravitating modulus, to the two chief planetary loci, are shown by the approximate identity of ¢ with the time in which a luminous ray would traverse Jupiter’s orbit or Saturn’s mean aphelion radius vector. Neptune’s gravitating modulus, z? ps» Tepresents an AIT | as the second supra-Neptunian locus which I indicated in 1873, and which Forbes found to represent a group of cometary aphelion distances (Note 32). 262. Photodynamic Modulus of Planetary Revolution. A mathematical friend, in whose judgment I place great confidence, ad- mits the conclusiveness of the evidence in favor of paraboloidal harmony in rupturing planetary loci (Note 46, etc.), but he thinks that the approxi- mation to the locus of Alpha Centauri may be accidental. Iam well -aware of the difficulty, which every one naturally finds, in believing that the seemingly quiet undulations of light should have any influence on the relative positions of stellar systems. The remembrance that the vs viva of action or reaction, for any given mass, varies as the square of oscil- lating velocity, would show that if there is any physical influence which controls interstellar arrangements, it should be the one which has the greatest normal velocity. The parabolic energy which is manifested within the solar system, both in approaching and in leaving the sun, must be indefinitely extended, and the luminous undulations which it indicates are equally extensive. The symmetry of the three-fold division in the paraboloid, together with the fact that the uncertainty of stellar distance is of the same order of magnitude as planetary eccentricities, excludes any probable attribution of the stellar accordance to accidental coincidence. The foregoing note furnishes additional grounds tor accepting all the har- monic relations of the photodynamic paraboloid as effective. Since L, ‘ocr? (Note 75), and L, at 7, = xz? 1,3, at the gravitating modulus 7’r,, the ap 0 o o § 5 ° photodynamic modulus would be z*/7,, its logarithm being 6 x .4971499 +3 x 1.5606934 = 7.6649796. This is only .0013506 less than the logarithm for the locus of g Centauri, as deduced from the corona line and the British estimate of Sun’s semi-diameter, indicating a difference of less than 7; of one per cent. It is, therefore, certain that the photodynamic mod- ulus of Sun’s gravitating modulus is in the neighborhood, if not in the ac- tual locus, of the nearest known star. 263. A Chain of Photodynamic Harmonies. If we designate the planetary locus which corresponds to the corona line (Note 45) by 2; Jupiter’s greatest eccentricity by y; and the theo- retical locus of g Centauri by 2, the.following connected equations can all be deduced from simple and obvious forms of elastic rhythm : 1. y= 1— (1048.875 = 5.202798 n) — .06055 Note 3 2. m= (2X 3X 4)* m, = 331776 m, «93 3. a = a nr, = 460.61 7, “45 4. 2:@::m2:ms2 2 == 461746300 7, «« 46 5. 0 = Oa 7, n+ 1 year = .0006265013 7, 5 6. Vo 2% (hh 7,2 = 4918442 rv, «5 a Vi =r, = 497.827 = m= 214.735 eS Ass > PIES teen 12 ee ee ih ek One a er UPON A Sao. « : ae i é eet J 4 i > ‘ ie Pe Rel ea ty 2” Rap ad 3 é me ~~}. oe Gis me a6 jn, ie wee , are any a is " Lik ra ’ ef wo : i. ek OTP 8 BR BAOTI: cles liiae BE) eserd oe IRbeNeBt ?, = + n= 960''.556 . iy solo oT sdt 30 Gost 10. Tr, = (m, + m,)3 < (yr. + 1,8 X 13> n= 432004 miles “ 7% _ ay po i, Pe peti 8094 Sigh. © ; 12. a ye n= = 10029 sec. Ce 18... d, + dy = (te f,)* — 05927 . as 14. L,=(V, + 2)? 7, = 474028 7, SMe 7, 15. Corona line = 7612 x log. 30.037 n + log. « = 5821.7 «45 ; 16. ps = nr, = 92,785,700 miles se The values of y, m,, 2, 2, 1,, L,, and the corona line, all represent photo- | x dynamic considerations ; the other values are readily deduced from them + by simple radiodynamic relations. Stockwell’s estimate of y is .06083 ; the value of 7 is intermediate between those of the British and the Ameri- oe can Nautical Almanacs ; the value of the corona line corresponds pre- cisely with the geometrical wave-length in Note 41 ; allthe other values are within the astronomical limits of probable error. . 264. Further Oscillatory Relations of Venus. It seems not unlikely that the position of Venus, in the belt of greatest condensation, may have nearly as many suggestive relations as that of Earth. To the eight indications of Note 250, the following may be added : 9. All the orbital loci of Venus are between a primary anda Hie centre of linear oscillation for Earth's semi-axis major (3, and 3 + 4 of 3 ; =). Stockwell’s estimates are,.secular perihelion, .6722 ; secular aphe- ; lion, .7744. | 10. The secular aphelion of Venus is nearly a mean osbatoel between - Earth’s second reciprocal centre of oscillation (4 of 3), and Jupiter’s secu- lar aphelion ; 7/3 x 5.42735 = .7766. > 11. The major-axis of the nebular ellipse which marks the incipient separation of Venus from Earth, 1.7744, is indicative of a successive nuclea- tion for Earth’s semi-axis major ; 4 x 4 = 1.7778. . 12. The mass harmony (8), introduces the principle of virtual velocities into the foregoing nebular ellipse, at the beginning of subsidence for Venus. 265. Tidal Harmony. The tidal disturbance of Earth by Sun, during a semi-annual orbital oscillation, is sufficient to give orbital velocity to all the particles which are disturbed both by Sun and by Moon. Orbital velocity would be com- municated in — of an oscillation, to the particles which are disturbed by Sun’s tidal action. During the remainder of the oscillation a like velocity would be communicated to z — 1 times as many particles. If we desig- re erlhLTlUCU Veg 419 | ioe nate Moon’s mass and semi-axis major by 7, and p,, this approximation gives us the following proportion : Mm, oF :i(n—l)m,: ps Substituting m, = 831776 ms, p; = 92785700 miles, », = 238869 miles, we get, m, = 82.486 m,. The values which were found in Notes 8 and 246 seem likely to be subjeet to fewer modifications than this, but every ad- ditional indication of approximation to anticipated harmonies lends new interest to the discussion of elastic influence and furnishes new material for future analytic research. 266. Harmonic Tidal Cycles. The tendency of the solar and lunar tidal disturbances to cyclic har- mony, is shown by the approximate equality of the solar disturbance, during the interval which would give terrestrial particles orbital velocity, to the lunar disturbance, during a sidereal revolution about the Earth. The approximation may be expressed by the equation : m lyr mM, gage eg Oy LI: Ps Se Pa : Substituting the same values as in the foregoing note for m,, o, and g,, we get the approximate value, m, = 83.025m,. The closeness of these _ _various approximations may be attributed, with great likelihood, to original influences of central-belt condensation, aided by the natural sta- bility of harmonic oscillations which have once been set up. The slight ‘discrepancies between different estimates are probably owing to subordi- nate rhythmic disturbances, such as nutation, precession, and other oscilla- tions, the exact influence of which we may reasonably hope to understand when we have a fuller knowledge of ethereal elasticity. 267. Subterranean Tides. My views regarding the influence of elasticity upon tidal adjustments, (Proc. Amer. Ph. Sov., ix-xiv ; xvi, sq.; Phot. Notes 215-8), are confirmed by the subterranean tides in the flooded mines‘at Dux, in Bohemia. In.a communication to Ciel et Terre (copied in Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., Xxv, 533-46), M. C. Lagrange cites the discussion, by Grablowitz (Boll. della Soc. Adr. di Sct. Nat. in Trieste, vol. vi, fase. I, 1880), of Kloénne’s obser- vations. The observations seem to show conclusively that the ebb and flow in the mines is due to combined solar and lunar action, but that it can be satisfactorily explained only by the direct attraction of the two bodies upon the solid mass of the Earth. Lagrange refers to previous investi- gations, by himself and by George H. Darwin, which go to show that if cosmical bodies have any elasticity, they must undergo continual and periodic changes of form. Grablowitz infers that those changes should lead to oscillations of various intensity, so as to produce mechanical effects which differ according to the nature and degree of local elasticity, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 8A. PRINTED NOVEMBER 15, 1882. ih Lee Pydh ye 4¢ >. og a : om R ‘ ; c m e ae: ; oh ms Gr. ; 7 ty ' “ r od wy * z Par ae % “ ve Ste fh 2) * Chase.] 420 i ae but subjected to invariable laws which are regulated by the relative movements of the disturbing bodies. Naumann’s tables (Handbuch der Chemie, 1877, pp. 346-59), show that if the whole Earth was a solid diamond, or if it was composed of rocks which are least éxpansible, the greatest quarter-daily tidal deformations would not involve an — amount of work equivalent to}°C. The spring tidal stress during six Mm. m, gt P s hours is a + —,)% = 619 ft., which is enough to furnish many 3 Pa o times the available force requisite for all the adjustments of «ethereal elas- ticity, freely moving particles, and internal work in the solid rocks. 268. ‘ Conservation of Solar Energy.” The views of Dr. C. William Siemens suggest a consideration of the in- fluence of solar rotation upon the «thereal atmosphere, at various dis- tances from Sun’s centre. Laplace’s limit, according to the data in Note 263, is at 36.35 7... The centrifugal force of rotation at that limit would be 36.35? = 1321.3 times as great as at Sun’s surface, while the centripetal force of gavitation is only ;;;-; times as great. The photographs of the solar eclipse which have been lately published (Natwre, April 20th, 1882), indicate an atmospheric oblateness which may be due to the equilibrating tendencies of these two opposing forces. If the «ethereal disturbances which result from this source are not sufficient to account for luminous and thermal vibrations, we may look still further to the velocity which the subsiding particles would acquire in falling from the equatorial limit to the poles. If there was no resistance, this velocity would be 35.39 tee 35 X 29 gn) = 76.8 miles per second. Any diminution of this velocity by resistance would be converted into heat. If the mean limit between the centrifugal and centripetal tendencies is in latitude 309%, the mean diminution of velocity when the particles reach the polar zone, would be .982 of 376.8 — 370 miles. If the mean time of accomplishing the centrifugal and centripetal cycles is the same as the time of half- rotary oscillation, the formula of torsional elasticity (Note 162) provides for radiations with the oscillatory velocity of light, and the general ten- dency of nebul to a discoid or flattened form gains a new significance. 269. Another Test of Atomic Divisors. In order to avoid all questions of absolute probability, in Notes 171, 201, 202, etc., I have computed (1 D — O) ~ D for all the elements in Clarke’s table except H, using D, = 7 for the perissads, D, = 8 for the artiads, D, = 1 for the hydrogen divisor. Adding the logarithms of (n D — O) =+ D, I find fu the pene » (for D,) = 2 0.4692966 S (for D,) = , 2T.9326580 A—B 1.5366386 421 [Chase. 1882.7 ok The aggregate probability of the hydrogen divisor is, therefore, 84.406 ; times as great as that of the general perissad divisor, 7. For the artiads > (for D,) = C 45.3906748 2,.(for Ds) ==, D 3 8.1502848 D—C : 6.7596100 The aggregate probability of the general artiad divisor, 8, is therefore 5749254 times as great as that of the hydrogen divisor. For al] the elements, ¥ (for D, and D,) — E 58599714 ¥ (for D,) =F 5 9.0829428 iE 52229714 The aggregate probability of the atmospheric divisors is, therefore, 167098 times as great as that of the hydrogen divisor. Dividing the sums of the perissad, artiad and total logarithms by 20, 44, ' 64, respectively, we get for the mean values of (xn D — O) + D, and for the mean relative probability of phyllotactic influence, Log. Antilog. Probability. Perissad, D, 1.0234648 10555 2.145 ' D, 2.9466329 .08844 3.223 Artiad, D, 2.9861517 .09686 2.124 D, T.1397792 .18797 » 1.491 Teta. Du Ds 2.9978121 .09950 2.009 D, T.0794210 .12007 1.664 The relative probability is found by dividing the mean accidental ratios for 20, 44, and 64 numbers, with differences equally distributed, by the antilogarithms, or observed ratios. The accidental ratios are .22607 for the perissads, .20578 for the artiads, .19985 for the whole list of elements. Some criticisms have been made upon my previous estimates of proba- bility, which overlooked my demenstration that ordinary tests fail to show probabilities which are known to exist (Notes 145, 149), and my introduc- tion of ‘‘the a priori probability of tendency to division in extreme and mean ratio’’ (Note 171). As my object is to show the relative probability of different divisors, and as it is impossible to know what weight should be given to @ priori considerations, the present method may be acceptable. 7 4 b 270. Fundamental Centrifugal and Centripetal Mass-Relations. The influence of cardinal loci upon the relative masses at the chief centre of nucleation and at the chief centre of condensation, is shown by the equation : SF, | () In this equation, p, = Earth’s semi-axis major = 1 ; »; = Jupiter’s semi- axis major — 5.202798 ; 7, = Sun’s semi-diameter ; / = Laplace’s solar _ limit = 36.3658 7, (See Note 75). This gives for Sun’s mass, m, = Chase.] 422 as ee yids: 835,153 m,, which is 1.32 per cent. greater than the estimate which is — based on requirements of oscillation and subsidence (Notes.5, 23, etc.). If/,, f; designate the centrifugal force of rotation at r,, J, respectively, and Jo» g, represent the corresponding centripetal accelerations of gravity, equation (1) may assume the form: ee I 1 Ps Kr. (2) 1 Ps Io Equation (1) is especially interesting for its bearing on the consenpntiont of solar energy (Note 268); equations (1) and (2) represent the equal ratios of action and reaction between centripetal and centrifugal tenden- cies, all the numerators having a centrifugal origin, while all the denomi- nators are centripetal. Combining these equations with the equation of Earth’s Sakae hamic vis viva (Note 91), we get | 0) . Me —_ a st ; (3) Here also we have ee numerators and pantripeial dinotninieee ws together with photodynamic orbital relations of mass, distance, velocity, y rotation, revolution and condensation, which are very suggestive. 271. Perissad Relations of Nitrogen. If we take the continued product, forall the elements, of the percentages of D which represent (n D — O) + D, the hydnoeert product is 69.208 times as great as for Gerber’s empirical divisors, and 18178.47 times as great — 7 as that for my phyllotactic factors (Note 136). While this is sufficient to ~ show the influence of phyllotactic tendencies, my comparisons of relative probability have led me to the discovery of important modifications of these - tendencies by the abundant gases, H, N, O; H being a representative factor of the rebar sai elements, } N for the tri- and pentavalent, 8 H for the di- and tetratomic, 7; O = .998 for the remaining metallic elements. The effect of a slight difference in the divisor upon the residuals, as wellas my method of operation, may be illustrated by testing Gerber’s divisor. - (D, = 1.559) and my own (D, = } N = 1.558) on the tri-and pentavalent elements: ; Clarke. Ri. Rs Log, R. Log. Re, N 14.021 9D,— 10= 9D, 1 1.0000000 .0000000 202 2.3463530 2.3053514 re 30.958 = 20 D, — 222 = 20D, = = 134 1.9344984 2.127104§ As 74.918 — .48 D,,+ 86 =. Sb 119.955 = 77 DD. 88-71 —_— Bi 207.523 = 133 D, + 176 = 133 D, + 309 2.2455127 24899585 Au 196.155 = 126 D, — 279 =126D, — 153 2.4456042 2,1846914 Bo 10.941.—" %D,4 238 =.) An Ta 182.144 — 117 1— 209.= 117 D, 142 2.4132998 2.1522883 2 log. R ‘ 18.0579422 16.0435122 >. 9 x log. D 28.7356149 28.7331075 Y log. | (R = D) =log. P T1.3223273 13.3104047 1 11 1.9444827 1.0413927. 35 1.4471580 1.5440680. 158 2.2810534 2.1986571 | 5 + log. = log. p 2.8135919 2.5900450 ~ f i 4 2 “it a 4 bi ciel cee ial tall , ; 1882... 425 [Chase. The logarithm of aggregate relative probability is T1T.3223273 — T3- .3104047 = 2.0119226; the log. of mean relative probability is 2.8135919 — 7.5900450 = .2235469. Hence the aggregate relative probability of the nitrogen divisor, P, — P, = 102.783; the mean relative probability, p, + Pp, = 1.6782. 272. Aggregate and Mean Ratio of Residuals to Atomic Divisors. In the following table the logarithms for each group are computed after the method of the foregoing note. The divisor for the first surd, §,, is 3 (8—/ 5) =.382 ; for the second surd, S,, $()/ 5 — 1) = .618 ; for hydro- gen, H —1; for Gerber and Chase I, see Note 136 ; for Chase II, see Note 269 ; for Chase III, see Note 271. ; Group. Soe. S$. 12h Gerber. ChaseI, ChaseIJ. Chase III. Monat. ¥,3393239 ¥8.5143370 1T2.2188579 I1.7186094 T1.6283038 IT.4019386 12.2138579 8 and 5. 7.4310096 %.7210766 10.7187995 11.3223273 11.3223273 9.0673580 13.3104047 2and 4, 11,7492826 17,6963491 16.59091435 25.8649303 23.6476134 25,5406987 23.3406987 Metal. T8,5073145 19.1410255 23.5593397 15.3369171 20.2251388 22.0499751 32.5388218 Periss. 195.7703335 15.2354136 22.9326574 21.0409367 22.9506311 -20.4692966 25,5242626 Artiad. 28.2565971 33.8373746 38.1502832 £0.2018474 £3.8727522 £5.3906738 55.8795205 Agereg, £2,0269306 £7.0727882 59,0829406 61.2427841 ©£.8233833 65.8599704 79.4037831 Mean, T.3441708 1,2667623 1.0794209 1.0506685 1.0128654 2.9978120 2.7719341 Rel. Ag. .0000000 4.9541424 16,9439900 18.7841465 21.2035473 22.1669602 36.6231475 Rel. M. 0000000 = .0774085 ~=—s- «.2647499 = .293502: 3318054 3463588 —-.57 22367 - The aggregate residual ratio for S, is more than 87,900,000,000,000,000 _ times as great as for hydrogen, and more than 4,199,000, 000, 000,000, 000, - 000,000,000, 000,000,000 times as great as for the relations to H, N, O; the mean ratio is 1.8397 times as great as for H, and 3.7345 times as great as for my second group of divisors. The aggregate hydrogen ratio is more than 47,770,000,000,000,000,000 times as great as for my third group, the _ mean ratio being 2.0299 times as great. us 273. Comparison of Geometric and Arithmetic Residual Means. The logarithms of the geometric mean residual ratios, for the several groups, may be found by dividing the monatomic ldgarithms by 11, the tri- and pentatomic by 9, the di- and tetratomic by 17, the metallic by 27. Some questions of relative probability may be tested more readily by arithmetical means, and for this reason as well as in order to preserve additional evidence of phyllotactic influence, the following table is given. All of my divisors were deduced from phyllotactic considerations ; the first set shows the great superiority of my phyllotactic over Gerber’s approxi- mately phyllotactic divisors ; the second set introduces corresponding terms of two phyllotactic series; the third set has two divisors which are simply phyllotactic (1, 8) and two which are products of phyllotactic ratios (Gle=4X 454=4x 9) fet ay é . - ne a ag = » Pra te oS J i fae ) e ¥ a Sl peas Ss Se ame ' Ce ee Kay. po " , ee a ae ‘ J f oe am, AN ere Chase.) 424 ae ne : (Oct. 6, Arithmetical, ' ‘ Geometrical, — bin eer an Group. S;, S,; H. G. CG. Cx Cy 9 Se Sr HH. G Cy. Oy Cy Monat. .237 \232 .215 .195 17] .205 .215 -201 .209 .085 .116 .114 .109 (085 Sand5. .218 .225 .142 .096 .096 .186 .082 186.155 .0938 .065 .065 .102 .039 Zand 4. .288 .221 .214 .144 .145 .187 .137 49 .165 4124 .050 .048 .046 .046 Metal. .268 .259 .225. .246 .240..227 | .127 *.225 .200 .148 .222 .185 .154 .068 Periss. .229 .228 .182 .150 .187 .172 .155 194 .183 .088 .090 .089 .106 060 Artiad. .276 .245 .220 .207 .203 .192 .131 .284 .186 .138 .125 .110 .097 .059 Aggreg. .261 .240 .209 .189 .183 .186 .139 287.185 .120 .112 .108 .099 .059 274. Some Consequences of the Identity of Luminous and .Gravitating Oscillation. The ethereal particles, which are repelled from Sun’s equator by the centrifugal force of rotation, ‘‘subside’’ spirally towards the poles, giving rise to Ampérian currents which account for Maxwell’s identification of luminous and electromagnetic waves and yielding a mechanical equiva- lent of 76,000,000 J for every pound of subsiding matter; the axial core of the spirals is the rod of the virtual solar pendulum (Note 162) of which the length and the radius of torsion are both determined by the solar modulus of light ; the continual succession of spiral impulsions substitutes uniform rotation for reciprocal oscillation ; the precise accordance between the time of rotary oscillation and the time of acquiring or losing the velocity of.luminous projection, shows the equally precise agreement be- tween centrifugal sethereal action and centripetal gravitating reaction; the combination of axial rotation with orbital revolution produces continual shiftings of inertial resistance which must be followed by continual re- newals of sethereal disturbance ; the perpetual maintenance of luminous ' oscillation by influx, as well as by an equivalent efflux, removes ‘‘the re- proach of Thermodynamuics,”’ : Such are a few of the obvious considerations which are suggested by the identity of luminous and gravitating oscillatory velocity at the centre of the solar system. In subjecting them to the tests of mathematical analysis, the equilibrating tendencies of centrifugal and centripetal action sliould be studied with especial reference to three oblate spheroids, all of which have the same poles as the Sun. Their equatorial loci are respec- tively coincident with Laplace’s limit (86.357,), the virtual radius of solar torsion (688.957,), and the solar modulus of light (4746577r,). 275. Consideration of Some Objections Professor Geo. Fras. FitzGerald (Nature, xxvi, 80) presents four ques- tions in the way of objection to the hypothesis of the conservation of solar energy by an average influx which is exactly equivalent to the average efflux. The reply of Dr. Siemens may be supplemented by some addi- tional considerations. ‘‘1. How the interplanetary gases near the Sun acquire a sufficient radial velocity to prevent their becoming a dense atmos- phere around him?’’ The proportionality of centrifugal force to mass would combine with the tendencies of gaseous diffusion and with the in- 1882.] 425 [Chase. creased molecular velocity of gaseous condensation, to maintain a constant circulation of all the constituents of the solar atmosphere. ‘‘2. Why enorm- ous atmospheres have not long ago become attached to the planets, notably to the Moon?’’ The reported discovery of a lunar atmosphere by Trépied and Thollon, during the late solar eclipse, which is announced in the same number as the question, gives an apt and timely confirmation of Wollas- ton’s views, which are cited by Siemens. ‘*3. Why the earth has not long ago been deluged when a constant stream of aqueous vapor that would produce a rain of more than 30 inches per annum all over the earth, must annually pass out past the earth in order to supply fuel to be dissociated by the heat that annually passes the earth?’’ The average annual rainfall of the whole globe is not accurately known, bift there is good reason to believe that it is very nearly, if not precisely, such as would be required by the hypothesis. ‘‘4. Why we can see the stars although most of the solar radiations are absorbed within some reason- able distance of the Sun?’’ The prevalent thermodynamic hypotheses suppose an unlimited power of absorbing radiant ozs viva, without any tangible evidence of such absorption. All that needs to be explained is the maintenance of a uniform amount of xthereal oscillations in the uni- verse. If the centrifugal and centripetal alternations of less elastic parti- cles are linked with like alternations of more elastic particles, the actions and reactions of elasticity and inertia may account, for the operation and stability of all physical laws. 276. Influence of Explosive Oscillations on Radiant Energy. The relations which I have pointed out between explosive oscillations and planetary positions (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xii, 392-417, et seq.), should also influence the centrifugal and centripetal alternations within Sun’s photosphere. I have often shown that the photodynamic equality of luminous and gravitating oscillations tends to drive all of Sun’s parti- cles towards the limit between aggregation and dissociation, so that a slight external disturbance may turn the unstable equilibrium in either direction. Berthelot’s investigations (C. R. xciii. 613-9) of explosions in gaseous compounds by detonating agents, have indicated the existence of explosive waves which are quite distinct from simple waves of sound, and have shown that compounds and explosive mixtures generally become more sensitive to shocks as they near the temperature at which they begin to decompose. Hence a meteor, or even a single molecule, which has ac- quired a sufficient velocity of subsidence in its sunward fall, may explode a gaseous compound which is in or near the nascent state, and the explo- sion may react upon the falling mass or molecule so as to leave it in an unstable equilibrium which is ready for explosion by the next like subsi- dence. The locus of the virtual radius of solar torsion (a7,, Note 162) in the asteroidal belt, makes the minor planets important outposts of explo- sive oscillation in the second of the oblate spheroids to which I called atten- —_— eee Ss. Chase.) 426 - :- ' 3 , [Oete6, tion in Note 274, and opens a wide field for analytical research pepe the equilibrating tendencies between centripetal and centrifugal ener, The stability of major axes, in orbital revolution, is no more necessal than the reciprocal equality of radiodynamic action ang reaction in ‘elastic media. whe smn aU - nog Different portions of the asteroidal belt are so related to Barth’s varying’ positions as to share the influence, either directly or through the conver-) sion of oscillatory o/s viva into projectile ozs eiva, of linear, spherical and: explosive centres of oscillation. One of these relations, which seems specially important and significant in connection with the maintenance’ of solar energy, is found by dividing the virtual radius of solar torsion’ (ar, = = 688.957r,) by Earth’s mean radius vector (p3 = 214.457,). This gives a relative cig agi of 1 + 3.2134, and a relative orbital velocity of (3.2134 — 1)? = 1.7926 + 1 at the chief centre of condensation in the solar sys slaae as compared with the orbital velocity at the ex- tremity of the radius of torsion. This is within about 3, of one per cent. of the ratio (1.8) of the vis viva of oscillating particles to the vis viva of wave propagation, which was indicated by me in 1872 (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xii, 394), and by Maxwell in 1877 (Phil. Mag. [5] iii., 453, iv. 209). A portion of this trifling difference may be ex- plained by the gradual diminution of xthereal density upon receding from stellar centres (Note 240). 277. Relations of Earth to the iepber 278. Collateral Hypotheses. (In investigating the relations of centripetal and centrifugal action and reaction, it seems desirable to consider and compare the following hypo- theses and conclusions : 1. Laplace’s estimate that the velocity of transmission, in gravitating 7 aap sacs is at least 100,000,000 times as great as that of light. =e . LeSage’s hypothesis that gravitation and luminous undulation repre- oo equal actions and reactions. es 3. Faraday’s fruitless search for a gravitating constant which would satisfy his interpretation of the doctrine of conservation of energy. ie 4. Herschel’s comparison of the mean ois viva of light, with that of sound. 5. Weber’s identification of the velocity of light (0 y» with the ‘‘ electro- magnetic ratio’’ (v2). 6..Berthelot’s ‘‘ explosive waves,’’ and their action upon sound waves. 7. The inquiries of Siemens into the combined influence of TotatON,, cen- trifugal action, gravitating force, and chemical affinity. 8. The various attempts of Thomson, Rankine, Maxwell, Eddy, and others, to escape the apparent consequences of the second law of thermo- dynamics. ’ 1882,] 427 (Chase. 270. Cosmical and Molecular Constant. If there is a natural unit of force we may look for a natural unit of velocity. The hypothesis that all the particles of bodies are in constant motion, involves oscillation of various kinds, orbital, pendulous, or wave. Different transformations of similar oscillations are harmonic. Rota- tion may be regarded as a pendulous oscillation due to retarded and modi- fied revolution. The resemblance of LeSage’s theory to the kinetic theory of gases points to a probability that the natural unit of velocity is oscillatory. This probability is strengthened if we assume the ex- istence of molecular and intermolecular elasticity. In looking to the activities of the principal mass in our system for indications of a natural unit of velocity, we find that gravitating velocities may be represented by gt. In order that gt may be constant, ¢ must vary inversely as g and, therefore, directly as r?. This variation is found in the rotation of a nebulous sphere, where it holds good for all stages uf expansion or con- tfaction which are not affected by externalinfluence. Gravitating accelera- tion should do its whole work in stellar rotation, as well as in planetary revolution. Particles exposed to solar superficial gravitating acceleration, during a single oscillation of half-rotation, would acquire a constant velocity (gt = vy) which is equivalent to the velocity of light. In other words, the unit of velocity which is indicated by the combined constant of solar gravitation and rotation is the same as is indicated by light and by electricity. 280. Harmonious Development. The velocity of light, like the velocity of sound, represents an elastic atmosphere whose height, if homogeneous, would be twice the virtual fall which would give the velocity in question. The analogy is enhanced by the fact that the hypothetical elasticity of the luminiferous xther is in har- monic accordance with solar rotation and planetary revolution. The identity of velocity OP ee 1) oy represents three simple relations of light, electricity and gravitation. In- terpret this fact as we may, it is strongly suggestive of some interplay between sun and matter outside of it, which has determined solar con- stants. The invariability of e% by nebular contraction indicates the same. determination for the present and for all future time. If Sun’s mass and magnitude are determined by cosmic causes, so that the solar system can always be considered as undergoing a process of harmonious development, the mass, rotation and other solar elements seem likely to be connected by numerical relations, either with other bodies of the system or with cosmi- cal or physical data. 281. A Fundamental Time-Integral. Thomson and Tait (Nat. Phil., i, § 52) speak of the principle of har- monic motion as one of ‘‘immense use, not only in. ordinary kinetics, but: PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 3B. PRINTED NOVEMBER 24, 1882. (er re é . eA ’ 7 < = a4 . re 4 Gs | A » nr ¥ 1 4- SF ok “ 3 Re arr, - > A A . = ened . ii on Bio ¢ af iy of f 3 7 y . ae x. ae os ae Fite Ls 4 + 4 Chase,] | 428 | [Oet. 6, | in the theories of sound, light, heat, etc.’”’. Nearly all the results of my a physical investigations go to confirm the truth of this statement. The velocity which is involved in the time-integral of projection against a con- stant gravitating retardation, is measured by gé. The theory of the ballistic pendulum assumes (op. cit., § 298) ‘‘that the ball and pendulum are moy- ing on as one mass before the pendulum has been sensibly deflected from the vertical. This is the essential peculiarity of the apparatus. A sufficiently great force might move it far from the vertical in a small fraction of its time of vibration. But in order that the time-integral may have its simplest application to such a case, the direction of the force would have continu- ally to change so as to be always the same as that of the motion of the block.’’ This is precisely the case in the identity of the foregoing note, accord- ing to LeSage’s hypothesis. The doctrine of correlation of force leads us to look for the simplest forms of harmonic motion at the centres of stellar systems. The simplest value of ¢, in a harmony of luminous undulation and stellar rotation, is that of a single oscillation of half-rotation. We have no means of knowing whether the identity, 02 = 0: = vy, holds for any system except our own, but its verification by our sun and the variety of ways in which photodynamic harmonies are deduced are very KoEe cant. 282. A Secondary Time-Integrat. The harmony between Sun’s constrained rotation and luminous undur lation warrants an expectation of subordinate harmonies between sola- and planetary motions. We may naturally look for the simplest relation in some harmonic motions of Sun and Jupiter. Jupiter is at the nebular centre of the system, on a diameter which is bounded by mean_loci of Neptune and Uranus, and the velocity which is involved in its time-inte- gral of rotary oscillation, (gt), is nearly, and perhaps exactly, the same as the limit of planetary velocity in a circular orbit ((/gr at Sun’s surface). Although planetary revolution at Sun’ssurface is impossible, the influences which tend to produce it are continuous, and any wave motion which may be thus produced is propagated with uniform velocity through the medium in which the waves originate. The uncertainties in regard to the exact values of Earth’s semiaxis major and the apparent semidiameter of Sun and Jupiter, introduce a range of uncertainty into the velocity of Ju- piter’s time integral, which amounts to about five per cent. Values may be taken which are very near the mean values and which make the accord- ance exact. This accordance may, perhaps, lead to a special extension: and modification of George H. Darwin’s beautiful investigations. 283. A Third Time-Integral. The centre which seems to hold the third rank in point of cosmical im- portance, in the solar system, is the centre of the belt of greatest conden- sation, which is represented by Earth’s orbit. The velocity which is in- -_ — " y PY > 429 [Chase. volved in its time-integral of rotary oscillation is slightly less than Jupi- ter’s corresponding velocity, being almost, or quite identical with plane- .tary velocity at the mean centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter. These suc- cessive accordances furnish data for a second ‘‘ photodynamic problem of three bodies,’’ which is, perhaps, even more remarkable than the one given in Note 254. The importance of the combined harmonies may be shown by a simple recapitulation of the several harmonic velocities, viz. : 1. The identity of Note 280; 2. The velocities which correspond with the respec- tive time-integrals of rotary oscillation for the chief centre of nucleation (Sun), the centre of nebulosity (Jupiter), and the chief centre of conden- sation (Earth); 3. The limiting velocity of circular orbital revolution in the system; 4. The velocity of circular orbital revolution at the centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter. 284. Instantaneous Action. The case of gravitating action and re-action between Moon and Earth (Thomson and Tait, § 276), is the one which led Laplace to his highest estimate of the velocity of gravitating transmission and to suppose that the transmission. might be absolutely instantaneous. Ii is also the case which led Adams (Jb. § 830) to the discovery of Laplace’s error respecting the theoretical invariability of the mean sidereal day and to the subsequent discussions of tidal friction and retardation. That there is such a thing as instantaneous action is so generally believed that it seems desirable that attempts should be made to furnish some physical representation of its possibility and to demonstrate its influence upon adjustments of equilib- rium in cosmical actions and reactions. It fricticnal accelerations in one por- tion of a rotating globe can be compensated by frictional retardations in another, or if elasticity (Note 217) aids tidal tendency and wave propaga- tion in making the instantaneous changes which are required by tidal action, our tidal theories need careful revision. The facts of harmonic relation which are found on all sides, indicate activities which have been at work in all time, and they should ‘not be ignored for any merely theo- retical considerations. 285. ‘‘ Hurmonice Analysis of Tidal Observations.’’ At the last meeting of the British Association, a special grant of £50 was made to Mr. George H. Darwin, for a Harmonic Analysis of Tidal Obser- vations. Mr. Darwin’s success in developing Sir William Thomson’s views upon cosmical viscosity, and the beauty of many of his results, give assurance of valuable additions to human knowledge from any work that he may undertake. The accuracy of the conclusions which he has already drawn from Delaunay’s hypothesis, is unquestionable. My criticisms (Notes 215-225) upon Prof. Ball’s use of those conclusions, were based upon the fact that they did not adequately represent all the elements of the questions which were involved, the laws of intermolecular elasticity and harmonic motion having been almost entirely overlooked. In the absence of any positive evidence of tidal retardation, we have no right to Chase.} 430 oct 6, jump at the conclusion that it is established by the second law of thermo- dynamics. ; The ‘‘reproach ’’ which that law involves is increasing] felt by able investigators (Note 278, 8), and even if it should at last be teat. mously admitted that the reproach is unavoidable, it is more satisfactory to suppose a continual restoration of energy by divine supervision, than to believe in the spasmodic alternations of rest and activity, which are taught in the Hindoo mythology. 286. Refraction of Energy. The important cosmical time-integrals and the triple identity of tind! mental velocities (Notes, 280-3), seem to: be indicative of a continual equivalence of centripetal and centrifugal activities, such as LeSage made the basis of his hypothesis ; the rotation of stellar centres serving both to maintain the active evergies of the universe and to provide cyclical ad- justments of equilibrium. The apparent requirements of thermo-dy- namics may, perhaps, be partially satisfied by the probability that the sethereal atmosphere of every star has a relatively hot and a relatively cold hemisphere. It seems possible that all radiations, luminous, thermal, electrical, or kinetic in any other form, may be so refracted, in their pas- sage through the various stellar atmospheres, as to be either reflected from star to star, or transiently absorbed by media which can speedily be enabled, by stellar rotation, to give them out again. 287. Another Phyllotactic Atomic Divisor. The di- and tetratomic group of chemical elements can be more nearly represented by the phyllotactic divisor 3 C = 7.9824, than by 8 H (Notes, 271-2). 5 ol of oO. TOO. (Log. TO.) O 2D 15.9648 15.9633 .0015 3.17609 S 4D 31.9296 31.984 .0544 2.738560 Se 10 D 79.8240 78,797 1.027 0.01157 Te 16 D 127.7184 127.960 ‘2416 1.38310 Mg 3D 23.9472 23.959 .0118 2.07188 Ca 5D 39.9120 39.990 .078 2.89209 Sr tip) 87.8064 87.374 .4324 1.63589 Ba 17D 135.7008 136.763 1.0622 0.02620 C 2D 15.9648 11.9736 3.9912 0.60110 Si 4D 31.9296 ~ 28.195 3.7346 0.57224 Ti 6D 47.8944 49.846 1.9516 0.29089 Zr 11 D 87.8064 89.367 1.6606 0.19329 Sn 15 D 119.7360 117.698 2.088 0.30920 Hg 25 D 199.5600 199.712 -152 1.18184 Mo 12D 95/7888 95.527 .2618 1.41797 WwW 23 D 183.5952 183.610 .0148 2.17026 U 30 D 239.4720 238.482 .99 1.99564 1 0.66435 17 (log. D = .90213) 15.33621 17) 25.82814 Logarithm of mean residual, %.54871 1882:}) 4 x On or) 288: Another Basis for Hstimates of Probability. [Chase. ¥ _ The substitution of 3 C for 3 O or 8 H, in Notes 271-2, not only introduces another evidence of phyllotactic influence upon atomicity, but italso shows that the organic elements, C, H, O, N, stand in important phyllotactic relations to four fundamental groups of elements. If we omit C from the comparison, the remaining elements of the di- and tetratomic group give Z 2.47682 for their logarithm of mean residual. themselves are .03538D and .02998D. I have already considered various probabilities, which were based on Schuster’s estimates, tive probabilities which are independent of any absolute estimates. An- The respective residuals as well as rela- other satisfactory basis of comparison may be found in the mean limiting D ak “value of, the residual, a—nD = 5.43004 (2zD) 22, when the possible re- siduals' are taken in arithmetical progression. thus ‘taken, in’other words, if the number of terms is infinite, the second If all possible values are 19) . factor becomes unity and the limiting value is =j75,57 = .18394D. This 5.438654 is 5.2 times as great as the first of the above mean residuals, or 6.135 times as great as the second. 289. Resumé of Phyllotactic Atomicity. The most satisfactory phyllotactic divisors for the four elementary ‘groups, as indicated by the foregoing notes, are the following : a, for the monatomic group, H=1 == 3.3 O; ®, for the tri- and pentavalent group, p34 N =—1.558 ; 7, for the di- aad tetratomic group, 3 C=i0=>8 H= 7.9824; 3, for the residuary metallic group, 3.2 0 =>3}7=.998. The comparative residual percentages, as deduced from Note 272, anc from ‘these divisors are given in the table below : So. ~ Monat. 20117 “Sand 5 .18626 2Qand 4 24947 Metal. 22497 » Periss. 19432 MArtiad. «28414 Mean 22089 S:. . 20868 © 15532 16498 20023 18271 18584 .18483 TI. 08483 09306 12405 14752 08344 13797 .12007 Gerber. 11623 .06510 04988 22172 .08955 .12460 11237 290. Comparative Probabilities. Chase. .08483 .06499 .02998 .06882 .07525 04965 05654 _The following tables give the comparative probabilities for the several ‘divisors : 1st, if the hydrogen unit ; 2d, if .18394D is taken as the unit of é probability. Ahoy %} ie =, Oe ne ‘9 x ey ee, to, AK . Chal ee A Wye? © TGP eee pale Fe elt cee rere wt PRS isos a2 gy eee alee cai al a > Re chase.] 432 - [Oete6 Fy Ce oH. Gerber. Chase, Monat. _—_—. 4217 4065 1.0000 7298 1.0000 Band5 —-.4996 5991 1.0000 1.4295: 1.4318 Qand4 _—.4972 7519 1.0000 2.4868 ~ 41377 Metal. 6558 .7368 1.0000 - 6658... 2.1625. Perissad. .4551 4840 1.0000 | -9876 1.1753 Artiad. — .5893 1424 1.0000 1.1073 2.7787 Mean 5436 -6496 1.0400 1.0684 - 2.1285. Aggregate, S, .0000000000000000114; S, .00000000000102 ; H 1; G 69.019; C 853,782,000, 000,000,000, 000. Monat. 9143 .8814 2.1685 1.5825 2.1685 3 and 5 -9876 1.1843 1.9766 2.8255 2.8302 2and 4 7373 1.1149 1.4829 _ 3.6876 —— 6.1356 Metal. 8176 9187 1.2469 8296 — —- 2.6964 Perissad. .9466 1.0067 2.0799 2.0541 - 2.4445 Artiad. 7856 .9898 1.3332 1.4763 3.7046 Mean. 18327 9952 1.5320 1.6369 ~ 8.2588 Aggregate, S, .00000815 ; S, .735; H_ 718,725,600,000 ; G 49,821,227,000, - 000 ; C 614,812,000,000,000, 000, 000, 000,000,000, 000. 291, Another Comparative Basis. . In the above comparisons it seemed best to’ exclude the elements that were exactly phyllotactic multiples of the assumed divisors (H in the 3d and 5th columns ; N and C in the 5th). If those elements were consid- ered as uncertain to the amount of .001 H, the results would be modified, by introducing all the elements, as follows: residuals ; H, monatomic, .05859, perissad, .07144, mean, .11154; Chase, monatomic, .05859, tri- and, pentatomic, .03891, di- and tetratomic, .03538, perissad, .04916, artiad, -05293, mean, .05168. The comparative mean probabilities would be as follows: S, .5050, S, .6035, Hf 1.0000, Gerber .9926, Chase 2.1581. The mean probability of the hydrogen unit, as deduced from the mean acci- dental residual, would be, 1.9286; of the phyllotactic divisors, 3.5589. That the test of the mean accidental residual is sufficiently severe is evi- dent from the probabilities which it indicates for the surd divisors, S, and §,. ; me 292. Objection Answered. ‘ The uncertainity, even of Clarke’s recomputation of atomic weights, has. been urged as an objection to the acceptance of any apparent probabilities. which may be inferred from their examination. If our conclusions were absolute, the objection would be valid, and it must be admitted that even the comparative probabilities will doubtless be greatly modified by the more ac- curate determination of doubtful atomicities. The modifications, however, would be quite as likely to increase the evidences of phyllotactic influence as todiminish them, if there were no reason to look for suchinfluence. Thea priori grounds for expecting proof of harmonic action in some shape or = f r 433 (Chase, other (Note 281), together with the various physical tendencies to division in extreme and mean ratio (Notes 135, etc.), which make phyllotaxy a sim- ple form of harmony, seem likely to turn the scale largely on the side of its present leaning, so as to make the fact of atomic phyllotaxy more and more evident with each successive increase of precision in atomic measure- ments. While the mean probability of the hydrogen unit, under the most favorable aspect, is 1.93 times as great as that of any divisor taken at random, the mean probability of the phyllotactic divisors, under the least favorable aspect, is 1.845 times as great as that of hydrogen. If my di- visors, like Gerber’s, had been purely empirical, there would have been more reason to think that they might lose credit with increased precision of determination, but even then it would be strange if so large a relative advantage were entirely overcome. The successive discoveries that Ger- ber’s divisors are approximately phyllotactic, that their significance is in- creased by making them exactly phyllotactic, and that the most satisfac- tory divisors which have yet been found stand in simple phyllotactic rela- tions to the four fundamental organic elements, furnish no ground for ex- pecting any future reversal or weakening of the harmonic indications which I have already set forth. 293. Photodynamic Precession. To the many harmonic evidences of photodynamic action and reaction between the chief centres of nucleation and of condensation, Sun and Earth, may be added one which serves to illustrate and extend the princi- ples that are involved in my first ‘“‘ photodynamic problem of three bodies”’ (Note 254). If we suppose the photodynamic rotating influence on the ethereal sphere, at the equatorial locus of Sun’s modulus of light (4740287, ; Note 263), to be such as would give planetary velocity at the same locus, the time of rotation would be (474028-+-214.73)?—103721 years. If nebular condensation were to begin at that locus and proceed until the primitive velocity of the locus would tend, through viscosity, to become parabolic, the nucleal radius would be reduced to one-half and the time of rotation to one-fourth of the primitive values. The period, or ‘‘ great year,’ which is thus indicated (25930.25 years), is virtually identical with a complete revolution of the equinoxes, which Herschel estimates at 25,868 years ; Stockwell at 25,694 8 + 281.2 years ;* Newcomb and Hol- den ‘‘about 25,800 years.”’ This accordance furnishes another reason for believing, with Laplace, in the stability of the physical universe, rather . than in the ultimate stagnation which seems to be indicated by the ques- tionable second law of thermodynamics. 294. Harmonic Rotation of Earth and Moon. The improbability of Delaunay’s hypothesis is further increased by har- monies of rotation which involve the conjoint action of Sun, Earth and Moon. * The differences from the mean value being due to secular inequalities. ee. ob Pee ‘Chase. ] AB4 —— [0et. By taking the rotating locus of the linear centre of oscillation, for La- place’s terrestrial limit, 1, we find that the velocity of rotation at } 7 is vir- tually identical with Moon’s mean velocity of revolution. oLet li nt ; 8 then ¢, = aN = 861641 seconds; x = 6.6074; } 1 = 2.202357 ; 73 velocity of rotation at 3 17 = 4.40469 zr, per sidereal day, or 4.41675 — RM, per mean solar day. If this is Moon’s mean orbital velocity, the cireum- ference of her orbit is (27.321661 « 4.41675 — 120.673) zr,. Moon’s or- bital eccentricity being .0549081, her orbit is .999246 x 27a and a= 60.382 r,. Proctor’s estimate is 60.263 7,; Littrow’s, 60.278 7, ; Newcomb’s 60.639 r,. See, also, Note 296. 295. Spectrum of Comet Wells. Huggins (Nature, June 22, 1882, p. 179) gives a band spectrum, with measured wave-lengths for the brightest portions. Its harmonies are shown in the following comparisons : Huggins. Divisors. — ‘Haravopip, a 769 1 AT69 3 4634 lta 4634.2 Z 4507 .,.., 1+4+2a 4507.2 0 4412 14256 AAI2. Aon civoy Ele 4253 1+ 3b 4252.9 pay 3 peeaed Dene 2: fe::2:8 In other words, 7 is the centre of linear oscillation between ¢ and f. Other phyllotactic approximations are indicated by the proportions ; 2 3 ye :.:,0,: 8 nearly. re 5 ici Saige 1 aren These several relations show a primitive phyllotactic tendency, which is controlled and modified by y and the harmonic divisors. The follow- ing values would exactly satisfy all the phyllotactic harmonies : 4760.71, 4633.86, 4507, 4411.86, 4253.29. 296. Harmonie Nebular Time-Integrals. The second ‘‘ photodynamic problem of three bodies,’’ which is specially implied in my three primitive time integrals (Notes 281-3), may be as- sociated with the first through a harmonic relation which involves Moon’s orbital time (¢ a) Earth’s rotation (tz), Earth’s superficial gravitating acceleration Gy and Sun’s gravitating acceleration at the perihelion centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter (gy). The relation is expressed by the proportion. te 742° 390? 9s The resulting equation, itg= Jot,, indicates two important harmonic time-integrals, which seem sstnlla more likely to be permanent, than to be 1882.] 435 [Chase. disturbed’and even overthrown by tidal friction and retardation. Since g is taken at the present locus of Jupiter’s orbital projection, it seems possible that the lunar disturbance, which Delaunay referred to tidal friction, may have a secular period, which represents some function of Jupiter’s secular variations of eccentricity. If we take Leverrier’s estimate of Jupi- ter’s present eccentricity, .0482388, and Stockwell’s estimate of its secular variation, .0608274, Sun’s superficial gravitating acceleration is 1.027 gy = 1.027 x 27.321661 = 28.059. This gives ps = 92,409,000 miles, if we take the oscillatory estimate of Solar mass, and the British Nautical Almanac estimate of Sun’s apparent semi-diameter (im = 831,776 m;,; p; = 214.459). Compare Note 256, e. 297. Two Tidal Questions. No physical question can be regarded as satisfactorily settled, until all the known facts which are likely to have any bearing on its solution have been duly considered. Provisional hypotheses may be very properly adopted as occasional and temporary expedients, in order to fix new points of departure, and facilitate the progress of investigation, but even they are ’ defective whenever they are obviously limited and partial. The cosmical importance of harmonic motion, which Laplace demonstrated in his dis- cussions of Jupiter’s satellite system, as well as the further evidences of its general physical importance which have been brought forward by La- grange, Fourier and Thomson, cannot be wisely set aside, even in a pro- visional hypothesis, through any dogmatic assertion of a thermodynamic requirement, which, if it is not compensated in some way, may possibly lengthen the terrestrial day by a minute interval, which has been variously was universally admitted, the relations of photodynamic precession (Note 293), indicate a possible harmonic acceleration which is manifoldly greater than this problematical retardation. Before making any admission which would call for a careful study of this possible acceleration, two questions should be satisfactorily answered: 1. Are the tidal tendencies instan- taneously adjusted? 2. Are the local tidal frictions limited to mere terres- trial action, so that the conversion of motion into heat, at one point, is com- pensated by a conversion of heat into motion at another? 298. Hxplosive Waves. Berthelot’s discovery has already been suggested (Note 278, 6) as.one of the important topics for consideration in the study of ethereal correla- tions. The velocity, /gh, which is indicated by the explosive energy of H,O (Note 16), is (82.088 x 68878.2 x 1389.6 = 9)2 = 18473 ft. = 3,49865 miles per second. This velocity is sufficient, under the normal atmos- pheric pressure at Earth’s surface, to produce ethereal waves which are manifested by light, heat and chemical combination. We may accordingly look for like phenomena whenever ‘‘ subsiding’ particles penetrate the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 8c. PRINTED NOVEMBER 24, 1882. an vi ' ie ‘ ee C2. b Be Renny eee ee ‘A oie ; ri ale eg ee v » : end yey ri ’ é bd | Ne y > Fa ae 4 rt . in y , * % yg . Chase,] 436 [Oct. 6): nebulous region of the zodiacal light with a corresponding vis viva. Subsi- dence from Laplace's solar limit (Notes 268, 274), would give ‘a vis viva which is more than 10000 times as great, in their passage through the” solar atmosphere. These facts should be carefully considered in‘any in- vestigations which are suggested by the hypothesis of Dr. Siemens. The> explosive velocity being acquired long before the subsiding matter reaches’ Sun’s surface, the compounded and condensed particles continue sunward” into the region of dissociation and centrifugal projection. No sufficient. reason has yet been given, for doubting the adequacy of the fundamental time-integral (Notes 280-1) to keep up this circulation indefinitely.) Im-* portant harmonic analogies are suggested by Neptune’s projectile orbital velocity at secular perihelion, and by Jupiter’s mean locus of subsidence, | According to Stockwell’s estimates of the planetary elements, Neptune’s | secular perihelion velocity is 3.42 miles per second and Jupiter’s mean’ aphelion is 5. 4274 Pa the mean proportional between Earth’s semi-axis:’ major and Neptune’s secular perihelion being 5.4404 p,. 299. Alternations of Energy. All the ordinary assumptions of dissipation of energy take it for granted that the universal «ther is able to absorb heat indefinitely, without im- parting it again to more condensed matter. If this were the case, why should not the heat be absorbed in its passage from star to star? Judging © from atmospheric analogies, we may infer the existence of ethereal con-_ vection currents and a greater manifestation of heat with increasing density. If ethereal density varies with pressure, as I have supposed in Notes 35, 236-240, etc., the kinetic, theory of gases would imply a con- stant mean molecular velocity. The tangential character of luminous un- dulations implies a polarity which would tend to the formation of sthereal spheroids about stellar centres, and if those centres have an orbital motion which ig combined with an axial rotation of their respective orbs, the con- tinual changes of relative position would favor a transfer of energy from star to star which, with reflection and refraction (Note 286), might main-" tain perpetual tendencies to an equilibrium which would never be reached. It seems not unlikely that the thermal relations of every star to its sethe-— real spheroid may be so adjusted that there is a transfer of heat from the «ther to the nucleus during one-haif of each rotation, and from ‘he nucleus to the «ther during the other half. Such a hypothesis lends a meaning to the fundamental kinetic identity (Note 280), which is in thorough accordance with Laplace’s belief in the stability of the solar sys tem. 300. Actions and Reactions in Moving Radiations. Prof. H. T. Eddy (Sci. Proc. of the Ohio Mech. Inst., July, 1832) de-— scribes a method for the distribution of heat in a way which conflicts with the second law of thermodynamics. He objects to the so-called ax- ioms of Clausius and Thomson, on the ground of their implicit assumption a 437 | [Chase. 1882,] that heat is radiated with infinite velocity, inasmuch as they take no ac- count of the states of relative rest or motion of the bodies between which the heat passes. He cites the statement of Kirchhoff, “that the second law cannot be (at present) proved ; but it, so fur, has never been found in disagreement with experience;’’ the view of Maxwell and Boltzmann ( Wien Sitzb., Bande, 1xxvi, Ixxviii), that it should be regarded ‘‘as merely the mean result flowing from the laws of probability ;”’ Rankine’s paper (Phil., Mag, [4] iv, 358), in which ‘‘he has supposed it possible to reflect radia-° tions in such a way as to give the universe such differences of temperature as to insure it a new lease of life ;’’ and the paper of Clausius (Mech. Theory of Heat, chap. xii), showing the general impossibility of such a reconcen- tration as Rankine supposed, when the radiating bodies are at rest ; never- theless, no such impossibility may finally appear in case of the actual uni- verse which is a system of moving bodies.’’. He closes his discussion with the following sentences: ‘‘The point to which I would emphatically direct attention is, that since radiations are known to be moving in space, apart from ponderable bodies, and subject to reflections, it is possible so to deal with them as tocompletely alter their destination, and successfully inter- fere with all results flowing from Prevost’s law of exchanges. It also seems to me that the exactness of the second law of thermodynamics depends, as - far as radiations are concerned, upon that of this law of exchanges.’”’ In addition to the reflections to which moving radiations are subject, I have also called attention to their retraction. (Note 286), and I have endeavored to co-ordinate all my discussions, through the fundamental identity (Note 280), which implies an equivalent motion of reactions for every radiant action. Moreover, the moving particles in each radiant undulation are all subject to cosmical attractions and perturbations, which have not yet been considered in investigations of the seeming dissipation of energy. 301. Thrust of Polar Icc- Caps. Geologists who believe that thenorthern hemisphere was once largely cov- ered with ice, have usually attributed the thrust to the simple gravitating pressure of the accumulation at the pole. The position of many of the bould- ers, and of the supposed terminal moraines, seems to indicate a greater pro- pelling force than many investigators are willing to attribute to the com- bined action of polar centripetal and equatorial centrifugal energy. Per- haps the unwillingness may be removed by making proper allowance for “the flow of solids,’’? an element of the problem which does not seem to have received any consideration beyond the simple plasticity and regela- tion which have been studied in connection with the movements of ordi- nary glaciers. The photodynamic hypothesis of an all-pervading and universally active zther involves the requirement of perpetual tendencies toward equilibrium, and the evidence of such tendencies which is given by Earth’s oblateness (Notes 246, 249) furnishes an adequate explanation for many of the glacial phenomena which have hitherto seemed paradoxi- cal. Bessel’s estimate of the oblateness is slightly less than would result he, Pg nt A iy a tyes 7 se art 2 he: ry bs y “ 1f; Je fie men me * ah a 1 ob 5 ie ea cass wei i ' iy tee A ae : 5 ? 1K a ak Di. 5 ey : aan) 49) ' ‘ Cope.] 438 } [Mtaga9, | ‘from Tresca’s ‘flow ;’’ Clarke’s two estimates accord more tealtyrwitiste theoretical value ; while Listing’s, which is the latest of all, gives an agree- ment which is virtually exact. If we start from his estimate (1: 288.4), 4m? y¢ 288.4 : ‘Veil 10 .baaionay we get g = eleh1y 7 = 32.086 ft. Ganot’s value is 32.088,ft, It can hardly be believed that such a coincidence is merely accidental. If itis indicative, as I have supposed, of inter-molecular xthereal action, it has an important bearing on tidal equilibrium, and it shows that Earth's shape and rigidity were not fixed in any past age, but are at all times adjusted to the requirements of internal elasticity and external attractions. Any arguments which may be adduced in favor of such an adjustment may bé urged, @ fortiori, in support of the flow and thrust of a plastic material like ice. The velocity of terrestrial rotation, in the mean latitude which Prof. H. C. Lewis has indicated for the terminal moraine in Pennsylvania, is more than 1000 feet per second. The centrifugal force consequent upon such a velocity, together with tlie thrust of an ice-cap which extended to the pole, must greatly facilitate glacial flow. The equilibrating forces would work upon local glaciers, in the same = as upon a Boney ice-cap. The Classification of the Ungulate Mammalia. By EF. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 19, 1882.) In the present essay the osseous system is chiefly considered, and of this, the structure of the feet more than of any other part of the skeleton. The ungulata are here understood to be the hoofed placental Mammalia with enamel covered teeth, as distinguished from the unguiculate or clawed, and the mutilate or flipper limbed, and the edentate or enamelless, groups. The exact circumscription and definition is not here attempted, though probably the brain furnishes an additional basis of it in the absence of the crucial, parietoéccipital, calcarine fissures, ete. Suffice it to say that it ison the whole a rather homogeneous body of mammalia, especially distin- guished as to its economy by the absence of forms accustomed to an insectivorous and carnivorous diet, and: embracing the great majority of the herbivorous types of the world. The internal relations of this vast division are readily devaciaaad) we reference to the characters of the teeth and feet, as well as other less im- portant points. I have always insisted that the-place of first importance should be given to the feet, and the discovery of various extinct types has justified this view. The predominant significance of this part of the skeleton was first appreciated Wy Owen, who defined the orders Perisso- ‘ Mlety, gltite Ey otal ed eho te ame OW 1882.Ji"* 439 [Cope. -dactylaand Artiodactyla... Professor Gill* has also used these characters to a large extent, but without giving them the exclusive weight that appears to me to belong to them. Other authors have either passed them by unnoticed, or have correlated them or subordinated them to other charac- acters in a way which has left the question of true affinity and therefore of phylogeny, in a very unsatisfactory condition. Much light having been thrown on these points by recent discoveries in paleontology, the results, as they appear to me, are here given, NTN AN a ey Brie. 1 Fia. 1.—Left anterior foot of Elephas africanus (from De Blainville). Carpus.—it is well known that in the Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla, the bones of the two rows. of the carpus alternate with each other; that the lunar for instance rests on the unciform, and to a varying degree on the magnum, and that the scaphoides rests on the magnum and to some degree on the trapezoides and trapezium. It is also known that in the Proboscidea, another state of affairs exists ; 7. e., that the bones of the two rows do not alternate, but that the scaphoides, lunar and cuneiform, rest directly on the trapezium and trapezoides, the magnum, and the unciform respectively. The preceding characters are sometimes included in the definitions of the respective orders. Further than this they have not been used in a systematic sense. ‘Professor Gill says of the carpus of the Tiina, be carpal bones in two interlocking rows ; cuneiform extending inwards (and articulating with magnum) ; * * * unciform and lunar separated by the interposition of the cuneiform and magnum.’’ Professor Flowery gives a figure which justi- fies these statements, but neither the one nor the other agree with my * Arrangement of the families of Mammals prepared for the Smithsonian Institution. Miscellaneous Collections 230. Nov., 1872, + Ostevlogy of the Mammalia, p. 266; fig. 92. . , ore ae ‘y ne ‘ 5 Me » eatin “ ™ hgh X . - ' ah +s » Peay ae % (rane Shalt eP Ack. >: a Use SP oe of ee ae = oF 7 } ; a f Cope] 440 lg specimens. In the manus of a Hyrax capensis (from Verrcaux, Paris), I find the following condition of the carpus. The bones of the two series are articulated consecutively, and not alternateiy ; they do not interlock, but inasmuch as the magnum is a little narrower than the lunar, the latter is just in contact (anteriorly) with! the trapezoides (centrale) on the one side, and the unciform on the other. My specimen agrees with Cuvier’s figure of Hyrax capensis in all respects. It is probable that Professor Fie. 2. Ere."3; Fic. 2.—Left anterior foot of Phenacodus primevus, one-third natural size (original). . Fic. 3.—Right anterior foot of Hyraz capensis ; (from Cuvier). Se. scapuloid bone; Z. lunar; ew. cuneiform ; p. pisiform ; tz. trapezium: td. trapezoides ; m. magnum; uv. unciform. . Flower has figured some other species under that name, which besides its peculiarities, is of smaller size than the H. capensis (see Fig. 3). > In April, 1875* I described the manus of Coryphodon (Bathmodon), showing that the lunar was supported below by the magnum and by parts _ of the unciform. This carpus has the characters of that of Hyraz capensis, : with the last named articulation more extensive. This was the first description of the carpus of the Amblypoda. In February, 1876,+ Pro- fessor Marsh described the carpus of Uintatheriwm (Dinoceras), and ‘asserted that the bones ‘‘form interlocking series.” He however states that ‘“‘the magnum is supported by the lunar and not at all. by the scaphoid,’’ a state of things which does not belong to the inter- locking carpus. The trapezoides does not join the lunar, but the unci- form does so, as in Coryphodon. Professor Marsh’s figure as to the articu- * Systematic Catalogue of the vertebrata of the Eocene of New Mexico, p. 24 (U.S. Geol. Survey W. of 100th Mer.). ; + Amer. Journal Sci. Arts. xi, p. 167; pl. vi., fig. 2. ; 1882.) 441 ; [Cope. > _ lations of the magnum does not agree with his description, as it makes that bone articulate with the scaphoid. The second description is how- ever correct, and the carpus is identical with thatof Coryphodon. (Fig. 4.) In the American Naturalist, June, 1882,* I have shown that the carpus of the Condylarthra is essentially like that of the Hyracoidea. (Fig. 2.) Fre. 5. Fic. 4—Manus of Ooryphodon (original). The cuneiform is imperfect. . Fie. 5.—Left posterior toot of Llephas indicus; (from Cuvier). ca. caleaneum ; a. astragalus; n. navicular; cu. cuboid; ec. ectocuneiform; mc. mesocunei- form. Tarsus.—In the tarsus of the Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla it is well understood that the cuboid extends inwards so as to articulate with the astragalus, giving the latter a double distal facet. It is also well known _ that the astragalus of the Proboscidea has but a single distal articulation, that with the navicular. It is, however, true that the cuboid is extended inwards, but that it articulates with the distal extremity of the navicular instead of that of the astragalus. It was shown by Cuvier that the astragalus of the Hyracoidea articulates with the navicular only, and that the cuboid is not extended inwards so as to overlap the latter. In 1873 Marsh} stated that the astragalus of the Amblypoda articulates with both cuboid and nayvicu- lar. Finally I discovered in 1881,+ that the astragalus of the Condylarthra articulates with the navicular only and that the cuboid articulates with * Page 522. ‘ + American Journal Science and Art, January, 1873. ¢ American Naturalist, 1881, p. 1017. Pie: eee posterior foot of Phenacodus primevus, one-third natural size (original). ; : Fie, 7.—Right posterior foot of Hyraxr capensis (from Cuvier). Ca. calca- neum; a, astrugalus; n. navicular; cu. cuboid; ecc. ectocuneiform ; mc. meso- cuneiform ; enc. entocuneiform. ‘ Fic. 8,—Posterior foot of Coryphodon (original). 1882) 445 [Cope. tion, which are typified in the Condylarthra, the Proloscidea, the Ambly- poda and the Artiodactyla respectively. (Figs. 5-9.) “s ’ ' i ‘ ' ' ‘ pe ipiescars aan eemee ee = ey, i Fie. 9. . ire. 10. Fie. 9.—Hind foot of Poébrotherium labiatum (original). Fic. 10.—Fore leg and foot of Hyracotherium venticolum (original). Orders.—From the preceding considerations we derive the following definitions of the primary divisions of the Ungulata, which should be called orders. In the first place I find the diversity in the structure of the carpus to be greater in the relations of the magnum and scaphoides, than in the relations between the unciform and the lunar. In other words the trapezoides and magnum are more variable in their proportions than is the unciform. This is directly due to the fact that the reduction of the inner two digits is more usual than the reduction of the external two. I there- fore view the relations of these bones as more characteristic. In the tarsus the really variable bone is the cuboid. It is by its extension inwards PROC. AMER. PHILOS, soc. xx. 112. 3p. PRINTED NOVEMBER 17, 1882. Cope.] 444 ; ‘ (May 19, that the additional facet of the astragalus is produced. Its relations will therefore be considered rather than those of the astragalus in framing the following definitions : Order I. Scaphoides supported by trapezoides and not by magnum, which supports lunar. Cuboid articulating proximally with calcaneum 0 arte ea y aba vane Samana ee Me DB ee’ o a.midinleie a's hee Taxeopoda. Order II. Scaphoides supported by trapezoides, and not by magnum, which supports lunar. Cuboid extended inwards and articulating with the distal face of the navicular. ................ seen ase oven ok POD08HIGER. Order III. Scaphoides supported by trapezoides and*not by magnum, which with unciform, supports the lunar. Cuboid extended inwards and articulating with astragalus. ............ ecpra-are wei ste sie have «ASO ee Order TY. Scaphoides supported by magnum, which with the unciform also supports the lunar. Cuboid extended inwards so as to articulate with the astragalus...... ¢'c o%s win \ghie Ue F Oh Meh Mol Aetnia, sintaln abalpte yatta vin Te aie Diplarthra. The sub-orders are defined as follows : I. TAXEOPODA. There are two, perhaps three sub-orders of the Taxeopoda; the Hyracoidea, the Condylarthra, and perhaps the Zozodontia.* The Toxodontia are how- ever not sufficiently known for final reference. The sub-orders are de- fined as follows : - A postglenoid process ; no fibular facet of caleaneum, but an interlocking articulation between fibula and astragalus ; ungual phalanges trun- RO ince a ialels, c¥usisctatere sieieda asa ee ites Risser «8: e110 \eie\vieiaid)». 0.» LLU ROCOMMEM. A postglenoid process ; no fibular facets on either calcaneum or astragalus ; a third trochanter of the femur ; ungual phalanges acuminate........ Condylarthra. There are a good many other subordinate characters which distinguish the Condylarthra, which will be given in my forthcoming volume iv of the Hayden Survey, on the Tertiary Vertebrata of Western America. > II. PROBOSCIDEA. There may be two sub-orders of this order, the Proboscidea and the Toxodontia. I do not know the Carpus of Torodon, but if it does not differ more from that of the elephants than the tarsus does; it is not entitled to subordinal distinction from the Proboscidea. The sub-order of Pro- boscidea is defined as follows : A fibular articulation of the caleaneum ; no postglenoid process ; no third trochanter of femur...........-; Nae coh ss eee soe seccve st PODOBCIGEK. *See my remarks on Toxodon, Proceedings Amer, Philosoph. Society, 1881, p. 402. + The considerable resemblance between the dentition of Tozodon and Hyrax must not be overlooked. 1882.] 445 [Cope. Ill. AMBLYPODA. The sub-orders of this order, as I pointed out in 1873, are two, defined as follows: Superior incisor teeth ; no ali-sphenoid canal ; a third trochanter of femur ; Pantodonta. No superior incisors, nor ali-sphenoid canal, nor third trochanter of femur ; Dinoceratu. The difference between the Proboscidea and the Amblypoda consists chiefly in that the navicular of the latter is shortened externally so as to permit the cuboid to articulate with the astragalus. The cuboid has the same form in both. The peculiar character of the navicular gives the astragalus a different form. IVY. DIPLARTHRA. This order is called by some authors the Ungulata, but that name 1s also used in the larger sense in which it is here employed. This appears to be its legitimate application, as the name should, if possible, be used for hoofed Mammalia in general, as its meaning implies. The two well known sub- orders are the following : Astragalus truncate distally ; number of toes odd, the median one the NAT ES trate ecietineie Sule Maree Dhak Scie iare wee aeee Ges woe oss Perissodaciyla. Astragalus with a distal pide eniane number of toes even, the median two IRIE CS te yeierars) aches seis otro Sos at is laVelnyerbiealeid eaieee suerte nile este Artiodactyla. Phylogeny.—The serial arrangement of the bones of the carpus and tarsus seen in the Tazxeopoda, is probably the primitive one, and we may expect numerous accessions to that order on further exploration of the early Eocene epochs. The modification seen in the more modern orders of Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla, may be regarded as a rotation to the inner side, of the bones of the second carpal row, on those of the first. This rotation is probably nearly coincident with the loss of the pollex, as it throws the weight one digit outwards, that is on the third and fourth digits, rendering the first functionally useless to a foot constructed solely for sustaining a weight in motion. The alternation of the two rows of carpals clearly gives greater strength to the foot than their serial arrange- ment, and this may probably account for the survival of the type possess- ing it, and the extinction ot nearly all the species of the type which does not possess it. Here is applied again the principle first observed by Kowalevsky in the proximal metapodial articulations. This author shows that the types in which the metapodials articulate with two carpal or tarsal bones, have survived, while those in which the articulation is made with a single carpal or tarsal have become extinct. The double articulation is, of course, mechanically the more secure against dislocation or fracture. As regards the inner part of the manus I know of no genus which presents a type of carpus intermediate between that of the Zaxeopoda and PRN OSS Sa ee ' ~~: . Nr er teh ae at ‘ ‘ we ee pias ee yy ; ‘ 0 CO ae 5 sia - @ ? a ¥ q 446 f. Cope.] [May 19, | Amblypoda on the one hand, and the Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla on the other. Such will however probably be discovered. But the earliest Perissodactyla, as for instance Hyracotherium, Hyrachyus and Triplopus, possess the carpus of the later forms, Rhinocerus and Tapirus. The order Amblypoda occupies an interesting position between the two groups, for while it has the carpus of the primitive type, it has the tarsus of the later orders. The bones of the tarsus alternate, thus showing a decided advance on the Taxeopoda. This order is then less primitive than the latter, although in the form of its’ “astragalus it no doubt retains some primitive peculiarities which none of the known Taxeopoda possess. I refer to the absence of trochlea, a character which will yet be discovered in the Taaeo- poda, I have no doubt. The Yaxeopoda approach remarkably near the Bunotheria, and the unguiculate and ungulate orders are brought into the closest approxima- tion in these representatives. In fact I know of nothing to distinguish the Condylarthra from the Mesodonta, but the ungulate and unguiculate characters of the two divisions. Inthe Creodonta this distinction is reduced to very small proportions, since the claws of Mesonyx are almost hoofs. Some of the genera of the Periptychide present resemblances to the Creodonia in their dentition also. The facts already adduced throw much light on the pnualae of the Ungulate Mammalia. The entire series has not yet been discovered, but we can with great probability supply the missing links. In 1874 I pointed* out the existence of a yet undiscovered type of Ungulata, which was an- cestral to the Amblypoda, Proboscidea, Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla, in- dicating it by a star only in a genealogical table. This form was discoy- ered in 1881, seven years later, in the Condylarthra. It was not until later} that I assumed that the Diplarthra are descendants of the Amblypoda, although not of either of the known orders, but of a theoretical division , With bunodont teeth.t That such a group has existed is rendered ex- tremely probable in view of the existence of the bunodont Probosciderand Condylarthra. That the Taaeopoda was the ancestor of this hypothetical group as well as of the Proboscidea, is extremely probable. But here again neither of the sub-orders of this group represent exactly.the ances- tors of the known Amblypoda, which have an especially primitive form of the astragalus not found in the former. In the absence of an ankle- joint, the Amblypoda are more primitive than any other division of the Ungulata, and their ancestors are not likely to have been more specialized than they. It is probable that a third sub-order of Zaaeopoda has existed which had no trochlea of the astragalus, which I call provisionally by the name of Platyarthra. * Homologies and Origin of Teeth, ete., Journal Academy Nat, Selenae, Philada., 1874, p. 20. t Report U.S. Geol. Survey W. of 100th Mer., p. 282, 1877. } This hypothetical sub-order is called in the appended pene: Amblypoda Hyodonta. 1882.] . 447 [Cope. The preceding paragraphs were written in May of the present year. On my return home, September ist, after an absence of three months, I find that various parts of the skeleton of Periptychus* have reached my mu- seum. On examination, I find that the astragalus of that genus fulfils the anticipation above expressed. Jt 7s without trochica, and nearly resembles that of Hlephas. As it agrees nearly, with that of Phenacodus in other re- spects I only separate it as a family from the Phenacodontide. One other type remains to be discovered which shall connect the Periptychide and the hypothetical Hyodonta, and that is a Taxeopod without a head to the astragalus,—unless, indeed, the ‘‘ Hyodonta’’ should prove to have such a head. I think the latter the less probable hypothesis, and hence retain the term Platyarthra for the hypothetical Taxeopod without trochlea or head of the astragalus. These relations may be rendered clearer by the following diagram : TAXEOPODA. * Condylarthra. Platyarthra.++ vas Hyracoidea. i PROBOSCIDEA. AMBLYPODA. / \ Hyodonta.t+ Pantodonta, | Dinocerata. DIPLARTHRA. oe Perissodacty la. Artiodactyla. Third contribution to the History of the Vertebrata of the Permian formation of Texas. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, September 15, 1882.) Since the publication of my second contribution to this subject, t I have described four additional species. These are, in Bulletin of the U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories ;§ Pantylus cordatus and Dimetrodon semiradicatus ; in the American Naturalist,|| Hryops reticulatus and Za- * See American Naturalist, October, 1882. ++ Hypothetical. {Paleontological Bulletin, No. 32, Proceedings American Philosophical So- ciety, 1880; the plates, 1881. 2 Vol. vi, 1881, p. 79. 1881, p. 1020. ~~. = 29 wr eee ee ~ r | oo Fee 7] : - a, % > . hes a eee Se b esis Le, nai ne *) ary .2Fy 18 Fel ott fie Pe 5 Cope.] 448 oe - (Sept. 15, vas trachys apicalis. The last two were not included in my catalogue of the Permian Vertebrata published previously* in the same year. The present paper adds some important points to this remarkable fauna, and explains the hitherto obscure relations of several genera, DIADECTID&. The pelvis and sacrum of a species of this group are preserved in my collection, and they indicate further peculiarities of this group, The sacrum consists of two vertebre only, and is thoroughly united with the pelvis by its transverse processes. The latter are decurved on the inner side of the iliac bones, and the sutures which distinguish them from the latter and from each other, are not serrate. The inferior arch is robust, but very narrow anteroposteriorly. The acetabulum is entire in every respect, so that it is probable that both pubis and ischium are united undistinguishably in the arch. The pubis is perforated by the usual in- terhal femoral foramen. The posterior edge is grooved, and it might be suspected that this marks the articulation of an ischium. The anterior edge is however grooved in the same way, so that the appearance is rather the position of muscular insertion. The spines of the sacral vertebra are distinct, and have the usual form seen in Diadectes. The two sacral vertebre and the absence of obturator foramen, are characters of the suborder Pelycosauria in which the latter differs from the Dicynodontia. Iam still inclined to question whether the extraordi- nary characters of the cranio-vertebral articulation I have described, jus- tify the separation of the Diadectidw as a third sub-order of the Theromor- pha, which I have called the Cotylosauria,} or whether they are not due to the loss of a loosely articulated basioccipital bone. EDAPHOSAURUS Cope, genus novum. Apparently allied to Puntylus. Temporal fosse not overroofed; surfaces of cranial] bones not sculptured. Mandibular and maxillary teeth subequal. Posterior half of the mandibular ramus expanded inwards and supporting numerous closely arranged teeth. Pterygoid, or perhaps an internal ex- pansion of the malar bones, supporting a dense body of teeth, correspond- ing to those of the lower jaw. Teeth subconical. The single species of this genus in my possession shows the following characters of systematic importance. An arch extends from the parietal plane posteriorly and downwards. to the- external base of the quadrate. The specimen is not yet in a condition to show how much of this is parie- tal, and how much squamosal or opisthotic. The proximal half of the posterior part of this arch is a distinct element, perhaps a transverse pro- cess of the supraéccipital. A distinct element connects the basioccipital on each side with the quadrate. The articular extremity of the latter has * American Naturalist Feb., 1881. + American Nuturulist, 1880, p. 304, ie 1882,] 449 [Cope. a deep anteroposterior concave emargination. There is a flat bone ex- tending from it anteriorly which is apparently pterygoid rather than quadratojugal. The tooth bearing portion terminates opposite the middle of the basisphenoid. The occipital condyle is undivided, and the basisphenoid presents the usual two divaricating protuberances to the basioccipital. EDAPHOSAURUS POGONIAS, sp. nov. Represented by the followsng portions of a skull; basis cranii with por- tion posterior to the middle of the parietal bone ; left maxillary with dental plate, left mandibular ramus entire ; various flat bones undetermined. There is also a body which may be the atlas with its arch somewhat dislo- cated. These pieces are in part covered with a thin layer of the red deposit of the Permian bed in which they occur. The facial plate of the 0s mazillare is subvertical, so that the orbit is lateral. The latter is rather small. The malar bone is narrow, and is continuous with the dentigerous bone of the palate. The latter has a thickened posterior edge, which commences below the anterior part of the orbit, and extends posteriorly to the middle of the basisphenoid. Thence the border turns forwards. Its anterior edge is below the anterior border of the orbit, and the general form is a-longitudinal oval. The maxillary teeth are somewhat weathered, and obscured by a thin layer of matrix. The posterior ones are compressed-conic; the premaxillaries are four in -number on one side, and are more nearly conic, and have incurved apices. The median premaxillary suture is, however, not clearly defined, so that the number of premaxillaries remains uncertain. The centre of the prob- able nostril measures one-third the distance from the premaxillary border to the anterior edge of the orbit. Tere are eight rows of (?) pterygoid teeth at the posterior fourth of the series. The teeth are subequal and obtuse, increasing a little anteriorly. The mandibular ramus is robust, and the external face slopes inwardly and downwards. The external border rises a little above a few of the posterior teeth, but it is injured at the posterior of the coronoid process, so that its existence cannot be ascertained. The border then descends and turns inwards to the articulation, which is condyloid at its internal extrem- ity. The inferior edge of the anterior part of the ramus becomes a median ridge below the condyloid region, and terminates in a short, compressed angular process. The symphysis is not coéssified, and is convex down- wards and forwards. The inferior part is subhorizontal, and forms the edge of a transverse plate which is separated from the vertical part of the ramus by a deep groove. The inner vertical face of the ramus is strongly convex, as is the corresponding edge of the symphyseal suture. The apices of the teeth are worn, but they were probably conic, the posterior gradually smaller and more obtuse. The interior face of packed teeth begins at,the posterior two-fifths of the external series, and expands in- A Sp eee (eel Seat oe x | | Ea Pe ee : ee eT ae 4 7 any i a We? ea Hy ae ee 5 ati) ya Cope.] 450 [Sept.15, wards posteriorly. It contains six longitudinal rows opposite the ante- penultimate dentary tooth. All the bony surfaces are smooth. Measurements. : M. Length of mandibular ramus (straight).......... Fic: .162 mS symphysis of do. (straight) ..........e0-e0s -038 “i external dental series... oon see estes ntcee OTT Width of ramus at dental pavement........ Sick ore . .040 “ skull at ends of OO. quadrata ...... seer as 138 = extremity of O. quadratum. 3.000 sens sree 024. x Occipital CoNGyvIS $25 swale aals wa eine oe i .018 Length of superior dental pavement .......... Sate Seis oe OUR Width of basisphenoid posteriorly...........+.+- Area) The supposed axis vertebra is longer than wide, and the centrum is deeply excavated posteriorly. Anteriorly it appears to have lost a piece— the centrum of the atlas, which, while fitting it closely, was not co-ossified with it. There is a flat horizontal convex ala in the place of a diapophysis, and an obtuse median hypapophysial angle. The neural spine is compressed, except posteriorly, where it is transversely expanded, terminating above in a short obtusely accuminate apex. From this apex an obtuse rib passes down the median line, and disappears above the neural arch, where the spine is somewhat narrower. The postzygapophyses are well developed and look downward. Measurements of axis. M. Length of centrum below.......2...-c0e. ewiarbnehicneta tree Width, including diapophyses..... Rtas ae eels ae" s re tate .035 Elevation of spine from postzygapophysis............- .038 Width of do., posteriorly... - swans Pi Wass hee 25 020 Remarks.—This interesting form is probably allied to Pantylus, which I have hitherto regarded asa Batrachian. The two genera may be placed in a special family of the Pelycosauria, to be called the Hdaphosauride. This family will be distinguished from the Clepsydropide by the presence of more than one series of teeth on parts of the jaws. It is possible that Helodectes must be placed in it. ; ECTOCYNODON Cope. Paleontological Bulletin No. 29, p. 508. A-species now before me resembles in generic characters the type of this genus, H. ordinatus. That species was described as having the canine tooth near the middle of the maxillary bone, while in the present one it is near the anterior part of it, asin some other genera. In the typical species, as in the species to be described, the cranial bones are sculptured, and the temporal fossse are overroofed. ,The sculptured surface as well as the canine teeth distinguish Hetocynodon from Pariotichus Cope and Proco- lophon Owen, which genera are otherwise related. 1882.] 451 [Cope. EcTOCYNODON AGUTI, sp. nov. This reptile is much larger than the Pariotichus brachyops, and the ante- rior part of the cranium has a different form. The general shape of the head is'much like that of a rodent mammal of the genus Dasyprocta. It israther wide at the temporal regions, flat above, and narrowed and com- pressed anterior to the orbits. The muzzle is narrowed and obtuse, and _the nostrils are terminal, and are lateral and a little anterior in direction. The maxillary alveolar edge is nearly straight, but the premaxillary edge, beginning below the posterior border of the nares, descends forward at an angle of 45°. Viewed from the front, the premaxillary border is a festoon, strongly convex downwards, and below the anterior part of the nostril. The suture separating the premaxillaries is distinct. The orbits are of moderate size, as in an aguti, and invade the superior frontal plane in a slight degree. The frontoparietal fontanelle is rather large. The mandible is robust, and presents a short angle. It closes up behind the premaxillary lobate edge. Its teeth are concealed in the specimen. The maxillary teeth increase rapidly in size forwards. The premaxillaries commence smaller next the maxillaries, and increase in size to the first, which is a little larger than the anterior maxillary. The crowns are weathered away. The sculpture on the maxillary and malar bones con- sists of closely placed shallow fossze. On the posterior part of the frontals there are strong ridges radiating posteriorly, and situated close together. Measurements. M. Length of skull to end of angle of lower jaw.......... .090 a ig frontoparietal fontanelle ........ Prorat fs ye OUDIt; WO Ves. opiclacssisls:« $08 os one seo .026— Ge ramus mandibuli........... ««, Bae «wy aie eisiete .082 Wepihbror skull Af OVDIb wre acy - c:-fo5a jade pests oe e.cele wie see BORE “ pee ey Were eee Pisiein hiciaaaie.5 settle bares .019 WIGS NOE SKI) DORETIOL LY 5 oun .5, 005543 na(sin sales ein'eine> ai ‘. .068 ie Se Weim CON GELS mina nines Seo 6,6 ain bys\6, 6,4 510 .017 ss ‘© between external nares...........0.-0 .0105 Diameter of first premaxillary tooth........... Seas .003 ee second maxillary tooth......csecececesees 003 Six fosse of the malar bone............. stare ieee ee .005 Seven grooves of the frontal bone........... ASodacans 005 This species is much larger than the Ectocynodon ordinatus Cope, and the canine tooth has a more anterior position. Discovered by W. F. Cummins. DIPLOCAULUS Cope. Paleontological Bulletin No. 26, p. 187, Nov. 2ist, 1877. Proceedings American Philos. Society, 1877, p. 187. This genus was characterized by me at the places cited, as follows: ** Vertebral centra elongate, contracted medially, and perforated by the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 112. 3—E, PRINTED NOVEMBER 17, 1882. ~, Ye te ey . a id $ ¢ ‘ an ey A eo ‘tb eats xr Pare { é FG ss Ae 5, Cope.] 452 (Sept. 15, foramen chorde dorsalis, coédssified with the neural arch, and supporting transverse procésses, Two rib articulations, one below the other, gen- erally both at the extremities of processes, but the inferior sometimes sessile. No neural spine nor diapophysis ; the zygapophysis normal and well developed.’’ This diagnosis was derived from the vertebre of a single species from the Clepsydrops shale of Ilinois, the D. salamandroides, and since that description was written, no additional specimens have come under my ob- servation. In the Catalogue of the Vertebrata of the Permian I placed the genus as the type of a family, the Diplocaulida, among the Pelycosauria. Iam now, however, through the energy of Mr. W. F. Cummins, in pos- session of specimens of a number of individuals of a second species of Diplocaulus, found by him in the Permian beds of Texas. From them I derive that the genus and family must be referred to the Stegocephalous Batra¢hia. It is, however, exceptional among these in the fauna of which it is a member, in not belonging either to the Rhachitomi* or to the Em- bolomera, since the vertebral centra are not segmented, nor are the inter- centra present in any form. Under these definitions it must be referred to the suborder which includes Oéstocephalus, Ceraterpeton, etc., for which I have adopted Dawson’s name Microsauria. The division includes genera with simple amphiccelous vertebral centra, and teeth without inflections of the dentine. The following characters must be added to Diplocaulus : Vertebr with a more or less perfect zygosphen articulation ; centra shorter in the anterior than in the median part of the column; axis and atlas solidly united by a long zygosphen, which is not roofed over by the zygantrum. Neural arch continued as a short tube into the foramen magnum. Atlas unsegmented, and, like the axis, without free hypapophy- sis. Cervical vertebre not distinguished from dorsals, and with two- headed ribs. ; Orbit separated from the maxillary bone by the union of the lachrymal and malar. Either the malar, or more probably the quadratojugal, extends much posterior to the quadrate bone. It is bounded above by the squa- mosal, which extends anteriorly to the distinct postfrontal, thus covering over the temporal fossa. Posteriorly it extends into a long, free process, like the operculum of Polyodon ossified. This horn does not appear to consist of the epiotic as appears to be the case in Ceraterpteon. The quadrate bone is extended very obliquely forwards and its extremity is divided into an hourglass-shaped condyle. In other words the condyle consists of two cones with apices continuous. The internal cone is the smaller, and its base is overlapped from before by a flat bone, probably the pterygoid. The cotyli of the mandible correspond. Mandible without angle ; symphysis short. The teeth are of about equal size, and are rather slender and with conical apex. Their surface is not inflected at any point. The superior series is * American Naturalist, 1882, p. 334. 1882.] | 453 [Cope, double, forming two lines between which the mandibular teeth close. This superior series stands near the external edge of the vomer, palatine and pterygoid bones successively. I have not been able to find any larger teeth in the jaws in this genus. Some fragments mingled with those here described, display such teeth, but I think they pertain to a species of another genus. I know nothing of the limbs of this genus. DIPLOCAULUS MAGNICORNIS, sp. Nov. The species is indicated by fragments of a number of crania, and por- tions of several vertebral columns. These were collected at two different localities by Mr. W. F. Cummins. The skull is very peculiar in the great extent of the parts posterior to the orbits as compared with the portion anterior to them. The posterior border not being complete, the proportions cannot be exactly given, but the part anterior to the orbits is two-thirds the length of the part extend- ing from their posterior border to near the base of the lateral horn, and one-fifth the distance fromthe orbit to the extremity of the horn. The part of the border of the orbit preserved indicates that the latter is of fair size. It is separated from the maxillary border by at least its own diame- ter. The external nares are peculiarly situated. They are nearer the orbit than the end of the muzzle, and are close to the maxillary border, being separated from the mouth by a narrow strip of bone only. They are round, open nearly laterally, and are removed from the edge of the orbits by the diameter of the latter. _ The malar or quadratojugal bone is protuberant at the canthus oris and projects laterally beyond the mandible at its posterior part. It also pro- jects beyond the extremity of the quadrate bone. This border is continued as that of the external base of the horn, but the portion which belongs to this element is soon distinguished from the superior element (squamosual) which composes the horn, by a groove. This groove is decurved, and bounds the apex of the element, which is a decurved, low tuberosity. The horn is produced backwards in a horizontal plane, forming a long flat triangle which contracts gradually with straight sides. The apex is nar- rowed, obtuse, and a little incurved. Near and at the extremity the horn is flat above and convex below. The mardibular quadrate cotylus consists of two fosse, which together form an approximate figure #, of which the internal fossa is the smaller, and opens internally. The external one is nearly transverse. The supe- rior border of the ramus posteriorly is straight. The greater part of the superior aspect is occupied by a huge fossa which opens upwards. It is uncertain whether the horns meet at an entering angle on the middle line posterioriy or not, but the width of the base of the horn indi- cates that such is the case. The extremity of the muzzle is depressed, and is broadly rounded. The external surface of the skull is sculptured in the form of fossz so distributed that the narrow ridges separating them do not form straight = . =" —* $= 0 = as . by * ee al 1-4) ? ¥ a Bae "Vie oe" ‘ A bel ‘ * mAS mee Giles bat 4 cS ? 4 BY cise > area ‘ ' at 5) & Ve & § Zn Shae Oe apt , «~ Cope.] 454 [Sept. 15, lines, except in a few places on the superior face of the horn. This sculp- ture is strongly'impressed, and is of medium coarseness. It extends on the inferior face of the quadratojugal (?) posterior to the quadrate, and on the inferior side of the horn at the edges. It is most extended below from the interior edge, and for the terminal inch of the horn, is as well marked as on the superior face. Elsewhere the sculpture of the inferior side passes into puncte before disappearing. A groove marks the superior boundary of the maxillary bone, which divides when it reaches the superior surface. One branch descends behind the nostril, the other passes transversely across the lachrymal bone and shallows out before reaching the middle line of the muzzle. The mandible is even rougher than the superior sur- faces, and has a longitudinal groove below the dental line, to near the symphysis, where it runs out on the alveolar edge. The internal and ex- ternal sides of the mandible posteriorly, are smooth. On the malar and other facial bones there are four fosse in 9 or 10 mm. ; The atlas is peculiarly flattened above, the neural arch being a tube, without neural spine. Its anterior tubular prolongation is not long, and is deeply notched below. The condyloid fossse are widely spread trans- versely and nearly flat, except that their surface is carried forwards on the neural tube. They are well separated below. There isa strong hypa- pophysial keel, which diminishes and runs out anteriorly. There are pre- zy gapophysial facets, but the postzygapophyses exist. Their superior edge is however carried posteriorly to form the sides of the huge embracing zygantrum. These side processes, which I will call zygantropophyses, extend as far posteriorly as above the posterior end of the centrum of the axis, embracing almost the whole of the neural arch. There is another short median superior process, which notches the extremity of the zygos- phen. The side of the atlas between the postzygapophysis and the con- dyloid facet is wrinkled, and the inferior face finely punctate. In the axis, the hypopophysis is a large ridge with a horizontal truncate edge. The costal heads of the diapophysis are not split to the base of the latter and the superior is the more robust (extremities broken off). Cen- trum concave posteriorly, and on each side of hypopophysis with reticulate surface. A short zygantropophysis ; zygantrum not large. Exposed summit of zygosphen (nearly equal neural arch) without neural spine. In both the axis and other cervical vertebra, the superior diapophysis is con- nected with the zygapophyses fore and aft, in accord with the shortness of the centra. In the more posterior vertebrie they become separated on account of the increasing length of the centrum. The third vertebra is like the axis, except in having a keel-shaped neural spine, and a short obtuse zygosphen continued from its base ante- riorly. With increasing length of centrum the diapophysis becomes longer, and the hypopophysial ridge becomes wider, and coéxtensive with the in- ferior face of the centrum. It is separated by an angle from the sides in the longer vertebrx ; in those of intermediate length, the inferior face is 1882,] 455 ' [Cope. convex. All of them retain the delicate lines and puncte of the inferior surface. The neural spine on the more elongate vertebre is a rather ele- vated keel, with horizontal superior edge. Its posterior extremity forms a wedge-like zygosphen. The zygantrum is a deep V-shaped cavity, open- ing posteriorly and not roofed over at any point unless for a small part of its fundus. The zygapophyses are well spread, and have horizontal faces. Each of the columns of the diapophysis sends a ridge forwards, which en- close a groove between them. ; Measurements of vertebrae. M. Length of atlas below......... Seta cheit a vince ool a eipue ses 015 of ¢ at zygantropophyses............... .. .029 Expanse ‘‘ SEGUE GIGIO HBCOLA: lela cisoresia.c «" 4¢ 4 og FS Ogcmanteres si «te Gia tine ee -008 sid of large mandibular tooth near symphysis...... .016 Diameter of base of crown of do...........+00+. pinkie ee Elevation of neural arch.2..........++s.s0- Pe ricy Mah 037 i ies vertical...... wee ce er eerereeee ae ia ea aie ae tem net! pine} yp fanisopteit Width neurapophysis anteroposteriorly........--+2++++« -010 From Mr. W. F. Cummins’ collections. I had thought at one time that this species might be referable to the ge- nus Leptophractus of the Coal Measures. No trace of the vertebre of the Rhachitomous order has yet been found in that formation in this country, nor have any of the Coal Measure genera of Batrachia yet been found in ve iy ie ae ade val 1882.] | ‘ 461 [Cope. the Permian of the United States.* It is not improbable that such occur- rence of genera may yet be substantiated, but the identification of an or- der hitherto unknown in a formation, on uncertain characters, is not a safe proceeding. The vertebre of Leptophractus although not certainly known, are supposed to be of the Labyrinthodont type. The teeth are much more - compressed and trenchant than in the present species, nor do there appear to be any long ones near the symphysis mandibuli. I consider the ques- tion of reference to Leptophractus to be still an open one. The family Hryopida, though abundant in individuals, is not represented by many species. They are presumably as follows : Anisodexis imbricarius Cope. Acheloma cumminsi Cope. Eryops reticulatus Cope. Fryops ferricolus Cope (Parioxys olim). Eryops megacephalus Cope. Actinodon frossardi Gaudry. Zatrachys serratus Cope. Zatrachys apicalis Cope. But the occipital condyles are unknown in Acheloma and Zatrachys. I may add here that through the courtesy of Messrs. Scott and Osborne, I have seen, in the Museum of Princeton College, vertebra of some species of the Rhachitomi from Saarbriicken, along with Archegosaurus, with entire centra, from the same locality. Synopsis of the Vertebrata of the Puerco Eocene epoch. By H. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 20, 1882.) REPTILIA. CROCODILIA. Crocodilus sp. Crocodilus sp. Crocodilus sp. TESTUDINATA, Plastomenus ? communis Cope. * Dermatemys sp. Compsemys sp. Himys sp. * Peplorhina arctata Cope, from the Illinois Permian, is not a Peplorhina, but a Theromorph Saurian, Aa VRE age y, bens Nh tages Fe ee Ma EE aoa uke BS ft - ‘ 4 , ine ‘ ¥ phe) } * , , , red Se A IIT Va ser a ) . -.. Frei 4 : Ag ’ ai ri b eee Cope.] 462 [Oct.20, CHORISTODERA. Champsosaurus australis Cope, American Naturalist, 1881, p. 690. Champsosaurus puercensis Cope, Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1881, p. 195. _ Ohampsosaurus saponensis Cope, Loc. cit. 1881, p. 196. MAMMALIA. MARSUPIALIA. Ptilodus mediaevus Cope, American Naturalist, 1881, p. 922. Ptilodus trovessartianus Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p. 686. Catopsalis foliatus Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p.:416. Catopsalis pollua Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p. 685. Polymastodon tadensis Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p. 684. BUNOTHERIA, TAENIODONTA. . Hemiganus vultuosus Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p. 831. Teniolabis scalper Cope, loc. cit. 1882, p. 604. TILLODONTA. Psittacotherium multifragum Cope, 1. c., 1882 p. 156. Psittacotherium aspasie Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philosophical Society, 1882, p. 192, (1882). MESODONTA. Pelycodus pelvidens Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1881, (1882) p. 151. Lipodectes pelvidens Cope, American Naturalist. 1881, p. 1019. ~ Hyopsodus acolytus Cope, sp. nov. This the least species of the genus, is also the oldest, being derived from the Puerco horizon. Parts of two individuals furnish the characters of the inferior and superior true molars, and the fourth superior premolars. The species differs from those hitherto described in other characters than the minute size. One of these is the absence of posterior interior cusp, the heels of the first and second true inferior molars being bounded by a ridge only at this point, as in most of the species of Pelycodus. The last inferior molar is not smaller than the second, nor longer. The anterior cusps of all the molars are robust, so that on the first and second true molJars they are separated by a shallow notchonly. There isa rudiment of the anterior inner cusp on the first true molar but none on the second and third. The posterior external is obtuse and has a triangular section on all the molars ; a crest is continued from the heel of the third molar on the inner side of the crown half way to the anterior inner cusp. 1882,] | 463 [Cope. The Microsyops spierianus differs from this species in its smaller size (true molars .008) and in the presence of posterior internal cusps of the true molars. The Hyopsodus acolytus was found by Mr. D. Baldwin, in New Mexico, CREODONTA. Sarcothraustes antiquus Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1881 (1882), p. 193. Dissacus carnifex Cope, Amer. Natst. Oct. 1882 (Sept.), p. 834. Dissacus navajovius Cope, loc. cit. 1881, p. 1019. Mesonyx navajovius Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Society, 1881, p. 484. Tritsodon quivirensis Cope Amer. Nat. 1881, p. 667. Tritsodon heilprinianus Cope, Proceeds. Amer, Philos. Soc. 1881 (1882), p. 193. Deltatherium fundaminis Cope, Amer. Nat. 1881, p. 237 ; 1881, p. 337. Tripodectes penetrans, loc. cit. 1881, p. 1019. Deltatherium baldwini Cope. This Creodont is known only from a portion of a right mandibular ramus which supports the two last premolars, and the first true molar with part of the second. It differs from the D. fundaminis in its materially smaller size, and in the forms of the teeth. The first true molar is a more robust tooth, and the basis of the posterior or heel crest is more rounded, and less angulate. The anterior inner cusp projects less anteriorly. The fourth premolar has a distinct anterior basal lobe which is wanting in the D. fundaminis. Its heel is short and wide, and the posterior face of the principal cusp is flat, and there is a rudiment of an internal tubercle on its side. The second premolar is elevated and acute, has no anterior basal lobe, and has a very short wide heel, enamel slightly roughened. The animal was rather aged. Measurements. M. heneth of P-m Handi and M. Ti. .)o.30052 i.e cess elon .0160 Wiictes Nea anteroposterior. ........ Mlaleielevsleeteerety URS entice, eae sisversjeiaa Gietelaie aie Sale cid dietete cients 0040 Elevation of crown of P-m. iii............ HERR Mee ie .0052 Depthjofmandibletat Mi Wie.5 sis < Hates .0180 From the Puerco beds of N. W. New Mexico. Dedicated to Mr. D. Baldwin, the discoverer of the Mammalian Fauna of the Puerco beds, which is one of the most important in the history of American Palzon- tology. Deltatherium interruptum Cope. The smallest species of Deltatherium is, like the D. baldwint, only repre- sented by the anterior part of a right mandibular ramus, which supports the last premolar and the first true molar, with the bases of the other pre- Cope.] 464 (Oct. 20, molars and part of the canine. The canine is small and the first premolar in accordance with the generic character, is wanting. The second pre- molar is two-rooted. The fourth has an elevated principal cusp, and a narrow heel on the inner side of the posterior base ; anterior base injured. The first true molar has very little sectorial character, and resembles the corresponding tooth of a Pelycodus. It differs entirely from that of the D. fundaminis in the possession of a well marked posterior internal cusp, which is connected by a ridge with the large internal lateral cusp of the heel. The anterior cusps of opposite sides sub-equal. A weak external basal cingulum on the anterior half of the crown; no internal cingulum. Enamel of the tooth wrinkled. Measurements. F M. Length of premolar series:.. «300 ssc0cnsesnrenesvanese s0L40 Mlevation of. P-m:- iV; .< 5.0 weno SS sMea Ac * Bric yl Ee P . f anteroposterior, 's;.iis saecs cbas ceie ae ge One Dinmetersof Mi { ee vere ee. See timer tba hs Depth of ramps at, P-m. issc.cc ayes 2 "WHTQAONER si. feinsiae caste NA IONE Re Tore tera tac SOP TAGHE ST a1ai3 Ors Sioa e ie ae 2 PMS ECHIVOTAD eine S56 oles Sp ate Rua CONG e tA His SDE: STC dies ante, oh 0 Mesodonta........ See setter Re RR RO Saye wis seeds ein ie Wwe 2 Lemuroidea...... Seas Sy ARS See ere tl Ses Gres on bal Es wertnctae oh 0 Creodonta...... SR ED athe acetates Jeb rs stares Boy ae 9 Pee RNI Die Sere tho be ccs tain wD taping gates eae fay ies as Cewheetre os 25 ELVYACOIDGRs wissen aide «ovals BOT MAD tr OSC io COD RAs O SO COCO AOD OL 0 Condylarthra.......... ST AERO se opalrs ce SP. Rela etane 25 PPG DOSCIDES Se. Fos /cleisletels =. cere ee Pa He te oy WORE = Sibte es hehe (Eh S. 0 Ammiblypoda:. do... Dee Stele ae ese w easiest Negicls fea) h ot i aldieatned 0 Mar ATA ios oS alae ote ecas Se ehga tee cutsiaeers pie ale sia pitted locelels Statests Poeines 0 Carnivora. tsercis jelocaieles iene Be ORO ERCICTS COI IRCETERE FOR cE ee eee 0 ACEO DIE TC ANG RARPIE COIS BCD Cc ocicn DATE CE EeiEPIInD er Eis coc CORT: =7a00 Total sey A COCO RIA ROOD Ee bere he 40 The above list renders the peculiar facies of this fauna at once apparent. It is the only Tertiary fauna known, from which Perissodactyla are ab- sent. The absence of Amblypoda, one of the oldest types, is unexpected. The lack of Rodentia is remarkable, and perhaps only due to failure of discovery ; but if yet to be found, they must be very rare, and their absence is consistent with their small representation in the Wasatch beds above them. In the large number of Bunotheria, the Puerco agrees with. the later Eocenes, but the order is here characterized by the small number of Mesodonta ; and the Lemuroidea are apparently absent. An especial feature of the fauna is the presence of five undoubted species of Mar- supialia of the family Plagiaulacidae, which has its origin in the Jurassic Paar ia Be pitied a 4 ae F ct AR eee ‘ ay bee) < as ? ir a, ; Cope.] 470 fOct.20, period, and extended through the Cretaceous. It is conned in the latter period in the Laramie by the genus Meniscoéssus.* In the absence of a number of the existing orders of placental Mammalia, the Puerco agrees with other Eocene faunz. In the absence of all of the - placental orders with convoluted cerebral hemispheres, this fauna is more primitive than any other Eocene fauna. The absence of all ungulata ex- cepting Taxeopoda, which have the most primitive foot structure, is further evidence of its primitive character. This is further increased by the pres- ence of the Marsupialia above mentioned. The general result is a mix- ture of Marsupial, and semi-marsupial forms, with half lemurs, and a great expansion of the Hyracoid type. In more detail, the genera of Bunotheria may be compared with those of the period immediately following ; viz.: The Wasatch. One genus only of the Creodonta is common to the two anenie (Didymictis). Five of the species remaining are much like oppossums, and may be Marsupialia. The two genera (Deltatherium and Triisodon) to which they belong, do not _ occur in the Wasatch. The remaining two genera, (three species) are peculiar to the Puerco, but represent a family (Mesonychide) which occurs throughout our Eocenes. The two species of Mesodonta belong to | genera of the Wasatch, one of them at least extending into the Bridger. The genera of Tzeniodonta and Tillodonta are distinct from those of any . of the later Eocenes, so faras known. Supplement on a new Meniscotherium from the Wasatch epoch. Meniscotherium tapiacitis, sp. nov. The species now to be described is a good deal smaller than MZ. chamense, and, @ fortiori, than the M. terrerubre. It is known to me from the nearly entire ramiof a single mandible. These support the last five molars of one side or the other, and alveoli of two others and of the canine tooth. Two characters besides the small size, are observable in this jaw. First, the symphysis has not the shallow convex inferior outline in transverse section ; but is on the contrary angular, having subvertical sides separated from a convex middle by a rounded angle. The symphysis is thus deeper than in MZ. terrerubre. Second, the crown of the third inferior molar tooth has partly the form of that of the second of the MU. terrerubre. It is antero- posteriorly short, and has a short heel and no anterior basal lobe ; the sec- tion of the principal lobe is lenticular, and profile subconic. In JL terre- rubre this tooth is elongate, with well developed heel and anterior lobe. The alveolus of the canine is relatively larger than that of the M. terrwru- bre. The coronoid process does not rise so close to the last molar tooth, nor so steeply, as in the latter species. The posterior recurvature of the internal extremity of the anterior limb of the posterior V of the true mo- lars is but little marked. * American Naturalist, 1882, p 830, Sept, 28th. 1882.] 471 [Cope. Measurements. M. Length of true molars on base............ Se aan ean see 2010 Diameters M. ii BRUCKOPORLETION oie iso's foe ce wi oe.d velete ises006 wine eorer { PLANSVETSE. <'s «/. .).%0' atcha aipiota tare ana sees .0044 Hinrhaters Mein { anteroposterior ........... «ca veo ete OOUD j transverse. .... Beeb ete Saas seis 8 720088 Dinnveteds Pane wi { vertical..... etter tees ic octeem 0045 ANTETOPOSteTIO“....02sececescves . .004 Width of inferior face of symphysis. ...... eeeia ee -008 Depth ramus at P-m. iii.......... Gram citiaaieisisre kits suet - .009 a ay Sl As Sb ES ee cS ei otkia ocala sitlts ate(sigeawhed tet This species was obtained by Mr. D. Baldwin from beds of probably lowest Wasatch age, in New Mexico. ' On the Systematic Relations of the Carnivora Fissipedia. By H. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 20, 1882.) This order embraces the clawed mammalia with transverse glenoid cav- ity of the squamosal bone, confluent scaphoid and lunar bones of the carpus, and well developed cerebral hemispheres. It is well distinguished from all others at present known, but such definition is likely to be invali- dated by future discovery. Some of the Insectivora possess a united scapholunar bone, but the reduction of the cerebral hemispheres of such forms distinguishes them. The presence of the crucial fissure of the hemi- spheres is present under various modifications in all Carnivora, while the parietooccipita! and calcarine fissures are absent. The many types of existing carnivora fall into natural groups, which are of the grade termed family in zodlogy. But the distinction of these from each other is not easily accompanished, nor is it easy to express their rela- lations in a satisfactory manner. The primary suborders of pinnipedia and fissipedia are easily defined. Various characters have been considered in ascertaining the taxonomy of the more numerous fissiped division. The characters of the teeth, especially the sectorials, are important, as is also the number of the digits. ‘Turner* has added important characters derived from the foramina at the base of the skull, and the otic bulla, which Flow- er} has extended. Garrodt has pointed out the significance of the number of convolutions of the middle and posterior part of the hemispheres. [I have added some characters derived from the foramina of the posterior and lateral walls of the skull.g Mr. Turner also defines the families by the form and relations of the paroccipital process. * Proceedings Zoological Soc., London, 1848, p. 63, + Loe, cit., 1869, p. 5. { Loe, cit., 1878, p, 377. § Proceedings Amer, Philosophical Society, 1880, p. Cope.] AT2 en (Oct. 20, In studying the extinct carnivora of the Tertiary period, it has be- come necessary to examine into the above definitions, in order to de- termine the affinities of the numerous genera which have been discov- ered. To take them up in order, I begin with the foramina at the base of the skull. The result of my study of these has been, that their importance was not overrated by Mr. Turner, and that the divisions of secondary rank indicated by them are well founded. Secondly, as to the form and’ structure of the auditory bulla. Although the degree and form of infla- tion are characteristic of various groups of Carnivora, they cannot be used in a systematic sense, because like all characters of proportion merely, there is no way of expressing them ina tangible form. For, if the forms in question pass into each other, the gradations are insensible, and not sensible, as is the case with an organ composed of distinct parts. The same objection does not apply so much to the arrangement of the septa of the bulla. The septum is absent in the Arctoidea of Flower (Urside of Turner), small in the Cynoidea (Flower, Canide Turner), and generally large in the #luroidea (Flower, Felide Turner). But here oc- curs the serious discrepancy, that in the Hyznide, otherwise so nearly allied to the Felidz, the septum of the bulla is wanting. Nevertheless, the serial arrangement of the order indicated by Flower, viz.: commence ing with the Arctoidea, following with the Cynoidea, and ending with the £luroidea, is generally sustained by the structure of the auditory bulla, and by the characters of the feet and dentition, as well as of the cranial foramina. Turner’s arrangement in the order, Urside, Felids and Cani- de, is not sustained by his own characters, and its only support is derived from Flower’s observations on the external or sylvian convolution of the hemisphere of the brain.* There are three simple longitudinal convolu- tions in the raccoons ; in the civets and cats the inferior convolution is fis- sured at the extremities, while in the dogs it is entirely divided, so that there are four longitudinal convolutions between the sylvian and median fissures. - An important set of characters hitherto overlooked, confirms Flower’s order. I refer to those derived from the turbinal bones. In the ursine and canine forms generally, the maxilloturbinal is largely developed, and excludes the two ethmoturbinals from the anterior nareal opening. In the Feline group, as arranged by Turner, the inferior ethmoturbinal is devel- oped at the expense of the maxilloturbinal, and occupies a part of the anterior nareal opening. These modifications are not, so far as my expe- rience has gone, subject to the exceptions seen in the development of the otic septa and molar teeth, while they coincide with their indications. The seals possess the character of the inferior group, or Urside, in a high degree. The characters derived from the paroccipital process are of limited ap- plication, as the study of the extinct forms shows. * Proceedings Zoological Society, London, 1869, p. 482. 1882.] 473 [Cope. I would then divide the fissiped carnivora into two tribes as follows : External nostril occupied by the complex maxilloturbinal bone ; ethmo- turbinals confined to the posterior part of the nasal fossa ; the inferior ethmoturbinal of reduced size........-sececeeessee ... HYPOMYCTERI. External nostril occupied by the inferior ethmoturbinal and the reduced WR AAUIOUUT DIAL ss wicueisie dat eece ape md nesm ae sles sis wninan EPIMYCTERI. While no doubt transitional forms will be discovered, the types at present known fall very distinctly into one or the other of these divisions. The characters are readily preceived on looking into the nares of well cleaned specimens. The Hypomycteri stand next to the Pinnipedia, since the maxilloturbinal bone has the same anterior development in that group. In searching for definitions of the families, it is necessary to be precise as to the definition of terms. The meaning of the word sectorial is in this connection important, sinee there are so many transitional forms be- tween the sectorial and tubercular tooth. A sectorial tooth then of the upper jaw, is one which has at least two external tubercles, which are the the homologues of the median and posterior lobes of the sectorial of the cat. By the flattening and emargination of their continuous edges, the sectorial blade is formed. One or two interior, and an anterior lobe, may or may not exist. In the genera of the Procyonida, except in Bassaris, the two external tubercles do not forma blade. The inferior sectorial tooth differs from the tubercular only in having an anterior lobe or cusp, which belongs primitively to the interior side. The inferior sectorial teeth with large heels, as in Viverride and Canide, ,I have called tubercular-secto- rials. The sectorial blade is formed by the union and emargination of the edges of the anterior and the principal external cusp. This blade is not well developed in the genus Cynogale and still less in the Procyonide and Urside. The families are then defined as follows. HYPOMYCTERI. I. No sectorial teeth in either jaw. SOT ST SANE Age ie apne Oe ae ee Pa ... Cercoleptide. II. Sectorial teeth in both jaws. a, Toes 5-5 f. No alisphenoid canal. Wrie molar4i its ios0s vss 3s ve PORT o rare. ds s/e'n oid om sled a sale F OLY ORME se OF Tories e's seta ds = aes POE Ds, Shel oh ded hel ee at Mustelida. ff. An alisphenoid canal. ‘Molars quadrate, 2........... Pa diett te Ss eae Apes ee Aeluride. MOlirs JOM PINGING, 6.9.00 cltaaecadt vc sass sou ctr ales aes ao --- Ursa. aa, Toes 5-4 or 4-4, , Sectorials well developed, an alisphenoid canal........... -+.++. Canide@. caret J 432 ae : ca Ay Oar te . 485 [White. beds along the Cheat river cafion through Chestnut Ridge and Laurel Hill. The sandstone in No. 7 gets quite massive at times, and this portion of the column makes a great bluff along either bank of the river, from which the descent to the stream is almost vertical in many places. As will be seen by comparing the sections, the interval between the Mountain limestone and the 10! impure limestone above, is in this section just double that in Sec. 3, showing that it is quite variable. The Mountain limestone, No. 12, juts out of the bluff in a great cliff at this point, and was once quarried for flux for the old Henry Clay furnace, situated near the head of Quarry run. No. 14 seems to be identical with the ‘‘Silicious limestone’’ of Steven- 1882,] ' son in Fayette and Westmoreland counties, and is here clearly a portion of No. X, since 10/ of Pocono or Vespertine sandstone comes above it. No. 16 is a massive, hard, gray sandstone, containing streaks of small _ quartz pebbles, and forming an immense cliff along the mountain side. About one-fourth mile above the last locality, another section taken on the same (east) bank of Cheat river reveals the following structure (See. 5): 1. Massive sandstone, and conglomerate, making lower hal€ of NOne& Derg won se he cacers sa ce 100’ Be AVONCESIEU«: « 5%)2 «a 6.6 ov be lowielate venta arene 0.0.x 50’, as 3. Sandstone, flaggy, and current-bedded....... 160/ = 5 2, eave, OL DECCEIB. icine a am ents wos aseere ea oi - 2 ar\ me yar Concesled and: red: shalet..acl-oass oe does se 40! ( 292! Oe TCMMOTEE, SIITLINIEG ator ok eh tota'e Beatin oad Sve sors = 1. Red shale, and concealed........ ben! Fae st es 37) & 8. Mountain limestone, visible........... Ls varererste 85/ S) Concesled terest ects se satrebee cok Sere eea aks 25/ LO, A OUEMPOIUS ITIERLO TIA seme een ties Ore. aie ers cies = iets 10’ . 11. Sandstone, massive, pebbly................. 100/ Be x 12. Concealed with flaggy sandstone at base..... 175! 13. Concealed to Cheat river (885’ A. T.)....... 150’ This section is but a repetition of the preceding one, with slight varia- tions, the Silicious limestone being here 10/ thick instead of 5’. It is a light gray rock, containing possibly 40-50 per cent. of lime, and would make as good pavement blocks as that from Westmoreland Co., so exten- sively used in Pittsburgh and vicinity. No. 4 is a curious layer of shale, iron ore, and sandstone pebbles ce- mented into a matrix of impure limestone. The rocks still rise quite rapidly south-eastward as we approach the Chestnut Ridge axis which crosses Cheat river about one mile and a quarter above the locality of Sec. 5. About one-half mile south-east from the locality of the last section, a small rivulet falls over the base of No. XII,,and completely exposes the [Oct. 20, white.) — 486 beds at the junction of No. XI, with the former, exhibiting the following in descending the steep east bluff of the river (Sec. 6) : 1. Cohglomerate, very massive..... Cn Ue eeR ea oe - 100’ Who Pee eae 2. Sandstone, coarse, few pebbles...........++. 50/ 180/ 3. Shales, sandy, buff, containing some I. O.... 20/ ; 4. Sandstone, massive, Dull. .c.cesscaee ses sse es 10/ J 5. Shales, yellow, and green, containing I. O... 30/ 6. Sandstone, greenish, somewhat flaggy........ 140/ 2s ". Layer of breccia, calcareous.......ceceeeeees a | 5S 8. Sandstone, green, flaggy..... Sieh aitipieninteta-s Se by vig 9. Layer of breccia, calcareous....... AScnieb dose 1’ ¢ 2987 10. Shales, red and green. .2 oi. sue cate eeee esse 45! | is 11. Dnceatone, WAP UNG. 0 cs ooo oa ec ee cme eee LO) 12. Red shales, and flaggy sandstone............ 45! | o 13. Mountain limestone. .......+-. alee tere ee? 1007: 14. ‘‘ Silicious limestone,’’ and Pocono sandstone. .125/ No. X 15. Concealed to level of Cheatriver...........- 450’) 575/ I was at first disposed to place the line between Nos. XII and XI at the base of No. 2 in the above section, but the massive yellowish sandstone, No. 4, so unlike anything usually found in No. XI, determined its base as the true dividing horizon between the two series. This is also confirmed by the thicknesses which result from placing it there, viz.: 180/ for XII and 293/ for XI shales, which are almost exactly the same as found for each in Sec. 2. The ‘‘ Silicious limestone’’ is 10/-15/ thick at this locality and as usual passes insensibly into the great sandstone deposit below. A few rods further south from the last locality another measurement of the beds gave this result (Sec. 7) : 1. Massive, pebbly sandstone................. 150/ ae XII. 2. Shales and shaly sandstone, buff............ 35/ 185/. 3. Shales, greenish, sandy 7 oys57 se se we is as 30/ 4. Sandstone, greenish-gray, flaggy........... 90/ Qs 5. Red and green. shales...........se00 -e0es aval Ae ee 6. Sandstone, greenish, massive at top, flaggy aad and shaly "below: swicctecie ee cee alee aie 65/ 4. Brecevated Wimestones si's\.s5 <0 es «ve stew oye olen 2/ 299! 8. Redand: Green seals sis 3/0 oi alem alsibla ele ate wpetat 25’ | 9. Blue sandy shales, and green flaggy SS... 25/) & 10. Limestone, impure, fossiliferous............. 10’ | o 11. Red and green shales and sandstone........ 40/ 12. Mountain Limestone........+ Sialo on lalotaiwteta cian as 1882.] 487 [White. (a.) Massive limestone in layers 1/—5/ thick, sparingly fossiliferous.................. 25/ (b). Shaly limestone and calcareous shales, very fossiliferous, especially rich in Productus, Spirifer, Athyris, Lophophyllum and Cri- ee MOLAAL COVWIMMNS. «.cce-seccs wecsavcees Fork el! (c). Limestone, gray, good, few fossils.......... 45/ (d). Shales and limestone.......... Srajestoraisnete ahs 35/ 13. ‘‘ Silicious limestone,’’ passing gradually into sandstone below...... srela weldola'euniofa cretalay2 30’ | No. X. 14, Sandstone, massive, pebbly, current- pedded, 605. WAM CHES. 04 sae sedi Garde where's cranes 100/ 15. Concealed to level of Cheat river........... 475! Here the ‘‘ Siliciows limestone’’ runs down into the underlying sand- stone to a depth of 30’ and finally fades into sandstone so imperceptibly that it is impossible to fix the line between the two. Just above this locality, about one-fourth mile, the Chestnut Ridge axis crosses Cheat river, four and a half miles from Ice’s Ferry. At the latter locality the top of No XII. is 300’ under the river, while here at the axis its top comes about 1300’ above Cheat river, or 1400’ higher than at Ice’s Ferry, since the stream falls nearly 100’ between the two points. Here, at the crest of the axis, the Great Conglomerate makes a broad and gentle arch, being almost horizontal for nearly a mile and a half. Its outcrop is traversed as usual by great intersecting fissures which are often 3/—4’ wide, and separate the stratum into immense blocks, some of which 50/ on a side, have toppled over into the steeply sloping edge of the cafion, and look from a distance as though a slight push would dislodge them into the great chasm beneath. The scenery along the crest of this great arch is the grandest and most picturesque to be found on this river, famous for its wildness for a dis- tance of nearly 200 miles. There are two points from which the out- look is especially fine, one of these known as Hanging Cliff View is on the east side of the river and about one mile above the locality of the last section. Here the river bends sharply westward and a long, narrow ledge of No. XII. sandstone, extends in a bold cliff far out into the main course of the cafion. From this elevated point, the eye takes in a radius of 25 to 30 miles for nearly three-quarters of the horizon ; to the south-east one looks up through the great gorges carved by the river out of Laurel Hill and Briery mountain, to the vicinity of Rowlesburg (80 miles dis- tant), where on a clear day, the white puffs of steam and smoke from the B. & O. R. R. engines may be distinctly seen, as the heavily laden trains wind up the steep slopes of the Alleghanies to Cranberry Summit, the lofty peaks of whose surrounding mountains loom proudly against the horizon ; to the west and north, the eye has an unobstructed view down the caiion and out over its fast receding walls, to the great plateau of the ae White.) : Coal Measures, which sculptured into endless forms of hill and dale stretches away to the limit of vision, in delightful contrast to the rugged mountains on the east. Add to this the wild dash of the river as it rushes along over its rocky bed, more than a thousand feet almost vertically below, disappearing in a silver thread far up and down the cafion, and we have a picture enchanting in the extreme. The other point is Brock’s View, named in honor of the late Dr. H. W. Brock, of the W. Va. University, who first discovered the beauties of this portion of the cafion. It is on the opposite side of the river from the Hanging Cliff, nearly one mile below, and is scarcely inferior in grandeur to the latter. In descending from Hanging Cliff View to the river the following struc- ture is visible (Sec. 8) : 1. Massive conglomerate ....... aia thes aise . 15! ) No. XII 2» Concealed to base Of SXL1-% isa wems dale necr . 2-110! J 185/ % Woncenled: ..icesus dos q 2. OONGCEBICU se op isieia tele [et rise let aires HORS OSE 22.200! 4, Sandstone, massive, top of XII.............. 50/2 No. XII. 5. Concesledsiizistaes senna eetoniee clove oyelagetace LUD! ; 225! 6. Red shale..... distetsleiaialolateiate eaigsies cles Gea ee ener 7. Sandstone, flaggy greenish......... sis sin sip ite 8. Sandstone, coarse, buff....... SRE toc) oe 9. Red shale with I. O. nodules. ........0+. ape Rela 10. Sandstone, green, flaggy, visible............, 50/ 11. Concealed to level of Cheat river..........«.. 320/ 2 leer — es 1882.] 493 (White. The Upper Freeport coal given in this section, has been opened along the road on the land of Mr. Graham, about one mile south-west from the top of the river bluff at No. 3, so that the interval of 200’ between the coal and No. XII, given by the barometer, should very probably be increased by 50/-75’, since the beds decline in that direction (S. W). As we pass on south-eastward up Cheat river from the Falls, the rocks still continue rising gently for about two miles, when they turn over in the broad arch of Laurel Hill, and descend, carrying the limestones and shales of No. XI below river level, and finally submerging No. XII itself at Albright, in the centre of the trough, where the western bluft of the river reveals the following section (14) of the Lower Coal measures: 1. Sandstone, somewhat massive, Mahoning?.......... 30/ PC OUMBCRICH Se xia ekeseiecipeva sate (o: 5.04 etain vinta ioiavicielses .0120 ae Bea OF Me CEN: { FTANSVerse (ab MIGGIC) =~ oisten ste sisiaieiainiaienls .0070 Peter OF PATel la TEAL NHAC iain ance a's 2/0's'no aie panelin tap aide * .0190 Diameters of tibia .07 M. from astragalus { SRL ETOp CE eres ame se ' (neha Cy: Che oernirsncic ac .0130 Anteroposterior width of astragalar face........ Sr err eran .0200 Pete NeHIP LA OF ASIEA PRIS conan ayn'a)e violaiap! sich ale mpi s?dw close dia! d pvid giaiee eet .0310 TENS OM PY OD VC oe a oie a oie ais enti eines ee .0210 Diameters of the trochlea ; WIEN AVOVR. 2 51d ony cutee’ baela'e clas at a see .0160 CLEVAMIOM) EXPEL A Lyi. sie a(a\el< ama wln.cteint letete -0130 Greatest width of astragalus below... .......0200-scecccovccncsecens 0225 Length anterior to internal crest of trochlea..........sscccess+-ees .0100 Mt aerdicrs Head of metataisal Tit { anteroposterior SOC OO ee ABS .0130 transverse (ir front): .2.<.ttv6.- «os .0110 Bearer head of metatarsal £Y PF ANCCTOPOBUETION. 6s vies ence ociee sirin « -0140 EEAMGWERHE: 22% sss . 0b see teres .0105 anteroposterior......... .0120 without tuberosity with lateral Diameters head M. V pe aims dint: pes transverseover alli\..2220.2 3 <2 eile ctala ni otn eta Hength Mt. V........% OES A St hee eee ane dais oraes! eisai ates .0460 Sar ET EU CUIGOUGY ICS cian apistc ies odie Bie wn aynis.siels w vie tes ives c's sain'e .0120 Width do. at condyle above.......... App ADooOnOAgBOOnIDAECGDAaGoT .0065 misoteN, TUT or TY at epicondyles.. sos. 5.2. ioe scccde cee sas. .0120 betes proxgmal cud of phalanve. sess y'sisisie'> s\o0's aes vic cae batenas .012 Bencih of smaller phalange (1st series) .2.... 2. .06..0.c2sccceesaasc .0230 Peaeruial’ dinmeter do- ae Din eaetapaNs clctaieis alec cicicteaiate tet -serererate .0070 UNMET o 6 ho on ota SO ObORCOnC ADUDe aalsicte) AeO Ungual phalange, vertical diameter of cotylus............ MS ort oe .0090 The specimen which has been partially described in the preceding pages as No. 2, has many pieces which are identical with those preserved in spec- imen No. 1. Among these may be mentioned the glenoid cavities of the squamosal bone. These display, besides the large postglenoid process, a well developed preglenoid ridge, as in Arctocyonide, Oxyenide and Meso- nychide. A large distal caudal vertebra of elongate form, indicates a long tail. An articular extremity of a flat bone is intermediate in form be- tween the proximal end of the marsupial bone of Didelphys and that of Sarcophilus. Its principal and transverse articular surface is transversely convex, as in the latter (S. ursinus), but the lesser articular face is sepa- rated from it by an even shorter concave interspace than in the opossum. It has almost exactiy the form of that of the latter animal. It is a short, flat cone, with two faces presenting on the same side, the one part of the concavity mentioned, the other flat and presenting away fromit. This Cope.] 55 4 [Jan. 5, piece has a slight resemblance to the very peculiar head of the fibula in the oppossum, but is not like that of Sarcophilus ursinus. I, however, think it much more probably the proximal extremity of a marsupial bone. A supposed cuneiform is subtransverse in position, and resembles in gen- eral those of Oryena and Esthonyx. It has the two large transverse prox- imal facets, the anterior one-quarter wider than the posterior. The distal facet (trapeziotrapezoidal) is simple. The navicular is much like that of Oxyena forcipata, but is more robust. Its external tuberosity is flattened anteroposteriorly, and is produced proximally. The three distal facets are well marked, the median a little wider than the external, while the internal is subround, convex, and sublateral in position. The entocunei- form isa flat bone, with cup-shaped facet for the navicular, and narrow facet for the first metatarsus. This facet is transverse transversely, and concave anteroposteriorly. It shows (1), that there is a pollex; (2), that it is probably small; and (3), that it was not opposable to the other digits, as is the case in the opossum. (4). It does not show whether the pollex has an unguis or not. Measurements No. 2. M. Transverse width condyle of mandible.......... Brees Anteroposterior width condyle of mandible (at middle) .0103 Diane paca ees marsupii { transverse. settereeees .0220 anteroposterior ....... .0068 iaieier cheers ¢ vertical.... sieerestenses BARA Sea LUE anteroposterior .............+- 0115 vertical in front... ...<.-0+---0. OUGp Diameters navicular {LATISVELSE:\ 0:65 a0sis.< te:nmn = pein e ate anteroposterior {middle) ..... .0110 vertical at middle........ .0100 Diameters ectocuneiform anteroposterior (middle) .. .0140 transverse distally........ -0060 Two other bones of specimen No. 2 I cannot positively determine. The first resembles somewhat the trapezium of Sarcephilus ursinus, and still more that of Didelphys. I will figure it, as a description without identifi- cation will be incomprehensible. The next bone is of very anomalous form. It may be the magnum, which is the only unrecognized bone of importance remaining, or it may bea large intermedium. It has no re- semblance to the magnum of any mammal known to me. It was evi- dently wedged between several bones, as it has eight articular facets. Two are on one side ; the largest (convex and oval) is on one edge ; three are on one end, and two, the least marked, are on the other flat side, oppo site to the first. Restorution. We can now read the nature of the primitive mammal Mioclenus ferox, in so far as the materials above discussed permit. It was a powerful flesh-eater, and probably an eater of other things than flesh. It had a long tail and well-developed limbs. It had five toes ali around, and the great or first toe was not opposable to the others, and may have been 1883.] 555 [Cope. rudimental.- The feet were plantigrade and the claws prehensile. The fore feet were well turned outwards. There were in all probability mar- supial bones, but whether there was a pouch or not cannot be deter- mined. These points, in connection with the absence of inflection of the angle of the lower jaw, render it probable that the nearest living ally of the Mioclenus ferox isthe Thylacynus cynocephalus of Tasmania. The pres- ence of a patella distinguishes it from Marsupials in general. Its den- tition, glenoid cavity of the skull and other characters, place it near the Arctocyonide. Should the forms included in that family be found to pos- sess marsupial bones, they must probably be removed from the Creodonta and placed in the Marsupialia. This species is about the size of a sheep. The bones are stated by Mr. Baldwin, who discovered it, to be derived from the red beds in the upper part of the Puerco series. MI0CLHZ NUS BUCCULENTUS, sp. NOV. A part of the right maxillary bone which supports three molars indi- cates this species. The molars are P-m iv, M.iand M.ii, This series is characterized by the remarkably small size of the fourth premolar, and large size of the second true molar. The first true molar is intermediate. The fourth premolar consists of an external cone and a much smaller in- ternal one. There is a weak posterior basal cingulum. The reduced size of the internal cone suggests the probability that the third premolar has no internal cusp,and that there may be but three premolars. In either case the species must be distinguished from Mioclenus. The first and second true molars have conic well separated external cusps, and a single pyramidal internal cusp. The intermediate tubercles are distinct. There is a posterior cingulum which terminates interiorly in a flat prominence. There is an anterior cingulum and a strong external one, which form a prominence at the anterior external angle of the crown. Enamel wrinkled, Measurements of Superior Molars. M. Lencth of bases of P-m.\ivMi-i andi: : 23 .2.200 9.498% .0180 Pinweter Pin. ay fAMELOPOSLELLON 212 s\-1-acre + «254 svasensuse, ULSD Di coanin yy f longtitudinal.........+.+...-- 0040 RIESOR eoreee {ETHERS (he ocis wie els > ese .0030 Long diameter of base of ‘“‘P-m. 1’’............ Deis ieee 20 mn a Es sig i) ee « .0017 Diameters P-m. iv { Vertical .---- +--+ eee e ete e eee ees 0055 VAanterOpOsieniora-cet cs. na> oss o> -0050 Diameters We { transverse. Poe eeee tener eetees sacs -0038 auteroposterior..... simp dicho nd! 's Sen e a Length of crown of MT] orsise» soos eas ee ae ae -0060 Depth of ramus at P-m. iii....... cea wi ule ot ietis Cerone .0090 4 = M. Sil, 00 sn 25 eeor eae pian diet? SORIND MIXODECTES CRASSIUSCULUS, sp. NOY. This mammal is represented by fragments of two mandibles from differ- ent individuals ; one less and the other more worn by mastication. The species differs from the last in its greater size, and in the relatively greater length of the last inferior molar. The length of the posterior four molars of the W. pungens equals that of the three true molars of the M. crassius- 1888.] 561 [Cope. culus; and the last true molar of the latter is half as long again as the pen- ultimate, while in WZ pungens it exceeds it but little. The best-preserved true molar is the second. Its most elevated cusps are the anterior and posterior inner, of which the anterior is subconic and more elevated. The anterior external cusp is crescentic in section, and sends crests to the supplementary, anterior, inner and the posterior anter- ior inner, both of which descend inwards. The posterior crest reaches the posterior base of the anterior inner cusp. The posterior external cusp is an elevated angle, sending crests forward and backwards. The former reaches the base of the anterior external cusp (not reaching the inner), while the latter passes round the posterior edge of the crown. As in JL pungens, it is convex posteriorly, and rises to the posterior internal cusp. In both species its appearance indicates that it performs an important masticatory function in connection with the su- perior molar. No cingula. Measurements. M. Length of bases of M. ii and iii; (No. 2)........ a aareste Olen ge TASS TOh ME) TT SCIN Ore) inya\ateatert’ sei © erase eens .0070 anteroposterior... .0056 transverse........ .0050 Depthvof pramustateyieener@Nion 1) ee ceerecciereieceecicine OLOD Diameters crown M. ii; (No. 1) ; PERIPTYCHUS CARINIDENS Cope. Additional specimens of this species demonstrate that the last inferior molar has a different form from that of the P. rhabdodon. While of the same length, it is narrower throughout, conformably with the smaller size of all the other molar teeth. PHENACODUS CALCEOLATUS, sp. NOv. This species is founded on fragments of the skull and limbs, with teeth, of a single individual. The teeth consist of two superior and four inferior molars of one side, and a smaller number of those of the opposite side. The teeth are of the size of those of the Phenacodus puercensis, and like that species, there is no median external cingular cusp of the superior molars. In these teeth the external basal cingulum is weak, but there is a strong anterior cingulum, distinct from any of the cusps. No internal cingulum. External cusps conical, well separated ; intermediate cusps rather large ; internal cusps rather large, close together, but deeply sepa- rated. The last superior molar is reduced in size. It has well developed anterior and posterior cingula, a weak external, and no internal cingula. The intermediate tubercles are rather large, and there is one large in- ternal tubercle. The heel of the last inferior molar is short, wide and rounded. The posterior tubercle is but little behind, opposite the posterior internal tu- bercle. The latter is separated from the anterior inner by a deep fissure, while the opposite side of the crown is occupied by a large median exter- Cope.] 562 [Jan. 5, 1883. nal cusp, which:has a semicircular section. The large anterior cusps are confluent on wearing. No anterior cingulum in the worn crown. The crowns of the first and second true molars of the specimen are rather worn. They show that the posterior median tubercle is very indistinct and prob- ably absent. The bases of the smaller inner cusps are round, and on wear- ing unite with the larger external cusps. Of the latter the posterior is the larger. Anterior cingulum rudimental or wanting. No lateral or pos- terior cingula. The principal peculiarity of the lower dentition of this species and the one from which it is named, is the form of the third or fourth (probably third) premolars, both of which are preserved. They have a compressed apex, which descends steeply to the anterior base, with- out basal or lateral tubercle. The base of the crown spr?ads out laterally behind, and is broadly rounded at the posterior margin, so as to resemble the toe of a wide and moccasined foot. It is depressed, the surface rising to the apex from a flat base. Measurements. M. § anteroposterior. . .0080 - iameters of second superior D ce superior molar ¢ transverse...... .0100 Diameters of last superior molar ; moeen Serge as yes Length of inferior true molars. ...... Dope tts Sitiara etchant ae Diameters of M. ii} transverse... sossisessesece 008 Diameters of M. ili{ transverse ¢-rss.scccclisisicl 20068 Diameters of the P-m. ili transverse.sssrsscccccceces 008 About the size of the P. puercensis. NOTE ON THE MAMMALIA OF THE PUERCO AND THE ORIGIN OF THE QUADRITUBERCULATE SUPERIOR MOLAR.—It is now apparent that the type of superior molar tooth which predominated during the Puerco epoch was triangular; that is, with two external, and one internal tubercles. Thus of forty-one species of Mammalia of which the superior molars are known, all but four have three tubercles of the crown, and of these thirty- eight triangular ones we may except those of three species of Periptychus, which have a small supplementary lobe on each side of the median prin- cipal inner tubercle. This fact is important as indicating the mode of development of the various types of superior molar teeth, on which we have not heretofore had clear light. In the first place, this type of molar exists to-day only in the insectivorous and carnivorous Marsupialia ; in the Insectivora, and the tubercular molars of such Carnivora as possess them (excepting the planti- grades). In the Ungulates the only traces of it are to be found in the molars of the Coryphodontide of the Wasatch, and Dinocerata of the ——————— Dec, 15, 1882.] 563 [Cope. ‘Bridger Eocenes. In later epochs it is chiefly seen only in the last supe- rior molar. It is also evident that the quadritubercular molar is derived from the tritubercular by the addition of a lobe of the inner part of a cingulum of the posterior base of the crown. ‘Transitional states are seen in some of the Periptychide (Anisonchus) and in the sectorials of the Procyonida. On the Brains of the Eocene Mammalia Phenacodus and Periptychus. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 15, 1882.) PHENACODUS PRIM AZVUS Cope. A cast of the cranial cavity gives the following as the general characters of the brain. The cerebal hemispheres are remarkably small, each one being less by one-quarter than the cerebellum. They are separated from the latter and from the large olfactory lobes by strong constrictions. The posterior one is occupied by a thick tentorium. In like manner a wide groove for a robust falx separates the hemispheres above, a notch repre- sents the sylvian fissure, and the lobus hippocampi is quite large. The vermis of the cerebellum is quite distinct, and the lateral lobes are large. They are impressed laterally by the petrous bones as in various ruminants. The anterior columns of the medulla are not visible. There are traces of the convolutions on their hemispheres. The brain displays the following more special features. The olfactory lobes are as wide as long, and they diverge, having two external sides. In section they are triangular, presenting an angle downwards. The hemispheres are depressed, and wider posteriorly. They are well sepa- rated from each other and from the cerebellum ; so much so that it is quite probable that the copora quadrigemina are exposed. Their outlines are however not distinguishable on the flat surface which connects the hemispheres posteriorly. No further indication of sylvian fissure can be seen in the cast beyond an entering angle defining the lobus hippocampi anteriorly. The latter is prominent externally, and less so downwards. There are distinct indications of convolutions. There are three on each side above the sylvian convolution, and a fourth extends from the sylvian upwards and posteriorly below the posterior part of the third or external convolution. The sulci separating the convolutions are very shallow. The internal and external convolutions unite anteriorly, passing round the extremity of the median convolution. The space between this gyrus and the base of the olfactory lobe is only three millimeters. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 3s. PRINTED MARCH 16, 18838. Cope.] 564 (Dee. 15, The cerebellum is larger than a single hemisphere. Its superior surface is somewhat flattened, and descends forwards ; the lateral boundary of this face is a projecting edge which rises behind to an angle of the vermis. The posterior face is shorter than the supcrior, and is vertical. It is sepa- rated by a space trom a very prominent lateral convolution, while the region of the flocculus is concave from the internal form of the ascending portion of the petrous bone. This concavity is open anteriorly. The base of the fifth pair of nerves is below its apex, and that of the sixth below the inferior extremity of the lateral convolution. The section of the medulla oblongata is a transverse oval; its inferior face and that of the pons varolii, smooth. A deep fossa just anterior to the bases of the optic nerves. Measurements of brain. M. Length from vermis to olfactory lobes inclusive..... oe, s000 ‘« of olfactory lobes from above........... oases 015 *« of hemispheres, from above.......... BS oe anor .030 ‘* ‘of cerebellum front above: 2...- cap asen'- cee a oe 024 Depth of olfactory lobe..... Hoenn eine aM ote 5 .010 4 ot hemisphere, sci ss oe ne Seiee ciiee ss noes Shots .023 ** of cerebellum and medulla..... oieilNe to ee .026 < ‘of miedallaiatiwermis, 52622650, 24 eee s steams 015 Width of olfactory lobes at middle...........-.-seee. . .030 <" (of Hemispheres in aronti.c. om ssh e ee aeee eens 044 ee e DOWIEG SS ..c enema eee .044 ‘© ‘of cerebell ami se wat.w oeieiseie eet ee aces . .036 4) medulla at iVeTMists cas ovis etic cee e eee a eee wee OTO PERIPTYCHUS RHABDODON Cope. I have obtained a cast of the top and sides of the cerebral hemispheres, and the proximal portion of the olfactory lobes, froma skull of a Periptychus in which the teeth are preserved, and prove the species to be the P. rhab- dodon. The olfactory lobes are enormous, and the hemispheres small and very flat. The mesencephalon is entirely exposed. The cerebral hemispheres are very flat, and are only differentiated from the olfactory lobes, by a moderate contraction and depression, which forms the peduncle of the latter. Only the proximal part of the olfactory lobes is preserved, but this expands so as to be only a little narrower than the hemispheres. The peduncle has a ridge on the median line, and a shallow fossa on each side of it. The lateral outlines of the hemispheres diverge, and the widest part is posterior. There is no indication of sylvian fissure. The transverse sec- tion of the hemispheres would be a flat arch, but for the presence of a longitudinal oval protuberance on each of them, which do not quite touch the median line, and which have definite boundaries. If their limits determine the size of the cerebral hemispheres, then the latter are wider 1882.] ' 565 [Cope. than long, but they probably pass gradually into the mesencephalon be- hind them. These bodies remind one of the corpora oliveformia, and may represent the superior or median frontal convolutions. They are probably, however, not to be homologized with any convolutions, repre- senting rather the cerebral vault of the lateral ventricle. Posterior to them the flat surface descends gently without indication of copora quadri- gemina or other irregularity, and at a distance about equal to the length of the oval bodies, it begins to rise gently. The cranium is broken here, and no cast of the cerebellum was obtained. I may remark that the cranium from which this cast is taken is not crushed, and that it consists of parts of the parietal and squamosal bones only. The latter remain as far as the incurvature to the pterygoid pro- cesses in front of the glenoid cavity. Measurements of brain. M, Length from posterior rise to base of olfactory lobes.... .037 Length of oval bodies of hemispheres..............0+. .018 Width of proximal part of olfactory lobes. ............ -027 Width of olfactory peduncles............ ine seis aGnatern via 021 Length from olfactory lobes to oval bodies of hemis- DETER ee aie1e- ahaa cteralaie Se veteTe Maeva iol sie corsiaiel pislstene/sherelcisvexere's .005 Diameter of hemispheres at posterior part of oval bodies. .038 Depth from sagittal crest to olfactory lobes...... epee 024 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE I. Casts of the brain case of Phenacodus primevus Cope, natural size. Bop oe Lateral view. Fig. 2. Superior view. Fig. 3. Anterior view. Fig. 4. Posterior view. PuatTE II. Fig. 1. Brain of Phenacodus primevus, inferior view. Fig. 2. Cast of brain case of Periptychus rhabdodon, superior view. Fig. 3. Cast of brain case of Periptychus rhabdodon, lateral view. Chase.] 566 (Jan. 19, Photodynamic Notes, VII. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 19, 1883.) 302. Combined Cometary Harmonies. In Note 295, I showed that the primitive phyllotactic wave-tendencies in the speetrum of Comet Wells, were modified by linear oscillations, and also by two seemingly independent harmonic progressions. One of the arithmetical progressions which formed the harmonic divisors had a miss- ing term, 1 + bd, for which Huggins observed no corresponding line. Upon further examination, I find that the completion of the harmony, by insert- ing the provisional wave length, #2, == 2+ (1+ 0b) = 4583.4, furnishes a phyllotactic bond between the two observed harmonic progressions. For 4583.2 = 7 + 4 (f-y), and /, represents a projectile locus of rotary oscilla- tion between 7 and i Moreover, the locus of the center of rotary oscilla- tion, (9-~) = 50.8, helps to determine phyllotactically the value of a, since } (a—9) = 50.625. 303. Telephonic Analogy. The telephone shows the influence of harmonic oscillations in successive media of different elasticity, and it may perhaps furnish suggestions which will prove useful in investigating the persistence of solar energy. The atmospheric sound-waves strike the diaphragm, exciting metallic sound- waves ; these, in the mechanical telephone, are transmitted through the wire to the receiving diaphragm, where they excite new atmospheric sound-waves, which awaken audible sound-waves in the tympanum of the listener. In the electric telephone, the metallic sound-waves modulate the electric waves, which are forwarded with much greater speed than the ordinary metallic waves, affecting the air in the receiver and the ear of the hearer in the same way as in the mechanical telephone. In a communication to the American Philosophical Society, March 21, 1873 (Proc., xiii, 149-54), I pointed out harmonies of light and sound, which, with the identity of Note 280, account for these successive transformations. Berthelot’s ex- plosive waves, (Notes 276, 278) must similarly produce luminous and electrical waves in Sun’s atmosphere, and thus contribute towards the maintenance of solar radiant energy. 304. Amount of Solar Thermal Radiation. A. Ritter, (Wied. Annalen, 1882, No. 10), estimates the solar radiation at 14,000 calories per square metre per second. This is equivalent to 3976100 foot-pounds per square foot. If the Sun were surrounded with an atmosphere like our own, but of superficial density proportional to the gravitating pressure, the pressure would be about 420 pounds per square foot. The radiation, therefore, would be sufficient to maintain a constant circulation of the entire atmosphere, at the rate of 9467 feet per second, which is but little more than half as great as the explosive velocity of 1883.) 567 [Chase. H,O (Note 298), about 1,56 times the molecular velocity of hydrogen, and about 4 of the equatorial velocity of Sun’s rotation. All of these relations are of an order of magnitude which tends to confirm the belief that solar radiation and gravitating circulation represent equal actions and reactions, and that dissociation and recombination within Sun’s photosphere may maintain luminous, thermal, and actinic ethereal oscillations. 305. Cometary Fugues. The spectral harmonies in Comet Wells (Notes 295, 302), as well as the planetary harmonies on which I based some of my successful predictions, (Notes 33, 133, 261, etc.), are of the nature of fugues, or harmonies which follow each other at certain intervals which are determined by rhythmic laws. The principle of the fugues being susceptible of indefinite exten- sion in two directions, it is not strange that even the stars should bear Witness to it (Notes 24, 46, 85, 111-5, 130-2, 154-5, 168, 262). Among the intra-modular positions which have verified my anticipations, two (Note 32) are known to be cometary; two represent the places of brilliant bodies which were seen by Watson and Swift, during the total solar eclipse of 1868, but which, having been seen by no subsequent observer, may also have been cometary; two were deduced from a comparison of planet-like shadows crossing Sun’s surface, and one from sun-spots of various forms; which have a harmonic period; seven indicate periods which are in strict , harmonic accordance with motions of our stellar system’s chief centres, of nucleation (Sun), of condensation (Earth), and of nebulosity (Jupiter). All the indications seem somewhat likely to be cometary, rather than planetary, and thus confirmatory of Herschel’s theory of nebular ‘‘sub- sidence.’’ As the statements of these confirmations of cosmical harmonic motion are scattered among various papers, I collect them here, in order to show, at a glance, the character of the various accordances. Harmonic. Observed. Authority. Notes. 296.52 285.2 Forbes 82, 261 94.38 96.7 Forbes 82 27 .267 De la Rue, 8. and L. 33 .207 .209 Kirkwood oe 185 .180 Gaillot os .167 .164 Gaillot and Mouchez Se BCs 7/ .163 Stewart 133 141 140 Earth’s day and year 33 121 123 Von Oppolzer eS .1065 .1069 Solar rotation, v = ee Ae .0199 .0195 Earth’s day at .0109 0109 Jupiter’s day ie .0076 0074 Solar oscillation Me .0058 .0057 Solar ‘‘subsidence’’ es .0047 .0047 Sun’s surface es Chase.] 568 Cs: an. 19, The seven loci which represent harmonies of nucleation, condensation and nebulosity, illustrate the tendency of waves in elastic media to main- tain and propagate motions which are harmonically dependent upon their loci of origination. ‘ 306. Velocity of Incandescence. Draper found that all solid bodies become incandescent at the same temperature, reaching red heat at 977° F., or at the absolute temper- ature of 1436°.4 F. This indicates a lift, against earth’s superficial gravitation, of A = 1436.4 x 772 = 1,108,901, or a velocity of » = V2gh = 8435.9 feet per second. The mean velocity of hydrogen molecules is 6050 feet, which is .717 x 8435.9 feet. The velocity of incandescence is, therefore, within 14 per cent. of the parabolic orbital velocity which would correspond to a circular orbital velocity equivalent to the molecular velocity of hydrogen, (6050 « 7/2 = 8556). In other words, if the mean velocity of hydrogen, at the standard temperature, is a mean orbital velocity, its increase to a velocity of infinite projection would give the velocity of incandescence, or the velocity which creates ethereal disturb- ances of sufficient magnitude to cause luminous radiations. These dis- turbances are of the same order of magnitude as those which are indicated jn Note 304, and they furnish new reasons for believing that the hypoth- eses ot Siemens and Berthelot (Note 278) may suffice to account for the ‘conservation of energy which is indicated by the fundamental equaiity, oj=0 sop (Note 280). 307. Tails of Comets. Proctor (Contemp. Rev., Oct. 1882) states some of the chief difficulties attending the attempts which have been made to explain the formation of comets’ tails, by materials thrown off from the nucleus by solar repulsion, by actinic clouds, by tactic arrangement, or by electricity, and speaks of certain phenomena ‘‘which force upon us the belief that they are phe- nomena of repulsion, though the repulsive action is of a kind not yet known to physicists.’’ He inclines, with Huggins, and ‘‘an American astronomer’’ whose name is not given, to attach great importance to electric action or something of a similar nature. He cites the notice by Huggins, of the remarkable persistence of meteoric trains in the rare upper atmosphere, where they sometimes last for more than three-quarters ofan hour. The evidences of repellent action such as might be explained by electricity, of gravitating re-action, of luminous radiation from the sun in the direction of the axis of the tail, and of a general curvature of the extremity of the tail as if it were retarded in some way, are such as to need consideration in any attempts at explanation. All of these phenom- ena, except the one last named, may be correlated by the fundamental equality of Note 280. The curvature of the tails may be due to persistence of oscillation, combined with ethereal tendencies to orbital motion in times varying as rj. The extreme tenuity of cometary matter points to a 1883.] 5 69 [Chase. relative elasticity which is much greater than that of air, and which must, therefore, be peculiarly subject to harmonic oscillations; the waves of light, like auroral flashes, which have often been seen in the tails, point to electric, phosphorescent, and luminous rhythms; the frequent inter- changes between the tail and the nucleus, as well as the rupturing ex- plosions and the formation of nucleoli, must be subject to the laws of phyllotactic and gravitating rhythm; if the «ther is material, it must be influenced by rotational and orbital tendencies, even if its elasticity is so great as to prevent actual orbital motion, and hence the ‘‘actinic shadows”’ may be curved. 308. Other Cometary Considerations. Phyllotactic distribution in organic growth, in frost tracery and other forms of crystallization, and in satellite or planetary groupings, points to a continuance of tendency, over periods which are proportional to the resistance interposed by the inertia of the particles or masses which partake of the distribution. When the inertia is very small, as in the xthereal interferences to which spectral lines are attributed, the adapta- tion to requirements of ‘‘extreme and mean ratio’’ may be nearly or quite instantaneous. We may, therefore, reasonably look for evidences of adaptation, such as are shown in Notes 295, 302 and 305, as well as for various modifications by other forms or kinds of harmonic tendency. Refraction of energy (Note 286), and Draper’s ‘‘latent light,’? may also contribute to the curvature of tails, in a medium which is perhaps more tenuous than the ‘‘fourth form of matter,’’ and which imparts sympathetic vibrations to the adjacent ether. 309. Lifects of Cometary Eccentricity. The tendencies to ethereal rotation and revolution about stellar centres may, perhaps, be so adjusted to other oscillatory tendencies as to oppose little or no resistance to planetary motions in orbits of small eccentricity. Mosi of the cometary orbits, however, are so eccentric that their vis viva, at every stage of their journey, is nearly twice as great as it would be if their paths were circular. Such amount of living force is more than sufficient, whenever there is any appreciable resistance, to produce and maintain luminous and thermal phenomena, of the same kind as occur in the explosive combinations of gases. The orbital energy may be resolved into two rectangular components, one of which passes through the sun, while the other is tangential to the path of the revolving «ether. The latter may adapt itself so readily to the «ethereal vortices as to make no disturbance; the former being perpendicular to the ethereal track, must encounter a continual resistance and retardation, unless it is compensated by luminous, electric, gravitating, or other kinetic undulations. 310. Hecentricity at Mean Centre of Inertia. The fundamental identity (Note 280) represents a uniform velocity, and we may, therefore, look for evidences of primitive photodynamic influence _ Chase.] 570 _ (Jan. 19, in the uniform velocities of important cosmical centres. One of these evidences is found in the proportion, t,:t,:: 7, : Tz In this proportion, ¢,, is the orbital time at the chief centre of condensa- tion (Earth); f,, the orbital time at the centre of primitive nebulosity (Ju- piter); 7’, the time in which a photodynamic wave would traverse the secular eccentricity at the primitive centre of planetary inertia (Saturn); 7, the time in which the wave would traverse Saturn’s semi-axis major. The accordance is shown by substituting the values, which give the proportion, 365.2564 : 4332.5848 : : .08431 : 1 Stockwell’s estimate of Saturn's secular excentricity is .08483. 7, and 7, also represent the comparative living forces which would project a planet, against uniform resistance, through the distances traversed by the respec- tive photodynamic waves. 311. Harmonies of Terrestrial Acceleration. The cyclic oscillations at the chief centres of condensation and nebulosity would tend to produce corresponding accelerations through the action of central forces. An important harmony, which introduces the vis viva of acceleration, is shown in the proportion, @,:0,::t, (t, +t) : tg. In this proportion, @, is the rotary acceleration which Earth has under- gone according to the nebular hypothesis; a, the acceleration according to Herschel’s theory of ‘“‘subsidence;’’ ¢, and ¢, have the same,values as in the foregoing note. The value of @, is (200.2504 + a = 338.22; g dg = 86164.1 sec, + anal = 16.983. Substituting these values we get ri t 338.22? : 16.983? : : 396.62 : 1 396.62 : 366.2564 : : 1.0829 : 1 t,+tg : tg: : 1.0848 : 1 This harmony furnishes additional grounds for rejecting Delaunay’s hypothesis of terrestrial retardation by tidal friction. 312. Harth’s Accelerated Rotation. I have already referred to the inconsistency of Delaunay’s views with the nebular hypothesis. According to the form of that hypothesis which was taught by Laplace, at the time of nebular rupture the day and year should have been sychronous. In order to establish such sychronism at the present time, Earth’s radius would need to be expanded ()/366.2565 = 19.138) times, and Laplace’s terrestrial limit would be ln 2 ( year + 2n\-) 3p, or 838.2187, Proc of Amer. Phil. Soc Vol XX, page 563. PHENACODUS PRIMA IVU S oS 1 ve A 1 wea T. Sinclair & Son, Lith Phila Proc. of Amer.Phil.Soc Vol. XX, page 563 PLU T. Sinclair & Son, Lith. Phila. 1. PHENACODUS PRIMAEVUS %. 2-3.PERIPTYCHUS RHABDODON % 7 oe 4s 1883. | 571 [Chase. This represents a comparative acceleration of the velocity of rotation which may be very closely represented by the quotient of (Jupiter’s year x Earth’s year) by (the sum of Jupiter’s and Earth's years x Earth’s day), or by 4332.5848212 x 365.2563582 + (4332.5848212 + 365.2563582) = 336.858. As this equation introduces considerations of the chief cen- tres of nucleation, nebulosity and condensation which must still be effi- cient, it furnishes another reason for caution in dogmatizing about tidal friction and thermodynamic laws. 313. Joint Relations of Sun, Jupiter, Barth and Venus. A succession of important harmonic motions is shown in the relations of solar mass and density, which make g,¢, = ,; the relation of Sun’s mass to Jupiter’s mass which makes Sun’s surface the projectile locus, or secular perihelion centre of gravity, of Sun and Jupiter; the relations of terrestrial mass and density which make g,f, = circular orbital velocity at the mean centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter; and the relation of Venus to Earth which makes the incipient orbital vis viva of Venus (at ’ secular aphelion) equal to Earth’s mean orbital o7s viva. If we adopt the British Nautical Almanac estimate of Sun’s apparent semi-diameter (961.//83), the accordance of harmonic and computed values will be as follows: Harmonic, Computed, Authority. Sun + Venus 427826 427240 Hill. se «* Karth 300463 d01776 (Oscillatory) (ec omelupiter 1047.879 1047.879 Bessel. Earth’s semi-axis major, 92,661,600. 314. Joint Relations of Sun, Jupiter, Earth and Saturn. Alexander’s harmony (m,d,? == m,d,”) is rendered more significant by Saturn’s orbital situation at the nebular centre of planetary inertia, (3 m@ = ¥ m)2 = ps The slight deviation from exact accordance is very nearly, if not precisely compensated by the equation, Sun xX Earth < Saturn = Jupiter’, Alexander’s approximation gives, m, = 3522. 33 m,; the other approximation gives, according to the foregoing note, m, == 8481.86; the arithmetical mean being m, = 3502.1, which differs by less than 4, of one per cent. from. Bessel’s estimate. If px ps represent Stockwell’s estimates of the mean perihelia of Jupiter and Saturn, Bessel’s estimates of their respective masses, and the equation (Sun + Jupiter) x (Earth + Jupiter) = (9; + p,)?, give m, + m, = 330240. The harmonic accordances which were given in Note 310 cor- roborate these evidences of joint relations, and encourage a search for modifications by combined harmonies in other cases. 315. Photodynamic Relations of Uranus and Neptune. The increasing number of harmonic influences with increasing distance from Sun, was illustrated in my Relations of Mass, (Proc. A. P. S., xviii, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc, XxX. 113. 81. PRINTED MARCH 12, 1883. Chase, | 572 [Jan. 19, 231), andin Note 156. A connection in which the harmonies of luminous undulation are more directly shown, gives the following relations: (p, + ps) + Baal? = 0, M, :M,::Yp,: Vr, My 2 My > 2 Py 2 Oy Stockwell’s estimates of p, and a, (secular perihelion and secular aphelion of Uranus) are 17.687929 and 20.679233. The closeness of harmonic accordance is shown in the following comparison, in which Ihave used Struve’s constant of aberration and the estimates of Note 313. Velocity of light 430737, 430777, Struve. Semi-axis major of Uranus 19.184), 19.138), Stockwell Sun — Uranus 22592 22600 + 100 Newcomb. «« «© Neptune 19324 19380 + 70 Newcomb. The division of the outer planetary belt is, therefore, such that the aphelion mass is in accordance with aphelion influence at the inner portion of the belt, while the perihelion mass is in accordance with perihelion influence. The further considerations of Note 156 add to the interest of this relationship. 316. Joint Relations of Sun, Earth, Venus and Moon. The three foregoing notes seem to show that the harmonic influence of the chief centre of condensation (Earth) upon planetary masses, has been greater than that of the centre of nebulosity (Jupiter). We may, there- fore, naturally look for additional illustrations of terrestrial influence with- in the dense belt, such as are given in Notes 8, 85, 156, 246-7, 254-6, 313. The estimate of », in Note 246, would become 1 ~ 81.08 if we adopt the value of »3, which is given in Note 313. This value, if substituted in Note 8, would give 4.952 miles for the height of Earth’s homogeneous atmos- phere, through the proportion nm X 81.08.: 1 : : rs : .0012496r, : : 3962.8 : 4.952 The harmonies of Note 85 may well be studied in this connection. Stockwell’s value for the secular perigee of Venus is .9322648,, —.7744234p : ==.1578414 », = 14,625,840 miles = 1.0252 x (8 x 4x 5)? x 3962.8 miles. The solar modulus of light, according to the same estimates, is 2213.37, = 1.00073 x 4 x (8 x 4 x 5/475. 317. The November Meteors. The relations which were pointed out in Note 315 may be supplemented by cometary indications of a character somewhat like those which led Forbes to his deduction of two supra-Neptunian loci (Notes 82, 305). The . 1883. ] 573 {[Chase. secular aphelion of Uranus, or its locus of incipient subsidence (20.679233), represents a cometary major axis with a period of 33.2473 years. The period of the great ‘‘star-shower’’ of November 1833 and 1866 has been computed at ‘about 33.25 years.’’ A similar cometary major axis (20.7072688), with a period of 33.315 years, would exactly represent, by its apsidal loci, the mean positions of Mars. and Uranus. The special photodynamic indications of the first equation in Note 315, may be fairly presumed to have exerted an influence on each side of the central track, which would be sufficient to account for all ot the approximations that have been indicated. 318.. Geological Time. Dr. Haughton (Am. Journ. Sci., Nov. 1882) read before the American Association, in August, 1882, some ‘New views of Mr. George H. Darwin’s Theory of the Evolution of the Earth-Moon System, considered as to its bearing on the question of the duration of Geological time.’’ He cites Sir William Thomson’s views as to the present rigidity of the earth, the probability that Saturn’s rings consist of swarms of discrete meteoric stones, the low specific gravity of the outer planets, the recent researches connecting the periodic swarms of shooting stars with comets, Huggins’s comparisons of the spectroscopic appearances of comets and incandescent portions of meteoric stones, and Prof. H. A. Newton’s hypothesis that the asteroids may be extinct comets, to justify the position ‘‘ that the earth and moon when they separated from the sojar nebula, did so as a swarm of solid meteoric stones, each of them having the temperature of inter- stellar space.’’ He then shows that the meteoric problem resembles the hydrodynamical problem, giving equations ‘‘in all respects similar to those derived by Mr. Darwin, from the hypothesis of a viscous earth”’ and placing ‘‘a cool earth and almost indefinite time at the disposal of geologists.’’ These views are in accordance with Herschel’s theory of subsidence, which I have found so abundantly illustrated by the actions and reactions of gravitation and ethereal elasticity (Proc. A. P. S., ix, 283-8, 345-9, 355-60; x, 261-9, 368-79; xi, 103-7; xii, 392-417, 518-22; xvi, 184-92; xvii, 294-307, et al). Dr. Haughton refers to Prof. Newton’s application of the same theory to account for the asteroids and some of the satellites, but he has made no allowance for the modifications of planetary and satellite arrangements which would result from harmonic motion. 319. The Key-Note of Nature. Gardiner says( Music of Nature, 2d, Ed. p. 417): ‘In the fifteenth century, music was generally written in the key of F, and its relative D minor. This order of sounds was first adopted, probably on account of its being the most familiar to the ear, as it will be seen that the cries of animals, the buzzing of insects, the roar of storms, the murmurs of the brook, and some of the grandest sounds of the natural world, are to be referred to this harmony and may be denominated The Key of Nature.” In 1873, (Proc. Chase.] 574. [Jan. 19, A. P. S., xiii, 151), I showed the accordance between the wave length of the principal Frauenhofer lines and of the homonymous notes of the twenty-third musical octave, the greatest difference being 2} per cent., and the closest approximation being at F, where the difference is less than # ot one per cent. In the arithmetical mean, the difference is less than 4 of one per cent.; in the geometrical mean the accordance is exact. Langley, in a communication to the British Association, at Southampton, reported experiments which show a fundamental solar ‘‘tint which must approxi- mately represent that at the photosphere, and which is most similiar to that of a hue near Frauenkofer’s F.’’ (Am. Jour. Sci., Nov. 1882). See also Notes 41, 42, 235. 320. Limit of Thermal Velocity. In Notes 58, 61, 62 and 102 I introduced some thermodynamic consider- ations which were based on interstellar photodynamic influence. In April 1865, (Proc. A. P. 8., x, 101) I called attention to the fact that ‘even the thermal currents are occasioned simply and solely by the varying gravitation of fluids of varying density,’’ and in nearly all my physical papers I have been guided by the belief that all ultimate energy is radiant from or toward kinetic centres, the various forms, (luminous, thermal, electric, gravitating, etc.) being merely due to subordinate modifications of primitive radiations. The simultaneous radiation of light and heat from the Sun, the “ Thomson Effect’’ (see Am. Jour. Sct., xxiv, 379-87), and the phenomena of thermo-electricity, furnish strong a priori grounds for believing that the limit of thermal velocity, v, is the same as the limit of luminous velocity, 2). 321. Extension of Fundamental Equality. In throwing a ball into the air, the thermal equivalent of the projectile force is equal to the product of the mass by the sum of the retardations which result from gravitating influence, atmospheric resistance and all other opposing circumstances. In solar rotation, all the solar superficial particles are alternately projected from and drawn towards the chief centre of gravity of the system, in cyclical periods of half-rotation. The thermal equivalent of this projection represents the whole work of gravity mgt? 2) for the time, , and the corresponding velocity, v, is equivalent to the velocity of light. This gives the following extension of the equation in Note 280: 0, = 0, = ty = %. The combination of centripetal and centrifugal tendencies which produces solenoidal terrestrial currents (Nute 274), may, perhaps, suggest consider- ations which will be serviceable in general electrical research, and so lead to important developments of this fundamental equation. 1883.] 575 (Chase, 322. Disturbed Attraction. R. Lamont (Jour. of Science, Oct. 1882), says, ‘‘If we disturb the at- traction which holds together the atoms of a chemical compound, whether it be in the solid, the liquid, or the gaseous state, we have this same ema- nation of light and heat. If, then, these great effects can be produced in our laboratories, what must result in our solar system from the continual struggle between attraction and centrifugal force?’’ I attacked the view that weight can be predicated of bodies at rest, as early as 1864 (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., ix, 357), and in February, 1868, I gave a summary of various phenomena which may be simply codrdinated by the theory that motion, rather than rest, is the natural state of matter (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., x, 377-9). Although similar views had often been advocated by others, no attempt seems to have been made to confirm them by numerical measure- ments, prior to my investigations, which began in 1863 (op. cit., ix, 283-8). 323. Lunar Barometric Tides. The correlations of gravitating and magnetic tides (Notes 116-22), lend interest to Bergsma’s observations of the lunar atmospheric tide at Batavia, 1866-80 (See Nature, Nov. 23, 1882, p. 79), a tide which appears to have been first observed by Luke Howard, in London. Assuming the lunar day to begin at the Moon’s upper transit, the following are the phases above or below the mean, expressed in millimetres :— mm, 1st max. -+ .057 at lunar hour 1 1st min. — .053 “* a if 2d max. + .064 ‘ *e 13 2d min. — .060 ‘ ie 19 Buchan’s isobar of 29.9 in. = 759.45 mm. passes through the Malayan Archipelago. This is 6491 times the mean range (.117) of lunar disturb- ance, which is much greater than can be explained by simple gravitating tide. It is, however, in simple harmonic relation to the square of the mass. If m2 : »? : : 6491 : 1, mz = 80.56y. 324. Lunar-Tidal Rainfall at Batavia. “«The influence of the moon’s phases on the rainfall [at Batavia] is quite decided ; for while the mean daily rainfall is .205 in., it rises at full moon to .248 in., from which time it gradually falls to .181 in. at the third octant, rises to .212 in. atthe fourth octant, then falls to .184in. at the fifth octant, and finally rises gradually to the maximum at the time of new moon. The important conclusion follows that the attractive influence of the moon, and consequently that of the sun, must be taken into account as factors con- cerned in bringing about oscillations of the barometer.’’ These evidences of lunar-tidal influence upon rainfall are greater than those which I found at Philadelphia (Proc. Am. Phil Soc., x, 523-37), about the same as at Barbadoes (Jb., xiv, 195-216), but less strongly marked than at Lisbon (1b., xii, 178-90), and at San Francisco (Jb., xii, 523-42). Chase.] 576 [Jan. 19, 325. The Neptuno-Uranian Belt. All the proposed forms of the nebular hypothesis seem to require evi- dences of retrograde motion, such as are shown by the outer planets of our system. The successive harmonic influences of central condensation, conversion of orbital into rotary motion, incipient projection and incipient subsidence are shown by the proportions which were given in Note 315. If we take the oscillatory estimate, m, = (2 x 3 x 4)* m,, instead of the estimate in Note 313, we get m, = 22656m, = 19379m, ; p; = 19.1383. Newcomb’s mass-estimates are m, = (22600 + 100)m, = (19380 + 70)m,. The observed value of p; is 19.184 9,, which is about } of one per cent. greater than the harmonic value. 326. Terrestrial Magnetic Vis Viva. Equation (1) of Note 91 may be modified by regarding », as a mean proportional between Earth’s mean orbital velocity and the velocity of light, and substituting the mass of the Telluric system, m,, for Earth’s mass. We then have, M0," > M,0,7 > 2 1,0)? : M07, substituting 0, = p, + 497.827; 0, = 2zp, + 31558149 ; m, = 1047.879m, ; we get m; = 311.672m,; m, = 326594m , which difters by about 3 of one per cent. from the magnetic estimate of Note 2 (327710). The identity of the velocity. of electro-magnetic disturbance (MJazuwell, Electricity and Magnetism, § 784) with the velocity of light, lends interest to this approxi- mate coincidence. If we estimate m, = 81.08,, these two values of m, give 82.08 2 : : ™, = 91 0g X 326594, = 330622m, ; 3 = 92678000 miles. 82.08 u mm, = 81 08 X 327710m, = 331752m,;; ps = 92783400“ The latter estimate of p, differs by less than ;}, of one per cent. from the value which is indicated by centres of nodal oscillation (Note 91). 327. Cosmic and Chemical Harmonic Motions. A harmony which involves considerations of the conversion of orbital into rotary velocity, projectile ozs viva, inertia of central condensation, and energy of chemical combination, is shown in the proportion Ri Go 3 WE See in which », = Earth’s primitive locus of orbital projection, or secular perihelion (Stockwell’s estimate of secular eccentricity and the Brit. Naut. Alm. estimate of Sun’s apparent semi-diameter give p, = 200.385p,); g, = mutual gravitating acceleration of two equal particles at distance 4; g, = like acceleration at distance 7, ; 4 = theoretical height of secondary centre of oscillation in explosive combination (Note 16). Solving the pro- portion, we get, 4 = 279.943 miles ; p; = 92789000 miles; m, = 331280m,. 1883.] 517 [Chase. 328. Comparison of Harmonic Mass-Estimates. The estimates of planetary mass in Notes 313-5 are, in some respects, more simple than those in Note 156. This is especially the case with Uranus and Neptune. Note 155. Notes 313-5. Computed, Sun ~ Venus. 427630 427326 427240 Sun ~ Earth, 331668 330463 331776 Sun ~ Jupiter, 1047.879 1047.879 1047.879 Sun ~ Saturn, 3003.22 3902.1 3901.6 Sun + Uranus, 22602 22592 22600 Sun + Neptune 19392 19324 19380 The relations of mass, density, and time, at the stellar centre of the system, are determined by the velocity of light ; those at the chief nebular centre are influenced by the first harmony ; those at the chief centre of condensation introduce the two preceding harmonies ; those at the centre of planetary inertia show the combined influence of luminous undulation, nucleation, nebulosity and condensation. Venus and Uranus are rhyth- mically influenced by the chief centres of nucleation and condensation ; Neptune is similarly influenced, though less directly, through its belt- connections with Uranus. 329. Comparative Harmonic Estimates of Earth’s Mass. In Note 15 I gave a summary of eighteen kinetic estimates of Earth’s semi-axis major, giving the mean value, p,; = 92737100 miles. Subse- quent harmonic estimates, introducing varions nodal influences which must be obviously operative, furnish data for the following comparisons :— Sun ~ Earth. P3- Chemical energy, Note 16 331631 92,772,200 miles. Oscillatory ‘‘ sé 20, 9L 30177 92,785,700 ‘* Inertia Se 152 331890 92,796,300 ‘<< Rotating energy, «e. ole 330463 92,661,600 <* Luminous Ge se 326 330622 92,678,000 * Magnetic es oe 331752 92,783,400 ‘ Gravitating ‘‘ "OR 331280 92,739,000 << The mean values are 331345 + 137, and 92,745,200 + 12900. The latter value differs by less than ;}; of one per cent. from the one given in Note 15. 330. Nodal Influence of Jupiter. The joint influence of Sun and Jupiter which was shown in Note 328, may be further illustrated by various nodal relations of planetary apsides. I indicated the importance of harmonic motion in determining apsidal positions, in a communication to the American Philosophical Society, April 2, 1869, more than eight years before Professor Stephen Alexander called the attention of the National Academy to the subject (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xi, 103-7; xii, 405-7, 412, 520; xiii, 146, 196 (11); xiv, 635; etc.). Chase.] 578 (Jan. 19, a. Jupiter’s locus of incipient subsidence (secular aphelion), is nearly a mean proportional between Neptune’s locus of incipient subsidence and Earth’s semi-axis major. 2. Jupiter’s mean subsidence-locus (mean aphelion) is nearly a mean proportional between Neptune’s locus of incipient subsidence and Earth’s mean projectile locus (mean perihelion). y: Jupiter's mean subsidence-locus is nearly a mean proportional be- tween the semi-axes major of Mars and Uranus. }. Jupiter’s semi-axis major is nearly a mean proportional between the mean projectile locus of Mars and the semi axis major of Uranus. e. Jupiter’s semi-axis major is nearly a mean proportional between the incipient subsidence locus of Uranus and the incipient projectile locus (secular perihelion) of Mars. ¢. Jupiter’s mean projectile locus is nearly a mean proportional between the incipient projectile-locus of Uranus and the mean projectile-locus of Mars. / 7. All of Jupiter’s orbital loci are at centres of explosive oscillation ($) of orbital loci of Saturn. @. Jupiter’s mean subsidence-locus is at the nucleal locus of a condens- ing nebula, of which Saturn represents Laplace’s atmospheric limit and Earth is the centre of condensation ; Earth’s semi axis major being the unit radius, and Laplace’s limit varying as the + power of the nucleal radius. Accordances 7 and @, which are the closest of all, are especially interesting on account of the variety of indications wh'ch they give of the harmonic influence of luminous undulations upon the four great centres of nucleation, condensation, nebulosity and planetary inertia. The following table shows the closeness of agreement between the har- monic values and Stockwell’s. Harmoniclog, Stockwell. Dif. oflogs. Percentage of difference. -7419330 -7418817 -0000513 =; of one per cent. .7344514 .7345879 .0001365 sr Sf cr .7329514 .7345879 -0016365 2 a - .7150274 -7162369 .0012095 2 yy ee -7165515 .7162369 .0003146 ys fs 4 .6974010 .6970763 .0003247 ds 7 RE ens : isch aus -0000009 0 ef s .7346221 . 7345879 .0900342 j1, See also, Note 334. CS Vt GNX WR 331. Photodynamic Significance of the Temperature of Space. Sir John Herschel estimated the absolute temperature of interstellar space as about one-half as great as Earth’s mean superficial absolute temperature. If the former temperature is due to stellar radiations, every star must have opposite hemispheres which are exposed to different temperatures, as well as to different gravitating tendencies. The fundamental equation ot ve- locity (Note 321), may be fairly presumed to be universal, so that all 1883.] 579 (Chase. stellar rotations may accord with solar rotation in alternately consuming and resuming, at alternate half-rotations, the photodynamic energy of all the superficial particles. At the outer limits of our ethereal system, the ether, if material, should rotate with the stars, so as to radiate and absorb heat like an ordinary atmosphere. A full discussion of conservation of energy in the several stellar systems, requires the consideration of time in- tegrals of various kinds, gravitating, thermal, photic, rotating and re- volving. Continual sbiftings of position may, perhaps, continually restore to cosmical centres a reactionary vis viva which is exactly equivalent to their active radiations. 332. Hirn’s Hypothesis. G. A. Hirn (Comptes Rendus, Nov. 6, 1882), agrees with Faye in be- lieving that astronomers need an absolute vacuum of matter in order to assure the stability of cosmical movements. He thinks that the doctrine must be discarded which excludes from the physical universe everything but matter and motion, and refers approvingly to Newton’s letter to Bentley, implying the necessity of a constant spiritual activity, which can- not be subjected to any materialistic formulation. Seven years ago (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xiv, 611, xvi, 302) I published a number of postulates, among which were the following : ‘11. Any ethereal medium through which impulses are progressively transmitted, must be material. «12. Any medium through which impulses are transmitted instantane- ously, must be devoid of inertia and, therefore, spiritual.’’ 333. Laplace's Principle of Periodicity. ' I have elsewhere (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xviii, 41-3). given some illustra- trations of the general principle, which was established by Laplace, that the state of a system of bodies becomes periodic when the effort of prim- itive conditions of movement has disappeared by the action of resistances. The periodicity of solar rotation shows the action of gravitating resistance against the effurts of luminous undulation. The resistance is just as con- stant as the radiation, and it would be far to seek any good reason why any provision for perpetuity which may be needful should not accompany every effort and every antagonizing resistance. If spiritual intervention is taken into consideration, its action may be merely directive, because there is a theoretical instant of absolute rest when one oscillation ends and its successor begins, so that there is no material ozs viva to be overcome. 334. Two-Fold Nucleation in the Dense-Belt. Jupiter’s nodal influence (Note 331), co-operating with central condensa- tion in the dense-belt, is shown in the following additional harmonics : :. Jupiter’s semi-axis major represents Laplace’s limit for its own con- densing nebula, of which the nucleal limit is the locus of incipient subsi- dence of Mars. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 8u. PRINTED MARCH 12, 1883. Chase.] 580 (Jan. 19, x. In tendencies to reverse condensation towards Jupiter, Earth’s mean locus of subsidence is 4.1289304,, from Jupiter’s mean locus. This repre- sents a nucleal radius for which Laplace’s limit would be 6.70965;, which is near the mean locus of Mars on the opposite side of Sun. }. In like reverse condensation, the mean locus of Mars, when in con- junction with Jupiter, represents a nucleal radius for which Laplace’s limit would be 5.679683, which is near Mercury’s incipient locus of subsi- dence. ‘ uw. Taking Mercury’s mean subsidence locus as final or unit radius, Venus represents a nucleal radius, for which Earth’s projectile locus would be Laplace’s limit. The closeness of accordance is shown in the following table : Percentage of Harmonie, Stockwell. Difference. ditference. t 1.75789 1.73648 .02141 1} per cent. K 1.50685 1.52368 .01683 Do i 2 47688 47680 .00008 od pu 93313 ° .93226 .00087 a For further evidences of nucleal and atmospheric limitations, see Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xvi, 496-505. 339. Another Harmonic Estimate of Saturn’s Mass. It cannot reasonably be expected, among all the different tendencies to harmonic motion, that we can immediately find all which have been operative in any given case. In view of the small amount of work which has been done in this field, such simplicity and closeness of agreement as were shown in Notes 329-31 and 334 are very encouraging, We have already found many evidences of reciprocal or retrograde action in the Neptuno-Uranian belt, of central planetary inertia in the Saturnian belt, and of Jupiter’s paramount planetary influence. If we regard all of the dense belt of planets as originally belonging to the great central nucleus, Alexander’s harmony, mz; p;’ = mg, p,’, may be thus modified : Jupiter = Sun + 1047.879 = .0009543087 Earth == 0% (=) See = .0600030141 Venus = “.-- Ae = .0000023385 Mars = * - 3093500 = .0000003233 Mercury = ‘“ - 4860751 = .0000002055 Moon = Earth + 81.2 = .0000000371 Amount =— x, = .0009602272 Log. 2, F.9823740 “© (pe ps)? 0265244 Log. mg, 4.4558496 Me = 0002856601 : = 3900.67 1882,] 581 [Chase, 336. Mean Harmonic Estimate of Saturn’s Mass. We have seen in Note 326, that in some harmonic approximations the most satisfactory results are reached, as in the foregoing note, by adding satellite or subordinate masses to their primaries, while in other cases it seems best to consider the primary mass alone. The choice of methods, in any in- stance, may be governed by considerations of static or kinetic equilibrium, instantaneous or progressive action, primitive or subsequent conditions, or other relations which may be unfolded by a more minute study of har- monic astronomy, If we substitute the rotary estimate of Note 313, (m, + m, = 330463) in Note 335, we get m, + m, = 3500.62. Combining this value with the two which are given in Note 314, we find an exact mean accordance with Bessel’s estimate, as follows : From central primitive nucleation, 3500.62 se otis) ec 3522.33 **« nucleation, condensation, nebulosity and inertia, 3481.86 Arithmetical Mean, 3501.60 337. Inner Limit of Saturn’s Preponderating Influence. The two foregoing notes regard all the intra-asteroidal planets as in some sense satellites of Jupiter, which have been made planetary by the superior attraction of the Sun, somewhat as our Moon is both a solar planet and a terrestrial satellite. It may be asked whether Saturn’s attraction when in opposition to Jupiter, is not sufficient to invalidate this hy- pothesis. Jupiter’s mass being 3.3415 times as great as Saturn’s, the ex- tent of its equal gravitating disturbance is )/3.3415 = 1.828 times as great. Saturn’s relative disturbance of intra-Jovian matter is greatest when Saturn is at secular perihelion (8.734451p,) and Jupiter is in opposition, at secular aphelion (5.519271p;). The limit of equal attraction is then at 3333 of 14.2537229, = 9.21349, from Jupiter, or 3.6941, from Sun, on the side towards Saturn, so that it includes all the orbits of the dense planets, and nearly all of the asteroidal belt. This fact gives new meaning to Notes 330 and 334. 338. More About Comet Wells. Notes 295 and 302 illustrate the probable formation of spectral bands by the combination of different harmonic tendencies, as well as the precision of delicate measurements by a skillful observer and accuracy of judgment in estimating the centres of maximum brilliancy. It is, therefore, not un- likely that careful study may discover successive evidences of phyllotactic and other harmonic influences, as was the case in investigating atomic phyllotaxy. If we take the difference between lines g and ¢< in the Wells’ spectrum (Note 295 ; 4769 — 4253 = 516), the phyllotactic numbers 2, 3, 5, 13, 34, serve in the following sub-multiples ; 2 of 4 of 516 = 31.754; 3 x 31.754 = 95.262 ; 4 x 31.754 —127.015 ; 5 x 31.754 = 158.769; 4 x +x $4 of 516 = 134.954. These numbers give the following accordance : Chase. ] 582 [Jan..19, Huggins. Harmonic. Ditterence. a 4769 4769 B 4634 4634.046 134.954 Y 4507 4507.031 127.015 ) 4412 4411. 769 95.262 € 4253 4253 158.769 339. Phyllotaxy in the Jovian System. The harmonies which are shown in Notes 330 and 334, supplement and help to explain the first four harmonies of Note 29 and the five har- monies of Note 14. Callisto’s semi-axis major represents a phyllotactic power of a phyllotactic multiple (3°), of Jupiter’s semi-diameter. The semi-axes major of the three inner satellites are approximately connected with the nebular radius and with one another by the phyllotactic fractions % and 3, as follows: Harmonie. Observed. Nebular radius 38.45 Nebular radius 38.424 2 of 38.45 15.38 Ganymede 15.3502 2 of 15.38 9.613 Europa 9.6235 Zof 9.613 6.008 To 6.0485 The greatest difference between the phyllotactic and observed loci is 2 of one per cent. The corresponding orbital times are connected by powers of the phyllo- tactic number 2. 6 Nebular radius 16.0135 ee Ganymede 4.0434 2. Europa 2.0073 2 Io 1.0000 340. Phyllotary of Planetary Mass and Position. = Peirce’s phyllotaxy of orbital times (Note 135), my atomic phyllotaxy (Note 289), and my phyllotaxy of virtual areas (Note 190), encourage asearch for phyllotactic relations of planetary mass and distance. Jupiter's mean projectile locus (mean perihelion), is an approximate phyllotactic basis for Saturn’s mean locus of subsidence, the rupturing locus of the outer two- planet belt and the mean centre of gravity of the belt: Stockwell. Phyllotactic. Jupiter 4.978 5 Saturn 10.000 2x5 3 Neptune 15.017 3x5 c. g. Uranus and Neptune 25.031 5x5 If Saturn’s mean perihelion were in the same longitude as that of the outer belt, the phyllotactic sum of their disturbing forces (2 + 5) would become an important limit of oscillatory inertia. Simple phyllotactic com- 1883.] 583 [Chase, binations of this sum with phyllotactic powers of 2, 3, and 5 give the fol- lowing mass-approximations : Computed. Phyllotactic. Sun — Jupiter 1047.879 1050 = (2+5) (2x5) (8x5) Sun — Saturn 3001.6 3500 = (2-+.5) (2X5)? (5) Sun ~ Uran.and Nep.° 10483 10500 = (2 + 5) (25)? (85) Sun — Earth 330463 330750 = (2 +5)? (2X5) (8X 5)?(8) Sun — Venus 427240 428400 = (2 + 5) (285) (3? 5) (34) Sun — Mars 3093500 3094000 = (2 +5) (2«5)8 (18x34) Sun — Mercury 4865751 4873050 == (2 -+- 5)? (85)? (13x 84) The greatest deviation is less than 7% of one per cent. 341. Centripetal Harmonies of Planetary Mass and Position. If we begin with the outer two-planet belt, we find evidence of the fol- lowing successive influences : a. Rotary vis viva, (mp? + 2). (1). If we call the sum of the masses of Neptune and Uranus m,. = m, + m,, we find that its influence of rotary perturbation introduces both the same and the diametrically opposite mean perihelion longitudes of Saturn, provided that p,,. and p,,) represent, respec- tively, the incipient loci of subsidence of Saturn and Uranus ; ™m,.) (p%, — Pe) = ™MePo@- (2): If we call the sum of the masses of Jupiter and the dense belt, 1.) =m, + m,-++ m, + m, + m,, we find that its mean influ- ence of rotary perturbation is the same as that of Saturn ; M0, = Moos 2. Rotary momentum. The interior mass of the three primitive masses, M,,, Was so divided that Sun’s semi-diameter became the rupturing locus ‘for the principal centre of gravity of the system (c. g. of m, and m,). Designating Jupiter’s radius vector at secular perihelion by p,,, we find, My Po —— M50 (5)* Photic time-integral. Sun’s mass and density are so harmoniously adjusted that the oscillations of solar rotation indicate the actions and re- actions of a wave-velocity which is equivalent to the velocity of light (Notes 17, etc.). 6. Secondary time-integrals. The solar superficial gravitating accelera- tion, which is determined by the photic time-integral, determines in its turn the velocity of circular-orbital oscillation (,/gr) at all distances from Sun’s centre. The velocity at Sun’s surface gives Jupiter’s time-integral : the velocity at the mean centre of gravity of the system gives Earth's time- integral. e. The photic time-integral (y), the probability that Sun’s density is har- monically determined by the density of hydrogen, and the equality of ethereal and solar mass which is implied by their equality of action and reaction, give the proportion at Sun’s surface, Modulus’ : p%, : : density of hydrogen : ethereal density. Chase.] 584 [Jan. 19, 342. Secondary Harmonies of Planetary Mass and Position. The data of the foregoing note are sufficient for approximate determina- tions of the respective masses at the chief centres of nucleation, condensa- tion, nebulosity, and rotary planetary inertia, (Sun, Earth, Jupiter and Saturn). The division of the outer two-planet belt, and the separation of Venus from the primitive interior belt were determined by simple rela- tions of vector-radii, which may be regarded as indicative either of photo- dynamic time or photodynamic vis viva. ¢. The radii which determined the aphelion and perihelion masses of the outer belt were, respectively, the aphelion and perihelion loci, or the loci of incipient subsidence and incipient projection, at the inner limit of the belt (Note 315). 7. The radii which determined the relative masses of Earth and Venus were, respectively, the mean radius-vector and the locus of incipient sub- sidence of the respective planets (Note 313). 343. Centripetal Approximations If we take the phyllotactic estimates of Mercury and Mars (Note 340), with the gravitating or centripetal estimates of the other planets, and of solar and ethereal density (Notes 341-2), we find the following approxi- mations, which may be compared with those of Notes 325 and 328 : Harmonie, Computed. Difference. Sun + Mercury, 4873050 4865751 3; of one per cent. Sun + Venus, 426721 427240 a “if Sun — Earth, 330463 331776 ee os Sun ~ Mars, 3094909 3093509 ern ae Sun ~ Jupiter, 1047.879 1047.879 Sun ~ Saturn, 3500.69 3501.6 ps is Sun — Uranus, 22759 22600 is “ ee Sun —- Neptune, 19467 19389 4g «6 ahs wy Density of Sun ~ Earth .25492 Log. = T.4064086 Density of “ther — Hydrogen 106,939, 960.000, 000,000 17.0291400 Solar Modulus of light, 474657, = 2213.37, 3.3450539 Solar Rotation, 25.5064 days : 1.4166487 Orbital time at p,. 10049 seconds 4.0021223 Sun’s semi-diameter, Po 432089 miles 5.6355735 Earth's semi-axis major, p;, 92,661.550 miles 7.9668996 344. Laplace, Herschel and Fourier. Laplace’s statement of the nebular hypothesis has been generally thought to imply that the planets and satellites were thrown off by the centrifugal force of contracting nuclei. Many objections have been found to this hypothesis, of which the moons of Mars furnish a striking example. Herschel’s theory of subsidence, by recognizing the equality of action and reaction, removed these objections, provided for the recognition of 1883. ] 585 (Chase. cometary and meteoric influences, and made the moons of Mars, as I have shown (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xvii, 302), an unexpected confirmation of his views. Fourier’s discussions of elasticity and cyclical motion, in a line of research to which American investigators have made important contribu- tions (see op. cit., xvi, 298-302), showed that all cyclical movements are quasi-elastic and may be represented by simple combinations of elastic formule, and thus paved the way for a wide extension of the theory of harmonic motion. The three foregoing notes show a combination of sim- ultaneous and continuous activities, which it would be difficult, if not im- possible, to explain by Laplace’s theory. They are all, however, in full accordance with the views of Herschel and Fourier, and they indicate that the photic ether may still be regarded as nebulous. 345. Photic Loci of Earth and Saturn. Note 341 suggests the influence of linear oscillation in subsiding particles. Neptune’s locus of incipient subsidence (30.47),) became, by the relative slowness of its motion, a point of virtual suspension. Saturn’s locus of incipient subsidence (10.343 ;) which was near its centre of oscillation (10.16p,), was the origin of the belt of mean planetary inertia. While the Neptuno-Uranian and the Jupiter-Telluric belts were yet undivided, the theoretical period of rotation was (30.46955 x 214.45)? x 25.5064dy = 3050950.7 years. The fundamental photodynamic equation (Note 321), with the equality of action and reaction, fixed the chief centre of con- densation at a locus which is in simple photic relations with the solar nucleus, the photic radius of rotation and the centre of planetary rotating inertia. For the mean proportional between the mean locus of incipient planetary subsidence (10.345253,,) and Earth’s semi-axis major is 3.2161 p, = 689.695,. If we call this the photic radius, or the locus of luminous equatorial velocity for a sphere which would have orbital velocity at Sun’s surface, Earth’s semi-axis major should be [#1558149 ~ (2 = x 497.827 x 689.69) ]?o, = 213.99p,, which is within 75 of one per cent. of the British Nautical Almanac estimate (214.45p,). 346. Mass-Relations of Earth and Saturn. The relative masses, as well as the relative positions, of the chief centres of condensation and of planetary inertia, show simple harmonic accord- ances with the energies of «ethereal rotation and reacting inertia; Earth’s locus of incipient projection (.932265p;), bearing the same ratio to Sat- urn’s mean locus of projection (9.077645p,), as the square root of Earth’s mass bears to the square root of Saturn’s mass, thus indicating an exact equivalent between the moment of rotation and the inertia of mass. This gives 331988m,—= m, ; p, = 92,805,400 miles. The mass-value differs by less than ;/; of one per cent. from the value which was adduced from the relative inertia of Earth and Jupiter (Note 152), and by less than ~; of one per cent. from the value which was deduced from centres of oscilla- tion (Notes 5, 23). Chase.) 586 (Jan. 19, 347. Phyllotaxy of Orbital Periods. The closeness of the phyllotactic mass-harmories (Note 340), may be more strikingly shown by observing the discrepancies in Peirce’s approxi- mations to the orbital periods of the primary planets, which seem to have been the first extensions of the phyllotactic theory beyond the vegetable world : Phylotactic, Observed, Difference, Neptune 60126.72 4 Neptune 30063.36 Uranus 80686.82 2, per cent. 4+ Uranus 10228.94 Saturn 10759.22 57 ‘ 2 Saturn 4303.69 Jupiter 4332.58 eee 2 Jupiter 1733.03 Asteroid 139 1723.37 rs 2 Asteroid 139 689.35 Mars 686.98 oes \ ee 3 Mars 343.49 Earth 365.26 64 “ 3; Earth 224.78 Venus 224.70 ae nee 2 Venus 89.88 Mercury S731 © Sees. The greatest deviation is more than nine times as great, and the mean deviation is more than ten times as great as in Note 340. 348. Photice Relations of Harth, Jupiter, and Asteroid 139. In view of the many evidences of the important influence of Jupiter upon planetary harmonies, the following proportion becomes suggestive : t, i tg 3 py? po The second theoretical phyllotactic reduction of Jupiter’s orbital period, % Asteroid 139, is represented by t, ; Earth’s day, by ¢,; the photic radius (Note 345), by p, ; Sun’s semi-diameter, by p,. The value of p;, as de- duced from this proportion, is 214.2,, which is about ;’, of one per cent. less than the British Nautical Almanac estimate. Thisis only y}, as great as the mean accidental deviation (Note 288). 349. Modifications of Hurmonic Planetary Masses. * The approximations of Note 342 are more closely connected than those of Note 328, and indicate a simpler bond of harmony. Among the various harmonic influences which may be presumed to have modified planetary masses and to be represented in their harmonic motions, are the following : (1). The fundamental velocity of Note 321, which was first indicated by my barometricinvestigations (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., ix, 283-8). (2). Centres of linear, spherical and explosive oscillation (Jb., xii, 392-4, 411-7 ; et al.). (3). The acquisition of nebula-rupturing velocities, by subsidence from mr to (1b. xii, 518-22). (4). Tendency to rupture in the periphery nr n+ 1 3 ofa stationary nebula, at 2r ~ (3 — V3) (Jb. xvii, 98-99). (5). Belt- 2 forming tendencies, through subsidence, at ms C1b., xvii, 100*). (6). The * Instead of “ minoraxisof //8r” read “ minor axis of /2r.” 1883.] 587 [Chase. ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter (Jb., xiii, 140-1, xiv, 609-12, et al.). (7). Time integrals, rotation-waves, harmonic vibrations, polar forces, etc. (1b. xiv, 141-7). (8). Laplace’s limit, and its variation as the 4 power of the nucleal radius (Jb., xiv, 612, 622, 652, etal.). (9). Con- stancy of pressure and constancy of volume (Jb., xiv, 651). (10). Instanta- neous velocity, implying spiritual influence (Jb., xiv, 611 ; xvi, 302, et al.). (11). Comparative variations of distance and density, in elastic media (/0., xvii, 109-12, e¢ al.). 300. Relation of Inertia to Time and Force of Oscillation. M. Lipschitz, in a letter to M. Hermite (Comptes Rendus, xcv, 1141), discusses some points which have an important bearing on my funda- mental equation (Note 321), and on time-integrals in general. Supposing a heavy body to turn freely about a horizontal axis, he considers two kinds of movement. In the first,*the angular velocity becomes 0 at #,; in the second, atz — 9,. The times in the two movements may be expressed by elliptic integrals of the first order, with complementary moduli. The corresponding integrals of the second order represent Hamilton’s acewmu- lated vis viva, or the integral of which the element is equivalent to the sum of all the living forces of the system multiplied by the element of the time. The result of the discussion, which he considers remarkable, gives an equation of oscillating times and accumulated vis viva, for the two kinds of movement, which depends solely on the moment of inertia of the body. 351. Motion of Sun-Spots in Latitude. Speerer, in a letter to Faye (Comptes Rendus, xcv, 1110), reports observa- tions upon the movement of Sun-spots in latitude. Arranging the observa- tions of twenty years (1861-80) in 5° belts, he finds a slight excess of move- ment towards the equator between the parallels of 5° and 10°, and a slight excess towards the poles between the parallels of 20° and 25°. Carrington and de Rico found a predominance towards the equator between 0° and 15°, and towards the poles in higher latitudes, but the indications were so slight that Carrington attached noimportance tothem. Faye regards these results as fatal to the theory of Siemens, for if the Sun is fed by the subsi- dence of matter towards the poles, he thinks that the equatorial centrifu- gal force should produce a constant tendenty of spots towards the equa- tor. He also calls attention to the fact that the centripetal force at Sun’s = gr - : equatorial surface (% a Pr) is about 48000 times as great as the cen- “o trifugal, and he attributes the equatorial increase in apparent velocity of rotation to the continual convection-currents between the photosphere and the interior of the Sun. 352. Photodynamic Centrifugal Energy. At the very outset of my planetary investigations I called attention to the accelerating effects of ‘‘subsidence,’’ and Hall’s discovery of the moons of Mars strengthened my conviction that such acceleration was the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. XX. 113. 8v. PRINTED MARCH 19, 1888. Chase.] 588 [Jan. 19, vera causa of Sun’s equatorial acceleration. Jupiter’s influence upon har- monic masses and positions (Notes 313, etc.), and the close approximation of the photic radius (Note 345) to Jupiter’s projectile centre of linear os- cillation, show that there are activities, at various distances from the Sun, which should be considered in discussing the conservation of solar energy. The centrifugal force to which Siemens refers is by no means limited to Sun’s surface ; at Laplace’s limit (36.367r,), at the photic radius (6897,), and at the solar modulus of light (689°7,), there are important rotating and consequent centrifugal tendencies which have been almost wholly over- looked. Darwin’s discussions of terrestrial ‘‘ viscosity’? furnish many sug- gestive hints for an investigation which, as I fully believe, will help greatly to extend Laplace’s views of universal stability. Noone, probably, would think of limiting the centrifugal force of terrestrial rotation to Earth’s sur- face, nor even to its atmospheric modulus; there is great likelihood that an appreciable atmosphere may extend even beyond Laplace’s limit (6.67,), all portions within that limit rotating synchronously with Earth, while all portions beyond the limit are subject to combined influences of rotation and revolution. Sun’s «ethereal modulus extends to more than 73 times Neptune’s semi-axis major, and if we suppose that to be the limit of zthereal centrifugal tendency, we have an available velocity which is 689 times as great as the velocity of light, If we suppose, still further, that Laplace’s velocity of gravitating action, more than 100,000,0000, (Mee. Celeste, X, vii, 22), represents an actual physical velocity, we have a radius of rotating influence which extends from the Sun as a centre to more than 13000 times the distance of a Centauri. 393. Motion in Perfect Fluids. Siemens calls attention (Comptes Rendus, xcv, 1040), to the results of Froude’s Torquay experiments, which showed that a submerged body, moving with uniform velocity in a perfect fluid, will meet no resistance whatever. By ‘‘a perfect fluid” is meant a fluid free from viscosity or quasi solidity, and in which no friction is caused by the slipping of its particles either over one another or over the surface of the body. If there are any such fluids, the luminiferous ether is doubtless one. Ferrel’s in- vestigations have shown that the centrifugal force of rotation would draw it entirely away from the poles, so that more viscous fluids, such as our atmosphere, would serve, as Siemens says, as lubricators, to supply tempo- rary vacua which would otherwise result from the slight lateral elastic oscillations of the «ther. These considerations, as well as those of the foregoing note, open a new field for analytical research, which must be thoroughly explored before final judgment can be passed upon questions pertaining to the conservation of solar energy, the stability of the physical universe, and the reproach of thermodynamics. 304. Centripetal Transformation of Radiations. When particles or bodies are moving in circular orbits, under the in- fluence of central] forces, the centripetal and centrifugal forces are in equi- ¥ 1883.] 589 [Chase. librium ; in parabolic orbits, the centripetal vis viva is twice as great as the centrifugal on approaching the centre, and one-half as great on reced- ing from the centre ; in elliptical orbits, the ratio of the living forces varies inversely as the ratio of the radius-vector to the semi-axis major. In actual orbital motions, the alternate oscillations between the apsides are equal, but in opposite directions. This must be true of the ther, as well as of planets and satellites, if the ether has any orbital motion, and reason- ing from analogy we might fairly suppose that it is true of ethereal waves. What becomes of the heat which is supposed to be absorbed by the xther? Does it increase the mean distance of the exthereal particles, does it main- tain an ever increasing amount of «ethereal undulation, or is it resolved into some form of gravitating or other centripetal activity, which furnishes conclusive evidence of the universality of the law that ‘‘action and re- action are equal and in opposite directions?’’ A single fact is worth more than a million theories, however plausible they may be. The second law of thermodynamics is purely theoretical, inasmuch as it tries to account for activities which are beyond the reach of experimental investigation. The fundamental equality of Note 321 is a significant and far-reaching FACT, which illustrates Laplace’s principle of periodicity (Note 333), and bears satisfactory witness to the continuance of activities which have hitherto been the reproach of thermodynamics. 355. Primitive Pirotodynamic Locus of Neptune. The combined influence of the tendencies to rotation and revolution (Notes 348, 352, etc.), is shown in the outer limits, as well as at the centre of the planetary system. The outer extremity of the photic radius (Note 345), has an oscillatory trajectory which is (zo, + 2,) times as great as that of p,. Its rotatory o/s vwa, and consequently, its radius of relative projection, is (7, + »,)* times as great, and the orbital period of this pro- jectile radius is (70, + 2)? X 2x V (7, + 9). Jupiter’s secular eccentri- city, according to Stockwell, is .0608274. This gives, for the linear centre of oscillation of its locus of incipient subsidence, .0405516, and for the solar radius vector of that centre, 1.0405516. If we take a like projection of Neptune’s locus of incipient subsidence (1.0405516 x 30.46995 = 81.70514) as an original nucleal radius ¢p,) for which Laplace’s limit oy) was (= 0, + 0%)? por We find ps = (x? 2 p3 + 3 ae Pos % + 3 = 31558149 sec. + (2 x X 497.827sec.) = 10089.116 ; p; = 214.461 o,; p, = 6799.52 p.; p, = 4684434 p.. 356. Primitive Photodynamic Locus of Saturn. The value of Sun’s apparent semi-diameter as deduced from the fore- going note is 206264.//806247 + 214.461 = 961./’78, the British Nautical Almanac estimate being 961.//82. A mean proportional between Sun’s semi-diameter and p, (2164.36 », = 10.09206 ;) is within less than one per cent. of Saturn’s mean subsidence locus (10.000059 p;). The photic Chase.] 590 (Jan. 19, radius (94 = po 0, + % = 688.936 p,.) is a mean proportional between Earth’s semi:axis major and Saturn’s incipient subsidence Jocus (2218.23 P, = 10.343253 »;) within 1ess than} of one per cent. A mean proportional between p, and p, is also a mean proportional between », and p,. Hence we see that Sun’s radius, Earth’s radius-vector, the photic radius, as well as the original nucleal and limiting radii of the system, are all represented through their harmonic influences upon the belt of mean planetary inertia. 307. Stellar Relations of Primitive Photodynamic Loci. In whatever way we may regard these many indications of harmonic influence upon planetary positions and orbital periods, whether as furnish- ing evidence of early nebular condensation or of nebular activities which still continue, we can hardly believe that they are confined to our imme- diate system. The nearest companion system being that of a Centauri, we need feel no surprise at finding that », is a mean proportional between Sun’s radius and the distance of « Centauri, and p, is a mean proportional between the solar modulus of light and the distance of « Centauri. The distance which is thus indicated differs by less than 3 of one per cent. from the one which was deduced from the corona line and the masses of Earth and Jupiter (Note 46). The photic radius is, of course, a mean proportional between Sun’s radius and the solar modulus of light. 308. Photodynamic Relations of the Neptunian System. Stockwell ( Wash. Obs., tor 1873, App. I), deduced two values for the quotient of Sun’s mass by Neptune’s mass, viz.: 19700 from perturbations of Uranus, and 19380 + 70 from Neptune’s satellite. The former value may, perhaps, indicate the mass of the planet; the latter, the mass of the Nep- tunian system, including the satellite which has already been discovered, together with any others which may be yet unknown, and one or more possible remote planets. The orbital period of the primitive projectile radius (Note 355) is 19613.1 times Neptune’s orbital period. Designating these periods by f¢, and ¢,, respectively, we have the approximate har- monic proportion, t, 2 tg ss LOGS 24 2 Ses In. This value is intermediate between Stockwell’s two estimates, differing but 2 of one per cent. from their mean, but 1} per cent. from the smaller and but 4 of one per cent. from the larger estimate. As the proportion is based upon time-integrals which must be operative, this closeness of ac- cordances is interesting. 399. Phyllotactic Relations of Earth and Neptune. To the harmonic relations which I have already pointed out, between the planetary masses at the centre of incipient subsidence (Neptune) and at the chief centre of nucleation, may be added a very simple phyllotactic relation, which is shown by the proportion, Ms:M,::2: 34, Se ee ee 1883.] 5 91 [Chase, If we take the mass-estimate of Note 313, m, - m, = 330463, this propor- tion gives m, + m, = 194389, which is, within the limits of probable error, in accordance with Stockwell’s second estimate. The interest of this har- mony is increased by the fact that the ratio of Earth’s equatorial velocity of rotation is to the limiting value of Vg, 7; in the same phyllotactic ratio of 2 to 34. 360. Harmonic Relations of Saturn, Mars, and the Tellurie System. The harmonic actions and reactions among the masses at the centre of planetary inertia (Saturn), the centre of incipient subsidence for the belt of greatest condensation (Mars), and the central system in the belt of greatest condensation (Earth and Moon), is shown by the proportion ™m,. : 7m = 0. 1,.. = M.. 6 (3) * (3) ° "4 Taking Bessel’s estimate, m,—-m, = 3501.6, with the rotary estimates of Notes 313 and 316, m, — m, = 330463, m, — » = 81.08, this proportion gives m, + m, = 3083416, which differs by less than } of one per cent. from Hall’s estimate. These repeated harmonic relations of mass seem to show that every planet represents some special central tendency, and when that tendency is found, the harmonic calculus will furnish estimates which are generally closer than those which have been reached by the ordinary astronomical methods. If this is the case with the first approxi- mations, we may well hope that a due regard to secondary and subordi- nate harmonies will give results of a very satisfactory character. In the present instance, if we regard Hall’s estimate as correct, and deduce the value of Earth’s mass, we find m, + m, = 331003, which is within the limits of probable error. 361. Synoptic Table. The six foregoing notes are, in some respects, more comprehensive in their harmonic indications than any that have preceded them. I therefore give the following comparative table : Harmonic Logarithms, Anti-logs, nN ~3 ps 2.3313488 214.461 i Po 2.8381787 688.956 3.2124 ~p; 3.3393286 2164.356 10.0921 Pv 3.8324785 799.523 31.7051 M 5.6763574 474682. 2213.1381 Pr 6.6706572 4684435. 21842.8 a Cent. '7.6649570 46253521. 215579.8 +0, 23410288 219.295 to 4.0020883 10048.2 sec. t.atp, 6.3431171 2203520.3 sec. t,atp, 1.4066034 25.504 days. 3,-+ 0; 1.4064550 125495 Chase.] 592 [Jan. 19, 862. The Terrestrial Series. The above table introduces two geometrical series ; the first having the ratio x, and having for one of its terms a solar radius-vector for Earth, similar to the one for Jupiter in Note 355 (1 + 4 ¢, = 1.02258). Harmonic. Observed. 82048 Mercury, mean perihelion, 31873 xt 1.02254 Earth, 1. c. 0, of sec. ece’y, 1.02258 x a 3.21240 Photic radius, Po» 3.21240 ma 10,09201 Saturn, mean aphelion, 10.00006 ma 31.70514 Neptune, p,, 81.70514 ma 99.60465 Forbes, I, Note 32, 100. z&q@ 312.91727 Forbes, II, Note 32, 300. This series includes the inner and outer principal planets, the centers of planetary inertia and of maximum condensation, the photic radius, and the two supra-Neptunian belts of cometary aphelia. The planetary loci are those of my first anticipatory series (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xiii, 140), with such modifications as represent the photic radius and the linear centers of oscillation of Earth and Jupiter. Each of the two-planet belts is indi- cated, and the photic radius precisely marks the locus of Asteroid 108: It also difters by less than 3 of one per cent. from a mean proportional be- tween Earth’s semi-axis major and Satura’s locus of incipient subsidence (3.21609 3). 363. The Stellar-Photic Series, The second geometrical series of Notes 355-61, has the ratio 7? and has, for two of its terms, a stellar locus and the solar modulus of light. Harmonic. Observed. B .00239 .5135 Sun’s semi-diameter, -00239 x p .02363 5.0683 Sun’s semi-diameter, .02363 x' B .02324 4 Mercury’s sec. aph., 23840 x® B 2.30202 Mean prop, Jupiter and Earth, 2.28096 ~ x B 22.72004 = Neptune’s mean aph., 22.75153 x3 224.2378 ey nf 2213.1381 Solar modulus of light, 2213.1381 nM 9 21842.804 Photic projectile radius, 21842.804 x8 ¥ 215579.86 a Centauri, 215579.86 The planetary indications are not quite so satisfactory as in the foregoing series, but the deviations are of the same order of magnitude as planetary eccentricities. _Neptune’s mean subsidence locus indicates a solar nebular density corresponding to Laplace’s limit, for a rotating nucleus with a semi- diameter equivalent to z,. Mercury’s primitive subsidence-locus indi- cates a degree of ‘‘ viscosity’? which would give a rupturing tendency at a mean proportionate locus between Sun’s viscous rupturing locus and z,/?- The mean proportional between these two loci is also a mean pro- portional between Earth’s primitive subsidence-locus and Jupiter’s mean projectile-locus. The deviations from exact accordance, according to > 1883.] 593 (Chase. Stockwell, are respectively, } of one per cent., J; of one per cent. and yy of one per cent. The three terms which indicate mere photodynamic pro- gression show an exact accordance ; but there is a range of uncertainty which is of the same order of magnitude as planetary eccentricities, with regard to the exactness with which the third of those terms represents the locus of g Centauri. The harmonic term preceding the solar modulus is 7.466 times Neptune’s semi-axis major. It has no obvious known repre- sentative, but future researches or discoveries may make it significant. The Terrestrial and the Stellar-Photice series are connected by the propor- tion : a ae 2 eae > Pb a : 70, > Dy). These several relations confirm the views which were expressed in Note 262. 364. Photodynamic Subsidence-Relation of Earth and Jupiter. The photodynamic projections of § from Sun’s rupturing locus, of the chief centre of gravity (Sun and Jupiter) from Sun’s surface, of the centre of the dense belt from the chief centre of condensation, and of Py from Nep- tune’s locus of incipient subsidence, seem partly to account for the photo- dynamic gravitating relations of Earth’s day and year. Theradius vector of the viscous rupturing locus of Jupiter’s incipient subsidence (Note 355) is 1.0304137. If ¢,= 1 year, we have, very nearly if not exactly, the equa- tions : gz t; = 1.0304137 2). ®, == 186125.8 miles. Pp = 92,659,000 miles. mM, = 330,419 mz. 365. Conservative Momentum of Vis Viva. Whether we accept or reject the hypothesis of Lesage, as a literal ex- planation of gravitating action, it may serve as a convenient concept for representing activities which are obviously incessant. There are con- stant centripetal tendencies towards the Sun, as wellas constant radiations from the Sun, each varying inversely as the square of the distance, and each subject to the law of equality between action and.reaction. Lesage supposed that they were opposite phases of a single energy, and his views are favored by the law of parsimony. If we reject them altogether, our perplexity is doubled, for we have two reactions to account for, instead of one. Even Newton, Peirce and Helmholtz; the first, in his hypothesis of an ‘‘:ethereal spirit,’’ the others in seeking an equivalent between solar radiation and solar contraction ; were guided, though less directly, by the law of action and reaction. In circular orbital motion, centripetal gravitation continually deflects the tangential path, so as to make it z times as long as the radial path before the tangential oscillation reverses its di- rection. The influence of momentum in such a change is represented by the terrestrial series (Note 362); the influence of vis viva, in the stellar- Chase.j 594 (Jan. 19, photic series (Note 363); the influence of both, in the fundamental equality (Note 321). If there is neither waste nor accumulation of energy, and if there isa material «ther, the hypothesis that the centrifugal action of every ethereal radiation is followed by an equal and opposite centripetal reaction, and vice versa, is justified by all the known phenomena of the heavenly bodies. 366. Dynamics and Kinematics. William B. Taylor delivered an address on ‘‘ Physics and Occult Qualities,’’ before the Philosophical Society of Washington, Dec. 2, 1882, on retiring from the Presidency of the Society. He discusses with great skill and lucidity, the comparative views of the kinematists who hope in time to resolve all physical enigmas by molecular processes, and of the dynamists who, “having searched in vain for any plausible co-ordination of the indisputable facts of cohesion [and other material phenomena] with an intelligible mechanical agency, simply acquiesce in the result, and without invoking the unknown or the irrelevant, accept this’ established property as ultimate and inexplicable.’’ In one paragraph (p. 30) he says: ‘‘ Without the indestructible—unwasting—tensions of molecular attrac- tion and repulsion, it lies beyond the scope of human ingenuity to devise or imagine a conservative system,’’ thus corroborating views which I have been advocating for twenty years. In another (p. 48), he seems to be somewhat self-contradictory, in saying: ‘‘ Under the present system of dynamic lav, it is certain that as radiating and cooling bodies, ‘The Stars shall fade away, the Sun himself Grow dim with age, and nature sink in years.’ Nor is there known to science any natural process whereby this cosmic doom may be either averted or repaired by ulterior reversal.’’ This is true of kinematics, but dynamic law positing behind itself ‘‘an Infinite LAWGIVER,”’ need give no thought to kinematic perplexities and paradoxes. Force ‘‘is attended with no expenditure and is capable of no exhaustion ”’ (p. 30). In his reference (p. 27) to the experiments of Guthrie and Bjerknes, on attractions or repulsions by mechanical vibration, he has overlooked my own experiments, which were published more than six years before Guthrie’s (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., ix, 359; x, 151-66). In his antagonism of the doctrine of ‘‘ unity of force’’ (p. 45), he makes no refer- ence to the identification of velocity, in the most important known mani- festations of photic, electrical, gravitating and thermal activity, as shown in the fundamental equality (Note 321). 367. Anticyclonic Storms. Loomis, in his 18th Contribution to Meteorolgy (Am. Jour. Sct., Jan., 1881), gives many illustrations of the frequency of anticyclonic storms, to which I called attention in 1871 (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xii, 40). My views were afterwards adopted in the Signal Service ‘‘Suggestions as to the prac- tical uses of Meteorological Reports and Weather Maps,’’ in magazine and 1883. ] 595 [Chase. newspaper articles by 8S. S. observers, and in reports of the Chief Signal, Officer. Prof. Loomis is, perhaps, somewhat unconsciously biased by a still lurking prejudice in favor of Redfield’s views, which disposes him to trace all rainfalls to ‘‘a cyclonic movement of the winds about the rain area.’’ As soon as the rain begins to fall, there must undoubtedly be a local cyclonism, as I stated (loc. cit., 7); but a careful study of weather- maps, especially in winter storms and in cases of failing forecasts, satis- fies me that the origin of storms is as much anticyclonic as cyclonic. The frequent instances of snows in a ‘‘high’’ area, with simultaneous rains in a ‘‘low”’ area, are very instructive. Ferrel’s researches show that cyclonism and anticyclonism must be companions. It is, therefore, hardly right to regard either as peculiarly storm-breeding. The vera causa is a blending of moist and cold currents. When the precipitation begins in a high area, the initial currents are anticyclonic ; when in a low area, cyclonic. Ferrel’s middle-latitude ridge of high barometer also ex- plains the anticyclonism of our Southern States, to which Loomis refers. 368. ‘Central Forces and the Conservation of Energy.’’ Mr. Walter R. Browne (Phil. Mag., Jan. 1883), confirms some of the views of central force which have guided my own researches, and which are embodied in Taylor’s retiring address (Note 366). He shows that the conservation of energy requires, and results from the equation fore v a= Snot @ in which two particles, A and B, are alternately receding and approaching between the distances a and a + }; and that F can only be a function of 7 ; ‘‘in other words, the force with which A acts upon B always tends towards A, and varies, if it varies at all, according to the distance from A only. But this is the definition of a central force.’’ He also refers to his paper ‘‘On Action at a distance’ (Phys. Soc., 1881; Phil.. Mag., Dec. , 1880), in which he showed that it is ‘‘impossible to explain certain elementary facts of physics without the hypothesis of action at a distance.’’ He de- duces from the kinetic theory of gases, the conclusion that the collision “occasions the instantaneous development of a strictly infinite force.’’ In 1876, I showed that ‘‘if the theory of Boscovich were true, at the centre, where p = 0, 0 a would be infinite’’ (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xvi, 304). These conclusions, as well as Laplace’s doctrine of the instantaneous action of gravity (op. cit. p. 3802), are inexplicable by any hypothesis which does not either recognize spiritual activity or spiritualize its definition of matter. 369. Mean Molecular Excursions. In discussing the kinetic interpretation of the law of gases, Taylor cites (Address p. 17) the application of the calculus of probabilities, by which Clausius inferred ‘‘that of the whole number “f free molecular excur- sions ina given time (in any large enclosure), those having less than the mean length will be 0.6321, or nearly double the number of those having PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 3W. PRINTED MARCH 19, 1883. Chase.] 596 [Jan. 19, the mean length or exceeding it. The simplicity of thermodynamic rela- tions in central force (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xiv, 651), suggests an equally simple means of estimating the proportionate number of mean excursions. Peirce’s views respecting the vis viva of rotation (see Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xvi, 300), involve the consideration of the mean moment of inertia, which 2 is represented by oe the momentum being represented by 7 7} = .632455 7, which differs from the estimate of Clausius by less than 7, of one per cent. 370. Cosmical Influence of Rotary Inertia. _ We may naturally suppose that, among the many harmonic influences which have combined in fixing the relative positions of the several planets, rotary inertia should be represented Among the evidences which strengthen such a supposition, are the following: 2.5 Mercury, sec. per., 7435 Venus, mean aph., 7489 1.5 Mercury, mean per., .4781 Mercury, s. a., .4768 2.5 Mercury, mean, .9677 Earth, m. p., .9661 1.5 Mercury, m. a., .6832 Venus, s. p., .6722 1.5 Mercury, s. a., - 1152 Venus, mean, 1232 1.5 Venus, s. p., 1.0084 Earth, mean, 1.0000 1.5 Earth, s. p., 1.8984 Mars, m. p., 1.4032 2.5 Jupiter, s. p., 12.2158 Uranus, m. p., 12.2153 1.5 Saturn, m. a., 15.0001 3 Neptune, mean, 15.0169 1.5 Uranus, m. a., 30.0663 Neptune, mean, 30.0339 .6 Neptune, s. a., 18.2817 Uranus, m. p., 18.3230 The ratio of the rotating radius to the projectile radius of mean rotary vis viva is 2.5 ; the reciprocal ratio gives the vector-ratio in opposition, 1.5 ; the ratio of the rotating radius, less that of the projectile radius is .6; the reciprocal of 1.5 is 3, which also represents the centre of linear oscillation and the radius of subsidence-collision ; the viscous rupturing radius of subsidence is }. F 371. Reaction of Rotary Vis Viva. A fact which has an important bearing on Delaunay’s hypothesis, as well as on the second law of thermodynamics, is shown by the recipro- cal ratios of the foregoing note, and more strikingly, by the reactionary influence of Neptune. If we look toa like reaction on the part of the other planets, we find the following harmonic accordances : .6 Uranus, m. a., 12.0265 _ .4 Neptune, m., 12.0135 .6 Uranus, s. p., 10.6128 Saturn, s. a., 10.3433 .6 Saturn, s. p., 5.2407 Jupiter, m., 5.2028 .6 Jupiter, m., 3.1217 Asteroid 120, 3.121 .6 Jupiter, m. p., 2.9869 Asteroid 61, 2.987 .6 Mars, s. a., 1.0419 Earth, m. a., 1.0338 .6 Earth, s. a., -6406 Venus, s. p., .6722 .6 Venus, m. a., .4493 Mercury, m. a., 4554 .6 Mercury, s. p., .1784 Laplace’s limit, -1696 1883,] 597 3 [Chase, The greatest deviations are at Earth’s secular aphelion or locus of in- cipient subsidence, and at Mercury’s secular perihelion or locus of in- cipient projection ; the difference in each case being about five per cent, (1.0493 and .9507), and the mean difference being zero. The mean devi- ation of the four dense planets is only 7, of one per cent. The mean dif- ference in the light belt is about 4 of one per cent., the greatest being that of Uranus, 2.5 per cent. The exactness of Jupiter’s influence on Asteroids 120 and 61 is remarkable. : 3872. Conservative Reaction. It may be readily seen that all the indications of the foregoing note point to a rotary vis viva of the several planets, reacting against a similar solar vis viva, and having no corresponding indications in opposition to the Sun. These indications are of a character like those which underlie the investigations of George H. Darwin, but their influence upon Sun is accelerating, instead of retarding, while any qguasz-viscous tidal influence is retarding, instead of accelerating. Ifthe two kinds of influence represent equal actions and reactions, the result would be a precise conservation of centripetal and ra- diant energies, without any solar expansion or contraction, other than in cyclic alternations, within limits of an order of magnitude like that of planetary eccentricities. The fundamental equality of Note 321 shows that Sun’s centripetal rotating energy is wholly photodynamic. We may readily believe that the solar rupturing and expanding tendencies of planetary rotation represent a purely photodynamic reaction on gravi- tating action, which is exactly equivalent and opposite. The evidences of such equivalence in cosmical aggregations should encourage us to look, with increasing confidence, for further evidences in ethereal oscillations of various kinds, and especially in the electric and thermal undulations which are indicated by the fundamental equality. Edlund’s researches point to electric and thermal equivalence of action and reaction, as plainly as Maxwell’s point to electric and photic equivalence, and as my own point to a like photic, electric, thermal and gravitating equivalence. 373. The Testimony of Mars. The many indications which I have found, of subsidence-orbital rela- tions between Mars and the asteroidal belt, are supplemented by the direct and reciprocal influences (2.5 and 1.5; see Note 370), of solar photody- namic rotation upon the secular apsides and the mean locus of Mars, as well as upon intermediate positions. 2.5 sec. per., 8,277 .6 Jupiter, m. a., 3.256 1.5 sec. per., 1,966 4 Asteroid 153, 1.977 2.5 mean, 3.809 .4 Saturn, m, 3.815 1.5 mean, 2.286 Asteroid 136, 2.287 2.5 sec. aph., 4.341 S Jupiter, m.a., 4.342 1,5 sec. aph., 2.605 Asteroid 132, 2.603 .4 sec. aph., 695 Venus, m. p., .698 Mean 2.711 Mean 2.711 Chase.] 598 [Jan. 19, The greatest deviation is 3 of one percent. The two mean asteroidal ac- eordances are nearly as exact as those in Note 371. Al of the direct and re- ciprocal influences are in the asteroidal belt. The direct influence at secu- lar aphelion (4.341) points to a ‘‘viscous’’ rupturing influence of the Jupiter-Saturnian belt (.4 of 10.855 = 4.342). The exact agreement of the general means is very satisfactory. 374. Centripetal Influence of Rotary Vis Viva. Some of my critics have supposed that it would be possible to find har- monic accordances with series which were taken at random, or with no known kinetic basis, but none of them have offered any such accordances to confirm their supposition. I have never published any harmonies which were not the natural outgrowth of well-known elastic laws, and the abun- dant confirmation which I have found for my anticipations is beyond all eavil or gainsaying. In Note 3701 gave evidences of the centrifugal influ- ence of rotary cis viva, which may be compared with the following evi- dences of mean centripetal influence. .4 Neptune 12.014 % Uranus, m. p., 12.215 -4 Uranus, 7.673 4 (Jup. and Sat.), m.a., 7.714 .4 Saturn, 3.816 2.5 Mars, 3.809 .4 Jupiter, 2.081 % Asteroid 120, 2.081 4 Asteroid 3, 1.067 Earth, s. a., 1.068 .4 Asteroid 4, 944 Earth s. p., 932 .4 Mars, .609 Venus, s. p., .672 .4 Earth, -400 Mercury, mean, .387 .4 Venus, .289 Mercury, s. p., .297 375. Lines of Force and of Motion. Taylor (op. cit. p. 28), very properly calls attention to the fact that ‘‘no atom can perform an oscillation or a revolution, or follow any other path than a straight line, excepting under the coercion of other atoms attracting and repelling. The first law of motion is that of perfect continuity both in amount and in direction. A shuttlecock rebounding in the empty air would not be more conspicuously a dynamic solecism and impossibility than the kinematists ‘vibratory particle.’’’ His doctrine (Jd. p. 9), that elasticity is ‘“‘a fact of nature, a property of matter, which can neither be interpreted by any form of motion, nor resolved into any mechanical concept,”’ is in precise accordance with the due regard to ‘“‘lines of force’’ which guided Boscovich and Faraday, and which has been very helpful in my own re- searches. My first paper on barometric estimates of solar mass and distance (Proce. Amer. Phil. Soc., ix, 283-8) was attacked by kinematists, because it violated some of their preconceived notions respecting the composition and resolution of forces. It did not receive much favor, until the productive- ness of the harmonie methods showed that the composition and re-lution of motions, in elastic media, may often enable us to dispense witu intricate integrations, which it would be difficult, if not impossible to solve, and that it is always safer to be guided by the Facts of natur2, than by any precon- ceived theoretical interpretation of those facts. 1883.] 599 [Rothrock, Some Microscopie Distinctions between Good and Bad Timber of the Same Species. By Dr. J. T. Rothrock. (Read before the American Philosophical Soviety, February 2, 1883.) A cross section of one of our ordinary ‘‘ hard woods”’ shows, more or less conspicuously, pores which are known as ducts, and which from their rela- tively large size are distinctly visible to the naked eye; secondly, it shows much smaller pores which may, or may not, require the magnifying glass to detect, and whose walls constitute the woody fibre of the stick ; thirdly, we should have (assuming the specimen to be an exogen), the an- nual rings which mark, a8 a@ rule, the limit of each year’s growth ; fourthly, there would be the radial lines extending from the centre outwardly to the bark, these being the medullary rays or the so-called ‘silver grain.”’ If, on the other hand, the specimen under observation were one of our or- dinary cone bearing trees, the ducts would be wanting, and the mass of the section would be composed of woody fibre. There may be openings which will resemble the ducts in hard wood, but instead of showing regularly or- ganized walls, these will be found to represent simply openings left by the destruction or the separation of the woody fibres. They are by no means so numerous ordinarily as the ducts in an average ‘‘ hard wood stick.”’ Considered from the standpoint of resistance to longitudinal strain, the strength-giving element of wood is the woody fibre ; and other things being equal, it is strong in proportion as the fibre walls are relatively thick, and the fibre cavities relatively small. [Illustrating this, we have the following cross sections of wood fibres, all magnified 242 diameters : 1, is that of Abies subalpina (Pumpkin Pine) from Utah; a timber which is almost worth- less ; 2, is that of our American Linden ; 3, represents the Butternut (or Juglans cinerea) ; 4, is the Pig-nut Hickory (or Carya porcina) and 5, is that of an average specimen of White Oak fibre (Quercus alba). Consider- ing the areas of the cavities in each of these sections, the White Oak has about six times as much wood in its walls, as there is in that of the Pump- kin Pine—a fact which it must be allowed will go far toward explaining the differences in the strength of the two woods. It is true that there may be differences in the strength of wood which are due to the molecular differ- ences involved in the structure of the fibre, but with these we are probahly in no position to deal. The intercellular substance which is destroyed by boiling in nitric acid and potassium chlorate is to a certain extent an ele- ment in the strength of wood. /There can be no doubt but that it aids in in- creasing the friction between the individual fibres, and is therefore the chief agent by which these are bound together, and thus resist longitudinal strain. So far as my investigations go, there is less relation between length of fibre and strength, than there is between thickness of fibre wall and strength. Some woods acquire additional strength, both longitudinal and transverse, from a twisting of the wood fibres among themselves. The Rock Elm is a notable example of this among our larger trees ; as the Viburnum nudum or Withe-rod is among the shrubs. Rothrock.] 600 [Feb. 2, So far as the ducts are concerned, while the material of which they are composed may be quite as strong as that of the fibres, yet owing to the enormous cavity they contain, it is apparent that as compared with fibres, they must be much weaker ; that in fact every duct is to be regarded as an element of weakness to the stick, Hence then, other things being equal, the more fibres and the fewer ducts, the stronger is any given stick of tim- ber as compared with another of the same species. The question of durability in exposed positions is quite another thing, and has no close relation to strength, Accepting the above facts as proven, mere examination of a cross section of timber with the naked eye, or at most with an ordinary hand Jens, may afford a reasonably safe way of estimating the quality of a given specimen of wood, Associated with the appearance presented by the ducts, and the mass of fibres, is another element of structure, ¢. e., that of the annual rings. These are usually caused as may be seen (A and B 6) by the thick, flat cells which are formed in autumn as contrasted (A and B 7) with the larger ones which mark the first growth of the ensuing spring. The number of rows which are thus flattened in the autumn wood is by no means constant. Sometimes, as in the case of the White Oak, there being but two, three or four; or as in the case of the Chestnut being often about eight, or more ; or as in the Redwood of California (Sequoia sempervirens) as high as fifteen. As a rule the color in all these autumn fibres is deeper than in those made earlier. Hence both shape and color combine to mark the ‘‘ year’s growth.” The term ‘‘year’s growth’’ is one which should not be depended upon too absolutely, inasmuch as it is well known to be misleading at times. Thus, in the American Linden, one frequently sees a ring more on one side than on the other; and indications are not wanting, which would prove that very frequently several such rings may form in our latitude in a single season. There are some facts of practical importance connected with the wood formed during the season, or to speak more accurately, with all the tissue lying between the denser, flatter fibres which are assumed to be formed in the autumns of two successive years. In White Oak, as shown by figures A and B, there may be a great range in the distance between these zones of flat fibres. Thus fig. B shows that the growth for the year was about twice that shown by fig. A. The former of these figures represents a good specimen of White Oak, and the latter a bad one, each having been carefully tested for strength by competent mechanical experimenters. In these instances the reason for the difference in the quality of the wood is obviously in the relative predominance of solid woody fibre over open ducts in the good specimen (B), and the lesser quantity of wood as compared with ducts in (A), the bad. It so happens that in A the diameter of the duct (.01430 of an inch) is greater by far than in the better wood. This can, however, hardly be regarded as constant. What does appear to prevail in White Oak is, the fact that most of these large ducts are made early in the 1883.J 601 {Rothrock. season, and that whether much or little wood is subsequently formed the number of the ducts will not greatly vary. Hence, then, for White Oak we may assert that the specimen with the larger year’s growth is, other things being equal, the better. Very frequently two duct cavities are thrown into one, so that the width is greatly increased. These may usually be distin- guished from true ducts by the irregular and disintegrated walls, which serve to explain the process by which the size was attained.* The above rule, as to the relation between size of ‘‘ year’s growth’’ and value, in Oak I have made the subject of some investigation, taking as test cases speci- mens of timber upon whose value opinions had been given by the most competent workers in the wood. Hickory, good and bad (certainly Carya alba and C. porcina), involves another element than mere size of the annual ring. Though I must here add that the best bit of C. porcina I have ever seen was also one that had the largest year’s growth I had ever seen. In this wood (Hickory), the large ducts are not so clearly limited in their production to the early part of the season (especially if the stick be one of poor quality), but are, or may be, clearly scattered through the wood. And the quality of the wood is de- termined mainly by the number and size of these ducts. Thus in bad Pig- Nut Hickory (C. porcina) I find in a surface of a quarter of an inch square, sixty-five, each with an average size of .01428 inch ; as against twenty-seven ducts having an average width of .01224 inch in good Hickory of the same species. : To a greater or less extent the same statements, as to cause of difference between good and bad qualities of Chestnut, and Locust (Robinia pseud- acacia), will apply. Figure C. illustrates the marked tendency which the ducts have to be as- sociated in Hickory. It also shows the effect of the growth in pushing aside one of the medullary rays, 9 b. It is not uncommon, however, in this wood to find these rays broken by the growth of the duct, and in Oak this is still less rare. I have frequently seen specimens of bad White Oak which were as porous as the average Red Oak, the ducts being, as shown by the micro- meter, quite as great in their diameter. The medullary rays or “silver grain’’ appear also to have important re- lation to value of Oak certainly, and probably of Hickory, to say nothing of other kinds of timber. The fibres and ducts are ordinarily characterized as the vertical system from the line in which they are elongated. With equal propriety then the medullary rays are spoken of as the horizontal system of the plant, because they are elongated at right angles to the fibres and ducts. From the thick walls of the cells constituting these rays, we might suppose they had to do with the lateral strength of the timber. This view is partially confirmed by a microscopic examination of the cross sec- tion of the different woods ; as upon the whole, Red-wood, Chestnut and White Pine show either that these rays are fewer in number or less strongly ’ * Very often this process of disintegration of the wall may convert a true duct into a mere cavity without walls. Rothrock.] 602 [Feb. 2, developed than in the Tupelo (Nyssa multiflora), or in a specimen of good White Oak. , However, in making comparisons of this kind, we must be careful to make them at points equidistant from the centre ; and to note whether these rays extend to the centre, or only part way in from the bark toward the heart of the tree, as this latter circumstance determines their age, and also generally their relative strength. In such species of timber as have rays extending vertically over two or more inches, as in some of the Oaks, the ray often indicates the line of easiest splitting, as is often seen by the eftect of drying upon the exposed end of such timber. This is not an invalidation of the statement that one function of the rays appears to be to give lateral tenacity, 7 €. to such portions of solid wood as lie be- tween the rays. They form as it were a chain binding the periphery to the centre, but offer no resistance to the separation of one woody wedge which they outline, from another such wedge which is placed alongside. If this be so, then such specimens of wood as have the rays ruptured by encroach- ment of ducts or by any process of disintegration would be correspondingly weakened. It is furthermore worthy of note that in such specimens of good White Oak (Quercus alba), and good Pig-Nut Hickory (C. porcina) as upon actual trial had proven to be the best, these rays were as a rule either most numerous, or best developed, or both. Examined microscopically, the cells making up these rays present an appearance when viewed from the side like figure D. That is to say they are quadrangular, thick walled and with numerous thin places in which the primary cell wall may or may not remain. Their very appearance suggests a somewhat easy communication between those (cells) which are adjacent, and thus afford a probable explanation of the fact, that when the starch made in summer by the younger portion of the tree is being conveyed into the interior of the branches for winter storage, these rays appear to furnish the most available avenues for accomplishing the work, and micro-chemi- cal tests show that it is most abundant in them. While these thin or open places in the cells of the medullar ray usually communicate with each other, it is remarkable that they are much fewer in the sides toward the ducts and fibres. It would be exceedingly interesting to know how far the facts indicated by this paper would conform to the value of timber as determined by spe- cific gravity. EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 1. Cross Section of Abies subalpina wood fibre X 242. 2 A “s Tilia Americana “ XK 242. i - Juglans cinerea, “ “XK 242. aoe oa Carya porcina, ‘“ ee ieee: ef Quercus alba s TS LR eres 6. Aand B. Flattened cells made in autumn. Meg ‘* Larger cells which indieate growth of following spring. * ‘* Open ducts seen in cross section. ¥ “« Medullary rays. 1883.] 603 (Rothrock, S Z At] aware les: SOS SS puswa' 80a) eeUONUEN GG Ge xetere a PROC. AMER. PHILOS. Soc. xx. 113. 3x. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1883. Frazer.] GOL (March 2, 7. Cross section of bad White Oak x 135. B. wes good ‘‘ 1 MALS Ch if Carya porcina X 112, grouping of ducts and pushing aside of Medullary rays. D. Fragment of Medullary ray showing the pits or pores in the walls, X 300. An improvement in the construction of the Hypsometrical Aneroid. By Dr. Persifor Frazer. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 2, 1883.) While in France last year the idea occurred to the writer to lessen the weight of the delicate Hicks Barometer by constructing as much as possi- ble of it of aluminium. Supposing that this could be done without difficulty, though of course at an increased expense, the writer devised a case of cork to contain it, and wrote to Mr. Hicks of London asking him to make the attempt. After a number of interviews it was finally estimated that the cost of the new form of aneroid should not exceed £10, or just double that of the ordinary instrument of brass in a wooden case. Delays were experienced from the beginning and added very much to the expense of the instruments when they finally arrived here. First it was found difficult to produce an aluminium dial plate with a graduation of the requisite delicacy and accuracy. Then the internal supports could not be easily cast in that metal of the shapes necessary to build the frame for the more delicate moving parts. Finally the writer was obliged to leave England without having received the barometers. When they arrived a few days ago the Government duty on them was $30.40 a piece, added to which Mr. Hicks had found it neces- sary to increase the original charge of £10 to £15 apiece. In consequence they cost a little over $105 apiece. They are, however, creditable to Mr. Hicks’s workmanship, and if their manufacture should increase, could no doubt be obtained at a very much reduced price.* : In order to prevent the breaking of the cork, by friction on the clothing, a light canvas cover was added, weighing 50 grams. The following is a comparison of the weights of the ordinary Hicks barometer with one of them. Old form, New form. Case and strap, 400 grams. (wood) 150 grams. (cork) Aneroid, 1000 *“* (brass) 400 <‘* (Aluminium) Canvas cover, — 50 a Total weight, 1400 <* 600 * “¢ ee or 3.09 ths. (av.) 1.323 Ibs. (av.) The ordinary instrument weighs, therefore, 2} timesas much as the new form, the weight of the old case being closely that of the new barometer. *A letter received from Mr. Hicks, after the above was in print, reiterates the difficulties with which he conte nded, und states that notwithstanding the experience guined in muking mine, he cannot deliver them for less than £15 upiece, 1883.] 605 [Davenport. Some Comparative Tables showing the Distribution of Ferns in the United States of North America. By George E. Davenport. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 2, 1883.) The following tables have been prepared fora Text Book and Manual of the Ferns of North America (north of Mexico), but are believed to be of sufficient interest to justify publication in advance. The attention of botanists is called to them, and their codperation solicited in enabling the writer to render them more complete and accurate for final publication. These tables are necessarily incomplete in their present form, no reliable data for all of the States and Territories being readily accessible. The num- ber of species credited to many of the States might have been increased by assuming the presence of certain species from their well known geographical range, but it was thought best to give only those which could be verified, or had been vouched for by good authority. Where a doubt exists in regard to the presence of a species said to have been collected in any State, and such doubt is not sufficient to justify exclu- sion, the species is credited with a query to indicate the uncertainty of its verification. All varieties are excluded except where a variety stands as the sole repre- sentative of the species itself. My thanks are due to John H. Redfield, Dr. George Engelmann, Professor D. C. Eaton, J. Donnell Smith and Wm. Stout for many additions, and it will further aid me greatly if others will send to me accurate lists of the species and varieties known to grow naturally in their respective States. The list of ferns as given below may undergo some changes before final publication, the numbers correspond to those given in the tables : 1. Acrostichum aureum. 18. Notholena Lemmoni. 2. Polypodium Plumula. 19. uC Fendleri. 3 gs pectinatum. 20. ub dealbata. 4 of vulgare. 21. es nivea. 5. sf falcatum. 22. ae Newberryi. 6. Hi Californicum. 23. sid Parryi. 7 és incanum. 24. He tenera. 8 ce Scouleri. 25, Cheilanthes Californica. 9 oe Phyliitidis. 26. us Wrightii. 10. ce aureum. 27, sé viscida. 11. Gym. triangularis. 28. ss microphylla. 1a) < hiepida. 29. “s Alabamensis. 13. Notholena sinuata. 30. “ leucopoda. 14. a ferruginea. ol. HIG vestita, 15. fs candida. 32. af Cooper. 16, Hookeri. 33. ¢ lanuginosa, iT sy Grayi. 34, Hl gracillima, Davenport.] 35. Cheilanthes tomentosa. 36. ¢ ~—\ Eatoni. 37. es Fendleri. 38. fe Clevelandii. 39. 4 Parishii. 40. rs Lindheimeri. Al. 3 myriophylla. 42. ce argentea. 43. Cryptogramme acrostichoides. 44, Pellza gracilis. 45. ‘¢ Breweri. 46 « Bridgesii. 7 ** —atropurpurea. 48. * aspera. 49. ‘« Wrightiana. 50. «« ternifolia. 51. ** ornithopus. 52. ‘* brachyptera. 53. ** andromedefolia. 54. “* cordata. ? 55. *€ flexuosa. 56. «« pulchella. 57. «« densa. 58. Pteris longifolia. 59. ‘* Cretica. 60. ‘* serrulata. 61 “¢ aquilina. 62. Ceratopteris thalictroides. 63. Adiantum pedatum. 64. . emarginatum. 65. ee tricholepis. 66. a capillus-veneris. 67. oe tenerum. 68. Vittaria lineata. 69. Teenitis lanceolata. 70. Blechnum serrulatum. 71. Lomaria spicant. 72. Woodwardia radicans. 73. ss Virginica. 74. fs angustifolia. 75. Camptosorus rhizophyllus. 76. Scolopendrium vulgare. 77. Asplenium serratum. 78. cf pinnatifidum. 79. ss ebenoides. 30. 4 ebeneum. 606 [Feb. 2, 81. Asplenium parvulum. 82. a Trichomanes. 83. es viride. 84. a dentatum, 85. i montanum. 86. *y Bradleyi. 87. e Ruta-muraria 88. de septentrionale. 89. eS firmum. 90. - myriophyllum. 91. ae cicutarium. 92. e 133, 151, 152. yee Arxansas—4, 7, 20, 29, 31, 33, 35, 47, 61, 63, 66, 73, 74, 75, 78, a) 81, 82, 86, 87, 92, 94, 95, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 113, 118, » 41* 133, 142, 143, 144, se 151, 152. ,) 23, 25, 27, 32, 337, 34, 37, 38, 39, 53, 57, 61, ue "64, 65?, 66, 71, | 44% 103, 106, 109, 116, 124, 130, 131, { 472 J CoLtorapo—4, 19, 33, 36, 37, 43, 44, 45, 47, 49, 61, 80, 82, 88, 94,) 25* 97, 99, 117, 124, 126, 130, 131, 1452, 146, 149, 151. \ 1? Connecticut—4, 47, 61, 63, 73, 74, 75, 79, 80, 82, 87, 94, 95, 96, 97, 113, 115, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 40* 100, 104, 105, 111, 112, 133,135, 141, 142, 143, 144, 146, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152. J Daxota—4, 33, 47, 61, 97, 992, 111, 117, 122, 124, 125, 127, 130, 131, 150, 151. 15* 1? * Woodsia Plummere Lemmon (Botanical Gazette Jan. 1832), is apparently avery glandular form of this species. Davenport} 608 [Feb. 2, 112, 113, 115, 118, 122, 127, 133, 185, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 152. DELAWARE—4, 61, 63, 78, 74, 75, 80, 82, 93, 94, 96, 100, 104, it 28* Dist. or Corumpra—4, 47, 61, 63, 74, 80, 82, 92, 98, 94, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 118, 122, 125, 188, 141, 142, 143, 144, 10, 26% 151, 152. Fiorma—1, 2, 3, 7, 9, 10, 28, 58, 59, 61, 62, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 73, 74, 77, 80, 812, 82, 84, 89, 90, 91, 94, 96, 100, 104, 108, 109, | 46* 114, 119, 121, 122, 134, 1362, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, ( 2? 153, 154, 155. Grorcta—29, 31, 61, 73, 74, '75, 81, 85, 93, 122, 133, 142, 144, 154. 14* InpaHo—61, 94, 102. 9% Inurno1s—4, 7, 33, 47, 61, 63, 732, '75, 78, 80, 82, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 100, 104, 105, 1112, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 133, 135, 142, 143, | 30* 144, 150, 151. 2 InprAna—4, 1%, 31, 47, 61, 63, 73, 75, 78, 80, 82, 87, 92, 93, 94, 96, 100 104, 105, 1112, 115, 1172, 118, 122, 128, 124, 195, | 33* 133, 135, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 152. a INDIAN TERRITORY—36, 47, 115, 133. 4* Iowa—4, 33, 44, 61, 63, 80, 82, 94, 95. 9* %* Kansas—20, 312, 47, 63, 75, 92, 115, 122, 124, 133, 151. \ : Kentucky—4, 7, 31, 35, 47, 61, 63, 66, 75, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 85, 86, ) ie 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 113, 115, 118, 122, 124, 125, 127?, 133, 135, 137, 141, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 1527. j a LovurstanNa—7, 61, 63, 73, 74, 80, 92, 93, 94, 95, 100, 104, 105, 109, 111, 114, 122, 125, 142, 144, 150, 151, 153. \ 23 Marine—4, 61, 63, 73, 80, 82, 94, 95, 96, 97, 100, 102?, 104, 105, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 118, 122, 128, 124, 125, 127, 133, 135, 142, 148, 144, 145, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152. MaryLanp—4, 31, 61, 63, 738, 74, 75, 78, 80, 82, 85, 87, 93, 94, 95, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 112, 118, 115, 118, 122, 124, 127, 138, 135, 141, 142, 148, 144, 150, 151, 152. Massacuusetts—4, 44, 47, 61, 63, 73, 74, 75, 80, 82, 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 100, 104, 105, 111, 112, 113, 115, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 1237; 133, 13b,) 1445 ‘Ade, 143, 144, 145, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152. Micuican—4, 43, 44, 47, 61, 63, 73, 74, 75, 80, 82, 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 99, 100, 102, 104, 105, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 117, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 131, 183, 135, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 151. MrnnEsota—4, 31, 44, 47, 61, 63, '75, 93, 94, 95, 97, 100, 104, 110, 111, 115, 118, 123, 125, 127-180; 148, 150; 151. ; MississrPPi—7, 66, 73, 80, 94, 96, 100, 122, 142, 144, 150. 11* 1883.] 609 (Davenport. Missourt—4, 7, 20, 31, 33, 35, 47, 61, 63, 66. 75, 78, 80, 82, 92, 93, 94, 96, 100, 104, 111, 118, 122, 124, 125, 183, 135, 142, 143, + 33 144, 150, 151, 152. i Monrana—4, 97, 99, 111, 122, 124, 125, 127, 150, 151. 10* Nepraska—t, 33, 44, 47, 61, 63, 75, 80, 82, 92, 94, 95, 96, 99, 104, ) 9 150, 151. J NEvADA—37, 103. Q% New Hampsutre—4, 44?, 479, 61, 63. 732, '75?, 80, 82, 872, 93, 94, 95, ) aie 97, 100, 102, 104, 105?, 110, 111, 112?, 113, 115, 118, 122, 123. 124, 125?, 127, 128, 133, 135, 142, 148, 144, 148, 150, 151, 152. ) 8 New Jersrey—4, 31, 44, 61, 63, 73, 74, 75, 79?, 80, 82, 83, 85, 87, 93, ) age 94, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 118, 115, 118, 122, 124, 125, 127, - ; 13%, 135, 138, 141, 142, 143, 144, 149, 150, 151, 152. J Lv New Mextco—12, 13, 14, 16, 19, 20, 21?, 26, 28?, 29, 33, 34, 36, 37, ) sew 40, 47, 482, 49, 502, 54, 55?, 56, 66, 81, 82, 88, 124, 131? 132, > os 133, 139. hot New Yorr—4, 31, 44, 47, 61, 63, 73, '74, '75, 76, 79, 80, 82, 85, 86, 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 100, 102, 104, 105, 110, 111, 112, | 52* 113, 115, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 128, 129, 133, 135, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152. y Norta Carotmna—4, 7, 29, 31, 35, 47, 61, 63, 66, 74, 75, 78, led 82, 85, 87, 92, 93, 94, 96, 100, 104, 105, 111, 118, 122, 124, + 39* 125, 127, 133, 135, 141, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 152. J Outo—4, 7, 47, 61, 63, 73, 75, 80, 82, 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, a | o4% 104, 105,111, 118, 115, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 1277, 133?, = 135, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 152. a OrEcon—4, 5, 6, 8, 11, 34, 43, 46, 57, 61, 63, 64, 71, 82, 94, 97, 98, ) o4x 101, 111, 124, 180, 131, 133, 151. J x PrEnnsyivanra—4, 31, 44, 47, 61, 63, 73, 742, '75, 78, 79, 80, 82, 85, ) 87, 92, 98, 94, 96, 97, 100, 102, 104, 105, 111, 112, 113, 115, { 42% 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 188, 185, 141, 142. eee 9? 148?, 150, 151, 152. RaovE Isuanp—4, 61, 63, 73, '74, '75, 80, 82, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, oe) 104, 105, 111, 112, 113, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 183, 135, + 34* 141, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151, 152. j SoutH CaroLtina—7, 73, 80, 82, 84?, 109, 150, 153, 154. ie TENNESSEE—7, 29, 35, 61, 63, 75, 76, 78, 81, 82, 85, 86, 87, 100, 111, ) 124, 125, 133, 135, 1387, 141, 152. jy 22* Texas—7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20, 26, 28, 29, 30, 33, 35, 40, 47, 48, 49, } 50, 54, 55, 56, 61, 65, 66, 80, 81, 82, 109, 120, 121, 132, 133, L 3n* 189, 152, 153. J Davenport,] 610 [Feb. 2, Uran—-23, 24, 33, 43, 45, 57, 61, 63, 66, 94, 99, 108, 117, 130, 181. 15* Vermont—4, '44, 47, 61, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83, 87, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 100, 102, 104, 105, 110, 111, 112, 118, 115, 118, 122, 123, | yoy 124, 125, 127, 128, 129, 183, 135, 142, 148, 144, 145, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152. Virernta, including W.Va.—4, 7, 31, 35, 61, 63, 66, 74, 752, 80, 81, 82, 85, 87, 92, 93, 94, 97, 104, 105, 111, 113, 115, 118, 124, | 30* 127, 133, 135, 141, 1422, 1442, 150, 151. . 3? WASHINGTON TERRITORY—4, 5, 8, 11, 34, 48, 57, 61, 63, 71, 82, 21* 94, 99, 101, 103, 111, 124, 130, 145, 150, 151, 152. 1? Wisconstn—4, 31, 33, 44 47, 61, 63, 75, 80, 82, 92, 98, 94, 95, 97, 100, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113, 115, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, | 35* 133, 135, 142, 143, 144, 150, 151. Wyomine TERRITORY—57, 131, 145, 150. 4* Remarks. No positively accurate comparisons can be made from the incomplete data furnished by these partial tables, but so far as now known. New York, Michigan, Florida, Vermont and California, in the order named, have the greatest number of species of ferns within their respective limits. In the first, second and fourth of these States, the number has, in all probability, reached, or very nearly reached, its maximum, while in the third and fifth it is likely to be largely increased, and those States from their favorable situations, climates, and comparatively extensive, unex- plored territory, will, undoubtedly, lead all other States in the future. Arizona and Texas alone being at all likely to compete with them for the highest place. If, however, we distribute our ferns according to the number of square miles of territory which each of the five first named States contains, then Vermont will iead the others, her ratio being as 1 fern to every 2262 square miles, that for New York as 1 to 814, Michigan 1 to 11914, Florida, 1-to 1289, and California 1 to 4295} square miles of territory. Taking the extremes-of the territorial limits, excluding the District of Columbia, which has 1 species to cach 24 miles of territory, Rhode Island gives us 1 species for each 384, and Delaware 1 to 75, as compared with Pennsylvania’s 1 to 109}, Colorado’s 1 to 4200 and Texas 1 to 78782 square miles. If we take an average of the fern-flora for the different geographical sections of the United States, on the basis of the present list, New England gives us an average of 40 species for each State, the Middle Atlantic States 40, the South Atlantic 27, the Gulf States 23, and the Central States 25, the Pacific States 23, and the Territories an average of 19. The returns from most of the Territories are altogether too meagre at present to permit of any comparisons, and those already made will neces- sarily undergo considerable modification as the gaps in the lists for other States fill up. But while no absolutely reliable comparisons can be made, nor the pre- 1883.) 611 [Davenport, cise limits of each species be determined from the present incomplete tables, we may ascertain from them, with a tolerable degree of certainty, the range of certain species, and find material for some interesting observa- tions. Thus we find the cosmopolitan Asplenium trichomanes and Pteris aqui- lina in thirty-five and thirty-nine, out of the forty-eight States and Territories respectively, while their actual presence in a greater num- ber may be safely assumed. Polypodium vulgare appears in thirty- three, with the same, or an even greater probability of its occur- ing in others in its favor, while its near congeners, P. californicum, and P. faleatum, as well as P. scouleri are restricted to two or three States. Of the remaining Polypodiums, all but zweanum, which appears in twelve States are restricted to the single State of Florida, which furthermore monopolizes all the species we lave in six genera, the tropical character of these bzing at once indicated by this fact. The only other State (since the discovery of Scolopendrium in Tennessee has divided with New York the honor of that ferns presence) which may now claim a monopoly of a genus is New Jersey, the very local Schizea being restricted to a portion of its limits and again restricted to a single species. Adiantum pedatum occurs in thirty-five States or Territories, while its congener, A. capillus-veneris, is restricted to thirteen, and the tropical A. tenerum to a single State. The Osmundas are represented by one or more species in twenty-nine, Onoclea in twenty eight States or Territories, and these probably occur in more, although not reported west of the Rocky mountains. 0. sensibilis extends as far west as Dakota and Montana, and in the last mentioned Territory is said to have been discovered in a fossil state. Cystopteris fragilis extends from Maine to California, through thirty- three States and Territories, apparently avoiding the South Atlantic and Gulf States, with the exception of North Carolina, while C. bulbifera occurs in twenty-five, covering a more unequal, but broader range south and west, the limits of which terminate in Louisiana and Dakota. C. montana so recently discovered in Colorado by Brandegee is reported elsewhere in the United States only from Alaska. The Aspidia are represented in forty- four, the Asplenia and Botrychia in forty-one States or Territories each, while the drought-resisting Gymnogrammes, Notholenas, Cheilanthes, and Pellzas are almost wholly restricted to the arid regions west of the Rocky mountains, a few scattering species only coming East, North or South. It is interesting to note the changes which have taken place in the num- ber and distribution of our ferns since Redfield published his valuable paper on the ‘‘ Geographical Distribution of the Ferns of North America,”’ in the Torrey Club Bulletin for January, 1875,and Watt, his admirable re- view of Mrs. Lyell’s Hand-Book in the Canadian Naturalist for 1870. Mr. Redfield enumerated 125 species, which have been increased up to the pres- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. BY. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1883. Davenport.] 612 (Feb. 2, ent time to 153 or 156, according as we may consider the claims of certain ferns to specific rank, or their right to a place in our fern-flora, while the range of the older species has been more or less extended. Taking the number in the list accompanying this paper for a basis, viz., 155, we have an increase of 30 species since 1875, and we may confidently’ expect a still greater increase as the vast regions of Arizona, New Mexico and Western Texas are more thoroughly explored. Fournier enumerates 505 Mexican species, of which number only 55 are known to occur within our own limits; but how many of the remaining 450 are lurking in the caiions this side of the Mexican border, to reward the patient search of keen-eyed botanists, remains yet to be made known. SUPPLEMENTARY. The foregoing tables were prepared in March, 1882. Since that time several additions have been made to our Fern Flora, and many additional eredits noted ; these have so changed the status of the leading States as given in the text, and are so interesting for comparisons by which to mark progressive changes in the future, that it seems best to place them on rec- ord here in a separate note. By the certain addition of 7, and the probable addition of 1 or 2 more to the entire fern flora of the United States, our list is increased from 155 to 162 or 164. . ¥ Numbers 94, 99 and 151 are to be credited to Alaska; 45, 131 and 124 to Idaho ; 117 to Washington Territory ; 124 to Utah, and 97 ( Var. calea- reum) to Iowa. California by the addition of numbers 24, 99, 117 and 154, advances from the fifth to the second place, and, if a little Woodsia lately received from Lower California proves to be obtusa, as seems probable, and the doubtful credits were verified, would lead New York. Florida by the addition of Polypodium Swartzii takes rank for the pres- ent with Michigan, although if we concede the presence of the doubtful credits Michigan will still lead by one species and take rank as third, a position, however, which she would be almost certain to yield up, perhaps before the close of another season. Arizona by the addition of 81, 120, Polypodium thyssanolepis, Pellea marginata, Cheilanthes lendigera, Cheilanthes ———— sp.? Notholena Aschenhorniana, Asplenium monanthemum, Asplenium Glenniei and Aspidium ——~sp.? pushes rapidly to the front, contests the honor of third position with Florida and Michigan, and threatens before long to become a close competitor for the leading place. Glancing over the entire field of our Fern Flora at the present time, it is safe to assume from the nature of her territory, and the close proximity of an extensive and almost unexplored mountainous area to a portion of Mexican territory rich in ferns, that Arizona in time will lead all the other States in the wealth of her fern flora. 1883,.] 613 [Muhlenberz. Obituary Notice of the Rev. Dr. Charles Porterfield Krauth. By F. A. Muhlenberg. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 16, 1883.) Both sacred and profane history is largely made up of biography. It is true, great events are also therein described, as intimately connected with the life of man ; brt human beings themselves have ever been a more in- teresting study, than the changes produced by their agency. Man is the most luminous point, in the prose, or poetic narratives, found in the litera- ture of all nations. His successes, his triumphs over obstacles, material and spiritual, as well his reverses, have been handed down, to successive generations, to imitate or avoid. Nations, civilized or uncivilized, have exalted through their bards, historians and orators, the fame of those, most eminent among them, in the varied departments of human enterprise or ambition, and have deposited these accounts in their archives, that the memory of their noble deeds might thus be perpetuated. The intuitions of the race have thus prompted them to pay a proper tribute to the divine and eternalin men. Thus the example of those most distinguished for their virtue, their learning, their benevolence, their skill, has always been a beacon light, to “allure to brighter worlds, and lead the way.”’ Such principles have, no doubt, influenced this venerable and honorable Society, to adopt the rule of having an Obituary Notice on the decease of one of its members. In accordance, therefore, with the wishes of this Society, and by the request and appointment of its honored President, we have prepared the fullowing sketch of our lately deceased, much be- loved, and illustrious member, Charles Porterfield Krauth. The subject of our sketch was born in the town of Martinsburg, Va., March the 17th, 1823. His father was the Rev. Charles Philip Krauth, at that time pastor of the Lutheran Churches of Martinsburg and Shepherds- town, Va., and his mother’s maiden name was Catherine Susan Heiskell, of Staunton, of the same State. Charles Philip Krauth was a native of Pennsylvania, having been born in Montgomery county, and was care- fully educated in private in Greek, Latin and French by his father, who had emigrated to our State from Germany, in the capacity of teacher and organist, being a member of the German Reformed Church, whilst his wife was a Lutheran, and a native of this country. After the comple- tion of his preparatory studies, under his father, having a preference for medicine, he pursued, for a time, his medical studies, as a pupil of Dr. Sel- den, of Norfolk, Va., and attended one course of lectures in the University of Maryland. From a conscientious change of views as to his duty, he abandoned medicine for the ministry, became, first, pastor of the churches in Virginia already mentioned ; then in 1827, of St. Matthew’s Lutheran Church in this city, whence he was transferred, in the year 1833, to Gettysburg, Pa., to become ‘‘ Professor of Biblical and Oriental Litera- ture,’’ in the Theological Seminary of the Lutheran Church, there located, Muhlenberg.] 614 (March 16, and subsequently was elected President of Pennsylvania College, at the same place, in‘which useful and important positions, he labored with great fidelity and success, until his death in the year 1867, in the 71st year of his age. The life, employments, and character of the elder Dr. Krauth, had so much to do with the usefulness and exalted fame of his son, Charles Porterfield Krauth, that the writer felt it to be necessary to give the above particulars with reference to him, and to append a few statements from some of those who knew him best, in regard to his extraordinary ability and excellence. In this way, we can obtain clear views of the genial and ennobling influences under which the younger Dr. Krauth was reared. One of his most intimate friends, long associated with the father whilst he was President of Pennsylvania College, in an interesting sketch of his life, says of him: ‘‘A character so near perfection, a life so almost blame- less isseldom found. He was one of the purest and best men that ever lived.’’ Another friend, now Professor in Columbia College, gives us this estimate of him: ‘‘ For me his character possessed attractions perfectly irresistible, and I loved him with an intensity that beggars description.” A third gentleman, who spent a week with him at a comparatively early period of his life, remarks: ‘‘His conversation was so instructive, his counsels were so wise, his manners were so gentle, his spirits so buoyant that I learned more practical wisdom than in any other week of my life.’ It was the good fortune of the writer to know, and be intimately associated with this eminent man, for seventeen years ; and it gives him pleasure to testify to the accuracy of his scholarship, soundness of judgment, keen perception, warmth of heart, eloquence of speech, nobility of nature, and eminence of Christian character. ‘‘He had,’’ to use the terse language of a writer in Johnson’s Encyclopedia, if I mistake not, his own son, re- cently deceased, ‘‘every quality which ensures a large distinction, except ambition.” Born of such parents, surrounded continually, from his earliest years, by such favorable influences for the improvement of his intellectual and moral powers, we have no difficulty in recognizing the cause, and in pre- dicting, from such antecedents, the certainty of the future eminence of our lamented fellow-member. He had the same eminent endowments of his revered father, in an intensified form; the same keenness of perception, eloquence of speech, soundness of judgment, richness of imagination, and warmth of heart. Through his mother, he was, perhaps, also gifted with a vivacity greater than that enjoyed by his father. He thus united in him- self the sober self-control of the Pennsylvanian, with the sprightliness and exuberant emotion of the Virginian. These native endowments were expanded also by early and constant companionship witb his father, ‘‘who knew all literature,’ and his profoundly learned friends, ‘‘ who knew all philosophy,’’ and access to, and use of the valuable library he possessed. In society, as well as in the case of individuals, auspicious influences for growth, become cumulative, anda maximum good result is the product of 1883.] 615 (Mublenberg. their combination. Children often thus exceed in eminence illustrious parents, by the possession of accumulated endowments, and the faithful use of increased opportunities of culture. The son continued under the more immediate care of his father during the remainder of his ministry at Martinsburg, his pastorate in Philadelphia, and the earlier years of his residence in Gettysburg. After the removal of his father to the latter place, he became a student in Pennsylvania College, and was graduated there in the year 1839, in a class of fourteen members, most of whom are now deceased, As the bud conceals within itself the beauty of the future flower, so do the unfolding powers of the youth foreshadow the direction, and extent of the excellence of the fully developed man. From personal recollec- tions, but chiefly from letters from some of his yet surviving classmates, and intimate friends, we can say something of the peculiar traits of char- acter he exhibited when he was a student in college, or in his boyhood ; tor he was still a boy, at least in years, having become a college graduate, when he was but sixteen years of age. The writer spent one session of a collegiate year at Gettysburg, fifty years since, with him whose earthly career has so recently terminated in such golden radiance. He cannot speak very confidently of him at that time, for in consequence of being older in years, and having removed to another institution, he was but seldom thrown into his society. Memory, however, still retains the image of his personal appearance, a frail, atten- uated form, apparently destined to a brief period of existence. He is not able to speak, from his own personal knowledge, of his intellectual pecu- liarities, for the reasons already mentioned, and because, at that period, when he was about ten years of age, they had not yet been sufficiently displayed to form any satisfactory judgment. He can affirm this much of him, that he never thought at that time that he was destined to survive long, or to attain such extended and deserved fame in letters. The writer’s deficient knowledge is fully supplemented by letters which are before him, of his fellow-students and classmates, in which he is graphically presented to us, as he appeared to them. One of these, now a Doctor of Divinity in the Presbyterian Church, speaks of him, ‘‘as hav- ing inherited some of his father’s easy-going disposition, but capable of great passions, and great efforts,’’ ‘‘fond of fun,”’ ‘‘an inveterate pa ““sarcastic,’’ having ‘‘a ready and comical trick of exaggeration,’’ a great lover and declaimer ot Shakespeare, and of large literary culture. Another classmate, the Rev. Dr. Charles Hay, of the Lutheran Theological Seminary at Gettysburg, in a letter to the writer, in which he says, ‘‘ they were boys together, and bed-fellows for a year,’’ speaks of his departed friend in the most kindly manner, and givesa very satisfactory account of his whole student life. The whole letter would be useful in print, but the limits to which we have to confine ourselves, will allow us only to quote so much of it as will be sufficient to give us a clear idea of his intellectual peculi- arities at that period of his lite. He remarks: ‘The cast of our brother’s Muhlenberg.] 616 [March 16, mind was metaphysical. We delighted in the English studies of the col- lege course (with the exception of mathematics), and in these easily dis- tanced his seniors, some of whom numbered twice his years. He was a voracious reader, devouring with avidity almost every thing that he could lay his hands upon. Thus absorbed, he became oblivious to the lapse of time, and was frequently, we may almost say, habitually negligent of the proper preparation forthe regular recitations. * * * His mind worked with amazing celerity, and his fund of general information was remarka- bly extensive in one so young. * * * The drudgery of routine was always distasteful to him, and he had often, in the recitation room, to be aroused from a reverie, into which his poetic fancy had Jed him away, as into the dreamland, where he loved to linger. With a keen sense of the ludicrous, he seemed unable to resist the temptation to make sport of the unfortunate weaknesses and blunderings of the less active minds around him. The youngest in a large class * * * he found abundant op- portunity for the display of his lively wit, which, with all its native kind- liness and playful geniality, was sometimes the reverse of welcome to those at whom it was aimed.’’ Those who had constant opportunities of seeing Dr. Krauth in his subsequent life, will recognize the coincidence of this accurate portraiture of his early life with the features of character he dis- played, almost to his dying hour, the only difference being that they were placed more under the control of reason, and their rough edges had been removed ‘by his native kindliness,’’? made more kindly, by continual ad- vances in Christian principle and love. His collegiate career was now closed, and it was necessary for him to decide upon a profession, in which he might more usefully employ his native and improved capacities. Ido not think he was long in coming to a conclusion ; for two years before his graduation, in connection with the dear friend already named, he had determined to devote himself en- tirely to the service of the Redeemer, and had been admitted, by the rite of Confirmation, to the communion of the Christian Church. On the occasion when these two interesting youths made up their minds to take this decided stand, Dr. Hay remarks that the elder Dr. Krauth, intensely interested for the welfare of his son, made a most fervent prayer in their behalf, and he gives his conception of it, by exclaiming: ‘‘Sucha prayer!’’ And the same thing is alluded to by another, well acquainted with the facts, who remarks: ‘‘Many there are who will never forget that prayer. * * * A prominent lawyer in the State, and an elderin the Presbyterian Church, ascribes his usefulness to the influence of that prayer.’? The elder Dr. Krauth was inimitable for the fervency and pathos of his supplications on all occasious. This first determined step of the son on the side of Christianity, in con- nection with the instructions, wishes and prayers of his venerated father, prepared the way for the second, the devotion of himself to the church in the ministry of the gospel. The loving father of our lamented friend experienced greater joy, without doubt, in this determination of his son 1883.] - 617 | Muhlenberg. to devote himself to the holy and responsible office of the ministry, than did Philip, of Macedon, when he counted himself happy, not so much on account of the birth of a son, as because he had an Aristotle to conduct his education. Acting in accordance with this purpose, the subject of our notice entered the Theological Seminary of the Lutheran Church, at Get- tysburg, as student, and finished his theological course, in the Institution in which his own father was one of the professors, in the year 1841, and first was licensed in the same year to preach the gospel by the Synod of Maryland ; and then ordained, by the same ecclesiastical body, to the holy office of the ministry, when he was but nineteen years of age. The preparatory stages of his education are now over, and he enters into the arena of conflict. Nearly one-third of his life, as we now know, had been passed in the work of preparation ; the remaining two-thirds were to be spent in more active efforts for the good of others; in the further development of his powers, and in extending his studies in new and more difficult fields of intellectual toil. As we intend to contemplate his suc- cessful efforts, during this latter period, as preacher, editor, theologian and philosopher, as well as his estimable qualities as a man, we regard it to be both useful and necessary, before proceeding with the considera- tion of the topics, to give a condensed summary of the facts with refer- _ ence to the positions he occupied, whilst discharging these different offices. His regular pastorate of Lutheran churches extended from 1842 to 1868 ; at Baltimore from 1842-47 ; Martinsburg, Shepherdstown and Winchester, successively from 1848-55 ; Pittsburg, 1855-59: St. Mark’s, Philadelphia, 1859-64 ; St. Stephen’s, in the same city, 1866-68, including ten months spent in the islands of St. Thomas and Santa Cruz, West Indies, anda short temporary service at St. John’s Lutheran Church, Philadelphia, in the absence of the regular pastor. Though not a regular pastor after this period, he continued to preach, when requested, throughout his life. He was elected ‘‘ Norton Professor of Systematic Theology and Ecclesiastical Polity,’ in the Lutheran Theological Seminary at Philadelphia, in the year 1864; ‘Professor of Intellectual and Moral Philosophy ’’ in the Univer- sity of Pennsylvania in 1868 ; Vice-Provost, in 1878 ; the subject of Logic was added to his chair in 1874, and that of History in 1881; and these positions he held with distinguished ability until his death. Besides these positions as professor, he was editor of the ‘‘ Lutheran and Missionary,’’ from 1861-66; Trustee cf the University of Pennsylvania from 1866-68 ; President of the General Council of the Lutheran Church 1870-80. He was likewise a Member of the Oriental, Philosophical and Historical Societies of this State; and also of the Committee for the Re- vision of the Scriptures. In each and all of these important positions, his profound learning and wisdom were eminently useful, and greatly appreciated by his distinguished associates. A few particulars, of a more private nature, are here also added, to give this part of our sketch completeness. He was twice married; in 1843, to Miss Susan Reynolds of Baltimore ; and in 1854, to Miss Mary Virginia Muhlenberg.] 618 [March 16, Baker, of Winchester, Va. The degree of D.D. was conferred upon him, by Pennsylvania College, in 1856 ; and that of LL.D., by the same Institu- tion in 1874. He spent the summer vacation, in the year 1880, in Germany ; gathering information, and visiting places, for a Life of Luther, which he had been requested, by the Church to which he belonged, to prepare ; but which we deeply regret he did not live to complete ; the same period in the summer of 1881, he was visiting Canada, for the benefit of his health, during which time he wrote his, ‘‘Cosmos,’’ the last one of 1882 he was at Mt. Desert Island, on the coast of Maine; and his death occurred, January 2d, 1883. It will be seen, from the preceding particulars of his life, that his labors were divided between two professions, often either permanently, or tem- porarily conjoined, in aim and usefulness closely allied with each other, that of the ministry and professor in institutions of learning and religion. Whilst our friend had qualities of mind and heart to make him useful, in either of these professions, he frequently informed me, that he much pre- ferred the chair of the professor to the pulpit. Nor was this owing to the fact, that his pastoral labors and pulpit efforts had not met with the approval of the people, or had been wanting in success; but because he believed, that the sphere of influence for good was wider in the former, than in the latter. We know, from the best evidence, that both in the country, as well as in the city, in the congregations he served, he was highly honored for his ability in the pulpit; and greatly esteemed and beloved for his personal character. With increase of years and experience, he gave increasing satisfzction, and acquired additional fume. A few, it is true, found fault with the peculiar tones of his voice, and peculiarities of attitude, in his early ministry ; and some, at a later period, with the labored character of many of his written discourses, but his greatness was generally recog- nized. : These slight defects of manner disappeared with increase of years, so that the tones of voice and mode of delivery became agreeable, and little open to censure. He preached both with, and without a manuscript. His writ- ten discourses displayed more fully his imaginative power, beauty of ex- pression, and the depth and extent of his learning; but his unwritten ones, the pathos and force of the eloquent orator. When he spoke with- out notes, his words were, like those of his excellent father, who always used this method of preaching, for the pleasure and edification of the people. It was then, that ‘‘the common pcople heard him gladly,’’ whilst his written discourses were better adapted toa higher grade of hearers. The latter class of auditors were carried away with admiration for his learning and great ability ; whilst the former were instructed and deeply moved, by the glowing words which welled forth spontaneously from his loving heart. The writer recalls to mind four separate occasions, espe- cially, when he had the pleasure of listening to his preaching. The earliest one was in the year 1864, during a rebellion of the students in Pennsyl- +1C 1883. } 61 7) {Muhlenberg. vania College, against the Faculty of the Institution, on account of dis- satisfaction with the distribution of college honors. The theme selected by the speaker, on this occasion, was the conduct of Rehoboam, in listen- ing to the advice of the young men, instead of being guided by the counsel of the more aged, whereby the kingdom of Israel was rent into two parts. The subject was handled with such excellent judgment, and great power, that its effects were very marked upon the minds of the intensely excited youth ; and contributed largely in bringing them again under the control of reason and Christian principle. Another very elaborate sermon, on the distinguishing peculiarities of the Lutheran Church, marked with all the profundity of thought, copiousness of illustration, vigor and beauty of expression, which are found in his written and printed sermons, the writer heard with great satisfaction, on two separate occasions; when it was listened to and admired by the large audiences, before whom it was de- livered, with enraptured attention. The last two, however, which were delivered without notes, and without much previous preparation, made the greatest impression upon the mind and heart of the writer; one, de- scriptive of the mission of the Saviour, based on the passage: ‘‘He went about doing good ;” the other, within quite a recent period, explanatory of the verse: “the whole creation groaneth and travaileth in pain to- gether until now.” This was a grand effort, and was upon a subject which seems to have been, at this period of his life, a favorite one with our departed friend, for it is alluded to in one of his last literary publica- tions, the ‘‘ Cosmos,”’ in the two following stanzas : ‘*Yet the world we may not love, Melts into a happier day, When at God’s transforming word Sin and death shall pass away. ° Oh, for that transcendent change Which her bridal shall recall, And with robes of spotless white Cover o’er her crimson pall.” There are, lying before me, quite a number of his printed discourses, sermons and essays, in volumes appropriated to such literary productions, belonging to different periods of his pastoral life ; they all present the same general features of excellence, and defects. They are full of inventive and imaginative power, display great extent of reading and profundity of thought, but sometimes, owing to the neglect, perhaps, of mathematical study during his collegiate course, are deficient in perspicuity, by a too abundant accumulation of particulars, or variety of illustrations. This characterizes more especially his earlier writings ; after he turned his atten- tion more fully to philosophical study, there is a marked improvement, in precision of statement, perspicuity and terseness of expression. Our limits will not allow us to quote any passages in proof of our assertion. The pastoral life of our fellow-member prepared the way for his pro- found studies, as a theologian and theological professor. Circumstances PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xx. 113. 3z. PRINTED APRIL 4, 1883. Muhlenberg.] 620 [March 16, might have so influenced him, as to have conducted him on to the further cultivation of\ the imaginative and poetic element of his nature, as it was manifested in his collegiate life, and in his first sermons ; but he was led by what we might call an accident, but which, no doubt, was the provi- dence of God, to the more complete improvement of the rational faculty ; and then he was turned aside into the domain of logical and speculative theology. In the list of his published writings, during the period from his ordination to the ministry, to the time of his election to the theological professorship, numbering twenty-six, more than half of the entire num- ber are profound papers on theology and psychology. In one of them, written in 1858, which contains an account of the bibliography of the Augsburg Confession, there are twenty pages of the ‘‘ Evangelical Re- view,’’ taken up with the list of titles of books on the subject, one hundred or more in number, all, or most of which, he had in his own library. He must have had at that time, the idea in his mind, for some reason or other not known to us, that he was to be distinguished as a theological professor ; and with a view to this, had already commenced collecting that valuable library, in this special department, which at his death amounted to 14,000 volumes, and had cost him $30,000. Many of these papers, on the, ‘‘ Re- lation of the Confessions to the Reformation ;’’ the ‘‘ Lord’s Day ;’’ ‘‘The Mass ;’’ ‘‘Liturgies,’’ &c., were modified, improved, and inserted with his latest views, in his greatest and best book: ‘‘The Conservative Reforma- tion,’’ which first appeared in the year 1871. How this particular direction was given to his studies, we are taught by one of his friends, whom we have already quoted. He remarks, that he asked on one occasion, the elder Dr. Krauth, how his son, ‘‘ the poet and preacher,’’ was changed into ‘‘the theologian and controversialist,”’ and he replied, that it was owing to the fact, that he had presented to his son ‘‘Charles,’”’ a copy of Chemnitz, who was a distinguished Lutheran theological champion, in the era of the Reformation, against the dogmas of the Roman Catholic Church, as laid down by the Council of Treat. This, so faras known to us, was the first stimulus given, for the intensified development of his native turn, for speculative truth. The same kind of studies was pursued, and the same kind of writing continued also during the five years, from 1861 to ’66, whilst he was editor of the ‘‘ Lutheran and Missionary.’’ And though the poetic vein often re-appeared in him, in all the subsequent years of his life, and was exercised in the composition of fugitive pieces of poetry, either original or translations, the burden of his work was of a controversial character, on the subject of liturgies, diver- gencies of theological belief and kindred matter, during all this time. These discussions were conducted with amazing skill and learning, and with a wit and power of expression, sometimes tinged with severity, un- equalled in the Church ; and which always silenced, if they did not con- vince, those who were opposed to him. His words, during the heated controversies, which prevailed in the Lutheran Church in America, in the five years of his editorship, were like the arrows, sent into the Grecian 1883. ] 621 (Muhlenberg. camp, by the “‘ god of the silver bow.’’ Hundreds of such polished shafts were sent, with convincing and controlling power, during each week of the period of his editorship of the ‘‘ Lutheran and Missionary.”’ Brought thus to the front, by his studies, and his positions of influence, he was not long in realizing the dream of his early ministerial life, if we are right in our supposition, for in the year 1864, he was elected to the position of ‘‘ Norton Professor of Systematic Theology and Ecclesiastical Polity,’ in the Theological Seminary of the Lutheran Church, in Phila- delphia. He had now ample time and opportunity for exercising his skill in theological dialectics. | Additional articles of the same kind were published, with those which had appeared at an earlier period; and the culmination of his work in this department took place, when he prepared and gave to the world, in a grand volume, his ‘Conservative Reforma- tion,’’ to which allusion has already been made. This volume demands more than a passing notice, for it is the noblest monument of his vast theological learning and dialectical skill, immense acquaintance with the whole field of literature, and of his intense love for the faith and church of his forefathers. Besides this, it has other points of interest. One of these is stated by the distinguished author himself in the preface. In the Lutheran Church, both of the Fatherland and this country, there have always been two parties ; one more liberal in the interpretation of the Confessions ; the other more strict, allowing no deviation, in the smallest particulars, from the standards of belief. The Doctor, with great candor, acknowledges, as is known to most of the older ministers of our Church, that he once occupied a position entirely divergent from the views he defends, in this splendid volume. Thus he speaks: ‘‘No man can be more fixed in his prejudice against the views here defended, than the author himself once was; no man can be more decided in his opinion, that those views are false than the author is now decided, in his faith, that they are the truth. This decided change from laxity, to strict conformity with the old Lutheran faith, as it is sometimes called, was permanent with him, and he maintained it with unvarying consistency, until his departure from the Church Militant to the Church Triumphant. Again, the author shows that he has changed his views with sufficient reason, forall the prominent doctrines of the Lutheran Church, as presented in the Augsburg Confession, are discussed with great skill and independence of judgment, and in connection with this chief symbol, the subsequent ones are not overlooked. It is a complete defence of the whole system, with that independent survey of the field for himself, for which the author was noted, for he could truthfully quote, as applicable to himself, the sentiment of the Roman poet: ‘‘ Nullius ad- dictus jurare in verba magistri.”’ The subjects of Baptism, Original Sin and the Lord’s Supper, receive the most extended and varied discussion, because the most difficult, and the most frequently assailed by others. It is not generally known, that . Muhlenberg. ] 622 ; [Mareh 16, the Lutheran Church has a mode of presenting these subjects, in herjudg- ment in aceordance with the Scriptures, which require careful and dis- criminating study to understand, as is sufficiently proved by the mistakes into which men of the highest abillty in some of the other Christian de- nominations have fallen, in the attempt to state them as they understand them. The mode of the Saviour’s presence in the Supper ; the doctrine of the ‘‘communicatio idiomatum ;’’ the union of natures in the person of the Redeemer and consubstantiation, which the Lutheran Church is said to hold, but does not, have especially been the occasion of the grave mistakes made by the gentlemen to whom reference has above been made. They are known and believed by those only who have been brought up in the Lutheran Church, but they require profound acquaintance with the sub- ject, and native and philosophical acumen, to defend them against objec- tions, without falling into error. In this field, difficult though it be, our friend showed himself a complete master, and the careful study of these profound subjects is visible on every page. The volume contains several elaborate chapters, prepared years before, designed specially to correct the mistakes made on the above subject, by learned Doctors of Divinity in sister churches. The chapter also, on the history of the ‘‘ Formula of Concord,’’ which was prepared at a later period than some of the others, is exceedingly well fitted to show the solid theological learning, superior penetration, and in- dependence of judgment of our gifted and diligent associate. It amazes me whenever I read it, to see how he unravels the tangled history of the theological controversies which agitated Germany, during the latter part of the sixteenth century, and how he follows, with clearness of intellec- tual vision, the intricate thread of truth, with which he started, to its final issue in the adoption of this Symbol. It pleases me to find, that he does not condemn, where others bitterly condemn ‘‘the gentle Melanch- thon;’’ who had, by his laudable, though sometimes mistaken desire for peace and aversion to controversy, given occasion to some of those acri- monious disputes. Yet, with all his high regard and esteem for this fine scholar and excellent man, he is not blind to his faults, but censures him when he thinks him deserving of it. It is easy to see that the writer is guided in his judgment by the love of truth, and not by prejudice, and Melanchthon fares better in his hands, than he does,with many of his own countrymen and contemporaries. This was a fine field, for the exercise of that ‘‘speculative’’ mind, with which Providence had endowed the author of this volume, and which is displayed in it, with such happy re- sults. The independence of our able friend is shown also in an article, which he prepared during his ministerial life in the year 1857, on the Lord’s Day, which does not appear in this volume, but which must be alluded to, be- cause in it he expresses and defends views which do not harmonize with aw i 1883.] 623 (Muhlenberg. those of many of the German theologians, but which he defended, as in accordance with the teachings of Luther and the Confessions, and which he continued to hold, as he informed me near the end of his life. We are not able say why it was not published with the others, possibly he did not think it necessary to put it into this more permanent form. Some of the German theologians so explain disconnected statements of Luther, with- out taking them as a whole, that they dissipate altogether the divine obli- gation with reference to the observance of the Lord’s Day. Not so our friend. We allow him to speak for himself. ‘If Germany has not en- joyed a Christian Sabbath, it is because she has refused to follow what the principles of Luther would have given her. The Sunday of Luther is an entire day, not a half-day ; not a morning for the church and an afternoon for the beer saloon or the dance, or the idle saunter; but a day for holy works ; and holy thoughts ; a holy day, not a holiday. Neither the Augsburg Confession, nor the greatest theologians of the Church of the Augsburg Confession, denies the divine obligation ot the Christian Sab- bath. * * * Divine in its generic origin and obligation, and apostolic in its specific determination.’’ There is one delightful chapter of the book which has but little of a controversial character in it; it is a solemn requiem of praise in honor of Luther, from almost every land of Christendom. The instrument selected by God, for the great work of the Reformation, is the hero, who has caused their strings to vibrate, in such perfect unison. No where else can there be found such a collection of literary gems, bearing upon this one point. The writer’s soul was aglow with admiration and love for Luther, when he wrote this admirable chapter, and after the full array of testimonies of the most illustrious characters in his behalf, he closes the subject with these striking words: ‘‘ Luther abides as a power for all time. His image casts itself upon the current of ages, as the mountain mirrors itself in the river at its foot—the mighty fixing itself upon the changing.”’ We may safely say, in passing from this volume, to the consideration of his last publications on another subject and in a different sphere of his use- ful and honorable toil, that no one can read it without reaching the pro- found conviction that the author of it will bear favorable comparison with the ablest theologians of this or any other land. Little else can be said of it, except to express admiration of its merits ; if we may be allowed to say anything of a contrary nature, we would merely respeat a remark already made, with reference to some of his earlier writings, that his logic occa- sionally is wanting in perspicuity, from an excessive accumulation of par- ticulars, and now and then he exceeds the bounds of truth by indulging that vein of his complex nature, alluded to by one of classmates, ‘‘a ready and comical trick of exaggeration.’’ A single illustration will sufficiently explain our meaning, Thus he speaks of sects: ‘‘ The insect-minded sec- tarian allows the Reformation very little merit, except as it prepared the way for the putting forth, in due time, of the particular twig of Protest- Mublenberg.] 624 [March 16, antism, on which he crawls, and which he imagines bears all the fruit, and gives all the value to the tree. * * * The Reformation, as they take it, originated in the divine plan for furnishing a nursery for sectarian Aphides.”’ His native fondness for speculative truth, together with his studies in connection with theology, which, from the standpoint he accepted, almost necessarily involved the study of philosophy, prepared the way for his last position, Professor of Intellectual and Moral Philosophy in the University of Pennsylvania, to which he was elected in the year 1868 ; the subject of Logic having been added to it in 1874. In some of the articles of the ‘Conservative Reformation,’’ he shows his large acquaintance with the foremost philosophers of the English and Scotch schools, such as Mill, Hamilton and others ; and his fondness for studies of this kind, led him to publish an edition of Fleming’s Vocabulary of Philosophy, eight years before he was elected to the post of professor. If we mistake not, the attention of some of the Board of Trustees was first directed to him, on account of his prominence among the Lutheran pastors in Philadelphia, and thus he was elécted trustee in 1866, to represent the Lutheran Church, and the ability there displayed, and the acquaintance made with its mem- bers, and especially with Dr. Stillé, the Provost of the Institution, to whom it owes so much, his warm personal friend, shortly afterwards elevated him to the responsible position he occupied in it, which, with other additional duties and offices, he continued to discharge and to hold until his death. The department of Philosophy was the chief one, in which such volumes as Hamilton’s Metaphysics, Berkeley’s Philosophy, Whewell’s Morality, Butler’s Analogy, constituted the text books, which made the basis of his instruction, and through which he exerted a wide and lasting influence on his pupils. For the use of his department he edited Berkeley, and enriched it with notes of great valne, from all the different schools of philosophy among Christian nations, which appeared in 1874; and at the same time repub- lished in the same way, with a very learned introduction, Ulrici’s Strauss. Through these publications, and his lectures to his classes, from year to year, his reputation as a philosopher became as great in our land as in the department of theology. He was frequently appealed to as the highest authority in questions of a philosophical nature, and it was easy to antici- pate from the instructions of his able and excellent father, and his own subsequent studies in theology, what position he would take in this vast and intricate field of speculation. These two things dominated his views. Philosophy had been settled in his theological studies, for we find the principles of Butler, Berkeley and Hamilton, presenting salient points in these earlier investigations. He was, as we might have expected, from such antecedents, an ‘‘Idealistic Realist,’’ to quote the words of one of his favorite pupils, who understood well his views, and a philosopher of de- cided Christian character. It was his great aim to infuse these princi- ples into the minds of the students of the University whom he instructed in successive classes for almost fifteen years, and upon whom he left the 1883.] 625 [Muhlenberg. indelible marks of his power and varied learning. He has left behind him no regular system, and this is a matter to be regretted, except so far as it can be gathered from his annotated works, and the notes and recol- lections of his pupils. These, with his favorite authors, in this depart- ment, will always show us the genuine Christian philosopher. Butler’s Analogy was one of his favorite books, we see its principles brought out in his discussion of Original sin ; in his Introduction to Strauss and in his last poetic effusions, and we are gratified to quote his own words on this subject, to this effect : ‘‘that he regarded this as a monument to the truth of the Christian religion, which skal] endure to the end of time.’’ The edition of Ulrici’s Strauss, which he superintended, translated and furnished with an introduction, is a work of immense practical value. It is small in form, but on this account, not less, but more valuable. Ponder- ous volumes, like heavy artillery, are hard to manage, and have but few readers, but the smaller ones, which you can take with you to the fireside, are popular and effective with the largest number, like the small arms in the close and well-contested battle. The reader of the introduction con- templates with wonder the immense, almost boundless extent of the au- thor’s reading in physiology and philosophy. As he was regarded and called in early life a ‘‘voracious’’ reader in literature and the department ' of the imagination, so his appetite in later life was equally insatiate in physiology and philosophy. He seems to have sounded with his plum- met the subject in its profoundest depths, and widest extent, and after all his studies he remains the Christian philosopher still. It is gratifying to find a gentleman of such breadth of culture, defeating, on their own soil, and with their own weapons, the enemies of truth, of God and of man. He is, in his own peculiar style, severe on materialism, and still more severe on Strauss, the great advocate of infidelity andatheism. Speaking of the union of the supernatural, everywhere with the natural, in Butler’s line of thought, but his own words, he says: ‘‘Science moves. ever to- ward the proof, how supernatural is the natural; religion moves toward the proof, how natural is the supernatural. For nature, in the narrow sense, is in her spring, supernatural.’’ To expose such a system as mate- rialism ‘‘would involve the compression of a world to the dimensions of a pea.’’ ‘*Without the metaphysical spirit, the geologist possesses the penetration of an artesian auger, no more.’’ ‘‘ The intellectual beats the material in all long races.’’ The ‘‘new faith’’ of Strauss is characterized ‘fas conscious matter, reverencing and worshiping unconscious matter,’’ ‘‘asreason bowed at the altar of unreason, which had given it being ;’’ as ‘‘without God, without Providence, without spirit, freedom or accounta- bility ;’’ ‘‘ recognizing no creation or redemption or sanctification ;’’ ‘‘no heaven, no hell, * * * whose last enemy is not death, but immor- tality, its goal, extinction.’’ These and a long list of other features, se- verely yet truthfully present, in the language of the author, the repulsive deformity of this proposed ‘‘ new faith.”’ The volumes, on which the Doctor’s fame will chiefly rest, are the three Muhlenberg.] 626 ; (March 16, which have been mentioned. ‘‘The Conservative Reformation ;’’ ‘ Ul- rici’s Strauss ’’ ‘‘ Berkeley, with Notes,’’ and the translation of ‘‘ Tholuck’s Gospel of St.\John.’’ Through these, with the many and varied essays, articles for encyclopedias, editorials, lectures at the Seminary and University, sermons published or heard, and the large number of young men whom he helped to educate for the ministry, the other learned pro- fessions, and practical life, will cause his influence to be felt, for good, through all future time. Throughout the forty years of his very active and laborious life—had he lived, forty years this day—in imitation of the Great Teacher, ‘‘he served his generation faithfully, according to the will of God,”’ and he will be held in everlasting remembrance, as one of the great benefactors of the race. Our subject would be incomplete, did we not speak of his excellent qual- ities asa Christian man. Scholarly acquisitions are often tarnished, by moral, or personal defects, or obliquities. It was not so with our friend. The grand elements of his character were harmoniously united, with a natural simplicity, and an affluence of kindly feeling. He was very con- descending towards inferiors, and extremely fond of children, whom he could most successfully entertain and instruct. In his addresses to them he laid aside all that was repulsive, became one of them, disarmed all their fears, and attracted them to himself. Nor was this attractive power limited ~ to them; it was general. The extent of it was realized fully since his la- mented death. Friend and foe, the aged and the young, those of the same belief with himself, as well as those who occupied positions in theology directly opposite to his own; officers of the churches he served, and gen- tlemen associated with himself in public bodies, have, with great unanimity, testified both to his general excellence, as well as the warmth of heart, by which he drew them to himself. One, eminent in position, but often op- posed to him in debate, speaks of him as ‘‘cordial, genial, magnetic and brilliant, often winning his way to hearts that were closed to others, and forming personal attachments which no changes of time or circumstances could break.’’ Such a man could not fail to be respected and beloved. But the bowstring, after long use, when subjected to extraordinary ten- sion, will snap asunder. So it was with our departed friend. There is a limit to human exertion, and our bodies and minds will not endure indef- inite pressure. The superabundant labors, apparent in what we have said, but more fully known to his associates, together with the anxieties, sorrows, disappointments—greater, because kept to himself—which his friends knew but did not venture to allude to, out of regard for his feel- ings, by degrees brought his manly form to an early grave. We will not draw aside the veil which conceals these special troubles from the public gaze, to which he never himself made any allusion, except to say, ‘‘ the heart knoweth its own bitterness.’’ They are too sacred for publication, but they exerted no little influence in gradually undermining his vigorous health. The first intimation of any serious illness was communicated to the writer by a friend of the Doctor, who visited Germany with him, and ; | 9 ld 1883.] 62 4 [Muhlenberg, was his almost constant companion for three months. The next commu- nication was made by his family physician, who remarked at that time, that the only relief for the Doctor would be total cessation from work, but that mode of relief his multiplied engagements, and his conscientiousness did not allow him to adopt. He acted, as far as possible, in accordance with the advice of the physician, and spent the two succeeding long vacations of the years 1881 and 1882 in Canada, returned with his health recruited, but when his double duties in the two Institutions in which he was en- gaged, were resumed, he again lost ground, and it was apparent that the disease was preying on the vitals of his system. On his return from the last trip, in answer to a question of one of his friends as to his health, he replied with sadness, as though looking forward to an unfavorable result, “‘better, but not well.’? The truth of this became painfully manifest when he resumed his duties in the University. He was very far from being well. His associates soon observed that his vivacity and vitality, and his powers of endurance were rapidly decreasing. Especially marked was this decline in the daily chapel services. Each succeeding day, through increasing weakness, he brought his chair nearer to the reading desk, un- tilthe day before he was ordered by his physicians to relinquish all his duties, they were placed alongside of each other, and it was with difficulty he could stand up to perform the devotions. With such Christian forti- tude did he continue to discharge his duties during the progress of the disease to its finalissue. His principles would not allow him to forsake his post, until his powers were exhausted. The writer now believes. the Doctor was fully conscious of his approach- ing dissolution, for he could not take sufficient nourishment to support life, and, besides this, the tenderness and deep pathos of his prayers, when- ever allusion was made to death, disclosed the thoughts and feelings with- in. The writer conversed with him, for the last time, the day before he completed his official duties. He bade farewell to him, as he thought, for a few days, in front of the University, at the close of the recitations for the day ; it was with difficulty that he moved his exhausted body, yet the writer will never forget the almost angelic tenderness and sweetness of his language and his looks. Two days after this he was ordered by his physicians to take his bed, and, contrary to the expectations of all, he declined more rapidly than before, and two weeks subsequently, when the new year 1883 had but _ commenced, January 2d, amid his sorrowing friends, without much suf- fering, his noble spirit, sustained by the faith and hopes of the Gospel, was conveyed to the bosom of his Saviour, whom he had loved and served so well. The removal of such a man must be deeply mourned, for his place can- not readily be filled ; but we may comfort ourselves with the thought, to which the Provost of the University gave utterance in the chapel, two days after his death, that as he was suffering from an incurable disease, he could do no more on earth, his work was done, and well done, he had secured PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. XX. 113. 44. PRINTED APRIL 4, 1883. Cope.] 628 [March 16, the victor’s crown. We recall to mind, at this point, the distinguished Grecian philosopher, Socrates, surrounded by his weeping friends and pupils, whom he was reproving for their sorrow, and endeavoring to con- sole with his own joyful hopes for the future world as he was bidding them farewell ; and we can thus think of our Christian philosopher ad- dressing us, from the glory he has attained, in words used by himself, many years ago, in some reflections on the Transfiguration: ‘‘ Why do we think of the parting pressure of the hand, the last words of love, the dying moan, and not of the crown, the communion with Christ, their eternal repose, and our re-uuion with them? Why, with desolate hearts, will we continue to stretch our hands to the home of their rest and cry, come, come to ourarms? Blessed be God, that he will not hear our prayers. Blessed are the departed, that we cannot recall them from their joy, or wound their hearts by the knowledge that we are willing to disturb their bliss. No, it is not good to be here ; we know not what we say.” Fourth Contribution to the History of the Permian Formation of Texas. By EH. D. Cope.* (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 16, 1883.) PISCES. ECTOSTEORHACHIS CICERONIUS, sp. nov. The genus Ectosteorhachis Cope, is known up to the present time from ichthyolites, which do not exhibit the interior details of the structure of the skull. Several portions of crania having recently come into my hands, Iam able toadd some important features, and a new species, which I name as above. The base of the skull consists of ossified parachordals, which embrace the chorda dorsalis posteriorly and are continued for a short distance posteriorly asa tube. Anteriorly the chordal groove is open. Trabeculze not ossified. The cranial structure is an excellent illustration of a perma- nent embryonic type. Above and in front of the opening for the chorda, the neural canal enters the groove. The parachordals are subtriangular, presenting one angle forwards, and having the internal side that bounds. the groove straight and longitudinally grooved. The anteroexternal side is oblique and nearly straight, and is overhung by the osseous roof of the skull. These characters are identical in both species. The L. ciceronius differs from the #. nitidus in having a narrower inter- orbital region, and in the possession of small tubercles of ganoine on the posterior parts of the superior surface of the skull. These are seen on the sides of the surface, and are quite small, not numerous, and *The third contribution can be found at page 447 Proceedings of the Society for 1882, 1883.) 629 [Cope. of various sizes and shapes. They resemble shining seeds. In Z. nitidus these points are wanting, but there are rugosities on the postfrontal and pterotic regions ofa radiating character, not found in #. ciceronius. Measurements. M. No. 1. Length of skull to occiput above (muzzle worn)....... .069 MTELOLDItAl es WwiGthin. sects ciel erie sels ABeEMODECECTIOO OC see OLS No. 2. Length of osseous base of cranium (parachordal)...... .039 -)1s,5\\ai0 MEMO A 068: i ‘* between widest molars..... Me eer .036 Discovered by Mr. W. F. Cummins. EMPEDIAS PHASEOLINUS Cope, Proceeds. American Philosoph. Society, May, 1880 (Diadectes). The fine specimen of this species above mentioned, which was obtained by Mr. Cummins, includes some parts of the skeleton not or rarely found hitherto. The pelvis shows that the corresponding part described by me, Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1882, p. 448, belongs to another species of this group. ‘The clavicles are preserved, and enable me to identify the corresponding part of another species in which the struc- ture is more distinctly visible. This shows an episternum wedged in be- tween the adjacent extremities of the clavicles, which are here very robust. But a small part of it appears in the inferior surface, but superiorly it forms a plate which covers the symphysis of the clavicles, but does not extend posterior to them. The suture of the episternum with the clavicles below is a coarse interdigitation. Posterior to it is the symphysis of the clavicles. The skull of this specimen is the first that I have seen in this group which possesses a basioccipital bone and condyle. This proves that in the five other crania of allied species, it has fallen out, which indicates its very PROC, AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 48. PRINTED MAY 2, 1883. 636 [Jan. 5, weak attachment to the sphenoid. The lateral superior articular facets of the exoccipital bone are characteristic of the family, and of the genus Chilonyz. This skull also shows that the premaxillary bones may be dis- tinct, and that they extend but a short distance on the superior face of the muzzle. In this species the interorbital region is wide and concave, and the pa- rietal regions are swollen and convex. The supraorbital border is nearly straight, and has an open notch medially. The hyposphen varies in size in different parts of the vertebral column, and is generally very large. The neural spines have bilobate extremities. Stated Meeting, Jan. 5, 1883. Present, 8 members. President, Mr. Fratzy, in the Chair. The resignations of A. E. Outerbridge, Jr., dated May 15, 1882; of B. B. Comegys, dated Nov. 1 1882; of Alfred Stillé, dated Dec. 28, 1883; and of Horatio C. Wood, dated Jan. 3, 1888, were announced by the Treasurer, and on motion accepted. The death of John Forsyth Meigs, M.D., at Philadelphia, Dec. 17, 1882, aged 65, was announced. The death of ae Rev’d Charles P. Krauth, D.D., Vice- Provost of the University, at Philadelphia, Jan. 2, 1883, aged 59, was announced. The President was authorized to provide for obituary notices of the deceased. Donations for the Library were reported from the Geo- graphical Societies at Munich, Bordeaux and Paris; the Meteorological and Astronomical Societies in London; the Society at Riga; the American Society at Paris; the Pea- body Fund and the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Cam- bridge; the Boston Zoological and Natural History Socie- ties ; American Journal of Science; American Academy of Medicine; N. Y. Academy of Science; Franklin Institute ; pal 1883, ] 637 Academy of Natural Sciences ; Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania; Union League; Library Co.; Mrs. Tyn- dale; U.S. Bureaus of Ethnology and Education; Washing- ton Philosophical Society ; U. 8. Coast Survey; U.S. Naval Institute; Royal Asiatic Society of Shanghai; M. Leon Fernandez and the Revista Euskara. Prof. Cope communicated a paper entitled: “ First addi- tion to the Fauna of the Puerco Eocene.” Pending nominations Nos. 969 to 980 were read. Annual appropriations for 1883 were passed. The request of Dr. Frazer to withdraw his Summary of the Geology of Egypt was granted. The result of the Annual Election was reported :— President. Frederick Fraley. Vice- Presidents. Eli K. Price, E. O. Kendall, J. L. LeConte. Secretaries. P. E. Chase, G. F. Barker, D. G. Brinton, J. P. Lesley. Counsellors for three years. R. E. Rogers, O. Seidensticker, R. Wood, P, Tf; Law. Counsellor for two years (in the place of B. F. Marsh de- ceased), C. A. Ashburner. . Curators. C. M. Cresson, Henry Phillips, Jr., Geo. H. Horn. Treasurer. J. Sergeant Price. The meeting was then adjourned. 638 (Jan. 19 Stated Meeting, Jan. 19, 1883. Present, 8 members. Vice-President, Mr. Pricr, in the Chair. Dr. Pepper by letter, Jan. 8, accepted his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. J. F. Meigs. Dr. Muhlenberg, by letter of same date, accepted his ap- pointment to prepare an obituary notice of the Rev. Dr. Krauth. A photograph of Admiral J. Downes, for the Album, was received. Donations for the Library were reported from the Royal } Academy, Brussels; Flora Batava; Annales des Mines ; Commercial Geographical Society, Bordeaux; Royal Geologi- cal Society and London Nature ; Canadian Institute; Essex Institute; Museum of Comparative Zodlogy and Peabody Museum; American Journal of Medical Science; American Journal of Pharmacy; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.; Ohio Mechanical Institute; T. L. Campbell; and the American Antiquarian Society. The death of Dr. W. H. Allen, President of Girard Col- lege, August 29, 1882, aged 74, was ordered to be inserted in the minutes. Prof. P. E. Chase communicated “ Photodynamic Notes, No. VEL” Mr. Lesley communicated a Memorandum of the Progress: of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, from the beginning, by Counties alphabetically arranged. Prof. Barker exhibited and explained his new Standard Cell for testing potentials of electricity. Dr. Frazer exhibited and described a collection of rock specimens from St. Davids and elsewhere in Great Britain, with special regard to their likeness to certain rocks in Pennsylvania. eel pet in 4080, | 639 General Thayer described some curious effects observed by him in using a secondary electrical battery. Mr. Lesley was elected Librarian for the ensuing year. Standing Committees were appointed, as follows: Finance. *-) Hall: Eli K. Price, J. Sergeant Price, Henry Winsor, W. A. Inghan, - J. Price Wetherill. C. G. Ames. Publication. Library. J. L. LeConte, HK. K. Price, D. G. Brinton, E. J. Houston, ©. M. Cresson, : Henry Phillips, Jr., G: He Horn, W. V. McKean, Persifor Frazer. Thos. H. Dudley. The reading of the list of members was postponed. Pending nominations Nos. 969 to 980 were read ; 979 was postponed ; the rest were balloted for. -The Library Committee were instructed to proceed with the printing of the last part of the Catalogue. (530 MSS. pages = 270 + pp. of text.) A Committee of three was appointed to draw up a Memorial to Congress urging the continuance of the Light House Board and the Coast Survey under the direction and control of the U.S. Treasury Department, the Committee to consist of Messrs. Fraley, Dudley and Frazer. New members elected :— J. Bennett Lawes, LL.D., of Rothumstead, Herts, Eng. J. O. Westwood, Hope Prof. Entom., Oxford, Eng. J. Cheston Morris, M.D., of Philadelphia. Jas. Russell Lowell, Min. Plen. U. 8. to England. Herbert Spencer, of England. Rey. Joseph May, of Philadelphia. Wm. Morris Davis, of Philadelphia. 8. F. Emmons, U. 8. Geologist, ‘Washington, D. C: 640 ; [Feb, 2, James Macfarlane, of Towanda, Penna. | E. W. Claypole, 2d Geol. Survey, New Bloomfield, Perry Co., Pa. Wm. H. Pancoast, M.D., of Philadelphia. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, Feb. 2, 1883. Present, 14 members. President, Mr. Fraury, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Rev. Jos. May, Jan. 23, and Mr. W. M. Davis, Milestown (Phil.), Jan. 23. Letters of envoy and acknowledgment were read. Donations for the Library were reported from the Mining Department, Melbourne ; Geographical Soc., St. Petersburg ; Turin Observatory; Academia dei Lincei; Revue Poli- tique; Commercial Geographical Society, Bordeaux ; Royal Museum of Natural History, Brussels; Royal Astronomical Society and Kew Observatory, London; Nova Scotia Insti- tute; Massachusetts Historical Society ; Museum of Com- parative Zoélogy ; Amer. Jour. of Science; Meteorological - Observatory, Central Park, New York; New Jersey Histor- ical Society ; Franklin Institute; H. Phillips, Jr. ; McCalla & Stavely ; Amateur Naturalist (Germantown); American Chemical Journal; American Journal of Mathematics; Signal Service Bureau; U.S. National Observatory; Engi- neer Department U.S. A. Proceedings A. P. S. No. 112, was laid on the table. Dr. W. H. Pancoast was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of Prof. Joseph Pancoast. Dr. Rothrock read a memoir on the microscopic differences in woods. (See page 599.) After a discussion of the subject by Messrs. Price, Davis, | | | 1883, 641 Rothrock, Lesley, Frazer and Kane, with special reference to the occurrence of abnormal rings in timber, Mr. Price desired it to be remarked that Dr. Rothrock’s important practical discovery was the direct result of the practical use to which the American Philosophical Society had put its portion of the Michaux Legacy, as the minutes of the last few years show. Dr. Frazer communicated a paper entitled: ‘‘ Some Com- parative tables showing the distribution of ‘Ferns in the United States,” by Geo. E. Davenport, of Medford, Mass. (See page 605.) Dr. Frazer presented the report of the Special Committee on a Memorial to Congress, which was approved, and the Officers were authorized to sign the Memorial and transmit — it to Congress. The Committee was discharged from the consideration of that part of the subject which related to the Light House Board. The President reported that he had received and paid over to the Treasurer $132.75, being the quarterly interest on the Michaux Legacy last due. ' On motion of Mr. Price, the expense of preparing the illustrations of Dr. Rothrock’s paper was charged to the Michaux Legacy fund. Stated Meeting, Feb. 16, 1882. Present, 11 members. President, Mr. Frary, in the Chair. Messrs. Macfarlane, Claypole and Emmons by letter ac- cepted their election to membership. Letters of acknowledgment and envoy were read. Donations for the Library were reported from the §. N. Antiq., Copenhagen; Royal Academia dei Lincei; Geo- graphical Societies at Paris and Bordeaux; Revista Euskara; 642 [Feb. 16, Kew Observatory; London: Nature; Royal Geological Society, Cornwall; Boston Natural History Society ; Mr. Geo. B. Dixwell; American Antiquarian Society ; Wesleyan University ; Regents of the University, N. Y. ; Numismatic and Antiquarian Society ; Engineer Club; Mr, H. Phillips, Jr.; Dr. D. G. Brinton; American Journal of Pharmacy ; Second Geological Survey of Pa.; U.S. Mint; War De- partment; Wisconsin Historical Society; and Mrs. R. Norris of Nice in France.—A rare copy of Kaempfer’s Japan; and a MS. volume of Japanese flowers, painted by native artists for Mr. Geo. Tyson of Boston during his residence in China, were presented by Mr. Morris Davis of Milestown, Phila.— Capn- A. D. Bache, presented, through Mr. Fairman Rogers, an old MS. of the Address of the Earl of Macclesfield to the Royal Society at the presentation of the Coplay Medal of 1753 to Benjamin Franklin. This MS. has the appearance of being the original document. On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered to Mr. Bache. The death of Dr. B. H. Rand, at Philadelphia, February 14, aged 55, was announced. Mr. Lewis introduced a discussion upon the thickness and movement of the Continental Glacier, in which Messrs. Frazer, Lesley and Price took part. The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers were read. f Pending nominations Nos. 979, 981 and new nominations Nos. 982, 983 and 984 were read. , Resolved, That the President be authorized to appoint as delegates to the Congrés des Americanistes, to meet at Copenhagen next September, any members of the Society who expect to be present on that occasion, pro- vided that the Society be not subjected to any expense by the delegation. Dr. Brinton and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., were appointed. Resolved, That the Finance Committee be requested to investigate the condition of the Magellanic Premium funds, and make recommendations for the appropriation of the surplus income fund for such purpose or purposes as they may think appropriate to the objects of the Society. And the meeting was adjourned. — 17 Ls ae a 1883.] 643 Stated Meeting, March 2, 1883. Present, 14 meinbers. President, Mr. Fraery, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from J. O. Westwood, of Oxford, England, dated February 12; and from James Russell Lowell, dated London, Feb. 11. Letters of acknowledgment and envoy were read. Donations for the Library were received from the Geo- graphical Societies of Paris and Bordeaux ; Revue Politique ; Belgian Academy; Abbé Renard; E. Ludwig; Royal Society, Society of Antiquaries and London Nature; Dr. Ed. Jarvis; U.S. Military Academy; Prof. Mansfield Merri- man; Dr. C. H. F. Peters; New Jersey Historical Society ; Mr. T. H. Dudley ; Franklin Institute; Mr. E. 8. Holden ; U.S. Naval Institute; San Francisco Mercantile Library Association; American Journal of Science; ‘ Science”; U. S. National Museum ; Census Bureau ; C. A. Ashburner, and B. 8. Lyman. Mr. Horatio Hale read a paper on the Tutelo Indians and their language. (See Vol. X XI, page’l.) Dr. Frazer exhibited two aneroid barometers and described some useful improvements suggested by him, executed by Hicks of London. (See page 604.) Pending nominations Nos. 979, 981 and 984 were read. Prof. Cope described as preposterous certain current news- paper explanations of the cause of the extinction of fossil mammalia in the West, by cold and by drought. | And the meeting was adjourned. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOc. XX. 115. 4c. PRINTED MAY 2, 1883. 644 . [March 16 Stated Meeting, March 16, 1883. Present, 16 members. President, Mr. FRAuery, in the Chair. Letters of envoy and acknowledgment were read. Donations for the Library were reported from the Societies at Moscow, Konigsberg, St. Gall, Frankfurt, Wiesbaden, Bordeaux and Cherbourg ; the Observatories at St. Peters- burg, Cambridge, Mass., and Mt. Hamilton; the German Geo- logical Society, Physical Society, and W. Franzen of Berlin; the Belgian Academy, Bureau of Statistics, and Bureau of the Interior ; the Lyons Society of Agriculture and Musée Guimet; the Flora Batava; the Society of Geography, Anti- quaries, Anthropology, and Geology of Paris; the Revue de )’Histoire des Religions and Revue Politique; the Royal In- stitute, Victoria Institute, Met. C. R. Society; Royal Geo- graphical, Royal Asiatic, Geological and Zoological Socie- ties; London Nature; Boston National History Society ; “Science”; N. Y. Linnean Society; Index Medicus; American Journal of Pharmacy; H. C. Lewis; Public Building Commission, Phil.; U.S. Coast Survey, Bureau of Education, Interior Department, National Museum; Missouri Historical Society; Hamilton A. Hill, of Boston; P. P. Sharples (Copy of the Monthly Mag. for Jan. 1784); and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jy. An Obituary notice of Dr. Krauth, was read by Dr. Muhlenberg. (See page 613.) The death of the oldest member of the Society, Mr. Henry Seybert, at Philadelphia, March 3, aged 82, was announced by Mr. J. 8. Price; and the President was requested to select a suitable person to prepare an obituary notice of the de- ceased. Dr. Brinton read a paper entitled “ On Medieval Sermon Books and Stories,” by Prof. T. F. Crane, of Cornell Univer- sity. (See Vol. X XI, No. 114.) . 1 ipa ig ah ome, 1883.] 645 Prof. Cope communicated a paper entitled “ Fourth Con- tribution to the History of the Permian Formation of Texas.” (See page 628.) The action of the Curators was approved in regard to lending for scientific examination the Mexican flutes belong- ing to the Cabinet of the Society, deposited at the Academy of Natural Sciences. Dr. Frazer took occasion from Dr. Brinton’s remarks prefatory to the reading of Prof. Crane’s paper, to ex- press his views regarding the presumptive restriction of authors of papers from using already published matter in said papers. Mr. E. K. Price and Mr. Fraley ex- plained the habitually liberal policy of the Society in respect of communications made for publication. Mr. Lesley ex- pressed the hope that the broadly “ philosophical” character of the Society would be maintained, and that the Proceed- ings would not become restricted to the narrow limits of Natural History or the Physical sciences, so called, but that the Society would encourage its members to communicate for publication their best mature thinking in whatever de- partment of human knowledge they might engage. Pending nominations Nos. 979, 981 to 984 were read, and the meeting was adjourned: Stated Meeting, April 6, 1882. Present, 13 members. President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Memberships accepted: G. Plante; J. B. Lawes. Membership declined: Jos. May. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal Society of New South Wales (107-111); M. Edw. Dupont (111); Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada, 646 {April 6, Toronto 57-60, 61-62, 67, 69, 75, 87; III, IV, V); Smith- sonian Institution (112); and Mr. Thos. C. Porter (112). Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Sur- vey of India; University at Lund; Batavian Society, Rot- terdam ; Oberhessischen Gesellschaft, Giessen ; and the Me- teorological Office, London. A letter. of envoy, requesting exchanges, was received from the Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Winnipeg, March 20, 1883. [See below. ] 3) Donations were received from the Academies at St. Peters- burg, Copenhagen, Brussels, Rome, Madrid and Philadel- phia; the Royal Societies, in N. 8. Wales, Victoria, Rotter- dam and London; the Royal Astronomical Society at Lon- don; the Royal Society of Antiquaries, Copenhagen; the Geological Society at Halle; the Geological Surveys of India, New York, and New Jersey; the Geographical Societies at Paris and Bordeaux; the Historical Societies in Provi- dence, Wilkesbarre and Winnipeg, Manitoba; the Swedish Bureau of Statistics; Lund University ; Upper Hessian So- ciety ; General Society of Prisons at Paris; Observatory at San Fernando; the Revista Euskara; London Nature and National Review; Boston Society of Natural History ; S. H. Scudder; H. A. Hill; Silliman’s Journal; Franklin Institute, American Journal of Pharmacy, American Journal of Medical Sciences, T. Dudley, H. Phillips, Jr., H. C. Lewis, Dr. J. G. Lee, P. P. Sharples, of Philadelphia; American Chemical Journal; F. B, Hough, of Washington ; Ohio Mechanics’ Institute ; National Mexican Museum. | A letter from Mr. Moncure Robinson was received accept- ing his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Henry Sey bert. The death of Daniel B. Smith, at Germantown, March 29th, in the 92d year of his age, was announced by Mr. Fraley ; and Prof. P. E. Chase was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Mr. Davis read a paper “On the conversion of chlorine 1883.] 647 into hydrochloric acid, as observed in the deposition of gold' from its solution by charcoal.” Prof. E. W. Claypole communicated, through the Secre- tary, two papers entitled, “On the Kingsmill white sand- stone,” and “ Note on a large fish-plate from the Upper Chemung (?) beds of Northern Pennsylvania.” Rey. J. Hagen, 8. J., Prof. College of the Sacred Heart, Prairie du Chien, Wis., communicated, through Dr. Brinton, . a paper entitled, ‘“ On the reversion of series and its applica- tion to the solution of numerical equations.” Mr. John Sharples communicated through Prof. P. E. Chase, a paper entitled, “The latitude of Haverford Col- lege.” Mr. Lockington read a paper entitled, “ The role of para- sitic protophytes; are they the primary or the secondary cause of zymotic diseases.” Dr. Barker exhibited two bronze medals which he had received, in Paris, as a delegate to the International Congress - of Electricians, and as a Commissioner to the International Exhibition of Electricity, held in Paris in 1881; and also a medal struck by the Institut de France in commemoration of the transit of Venus. Pending nominations Nos. 979, 981-984, and new nomina-. tion No. 985, were read. The Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Win- nipeg (see its letter, March 20), was ordered to be placed on the list of corresponding Societies to receive the Proceedings from date. Dr. Brinton in behalf of the owners offered some valuable - documents. On motion, the President was requested to ex- amine them and report to the Society. The Finance Committee reported “ that in the matter of. the Magellanic Fund referred to it, the subject was consid- ered, assisted by the President, and it was concluded that no change in the present regulations was needed.” Report: accepted. 648 [April 6, The Secretaries were authorized to publish with Mr. Hale’s paper on the Tutelo Indians a fae-simile photograph of the old Tutelo Chief, the last of his tribe. (See No. 114.) The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported as fol- lows: «“That the appropriation made for a course of lectures in Fairmount Park for 1882 by Professor Rothrock, to wit, two hundred and eighty dollars for the Professor, and fifty dollars for advertising, was duly received from the Treasurer, and applied as intended. } ««The lectures, fourteen in number, were upon the subjects in the an- nexed printed schedule; and were attended by increased numbers of citizens of both sexes. There is a growing interest in these subjects in our community, amply to justify the Society’s appropriation in that direc- tion. The Committee recommend the same amounts to be voted for 1883, for lectures as in Schedule No, 2, annexed.”’ It was then, on recommendation of the Committee, Resolved, That an appropriation be made from the Michaux Legacy of two hundred and eighty dollars for Professor Rothrock’s lectures in Fair- mount Park, and fifty dollars for advertising them, and that the Treasurer be authorized to make payments under the direction of the Chairman of the Committee on the Michaux Legacy. The following schedule of proposed lectures for 1883 was appended to the report: Free Lectures in Fairmount Park, on Botany and Tree Culture, by Professor Rothrock, on Saturdays, at 4 P. M. April 21. The value of Science to Mankind. ‘« 28. Young Plants ; how studied in life. May 5. Relations of Plants to National Prosperity. «« 12, The Microscope ; what it is; what it does; how to use it. «« 19, A thriving colony on a Spruce Tree. ** 26. What the Leaves do, and how they do it. June 2. Wasted food. Sept. 8. The Forests of the Sea. ‘© 15. The American Forests, and their special importance. ‘* 22. American Timber, and its special value. «* 29. Old and new systems of Classification. Oct. 6. Vegetable Units, and how they make the plant. The Curators reported the safe return of the Mexican flutes borrowed by Mr. Cresson, and studied by Mr. Cox, ee ee a 1883. | 649 (Barker, who had obtained from them a diatonic scale of an octave and a quarter in extent. The Librarian reported the completion of his MS. con- densed copy of the early records of the Proceedings of the Society from 1744 to 1837. The subject of printing the same was referred to the Committee of Five (Phillips, Horn, Lewis, Brinton and Law) appointed December 16, 1881. And the meeting was adjourned. On the Measurement of Electromotive Force. By George F. Barker. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 19, 1883.) The term electromotive force is applied to that force which tends to set electricity in motion. It appears to have been used first by Ohm, who in 1827 gave precision to the study of electric currents by formulating his well known law:—The strength of an electric current is directly propor- tional to the sum of the electromotive forces and inversely proportional to the sum of the resistances in the circuit. ‘The measurement of electromotive force may be absolute or relative ; absolute when it is determined directly, relative when its value is obtain- ed by comparison, the ratio of an unknown to a known electromotive force being the object of the measurement. In both measurements, the final standard of electromotive force is an absolute unit, based upon the funda- mental units of mass, length and time; since these are respectively the centimeter, the gram and the second, absolute units are often called C. G.S. units. -In electrostatics, electromotive force and difference of potential are synonymous, the same unit being used for both. The unit difference of potential exists between two points, when to carry a unit of positive electricity from one to the other, requires the expenditure of a unit of work; or in the C. G. S. system, of an erg. Now a unit of work, 7. ¢., an erg, is done when a unit of force, 7. ¢., a dyne, overcomes resistance through an unit of distance, 7. ¢., a centimeter. And a unit of force, #. 6., a dyne, is that force which produces a unit of velocity in a unit of time ; 7. ¢., produces an increase of velocity of one centimeter in one second. Since in this latitude, gravity produces a velocity of about 980 centimeters per second, the force of a dyne corresponds to the attractive force which the earth exerts upon the 1-980th part of a gram. To raise one gram therefore to the height of one centimeter requires the expendi- ture of 980 ergs of work. Obviously then if two electrified bodies at unit distance attract or repel each other with a force equivalent to that which Barker.) 650 (Jan. 19,. the earth exerts on a gram weight, there exists between them a difference of potential of 980 absolute units. By measuring the force between two- electrified bodies in grams, the difference of potential or the electromotive force between them is easily calculated in absolute measure. By mul- tiplying this value in electrostatic units, by thirty thousand million, the ~ electromotive force is obtained in absolute electromagnetic units. The instrument used for measuring differences of potential is called an electrometer ; if by direct measurement, an absolute electrometer. The ab- solute electrometer of Sir William Thomson is the best thus far devised. This instrument consists of two metal plates, one of which, the smaller, © is provided with a guard ring so that the electrical distribution shall be uniform ; these plates being so arranged that the attraction between them may be very accurately measured. The force may be measured at a con- stant distance by varying the weight necessary to balance it ; or the dis- tance may be varied until the force balancesa constant weight. The latter’ method is preferred in the absolute electrometer of Thomson. With this instrument, the electromotive force of a Daniell cell was found to be 0.00374 electrostatic unit, corresponding to 112 million electromagnetic units. Relative measurement of electromotive force, especially for practical purposes, is much more frequent than absolute measurement. Although the same units may be used, yet in practice it has been found more con- venient to employ a separate unit called the volt, the value of which is. given as one hundred million absolute electromagnetic units. Moreover, this unit is represented not in the abstract form alone, but also concrete. Some distinct electromotor, the difference of potential between the elec- trodes of which has been accurately measured, is taken as the standard. For example, the Daniell cell above mentioned has an electromotive force, by the definitions already given, of 1.12 volts. Such a battery, used for measurement, is called a standard battery. For determining an unknown electromotive force, it is only necessary to determine the ratio between this and the electromotive force of the standard battery. Two general methods of doing this are in use ; the one” direct, the other indirect. In the direct method, an electrometer which has been calibrated is employed; ¢. ¢., one whose constants have been de- termined by comparison either with the standard battery or with an abso- lute instrument. Such are the portable and the quadrant electrometers of Thomson. In the latter instrument an 8-shaped needle of aluminum swings inacylindrical metal box with separated quadrants. The alternate quadrants are electrically connected when the instrument isin use. A small charge being communicated to the needle—previously adjusted so- that its axis is parallel to the line between adjacent quadrants—any electri- fication of the quadrants is made apparent by the motion of the needle to the right or left. By connecting these quadrants, first with the electrodes of the standard cell, and then with the cell whose electromotive force is to- be measured, the ratio of the deflections gives the ratio of the electromo- 1883.] 651 (Barker. tive forces, provided the angle of rotation be small. A mirror attached to the suspension of the needle enables these deflections to be accurately read with a telescope and scale. A simpler instrument suffices when the zero method is employed. In this case the two electromotors are simul- taneously connected to the quadrants, their electrodes being reversed. If equal, the deflection will be zero. If unequal, it will be equal to the dif- ference. By varying the known electromotive force until the deflection is zero, the two are again equal. While, in the direct method, the electromotive force is the quantity which is measured, in the indirect method some other quantity or quantities are measured, and the electromotive force deduced by calcu- lation from the known relation between the quantities. When, forexample, the current strength is measured on the galvanometer and the resistance of the circuit is known, the law of Ohm enables the electromotive force to be computed. In Wiedemann’s method, the electromotor to be measured is joined up with the standard battery, in circuit with a galvanometer, first with the electrodes in the same direction, then reversed. The electro- motive force required is then the product of the standard electromotive force by the quotient of the difference of the current strengths divided by the sum. Another method consists in putting the standard cell in cir- cuit with a galvanometer, the resistances of both being known. The standard cell is then replaced by the electromotor to be tested and the re- sistance in circuit varied until the same deflection is obtained. The elec- tromotive force of the standard cell multiplied by the ratio of the second total resistance to the first gives the electromotive force required. The electrometer methods have the advantage of not using the current of the electromotor to be measured; and hence any change in its condition due to the current produced is avoided. From what has been said, it will be evident that the selection of the standard cell is a matter of prime importance. The advantages of the Daniell cell for this purpose are too well known to require elaborate state- ment here. As used on closed telegraphic circuits and the like, two forms have come into general favor. One of these is that employed originally by Professor Daniell. It consists of a glass jar containing copper sulphate, in which the copper plate is immersed, and of a porous cup containing the zinc plate, a more or less dilute solution of zinc sulphate. The other form is the modification first proposed by Varley and afterward by Callaud, in which the porous cup is done away with, the differ- ing densities of the two solutions being depended upon to keep them separated. The copper sulphate solution is placed at the bottom of the jar in contact with the copper plate. As the density of this solution when saturated is 1.186 at 15° C. the solution of zinc sulphate ordinarily rests upon it and in contact with the suspended zinc plate. But as the action of the battery goes on and the zinc sulphate accumulates in the solution, this later finally becomes heavier than the copper sulphate solution (the density of a saturated solution of zinc sulphate being 1.44 at 15° C.), and PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 4D. PRINTED MAY 5, 1883, Barker.) 652 [Jan. 19, falls to the bottom ; thus reversing the normal conditions in the battery. In 1871 Sir Wm. Thomson attempted to reverse the position of the plates in this gravity battery and place the zinc at the bottom in contact with the heavier solution. But the collateral disadvantages arising from the change more than balanced the advantages. He returned to the old form, therefore, but arranged a siphon in such a way that the zinc sulphate solution should be gradually withdrawn and too great concentration avoided. In practice the zinc sulphate should never be allowed to accumulate so as to increase the density of the solution above 1.17. This may be accomplished readily by pouring off the solution from the top of the jar and replacing it by pure water. When freshly set up, both of the forms of battery above described require to be kept on closed circuit for a day or two. Their condition of equilibrium is then reached and they may be used for the determination of electromotive force. The difference of potential between the electrodes of a Daniell cell has been determined by many experimenters; by Regnauld, by Poggendorft, by Buff, by Beetz, by Petruschefsky, by Clark and Sabine, and by Ayrton and Perry, among others. They find that while it varies somewhat under variations of condition, yet that on the whole, it is remarkably constant, the maximum being 1.081 and the minimum 0.901 volt. In all these ex- periments the copper was immersed in a saturated solution of copper sulphate. The zinc was placed in solution of sodium chloride, in dilute sulphuric acid or in solution of zinc sulphate, all of varying strengths in the different experiments. It is noticeable that in none of these measure- ments made by indirect methods is the electromotive force as high as that already mentioned as having been obtained by Sir William Thomson by means of his absolute electrometer. Since the electromotive force of a Daniell cell is the sum of the differences of contact-potential within it, it would seem that any variation in the value of this electromotive force must be due either to a change in the character or concentration of the so- lutions, or to a difference of temperature. Moreover it has been observed that the electromotive force of the gravity form of battery is always a lit- tle higher than that of the cell in which a porous cup is used ; a result due, probably, to the different conditions under which the diffusion of the two liquids takes place, a fact pointed out by J. W. Draper in 1834. Using, therefore, the same form of battery, the solutions being always the same in kind and in concentration, and the temperature being the same, it is fair to infer that the Daniell cell may be made sufficiently con- stant to serve as a reliable standard of electromotive force. Several attempts have been made to do this. Raoult in 1864 (Ann. Chim. Phys., IV, ii, 345), proposed a standard cell consisting of two covered jars of glass, one containing a copper plate in a saturated solution of copper sul- phate, the other a zine plate in a solution of zinc sulphate in an equal weight of water. The two were connected by an inverted U tube, whose ends were closed by porous plates of earthenware cemented to them. By 1883. ] 655 {[Barker. means of a tubulure in the bend this tube was filled with the zine sul- phate solution. When not in use, the U tube is removed and kept in a separate vessel. Kempe in 1880 (J. Soc. Teleg. Hng., June, 1880), described a standard Daniell cell which has been adopted in the British Post-Office. The containing vessel is of porcelain, having two compartments. In one of these is a half saturated solution of zine sulphate, reaching to the lower edge of the zinc plate. In the other is a flat, porous cup containing the cop- per plate surrounded with crystals of copper sulphate, and immersed in copper sulphate solution. To use this battery, the porous cup is transferred from one compartment to the other, thus raising the zine solution into contact with the zinc plate. After making the measurement, the porous cup is replaced in its own compartment. Any copper which may have been carried into the zinc solution is precipitated upon a fragment of zinc kept constantly in it. Having had occasion for a series of months, at intervals, to make measure- ments of electromotive force by the method of comparison, I have been led to devise a form of standard Daniell cell which appears to have so important advantages over others heretofore used as to justify me in bringing it to the notice of the Society. The form of apparatus which has been adopted is represented in the annexed wood-cut. It consists of two bottles with lateral tubulures near the bottom. These are closed with rubber corks through which passes a stop-cock of glass. The necks of the bottles also carry corks of rubber, through which pass the rods of zinc and copper. The bottle containing the rod of zinc is filled about three-fourths with a solution of zinc sulphate saturated at 15° C. That containing the copper rod with a saturated solution of copper sulphate. When the cell is to be used for measurement, the cock is opened and the two liquids are thus put in communication. At the end of the experiment, it is again closed and all diffusion is prevented.* For ordinary use, especially where a large number of cells in series is required, a much cheaper apparatus may be constructed. Those set up in my own laboratory consist of a couple of the cheap bottles now in general use for the nasal douche and for contain- ing dry plate developers, which have a small lateral spout at the bottom. Over these a rubber tube may be passed and tied, being closed when re- quired by a wire compressor. In practice I have found it an advantage to place a wisp of spun glass in the rubber tube to prevent adherence be- tween its sides. The zinc and the copper rods pass through corks in the mouths of the bottles as before. The advantages which are claimed for this new form of cell are : 1st. Itsconstancy. When set up, all such cells are identical. Thezine is in contact with a solution of zinc sulphate, and the copper with one of copper sulphate both saturated at 15° C. Moreover, this iden- tity continues. When on closed circuit, the liquids are altered by dif- fusion to a scarcely appreciable extent, the surface of contact being so small. During action copper sulphate is decomposed on one side and cop- The cell here represented was made for me by J. W. Queen & Co., of this city. 654 (Jan. 19, Barker.]} per deposited ; zinc is dissolved on the other side and zinc suiphate pro- duced. The amount of current used in a measurement is small, first be- by, ZY Y | cause the internal resistance of the cell is high, and second because the duration of the test is brief. But the minute change thus caused in the A — es 1883.] 655 [Barker, solution is prevented, first, by keeping a crystal of copper sulphate in the copper solution, and second, by the deposition of the excess of zinc sul- phate in crystals. Since the zine solution is the heavier, any hydrostatic transfer will be into the copper solution where no damage is done. When the cell is on open circuit, no diffusion takes place, communication being cut off. And since the apparatus is wholly closed to the air, no change in the conditions can arise from evaporation. Provided therefore the temperature be uniform, the electromotive force of the cell may be ex- pected to be constant within narrow limits. 2d. Its transportability. In the use of the ordinary Daniell cell, par- ticularly of the gravity pattern, any change of position disturbs more or less the conditions of equilibrium, and so varies the electromotive force. After moving such a cell, therefore, or after altering in any way its normal state, as by adding water lost by evaporation, it is necessary to allow twenty-four hours or more of rest, before the battery can be trusted to give proper measurements. But in the cell now preposed, no change can take place in its conditions by being moved from place to place. Hence for local testing in circumstances where a permanent battery cannot be had, its value is considerable. 3d. Its convenience and cheapness. The common form of Daniell bat- tery requires to be especially prepared for use. If set up anew, twenty- four aours are needed before it comes into good working action. Even the improved forms of standard cell above described are more or less in- convenient, since they require something to be done to put them in action. But in the form now proposed the cell is always ready for use, no matter how long a time may have elapsed since it was used before. The opening of a stop-cock puts it in full operation. Moreover, this cell is readily con- structed from apparatus and material at hand in every laboratory. And if douche bottles are used, the cost is not over a dollar. Itisevident that the form of apparatus now described has a much wider range than has yet been claimed. By its means not only may the effect of using various solutions in contact with either plate of a Daniell cell be ac- curately studied, free from many of the disturbing causing hitherto en- countered, but by the use of various metals also, the innumerable ques- tions of importance, concerning not only primary but also secondary bat- teries, may be conveniently investigated. One of these for example, is the question whether the zinc of a Daniell cell should be amalgamated. The im- pression is very generally in favor of amalgamation, since in a zinc sulphate solution amalgamated zinc is said not to become polarized ; and since the electromotive force is one or two per cent. higher. But experiments have shown, that while amalgamated zinc should be used when the solution is acid, yet that when it is neutral, local action is greater with amalgamated than with unamalgamated zinc. Experiments now in progress with this new form of cell, it is hoped, will enable some of these doubtful points to be satisfactorily settled. PHILADELPHIA, January 18, 1888. Barker.) 656 (Dec. I, Henry Draper. (Minute prepared by Geo. F. Barker, Secretary American Philosophicai Society, for Proceedings, December 1, 1882.) Henry Draper was born on the 7th of March, 1837, in Prince Edward county, Va., his father being at the time Professor of Chemistry and Nat- ural Philosophy in Hampden Sidney College. When but two years old, his father was called to the chair of Chemistry in the University of the City of New York, and removed to that city in 1839. Henry was entered as a regular scholar, first in the primary, and subsequently in the preparatory schools connected with the University, and at the age of fifteen, entered the collegiate department as an undergraduate. Upon the completion of his sophomore year, however, he abandoned the classical course and en- tered the medical department, from which he graduated with distinction in 1858. The following year he spent in Europe. While abroad he was elected on the medical staff of Bellevue Hospital; and on his return he assumed the position and discharged its duties for eighteen months. In 1860, at the age of 23, he was elected Professor of Physiology in the Classical department of the University, and, in 1866, to the same chair in the Medi- ‘cal department ; being soon after appointed Dean. In 1873, he severed his connection with the medical department ; and in 1882, upon the death of his father, he was elected Professor of Chemistry in the Classical de- partment ; a posiion which he held until the close of the current aca- demic year. Reared in direct contact with science and scientific thought, as Dr. Draper was, it is not surprising that at an early age he developed a decided preference for scientific pursuits. His father was a man not only of the widest scientific knowledge, but he was also of exceptional ability as an in- vestigator. To live in contact with this genial and learned man, was of itself a scientific education of the highest type. Henry was early taken into his confidence in scientific matters, and was called upon to assist his father not only in his lectures, but also in his investigations. The scien- tific spirit which presses forward unflaggingly in the pursuit of truth and which wrests from Nature the profoundest secrets by patient and long con- tinued application, had long been characteristic of the elder Draper ; it was now fully developed in his son. While yet a medical student, he un- dertook a most difficult research upon the functions of the spleen ; and, conscious of the inaccuracies incident to drawings, he illustrated this re- search—afterward published as his graduating thesis—with micropho- tographs of rare perfection for those early days, all taken by him- self. While engaged with the microscope in making these photographs, he discovered that palladious chloride had a remarkabie power in darkening or intensifying negatives ; an observation subsequently of much value in photography. During his sojourn in Europe, he had visited the great reflecting tele- scope of Lord Rosse at Parsonstown, Ireland. The sight of this instrument 1882.] 657 |Barker. inspired him with a desire to construct one like it, though on a smaller, scale, and turned his attention toward astronomy and astronomical photo- graphy. Soon after his return he began the construction of a metal specu- lum, fifteen inches in diameter, completing it in 1860. Subsequently he ac- cepted a suggestion contained in a letter written to his father by Sir John Herschel, and abandoned speculum metal for silvered glass. In the year 1861, he made several mirrors of silvered glass, 154 inches in diameter. The best of these was mounted as a Newtonian telescope, in a small wooden observatory erected at Hastings-on-Hudson, his father’s country seat. The details of grinding, polishing, silvering, testing and mounting this reflec- tor, all of which he did with his own hands, were published as a mono- graph by the Smithsonian Institution. This publication has had a de- served popularity, and has become the standard authority on the subject. Much experimental work was done with this telescope ; that which is best known, being his photograph of the moon. More than 1500 original negatives were taken with this instrument. They were one anda quarter inches in diameter, but such was the perfection of their detail that they bore enlargement to three feet, and in one case to fifty inches without in- jury. The success of this mirror stimulated him to undertake a still larger one, and, in 1870, he finished a silvered glass mirror, twenty-eight inches in diameter. A new dome was built for it by the side of the old one, the mounting being equatorial, and the telescope Cassegrainian ; though subsequently a plane secondary mirror was substituted for the con- vex one. A refracting telescope of five inches aperture was attached to the tube of the reflector, asa finder. With this larger instrument, work was at once begun upon photographic spectra ; and, in 1872, a beautiful photo- graph was obtained of the spectrum of @ Lyre (Vega), which showed the dark lines ; a step far in advance of anything which had been accom- plished in this direction up to that time. Desiring to make simultaneous eye-observations, Dr. Draper, in 1875, placed upon the same axis, a re- fracting telescope of twelve inches aperture, made by Alvan Clark & Sons. In 1880, this was exchanged for another refractor by the same mak- ers, of eleven and a half inches aperture, but furnished with an additional lens to serve as a photographic corrector. The work of stellar spectrum photography went steadily on, the new refractor now doing the principal work. More than a hundred such photographs were made, most of these having upon the same plate a photograph of the spectrum of Jupiter, Venus, or the moon. These latter, giving the solar lines by reflection, enabled the stellar lines to be identified by direct comparison. Reflecting on the extreme sensitiveness of the dry-plate process in pho- tography, he was led to experiment on the reproduction of nebule by its means; and onthe 30th of September, 1880, he succeeded by an exposure of fifty-seven minutes in obtaining a photograph of the nebula in Orion. Sat- ‘ isfied now that the idea was an entirely feasible one, he devoted himself un- interruptedly to securing the greatest possible perfection in the driving clock and to improving the details of manipulation. In March, 1881, a Barker.] 658 [Dec. 1, second and much superior photograph of this nebula was secured after an exposure of 104 minutes. And finally, a year later, on the 14th of March, 1882, he succeeded in making a successful exposure of 137 minutes, and in producing a most superb photograph, which showed stars of the 13.7 magnitude, invisible to the eye, and in which the faint outlying regions of the nebula itself were clearly and beautifully shown. This unrivaled photograph, by far the most brilliant success yet achieved by celestial photography, will ever have a very high astronomical value, since by a comparison with it of photographs of this nebula, taken many years subsequently, changes which are going on in it may be traced and their history written. Ordinarily the photograph of a spectrum is more difficult than one of the object itself. But in this case it is not so. The spectrum being of bright lines, the light is localized and readily impresses the plate. Moreover, any error in the rate of the clock or any tremors of the instrument, which are fatal to the nebula, count for little in photographing its spectrum; since the image is thereby simply shifted off the slit and no injury results to the definition. Many excellent photographs of the spectrum of the nebula in Orion were obtained by Dr. Draper, however, the chief interest in which consists in the fact that be- side the characteristic bright lines, there are traces of continuous spectrum in various parts of the nebula, suggesting the beginning of condensation. Beside the work done at his observatory at Hastings, which may be called astronomical work proper, Dr. Draper occupied himself with col- lateral questions of not less importance, in the admirably equipped physi- cal laboratory he had built in connection with his residence in New York City. It was here, in 1873, that he made the exquisite, and to this day un- equaled photograph of the diffraction spectrum. The region from wave- length 4350, below G, to wave-length 3440 near O, was contained upon a single plate. The Roman astronomer Secchi reproduced this photograph as a steel plate for his great work on the Sun, and the British Association, in 1880, endorsed it as the best known standard spectrum by publishing a lithograph of it in their Proceedings. The grating used to produce this photograph was one of Mr. Rutherfurd’s superb plates, ruled with 6481 lines to the inch. It was in his New York laboratory, too, that he made the most important discovery of his life, perhaps ; that of the existence of oxygen inthe sun. After months of laborious and costly experiment, he succeeded, in 1876, in photographing the solar spectrum and the spectrum of an incandescent gas upon the same plate, with their edges in complete contact ; thus enabling the coincidence or non-coincidence of the lines in the two spectra to be established beyondadoubt. On examining the spectrum of oxygen thus photographed, he saw that while the lines of the iron and the aluminum used as electrodes, coincided, as they should do, with their proper dark lines in the sun’s spectrum, the lines of oxygen agreed with bright solar lines. Whence the important conclusion announced by him, ° 1st, that oxygen actually existed in the sun, now for the first time proved ; and, 2d, that this gas exists there under conditions either of tempera- Pe: ee 1882.] 659 [Barker. ture or pressure, or both, which enable it to radiate more light than the contiguous portions of the solar mass. ‘This view of the case however, required radical modification in the then accepted view of the constitution of the sun ; a modification which he pointed out and advocated. So ex- ceptional were these results, and especially the conclusions from them, that it was hardly to be expected that they should be at once accepted. Dr. Draper, however, in this, as in all his work, was his own severest critic. Increasing constantly his appliances and perfecting his methods he produced, in 1879, another photograph on a much larger scale, which showed the coincidences which he claimed, especially of groups of lines, so unmistakably as to leave no question of the fact in a mind free from bias. To strengthen still more the evidence on the subject, he had planned for execution the present winter, a research upon the spectra of other non-metallic gases, in the hope that some of these, too, would be found represented as bright lines in the sun spectrum. In 1878, he was the director of a party organized by himself to observe the total eclipse of the sun of the 29th of July. His familiarity with the lo- cality led him to select Rawlins, Wyoming, an important station on the Union Pacific Railway, as the objective point. The result justified his selection. The expedition was entirely successful, and the observations which were made were of great value. By means of his splendid appa- ratus, Dr. Draper himself obtained an excellent photograph of the corona and also a photograph of its diffraction spectrum which was apparently continuous. In 1880, he obtained a number of spectra of Jupiter in con- nection with stellar work. On examining one of these spectra, the pho- tograph appeared to him to show that the planet really furnished a cer- tain amount of intrinsic light. The exposure on Jupiter was fifty minutes, the spectrum of the moon being taken in ten. The original negative was sent over to his friend, Mr. A. C. Ranyard, who presented it to the Royal Astronomical Society. In June, 1881, he took several excellent photo- graphs of the comet, and also of its spectrum. With a slit and two prisms he obtained three photographs of the spectrum, with exposures of 180, 196, and 228 minutes, respectively. On each plate, a comparison spectrum was also photographed. Upon the organization of the United States Commission to observe the Transit ot Venus in 1874, Dr. Draper’s great attainments in celestial pho- tography pointed him out at once as the man best suited to organize the photographic section, and he was accordingly appointed Director of the Photographic Department. He went at once to Washington, entered heartily into the work, and during three entire months devoted himself to the labor of organizing, experimenting and instructing ; declining sub- sequently all compensation for the time thus spent. Although his duties at home prevented him from joining any of the expeditions, yet so instru- mental had he been in making the transit observations a success, that upon the recommendation of the Commission, Congress ordered a gold medal to be struck in his honor at the Philadelphia Mint. This medal PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 4£, PRINTED MAY 5, 1883. Barker. ] ; 660 (Dec. 1, is 46 millimeters in diameter. It has the representation of a siderostat in relief upon the obverse, with the motto: ‘‘Famam extendere factis, hoe virtutis opus.’’ On the reverse is inscribed the words: ‘‘ Veneris in sole spectande curatores R. P. F. 8. Henrico Draper, M. D., Dec. VIIL, MDCCCLXXIYV ;”’ with the motto: ‘‘ Decori decus addit avito.”’ Professor Draper was appointed, in 1861, Surgeon of the Twelfth Regi- ment of New York Volunteers ; a position which he accepted and in which he served with credit. In 1876, he was made one of the Judges in the Photographic Section of the Centennial Exhibition. In 1875, he was elected a member of the Astronomische Gesellschaft. In 1877, he re- ceived an election to the National Academy of Sciences ; and in the same year he was made a member of the American Philosophical Society. In 1879, he was elected a Fellow of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science. In 1881, the American Academy of Arts and Sci- ences worthily enrolled him among its members. In 1882, the University of Wisconsin and the University of New York conferred on him, almost simultaneously, the degree of LL.D. For several years it had been Dr. Draper’s custom to join his friends, Generals Marcy and Whipple, of the Army, in the early fall, for a few weeks’ hunting in the Rocky mountains. In 1882, the party left New York on the 31st of August, went by rail to Rock creek, on the Union Pa- cific Railway, and from there went north in the saddle ; reaching Fort Cus- ter, on the Northern Pacific Railway, near the middle of October. Dur- ing the two months of their absence the party rode fifteen hundred miles on horseback, as Dr. Draper estimated. When above timber line early in October, they encountered a blinding snow storm with intense cold and were obliged to camp without shelter. Dr. Draper reached New York on the 25th of October. Ordinarily, he returned refreshed and invigorated with the splendid exercise of the trip; but this year the distance traveled seemed to have been too great, and this, together with the hardships en- countered, seemed to have wearied him. Pressure of delayed business awaited him and occupied his time at once. Moreover, the National Acad- emy was to meet in New York in November; and he was to entertain them as he had always done. This year the entertainment was to take the form of a dinner. In order to offer them scientific novelty, he determined to light the table with the Edison incandescent light, the current being furnished from the machine in his laboratory. But the source of power being a gas engine, and therefore intermittent, a disagreeable pulsation was ob- servable in the light. To obviate this he contrived an ingenious attach- ment to the engine whereby at the instant at which the speed was accel- erated by the explosion of the gas in the cylinder, a lateral or shunt circuit. should be automatically thrown in, the resistance of which could be va- ried at pleasure. With his admirable mechanical skill he extemporized the device from materials at hand and found it to work perfectly. The dinner was given on the evening of November 15th, and was one of the most brilliant ever given in New York; about forty academicians, together 1882, ] 661 r (Barker. with a few personal friends as invited guests, sitting at table. But Dr. Draper's overwork now told upon him ; slightly indisposed as he had been before, he was unable to partake of food, and a premonitory chill seized him while at the table. As soon as the dinner was over, he took a hot bath, thinking thus to throw it off. But while in the bath a second and severer chill of a decidedly congestive type attacked him, and it was only with the greatest difficulty that he could be carried to his bed. His warm friend and former colleague, Dr. Metcalfe, was at once summoned and pronounced the attack double pleuritis. The best of treatment and the most careful nursing scemed for two or three days to be producing an effect for the better. But on the Sunday following, heart complication developed and he died about 4 o’clock in the morning of Monday, the 20th of November. Viewed from whatsoever standpoint, the life of Henry Draper appears as successful as it was earnest, honest and pure. His devotion to science was supreme ; to him no labor was too severe, no sacrifice too great, if by it he could approach nearer the exact truth. The researches he had already made, and much more those he had projected, involved the largest. expenditure of his time and means. But such was his delight in his sci- entific work, and his enthusiasm in carrying it on, that he was never happier than when hardest at work in his laboratory, never more cheerful than when most zealously laboring with his superb telescopes. Moreover, he was as eminent as a teacher of science as he was as an investigator. His lectures were simple, clear and forcible. They held the interest of the class and awakened their enthusiasm while they enriched the stu- dent’s store of knowledge and strengthened his powers of observation and of reason. In the laboratory he was keen, thorough and impartial, while at the same time considerate and helpful ; ever striving to encourage hon- est endeavor and to assist the earnest worker. Still another ‘sphere of labor, however, made demands upon his time. In 1867, he married Mary Anna, the accomplished daughter of Courtlandt Palmer, of New York. Upon Mr. Palmer’s death, in 1874, Dr. Draper became the managing trustee of an immense estate and, with his charac- teristic energy and efficiency, entered at once upon the task of reducing it to a basis of maximum production with the minimum amount of attention. The responsibility which thus rested upon him, the harassing demands of tenants, the endless details of leases, contracts and deeds, and the no less annoying complications of necessary law suits, worried him incessantly. And had it not been for his unsurpassed business capacity, he might have failed. But he was equal to the demand upon him, and within a few . years, order had come out of confusion, and a few hours at his office daily enabled all to flow along smoothly. To indicate the esteem in which Dr. Draper was held by his confréres in science, the following passages may be quoted from an excellent biogra- phical notice of him written by Professor Young, of Princeton : “In per- son he was of medium height, compactly )uilt, with a pleasing address, Lewis.] : 662 [Oct, 6, 1882. and a keen black eye which missed nothing within its range. He was affectionate, noble, just and generous ; a thorough gentleman, with a quick and burning contempt for all shams and meanness; a friend most kind, sympathetic, helpful, and brotherly ; genial, wise and witty in conversa- tion; clear-headed, prudent and active in business ; a man of the highest and most refined intellectual tastes and qualities ; a lover of art and music, and also of manly sports, especially the hunt ; of such manual skill that no mechanic in the city could do finer work than he; in the pursuit of science, able, indefatigable, indomitable, sparing neither time, labor nor expense.”’ ‘*Excepting his early death, Dr. Draper was a man fortunate in all things ; in his vigorous physique, his delicate senses, and skillful hand ; in his birth and education ; in his friendships ; and especially in his mar- riage, which brought to him not only wealth and all the happiness which naturally comes with a lovely, true-hearted and faithful wife, but also a most unusual companionship and intellectual sympathy in all his favorite pursuits. He was fortunate in the great resources which lay at his dis- posal, and in the wisdom to manage and use them well ; in the subjects he chose for his researches and in the complete success he invariably attained.’’ Such a man as this it is whose name we are sorrowfully called upon to strike from the roll of our living membership. Professor Draper was a man among men, a scientist of the highest type. Stricken down in the midst of his life-work, at the early age of 45, the bright promise of his noble life is left unfulfilled. What brilliant researches in his favorite science he would have made, we can never know. But with a mind so richly en- dowed and so thoroughly trained, with an experimental ability as earnest as it was persistent, with facilities for investigation which were as perfect as they are rare, with abundance of time and means at his disposal, and above all, with a devoted wife, who keenly appreciated the value of his scientific work, was ever at his side as his trusty assistant and always shared in the glory and the honor of his discoveries, we may be sure that, had he been permitted to reach the age of his honored father, results would have been reaped by his labors which would have added stilt brighter lustre to the science of America. Map of the Terminal Moraine. On page 476 it is recorded in the minutes of the meeting, October 6, 1882, that Prof. Henry Carvill Lewis read a paper on the course of the . great Terminal Moraine through Pennsylvania, studied by him as volun- teer Assistant of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, and de- scribed in his unpublished Report of Progress, Z, illustrated by photograph pictures taken by Mr. E. B. Harden, Topographical Assistant to the Survey. 4 Oneida JPL, 663. & wAinat Ithaca f- 3 | BWA eee oe “* x ae .s : : 2 & “Frankhn SS = ie he _Amer Phil. Soc. Philadel hia. Proceedings. Vol. xX. page 664 [April 6, Clay pole. ] Mr. Lewis described the hummocks west of Bangor in Northampton county; the striated boulders ; the clay plain ; 8. W. pointing striz# near Bangor ; the moraine ascending and descending the slopes of the Kitta- tinny mountain, west of the Delaware Water gap ; boulders, 30 feet long, of fossiliferous Lower Helderberg limestone, from the outcrop in the valley in Monroe county, now perched on the crest of the mountain, 1400 feet above tide ; boulders of well rounded Adirondack syenite from North- ern New York; the moraine ascending to the summit and stretching west- ward across the Pocono plateau, 2000’ A. T. where it forms Long ridge, twelve miles long, a mile wide and 100 feet high ; damming Long pond ; de- scending to the bed of the Lehigh river, and crossing the Hazleton coal field mountains, Cunnyngham valley and Nescopec mountain and the Susquehanna river above Berwick ; its curious ascent and descent of the Shickshinny mountain, with a perched boulder on the crest ; the ascent of the Alleghany or Great North mountain; the course of the moraine through Lycoming and Potter counties into the State of New York ; its return, and its south-west course through Warren, Butler and Beaver counties to the Ohio State line. The accompanying map was prepared to show the course of the moraine with regard to the topography. Note on a large Fish-plate from the Upper Chemung (?) beds of Northern Penn- sylvania. By BE. W. Claypole. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.) During a visit paid in the northern counties of this State in October last, I met a gentleman residing in Susquehanna county, Mr. A. Carter, who told me that some time previously he had ploughed up in one of his fields a large stone containing very peculiar markings upon its surface. Being unable to recognize it from his description, I requested him to send it down to me for examination on his return home. This he did, and a single glance showed an impression of a very large fish-plate in excellent preservation. Except one or two marks which had been made by the point of the ploughshare the cast was perfect. It was, however, unlike anything which I had previously seen, and no material within my reach gave me the means of identifying it. It was ap- parently a nondescript. I accordingly forwarded a rough outline and description to Prof. Cope, who told me in reply that he could not at the moment of writing, recall anything resembling it. I next sent a similar communication to Dr. Newberry, with the request that he would inform me if in his collection there was any similar speci- 1883.] 665 [Claypole. men. In reply he told me that he thought he had fragments that might belong to the same species, but they were not sufficiently perfect for de- scription. Feeling anxious to have Dr. Newberry’s decisive opinion I next forwarded to hima photograph of the plate, asking if that would enable him to express an opinion whether the specimen belonged to a de- scribed or an undescribed species of fish. In reply he informs me that the fish in question is undescribed, but that he has some fragments of what he thinks is the same species, too imperfect for description. Knowing that Prot. Whiteaves, Palzontologist to the Canadian Survey, had been working recently among some new Upper Devonian fishes, I sent him a photograph, requesting his opinion upon it. He has replied, saying, that there is no similar specimen among all those which he has seen from Scaumenac bay, and that he believes it_is undescribed. DESCRIPTION. The specimen in question so far as the means at my command enable me to determine belongs to some species of the genus Pterichthys, or to some kindred genus, and is apparently the ventro-median plate. It is pent- angular in outline but inequilateral, nearly symmetrical but not perfectly so. The front (?) is formed by one of the angles of the pentagon and the two sides enclosing this angle (of about 80°) are slightly concave outwardly. One of these sides—the right on the cast—is four and the other three and a quarter inches long. The former meets the third side of the pentagon at an angle of about 120°. This side is six and a quarter inches long. The latter meets at an angle of about 130° the fourth side of the figure which measures six and a half inches in length. The pentagon is closed at the base (back) by a short side of one and three-quarters of an inch long and very concave outwardly. The base is, in consequence of the inequality of the sides, slightly oblique. The surface of the plate is marked with an ornamentation which I can_ not find mentioned in the accounts of any otherspecies. Instead of show- ing the tubercular or pustulose appearance of Pterichthys, its character more resembles (if we compare the great with the small) a magnified scale of Holoptychius. It is completely covered with close set inverrupted wrinkles, slightly wavy, anastomosing and again separating without any appearance of regularity. These wrinkles meet the outside line almost at right angles and radiate inward in the following manner: If from the middle point of the axis of the plate straight lines be drawn to the upper (front) and two lower (back) angles, and lines, upwardly convex, to the lateral angles, the wrinkles in question start from these lines so as to meet the periphery (as said above) nearly at right angles. The wrinkles are subequal in size, largest anteriorly and posteriorly where they measure as much as one-eighth of an inch in breadth and are separated by furrows of about equal width. They increase slightly in size towards the periphery and in the middle are very small and much interrupted. A flat, finely striate margin surrounds the whole plate, commencing at 666 {April 6, Claypole.] the anterior angle where its breadth is nothing and widening to the lateral angles where its breadth equals half an inch. The outer line of this mar- gin between the lateral and basal (?) angles is straight, giving its greatest breadth about the middle of these sides where it equals an inch. The margin of the basal side is about three-quarters of an inch in breadth in the middle. The whole of this margin is very finely striate nearly at right angles to the sides of the plate. This margin is evidently the portion of the plate which was overlapped by the adjoining plates and in this respect the resemblance between itand the ventro-median plate of Pterichthys oblongus Ag. is obvious. The outline of the plate corresponds very closely with that of the dorso- median plate of Pterichthys, and were it not perfectly flat I should be in- clined to refer it to that part of the exo-skeleton. But this flatness renders it more probable that it represents the ventro-median or well known ‘‘lozenge-plate’’ of Hugh Miller—the central piece of the armor of this fish on the lower side—overlapped on ail sides by others. Prof. Whiteaves has very kindly lent me for comparison the original and only specimen of the ventro-median plate of his new species, Coccosteus Acadicus. This, much more closely than my specimen, resembles the ventro-median plates of Pterichthys and Coccosteus, as given by Hugh Miller in his ‘Old Red Sandstone.’’ It is quadrilateral, with two out- wardly concave and two straight sides. The ornamentation is very pecu- liar, the plate being ‘‘ quartered’ if we may borrow an expression from heraldry, and having crenulated ridges parallel to the outer side in the first and fourth quarters and irregularly scattered tubercles in the second and third. Altogether it shows little resemblance to the plate here described. Prof. Newberry remarked in his letter that he very much doubted if the plate here described belonged strictly to Pterichthys and was inclined to consider it the type of anew genus. Probably this will be the result of a better knowledge of its structure, but it would be premature in this note to found a new genus on the fragments already known. When other parts of the exo-skeleton have been found it will be time to consider its generie position. Meanwhile I suggest for it the provisional name, PTERICHTHYS RUGOSUS. The accompanying figure is taken from a photograph and will suffice to preserve the appearance of the specimen for future comparisons in the event of its loss or destruction. On the Kingsmill White Sandstone. By E. W. Claypole. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.) Near the base of the red sandstones and shales which compose the Great Ponent series of Professor Rogers, lies a thin bed of white sandstone which promises to be of much interest, and perhaps of some importance in the [Clay pole. 667 1883,] NG, PENNA. From a pho- PTERICHTHYS? RUGOSUS, sp. n. UPPER CHEMU dstone. 10D 1n san tograph of a plaster cast taken from the impress PRINTED MAY 20, 1883. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc, xx. 113. 4F. Claypole.) 668 [April 6, géology of Perry county and of Middle Pennsylvania. In itself in nowise remarkable, it abounds in organic remains which when worked out will yield a rich fauna. It is at present impossible to decide the exact horizon to which this sand- stone belongs. For this reason, and to avoid prejudging the question, I have retained the term ‘‘Ponent.’’ The transcendental nomenclature of Rogers is doomed to deserved extinction, but until we can determine finally what terms shall take the vacant places, it is wise to retain such of them as are necessary or convenient. There is no question regarding the extent or signification of the term ‘‘Ponent’’ as employed by Professor Rogers. It is purely a lithological term, and is neither based on nor supported by paleontological evidence. In many parts of Middle Pennsylvania the dividing line which limits this Ponent Group is almost as easily seen in the rocks as on a geological dia- gram. By the term ‘‘ Ponent,’’ Professor Rogers intended to designate all that great mass of red sandstone and shale, which intervenes between the top of his olive ‘‘ Vergent’’ shales (Chemung of New York), and the Great Lower Carboniferous sandstone above them. The color and material of the beds are the sole foundations on which the distinction is based. Paleontological considerations were not in the least regarded, partly be- cause the time and means at the command of the First Survey forbade any extensive search for fossils, and partly because the great barrenness of these red shales and sandstones discouraged the same. In New York, on the other hand, though fossils were also very scarce, yet an attempt was made by Professor Hall to establish a paleontological basis for his ‘‘ Catskill Group,’’ and the few relics that were obtained from the scanty exposures of these red shales and sandstones in that State were considered ‘‘characteristic.’’ These are, strictly speaking, only two in number—AHoloptychius Americanus and Sauripteris Taylori. The base of the Catskill Group in New York is therefore double, Etho- logical and paleontological. It may be to some extent an open question, whether or not these two horizons exactly coincide, and possibly the ques- tion may not admit of solution from the few and obscure exposures in that State. But until the coincidence of the horizons in New York with those in Pennsylvania is definitely settled, it would be premature to assume it. Consequently I retain for the present the term ‘‘Ponent”’ in writing of these beds. The Kingsmill white sandstone lies near the base of these red sandstones and shales. Consequently it is in the Ponent Group of Pennsylvania. Its exact position is about 600 feet above the actual base of the red shales and sandstones. Palzontologically, the evidence leads to the same conclusion for about 400 feet below it are two fish-beds full of the remains of Sawrip- teris and Holoptychius. There is consequently no question of its position, judging from the data that have been hitherto accepted by geologists. Whether or not turther examination of the Kingsmill sandstone will compel 1883. 669 (Claypole. some modification of these data time will show. As the lines of discrimina- tion are now drawn, this sandstone must therefore be placed in the Ponent Group of Pennsylvania, and on paleontological evidence in the Catskill Group of New York. And no future changes can raise it. Any alteration, if made, can only lower it by placing it in the underlying or Chemung (Vergent) Group. These details are necessary as an introduction to the facts and argument which follows. Among the numerous fossils of the Kingsmill sandstone (many of which, though casts, are in excellent preservation, often showing the finest detail of structure), is one which at an early stage of the work arrested my at- tention. Its beautiful condition and the immense number in which it occurs were sufficient for this purpose. It is no exaggeration to say that at some of the exposures this fossil occurs in millions. For some time I could get no clue to its name. At length, however, after going through with care all the material in my possession or within my reach, that bore upon the subject, I became almost certain that it was a fossil figured by Professor Hall in the geology of the Fourth District of New York, under the name Cypricardia rhombea. Possible inferences from this determination, however, deterred me from making use of the conelusion, and I laid the matter aside for further consideration. Returning to the subject during the winter, while engaged in the study of my summer’s collection, I found no reason whatever to distrust my pre- vious determination, but in order to obtain the confirmation of another observer, I enclosed a specimen in a small parcel which I had occasion to send to Professor Whitfield, of the American Museum of Science, re- questing his opinion on the identification. In his reply, he said : “The shell sent is, I think, without question, Schizodus rhombeus Hall (Cypricardia rhombex) of the Fourth District Report. We have no really authentic specimens here, they being all in Professor Hall’s hands at present.”’ In order to make the identification perfectly certain, I packed up a speci- men, and sent it to Prof. Hall, with a request for his opinion upon it. In reply, he writes under date of March 10th, 1883. ‘‘T do not perceive any important difference between the specimen sent, and Schizodus rhombeus, though I have not before had the casts of the interior, which I am glad to receive.’’ There remains therefore no doubt that the specimens here alluded to be- long to the species Schizodus rhombeus Hall, of the Geological Report of the Fourth District of New York, where it was described and figured under the name of Cypricardia rhombea. It was found four miles north of Panama, Chautauqua county, New York, and attributed to the conglom- erate at the base of the Carboniferous system. This opinion is now proba- bly held by few or by no one. Prof. Hall said in the Twenty-third Re- gent’s Report (p. 10) : ‘(In the original collections of the Geological Survey, some of the con- Claypole.|} 670 April 6, glomerates of the southern counties containing certain fossils were referred to and arranged with the Chemung Group, while those from other locali- ties, but without fossils, were referred to Carboniferous age. This latter reference arose from finding some ferruginous beds supposed to be out- liers of the red sandstone of Tioga, near the summits of some of the hills and below the conglomerates. These have since been proved by their con- tained fossils to belong to the Chemung Group, and it has not yet (1871) been demonstrated that the red sandstone of the adjacent part of Pennsyl- vania does occur within the limits of the south-western counties of New York. ‘To a very great extent the conglomerates have been ascertained to be- long to the Chemung Group, and to contain numerous fossils of that forma- tion, while in some localities at least two hundred feet of shales and shaly sandstones, charged with Chemung fossils, lie above the conglomerates. So many localities have now been examined that we may conclude that all the conglomerates of the southern counties are of the age of the Chemung, but from the great difference in character of the fossils from different localities, it may not be regarded as proven that these beds are all of the same horizon. ‘‘The relations of some of the outlying conglomerates south of Olean in New York and the adjacent parts of Pennsylvania in McKean county, to the Chemung Group and Coal Measures have not yet been satisfactorily determined.’’ Mr. Carll in Report III has given a minute account of the Panama con- glomerate at its several exposures in Chautauqua county, New York, and has pointed out its peculiarities. He has also given a list of fossils obtained from it, which agrees, so far as the species were determined, with that given by Prof. Hall (Geol. 4th Dist. p. 291), except in one point. The following are the lists : Prof. Hall’s list. Mr. Carll’s list. EHuomphalus depressus Euomphatus depressus —_- Cypricardia rhombea Cypricardia rhombea Cypricardia contracta Cypricardia contracts Spirifer disjunctus Mr. Carll does not give his locality, but as he describes a quarry four miles north of Panama, it may be inferred that he obtained some of them there. This is the locality mentioned by Prof. Hall. One curious fact is the great discordance between the two accounts of the rock. Prof. Hall says : ‘* Fossils are exceedingly rare in this rock, having been seen in one lo- cality only, four miles north of Panama.”’ Mr. Carll says: ‘‘One of the exceptional featuresof the Panama rockis the great abun- dance of fossils found associated with it, and even in the pebble mass itself.’’ Probably, judging from the resemblance between the lists given above, the abundance of fossils is a local character of the rock. In this way we may perhaps reconcile the two accounts. eae i 1883.] 671 [Claypole. Without laying too much stress on a single species, it may be worth consideration whether or not the Panama conglomerate of Report III may be of approximately the same age as the Kingsmill white sandstone above described. The following points of resemblance may be noted : 1. The Kingsmill sandstone is often conglomeratic. 2. The Kingsmill sandstone contains abundance of flat lenticular quartz pebbles. I have never seen a pebble of any other shape init. This isa distinguishing feature of the Panama rock according to Mr. Carll and Mr. Ashburner. 3. The Kingsmill sandstones contain abundance of fossils, among which, in one locality at least, is found in profusion Schizodus rhombeus, one of the three characteristic species of the Panama rock. The Sub-Olean or Sub-Garland conglomerate of Messrs. Carll and Ash- burner is the only other conglomerate in that part of Pennsylvania holding similar flat pebbles. See Rep. III. I have not yet identified with certainty either of the other three species mentioned by Prof. Hall and Mr. Carll to occur near Panama in the conglomerate, but so far as I have yet observed Schizodus rhombeus is strictly limited in Perry county to this single bed of sandstone not exceed- ing ten feet in thickness. A scarce form, usually imperfect, much resem- bles S. contractus (Cypricardia contracta), and may prove to be so. The Gasteropods are in so ill preserved a condition that their identification is attended with great difficulty. If any importance be attached to this suggestion, it only remains to point out the horizon of the Kingsmill sandstone, which admits of no doubt, although it may admit of slight differences of opinion. As mentioned at the beginning of this note, it lies near the base of the great ‘‘ Ponent’’ seriet. of Prof. Rogers. It must, therefore, be about the top of the Chemung or the base of the Catskill of New York, or perhaps better in what we may call the ‘‘Chemung-Catskill passage beds.’’ It is not probable that the paleontological evidence, when complete, will warrant the placing of this sandstone and itS associated strata fully within either of these two great groups of New York. The Kingsmill standstone cannot of course be a continuation, unchanged, of the Panama conglomerate for, according to the testimony of Mr. Carll and Mr. Ashburner, the latter graduates down into soft shales when fol- lowed a few miles to the south-east of Panama. But it may be a bed on the same or nearly the same horizon, and the deposit of a sea tenanted by the same species. It may even be a continuation of the same bed taking on its sandy nature again in consequence of changed conditions. It only remains to add that, though the three or four species above enu- merated form the whole of the known fauna of the Panama conglomerate* * The list of fossils from the Panama conglomerate or its associated conglom- erates has apparently been increased since the publication of the Geology of New York, by the addition of the following three species ; Edmondia equimarginalis = Cardinia equimarginalis Win, Allorisma Hannibalensis = Grammysia Hannibalensis Shamard. Sanguinolites clavulus Hall. Claypole.] 672 [April 6, in New York, yet the Kingsmill sandstone contain a rich fauna, the names of which will form, when worked out, along list. | In addition to what has been said above concerning the fossils of the Panama conglomerate, the following notes are worthy of a little space. Prof. A. Winchell in a paper printed in the Proceedings of the Acad. of Nat. Sciences, 1865, says, when speaking of the fossils of the Marshall Group of Michigan : ‘Perhaps the most interesting feature of all is the identification of four Western species with fossils contained in the supposed Carboniferous con- glomerate of Western New York. These are: Euomphalus depressus Hall = Straparollus Ammon White. Cypricardia contracta Hall = Edmondia bicarinata Win. = Sanguinolites rigidus Win. = Cypricardia rigida White and Whitf. Edmondia equimarginalis Win. Allovisma Hannibalensis Shum. ‘‘Further than this, two of the above species—Z. equimarginalis and- Allorisma Hannibalensis—occur in what has been regarded as another con- glomerate whose position is beneath the first, and at the top of the Che mung rocks of Western New York.’’ In regard to this last remark, Mr. Ashburner in Report III, pp. 70-79, says that the Panama conglomerate is the lowest sandstone in the N. W. of Pennsylvania and S. W. of New York. He says that an oil well sunk close to the base of the Panama rock passed through 1200 feet of soft shale and slate, and that other wells in the region gave similar sections. He says that, granting all the conglomerates cropping out and forming rock-cities along the State line hills to be distinct beds, they lie thus : 1. Olean (Garland = Sharon = Ohio). 2. Sub-Olean, Sub-Garland, Shenango. 3. Tunangwant. = 4. Salamanca. , 5. Panama. On his view, therefore, there is no older conglomerate than the Panama in the region. Prof. Winchell argues that because these four species occur in the Mar- shall Group in Michigan, and in the Panama (or its equivalent) conglom- erates of New York, therefore the Marshall Group is more or less the equivalent of these conglomerates which he assumes to be of Lower Carbo- niferous age as stated in the Geology of New York. Consequently, he in- fers that the Marshall grits and conglomerates of Michigan are of Lower Carboniferous age. The evidence given above, shows that one of the spe- cies of the Panama conglomerate is not Lower Carboniferous, but belongs at the base of the Catskill. The other species may be found in the same horizon. The inference from this datum, somewhat slender it is true, is d : ae a 1883.] 673 (Lesley. that the Panama conglomerate belongs to the base of the Catskill, and probably also the Marshall grits of Michigan. No representative of the Catskill has yet been found or recognized so far as I am aware in Michigan. A gap is left in the Michigan section between the Chemung and the Lower Carboniferous. Mr. Lesley remarked on this paper of Prof. Claypole’s, that he could not agree with the sentiment expressed in its introduction respecting the doubtful propriety of the use of the term “ Catskill formation” as an equivalent of Prof. Roger’s “ Ponent formation.” It is a mistake to suppose that the ‘‘ Catskill formation’’ was based in any degree upon fossil forms, any more than was the ‘‘Ponent.’’ The two terms are completely and exactly identical. The New York geologist meant by it the red rocks constituting the Catskill Mountain massif, overlooking the Hudson valley, and extending unbroken far into Penn- sylvania, and in fact through Pennsylvania into Maryland and Virginia. It.was described as a pile of nearly horizontal Devonian strata destitute of fossils remains, except a few macerated plants and one or two types of fish. Mr. Rogers had to describe the same mass of strata, with the same lithological constitution and topographical aspect, and perfectly continuous with it geographically. There never was any question, nor is there now any question of the identity of this mass of strata in the two States. But as Mr. Rogers declined to accept any of the Paleozoic names of New York and invented a new nomenclature for his own use in Pennsylvania, he sub- stituted Ponent for ‘‘ Catskill,’’ as he substituted Wedidial for ‘‘ Oriskany,’’ Postmedidal for ‘‘Upper Helderberg,’’ Cadent for ‘‘Hamilton,’’ Vergent for ‘‘Chemung and Portage,’’ &c. The only essential change he made was in giving a separate name, Vespertine, to the gray sandstone strata forming the peaks of the Catskill. These had been left unnamed (or in- cluded under the general name ‘‘Catskill’’) because the N. Y. geologists had no clue to their topographical significance, which only appears after passing west of the Lehigh, where, upturned vertically, they constitute a separate range of mountain. In the reports of the Second Geological Survey the transcendental nomenclature of the brothers Rogers has been set aside in favor of the older, classical and generally accepted nomenclature of the New York geologists. As the gray sands of the Catskill peaks form the top coating of the Pocono tableland in Pennsylvania, the name ‘‘ Pocono’’ has been substituted for Vespertine ; but this leaves the term Ponent represented, as it always has been, by “ Catskill.” Lesley.] 674 [April 6, The discussion in New York respecting the lower limit of the Catskill formation (recently settled by the proper placing of the Oneonta sand- stone) has always left the great Catskill formation unaffected. So in Pennsylvania, the 100’ of transition beds at the bottom of the Ponent and at the top of the Vergent, do not affect in the least the broad fact that Ponent is ‘‘Catskill’’ and Vergent is ‘‘Chemung.’’ No paleontological discoveries can ever alter these established relationships. The discovery of Catskill fish-forms down in the Chemung has no more bearing on the name ‘‘Catskill’’ than it has on the name Ponent ; for “*Catskill’’ and Ponent are merely synonyms for the 3000’ + of red and gray sanés and shales of the Catskill-Pocono-Alleghany mountain range which present a continuous outcrop from the Hudson to the Potomac. The discovery of Catskill fish-forms down in the Chemung merely adds one more item of evidence to the now almost accepted conviction that the task of devising geological names of the first and second order cannot safely be entrusted to paleontologists, but that they must limit their function as namers of strata to names of the third and fourth order, as the geologists of the continent of Europe have been content to do for some years back, designating the groups of beds in a subdivision of a forma- tion by some characteristic fossil form; as, for instance :—TrtAs; 1. Grés bigarré ; 1. b. Grés @ Woltzia. The fact is becoming patent to all eyes, that the occurrence of special fossil forms in a rock is no evidence of the exact age of that rock until after its exact age has been settled topographi- cally or structurally. If then the new fish-form be a Catskill fish found in Chemung rocks, it will not make the upper part of the Chemung, Catskill. It merely happens that a Chemung fish is also a Catskill fish. And so of any other fossil form discovered under similar circumstances. Mr. Lesley added that the discovery of the Kingsmill White Sandstone fossils by Prof. Claypole is important for the future settlement of the question : What becomes of the Catskill formation going west into Western New York, Ohio and Michigan? If we could trust the evidence of fossil forms for establishing a lithological horizon — if we were sure that there were an immovable horizon extending more than 506 miles (8. E. and N, W.) characterized by Hall’s Huomphalus depressus, and Cypricardia con- tracta, Winchell’s Hdmondia equimarginalis, and Shumard’s Allorisma Hannibalensis—and if this horizon be seen at Marshall in Michigan just under the Coal measures, at Panama in Western New York considerably below the Venango Oil measures, and in Perry County, Middle Pennsyl- vania, just below the bottom of the great Catskill formation—everybody who believes in this kind of evidence must accept the conclusion that there is a time gap in the Michigan and Northern Ohio section to be measured by many thousand feet of Pennsylvania strata, the majority of which are Catskill; and that this gap happens between the ‘‘ Marshall grit’’ of Michigan and the next overlying strata. - 1883.] 675 [Lesley. But the fact must be kept in view, that no interval of time can elapse between emergence and resubmergence, without the interval being ac- ‘cented by erosion which has gone on during the interval. If the time interval in question extended through the Catskill era, Michigan standing above sea level, there should not only be a plane of paleontological non- conformity, but also nonconformable bedding; and, in soft Devonian measures, this would be deeply sculptured. None such being known in Michigan, we must conclude that the time-interval was spent under water ; but in that case sedimentation must have gone on. We are there- fore shut up to the conclusion that several thousand feet of Perry County, Pennsylvania, deposits are represented by a few yards, feet, or perhaps only inches of Michigan rocks ; yet nevertheless perfectly and conforma- bly represented. Early Records of the Society. Mr. Lesley, in reporting the completion of his MS. Con- densed Copy of the Minutes of the Society, upon which be has been engaged, at intervals, during the last two years, said : These Minutes, preserved in ten volumes, commence with Franklin’s letter of 1744, and reach to the last meeting in December, 1837, after which the Proceedings were regularly printed for the use of the members, at first four times, and then twice a year, the first issue of 1838 being numbered 1, and the last issue of 1882, 112. Vol: i 1838, 1839, 1840, contains Nos. 1 to 14. Vol. II, 1841’3, contains Nos. 15 to 26. — Vol. Ill, Celebration of the Hundredth Anniversary, No. 27. Vol. IV, 1845’7, contains Nos. 28 to 39. Vol. V, 1848 to 1853— Nos. 40 to 50. Vol. VI, 1854 to 1858— Nos. 51 to 60. Vol. VII, 1859 to 1860— Nos. 61 to 64. Vol. VIII, 1861, contains Nos. 65 and 66. Vol. IX, 1862 to 1864— Nos. 67 to 72. Af) Ee. © 1865 to 1868— Nos. 73 to 80. Vol. XI, 1869 and 1870— Nos. 81 to 85. Vol. XII, 1881 and 1872— Nos. 86 to 89. Vol. XIII, 1873 and 1874— Nos. 90 and 91. Vol. XIV, 1875, contains Nos. 92 to 95. Vol. XV, 1876, contains No. 96. Vol. XVI 1876 and 1877, contains Nos. 97 to 99. Vol. XVII, 1877 and 1878—. Nos. 100 and 101. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx. 113. 46. PRINTED MAY 25, 1883. Lesley.] 676 [April 6, Vol. XVIII, 1878 to 1880— Nos. 102 to 106. Vol. XIX, 1880 and 1881— Nos. 107 to 109. Vol. XX, 1881°2’3— Nos. 110 to 113. Vol. XXI, 1883, June onward,— No. 114. I propose that as a substitute for Vol. I, now out of print, the Society shall print a Vol. I, beginning in 1744 and containing the condensed Min- utes of ninety-six years, 7. €., up to the beginning of 1841, as including a condensed reprint of the present Vol. I. The MS. which I lay on the table consists of reports of the Proceedings of every stated, adjourned or special meeting in more than seventy years, condensed ; omitting nothing of the nature of an act or fact however un- important, but stating it in the fewest possible words, and using a certain number of easily understood contractions, such as Soc., Lib., Don., Com., for Society, Library, Donations, Committee, &c., in order to get as many paragraphs as possible to occupy each not more than one line of printed text. Another means made use of for diminishing the bulk of the MS. was the omission of all titles and initials to proper names, except in cases where the title or initial was needful to distinguish one individual from another of the same name. With the same object in view, the lists of members present at meetings subsequent to 1800 are only given on important occasions, or at times when the Society was specially active or specially inactive, or after numerous admissions of new members, or at elections, or — debates protracted from meeting to meeting. Much space was saved, and great clearness given to the record, for con- sultation, by ignoring most of the prolix formality and tedious verbiage of -both minutes and resolutions. Short formule were adopted for many of the constantly recurring proceedings, such as references to and reports from committees. But resolutions of the slightest financial or historical importance are given verbatim ; and where they are contracted or con- densed, the essential wording is retained, and every word or sentence in the original is furnished in the copy with quotation marks, to obviate the necessity of reference to the original for the purpose of verifying the real meaning of the transaction. Quotation marks are used throughout the copy, and by these the com- pleteness of the copy as well as its fidelity, can be judged. All unusual spellings of words and names are followed by the signal (sic). Many of the names of members are spelled by different Secretaries, in different years, and in the same year, in two or more ways; as for ex- ample: Lesueur, Le Sueur, Le Seur; Beesley, Beasley ; Du Ponceau, Du- ponceau; Nicholls, Nicolls, Nichols; Pennington, Penington ; and even Vaughan, Vaughn. Many of these variations are not due to careless tran- scription, but to unestablished orthography. This is especially apparent in the lawless variations in the use of initial capitals, especially in the ear- oe. . oa eS ee —" rps 1888.] 677 [Lesley. lier years. All these curious features of our minute books have been sedu- lously retained in making the copy. All annotations are placed in brackets. Side notes, corrections and blanks are noted. Thirty or forty blank pages have been left, in different parts of the mass of copy, to be filled by a literal copy of the original MS. in such cases as the letters of Jefferson, or long resolutions, every word of which should be retained. This filling-in can be done by a careful copyist at any time previous to the publication of the copy, or while it is going through the press. For nearly fifty years the records of the earlier years of our Society have stood exposed to destruction, especially by fire; and it is surprising that a copy of them has never been made before now. The present copy is pre- served by the President in the fire-proof vault of the Western Saving Fund Society, Walnut and Tenth streets, to be forthcoming at the order of the Society. Its publication would not only secure it against destruction, but would no doubt give lively satisfaction to the members of the Society, who would then for the first time be able to gratify a natural and affectionate curiosity respecting the origin, growth, struggles and labors of the venerable institu- tion to which they belong. Most of the names of noted Philadelphians ap- pear in these minutes, and many famous men of other States, and of foreign countries. Not the least important feature of the record is its representation of the first appearance of potent ideas ; the first efforts for the improvement of the mechanic arts ; the first steps taken in scientific paths ; early explora- tions of the New World ; with a pronounced eagerness to import the facul- ties of the Old World into it. It is not so much a-record of the growth of an American Society, as a record of the growth of society in America, and in this sense alone it possesses an extraordinary historical value. If printed, it will make a volume of about 400 pages, and can be cursorily read through at two or three sittings. The reader will probably feel what the biologist feels while spending some hours in watching, through his microscope, the metamorphoses of one of the protozoa. The printing will be cheap, as it is all plain copy, and will require little or no correction. : It should be printed as one of our set of Proceedings ; and entitled ‘‘ The Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, Vol. I, Part I, from 1744 to 1838,’’ orsimply Vol. I, 1744 to 1848. It will then be placed by cor- responding societies and libraries in its proper place at the beginning of the row of our Proceedings, the present Vol. I, will be recognized (even without reprinting its title page) as Vol. I, Part II. But it would be well for the Society to print an extra title page, to go out with it, and be pasted by our correspondents over the old title page of Vol. 1, designating that as Part 2. The principal use of this volume, well zndexed, will be for referring to the Lesley.] 678 {April 6, 1883. past action of the Society on subjects of order and discipline, ownership of property, and financial investments, which have always necessitated refer- ences to the written minutes tedious and often unsatisfactory. Also, when questions arise as to the ownership and history of the objects of art and books in the possession of the Society, this printed record will be found convenient. —- eS INDEX TO VOL. XxX. Stated Meetings Held. 1882. : Page. 1882. Page. SaVUay COs be GS ween! woe Le OctoberiGthis 5), cverate sss. 475 Bannary DOCH. 6.25. 4. tate se tees et ee |, OCtODer Winans or. oie eee 476 MOGPEUBEY LOM site =) oes) eee enn ce ne) © LOE «| NOVELL DOL OCs an ot isn st aie im ites 496 Mepruary lth... 2: 2's 4 <2 .<... 224%) -November lvthis 232. 2.5. 4 sue WHAEGIRGG 615. 202, 5) 2.3 oth tee eh, - OD CCOM DEIN LAL ements octets cet 505 Marcht7th: . 3 + = s $0.*-=.-0c--. +. 220)_| Decomber thine siete ee eto April7th; 2:63:23 .ie.7 5%. . 281 | 1888. PAT DIS Gs. 85 Site ene foto celites erelieia 1 233 | January 5th....-........ . . 636 IER Ve BGI Kose cc helo uits ls Hc a ete PR | “Oo AILUALY, POM ie temerebatie = tem eennies 638 My TOG Ss) s5) ss. Stare te ooo cete te LOB) | Hebruary] 2d oS pase. cists 3 women 640 June 6th. .-. .-.-.. seer) sce 2 O82) |-Kebruary 16th cen eneoeie ie See GAL Oy DIStin cacti. teeter eteae',s = = <878U|t March 20h. c5 a) ae aera . . 648 PAGS RISE TRING Gane Bde on uote S70= |) MarchaGthiy eis ae r-rel tees 644 SeptemberJhth. :-..5.5 ..%.. Sata) “Gomes | ede ca + 3 cere OSD New Members Elected. SE eA Ghcratcy ious s) sis clelahis| ia, e) siOdO|/E MACTATIANG, JAS.) cc’ ene eee OLO 2:0) ben i ons US Re ee re Se BIO PNEaiy, POs). & os oe a. i sa eS EGOS. SILO GO VV Mei s(ctelicn selene) oi) | sek | MOY, Grit. 7. atten ene GO cbc SEL Ee Trurnepleree actiete coh olte colts) (ole is), deco ALO LOLTIS, dis; Oo. 2, some o Yadiel ohiet ee eae Maypole... Wie. c e's s ses oo « 6 040"') Pancoast, W.. ED: cvsueciee ae spp 40 LESAED ANS MES SiGe a oc o Wee Ge0b Elante. Go eae neers 379 RCPILOMINY aia Ss fo sclicisciis 2) 6 « 36 O1Os | eA On ve) eee c PP P,P oe 2 MATS Emmons,s.F.. i a eR Bawlins) CC.) His. seen een Seer ae 3 ae PT PER SPAN eso cm etensicetehetey +), sus 936:)|. Robins; J. Wi... se ene eee eee ae PPOs NS Bee ect chetets 5, 6 sis “5,7 200 | Sareent, (CoS ie. tae he ene 235 UGE GOS Mom woe Dot 6 atolomoenene: Se MSCS DL os Goldie Aus co SA tae 2 ee 379 MOGI Aa AG Suu otcu ei eile shies ‘satis 236° | Sharples, 8. Boc slo aie eee 236 ReU TEN COR VY) of =) Oooh a) 2 Maes? a }ODS PATEW ECHO. Cie. Ss eco ar o> ok w alba 'o, Kel cee sie’ ve) “ouralte) vy lelensaicethe Pealacee eae ar aon 504 Bridges, R. (Rushenberger, appointed 229)............ ons hes ee 225 STIPE riley hs tas cris roc ot enietos al elistaipoicelte lower site ietr ied eneiee ono Me.celyemee een ©, CIELO SMMISLIS OU EDT. 1s. S)°S. 5. ge ence gsc mene nto menrS BATE 497 WIG sIROUIE Gaeturs fon tes Melts semaice hae oR ek iting oils) cA lores ERIS ears stage Se aurepors 380 680 Desor, E. (Lesley appointed, 298; read 519)... . 2... 2.0. cece eee ees LOT. pt: at Sh Pees SO re tramiris tes futile cpanel co Draper, H. (Barker appointed ; read 657). ..........-. Draper, J. W. (Hammond appointed, 226; read 227)..... Emerson, R,. W. (Ames appointed, 298 , read 496). ...... Hays, I. 1. (Brintonappointed)........... aealieh ete PAR VON, BoB ay ke ere ie. eee oa eras Siete eee pre Melis ne Be James, T. P. (Rothrock appointed, “39; read 293, 298) . cae Kinderdine, BiB soc6 5 veces edie eh > aoa io 3h se Merke? ahs Krauth, C. P. (Muhlenberg appointed, read 613)...... Lenthald 2.30%. % ms sees es eee eee St BS ie es 1 Ch: ee se UEC Br So) him he Ge city a Gea re Meigs, J. F. (Dr. Pepper appointed, 638). .......... Pancoast, Jos. (Gross, 229, 234; W. H. Pancoast, 640). ..... Rand: Bs His i) ee ou ME er Ripon cya ee a egiae st vine Roberts, 8S. W. (Fraley appointed) . aie DS Pir eS Caste Roberts, W. M. (Obituary read by Mr. Fraley) . Srey ot Seteuis ogers, W. B. (R. E. Rogers). ... . Ro 4 Oy opoee Shen iE Seybert, H. (Moncure Robinson, 646). ...........- Smith, D. B.(P. E. Chase appointed). ......... ree Smith, Geo. (Brintonappointed).............. aria Vaux, W.S. (Law appointed, 332). .......... ae hago ae Warren, Gi Koin.5. wee tak eel ciniemeee tama aeht AS agit Aye Wiheatley, Goi ices oa. i - ckret elect Rate Mel irre reteto teres eam= Wonlers Fe ec zk. eh ras Tepe htbte UC ees, feitente. Woes UPA sy tec Members Resigned. COME SVE Bs sin <) cles aeons « + /685 7 (\Outerbridge; As Kiva se iene. ae - 636 ‘Longtellow, 8)... sss en 924°'230 || (Stillé, Alfred. 5 cs. o:. i) -) >) eee - 636 May, Joseph... 2S s-ar areas 5 = 3 646 il Wood, HoratloiGy «0 wv. ts cane eee Communications. AMES. Obituary Notice of R. W. Emerson. ... . BP cya oh a eset koe ae 496, 498 ASHBURNER. 2 | (Verbal) Colorado Anthracite........ WEE en. oe 8 - 205 | (Verbal) Ona Bureau’ of Mines Wi 2 oa es ye a, cp cant eee - 206 Estimation of Coal areas............ Soe) week: Sy eee . 232 BARKER. New Stantlard ‘Cell... 5 5) 7) soe oete is 20 cece kre a nie 638, 649 (Verbal) Three Bronze Medalsy 2 eer aes cea - ea) 0 ieee memes . 647 Obituary Notice of Henry Draper......... Sie al eineiketeoee ene . 656 BRITTON. (Verbal) Arkansas Peat‘and Lignite. 2 cs. 2 ce 2 inl soe ee onl ee . 225 CHASE. Photodynamic Notes. V, VI, VII....... - - « « « 2 285-7, 406, 476, 566, 638 CLAYPOLE. Commingling of fossilforms............ ShisdS eres Shoe vote Eli gio Occurrence of Holoptychius in the Chemung. ............- a Rite Catskill rocks erroneously mapped in Bradford county........ . 531 Equivalent of Schoharie grit in Middle Pennsylvania......... - 534 Kingsmill White Sandstone. ....%.....%% Sik cept Mol etal ropenaee 647, 666 Fish-plate in the Chemung—Ptlerichthys rugosus.........-. . 647, 664 681 CRANE. Page. On Medisval fermon books‘and stories. .. ....2 2.5.56 se ses 644 CopE. (Verbal) Fossil lower jaw from the Colorado basin. ............ 199 Structure of some Eocene Carnivorous Mammals............. 226 On-Archasthetism: 257s eae ts, sn esas kore Pe eae be ey eee 232 New Marsupial from Lower Eocene of New Mexico............ 232 Classification of Unrulate Mammalia =... .).05.5 3,2. 2 2 ace 299, 438 Remarkable new Permian forms from Texas. .........-....6s 405 Third Contribution to Permian Vertebrata in Texas......... 405, 447 Synopsis of Puerco Eocene Vertebrata..............s..-. 461, 478 Systematic relations of Carnivorous Fissipedia. ........ 5 fe yn MA AIO New Synthetic form of Laramic Cretaceous Mammal........... 476 Brains of Eocene Theocodus and Pteryptichus............ 509, 563 Kirst addition to'Puerco Hocene fauna, 2.54552. .13 =... a 545, 637 Contributions. . . Vertebrata. . . L. Eocene, Wyoming, 188]l.. ... . .139 (Verbal) Absurd hypotheses for the extinction of fossil mammals... . . 643 Fourth Contribution to the history of the Texas Permian....... 645 DAVENPORT. Tablesiomihe distribution Of Herns aces) cet ee eee 605, 641 Davis. ‘ Deposit of Gold from Chlorine Solution. (To be published in No. 114) . 646-7 Eppy. OntRadiantihea tee.) osm Geeta ee fe Moen, sk a en eee ae 334 FRALEY. ObDituary7OLSWic Ms RODCLES F256. wae) eo a 5 S30 6 SO eee eS 199 Minuteon Bi-Centennial: Anniversary . <<... . » « « «sie seers 497 FRAZER. iHorizZononuhe South valley Hill rocks... () =. = 05 see eae ene 509, 510 Improvements in the Aneroid Barometer. .......... . . . 604, 643 Summary of a Geology. of Beypts, oa. 2.) 5% a ters sees y acy Senne 637 ROCKS OLS be RVIOS FC res oii, jel «ohn st wei: SOT OOD OG a O38 Cy NAYaKols MEP 2) coos bo OO Coco Go De A do Oe 497, 504 Wy ‘ss 7 iW: ~~ tage a Wy 1) Wiad Poe a Stee a oh YP ty OO Nie cl © Oats P mia is ‘ea et yeh : oe? > ee Wt wih Be rv oF Peele ate 1) [ols Nag i ; rake yr $l yy5 fh rent say ms mits Gh) Tintig* ne laghe TFS te es : | Nie ss. ake oa Pad ue 4 taf eg si See vs vit rae +a? t t/a t sé ual uy’, city eyo) an » berphss ci el - ee 7) aet we ra , te >" e a Thee ri G oh tae! —_ ha _ y = ; P x - - = : vu , — — —> ~ a ii — Se Q American Philosophical aw Society, Philadelphia PS Proceedings v.20 Physical & Applied Seis Senals PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET Rs eons neers UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY Seema 'e . Arerees p Ode plein kit spt ppt iT A Man Teiyt 4 mba tay oy AGH ot a ' ee prance ae ip ber ‘ Fesent ** ‘ . 1 , ’ ' : ‘ ‘ a? ' J “ ¥ Y is ' ’ ’ o ” , cere fa wee taste te eaten. ' NESE teaee ; « rf ~ sp fo)3 pee? te fe F e . * od Eee Batet aa ‘ ; re ia 7 : + Bt 7 aha 297 eau : woah algerege ou bay fe Sea! Waa Shaie. . ip lae & sty iby +79 Coane Hiety fe Seed Z aac in a) , ‘ . prey ’ eats A yidstite eh tnt 74 : ER eid: vlan, Mwmms et Lae Oey: i] aye tats hentiide : aes : : as 3 . ‘ ‘ ’ . Sa ae , ie aioe sat La . He f Ml ies kh eke ‘ 5 ‘ Pa Dieve thgcaia ; bore + ' ' { . e ’ > , 7] hs s 4 % ' om ey of ; : .¢ 7 / ‘ ¥ ‘ . H £ ‘ e| 4 a * iat : J ni uA ! + * ' é 7 b , ‘ ‘, F i , . 7 & A Fei nm ay ~ ue ‘ ’ a is, i 4 - ‘ te . ‘ ’ ee MH ; é ’ rn F : ‘ ‘ . ‘ i] ‘ = ye Poreets ; AYE KN SSS ‘ 7 % 5. tat! : 4 . ral . . Py ‘ ‘ . a8 , . ' . bs , een SS 5 * : . 7 . 7 .. eee aes ; Pay ’ : . ‘ t poe Cpe a Speers bhi cx 5 . viet, bis aoe Epc earn ri raters os aS = Shale 9 Aeris Ap > a2 ee Hk tari, : ae eye tet Daley hn it A amy Si Aes ohhh pert, by th ol. Sy i se ths b ote A dig Saat 5 a) bk eee SRS Lets} eae Vraree eee . . : ih het ue pee ~ fy-erstore") i : ’ Ae oN Sree. etd Sn ae UN ate bs ' ‘ere seen a Rlesoe ‘ ; ; aah ; d ‘ae ehing aye “i. As & dar Sete ; : | ot Salts a . Seer yes 8 Satery gn sro . ; wen lecle Gin Batty 6 pt ay fink iy be hh 8 Bt he aa : ser or cm enn ~~ “ars? ". ee er . wpe tat ne Bw end oy & aL, 1 : * eben Oe « path SaaS 7 be hte gt te : eee ne. cy ; Lowa ere Y . O A Ay poten vee terb e n ar >a . x, Pa a8 9 g a A 9 e tate. An. . ; Scie tg ba Ss ; pase en aM rea" . Ke bie ale meme » atette teal tt hak dae eyo 4 .